CAFull_RM.

book Page 0 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect® X2
Reference Manual

Professional Design & Drafting Software

Chief Architect, Inc.

6500 N. Mineral Dr.
Coeur d’Alene, Idaho 83815
www.chiefarchitect.com
CAFull_RM.book Page 1 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Copyright © 2009 by Chief Architect, Inc. All rights reserved.

No part of this book or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from Chief Architect,
Inc.
Chief Architect® is a registered trademark of The City Blueprint and Country Blueprint
Chief Architect, Inc. fonts are © 1992-1999 Payne Loving Trust.
All rights reserved.
The Sentry Spelling-Checker Engine
Copyright © 1994-2003 Wintertree Software
Inc.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of Chief Architect, Inc. or their respective
owners.

Printed in the United States of America.

CAFull_RM.book Page 2 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Contents

Chapter 1: Program Overview

Chief Architect Full vs Interiors vs Lite..........................................26
Startup Options .................................................................................27
The Chief Architect Environment ...................................................28
Toolbars..............................................................................................31
Menus..................................................................................................32
Dialogs ................................................................................................33
The Status Bar ...................................................................................34
Preferences and Defaults ..................................................................34
Drawing a Plan ..................................................................................35
Viewing Your Plan ............................................................................37
Program Updates...............................................................................39
Getting Help .......................................................................................39
About Chief Architect .......................................................................40

Chapter 2: File Management

Compatibility with Previous Versions .............................................43
Organizing Your Files.......................................................................43
Chief Architect Data..........................................................................44
Creating a New Plan or Layout........................................................45
Saving a Plan or Layout File ............................................................46
Saving a Plan Thumbnail..................................................................48
Auto Archive ......................................................................................48

2
CAFull_RM.book Page 3 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Undo Files........................................................................................... 50
Opening a Plan or Layout File ......................................................... 50
Template Files.................................................................................... 51
Searching for Plans ........................................................................... 53
Exporting an Entire Plan.................................................................. 58
Closing Plans and Views ................................................................... 60
Exiting Chief Architect ..................................................................... 60

Chapter 3: Preferences & Default Settings

Defaults and Preferences .................................................................. 63
Default Settings.................................................................................. 63
Dynamic Defaults .............................................................................. 67
General Plan Defaults Dialog ........................................................... 68
Reset to Defaults ................................................................................ 69
Preferences Dialog............................................................................. 70

Chapter 4: Toolbars & Hotkeys

Toolbar Arrangement ..................................................................... 107
Customizing Toolbars ..................................................................... 107
Toolbar Configurations .................................................................. 112
Restoring Toolbars .......................................................................... 113
Hotkeys ............................................................................................. 114

Chapter 5: Layers
Displaying Objects........................................................................... 117
Layer Sets ......................................................................................... 118
Layer Set Management ................................................................... 119
Active Layer Set Control ................................................................ 121
Layer Display Options Dialog ........................................................ 121

3
CAFull_RM.book Page 4 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Select Layer Dialog..........................................................................124

Layer Tab .........................................................................................125
Layer Painter and Eyedropper ......................................................126
Layout Layer Sets............................................................................127
Exporting/Importing Layer Sets ....................................................127
Layer Set Defaults Dialog ...............................................................129

Chapter 6: Editing Objects

Architectural vs CAD Objects........................................................131
Defaults and Preferences ................................................................131
Snap Behaviors ................................................................................133
Object Snaps ....................................................................................133
Angle Snaps......................................................................................135
Grid Snaps........................................................................................136
Edit Behaviors..................................................................................137
Undo and Redo ................................................................................141
Creating Objects..............................................................................141
Selecting Objects..............................................................................144
Editing Line Based Objects ............................................................147
Editing Arc Based Objects..............................................................150
Editing Open Polyline Based Objects ............................................155
Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects .........................................160
Editing Box-Based Objects .............................................................164
Editing Spline Based Objects .........................................................167
Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses ................................................171
Architectural and CAD Blocks.......................................................174
Displaying Objects...........................................................................175
Moving Objects................................................................................177
Aligning Objects ..............................................................................180
Resizing Objects...............................................................................183

4
CAFull_RM.book Page 5 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Reshaping Objects ........................................................................... 184

Rotating Objects .............................................................................. 188
Reflecting Objects............................................................................ 190
Copying and Pasting Objects ......................................................... 191
Deleting Objects............................................................................... 196
Trim and Extend ............................................................................. 198
Transform/Replicate Object Dialog............................................... 200
Union, Intersection, and Subtract.................................................. 202
Converting Objects.......................................................................... 205
Select Same / Load Same ................................................................ 208
Edit Area Tools................................................................................ 209

Chapter 7: Walls, Railings, & Fencing

Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults ............................................... 215
The Wall Tools................................................................................. 219
The Deck Tools ................................................................................ 221
The Fencing Tools ........................................................................... 221
Exterior and Interior Walls............................................................ 222
Foundation Walls ............................................................................ 222
Pony Walls........................................................................................ 223
Railings ............................................................................................. 224
Invisible Walls.................................................................................. 224
Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks ................................................ 225
Hatch Wall ....................................................................................... 226
Break Wall ....................................................................................... 226
Deck Railings ................................................................................... 227
Deck Edge......................................................................................... 227
Fencing ............................................................................................. 227
Drawing Walls ................................................................................. 228
Connecting Walls............................................................................. 229

5
CAFull_RM.book Page 6 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Walls ..............................................................................230

Editing Walls....................................................................................231
Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations ...............................234
Aligning Walls..................................................................................235
Attic Walls........................................................................................238
Double Walls ....................................................................................239
CAD to Walls ...................................................................................240
Wall Type Definitions......................................................................241
Wall Type Definitions Dialog .........................................................243
Exporting Wall Type Definitions ...................................................246
Importing Wall Type Definitions ...................................................247
Stepped and Raked Walls ...............................................................248
Wall Specification Dialog................................................................249
Wall Hatch Specification Dialog ....................................................264

Chapter 8: Rooms
Room Definition...............................................................................267
Floor Defaults...................................................................................267
Room Material Defaults..................................................................267
Floor & Ceiling Heights ..................................................................268
Selecting Rooms ...............................................................................270
Room Types......................................................................................271
Room Labels.....................................................................................273
Decks.................................................................................................275
Editing Rooms..................................................................................277
Special Ceilings ................................................................................279
Room Polylines.................................................................................282
Room Specification Dialog..............................................................283
Room Finish Schedules ...................................................................291

6
CAFull_RM.book Page 7 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 9: Doors
Door Defaults ...................................................................................293
The Door Tools ................................................................................ 293
Displaying Doors.............................................................................. 295
Editing Doors ...................................................................................296
Changing Door Swings.................................................................... 297
Centering Doors and Windows ...................................................... 300
Special Doors.................................................................................... 301
Door Specification Dialog ............................................................... 303
Door Schedules ................................................................................ 314

Chapter 10: Windows

Window Defaults ............................................................................. 317
The Window Tools........................................................................... 317
Special Windows.............................................................................. 319
Grouped Windows........................................................................... 320
Make Mulled Unit ........................................................................... 321
Window Levels................................................................................. 324
Displaying Windows........................................................................ 325
Editing Windows ............................................................................. 326
Custom Muntins .............................................................................. 327
Bay, Box, and Bow Windows.......................................................... 328
Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs .................................................. 330
Window Specification Dialog ......................................................... 332
Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog .......................................... 349
Bow Window Specification ............................................................. 351
Window Schedules........................................................................... 351

7
CAFull_RM.book Page 8 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 11: Multiple Floors

Floor Defaults Dialog ......................................................................353
Working With Multiple Floors.......................................................354
Floor Tools .......................................................................................355
Adding Floors...................................................................................355
Exchanging Floors ...........................................................................357
Copying Floors.................................................................................357
Deleting Floors .................................................................................358
Floor and Ceiling Platforms ...........................................................358
Rebuilding Walls, Floors & Ceilings .............................................358
The Current Floor ...........................................................................358
The Attic Floor.................................................................................359
Reference Floor................................................................................359

Chapter 12: Foundations

Foundation Defaults ........................................................................363
Building a Foundation.....................................................................366
Displaying Foundations...................................................................367
Editing Stem Wall Foundations .....................................................367
Editing Slab Foundations................................................................368
Aligning Foundation Walls.............................................................368
Deleting Foundations.......................................................................369
Foundations and Rooms..................................................................369
The Slab Tools..................................................................................370
Editing Slabs ....................................................................................371
Editing Piers and Pads ....................................................................371
Slab Specification Dialog ................................................................372

8
CAFull_RM.book Page 9 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 13: Roofs

Roof Defaults.................................................................................... 375
Automatic vs. Manual Roofs .......................................................... 375
The Roof Tools................................................................................. 376
Build Roof Dialog ............................................................................ 377
Roof Planes....................................................................................... 385
Displaying Roof Planes ................................................................... 387
Editing Roof Planes ......................................................................... 387
Roof Plane Specification Dialog ..................................................... 392
Automatic Roofs .............................................................................. 396
Roof Baseline Polylines ................................................................... 401
Roof Baseline Specification Dialog ................................................ 403
Curved Roof Planes......................................................................... 404
Ceiling Planes...................................................................................408
Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog ................................................. 409
Gable/Roof Line............................................................................... 412
Skylights ........................................................................................... 414
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog ....................................... 416
Dormers ............................................................................................ 417
Editing Auto Dormers..................................................................... 419
Dormer Specification Dialog .......................................................... 420
Roof Returns and other Details...................................................... 423
Roof Pitches in Degrees................................................................... 426

Chapter 14: Stairs & Landings

The Stair Tools................................................................................. 429
Anatomy of a Staircase ................................................................... 429
Drawing Stairs ................................................................................. 430
Displaying Stairs.............................................................................. 431

9
CAFull_RM.book Page 10 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Merging Stair Sections ....................................................................431

Editing Stairs ...................................................................................433
Winders ............................................................................................434
Stair Landings..................................................................................435
Maintaining Tread Width...............................................................439
Flared Stairs and Curved Treads ..................................................440
Starter Treads..................................................................................443
Wrapped Stairs................................................................................444
Other Special Railings & Stairs .....................................................445
Creating a Stairwell.........................................................................448
Rooms Below Staircases..................................................................449
Staircase Specification Dialog ........................................................450
Stair Landing Specification Dialog ................................................458

Chapter 15: Framing

Framing Defaults .............................................................................461
Manual vs. Automatic Framing .....................................................462
The Framing Tools ..........................................................................464
Build Framing Dialog......................................................................467
Framing Reference Markers ..........................................................480
Bearing Lines ...................................................................................482
Joist Direction Lines........................................................................482
Displaying Framing .........................................................................485
Editing Framing...............................................................................487
Keeping Framing Current ..............................................................488
Framing and the Materials List .....................................................489
Framing Specification Dialog .........................................................490
Post Specification Dialog.................................................................492

10
CAFull_RM.book Page 11 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chapter 16: Trusses

Truss Defaults .................................................................................. 495
Floor and Ceiling Trusses ............................................................... 495
Roof Trusses..................................................................................... 495
Editing Trusses ................................................................................ 498
Editing Truss Envelopes ................................................................. 499
Truss Details ....................................................................................499
Truss Labels..................................................................................... 500
Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing............................................... 501
Truss Bases....................................................................................... 501
Truss Base Specification Dialog ..................................................... 504
Hip Trusses ...................................................................................... 505
Step Down Hip ................................................................................. 506
Drop Hip or California Hip............................................................ 507
Subgirder Hip .................................................................................. 508
Girder Trusses ................................................................................. 509
Scissors Trusses ............................................................................... 509
Roof Truss Specification Dialog..................................................... 510
Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog ...................................... 513

Chapter 17: Electrical

Electrical Defaults ........................................................................... 516
The Electrical Tools......................................................................... 518
Creating Wiring Schematics........................................................... 519
Auto Place Outlets ........................................................................... 519
Electrical Library ............................................................................ 520
Displaying Electrical Objects ......................................................... 520
Editing Electrical Objects............................................................... 521
Electrical Service Specification Dialog .......................................... 522

11
CAFull_RM.book Page 12 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 18: Trim & Molding

Corner Boards .................................................................................529
Corner Board Specification Dialog................................................530
Quoins...............................................................................................531
Quoin Specification Dialog .............................................................531
Editing Corner Boards and Quoins ...............................................533
Molding Profiles...............................................................................533
Symbol Moldings .............................................................................534
Molding Polylines ............................................................................535
Displaying Molding Polylines .........................................................537
Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings .......................................537
Frieze Moldings ...............................................................................538
Molding Polyline Specification Dialog...........................................539
3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog.....................................541

Chapter 19: Cabinets

Cabinet Defaults ..............................................................................547
The Cabinet Tools............................................................................548
Cabinet Fillers..................................................................................551
Placing Cabinets and Fillers ...........................................................551
Custom Countertops .......................................................................553
Displaying Cabinets.........................................................................554
Cabinet Labels .................................................................................555
Editing Cabinets ..............................................................................556
Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel Style.............................558
Editing Custom Countertops..........................................................558
Special Cabinets...............................................................................559
Cabinet Specification Dialog ..........................................................562
Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog.................................................575

12
CAFull_RM.book Page 13 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog............................................... 576

Custom Countertop Specification Dialog...................................... 578

Chapter 20: Terrain

Terrain Configuration Button........................................................ 581
Terrain Perimeter............................................................................ 581
Elevation Data Tools ....................................................................... 582
Terrain Modifier Tools ................................................................... 587
Terrain Feature Tools ..................................................................... 588
Garden Bed Tools............................................................................ 590
Water Feature Tools ....................................................................... 591
Stepping Stone Tools ....................................................................... 591
Terrain Wall and Curb Tools......................................................... 592
Sun Shadows ....................................................................................593
Terrain Objects in the Library ...................................................... 593
Displaying Terrain .......................................................................... 593
Editing Terrain Objects .................................................................. 595
Terrain Specification Dialog........................................................... 596
Elevation Point Specification Dialog.............................................. 600
Elevation Line Specification Dialog............................................... 603
Flat Region Specification Dialog .................................................... 604
Hill / Valley Specification Dialog ................................................... 605
Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog ............................. 606
Terrain Feature Specification Dialog ............................................606
Garden Bed Specification Dialog ................................................... 608
Terrain Break Specification Dialog ............................................... 609
Terrain Path Specification Dialog.................................................. 610
Importing Elevation Data ............................................................... 612
Import Terrain Wizard................................................................... 612
Import GPS Data Wizard............................................................... 616

13
CAFull_RM.book Page 14 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data...........................................620

Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data........................................621
Plant Tools........................................................................................621
Plant Image Specification Dialog ...................................................622
Plant Specification Dialog...............................................................626
Plant Chooser Dialog.......................................................................627
Hardiness Zones...............................................................................629
Sprinkler Tools ................................................................................629
Sprinkler Specification Dialog........................................................630

Chapter 21: Roads, Driveways & Sidewalks

Road and Sidewalk Defaults...........................................................635
Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools .............................................636
Displaying Road Objects.................................................................639
Editing Road Objects ......................................................................639
Adding Road Objects to the Library .............................................640
Road Specification Dialog...............................................................640
Median Specification Dialog...........................................................642
Driveway Specification Dialog........................................................642
Road Marking Specification Dialog...............................................644
Sidewalk Specification Dialog ........................................................644

Chapter 22: Other Objects

Primitive Tools.................................................................................649
Creating Primitives .........................................................................649
Editing Primitives............................................................................650
3D Box Specification Dialog ...........................................................653
Sphere Specification Dialog ............................................................655
Cylinder Specification Dialog.........................................................656
Cone Specification Dialog ...............................................................657

14
CAFull_RM.book Page 15 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Shape Specification Dialog ............................................................. 658

Polyline Solids .................................................................................. 658
Polyline Solid Specification Dialog ................................................ 659
Soffits ................................................................................................ 660
Special Applications for Soffits ...................................................... 660
Calculating Materials on Soffits..................................................... 661
Soffit Specification Dialog............................................................... 662
Distributed Objects ......................................................................... 666
Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs ........................... 666
Fireplaces ......................................................................................... 671
Fireplace Specification Dialog........................................................ 672
Library Fireplaces ........................................................................... 674
Chimneys .......................................................................................... 675

Chapter 23: Architectural Blocks

Architectural vs CAD Blocks ......................................................... 677
Creating Architectural Blocks ....................................................... 677
Displaying Architectural Blocks .................................................... 678
Editing Architectural Blocks .......................................................... 678
Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components ................. 679
Architectural Block Specification Dialog ...................................... 680

Chapter 24: Libraries

The Library Browser ...................................................................... 683
Library Browser Contents.............................................................. 685
Selection and Preview Panes .......................................................... 686
Library Search Dialog..................................................................... 687
Select Library Object Dialog.......................................................... 689
Placing Library Objects.................................................................. 690
Place Library Object Button .......................................................... 692

15
CAFull_RM.book Page 16 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Replace From Library ....................................................................693

Displaying Library Objects ............................................................694
Editing Library Objects..................................................................694
Library Objects and the Materials List.........................................696
Symbol Object Specification Dialogs .............................................696
Editing Libraries .............................................................................697
Adding to the Library .....................................................................700
Importing and Exporting Library Content ..................................702

Chapter 25: Materials

About Materials ...............................................................................707
The Material Painter.......................................................................707
Materials Tab...................................................................................709
Viewing Materials............................................................................711
Editing Materials .............................................................................711
Creating Materials...........................................................................712
Mapping Patterns and Textures.....................................................714
Material Types .................................................................................716
Managing Plan Materials...............................................................717
Define Material Dialog ....................................................................719
Material Defaults Dialog.................................................................726
Color Chooser Dialog ......................................................................727

Chapter 26: Zoom & View Tools

Zoom Tools.......................................................................................731
Undo Zoom.......................................................................................731
Fill Window......................................................................................732
Panning the Display.........................................................................732
Swapping Views ...............................................................................733
Window Menu Tools .......................................................................733

16
CAFull_RM.book Page 17 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Cascade............................................................................................. 734
Tiling Views...................................................................................... 735
Arrange Icons .................................................................................. 736
Aerial View....................................................................................... 736
Closing Views ...................................................................................738

Chapter 27: 3D Views

OpenGL and Hardware .................................................................. 741
Types of 3D Views ........................................................................... 741
Defaults and 3D Preferences .......................................................... 742
Camera Defaults Dialog.................................................................. 742
3D Settings Dialog ........................................................................... 744
3D View Tools .................................................................................. 749
Creating Camera Views .................................................................. 750
Creating Overviews ......................................................................... 751
Cross Section/Elevation Views ....................................................... 752
Displaying 3D Views........................................................................ 756
Editing 3D Views ............................................................................. 758
Cross Section Slider......................................................................... 764
Working in 3D ................................................................................ 765
Saving & Printing 3D Views........................................................... 767
Camera Specification Dialog .......................................................... 768
Cross Section/Elevation Camera Specification............................. 770

Chapter 28: Rendering & Raytracing

Rendering Tips ................................................................................ 773
Lighting ............................................................................................ 775
Light Types ...................................................................................... 779
Light Specification Dialog............................................................... 781
Default Sun Light Specification Dialog ......................................... 782

17
CAFull_RM.book Page 18 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Sun Angle Specification Dialog ......................................................782

Rendering Techniques.....................................................................785
Rendering Technique Options........................................................788
Glass House View ............................................................................796
Glass House Options........................................................................797
Speeding up 3D View Generation ..................................................797
Creating a Raytrace View...............................................................800
The Raytrace Window ....................................................................803
Creating Materials for Raytracing ................................................804
Raytracing Tips ...............................................................................805
POV-Ray ..........................................................................................807

Chapter 29: Dimensions

Compatibility With Previous Versions..........................................808
Dimension Defaults and Preferences .............................................809
Dimension Defaults Dialog..............................................................810
Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog .........................................821
The Dimension Tools.......................................................................823
Displaying Dimension Lines ...........................................................826
Editing Dimension Lines.................................................................827
Editing Extension Lines ..................................................................829
Moving Objects Using Dimensions ................................................831
Dimension Line Specification Dialog .............................................833

Chapter 30: Text, Callouts & Markers

Text Defaults and Preferences........................................................839
Fonts and Alphabets........................................................................840
The Text Tools .................................................................................841
Creating Text, Callouts and Markers............................................842
Displaying Text, Arrows, Callouts and Markers..........................843

18
CAFull_RM.book Page 19 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Rich Text Specification Dialog ....................................................... 843

Text Specification Dialog ................................................................ 850
Editing Text ..................................................................................... 854
Copying & Pasting Text.................................................................. 858
Spell Check....................................................................................... 859
Text Arrows ..................................................................................... 861
Callouts............................................................................................. 863
Callout Specification Dialog ........................................................... 864
Editing Callouts ............................................................................... 866
Markers ............................................................................................ 867
Marker Specification Dialog........................................................... 867
Editing Markers .............................................................................. 868
Text Macros ..................................................................................... 869
Designer Information Dialog.......................................................... 871
Client Information Dialog............................................................... 872

Chapter 31: CAD Objects

CAD Defaults and Preferences....................................................... 875
The CAD Drawing Tools ................................................................ 878
Line Styles ........................................................................................ 879
Point Tools........................................................................................ 880
Line Tools ......................................................................................... 884
Line Specification Dialog ................................................................ 888
Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes ............................................. 892
Arc Tools .......................................................................................... 894
Arc Specification Dialog ................................................................. 895
Circle Tools ...................................................................................... 897
CAD Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog.............................. 898
Polylines............................................................................................ 900
Polyline Specification Dialog .......................................................... 901

19
CAFull_RM.book Page 20 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Box Tools ..........................................................................................903

CAD Box Specification Dialog........................................................905
Revision Clouds ...............................................................................906
Revision Cloud Specification Dialog..............................................907
Splines...............................................................................................908
Displaying CAD Objects .................................................................909
Creating Line Styles ........................................................................910
CAD Blocks ......................................................................................912
CAD Block Management ................................................................913
CAD Block Specification Dialog.....................................................915
Number Style/Angle Style Dialog...................................................917
CAD Details......................................................................................917
Plot Plans and Plan Footprints.......................................................918
Plan Footprint Specification Dialog...............................................920

Chapter 32: Project Management

Time Tracker ...................................................................................922
Time Log Dialog ..............................................................................923
Project Browser ...............................................................................924
Project Information.........................................................................925
House Wizard...................................................................................926
Plan Check .......................................................................................928
IRC Checklist...................................................................................929
Loan Calculator ...............................................................................929

Chapter 33: Pictures, Images, & Walkthroughs

Picture Files vs Pictures and Image Objects.................................933
Images...............................................................................................933
Displaying Images............................................................................935
Editing Images .................................................................................935

20
CAFull_RM.book Page 21 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Image Specification Dialog ............................................................. 936

Pictures ............................................................................................. 940
Editing Pictures ............................................................................... 941
Picture File Box Specification Dialog ............................................ 942
Metafiles ........................................................................................... 943
Editing Metafiles.............................................................................. 945
Metafile Specification Dialog.......................................................... 945
Copy Region as Picture ................................................................... 946
Creating Screen Captures............................................................... 946
Walkthroughs .................................................................................. 948
Creating VRML Files...................................................................... 949

Chapter 34: Importing & Exporting

DXF vs DWG File Formats ............................................................ 953
Importing 2D Drawings .................................................................. 953
Import Drawing Wizard ................................................................. 954
CAD to Walls ................................................................................... 962
Exporting 2D DXF/DWG Files ...................................................... 962
Additional 2D Export Information ................................................ 964
3D Data Import Requirements....................................................... 966
Importing 3D Symbols .................................................................... 967
Exporting a 3D Model in DXF/DWG Format .............................. 971
Exporting a 3D Model in 3DS Format........................................... 972

Chapter 35: Custom Symbols

Symbol Specification Dialog ........................................................... 974
Get Last Symbol .............................................................................. 987
Convert to Symbol........................................................................... 987
Editing Custom Symbols................................................................. 988

21
CAFull_RM.book Page 22 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 36: Printing & Plotting

Introduction to Printing..................................................................993
Printers and Plotters .......................................................................994
The Printing Tools...........................................................................995
Display Options and Printing .........................................................995
Printing Directly from a View ........................................................997
Printing from Layout ......................................................................997
Printing to Scale...............................................................................997
Printing Across Multiple Pages......................................................998
Printing to a PDF File .....................................................................999
Line Weights ....................................................................................999
Printing Text and Dimensions......................................................1002
Creating Custom Sheet Sizes........................................................1002
Page Setup Dialog ..........................................................................1004
Print Dialog ....................................................................................1006
Print Image Dialog ........................................................................1009
Print Model ....................................................................................1009

Chapter 37: Layout

Layout Defaults..............................................................................1015
Preparing for Layout ....................................................................1015
Creating a Layout File ..................................................................1016
The Layout Tools...........................................................................1016
Sending Views to Layout...............................................................1018
The Current Page ..........................................................................1020
Layout Page Zero ..........................................................................1021
CAD and Text in Layout...............................................................1021
Images in Layout ...........................................................................1022
Keeping Layout Views Current ...................................................1022

22
CAFull_RM.book Page 23 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Editing Layout Views .................................................................... 1024

Rescaling Views ............................................................................. 1025
Displaying Layout Views .............................................................. 1025
Layout Page Display Options ....................................................... 1026
Opening Layout Views .................................................................. 1027
Editing Layout Lines..................................................................... 1028
Edit Layout Lines Dialog .............................................................. 1028
Managing Layout Links................................................................ 1030
Printing Layout Files..................................................................... 1033
Exporting Layout Files ................................................................. 1034
Layout Box Specification Dialog .................................................. 1034

Chapter 38: Schedules

Schedule Defaults .......................................................................... 1036
Creating Schedules ........................................................................ 1037
Editing Schedules .......................................................................... 1038
Adding Columns to Schedules...................................................... 1039
Schedule Specification Dialog....................................................... 1039
Columns and Objects to Include .................................................. 1043
Object Labels .................................................................................1044

Chapter 39: Materials Lists

The Materials List Tools ............................................................... 1049
Creating an Accurate Materials List ...........................................1050
Organizing Materials Lists ........................................................... 1050
Material List Display Options Dialog..........................................1052
Materials List Columns................................................................. 1054
Editing Materials Lists.................................................................. 1056
Materials Polyline.......................................................................... 1057
Managing Materials Lists ............................................................. 1058

23
CAFull_RM.book Page 24 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Exporting the Materials List ........................................................1058

The Master List..............................................................................1059
Components Dialog .......................................................................1062

Appendix A: Whats New in Chief Architect

Before You Begin...........................................................................1064
New and Improved Features by Chapter....................................1068

Appendix B: Additional Resources

Reference Manual..........................................................................1078
User’s Guide...................................................................................1078
Online Help Videos........................................................................1079
Chief Architect Web Site ..............................................................1079
Online Personal Training..............................................................1079
Training Seminars .........................................................................1079
Chief Talk Online User Forum ....................................................1080
Technical Support .........................................................................1080

Appendix C: Technical Support Services

Reference and Training Resources ..............................................1082
Troubleshooting Common Technical Issues ...............................1083
Troubleshooting Printing Problems ............................................1084
Error Messages ..............................................................................1086
Contacting Technical Support......................................................1087

Appendix D: Menus & Toolbar Buttons

Using the Menus ............................................................................1090
File Menu........................................................................................1091

24
CAFull_RM.book Page 25 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Edit Menu....................................................................................... 1096

Build Menu..................................................................................... 1100
Terrain Menu................................................................................. 1110
Library Menu ................................................................................ 1115
3D Menu ......................................................................................... 1115
CAD Menu ..................................................................................... 1123
Tools Menu..................................................................................... 1128
Window Menu................................................................................ 1135
Help Menu...................................................................................... 1137
MEP Toolbar Configuration Buttons..........................................1139
Toggle Buttons ............................................................................... 1140
Edit Toolbar Buttons..................................................................... 1141
Other Buttons ................................................................................ 1147

25
CAFull_RM.book Page 26 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 1:

Program Overview

Chief Architect is specifically designed for Chapter Contents

the residential and light commercial design • Chief Architect Full vs Interiors vs Lite
professional. It allows you to easily and • Startup Options
efficiently produce 3D models and • The Chief Architect Environment
construction documents for your projects. • Toolbars
We thank you for choosing Chief Architect • Menus
and wish you the best in your design work. • Dialogs
• The Status Bar
• Preferences and Defaults
• Drawing a Plan
• Viewing Your Plan
• Program Updates
• Getting Help

Chief Architect Full vs Interiors vs Lite

Not all features are available in the Interiors
and Lite versions of Chief Architect. For a
list of the features in each program, see our
website, www.chiefarchitect.com.

26
CAFull_RM.book Page 27 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Startup Options
When Chief Architect opens, the The Startup Options dialog can be opened at
Startup Options dialog displays, any time by selecting File> Startup Options
allowing you to choose how you want to .
begin working in the program or access
useful resources.

2
1
3

1 Select a File command to open a .plan • Click New from Template to open a
file. new, blank plan based on a template that
• Click New Plan to open a new, blank you select. See “Template Files” on page
plan. See “Creating a New Plan or Lay- 51.
out” on page 45. • Select House Wizard to launch a
• Choose Open Plan to work on an new plan in the House Wizard. See
existing plan file. See “Opening a Plan or “House Wizard” on page 926.
Layout File” on page 50.

27
CAFull_RM.book Page 28 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Chief Architect Environment

• Click Find Plan Wizard to search a X2, the online Help menu, Reference Manual
plan database using criteria you select. and User’s Guide .pdfs, and links to the
See “Find Plan Wizard” on page 54. Chief Architect and Chief Talk Web sites.

2 Recent Files lists the names of the most 34 Uncheck Show Options on Startup if
recently opened files. Click on a name you do not want this dialog to display
to open the file. You set the number of files when you launch Chief Architect. Instead, a
that display in this list in the Preferences new, blank plan opens.
dialog. See “General Panel” on page 79.
To have the Startup Options dialog
3 The Help options provide access to a display at startup again, select File> Startup
variety of information resources. These Options and place a check mark at Show
include a list of the new features of version Options on Startup.

The Chief Architect Environment

Object-Based Design displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the
program window.
Chief Architect’s parametric, object-based
design technology means you place and edit Architectural objects take up space in all
objects, rather than work with the many three dimensions and their height, width and
individual lines or surfaces used to represent depth can be specified in Imperial or metric
them. units. In addition, the location of objects can
be precisely defined using coordinates, again
You can quickly select and edit the location, specified in Imperial or metric units.
size, shape, style and other properties of
objects as well as change the materials CAD objects such as lines and arcs take up
applied to their surfaces. space in two dimensions in the current view.
Their dimensions can also be specified in
Use Chief Architect’s editing capabilities to Imperial or metric units and their locations
make the objects you place in a plan match precisely defined using coordinates.
the objects they represent in real life. For
example, you can set up your windows and
Easy Access to Tools
doors to match those available from your
supplier. You can access Chief Architect’s features in
various ways using the mouse and keyboard.
3D Drafting • Menus provide access to most tools.
In Chief Architect, the entire drawing area is • Convenient toolbar buttons allow fast
laid out on a three dimensional coordinate access to tools and let you customize the
system described using the X, Y and Z axes. interface.
The current position of your mouse pointer

28
CAFull_RM.book Page 29 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Keyboard shortcuts are available for most • The Status Bar at the bottom of the screen
tools and can be customized. provides tool descriptions and other
• Contextual menus display with a right- information about the current task.
click of the mouse.

Title
Bar Child
Tools
Menus

Parent
Tools
Library &
Selected Project
Object Browser

Library
Preview
Temporary Panes
Dimension

Edit
Toolbar Reference Pointer Crosshair Status Bar
Grid Lines Lines

Using the Mouse The Right button has several uses.

Right-click to select any object.
Many objects, such as doors and cabinets, are
created by clicking the left mouse button.
Others, such as walls, stairs and dimension
lines, are created by dragging the pointer If, for example, the Straight Exterior
from one end of the object to the other. Wall tool is active, the left mouse button
The left button is the primary allows you to select only walls. You can
button used in Chief Architect. select other object types such as cabinets
Unless specified otherwise, this with the right mouse button.
reference manual refers to the left Use the right mouse button to temporarily
mouse button. switch to the Alternate edit behavior. See
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
Note: If you are left-handed and have re-pro- You can also use the right mouse button to
grammed your mouse, reverse the instruc-
open a context sensitive menu with
tions for left and right buttons in this manual.
additional editing commands.

29
CAFull_RM.book Page 30 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Chief Architect Environment

The Middle button can be used to • A circular arrow indicates that the
pan in floor plan view or to selected object can be rotated.
temporarily use the Move edit
Resize handles display along the edges of the
behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on
object are used to change the size. See
page 137.
“Resizing Objects” on page 183.
You can also program it to work as a double-
click.
The Mouse Wheel can be used to
zoom in and out in most views. The Move handle at the object’s center lets
you move the object. See “Moving Objects”
on page 177.
The Back, or X1, button on a 5-button mouse
can be used to temporarily enable the
Concentric edit behavior. See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 137 or the
documentation for your mouse.
The Forward, or X2, button on a 5-button The triangular Rotate handle lets you rotate
mouse can be used to temporarily enable the the object. See “Rotating Objects” on page
Resize edit behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” 188.
on page 137 or the documentation for your
mouse.

Using the Edit Handles

When you select an object, its edit handles You can cancel any edit handle operation
display. How each handle behaves when it is before it is completed by pressing the Esc
clicked and dragged may depend on which key on your keyboard or by pressing any two
Edit Behavior is currently active. See mouse buttons at the same time.
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137. The edit handles that display depend on the
When you pass the mouse over the edit type of object selected, the current view, and
handles, the pointer changes to show how how far you are zoomed out.
you can use that handle. Edit handles do not resize as you zoom in or
• A two-headed arrow indicates that the out. If you are zoomed out far enough, some
object, corner or edge can be moved in edit handles may be hidden so that they do
the direction of the arrows. not stack over one another. As you zoom in,
these handles become visible again.
• A four-headed arrow indicates that the
selected object or edge may be moved in
multiple directions.

30
CAFull_RM.book Page 31 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Toolbars
Using the toolbar buttons is the fastest, The most recently selected tool displays in
easiest way to access many program features. the toolbar.
You can move the toolbars, customize them
by adding or removing buttons, or create Parent and Child Tools
your own toolbars from scratch. “Toolbar
Customization Dialog” on page 107. An alternative to the Drop-Down toolbar
interface are Parent and Child tools. Parent
The toolbars that display in a given view toolbar buttons have a blue triangle in the
depend on the view type. For example, lower right corner. When you select a parent
toolbars that control camera position display button, child tools display on the right side of
in 3D views but not in floor plan view. the toolbar.
When you pass the pointer over a toolbar
When you click the Window Tools
button, a “tool tip” displays the name of the
parent button, for example, its child buttons
tool. When you see one of these tool tips,
display to the right.
press F1 to get more information about that
item. A more detailed description displays in
the Status Bar at the bottom of the window.
You can use either of two styles of toolbar You can select either Parent - Child or Drop-
interface: drop-down tools or parent-child Down tools in the Preferences dialog See
buttons. “Appearance Panel” on page 71.

Drop-Down Tools Toolbar Configurations

Click on the arrow to the right of a button to Toolbar configurations are sets of toolbars
display a drop-down list of related tools. For that are organized for certain tasks.
example, click the arrow to the right of the
There are eight toolbar configurations in
Window button to display a drop-down Chief Architect. Each can be accessed in the
list of the other Window Tools. Toolbar Customization dialog by right-
clicking on a toolbar button, or by clicking a
button:
The Default Configuration displays a
selection of architectural, file
management and display settings tools.
The Terrain Configuration displays a
selection of terrain, file management
and display setting tools.

31
CAFull_RM.book Page 32 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Menus

The Space Planning Configuration The Edit Toolbar

displays a selection of file management
and display setting tools, as well as the When you select an object, the edit toolbar
House Wizard tools. appears. By default, it is located at the
bottom of the program window, just above
The Plan Detailing Configuration the Status Bar. The toolbar buttons that
displays a selection of display settings, display can be used to edit the selected
file management, annotation and other object(s). Which buttons display depends on
documentation tools. the type of object selected, the current view,
The CAD Configuration displays a and how you selected the object.
selection of CAD, file management
and display setting tools.
The 800x600 Configuration displays The edit toolbar buttons are the same as the
toolbars suitably sized for monitors set options in the contextual menu when you
at 800x600 screen resolution. right-click on an object.

The Expanded Configuration Hotkeys

displays an expanded selection of
architectural, terrain, file managment and Many commands can be invoked from the
display setting tools. keyboard. Press Alt on your keyboard and
press the underlined letter in a menu name to
Customizable Toolbars access that menu, as well as items in the
menus and submenus.
Since the work you are doing determines the
tools you need, Chief Architect allows you to Other keys or key combinations will invoke a
tailor toolbars to suit your own needs. You variety of program commands. If a Chief
can store various toolbar configurations for Architect menu item has a keyboard shortcut,
future use. For more information about or hotkey, associated with it, that hotkey will
customizing toolbars, see “Toolbar display to the right of its name in the menu.
Customization Dialog” on page 107. You can assign hotkeys to Chief Architect’s
tools to best suit your style of work. See
You can add toolbars to each configuration “Hotkeys” on page 114.
using the Toolbar Customization dialog
while that configuration is active. For more information about menu items and
toolbar buttons, see “Menus & Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1090.

Menus
Chief Architect uses a standard Windows be used to access nearly all tools in the
menu format. The menus are located below program.
the title bar in the program window and can

32
CAFull_RM.book Page 33 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Menu items with an icon to their left have a In this reference manual, menu paths are
toolbar button associated with them. Some written in this format: Build> Window> Box
buttons are not included on the toolbar but Window . An icon image after the menu
can easily be added. See “Toolbar path indicates that a toolbar button is also
Customization Dialog” on page 107. available.
Many tools in Chief Architect also have
hotkeys associated with them. If a menu item Contextual Menus
has a hotkey, it will display to the right of the
Contextual menus are context sensitive
item’s name. See “Hotkeys” on page 114.
menus that display tools relevant to a
selected object or view.
To access contextual menus, right-click on an
object, in an empty space in a view window
Edit menu items with button icons or in a text field in any dialog box.
to the left and hotkeys to the right
Contextual menus can be enabled or disabled
in the Preferences dialog. See “Appearance
Panel” on page 71.

Dialogs
Default and preference settings, object active to open its specification dialog. See
specifications, display settings, and many “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
other functions are accessed through dialog
You can open the specification dialog for
boxes.
group-selected objects if they are of the same
Many dialogs have a preview that shows how type, such as base cabinets.
the changes affect the object. This preview • If a particular setting varies among the
updates when you click in a different field or different objects, its check box will have
press the Tab key on your keyboard. a solid fill instead of a check mark. Click
once to clear the box for all selected
Specification Dialogs objects, or click a second time to place a
Each object in Chief Architect has a checkmark for all selected objects.
unique specification dialog where you • If the setting has a text field, it will say
can enter size, style and other information “No Change”. Changes made to such a
specific to the selected object. To access it, setting can be undone by replacing the
select the object and click the Open Object value in the text field with the letter N
edit button. You can also double-click on an before you click OK.
object with the Select Objects tool If you select multiple objects of different
types, the Open Object edit button is

33
CAFull_RM.book Page 34 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Status Bar

usually not available. The button may

display if the objects have data in common,
but you can only edit the common data.

The Status Bar

The Status Bar at the bottom of the main • The current floor.
window displays information about the • The dimensions of the active window in
current state of the program. pixels.
• The current layout page.
• The current default CAD layer.
This information depends on a variety of
conditions such as settings in the • The current CAD coordinates of the
Preferences dialog, the type of object pointer.
selected, and the current position of the • The screen redraw time.
pointer. The information may include the
• The length and/or angle of an object as it
following:
is being drawn.
• A brief description of the toolbar button
or menu item highlighted by the mouse. The number format used in the Status Bar is
set in the Dimension Defaults dialog, while
• A description of the selected object. the angle style can be specified in the
• The total number of objects currently Number Style/Angle Style dialog. See
group-selected. “Primary Format Tab” on page 812 and
• The layer that the selected object is on. “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on page
917.

Preferences and Defaults

Preference and default settings control many Preferences
aspects of the user interface and tool
behavior in Chief Architect. You can use Preference settings let you change program
these settings to customize the program to behavior to suit your workflow. For example,
suit your personal work style. you can:
• Turn certain display elements on or off.
For more information about defaults and
preferences, see “Preferences & Default • Choose background and floor plan view
Settings” on page 62. colors.
• Set frequency of autosaves, maximum
number of “undos,” and file protection.
• Set default folders for various files.

34
CAFull_RM.book Page 35 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Control the editing behaviors of objects. Default settings, unlike Preferences, are file
• Setup the material list categories, sub- specific.
categories, and report style, as well as
manufacturer and supplier information. Dynamic Defaults
• Set rendering specifications to maximize Dynamic defaults are values that affect
efficiency and quality. existing objects in a plan.
Preference settings are global, affecting all In specification dialogs, dynamic default
plan and layout files. values have a Default checkbox beside them
or a [D] in their text fields. As long as this
Defaults checkbox is checked or the [D] is present,
changes made to the default affect the object.
Most objects in Chief Architect derive their
intial properties from their respective default To edit an individual object, you must delete
dialogs. the [D] or uncheck the box in the
specification dialog. Objects you edit in this
For example, a newly placed Window way do not update if you change the default.
gets its initial values from the Window
To restore a value to the default, click to
Defaults dialog and a newly placed Hinged
place a check in the Default checkbox or
Door gets its initial values from the Door type a “d” into an edit box.
Defaults dialog.

Once an object is placed in a plan, its initial Template Plans

properties can be overridden, but setting up You can set up an otherwise empty plan with
your defaults before you begin drawing can the default settings of your choice and use it
save you considerable time as you build a as your template for new, blank plans. See
model in the program. “Template Files” on page 51.

Drawing a Plan
When you draw a plan in Chief Architect, Set the Defaults
you are placing 3D objects that represent
building components. Chief Architect comes 1. Open the plan template you want to use,
with predefined default settings so you can or choose File> Startup Options> New
start drawing plans immediately. You should from Template to begin a new plan.
review these default settings to be sure they
2. Set the structural defaults:
match your drawing and building methods.
See “Preferences & Default Settings” on • Floor Defaults. Set the default ceiling
page 62. height for Floor 1. See “Floor
Defaults” on page 65.

35
CAFull_RM.book Page 36 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Drawing a Plan

• Foundation Defaults. Set the founda- 7. Build additional floors. See “Adding
tion specifics such as type, footing size, Floors” on page 355.
and stem wall height. See “Foundation 8. Specify the default ceiling height for
Defaults” on page 65. each floor as soon as it is created. See
• Framing Defaults. Set the floor framing “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
specifications, including type and
9. Adjust the perimeter shape of additional
dimensions. See “Framing Defaults”
floors as needed. See “Editing Walls” on
on page 65.
page 231.
• Default Wall Types. Specify the
defaults for walls and railings. See 10. Align edited or moved walls with those
“Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults” above or below where appropriate. See
on page 215. “Aligning Walls” on page 235.

3. Set material defaults for roof, walls, and

Entering Dimensions
rooms (optional). See “Material
Defaults” on page 65. When using Imperial units, enter distances as
4. Set style defaults for doors, windows, inches or feet and inches, in fractional or
molding, cabinets and other objects. decimal form. Millimeters are the default
unit for all metric distances. See “Dimen-
sions” on page 808.
Draw the Floors
• To enter feet, include the ( ' ) marker or
1. While the size of the drawing area in the program assumes inches.
Chief Architect is limited only by the • In most cases, the program allows
resources on your computer, it is best to precision to 1/16th of an inch. Fractions
begin your drawing near the origin, with denominators 2, 4, 8 and 16 are
0,0,0. See “3D Drafting” on page 28. allowed.
2. Draw the exterior walls on Floor 1 in a • The program usually converts decimals
clockwise direction. See “Drawing to fractions.
Walls” on page 228.
• You can enter angles as bearings, decimal
3. Adjust the perimeter shape and size as degrees, or degrees, minutes, and
required. See “Using the Edit Handles” seconds. See “Number Style/Angle Style
on page 232. Dialog” on page 917.
4. Place any first floor bearing walls.
5. Define types for special rooms such as Build the Foundation
garages and decks in the plan. See
“Room Types” on page 271. 1. Derive the foundation plan from the first
floor. See “Building a Foundation” on
6. Place perimeter doors and windows. See page 366.
“Doors” on page 292 and “Windows” on
page 316. 2. Adjust the foundation perimeter shape
as needed.

36
CAFull_RM.book Page 37 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3. Place interior foundation walls as 5. Build the framing. See “Framing” on

needed for the first floor bearing walls. page 460.
4. Place any other foundation walls 6. Build the terrain and landscaping
required. (optional). See “Terrain” on page 580.
5. Align with Above as needed. See 7. Create the plot plan and plan footprint.
“Aligning Walls” on page 235. See “Plot Plans and Plan Footprints” on
page 595.
Add Structure and Details 8. Create any necessary views and print the
plan and use CAD Detail from View to
1. Build non-structural interior walls. create 2D elevations and plan details.
Begin on floor one and work up in mul- Use and modify details from the Library,
tiple story structures. as well. See “CAD Details” on page
2. Add walls where needed to create fea- 917.
tures such as chimney chases, plumbing
walls, or Open Below areas. Create the Layout
3. Finish the relevant interior structure
including interior doors, doorways, cabi- 1. If one does not exist, create a Layout file
nets, fixtures, and fireplaces. with a title block, placing the border,
title block, and other text on page 0. See
4. Build the roof planes. If you generate the “Layout” on page 1014.
roof automatically, remember to carry
the roof directives in the walls from the 2. Send views to the layout, starting with
first floor up to the top floor for multiple layout page 1. See “Sending Views to
story structures. See “Roofs” on page Layout” on page 1018.
374. 3. Print the plan. See “Printing & Plotting”
on page 992.

Viewing Your Plan

You can see your model in a wide variety of Floor plan view is a 2D view of the model and
different 2D and 3D views. You can display is most commonly used for drawing and
more than one view at a time and in any editing. In floor plan view, each floor displays
view, you can pan or zoom in or out. See separately and you can only edit one floor at a
“Zoom & View Tools” on page 730. time; however, you have extensive control
over which objects display at any given time,

37
CAFull_RM.book Page 38 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Viewing Your Plan

can easily switch between floors, and can also the relationships between spaces, and plan
display items on a second floor for reference. traffic flow.

Framing Overviews display framing in 3D,

provided that framing has been built. You can
customize 3D views to serve special purposes
such as this.

You can create interior and exterior 3D views

of your model from any perspective. As in
floor plan view, you can select and edit many
objects in 3D views and can control which
objects are visible. See “3D Views” on page
740.
A variety of Cross Section and Elevation
camera tools create accurate, scaled 2D views
of a model’s exterior and interior. Just as in
other views, you can select and edit objects in
a Cross Section/Elevation view as well as
control which objects display. Cross Section/
Elevation views can be annotated and
dimensioned.
You can also create Floor Overviews that
show only the current floor. Ceilings are
omitted so you can see the interior, visualize

A variety of rendering techniques let you

produce customized 3D views, from detail

38
CAFull_RM.book Page 39 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

drawings to photorealistic Raytrace views to Layout

artistic presentation views.
All plan views can be sent to a layout
where they can be arranged to produce
full construction documentation. See
“Sending Views to Layout” on page 1018.

All views can also be exported as a graphic

image. See “To export a picture” on page
940.

Program Updates
From time to time, Chief Architect Inc. Select Help> Download Program Updates
releases program updates that are available to launch your default Web browser to the
for download from the Chief Architect Web Program Updates section of the Chief
site, www.chiefarchitect.com. Architect Web site.

Getting Help
There are many forms of help paste, and right-click to access contextual
available in Chief Architect including: menus. Help also assumes you are familiar
Tool Tips, the Status Bar, and the online Help with Windows terms.
menu.
More information is available in the product
All these forms of help assume you have a documentation in both printed and electronic
basic working knowledge of the Windows format and on Chief Architect’s official Web
operating system, including how to use a site, www.chiefarchitect.com. See
mouse, open, close and save files, copy, “Additional Resources” on page 219.

39
CAFull_RM.book Page 40 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

About Chief Architect

Tool Tips • When you move the cursor over a toolbar

button or menu item, a brief summary of
When you move the pointer over a toolbar that tool displays in the Status Bar. Press
button or menu item, a Tool Tipdisplays, the F1 key to open online Help to a page
offering a brief description of the tool. More with more information about the tool.
information displays in the Status Bar at the
bottom of the window. • When an object is selected, edit handles
display. Place the cursor over an edit han-
dle and press F1 to open online Help to a
Online Help Menu
page with information about that handle.
Online Help is a searchable menu that • Press the Help button in any dialog box
provides information about all of the tools in to open online Help to a page describing
Chief Architect. Select Help> Contents & the options in that dialog.
Index to open the online Help and
explore the table of contents, browse the
Index, or search for keywords. Chief Architect strives to make our doc-
umentation as helpful as possible for all
of our customers. Please send any
Current Mode Help questions, comments, or feedback to
[email protected].
Online Help can also be used to provide
instant information about toolbar buttons,
menu items, and objects in your plan.

About Chief Architect

Select Help> About Chief Architect to Contact information for Chief Architect, Inc.
view information about your software is available on the More Information tab.
license, the program’s version number, and
its release date.

40
CAFull_RM.book Page 41 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

41
CAFull_RM.book Page 42 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 2:

File Management

Chief Architect reads and edits two main Chapter Contents

document types: .plan files and .layout files. • Compatibility with Previous Versions
The complete 3D model of a structure, • Organizing Your Files
surrounding terrain and any CAD data • Chief Architect Data
associated with it are stored in the plan file. • Creating a New Plan or Layout
Data used to create working drawings and • Saving a Plan or Layout File
the links to various views or details are • Saving a Plan Thumbnail
stored in the layout file. • Auto Archive
All commands related to opening, saving and • Undo Files
closing plans are located in the File menu. • Opening a Plan or Layout File
You can also open plans from the Startup • Template Files
Options dialog. See “Startup Options” on • Searching for Plans
page 27. • Exporting an Entire Plan
• Closing Plans and Views
Just as with files created in other software • Exiting Chief Architect
applications, you should back up your plan
and layout files externally on a regular basis
to avoid accidental loss of work.

42
CAFull_RM.book Page 43 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Compatibility with Previous Versions

Plans produced in the following programs Files that have been opened and saved in
can all be read by Chief Architect X2. Chief Architect X2 cannot be read by the
programs listed above. To continue to read
• Chief Architect® 5.0 through X1
files in the program in which they were
• 3D Home Architect® 3.0 and 4.0 created, be sure to create copies of your files
before opening them in Chief Architect X2.
• Chief Architect® Home Edition 5.0
• All Version 8 and prior Better Homes and
Note: Chief Architect automatically archives
Gardens Home Designer™ products
plans created in prior versions. See “Auto
• Better Homes and Gardens Landscaping Archive” on page 48.
and Deck Designer, Version 8 and prior
• Better Homes and Gardens Interior Limited editability of files saved in Chief
Designer, Version 8 and prior Architect X2 can be enabled when these files
are opened in Version 9 and later of Better
• Trading Spaces® Design Companion™ Homes and Gardens Home Designer
programs. See “General Plan Defaults
Note: 3D Home Architect 5.0 was not devel- Dialog” on page 68.
oped by Chief Architect, Inc. Plans written Several steps are required to successfully
using 3D Home Architect 5.0 or later cannot
convert plans created in an earlier program
be read by Chief Architect.
version to the Chief Architect X2 format.
Before doing so, see “Before You Begin” on
Only the .PL1, .LA1, .plan, and .layout files
page 1064.
from prior versions can be opened in Chief
Architect X2.

Organizing Your Files

You should keep your plan and layout files that use them so that they are easily found.
separate from the support files needed to run See “Adding to the Library” on page 700.
Chief Architect. To keep files organized, you
Here is one way to organize your files:
may find it helpful to create a new folder for
each project. • Create a folder in “My Documents”
(“Documents” in Windows Vista) called
Many Chief Architect files use imported “Chief Architect Plans” or another name
images, textures and other custom content you prefer. See Microsoft Windows Help
saved in their own external data files. to learn how to create folders.
Consider storing copies of all external files in
the same folder as the plan and layout files • Inside this folder, make a new folder for
each client or project. Save all the files

43
CAFull_RM.book Page 44 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Data

for that client or project inside this folder,

including plan and layout files and refer- It is recommended that each layout file
enced external files. See “Saving a Plan be saved in the same folder as the plan
or Layout File” on page 46. file(s) associated with it. See “Managing Lay-
out Links” on page 1030.
Bear in mind, though, that path names
exceeding 260 characters cannot be opened To specify a default Save As location
by Chief Architect. As a result, it is a good
idea to limit the number of embedded folders
1. Select Edit> Preferences , then
you use in your file organization method.
select New Plans from Category list. See
Once you understand the file management of “New Plans Panel” on page 82.
Chief Architect, you should decide on a 2. Under Open and Save As, click Use this
naming convention that suits your needs. Folder. The Browse button becomes
available.
3. Browse to the folder you plan to save
your projects in. Click OK.

Chief Architect Data

When Chief Architect X2 is installed, the • lex - A folder of customized dictionaries.
program automatically creates a folder in My See “Spell Check” on page 859.
Documents called Chief Architect X2 Data. • Database Libraries - A folder of cus-
This folder contains important user-specific tomized libraries. See “User Libraries”
information saved in the following folders on page 686.
and files and should not be moved, renamed • Templates - A folder of plan and layout
or deleted: template files. See “Template Files” on
• Archives - A folder of automatically page 51“Creating a New Plan or Layout”
archived plan and layout files. See “Auto on page 45.
Archive” on page 48. • Textures - A folder of texture files that
• Backdrops - A folder of custom back- can be used to create custom materials.
drop images. See “3D Backdrops” on See “Creating Materials” on page 712.
page 756. • Toolbars - A folder of customized tool-
• Hotkeys - A folder of hotkey assign- bar files. See “Toolbar Customization
ments. See “Hotkeys” on page 114. Dialog” on page 107.
• Images - A folder of custom images. See • Dialogs Suppressed.int - Contains infor-
“Adding Images to the Library” on page mation about which dialog boxes have
934. been suppressed by clicking Do not show
this message again.

44
CAFull_RM.book Page 45 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• mmaster.mat - The Master Materials Just as with your plan and layout files, it is a
List file. See “The Master List” on page good idea to back up your Chief Architect
1059. X2 Data folder.
• units.dat - A list of user-created units of
measurement. See “Unit Conversions If the Chief Architect X2 Data folder is
Panel” on page 85. moved or deleted, the program will
automatically replace it using default infor-
The name of the Chief Architect X2 Data mation from the Chief Architect installation
folder cannot be changed, but you can folder. When this occurs, customized user
specify its location on your computer in the settings and custom user libraries will not be
available.
Preferences dialog. See “Folders Panel”
on page 80.

Creating a New Plan or Layout

To create a new, blank plan, select Units of Measurement
File> New Plan.
All plan and layout files save measurements
You can also choose New Plan in the in either Imperial or Metric units. New files
Startup Options dialog. See “Startup are created using one or the other, depending
Options” on page 27.
on the current setting in the Preferences
By default, a new layout file will be dialog. When the program is first installed,
assigned the same name of the first the Windows OS setting for units determines
plan file sent to it, associating the layout files what system is used. See “New Plans Panel”
with the plan files used. on page 82.
A plan or layout file’s unit of measurement
Note: Only one layout file can be open at any must be specified before it is created and
given time. cannot be changed later. If you normally
work in one set of units but need to create a
New plan and layout files derive their default new file using the other, select File>
settings the from currently selected template
files. See “Template Files” on page 51. Templates> New Plan From Template
to open a new file using an appropriate
New, blank plans are called Untitled.plan template without changing your Preferences
and new, blank layout files, Untitled.layout. settings. See “Opening Template Files” on
Unless these files are named and saved, they page 52.
will be lost when closed. See “Saving a Plan
or Layout File” on page 46. While it is recommended that you create new
plans using the type of unit that you plan to
use, you can display dimensions using any

45
CAFull_RM.book Page 46 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Saving a Plan or Layout File

type of unit. See “Dimension Defaults and Commonly used settings, defaults and other
Preferences” on page 809. information are included in template files.
You can customize the settings in a template
Template Files file to fit your work style and then save your
changes as a new template file. See “To
New plan and layout files are created as create your own template plan” on page 52.
copies of the current template files specified
If no template has been specified in the
in the Preferences dialog. See
“Template Files” on page 51. Preferences dialog, new plans and
layouts are created using the system defaults.
System defaults cannot be modified.

Saving a Plan or Layout File

When you first save a new, • File> Save As opens the Save Plan
untitled file, you must select a File dialog, allowing you to save the plan
location for it on your computer and give it a or layout file using a different name or
name. There are two options for saving plan location on your computer.
and layout files: File> Save and File> Save
As. To save an untitled plan or layout file
By default, a new layout file is assigned the
same name as the first plan file from which a 1. Select File> Save to open the Save
view is sent to it. It is also saved in the same Plan File dialog.
directory as the plan file. If no view has been
sent to a layout, it remains untitled until you
save it.

Although the program warns you if you

try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting
the program.

Both Save and Save As can be used 2. In the Save in drop-down, browse to the
to save your plan and layout files; however, location on your computer where you
they accomplish this in two different ways. would like to save the file. See “Orga-
• File> Save saves the current state of nizing Your Files” on page 43.
your plan or layout file without changing 3. In the File name text field, type a name
its name and should normally be used for for the file.
saving your work.

46
CAFull_RM.book Page 47 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4. Chief Architect automatically assigns If you transfer a plan file from one computer
the File of type and file extension .plan to another, the program will warn you of
to plan files and .layout to layout files. missing files if the external data files used by
5. When both the Save in location and File the plan cannot be found.
name are correct, click Save. Layouts are also dynamically linked to plan
Any previously saved cross section/elevation files. When transferring layout files to
views and CAD Details associated with the another computer, be aware that the plan files
plan are also saved with this command. are also external file references and are not
actually contained in the layout.
When saving a layout, the program saves all
pages of the layout, all the links to the When transferring plans or layouts to another
various views saved in the layout, and all the computer that does not have these external
CAD objects added to the .layout file. files, use the Export Entire Plan tool.
See “Exporting an Entire Plan” on page 58.
Initially, all Open and Save As
operations go to the “My Documents” folder Backing Up Your Files
of your computer. After that, the location last
visited is remembered and subsequent It is always a good idea to create backup
copies of all your important files on your
Open or Save As commands default
computer.
to the directory last used for that operation.
This path is saved when the program exits. It is strongly recommended, however, that
The next time Chief Architect is launched, you never save directly:
these defaults are used. • Across a network, such as onto a server;
If you prefer, you can instead specify a • Onto removable media such as a USB
directory to be used for all Open or Save thumb drive or CD;

As operations in the Preferences • Across the Internet.

dialog. See “New Plans Panel” on page 82. Instead, copy your files to such locations in
Windows Explorer only after you have saved
Exporting Files them on your computer’s hard drive and
closed the program.
File> Save As is a simple way to transfer
Similarly, you should never open files saved
a plan or layout to a different location on
in these locations. Copy the files to the local
your computer. Bear in mind, though, that
hard drive, and then open them. See
plan and layout files often reference external
“Opening a Plan or Layout File” on page 50.
data files such as imported textures, images,
and backdrops. These external files are not Archive folders are used by Chief Architect
affected when Save As is used. to manage prior versions of your files. You
should never save a file to an archive folder.
See “Auto Archive” on page 48.

47
CAFull_RM.book Page 48 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Saving a Plan Thumbnail

Saving a Plan Thumbnail

A thumbnail is a miniature image that helps To save a custom thumbnail for the current
identify a file in the Open Plan File dialog file, make sure the view you want to use is on
and in the Find Plan Wizard. Any view of a screen, then select File> Save Plan
plan or any layout page can be saved as the Thumbnail .
thumbnail. See “Searching for Plans” on
page 53. You must save the plan and give it a name
before you can save a plan thumbnail.
If thumbnails are enabled in the Preferences Thumbnails are saved using the same
dialog, the program automatically creates filename as the current plan with the _p.jpg
one when you first save a new plan. You can file extension for plans and _l.jpg for
choose to generate small or large thumbnails. layouts. If a plan thumbnail already exists,
See “General Panel” on page 79. the program asks if you want to overwrite the
existing thumbnail.

Auto Archive
When a plan or layout is first saved, Chief Files can be archived by hour, day or most
Architect creates an Archive folder in the recent save. They are renamed according to
Chief Architect Data folder. The Archive which archiving option is selected in the
folder contains Auto Save and Archive files. Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on
See “Chief Architect Data” on page 44. page 79.
Auto Save and Archive files should not be Previous
viewed as a substitute for regularly saving Save
your work by selecting File> Save or Daily
pressing Ctrl + S on the keyboard, nor should Hourly
they be considered an alternative to your own
Archive files illustrating all three archive options
file backup routine.
Plan, layout and related files from previous
You should never save a file in an versions of the program are automatically
archive folder. moved to the archive folder when the plan is
opened and saved in Chief Architect.
Archive Files Archive files are meant to be for emergency
Every time a model is saved, internal archive use only. If you must access an archive file,
files are automatically created that keep a open it as you would any other file. See
historical archive of your plan. “Opening a Plan or Layout File” on page 50.

48
CAFull_RM.book Page 49 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

As soon as the file is open, use Save As when changes are made to a file but not
to save this file to another location. saved by selecting File> Save .
These Auto Save files are appended
Legacy Archive Files _auto_save.plan or _auto_save.layout and
If you open a Chief Architect plan or layout are saved in the Archive folder.
file from a previous program version and When you close a file normally, its Auto
immediately Save it (not Save As ), Save file is retained until the next time the
the Auto Archive utility will create an file is opened and the Auto Save file is
additional archive file using the original overwritten.
program version format. This archive file is a
copy of the original and can still be opened in
the original program version.
Auto Save file after normal shut-down
If you open and Save a Chief Architect You can enable Auto Save and set its
Version 10 plan or layout file, the legacy
archive file name will be appended “_v10” to frequency in the Preferences dialog. See
help distinguish it from other archived .plan “General Panel” on page 79.
or .layout files of the same name, and a copy Auto save files created as a result of an
of its archive folder will be created in the improper program shutdown are appended
Chief Architect X2 Archives folder. _auto_save_bak.plan or
_auto_save_bak.layout.
Manage Archives
Chief Architect offers two convenient ways
to access Archive folders. Auto Save file after abnormal shut-down

• Select File> Manage Auto Archives If your computer shuts down accidentally,
to open the current plan’s Archive folder. you can recover some of your work by
• Click Yes in the Archived Files dialog opening the _auto_save_bak file.
when the program warns you that the
number of archive files exceeds the Auto A file is auto saved only if you have
Archive Files value. saved it previously. Auto Save does not
work for unnamed files.
You can also move or delete archived files
using Windows Explorer. See your Windows
When you reopen a file after a computer shut
documentation for more information.
down or system crash, the following dialog
displays if an Auto Save file newer than the
Auto Save Files original file is found.
As you work, Chief Architect automatically
creates Auto Save files at regular intervals

49
CAFull_RM.book Page 50 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Undo Files

• Click the Save button.

• Select File> Save .

• Press Ctrl + S or F3 on the keyboard.
Even with Auto Save, you should save your
work manually on a regular basis using any
of the following methods:

Undo Files
Chief Architect stores a set number of copies use Windows system cleanup features, these
of all open plan file changes, known as undo files can be deleted. Because of this, you
files. Undo files are referenced whenever should only use these type of utilities when
you select Edit> Undo or Edit> Redo Chief Architect is not running.

. See “Undo and Redo” on page 141. The maximum number of Undo files is
specified in the Maximum Undos value in
Undo files are stored in the Undo Directory, the Preference settings. If you have Undo
which can be specified in the Preferences enabled, be sure to define a directory on a
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 80. hard drive with enough space for these files.

By default, the Undo Directory is the When Chief Architect is closed normally,
Windows Temporary Directory. When you any current Undo files are deleted.

Opening a Plan or Layout File

Select File> Open Plan to open
an existing .plan file or File> Never open a file located on a server or
Open Layout to open an existing .layout file other computer on a network, or on a
located on your computer. Chief Architect removeable storage device. Copy such files
to your local machine’s hard drive first, and
automatically browses to either the directory
then open the copy.
last used or to a specific directory, depending
on your current Preferences settings. See
The Open Plan File and Open Layout File
“New Plans Panel” on page 82.
dialogs can be resized by clicking and
dragging the lower right corner.

50
CAFull_RM.book Page 51 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• In the Look in drop-down, browse to the • When the desired file is selected, click
location on your computer where the file Open.
you wish to open is saved.
• Any folders and either .plan or .layout Recently Opened Files
files in the current location display in the The names of the plan and layout files you
field below. The file type that displays most recently opened or saved display at the
depends on the Files of Type selection. bottom of the File menu. Click on a recent
• Click on the file you wish to open. Its file to open that file without using the Open
name will display in the File name text Plan File dialog.
field.
The maximum number of recent files listed
• If a preview image of the file is available, in the File menu can be changed in the
it will display on the right side of the
Preferences dialog. See “General
dialog. See “Saving a Plan Thumbnail”
Panel” on page 79.
on page 48.
• The only file types available in the Files The names of recently open files also display
of type list are .plan and .layout. in the Startup Options dialog. Click on the
name of a file to open it. See “Startup
Options” on page 27.

Template Files
When Chief Architect opens a new, predefined default settings, layer settings,
blank plan or layout file, the new file wall definitions, and page setup information.
is actually a copy of a template using either
You can create custom templates for metric
metric or Imperial units of measurement and
and Imperial plans that include the settings

51
CAFull_RM.book Page 52 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Template Files

that you regularly use. In the Preferences

dialog, you can specify what templates the Note: Make sure you use the appropriate
program refers to when a new plan or layout units of measurement when you create a
file is opened. See “New Plans Panel” on template plan. The Imperial or metric units
used in the new plan are the same as when
page 82. the template was saved.
Once you are familiar with the default
settings in Chief Architect, you can create Creating Templates
template files to fit your needs, store them in
the templates directory, and specify them as The steps for creating template plans and
the defaults for new files. layouts are similar, although there are fewer
default settings in layout files, and most
If you make changes to a default template layout templates include a border and title
file, all subsequently created plans or layouts block where as most plan templates are
will use the new default settings. blank.
You can designate the template folder that
To create your own template plan
you would like to use in the Preferences
dialog. See “Folders Panel” on page 80.
1. Select File> New Plan .

If a template file is not specified or can- 2. Select Edit> Defaults Settings and
not be found, the program starts new open and modify the settings in the
plans using a set of system defined defaults. default dialogs as needed. See “Defaults
These system defined defaults are very basic
and Preferences” on page 63.
and unlikely to meet your drawing needs, so
you should always specify a template plan 3. Select Tools> Display Settings> Dis-
and layout.
play Options and create any custom
layers, layer sets and layer settings that
Opening Template Files you typically use. See “Layers” on page
If you have more than one plan or layout 116.
configuration that you regularly use, you can 4. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall
create multiple template files and open
whichever is needed for a given project. Types and create any custom wall
types that you often use. See “Wall Type
To create a new plan or layout file using a Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
template other than the current preference,
choose File> Templates> New Plan from 5. Select 3D> 3D Settings and set up
your backdrop and other options for 3D
Template or New Layout from
views. See “3D Settings Dialog” on
Template . The program browses to the page 744.
Templates directory specified in the 6. If you draw anything in the template
Preferences dialog. plan, it displays in all new plans created
with that template.

52
CAFull_RM.book Page 53 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

7. You can insert text macros into the tem- 5. Select Tools> Layout> Page Down
plate. See “Text Macros” on page 869. to go to layout page 0 and use the CAD
8. After modifying all your default set- tools to design a border and title block
tings, select File> Templates> Save that suits your needs. See “Layout Page
Plan As Template . Name the tem- Zero” on page 1021.
plate plan and save it in the Templates
directory. To set a template as your default

9. In the Change Default Template dialog,

click Yes to use the plan as your default 1. Select Edit> Preferences and go to
template whenever you select File> the New Plans panel of the Preferences
dialog.
New Plan . Click No if you prefer to
access this template by selecting File> 2. Click Imperial or Metric Units.

New Plan From Template . 3. Click the Browse button for either the
plan or layout template.
10. The current plan remains untitled, but a
copy of it is saved for use as a template. 4. Select a template file from the Templates
directory or navigate to a different loca-
tion and select a template from there.
To create your own template layout
Updating Templates
1. Select File> New Layout .
To change the default settings in your
2. Select Edit> Defaults Settings and template, you must open the template file as
open and modify the settings in the though it were a regular plan or layout by
default dialogs as needed. See “Default selecting File> Open Plan or Open
Settings” on page 63.
Layout .
3. Select Tools> Display Settings> Dis-
After the necessary changes are made, select
play Options and create any custom
File> Templates> Save Plan as
layers, layer sets and layer settings that
you typically use. See “Layers” on page Template . Select the name of the
116. template from the list of files in the
Templates directory. When the program asks
4. Select File> Print> Page Setup and if you want to replace the existing file, click
specify the desired print settings. See Yes.
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004.

Searching for Plans

Select File> Search for Plans to opens the Find Plan Wizard, which helps
locate an existing plan. This command you search specific plan database files and

53
CAFull_RM.book Page 54 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Searching for Plans

define search parameters for plans based on When you open the Find Plan Wizard,
parameters that you define. choose a plan database to search. When you
first run Chief Architect there is only one
Find Plan Wizard plan database containing the sample plans
that come with the program. Click the
The Find Plan Wizard can be used to search Browse button to select a different plan
for plans using stored information about each database. You must create a plan database
plan, such as the style of construction and the before you can use the Find Plan Wizard to
number of bedrooms and other room types. locate files you created.

House Style

At the bottom of each page, the number of On any page, click the Back button to
plans that match your current search modify any previously selected parameters.
parameters displays. As you modify the
Select the style of house desired, the number
parameters, this number increases or
of floors in the house, and the number of
decreases as matching plans are found.
bedrooms, then click Next to continue.

54
CAFull_RM.book Page 55 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

House Size

Select the number of bathrooms, size, and

desired price range and square footage of the
house, then click Next to continue.

55
CAFull_RM.book Page 56 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Searching for Plans

Plan Details

Click on the name of a plan in the list to see a Click Next, then click the Finish button to
preview of the plan, if one exists. See open the selected plan.
“Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on page 48.

Creating a Plan Database File

Select Tools> Plans Database> for plans using the Plan Find Wizard. The
Create Plan Database to create a new Create Plan Database dialog opens.
plan database file that can be used to search

1
2
3
4

1 Use the Database File field to name the the Browse button to save this file at the
plan database file to be created. Click location of your choice, as well as name it.

56
CAFull_RM.book Page 57 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2 Use the Plan Search Path to specify plan and analyze it so this process may take
the location on your computer of the some time.
plans to be included in the plan database. The
You can Cancel the search process at any
program searches for any plan files that exist
time. If you do, your plan database will have
in this folder and adds them to the plan
incomplete information and will not contain
database. Click the Browse button to
entries for all plans in your search folder.
navigate to a particular folder on your
When all plans have been found and added to
machine.
the plan database, the program automatically
3 The Include Subfolders checkbox opens the new plan database file for
allows you to specify whether or not the modification.
search looks only in the Plan Search Path or
if it also searches any subfolders found. Editing a Plan Database File
4 Check Use Relative Path if you Once a plan database file is created, it
anticipate moving the folder containing can be modified. Select Tools> Plans
the database and plans to another location. Database> Edit Plan Database, then select
As long as the database and the plans it the plan database file you want to modify.
references remain in the same folder, the
folder can be moved to another location. Click OK to open the Edit Plan Database
dialog. You can edit any of the information in
When you click OK, the program searches the plan database and add and remove plans
for plan files and adds them to the plan from the database.
database file. The program must read each

Edit Plan Database Dialog

1 2
3

57
CAFull_RM.book Page 58 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Exporting an Entire Plan

1 Plans in the Database - All plans that • Area - The area is automatically calcu-
currently have information stored in the lated by the program based on the living
plan database are listed here. area of the plan when it is added to the
• Click Add Plan to select a plan file to database. You can enter a different value
add to the plan database. if you wish.

• Click Remove to remove the currently • Bedrooms - The number of bedrooms is

selected plan from the plan database. automatically calculated when a plan is
added to the database. You can enter a
• Click Select File to relink the selected different number if you wish.
plan to a plan file on your computer. If a
plan file is renamed, moved or removed • Baths - The number of bathrooms is
from your system, the plan database does automatically calculated when a plan is
not know how to locate it. You must then added to the database. You enter a differ-
relink the plan database to the file or ent number if you wish.
remove it to keep the plan database infor- • Floors - The number of floors is automat-
mation accurate. ically calculated when a plan is added to
• Click Open Plan to open the selected the database. You can enter a different
plan. Opening a plan closes the Plan number of floors if you wish.
Database dialog. If you have not saved • Description - Enter a description for the
any changes you made before clicking plan, if desired. This description displays
the Open Plan button, you are asked to when a plan is found and selected using
do so before you continue. the Search for Plans tool.
2 Plan Information - Information about 3 Plan Thumbnail - The thumbnail
the selected plan displays and can be preview image of the selected plan
edited here. displays here. You can create a thumbnail for
• Style - Select a plan style from the drop any plan. See “Saving a Plan Thumbnail” on
down list. You can also create a new plan page 48.
style by typing in the name of the new
style in the blank area. 4 File Path - The selected plan file’s path
name displays here.
• Price - Enter the price range for this plan.

Exporting an Entire Plan

Because Chief Architect plans and this easily by selecting File> Export>
layouts often contain many references Entire Plan.
to other external files, it is necessary to copy
Exporting an Entire Plan is important when:
all the associated files to a new location
when a plan or layout is moved. You can do • Migrating legacy files created in older
program versions.

58
CAFull_RM.book Page 59 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Transferring files to another computer or 2. When you click the OK button in the
sending them to another user. Export Entire Plan dialog, the Browse
• Archiving or backing up your work. for Folder dialog opens. Here you can
select the destination folder for the asso-
ciated plan files.
Note: Always use File> Export> Entire Plan
when sending files to a user of the Chief
Architect Viewer to make sure that they have
all associated data.

To export a plan and all associated files

1. To copy all associated plan or layout

files to a new directory, select File>
Export> Entire Plan . The Export
Entire Plan dialog opens for you to
choose what files are copied.

3. Navigate to any folder on your system,

to an external storage device, or create a
new folder.
• Choose Export All Files to copy all
plan or layout files and all externally
You must select an empty folder for the
referenced files such as linked plan
Export Entire Plan feature to work. If
files, inserted picture files, and any you select an existing folder that is not empty,
graphics files such as textures, images, the export is cancelled.
and backdrops.
• Choosing Export Plan Files Only cop- Returning Viewer Files
ies all associated plan files and any
externally linked files and inserted pic- When customers review and annotate files
ture files, but it does not copy any using the Chief Architect Viewer, they only
graphics or pattern files. This is best need to return the .plan and/or .layout files.
used when transferring a plan or layout The associated files do not need to be
file to a computer that already has the returned.
graphics files installed.

59
CAFull_RM.book Page 60 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Closing Plans and Views

Closing Plans and Views

Choose File> Close to close the active or Cancel to close the dialog and return to
window. If it is the last open view for a plan the window.
and you have not saved it, the program
Select File> Close All to close all currently
prompts you to save before closing. Edited
open windows.
cross section/elevation views also prompt
you to save before closing. Select Yes to
save, No to close the window without saving, Although the program warns you if you
try to exit without saving, you should get
in the habit of saving plan files before exiting.

Exiting Chief Architect

Select File> Exit to exit the program. If you When you exit from the program using File>
have not saved any open plans, you are Exit, all Autosave files and Undo files are
reminded to do so. It is better to save your automatically deleted.
work before exiting than to save on exit.

60
CAFull_RM.book Page 61 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

61
CAFull_RM.book Page 62 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 3:

Preferences &
Default Settings

Becoming familiar with the program defaults Chapter Contents

and preferences is vital to understanding how • Defaults and Preferences
Chief Architect works and maximizing your • Default Settings
productivity. • Dynamic Defaults
• General Plan Defaults Dialog
• Reset to Defaults
If you use special settings regularly, it is
a good idea to save your settings in a • Preferences Dialog
template plan. See “To create your own tem-
plate plan” on page 52.

62
CAFull_RM.book Page 63 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Defaults and Preferences

Default and preference settings have settings in one plan or layout file will have
important effects on how the tools in Chief no effect on other plans or layout files.
Architect function. These settings can be
Default settings are an important aspect of
customized to suit your needs and improve
template files, which determine the initial
your efficiency, so it is important to become
settings of new plan and layout files and can
familiar with them and learn how you can
be used to save you considerable time. See
best use them.
“Template Files” on page 51.
Default Settings Preferences
Default settings determine the initial
Preference settings influence the
characteristics of objects when they
overall environment of the program,
are first drawn. For example, when you place
such as what the interface looks like, how the
a base cabinet in a plan, its size, materials,
tools are accessed, the basic rules governing
front items, hardware and fill style are
how objects are drawn and edited.
determined by settings in the Base Cabinet
Defaults dialog. Unlike default settings, preferences are
global, which means that any changes that
Defaults are file-specific, which means that
you make to them will take effect in all plan
any changes that you make to the default
and layout files.

Default Settings
You can access a list of the various
default settings by selecting Edit> You can create Hotkeys to open any of
Default Settings from the menu. the defaults dialogs listed in the Default
Settings dialog. See “Hotkeys” on page 114.

63
CAFull_RM.book Page 64 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Default Settings

Camera Defaults
Select Camera and click the Edit button or
double-click the Render Tools parent
button to display the Camera Defaults dia-
log. See “Camera Defaults Dialog” on page 742.

Dimension Defaults
Select Dimension and click the Edit button
or double-click the double-click the Dimen-
sion Tools parent button to display the
Dimension Defaults dialog. Dimension
Defaults are available in both plan and layout
files. See “Dimension Defaults and
Preferences” on page 809.

Door Defaults
Click the + beside Doors or double-click the
Cabinet Defaults
Door Tools parent button to access the
Click the + beside Cabinets to access the defaults dialogs for exterior and interior
default dialogs for the various cabinet types. doors. See “Door Defaults” on page 293.
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 547.
Select General Cabinet and click the Edit Dormer Defaults
button to open the General Cabinet Defaults Select Dormer and click the Edit button or
dialog. See “General Cabinet Defaults” on
page 547. double-click the Auto Floating Dormer
or the Auto Dormer child button to open
CAD Defaults the Dormer Defaults dialog. See “Dormer
Defaults” on page 375.
Select CAD and click the Edit button to
open the CAD Defaults dialog. You can also
Electrical Defaults
use the CAD Defaults button to access
the dialog if you add it to your toolbar using Select Electrical and click the Edit button or
Toolbar Customization. CAD Defaults are double-click the Electrical Tools parent
available in both plan and layout files. See button to display the Electrical Defaults dia-
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875. log. See “Electrical Defaults” on page 516.

64
CAFull_RM.book Page 65 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Floor Defaults dialog for the current floor. See “Room

Material Defaults” on page 267.
Select Floor and click the Edit button,
double-click the Floor Tools parent but- Plan and Layout Defaults
ton to open the Floor Defaults dialog for the
current floor. See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on Select Plan or Layout and click the Edit
page 353. button or double-click the Select Objects
button to open the Plan or Layout Defaults
Foundation Defaults dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
on page 68 and “Layout Defaults” on page
Select Foundation and click the Edit button 1015.
to open the Build Foundation dialog. You
can also Build> Floors> Build Foundation
Road, Sidewalk, &
or double-click either the Foundation Driveway Defaults
Wall or Retaining Wall child button Click the + beside Roads, Sidewalks and
to open this dialog. See “Foundation Driveways or double-click the Road
Defaults” on page 363.
Tools parent button to access the defaults
Framing Defaults dialogs for the various road tools. See “Road
and Sidewalk Defaults” on page 635.
Select Framing and click the Edit button or
• Select Road and click the Edit button,
double-click the Framing Tools parent
double-click the Road Tools parent
button to open the Framing Defaults dialog.
See “Framing Defaults” on page 461. button, or double-click the Road
child button to open the Road Defaults
Layer Sets Defaults dialog.
• Select Driveway and click the Edit but-
Select Layer Sets and click the Edit button
to open the Layer Sets Defaults dialog. See ton or double-click the Driveway
“Layer Set Defaults” on page 119. child button to open the Driveway
Defaults dialog.
Material Defaults • Select Road Marking and click the Edit
button or double-click the Road Stripe
Click the + beside Materials to access the
defaults dialogs related to materials. or Road Marking child button
to open the Road Marking Defaults dia-
Select General Materials and click the Edit log.
button to open the Material Defaults dialog.
See “Material Defaults Dialog” on page 726. • Select Sidewalk and click the Edit but-
ton or double-click the Sidewalk
Select Room Materials and click the Edit
child button to open the Sidewalk
button to open the Room Material Defaults
Defaults dialog.

65
CAFull_RM.book Page 66 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Default Settings

Schedule Defaults and Preferences” on page 839. Text Defaults

are available in both plan and layout files.
Click the + beside Schedules or double-click
• Select Rich Text and click the Edit but-
the Schedule Tools parent button to
access a list of the default schedule dialogs. ton, double-click the Rich Text Tools
Select the type of schedule and click the Edit parent button, or double-click the Rich
button. See “Schedule Defaults” on page Text child button to open the Rich
1036. Text Defaults dialog. See “Rich Text
• Select Door Schedule and click the Edit Defaults” on page 839.
button to access the Door Schedule • Select Text and click the Edit button,
Defaults dialog.
double-click the Text Tools parent
• Select Window Schedule and click the
button, or double-click the Text child
Edit button to access the Window
button to open the Text Defaults dialog.
Schedule Defaults dialog.
See “Text Defaults” on page 839.
• Select Cabinet Schedule and click the
• Select Callouts and click the Edit button
Edit button to access the Cabinet
Schedule Defaults dialog. or double-click the Callout child but-
• Select Fixture Schedule and click the ton to display the Callout Defaults dia-
Edit button to access the Fixture log. See “Callout Defaults” on page 839.
Schedule Defaults dialog. • Select Markers and click the Edit button
• Select Furniture Schedule and click the or double-click the Marker child
Edit button to access the Furniture button to display the Marker Defaults
Schedule Defaults dialog. dialog. See “Marker Defaults” on page
• Select Electrical Schedule and click the 839.
Edit button to access the Electrical • Select Room Label and click the Edit
Schedule Defaults dialog. button to open the Room Label Defaults
• Select Room Finish Schedule and click dialog. See “Room Label Defaults” on
the Edit button to access the Room page 839.
Finish Schedule Defaults dialog. • Select Arrow and click the Edit button
• Select Plant Schedule and click the Edit or double-click the Text Line with
button to access the Plant Schedule Arrow or Leader Line child but-
Defaults dialog. ton to open the Arrow Defaults dialog.
See “Arrow Defaults” on page 840.
Text, Callout, &
Marker Defaults Wall, Railing, and
Click the + beside Text to access the various
Fencing Defaults
Text Defaults dialogs. See “Text Defaults Select General Wall and click the Edit
button or double-click the General Wall

66
CAFull_RM.book Page 67 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Defaults toolbar button to open the Railing child button to open the
General Wall Defaults dialog. See “General Railing Defaults dialog. See “Railing
Wall Defaults” on page 215. and Deck Railing Defaults” on page 219.
• Select Interior/Exterior Wall and click • Select Fencing and click the Edit button
the Edit button or double-click the Exte- or double-click the Fencing child
rior Wall or Interior Wall child button to open the Fencing Defaults dia-
button open the Interior/Exterior Wall log. See “Fencing Defaults” on page 219.
Defaults dialog. See “Exterior/Interior
Wall Defaults” on page 216. Window Defaults
• Select Pony Wall and click the Edit but- Select Window and click the Edit button or
ton or double-click the Pony Wall double-click the Window Tools parent
child button to open the Pony Wall button to open the Window Defaults dialog.
Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall See “Window Defaults” on page 317.
Defaults” on page 218.
• Select Railing and click the Edit button Reset Defaults
or double-click the Straight Railing Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the
child button to open the Railing Defaults Reset to Defaults dialog. Use this dialog to
dialog. See “Railing and Deck Railing clear special settings made in various parts of
Defaults” on page 219. your plan. See “Reset to Defaults” on page
• Select Deck Railing and click the Edit 69.
button or double-click the Deck

Dynamic Defaults
Dynamic defaults are values that can be set
or changed globally throughout a model.
These values are found in the default
specification dialogs of most objects,
including walls, doors, cabinets and rooms.
Dynamic defaults are followed by either a
(D) in the value field or a Default check box.
You can change the value for that kind of
object and all the objects of the same type
update automatically. The exception to this To edit a dynamic default, delete the (D) or
rule is any object you edited the values for. In remove the check from Default box and type
that case, the value does not update when the desired value.
you change the dynamic default value.

67
CAFull_RM.book Page 68 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

General Plan Defaults Dialog

To reset a value back to the dynamic default, Materials are another example of an attribute
type the letter D in the field or click the that uses Dynamic Defaults. See “Material
Default checkbox. Defaults Dialog” on page 726.

General Plan Defaults Dialog

The settings in the General Plan Defaults Plan Defaults, and click the Edit button, or
dialog control basic features of the Chief double-click the Select Objects button.
Architect environment. To open this dialog,
select Edit> Default Settings , select

1 2

3 4

1 General Settings - Specify the default secting wall. Clear this box retain suffi-
functionality for a variety of general cient space for the opening’s specified
behaviors in the program. trim width.
• Check Warn Before Delete Selected • Check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enable
Item if you want the program to require to allow the resizing of library symbols.
confirmation before an item is deleted. When enabled, fixtures and furniture can
• Check Ignore Casing for Opening be resized from 1 to 2000 inches.
Resize to allow wall openings such as • Check Show Pitch as Degrees to display
doors to be positioned against an inter- the roof pitch in degrees.

68
CAFull_RM.book Page 69 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Chief Architect automatically calculates they are moved or resized. See “Grid Snaps”
the square footage of each floor in the on page 136.
plan and shows this number as the living • Check Use Snap Grid/Units to enable
area in floor plan view. Uncheck Show Grid Snaps.
“Living Area” to disable the display of
the Living Area label. See “Living Area” • Specify the Snap Unit you wish to use.
on page 275.
• Enter the number of Inches/MM It may be helpful to change the Snap
Unit temporarily when working with
Scrolled by Arrow Key in floor plan
large objects such as terrain or small objects
view. See “Using the Arrow Keys” on such as molding profiles.
page 732.
• Check Allow Editing in Select Home • Uncheck Show Snap Grid to turn off the
Designer Products to allow limited edit- display of the Snap Grid, a visual indica-
ing of the current plan in Version 9.0 tor of the location of the snap points.
Home Designer programs, when they • Click the Color bar to specify the Snap
become available. Grid Color. See “Color Chooser Dialog”
on page 727.
2 Specify the Allowed Angles used when
Angle Snaps are enabled. See “Angle • Check Display as Dots to display the
Snaps” on page 135. Snap Grid using dots rather than lines.
• Select 15 Degrees to enable Angle Snaps
in 15 degree increments. 4 Specify the display of the Reference
Grid.
• Select 7 1/2 Degrees and additional • Specify the Reference Grid Size.
angles to enable Angle Snaps in 7 ½
degree increments. • Check Display as Dots to display the
Reference Grid using dots rather than
You can also enter up to eight Additional lines.
Angles in the fields provided. Click the
Number Style button to specify the format You can also click Grid Snaps toggle
used to enter angles. See “Number Style/ button to turn on/off grid snapping or click
Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.
the Display Reference Grid toggle
The Snap Grid allows you to snap button to turn on/off the grid display.
3
objects to specific points on-screen as

Reset to Defaults
Select Edit> Reset to Defaults to open the This dialog allows you to clear the special
Reset to Defaults dialog. settings you have made in various parts of
your plan.

69
CAFull_RM.book Page 70 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

roof group independently from the roof built

over other parts of the plan. Check to reset to
the default roof group, zero. See “Room
1 Specification Dialog” on page 283.

4 Roof Directives - You can set

directives describing how a roof surface
2 rises from a wall into a wall using the Roof
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. All
3
4 Roof tab items are unchecked and any value,
5 such as the roof pitch, is reset to the default
pitch. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 249.

5 Wall Top Heights and Wall Bottom

Heights - Wall shape and height can be
edited in cross section/elevation views.
1 The settings can be cleared for the Check to reset wall shapes and heights.
current floor or for All Floors.

2 Floor and Ceiling Heights - Floor and If your plan behaves strangely, the cur-
ceiling heights for any room can be
rent settings may have been brought
changed in the Room Specification dialog. forward from a previous version and/or no
Check to reset the default values as specified longer be appropriate. To check for this, open
in the Floor Defaults dialog. See “Floor your plan and reset these items to their
Defaults Dialog” on page 353. defaults. Rebuild floors and ceilings to see if
the plan looks better. If so, you know what the
3 Roof Groups - You can designate a problem is. Rather than save your plan at this
different roof group for a room in the point and lose all these settings, you may
Room Specification dialog. This builds the want to investigate and find the specific set-
roof over this room and others in the same tings causing the problem and fix only those.

Preferences Dialog
The settings in the Preferences The category tree structure is similar to other
dialog are global: they apply to all Windows programs. A “+” next to a category
plan and layout files and are preserved indicates that it has subcategories. Click the
between sessions. Select Edit> Preferences “+” to make the subcategories visible; to hide
to access this dialog. them, click the “-.”
The Preferences dialog consists of panels The program remembers which panel you
which are accessed by clicking on the names last accessed and opens to that panel the next
in the Category tree along the left side. time you open the dialog.

70
CAFull_RM.book Page 71 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Preference dialog panels: • CAD Panel

• Line Properties Panel
• Appearance Panel
• Sun Angle Panel
• Colors Panel
• Edit Panel
• Font Panel
• Behaviors Panel
• Library Browser Panel
• Snap Properties Panel
• Text & Page Setup Panel
• Material List Panel
• General Panel
• Report Style Panel
• Folders Panel
• Master List Panel
• New Plans Panel
• Categories Panel
• Layers Panel
• Render Panel
• Unit Conversions Panel
• Video Card Status Panel
• Time Tracker Panel
• Reset Options Panel
• Architectural Panel

Appearance Panel

1 6
7
2

8
3
9
4

1 When Contextual Menus are enabled, are unique to the selected object. The options
you can right-click an object and a in a contextual menu are usually the same as
contextual menu displays with options that those on the Edit toolbar.

71
CAFull_RM.book Page 72 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

A menu of general commands displays if you the same object surface in order for the
right-click in an empty space in a view contextual menu to display: clicking on
window, away from any object. two different surfaces of the same object
is treated like two single-clicks.

2 The Status Bar at the bottom of the

main window displays information
about the current state of the program. See
“The Status Bar” on page 34.
• Check Enable to activate the Status Bar
or clear the check box to disable it.
• Check Show Screen Redraw Time to
display the number of seconds it takes to
redraw the screen. This is useful for
determining the effectiveness of the 3D
acceleration of your graphics card.
• Check Show Coordinates to display the
coordinates of your cursor at all times on
the right side of the Status Bar.

The number style for the coordinates is

controlled in the Number Style/Angle Style
dialog. See “Number Style/Angle Style
The contextual menu for a base cabinet Dialog” on page 917.
Since Chief Architect can use the right-click
as a general select, you have the option to
3 Check Show Line Weights to represent
line weights on-screen. Because of
disable or limit the contextual menus. monitor DPI, lines may appear to be much
• Check Enabled to activate contextual wider on screen than when they are printed.
menus. Clear the check box to disable Zooming closer may reflect a more accurate
contextual menus. idea of the actual line width.
• Check Click Twice to Display to require Specify the Min Display Weight, the lowest
two right-clicks on an object before the line weight possible on screen, regardless of
contextual menu displays. This allows how far you zoom out. A Minimum Display
the first right-click to be a general select. Weight of 0 is the same as 1. This setting is
See “Selecting Objects” on page 144. ignored when printing or when Print
Preview is enabled.
In 3D views, the two clicks must be on

72
CAFull_RM.book Page 73 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Check Plans and Layouts to double-buf-

The line weight for CAD objects may be fer in floor plan view and layouts.
defined individually through each
object’s specification dialog or globally in the • Check Elevations and Vector Views to
Layer Display Options dialog. double buffer in cross/section elevation
and Vector views.
4 Specify how Toolbars present child • Check Auto Cache to save a bitmap of
tools when a parent button is clicked. the last screen draw. This bitmap is used
• Choose Parent-Child to display child to refresh the screen if no changes are
tools as buttons at the end of the toolbar made to the model. This option is not
where the parent button resides. available on computers running Windows
Vista.
• Choose Drop Down to display child
tools when the drop-down arrow to the 8 Color Off is - Specify whether views
right of the parent button is clicked. appear in Black and White or
Grayscale when color is toggled off. Does
5 Images and Pictures - Check Always not apply to Rendered or Raytrace views.
Display in Color to display images and
See “Color On/Off” on page 757.
pictures in color, even if color is turned off in
a particular view. If you uncheck the box, 9 Specify how Vector Views are
pictures and images appear in grayscale generated. See “Rendered and Vector
when color is turned off. Views” on page 742.
• Enhanced Line Drawing - This option
6 Show Icons - Check this box to display produces superior quality Vector Views,
tool icons next to items in the menus.
but slows down the process. Remove the
7 Double Buffer Drawing - Double check mark to disable the option.
buffering means that all drawing is
done to an offscreen bitmap and then copied • Lower Interactive Quality - Check this
to the screen. The result is that the screen to speed up the generation of Vector
does not flicker, but there may be a slight Views by drawing surface edges with no
delay before individual objects appear on fill. This may be helpful when navigating
screen. This option does not affect render or a Vector view of a larger model.
raytrace views. • Lower Quality Timeout - Enter a value
in seconds for Lower Interactive Quality
to be initiated.

73
CAFull_RM.book Page 74 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Colors Panel

1
2
3
4
5

1 Background Color - Click the color 4 Selection Fill Color - Click the color
bar to open the Color Chooser dialog. bar to specify a color for selected
See “Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727. objects. The color may change to ensure that
selected objects are always visible, so this
Select the background color for all views
may not always be the color you expect.
except some rendered views. See “Rendering
Techniques” on page 785.
If the move color and the handle fill
The background color for some rendered color are similar, it may be difficult to
views is set in the 3D Settings dialog. See distinguish between active and inactive
“Backdrop Tab” on page 748. points. The colors should be sufficiently dis-
similar to avoid confusion between active and
2 Move Color - Click the color bar to inactive points.
select the color of the lines that
represent object(s) as they are being moved.
5 Specify the Editing Transparency,
which is the degree to which the
3 Handle Fill Color - Click the color bar selection fill and edit handles are transparent.
to select the color for the edit handles
for selected objects. The default value is 20%.

Font Panel
The Font panel controls the conversion of
text in legacy plans when they are opened in

74
CAFull_RM.book Page 75 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chief Architect as well as the text used in

materials lists.

1
2
3

1 Choose Legacy Text Conversion, Legacy Text and Dimension Conversion

Legacy Dimension Conversion, or
Materials to define the font for that use. settings only affect plans from previous
versions when they are opened in Chief
Legacy Text Conversion sets the default Architect. Set these values to the default font
font for text created in previous versions of that you used in previous versions before
Chief Architect. See “Character Size” on opening legacy files.
page 840.
Legacy Dimension Conversion sets the 2 Click the arrow to select a font for the
specified use. See “Fonts and
fonts for dimensions created in previous Alphabets” on page 840.
versions of Chief Architect. See
“Dimensions” on page 808. 3 Select one or more font styles to apply
to the specified use.
Materials sets the default font for the
Materials List and Master List created in 4 Sample text displays the selected font
previous versions of Chief Architect. See and font style.
“Materials Lists” on page 1048. Text size is set individually in the Text
Specification dialog or globally in the Text

75
CAFull_RM.book Page 76 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Defaults dialog. See “Text, Callouts &

Markers” on page 838.

Library Browser Panel

The Library Browser panel controls the
appearance of the Library Browser window.
See “The Library Browser” on page 683.

1
2
3

1 View options control the display of the 2 Preview Pane - Specify how selected
main sections of the Library Browser. library items look in the Preview Pane.
• Hide Selection Pane - Check to hide the • Render Display - Library items previews
pane that displays objects in a selected display textures and appear as they do in
library or library folder. rendered views. See “Rendered and Vec-
• Hide Preview Pane - Check to hide the tor Views” on page 742.
pane that shows a preview of a selected • Vector Display - Library item previews
object. are line-based and display patterns as
• Show Status Bar - Check to display the they do in Vector Views.
Library Browser Status Bar.

76
CAFull_RM.book Page 77 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3 Selection Pane View items control the • Vertical - Displayed sections of the
display style of objects in the Selection Library Browser are divided vertically.
Pane. • Horizontal - Displayed sections are
• Tiled to Fit Window - Select to display divided horizontally.
all objects in a library or library folder. If • Stacked - Displayed sections are divided
there are many objects, they appear very both horizontally and vertically.
small.
• Scrollable List - Select to display all 5 Disable Docking - Check to prevent
the Library Browser from docking to
library objects at the highlighted level on
the sides of the Chief Architect window. See
a scrollable list.
“Docking the Library and Project Browser”
• Show Names in Selection Pane - Check on page 685.
to display the names of the objects in the
Selection Pane. Restore Position/Size Defaults - Click to
restore the original size and position of the
4 Preview Pane - Selection Pane Library and Project Browser: docked on the
Layout - Select a radio button to right side of the Chief Architect window.
change the appearance of the Library
Browser.

Text & Page Setup Panel

The Text & Page Setup panel controls some
text objects behaviors as well as the Page Legacy Plan and Layout Page Setup
Setup information for legacy plan and layout settings only affect files from previous
files. versions when they are opened in Version
X2. You should set these values to the default
font that you used in previous versions of
Chief Architect before opening legacy files.
See “Whats New in Chief Architect” on page
1064.

77
CAFull_RM.book Page 78 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

1 Uncheck Text Specification Enter layout file created in an earlier version of

Key to close the Text and Rich Text Chief Architect. See “Page Setup Dialog” on
Specification dialogs when the Enter key is page 1004
pressed. When checked, a new line of text is
created when Enter is pressed. See “Text, 4 Default Designer Information - Click
the Define button to enter designer
Callouts & Markers” on page 838.
information that applies to all plans drawn in
2 Click the Legacy Plan Page Setup Chief Architect. This default may be
button to open the Page Setup dialog. overridden for individual plans. See
These settings apply whenever you open a “Designer Information” on page 925.
plan, or elevation, or CAD detail created in
an earlier version of Chief Architect. See 5 Leader Lines - Specify the Number of
“Page Setup Dialog” on page 1004. Segments that text Leader Lines
have. Changes to this setting only affects
3 Click the Legacy Layout Page Setup subsequently drawn Leader Lines: existing
button to open the Page Setup dialog. lines are not affected.
These settings applied whenever you open a

78
CAFull_RM.book Page 79 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Panel
The General panel contains settings that affect
file management and program updates.

1 6

2 7

3 8

5 9

1 To use Auto Save, select the Enable 2 File Locking - Choose whether or not
check box and enter a value greater to lock .plan and .layout files when
than zero to specify the frequency in minutes they are open. File Locking prevents another
that auto save files are created. Auto save program or copy of Chief Architect from
files are stored in the archive folder. opening and modifying the same file at the
same time.
Note: Even with auto save active, you should • Select Use File Locking to lock files.
frequently save your work to the hard drive by
• Select Disable File Locking to disable
selecting File> Save.
the feature. You should not disable the
feature unless you have conflicts with file
In the event that your computer shuts down
locking.
unexpectedly, you can recover your most
recent work by opening the auto save file
3 Recent File List - Specify the
created by the program. See “Auto Save maximum number of files to list at the
Files” on page 49. bottom of the File menu and in the Startup
Options dialog. Additional files are included

79
CAFull_RM.book Page 80 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

if you increase the value. You can open any

6 Check the box to Enable Thumbnail
of the files in this list by selecting them, Images. This only applies to
making the list a quick way to access your automatically created thumbnails. Even if
most recent work. this option is disabled, you can still create a
thumbnail manually.
4 Undo - Click in the Enable check box
to enable Undos and Redos. Select a radio button for Small or Large
thumbnails. Large thumbnails provide a
Maximum Undos - Specify how many
higher quality image.
levels of Undo and Redo you want available,
from 1 to 100. Undo files are saved in the
7 Auto Archive Files - Select an archive
Undo Directory. option. Every time a model is saved by
Record undo state only if idle longer than - clicking the Save button, selecting File>
Use this setting to control how often undo Save from the menu, or pressing Ctrl + S on
states are recorded. If set to 0 milliseconds, the keyboard the current archive file is
an undo state is recorded every time a change overwritten. See “Archive Files” on page 48.
is made to a plan. Select Hourly to save and append archive
If set to a number larger than 0, an undo state files based on an hourly format.
is recorded if the specified amount of time Select Daily to save and append archive files
has elapsed since the last change was made. based on a daily format.
Depending on the time specified and the
speed work is being done, multiple changes Select Previous Save to archive only the
might be reversed with one undo. most recently saved file, unappended.
This setting can have a significant effect on 8 Auto Archive Warning - Enter the
the performance of the undo feature when number of files that must be in the
working with large plans. Archive directory for the Manage Archives
warning to display. Enter 0 to disable the
5 Check For Program Updates- Check warning. See “Manage Archives” on page
Enable and specify a frequency in days 49.
to check for program updates. By default
Chief Architect will check for program 9 Startup Options- Check Show
updates once a day, whenever the program is Options at Startup to open the Startup
launched. Options dialog when Chief Architect is
launched. See “Startup Options” on page 27.

Folders Panel
Chief Architect stores many support files in You do not need to change default locations
various folders on your computer. The under normal circumstances, but sometimes
default locations of these directories are it may be preferable to locate certain files in
listed and can be redefined on the Folders another location. To specify a new default
panel if necessary.

80
CAFull_RM.book Page 81 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

folder for a particular purpose, click the

Browse button to the right of that item. Changing the settings on the Folders
panel can result in unexpected program
functionality.

My Data Folder If you move this folder on your computer

without changing its default location,
Important user-specific information is saved however, the program will automatically
in a folder on your computer called Chief replace it using default information from the
Architect Data. Chief Architect installation folder. When
This folder contains custom libraries, this occurs, customized user settings will not
toolbars, template files, archive files, and be used and custom user libraries will not be
other important data and is located in My available.
Documents by default. See “Chief Architect
Data” on page 44. Temporary File Folders
While you cannot change the name of this By default, temporary files and undo files are
directory, you can change its default location stored in the same folder: by default this is
on the Folders panel. the Windows Temporary Directory. If you

81
CAFull_RM.book Page 82 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

wish to use a different folder, you must Chief Architect will not let you save your
define a directory on a hard drive with work to or open files saved in the Temporary
sufficient space to hold these files. or Undo folder.
You can specify any directory as your Chief
Architect temporary folder, but you should Shared Folders
neither relocate the Windows Temporary You can share Libraries, Textures, Images,
Directory nor use it for anything other than Backdrops and Patterns with other users by
temporary files. copying these items into the appropriate
Shared Folder in Windows Explorer. Click
the Browse button to select a location on
your computer that other users can access.

New Plans Panel

1 New Plans - Select the Imperial Units different set of templates for imperial plans
or Metric Units radio button to and metric plans.
determine the units used in your new plans.
When Chief Architect is first opened on a
Once you create a new plan, the units of that
computer, it refers to the Windows system
plan cannot be changed. You can specify a

82
CAFull_RM.book Page 83 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

settings to determine whether to use Imperial Click the Browse button to select the new
or metric units. template.
If a template file is not specified or cannot be Layout Template - Displays the template
found, the program starts new plans in the file the program uses when you start a new
selected units but uses a set of basic system layout file. Select a new default layout
defined defaults for new plans. You should template by typing in a new file pathname or
always specify a template plan and layout, as click the Browse button to select a new file.
the system defined defaults are unlikely to
For information about creating templates,
meet your drawing needs.
see “Template Files” on page 51.

Be sure that you use an imperial plan 2 Open/Save As Directory - Control

how the program behaves when a new
for your imperial template file and a
metric plan for your metric template file. plan is opened or an existing plan is saved.
When a new plan is created, the plan is cre- Use Last Directory refers the program to the
ated in the units of the template file regard-
directory last used to save or open a plan file.
less of the units setting.
Use This Directory refers the program to a
particular location specified by you.
Plan Template - Displays the template file
the program uses when you start a new plan.

83
CAFull_RM.book Page 84 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Layers Panel

1 Layers were managed differently in the default names used in Chief Architect
earlier versions of Chief Architect. The Version X2.
options on the Layers panel determine how
If you would like your legacy plans to look
layers are treated when you open plans
like they did in previous versions of Chief
created in earlier versions.
Architect, uncheck Purge Unused Layers,
Check Purge Unused Layers to delete any check Keep All Layer Numbers, and
layers that do not have a name and contain no uncheck Reset Default Layer Names.
objects.
Note: When loading legacy plans, there may
Check Keep All Layer Numbers to keep all be a noticeable delay while converting these
layers that were on the System and User tabs layers.
in version 9 and use their layer numbers as
names.
2 If you check Modify Name In All
Check Reset Default Layer Names to reset Layer Sets and then change the name
the names of layers that were on the of a layer in one layer set, it will be changed
Architectural and System tabs in version 9 to in all layer sets. Clear the checkmark if you
want name changes to only affect a single
layer set.

84
CAFull_RM.book Page 85 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Unit Conversions Panel

In many places throughout Chief Architect, drawing is only scaled at the time you print
you can choose what units are used with it. This means that if you import a drawing
different objects. The program automatically that is already scaled, you must convert the
calculates conversions based on the data on units using this panel. You must add the units
this panel. here for them to be available in the Import
Drawing Wizard.
These conversions are also useful when you
import drawings. Chief Architect draws The default unit conversions are locked and
plans in real world measurements. When you cannot be changed, but custom conversions
draw an object, it appears small on screen, can be added to the list.
but the program sees it as actual size. The

1 List of unit conversions available. 3 Add, Edit, Delete, or Copy the unit
conversions. Certain unit conversions
2 Sample - This area shows how the are locked and cannot be edited or deleted.
selected unit converts to a sampling of
similar units. Use this to verify that any unit If you click Add, Edit or Copy, the Add Unit
conversion you add is correct. Conversion dialog displays.

85
CAFull_RM.book Page 86 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

1
2
3

1 Unit Name - Type the name of the unit. 4 Multiply by gives you a number to
Names must be unique. multiply by to convert to the unit you
select from the drop-down list. A
Names can include any characters, as well as
measurement type must be selected before
spaces. Bear in mind, though, that names of
the list is populated.
units for measuring length that have numbers
in them may be unusable if entered in some
To create a new unit conversion
dialogs in the program.
Create a unit conversion for furlongs, a unit
2 Default Unit - Check this box to of measurement equal to 660 feet that
display this unit in places that present
originated in England.
lists of available units. For example, if you
have inches as units and make inches a
1. Click Add on the Unit Conversions
default, inches appear on the list when you
page of the Preferences dialog to open
are given a choice of units, such as in the
the Add Unit Conversion dialog.
Import Drawing Wizard. In other places,
such as the Materials List, all units are listed. 2. Type Furlong into the unit name dialog.
3. Select Length in the measurement type.
3 Measurement Type specifies what the
unit measures. Select the appropriate 4. Type 660 in the Multiply by field.
radio button. 5. Select ft in the combo box.
6. Click OK to close the dialog.

86
CAFull_RM.book Page 87 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Time Tracker Panel

Check Automatically Start Timer on File Check Display Idle Timeout Dialog to warn
Open to begin logging time whenever a file when a plan is considered idle.
is opened. If this is not checked you must
You can enter or change the Default User
click the Start Time Logging button to Name.
begin logging.
For more information, see “Time Tracker” on
Check Stop timer if idle for __ minutes, page 922.
and enter the number of minutes to stop
logging time when a plan has been idle.

87
CAFull_RM.book Page 88 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Architectural Panel

1 Select the desired default behaviors for 554, “Displaying Doors” on page 295, or
selected Walls. “Displaying Windows” on page 325.
Check Show Same Wall Type Handles to
3 Check Stair Sections Move
display edit handles on selected walls that Independently to allow stair sections
draw new walls of the same type when connected by landings to move separately,
dragged. See “Same Wall Type Edit without moving the entire staircase.
Handles” on page 232.
4 Select the desired Skylight Ceiling
Check Select Room Before Wall in 3D to Hole Default behavior.
select the room defined by a wall when you
If you select Skylights Automatically
click on the wall in 3D views. See “Selecting
Generate Ceiling Holes, the program
Walls” on page 232.
automatically generates a ceiling hole for a
2 Check Reverse Opening Indicators to new skylight.
change the direction that opening
Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole
indicators point for doors, windows, and
Polylines to create your own ceiling holes.
cabinets. See “Displaying Cabinets” on page

88
CAFull_RM.book Page 89 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

CAD Panel
The CAD panel contains settings that define
how CAD blocks and other objects behave.

1 CAD Blocks - These settings determine dialog when a new CAD block is created.
the default fill style behavior for CAD See “General Tab” on page 915.
blocks. See “CAD Blocks” on page 912.
• Check Always use ’By Object’ for CAD
block fill style to retain the fill patterns
of the component objects of CAD blocks.
When checked, all settings that would
otherwise affect the fill style of a CAD
block in its specification dialog are
ignored. See “CAD Block Specification
Dialog” on page 915. Checked Unchecked

• Check Use ’By Object’ when creating

new CAD blocks to have By Object
2 Options - These settings control the
editability of polylines, polyline-like
checked in the CAD Block Specification objects such as walls connected to form a
room, and splines.

89
CAFull_RM.book Page 90 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

• Check Edit Object Parts to edit the indi- • Check Advanced Splines to enable the
vidual components of a polyline or advanced spline setting as the default
polyline-like object. This functionality editing behavior for all subsequently
can also be accessed by clicking the Edit drawn splines. You can also enable this
Object Parts button. See “Edit function for an individual spline by click-
Object Parts” on page 132. ing the Advanced Splines edit but-
ton. See “Advanced Splines” on page
170.

Line Properties Panel

The Line Properties panel controls the
appearance of CAD lines.

Endcap Length (Pixels) - The beginning can be placed to eliminate this problem.
and end of CAD lines that are not solid are Specify the number of pixels for endcap
sometimes difficult to distinguish. Endcaps length.

90
CAFull_RM.book Page 91 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Sun Angle Panel

Define a default Latitude, Longitude and See “Sun Angles” on page 776.
Time Zone used when creating Sun Angles.

91
CAFull_RM.book Page 92 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Edit Panel
The settings on the Edit panel of the
Preferences dialog control the appearance
of the cursor and selection behavior of edit
handles.

1 Use a cursor with Cross Hairs in Cross hair size is specified as a percentage of
different view types and control its window width. Specify Size (% of Window
appearance. Width) as 100% to extend the cross hairs
across the entire screen.
Check Enable in Plan and Cross Section to
use a cross hair cursor in floor plan, cross Set the Aperture Size, measured in pixels.
section, and elevation views. This option is The aperture is the space where the cross
checked by default. hairs meet. A value of 0 makes the cross
hairs meet at a point. Larger numbers leave a
Check Enable in Perspective Views to use a
gap in the center.
cross hair cursor in perspective camera views
and overviews.
2 Specify the desired Selection settings,
which affect how objects are selected
Click the color bar to open the Color
and their appearance.
Chooser dialog and specify the color of the
cross hairs.

92
CAFull_RM.book Page 93 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Enter an Edit Handle Size in pixels. The edit

3 Specify program behavior when using
handles are twice this number of pixels plus Marquee Select. See “Marquee Select”
one. For example, the default value is 3, on page 146.
which results in a handle that is 7 x 7 pixels
(3 x 2=6, and 6 + 1=7). A value of 1 results • Select Select Intersected Objects to
in a handle that is 3 x 3 pixels. select any objects intersected by or
located within the marquee.
Enter a value, in pixels, for Edit Handle
Tolerance to specify how close to an edit • Select Select Contained Objects to
handle you must click in order to select it. select only objects located entirely within
The default value is 0. the marquee. This option provides the
best results in most situations.
Check (S)tart and (E)nd Indicators to
display an S and an E at the start and end • Select Select Objects by Center to
points of the selected edge of a CAD-based select only objects whose center points
object. This can make it easier to edit the are located within the marquee.
selected edge in the object’s specification
dialog. See “Selected Edge” on page 145. You can add the Selection Modes tools
to your toolbars. See “To add a button
to a toolbar” on page 109.

Behaviors Panel
The settings on the Behaviors panel of the
Preferences dialog define basic editing
behaviors of CAD and architectural objects.

1 2

1 Rotate/Resize About defines the point or resizes about. See “Rotate/Resize About”
an object or a group of objects rotates on page 132.

93
CAFull_RM.book Page 94 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

• Select Object Center to rotate or resize Rotate Jump defines the angle an object or
the selection about its center point. group of objects jumps to when it is rotated.
Object Center is the default setting. It overrides the angle snaps set in Plan
• Select Current Point to rotate the object Defaults. If you set this to zero, the angle
about the current CAD point instead. snaps set under Plan Defaults are used.

Rotate about Rotate about

Object Center Current Point

To resize a CAD object about a current point, Box rotating about Current
select the Resize Edit Type. Point with Jump set to 45°

This function can also be accessed by 2 Select one of the four Edit Type
selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> options. For detailed information about
the different edit types and how they affect
Resize . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
different objects, see “Edit Behaviors” on
137.
page 137.
If Concentric is selected, specify the desired
Jump increment.

3 The Primary Movement Methods

control the directions that you can
move objects using their edit handles.
Concentric Resize About • Select Orthogonal to move an object
Resize Current Point perpendicular to any of its edges.
• Select Polar to move an object at
Allowed Angles.

94
CAFull_RM.book Page 95 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Snap Properties Panel

The settings on the Snap Properties panel of
the Preferences dialog control the behavior
of Object Snaps as well as the appearance of
snap indicators. See “Object Snaps” on page
133.

1 3

1 Check any combination of object

snapping options. You can also turn
these options on an off with the toggle
buttons on the toolbar. Endpoint and midpoint snaps
Endpoint - Enables snapping to the
Center - Enables snapping to the
ends of lines, arcs, splines and other
center of cabinets, fixtures, furniture,
objects.
as well as circles and arcs.
Midpoint - Enables snapping to the
midpoint of an object such as a line or
Note: Center snapping only works for arcs
arc. For objects such as boxes, you can snap and circles if Show Arc Centers and Ends is
to the midpoint of any side of the box. turned on. See.“Aligning Arc Centers” on
page 183.

95
CAFull_RM.book Page 96 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Quadrant - Enables snapping to the

2 Check any combination of extension
left, right, top, or bottom of an object. anchor options. You can also use the
Only used for arcs and circles. toggle buttons on the toolbar.
Tangent Extensions - Enables
snapping to a point tangent to the
point where the extension anchor sits.

Quadrant snaps

On Object - Enables snapping to any

point on the selected object, including
CAD objects and cabinets.
Tangent extension
Perpendicular Extensions - Enables
snapping to a point perpendicular to
the point where the extension anchor sits.

On object snaps

Points/Markers - Allows you to snap

to any temporary points you may have
placed, as well as callouts and markers.

Points/Markers snaps

Intersection - Enables snapping to the Perpendicular extension

intersection of two objects, such as the
Orthogonal Extensions - Enables
intersection of a line with another line.
snapping to a point on a 90-degree
Intersection snapping also snaps extension
axis from the extension anchor.
lines to objects, and allows you to snap two
extension lines to each other.

Orthogonal extension

Intersection snaps

96
CAFull_RM.book Page 97 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3 Options - Specify the number of Specify the Maximum Bump Distance

extension line anchors that can display (pixels), which is the distance that a selected
at one time by changing the Objects in object must be dragged to override bumping
History setting. and move past an obstructing object.
The Snap Distance controls how far your the Check the box beside Angle Snaps to enable
cursor can be from a snap point for the snap snapping to allowed angles. See “Angle
to occur. It is measured in screen pixels. This Snaps” on page 135.
setting also controls the minimum length of
Check Snap Cabinets After Paste to make
camera and cross section/elevation lines of
the cabinets snap together after you paste
sight. When working with very small objects,
them.
you may find it helful to reduce this value;
when working with very large objects, you
4 Control the appearance of Snap
may find it helpful to increase it. The default Indicators.
value is 12. See “Creating Camera Views” on
Specify an Indicator Size in pixels.
page 750.
Click the color bar to select an Indicator
Check the box beside Bumping/Pushing to
Color and an Extension Color from the
enable bumping and pushing. See User’s
Color Chooser dialog. See “Color Chooser
Guide, “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
Dialog” on page 727.

97
CAFull_RM.book Page 98 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Material List Panel

The Material List panel controls which prefixes are listed here. They are defined by
categories are included in Materials Lists. the program and cannot be changed.
The names of all categories and their ID

When a material is entered in the Materials new materials list generated. Before you
List, the program decides what category it hide a category, make sure you know what
goes in and assigns it an ID, which is the items are listed within it.
prefix followed by a number. EX1 would be
the first exterior trim piece entered in the
It is usually better to remove categories
Materials List for a particular plan. from individual plan lists in the Layer
Include These Categories - Check the Display Options dialog, rather than globally.
See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
categories you want to to include in every
121.

98
CAFull_RM.book Page 99 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Report Style Panel

The Report Style panel specifies the Tools> Display Options from within
appearance of the Materials List. This that Materials List.
information can also be specified
individually per Materials List by choosing

1 Include These Columns - Check the narrow or broaden your query when
columns that should be included in the searching the Master List.
Materials List.
Grid - Choose whether or not grid
3
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons lines display in the materials list. If you
to change the order that columns appear. To want lines, choose to have horizontal,
change the order, select one or more items in vertical, or both. If the lines are turned off,
the list and click the button. The selected they do not show on-screen or in print. You
columns move up or down by one in the list. can select Solid Lines for the grids instead of
dotted lines.
For a more detailed description of Materials
Lists, see “Materials Lists” on page 1048.
4 Background Colors can be set for
even and odd numbered lines.
2 When Querying Suppliers &
Manufacturers - Select an option to

99
CAFull_RM.book Page 100 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Master List Panel

The Master List panel specifies how the information for materials. You can maintain
Master List(s) for materials appears. Master Multiple Master Lists, but only one may be
Lists contain price and manufacturer used at any given time.

3
4

1 Include These Columns - Check each subsequently opened plans when a materials
column to include it in the Master list is generated from any model.
materials list.
3 Press Browse to select a different
Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons Master List. Navigate the directory
to change the order of columns. To change structure until you find the new Master List
the order, select one or more items in the list to be used, select it, and click OK.
and click the button. The selected columns
move up or down by one in the list. See 4 Press New to create a new Master List.
Name and save it in the location of your
“Materials Lists” on page 1048.
choice. When you create a new Master List,
2 Master List File - The name and it is blank until you build a materials list and
pathname of the Master List currently enter prices, supplier or manufacturer
referenced is shown. It is referenced for all information. The Master List is saved
automatically when you close.

100
CAFull_RM.book Page 101 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Categories Panel
The Categories panel allows you to Subcategories can also be included in
customize the organization of the Materials schedules. See “Adding Columns to
List by creating subcategories under the pre- Schedules” on page 1039.
defined Materials List categories. See
“Organizing Materials Lists” on page 1050.

1 2

To create or modify a subcategory The Sub Cat name can be any sequence of
characters, up to 12 characters in length.
1 Select a Category from the list.
5 Doors, Windows, Cabinets, Fixtures,
2 Existing subcategories display here. Furniture, and Electrical objects can
3 To Add, Edit or Delete a subcategory, generate schedules. Subcategories for these
select it and click the appropriate objects can appear as column headings. Type
button. Clicking Add or Edit opens the Sub- a Column Heading for Schedules.
Category dialog.
In the example above, two subcategories are
4 In the Sub Category dialog, type a added to the Windows category: GLZ
name of the subcategory to appear in (Glazing) and EXT (Exterior Trim).
the SubCat column of the Materials List.

101
CAFull_RM.book Page 102 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

Render Panel
The Render panel settings control how 3D Previews and Final Views. See “Preview vs
views are generated, particularly Render Final View” on page 774.

2
3

1 The General Options settings affect that sometimes result along surface
both Render Previews and Final Views. edges, producing cleaner lines. Not avail-
• Optimizations On saves rendering data able if your video card does not support
to your video card, which speeds up ren- this feature. See “OpenGL and Hard-
dering time. This option may cause prob- ware” on page 741.
lems if the rendering data for your model • Zoom Using Field of View directs the
exceeds the video card’s memory. program to zoom in 3D views by adjust-
ing the camera’s Field of View, which can
If your computer stops responding when result in perspective distortion. When
rendering, try unchecking Optimizations unchecked, zooming in 3D views is done
On. This slows down rendering time con- by cropping or expanding the view’s
siderably, though, so if the problem is not extents. See “Zooming” on page 763.
solved, leave this check box selected. • Soft Shadows displays shadows with soft
• Hardware Edge Smoothing uses the edges instead of hard edges. This feature
video card to remove the jagged edges

102
CAFull_RM.book Page 103 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

is only used when Show Shadows and ows. They are typically used only for
Smooth Edges are also used. Final Views. See “Lighting” on page 775.
• Surface Backdrop generates the back- • Use Transparency allows materials such
drop image using hardware acceleration. as window glass to display effects. For
For some graphics cards, this option some video cards, rendering may be
improves rendering speed considerably. slowed when this feature is selected.
• OpenGL Vector View directs the pro- • Use Textures controls whether or not
gram to generate Vector views using surfaces are rendered with textures. This
OpenGL hardware acceleration. only affects surfaces with materials that
have assigned textures. When textures are
turned off, surfaces are rendered using
Note: If OpenGL Vector View is not selected,
you can create Vector Views but cannot apply the color assigned to the material, but not
any of the other Rendering Techniques to the texture. See “Mapping Patterns and
them. See “Rendering Techniques” on page Textures” on page 714.
785.
Textures can also be turned on or off in
The Preview Options settings affect most rendered view by selecting 3D>
2
only Render Previews. Camera View Options> Toggle Tex-
• Hardware Texture Filtering uses your tures .
video card to filter textures and improve
• Use Triangles divides large surfaces,
their appearance: noticeably, on surfaces
such as walls, floors, and ceilings, into
angled away from the camera. In some
small triangles. This feature enhances
rare instances, this may slow rendering
lighting effects when point or spot light
time somewhat. Not supported by some
sources are used. Triangles are not used
video cards.
by the Enhanced Lighting, Technical
• Smooth Faces generates smooth curved Illustration or Vector View techniques.
surfaces. It uses new surface normals to
• Max Triangle Size controls the size of
alter the lighting effects on surfaces,
the surface triangles modeled by the pro-
making them appear curved, even though
gram. Lighting looks better with smaller
it does not alter the shape of the surfaces.
triangles, but rendering takes longer. See
• Show Images controls the display of “Rendering Tips” on page 773.
images, such as plants, cars and people,
in rendered views. See “Displaying The initial settings for Previews and Final
Images” on page 935. Views are 60” (1500 mm) and 24” (600
• Show Shadows controls whether or not mm), respectively. The minimum value is
shadows display. Shadows are extremely 6" (150 mm).
complex to calculate and slow down ren- • Software Edge Smoothing removes the
dering speed significantly, particularly jagged edges that sometimes result along
when multiple lights are set to cast shad- surface edges, producing cleaner lines.
Use the slide bar or text field to specify

103
CAFull_RM.book Page 104 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Preferences Dialog

how much jagged edge lines should be

3 The Final View Options settings are
smoothed. exactly the same as the Preview
Options, but affect Final Views instead of
Inital Software Edge Smoothing settings Render Previews. See “Final Views” on page
for Previews and Final Views are 0% and 758.
80%, respectively.

Video Card Status Panel

The Video Card Status panel displays this says “Installed Client Driver.” If it does
information about your video card, including not, it says “No Hardware Acceleration.”
the vendor and the version of OpenGL it There is a significant difference in speed
uses. See “OpenGL and Hardware” on page between rendering with acceleration and
741. without.
This information may be important if you are The Max Lights value indicates how many
having problems generating 3D views. lights you can have turned on at any given
time when generating a 3D view. This value
Notice the information following the
should be 8 or higher, depending on your
Acceleration label. If your video card
video card. See “Lighting” on page 775.
supports hardware acceleration for OpenGL,

104
CAFull_RM.book Page 105 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Reset Options Panel

If message boxes have been suppressed, you with the program. For the reset to take effect,
can make them display again by clicking you will need to restart the program.
Reset Message Boxes.
Click the Reset Preferences button to restore Resetting all preferences to default can
all preferences to those that originally came be a drastic step if you have made
many changes to your defaults and should be
done with caution.

105
CAFull_RM.book Page 106 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 4:

Toolbars &
Hotkeys

Two of the most efficient ways to access Chapter Contents

Chief Architect’s tools are the toolbars and • Toolbar Arrangement
keyboard shortcuts, also referred to as • Customizing Toolbars
hotkeys. • Toolbar Configurations
Toolbars are organized into configurations, • Restoring Toolbars
which are basically collections of multiple • Hotkeys
toolbars arranged for use during specific
drawing tasks. Within a given toolbar
configuration, buttons are arranged so that
similar tools are located near one another.
Both toolbars and hotkeys can be customized
to suit your workflow.
A complete list of Chief Architect’s tools can
be found in “Menus & Toolbar Buttons” on
page 1090.

106
CAFull_RM.book Page 107 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Toolbar Arrangement
Chief Architect installs a set of Toolbar display its “child” buttons to the right. See
Configurations, which determines what tools “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
are initially included in the toolbars, as well
as where these toolbars are located.

Toolbar Preferences You can turn off the display of toolbars

entirely by selecting Tools> Toolbars &
Toolbars can be viewed in Drop - Down or Hotkeys> Hide Toolbars.
Parent - Child arrangement. Drop - Down
toolbar buttons have an arrow to the right of Moving Toolbars
the button that accesses additional, related
tools. You can, if you wish, move any toolbar to a
different location. Toolbars can be docked to
any side of the program window, or they can
be undocked and left floating. Undocked
toolbars can also be moved outside of the
program window.
Toolbars are saved between program
sessions. To restore the original toolbar
locations, as well as their display, click the
Alternatively, you can use Chief Architect’s Reset Toolbars button in the Toolbar
Parent - Child toolbar arrangement. In this Customization dialog. See “Toolbar Tab” on
arrangement, you select a “parent” button to page 110.

Customizing Toolbars
You can create custom toolbars as well as • Add and remove buttons from toolbars.
entire custom toolbar configurations in the • Specify which of the available toolbars
Toolbar Customization dialog. In this display in different view types.
dialog, you can:
• Select the active toolbar configuration.

Toolbar Customization Dialog

Select Tools> Toolbars & Hotkeys>
Customize Toolbars to open this dialog.

107
CAFull_RM.book Page 108 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Customizing Toolbars

Tools Tab
The Tools tab allows you to add or remove
buttons from your toolbars.

1 4
5

Adding Toolbar Buttons

You can use the Empty Space button in
1 Select the type of View you would like your toolbars as a spacer.
to add toolbar buttons in. As you select
various views, the tools available change.
5 Click on a button in the “Main Toolbar
Buttons” area to display its child
2 A description of the selected button buttons in this Child Buttons area. If no
displays here.
child buttons display, the button you selected
3 Check Sort Alphabetically to sort the is not a parent tool. See “Parent and Child
tools in alphabetical order rather than Tools” on page 31.
the order they appear on the toolbars.
In the image above, the Cabinet Tools
4 A list of the Main Toolbar Buttons parent button is selected under “Main
available for the selected View displays
Toolbar Buttons” and its child tools display
here. Click on a button to display any child
under “Child Buttons”.
buttons to the right and a description at the
lower left of the dialog. See “Parent and Child tools are permanently associated with
Child Tools” on page 31. the parent tool. If, for example, you add the
Cabinet Tools parent button to a toolbar,

108
CAFull_RM.book Page 109 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

its child tools will always display whenever 2. Select the first button that you want on
it is selected. An individual child tool can, the toolbar from the Main Toolbar But-
however, be placed on a toolbar by itself. tons or Child Buttons areas.
3. Click and drag the button out of the dia-
To add a button to a toolbar log box and drop it:.
1. Select the View type that you want to • In an empty section of the program
add a toobar button in. window border to create a new toolbar
2. Select the desired button or its parent docked at that location.
from the Main Toolbar Buttons list. • In the drawing area to create a new,
undocked toolbar.
3. If the desired button is a child button,
select it from the Child Buttons list. 4. Additional buttons can be added to this
new toolbar.
4. Click and drag the button you wish to
add to a toolbar out of the dialog box. An undocked toolbar can be docked, or vice
• Drop it onto an existing toolbar to add versa, at any time.
the button to that toolbar.
• Drop it away from an existing toolbar Removing Tools from Toolbars
to create a new toolbar. The selected To remove a button from a toolbar, select
button is first in the new toolbar. The Tools> Toolbars & Hotkeys> Customize
new toolbar is named with the current Toolbars to open the Toolbar
view followed by a number. Customization dialog. With this dialog
open, click and drag the button off its toolbar.
To create a new toolbar
1. Select the View type to which you want You can only remove a button from a
to add a new toobar. toolbar when the Toolbar Customization
dialog is open.
• If you select All Views, your new tool-
bar will display in all views.
Buttons cannot be added to or removed from
• You can add any buttons you like to an
the Edit toolbar. See “Menus & Toolbar
All Views toolbar; however, not all
Buttons” on page 1090.
buttons will necessarily be available
for use in all views.

109
CAFull_RM.book Page 110 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Customizing Toolbars

Toolbar Tab
The Toolbar tab allows you to manage your
individual toolbars.

2
1 3
4
5

1 Select a type of View to display the Reset Toolbars is only available if a

toolbars available for use in it. .toolbar.bak file with the same name as the
toolbar configuration file exists. See
2 The toolbars available for the selected “Restoring Toolbars” on page 113.
View display here. Select a toolbar by
clicking on its name.
Clicking on the Reset Toolbars button
• If the selected toolbar is not active, the deletes any toolbar customization you
Activate button is available. Click Acti- have done.
vate to make the selected toolbar active.
• Click Rename to rename the selected 4 Display Tool Tips - Check this to show
toolbar. Tool Tips when you move the cursor
over buttons.
• Click Delete to remove the selected tool-
bar from the list. A deleted toolbar is no 5 Lock Toolbars - Check the box to lock
longer available. toolbars in their current position on
screen.
3 Click Reset Toolbars to restore all the
toolbars to their original configuration.

110
CAFull_RM.book Page 111 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Configurations Tab
The Configurations tab allows you to add, configurations. See “Toolbar
remove and switch between toolbar Configurations” on page 112.

1 2
3
4
5

1 A list of toolbar configurations displays 5 Switch To - Click to switch to the

here. Select a configuration before selected toolbar configuration. You can
clicking the Remove, Copy, or Switch To also right-click on any toolbar and select a
buttons. configuration from the menu, or click a
Toolbar Configuration button.
2 Add - Click to browse for a toolbar
configuration file and add it to the list.
6 The location of the Current Toolbars
Folder displays here. It can be
3 Remove - Click to remove the selected specified in the Preferences dialog. See
toolbar configuration. This removes the
“Folders Panel” on page 80.
configuration from the list but does not
delete the configuration file permanently.
Note: If you customize your toolbars, it is a
Copy - Click to create a copy of the good idea to back up your toolbar configura-
4 tion files (*.toolbar). See “Chief Architect
selected toolbar configuration.
Data” on page 44.

111
CAFull_RM.book Page 112 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Toolbar Configurations

Toolbar Configurations
The Chief Architect program window has • CAD Configuration shows the tools
limited space for toolbar buttons. How many needed for CAD drawings.
can be shown depends on your monitor’s size
and screen resolution settings. • The Extended Configuration can be
accessed by right-clicking on a toolbar or
The toolbar configurations that come with using the Toolbar Customization dialog.
Chief Architect organize tools based on the It provides access to a variety of tools for
type of work being done as well as on various uses in plan files.
monitor screen resolution.
• The 800 x 600 Configuration is only
• The Default Configuration displays available through the Toolbar
architectural tools used for house design, Customization dialog. It is designed for
including walls, windows, doors, stairs, monitors with 800x600 resolution.
cabinets, etc.
To switch toolbar configurations
• The Terrain Configuration displays
buttons associated with the terrain and There are several ways to switch from one
road tools, including the plant and sprin- toolbar configuration to another.
kler tools. See “Terrain Configuration • Click a Toolbar Configuration button.
Button” on page 581. • Choose a configuration in the Toolbar
• The Kitchen and Bath Design Configu- Customization dialog. See “Configura-
tions Tab” on page 111.
ration displays buttons associated
with kitchen and bath design. See “Cabi- • Right-click on a toolbar and select a con-
nets” on page 546. figuration from the contextual menu.

• The MEP Configuration displays To create a custom configuration

buttons associated with mechanical, elec-
trical, and plumbing. See “Cabinets” on You can create a custom configuration that
page 546. shows only the buttons you need.
1. Access the Configurations tab of the
• The Space Planning Configuration Toolbar Customization dialog.
displays buttons associated with the
House Wizard. See “House Wizard” on 2. Select a configuration similar to the one
page 926. you want to create and click Copy.
3. Give the new configuration a name. It
• The Plan Detailing Configuration is should be saved to the Chief Architect
designed for dealing with materials lists, Toolbars folder. See “Chief Architect
time tracking, and client and designer Data” on page 44.
information.

112
CAFull_RM.book Page 113 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4. Click Save. The program switches to the • The color (R:223, G:223, B:223) maps to
new configuration and it appears high- the system 3D light color.
lighted in the list.
5. Drag tools you want to add out of the To import a custom configuration
Toolbar Customization dialog and onto You can import an existing toolbar
the toolbars. configuration.
6. Drag any tools you do not want off the 1. Access the Configurations tab of the
toolbars. Toolbar Customization dialog.
7. When you are satisfied with the appear- 2. Click Add.
ance of your new toolbar, click Close.
3. Browse to the location of the toolbar you
By default, new toolbar configurations want to import.
display the Expanded Configuration 4. Click Open. If the .toolbar file is not in
button. the Chief Architect Toolbars folder, a
You can make your own button icon for your copy of the file will be created there.
custom toolbar configuration. Create a .bmp
file with the same name as the configuration Color Palettes
and save it in the Toolbars folder. To see an Color palettes are toolbars with library
example, look at the Default.bmp file in the materials which have been added to buttons
Chief Architect Toolbars folder, which
corresponds to the Default Toolbar using the Place Library Object tool.
configuration. They are available on the Toolbar tab of the
Toolbar Customization dialog and can be
• Toolbar button bitmaps must be 24 x 24 used in 3D views. You can customize these
pixels in size. toolbars and/or create your own toolbar
• The color (R:192, G:192, B:192) maps to palettes. See “Place Library Object Button”
the system 3D face color. on page 692.
• The color (R:128, G:128, B:128) maps to
the system 3D Shadow color.

Restoring Toolbars
Chief Architect installs two files that affect The program uses *.toolbar files to
the way toolbars display. These files are remember original toolbar settings. When
*.toolbar and *.toolbarbak. you click the Reset Toolbars button in the
Toolbar Customization dialog, the program
The program updates *.toolbarbak anytime
copies this file and saves it as *.toolbar. If
you select another toolbar configuration,
you make changes you prefer over the
close the Toolbar Customization dialog, or
original toolbar, create a copy of your
exit from the program.

113
CAFull_RM.book Page 114 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Hotkeys

*.toolbar file and save it as *.toolbarbak.

The next time you click Reset Toolbars, the
program returns to the default settings.

Hotkeys
Many Chief Architect tools have a keyboard To use a hotkey, simply press the appropriate
shortcut, or hotkey, associated with them. If key or combination of keys on your keyboard
such a hotkey exists, it will display to the instead of selecting the menu item or clicking
right of the tool’s name in the menu. the toolbar button. For example, press the
Ctrl and Z keys at the same time to perform
an Undo .
You can specify which hotkeys activate
Edit menu items with button icons which Chief Architect tools in the
to the left and hotkeys to the right Customize Hotkeys dialog. Select Tools>
Toolbars & Hotkeys> Customize
Hotkeys to open this dialog.

Customize Hotkeys Dialog

The Customize Hotkeys dialog lets you a variety of commands such as opening
program hotkeys to activate tools and invoke dialogs, including Defaults dialogs.

4
1
2

114
CAFull_RM.book Page 115 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 Show commands/hotkeys containing Previous Command, Next Command and

- Type part or all of the name of a tool a Previous Command hotkeys. The tools in
hotkey to see a list of tool names and hotkeys this list are organized according to the order
with that string of characters. in which you selected them during the
current program session.
2 Click on an item in the list of
Commands and Hotkeys to select it. Cancel Selection/Previous Command,
Next Command and Previous Command
3 Edit hotkey for this command - Click are hotkeys only: they do not have toolbar
in this field, then press they key
buttons associated with them and are not
combination that you would like to use.
found in the menu.
4 Tool Available In - A list of the view By default, Cancel Selection/Previous
types that the selected command can be
Command is assigned to the Esc key. This
used in displays here.
command can be used to:
5 Tool Description - A brief description • Cancel a current object selection.
of the selected command displays here.
• Cancel a current drawing or editing
action that is in progress.
Note: Nearly all commands can be assigned
custom hotkeys; however, a few cannot. • Activate the previously used tool or com-
Delete and Enter Coordinates are two nota- mand if no object is selected or action in
ble examples. progress.

Create Hotkey List When using the Esc key, be careful to

press it only once.
A list of the hotkeys available to the current
program user can be saved in .html or .xhtml
By default, Next Command is assigned to
format.
the Shift+Esc keys. This command can be
Select Tools> Toolbars & Hotkeys> Create used to deactivate the current command and
Hotkey List to open the Save Hotkey List instead activate the one that is next in the list
File dialog, a standard Save dialog, and of recently used tools.
create a hotkey list that can then be opened in
If you prefer, you can assign two different
a web browser window and printed, if you
hotkeys to the Cancel Selection and
wish.
Previous Command instead of one single
hotkey.
Next/Last Command
You can navigate a list of up to 100 recently
used tools using the Cancel Selection/

115
CAFull_RM.book Page 116 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 5:

Layers

Layers are used to organize and manage the layer set used by a particular type of view in
display of all objects in all views and in the the Layer Set Defaults dialog.
Materials List. A layer can be thought of as a
transparency sheet with objects placed on it Chapter Contents
for viewing. Nearly all views use multiple • Displaying Objects
layers, like a stack of transparencies put
• Layer Sets
together to show different types of objects.
• Layer Set Management
You can find out which layer an object is on • Active Layer Set Control
in its specification dialog or by selecting the • Layer Display Options Dialog
object and looking at the Status Bar. You can • Select Layer Dialog
customize how each layer displays in the • Layer Tab
Layer Display Options dialog. • Layer Painter and Eyedropper
• Layout Layer Sets
Multiple layers are organized into Layer
• Exporting/Importing Layer Sets
Sets, which are designed to help you perform
• Layer Set Defaults Dialog
different tasks efficiently or produce specific
views for your construction documents or for
presentation purposes. You can customize
the display settings for individual layer sets
and can also copy, add and delete layer sets.
Different types of 2D and 3D views use their
own layer sets. You can specify the initial

116
CAFull_RM.book Page 117 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Displaying Objects
The display of objects in different views is inclusion of objects in the Materials List on a
controlled by layer sets and layers in the layer-by-layer basis.
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer
Some default layers, such as Patterns, do not
Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
generate materials and are not included by
default. See “Materials Lists and Layers” on
In All Views page 1051.
All layers with a check in the Disp. column
display when the current layer set is active.
Objects that are not displayed cannot be seen
or selected. If you try to place or draw an
object on a layer that is hidden, the program
asks if you want to turn the layer on.
The overall content and organization of
materials lists can be controlled in the
Preferences dialog. See “Material List
Panel” on page 98.
To control the components that are included
in a Materials List for a particular object,
A layer’s Color, Style, and Size attributes select the object and click the Components
determine how an object on that layer
appears in floor plan view and in 3D views edit button. See “Components Dialog”
using the Vector View rendering technique. on page 1062.

Locking Layers
Objects on layers with a lock symbol in the
Lock column are visible but cannot be
selected. This prevents them from being
accidentally changed.
Many objects, including all CAD and text
objects, allow you to override the line style,
color, and line weight for an individiual
instance without changing its layer.

Materials Lists
Layers showing an “M” in the Mat column
Layers with objects that have been
are included in subsequently generated
extensively edited and do not require further
materials lists. This allows you to control the
editing are good candidates for locking.

117
CAFull_RM.book Page 118 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Layer Sets

Locking a layer does not prevent the program New objects cannot be drawn on a locked
from modifying the objects on that layer. layer. If you lock a layer and then attempt to
draw a new object on that layer, a warning
asks you to unlock the layer.
Although objects on locked layers can-
not be selected, most can nevertheless
be deleted using the Delete Objects dialog.
Objects are also deleted if the floor they are
placed on is deleted. See “Delete Objects
Dialog” on page 197 and “Deleting Floors” on
page 358.

Layer Sets
Layer Sets are used to control the layer
Each plan file can have an unlimited
settings for different views in a plan or layout
number of layer sets.
file. All views associated with a plan file -
including views sent to layout - make use of
While any view is active, select Tools>
layer sets stored in that .plan file.
Display Settings> Display Options to
A layer set consists of a complete list of the make changes to the layer set used for that
layers in the current plan or layout along with view type.
the display settings for each layer as set for a
particular type of view or purpose. These
Layout Layer Sets
display settings can be modified, and can be
different for each layer set. See “Layer Views sent to layout use layer sets saved with
Display Options Dialog” on page 121. the plan, rather than with the layout. See
“Displaying Layout Views” on page 1025.
Any changes made to a layer set in one view
affects all other views using the same layer
set. If this is not desired, you can create a Layer Sets & Templates
unique layer set for a particular view. See Layers and layer sets are plan-specific. A
“Layer Set Management” on page 119. custom layer set that you created in one plan
Layer sets are file specific, which means that file may not be available in another. To
changes made in one plan or layout file have include a custom layer set in all new plan
no effect on the settings in other files. If you files, add it to your template plan. See
find that you use the same settings often, you “Exporting/Importing Layer Sets” on page
should consider adding these layer sets to 127 and “Template Files” on page 51.
your template files. See “Template Files” on
page 51. Modify All Layer Sets
If you want changes made in one layer set to
apply to all other layer sets in the current

118
CAFull_RM.book Page 119 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

plan, check Modify All Layer Sets in the that view. Which layer set becomes active
Layer Display Options dialog before depends on the type of view created.
making changes. The layer name and display
The default layer sets for nine different view
attributes are applied to all other layer sets.
types, including the Reference Display, are
For example, if you check Modify All Layer specified in the Layer Set Defaults dialog.
Sets and then change the color and line style
Each of these layer sets can be edited as
for the Text layer of the Electrical Set, the
needed in the Layer Display Options dialog.
same changes are applied to the Text layer of
See “Layer Display Options Dialog” on page
the Framing Set of the same plan.
121.
Layer Set Defaults Normally, it is best to change the settings in
the existing default layer sets rather than
Whenever a particular type of view is select different default layer sets, but you can
created, such as floor plan view or a framing do so if needed. See “Layer Set Defaults
overview, a specific layer set is activated for Dialog” on page 129.

Layer Set Management

The Layer Set Management dialog Select Tools> Display Settings> Layer Set
lists the layer sets available in the Management to open the Layer Set
current plan or layout file and lets you add Management dialog.
and remove layer sets and modify and copy
existing layer sets.

119
CAFull_RM.book Page 120 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Layer Set Management

1 Use the Available Layer Sets options active layer set or any layer set in use as a
to manage the layer sets saved with the default.
current plan or layout file.
• Click on a layer set name in the list to Do not delete any layer sets that are used
select it. by a layout.

• Click the Define button (or double-click • Click the Import button to import layer
a layer set) to open the Layer Display settings from a .layers file. See “Export-
Options dialog and make changes to the ing/Importing Layer Sets” on page 127.
selected layer set. • Click the Export button to export the
• Click the New button to open the New layer settings in the current plan in a .lay-
Layer Set Name dialog and create a new ers file. See “Exporting/Importing Layer
layer set using the system default set- Sets” on page 127.
tings.
2 The Active Layer Set for Current
• Click the Copy button to open the New View options affect only the layer set
Layer Set Name dialog and enter a name used in the view that was active when the
for a copy of the currently selected layer Layer Set Management dialog was opened.
set. You can select a new Active Layer Set from
the drop-down list or click the Define button
• Click the Delete button to delete the
to make changes to the active layer set in the
selected layer set from the current file.
Layer Display Options dialog.
The Delete button is enabled if the layer
set can be deleted. You cannot delete the

120
CAFull_RM.book Page 121 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3 Reference Display Layer Set - Click Display Set is usually sufficient, you can
the drop-down list to specify which create as many layer sets as you like and use
layer set is used when the reference display is any of them for the reference display. See
turned on. While the default Reference “Reference Display” on page 360.

Active Layer Set Control

The Active Layer layer sets saved with the plan. Click the
Set Control drop- drop-down list to select a new layer set for
down list displays on the toolbar for all views the current view.
and provides convenient access to a list of all

Layer Display Options Dialog

The Layer Display Options dialog Selecting Tools> Reference Floors>
controls the display of layers in a Reference Display Options opens the
selected layer set. It consists of a table that Layer Display Options dialog with the
lists all available layers and the attributes for Reference Display Set active. See
each. Layers can be added and deleted. There “Reference Floor” on page 359.
is no limit to the number of layers that can
exist in a plan. Selecting Tools> Display Options in a
From any view except the Materials List, materials list opens the Materials List
select Tools> Display Settings> Display Display Options dialog. See “Material List
Display Options Dialog” on page 1052.
Options to open the Layer Display
Options dialog. This dialog is resizeable and
maintains its size between program sessions.

121
CAFull_RM.book Page 122 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Layer Display Options Dialog

1
2

6
4

5
7

1 The Available Layer Sets options 2 Click the column header to sort all
control which layer set is affected by layers in the Layer Display Options
changes made in the Layer Display Options dialog by that column.
dialog. • The Name column is sorted alphabeti-
• The currently selected layer set displays. cally. Sorting is also case sensitive to
Click the drop-down list to select a differ- allow greater control over organization.
ent layer set. • A red + in the Used column indicates
• Click the Copy Set button to create a which layers have objects placed on them
copy of the current layer set. in the current plan. This column cannot
be edited.
• When Modify All Layer Sets is checked,
changes made in the Layer Display • A check in the Disp column indicates
Options dialog apply to all other layer which layers are set to be visible. This
sets in the plan when you click OK. controls the display of objects in 2D and
3D views.
Modify All Layer Sets is a one-time • An M in the Mat column indicates which
action. It is always unchecked when layers are included in the Materials List.
the Layer Display Options dialog is opened.
• A yellow in the Lock column indicates
which layers are locked, preventing

122
CAFull_RM.book Page 123 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

objects on that layer from being manually display at the bottom of the dialog. If
edited. multiple layers are selected, “no change”
• The Color column shows the line color may display for attributes that are different
for each layer. You can sort this column among the selected layers.
so that like colors are listed together.
• The Style column shows the line style for When one or more layers are selected
and you click OK, the program remem-
each layer and can be sorted so that like
bers your selection so that the same layers
line styles are listed together. are selected when you reopen the Layer Dis-
• The Size column displays the line weight play Options dialog.
used by each layer and can be sorted so
that like line weights are listed together. 4 When a layer or layers is selected,
See “Line Weights” on page 999. single or shared layer attributes can be
edited in the section titled Properties for
• Click the Library button to open the
“Selected Layer.” Line Color, Style and Size
Library Browser to the Line Styles
affect lines in floor plan view and surface
library. See “Line Styles” on page 879.
edge lines in vector views.
3 Layers are named so that similar object • To change the color of lines on a selected
types such as Cabinets, Base and layer, click the Color bar to select a new
Cabinets, Wall are listed near one another color in the Color Chooser dialog. See
alphabetically.
“Color Chooser Dialog” on page 727.
Double-click a layer in the Name column to • To change the line style of a selected
rename it. layer, click the Style drop-down arrow or
click the Library button to select a line
style from the library. See “Line Styles”
on page 879.
• To change the width of lines on a selected
layer, enter a Size. See “Line Weights” on
page 999.
• To turn off a selected layer, uncheck
Display. See “Displaying Objects” on
page 117.
If a layer is turned on, a checkmark is shown • To exclude all objects on a selected layer
in the Disp column. If a layer is turned off, from the Materials List, uncheck Include
the column is blank. in Materials List. See “Materials Lists”
on page 1048.
Layers are selected by clicking them in the
table. Hold down the Shift key or the Ctrl • To protect the objects on a selected layer
key to select multiple layers at once. Click from accidental changes, check Lock.
the Select All button to select all layers in the Items on locked layers display but cannot
table. When selected, a layer’s attributes

123
CAFull_RM.book Page 124 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Select Layer Dialog

be selected, deleted, moved, or modified. layers or any of the system layers used by
See “Locking Layers” on page 117. Chief Architect.
• Click the Reset Names button to revert
5 The buttons at the bottom left of the layer names for system layers back to the
dialog provide additional control of the
layers in the table. original names that installed with Chief
Architect. This does not affect layers you
• Click the Select All button to select all
created.
layers in the table at once. This allows
changes to be quickly applied to all lay- • Click OK to close the dialog and apply
ers. your changes.
• Click the New button to open the New • Click Cancel to close the dialog, ignor-
Layer Name dialog and create a new ing any edits.
layer with the unique name of your
choice. Duplicate layer names are not 6 Select a layer to serve as the Current
CAD Layer from the drop-down list.
allowed. This is the default layer used for new CAD
objects such as lines and arcs. See “Current
Note: New layers are added to all layer sets. CAD Layer” on page 910.
However, newly created layers will be turned
on to display only in the current layer set. 7 Click the size grip and drag to resize the
Layer Display Options dialog.
• Click the Copy button to create a copy of
the selected layer. The new layer is added Note: Not all objects display in all views. For
directly below the original layer in the instance, door labels do not appear in 3D
table. views and room labels do not appear in mate-
rials lists, regardless of the layer they are
• Click the Delete button to delete the placed on, or whether the layer is turned on
selected layer. You cannot delete used or not.

Select Layer Dialog

When new CAD objects are drawn, Current CAD Layer to open the Select
they are placed on the Current CAD Layer dialog.
Layer. See “Current CAD Layer” on page
This dialog is also used for the Layer Painter
910. You can specify which layer is the
tool. See “Layer Painter and Eyedropper” on
Current CAD Layer by selecting CAD>
page 126.

124
CAFull_RM.book Page 125 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

This dialog can only be accessed by clicking Options dialog but only allows a layer to be
the Current CAD Layer button. It is selected.
similar in appearance to the Layer Display

Layer Tab
The Layer tab is found in the specification
dialogs for many different objects. Here you Note: In some specification dialogs, layer
can specify on what layer the program uses information is located on the Line Style or
to display the selected object. Appearance tab rather than the Layer tab.

125
CAFull_RM.book Page 126 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Layer Painter and Eyedropper

1
2
3

1 Check Default to place the selected 3 Click Define to open the Layer Display
object on the default layer for that Options dialog and select, modify, or
object type. add a new layer. See “Layer Display Options
Dialog” on page 121.
2 Click the drop-down list to select from
all layers available in the plan file.

Layer Painter and Eyedropper

The Layer Painter and Layer 3. Note that the name of the layer being
Eyedropper tools allow you to painted is noted on the left side of the
move an object to any layer from any view Status Bar at the bottom of the program
without opening its specification dialog. window. See “The Status Bar” on page
34.
To use the Layer Painter 4. Move your cursor over an object and
notice that the Status Bar now states
1. In any view, select Tools> Display Set- both the layer being painted and the cur-
tings> Layer Painter . rent layer of the target object.
2. In the Select CAD Layer dialog, choose 5. Click on objects in the view to move
a layer and click OK. Your cursor will them to the selected layer.

display the painter icon.

126
CAFull_RM.book Page 127 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To use the Layer Eyedropper 2. Click on an object to load the layer it is

on into the Layer Painter.
1. In any view, select Tools> Display Set-
3. Your cursor will display the painter
tings> Layer Eyedropper .
icon, and you can click on other objects
to place them on the selected layer.

Layout Layer Sets

Layer sets are an effective way to control not always saved with the plan that the view was
just what displays while you are working, but originally sent to layout from. For this
what displays in the views you send to layout reason, you should avoid deleting layer sets
and print. See “Layout” on page 1014. from a plan unless you are absolutely sure
that they are not being used by layout views.
When you send a view to layout, you have
two choices as to which layer set the view You can find out which layer set a layout
uses: view is using by selecting it and clicking the
• You can use the same layer set as the Layout Box Layers edit button. See
original view being sent to layout. “Editing Layout Views” on page 1017.
• You can make a copy of the layer set used If you select a layout view and click the
by the original view.
Open View edit button, you will return
Both approaches have advantages and to the original view in the plan file. Bear in
disadvantages, so you should use the option mind that the layout view’s layer set will be
that best suits your needs. active. If you make changes to its settings,
Whichever option you choose, remember the view on the layout page will be affected.
that the layer set used by a layout view is

Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

Layer sets created in one plan can convenient alternative to re-creating a layer
be exported as a *.layers file and set that may already exist in another plan.
imported into other plans. This is a

Exporting Layer Sets

To export layer sets from the current plan, Layer Sets to open the Save Layer Set
click the Export button in the Layer Set File dialog.
Management dialog, or select File> Export>

127
CAFull_RM.book Page 128 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Exporting/Importing Layer Sets

• In the Save in drop-down, browse to the

location on your computer where you
would like to save the exported file.
• Any folders and .layers files in the cur-
rent location display in the field below.
• In the File name text field, type a name
for the exported file. Chief Architect
automatically attaches the file extension
.layers, which is the only file type avail-
able in the Save as type field.
• When both the Save in location and File
name are correct, click Save.

Importing Layer Sets

To import layer sets (*.layers file) into the • Click on the .layers file you wish to
current plan, click the Import button in the import. Its name will display in the File
Layer Set Management dialog, or select name text field.
File> Import> Layer Sets to display the • The only file type available in the Save
Open Layer Set File dialog. as type field is .layers.
• When the desired file is selected, click
Open. The Import Layer Sets dialog will
open next.

4. In the Look in drop-down, browse to the

location on your computer where the file
you wish to import is saved.
• Any folders and .dat files in the current Select a layer set or hold down the Shift key
location display in the field below. to select multiple sets and click OK.

128
CAFull_RM.book Page 129 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Layer Set Defaults Dialog

The Layer Set Defaults dialog is used Settings to open the Default Settings dialog,
to specify the initial layer sets for then select Layer Sets from the list and click
different view types. Select Edit> Default the Edit button.

When a new view is created for any of the Select Use Active Layer Set to use the
specified view types, Chief Architect sets the currently active layer set for the new view
default layer set listed here as the active layer when it is created.
set. Click the drop-down list to change the
initial layer set for each view. Click the Define button to open the Layer
Display Options dialog and change the layer
settings for the layer set. See “Layer Display
Options Dialog” on page 121.

129
CAFull_RM.book Page 130 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 6:

Editing Objects

In Chief Architect, a variety of architectural Chapter Contents

and CAD-based objects are used to create • Architectural vs CAD Objects
complete 3D models and working drawings. • Defaults and Preferences
Although these objects are sometimes very • Snap Behaviors
different from one another, the methods used • Object Snaps
to move, rotate, resize and otherwise edit • Angle Snaps
them are similar throughout the program. • Grid Snaps
• Edit Behaviors
Edit handles allow objects to be resized, • Undo and Redo
relocated, or rotated using the mouse. Edit • Creating Objects
toolbar buttons and the contextual menus • Selecting Objects
access edit tools relevant to the selected • Editing Line Based Objects
object(s). Most objects have a specification • Editing Arc Based Objects
dialog that allows you to edit it in ways that • Editing Open Polyline Based Objects
are specific to that type of object. • Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects
The editing characteristics common to most • Editing Box-Based Objects
objects are described in this chapter. Unique, • Editing Spline Based Objects
object-specific editing behaviors and the • Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses
specification dialogs are covered in their • Architectural and CAD Blocks
respective chapters. • Displaying Objects
• Moving Objects
• Aligning Objects
• Resizing Objects
• Reshaping Objects
• Rotating Objects
• Reflecting Objects

130
CAFull_RM.book Page 131 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Copying and Pasting Objects • Union, Intersection, and Subtract

• Deleting Objects • Converting Objects
• Trim and Extend • Select Same / Load Same
• Transform/Replicate Object Dialog • Edit Area Tools

Architectural vs CAD Objects

There are two broad categories of objects in In contrast, architectural objects such as
Chief Architect: architectural objects and walls, cabinets, doors, windows, and stairs
CAD objects. display in 2D and 3D views. Architectural
objects can be created and edited in 2D and
CAD objects such as lines, arcs, and text are
3D views but not in CAD Detail windows or
2D objects that can be created and edited in
on layout pages.
floor plan view, cross section/elevation
views, CAD detail windows, and on layout Some architectural objects, such as custom
pages but do not display in 3D camera views countertops and slabs, have some behaviors
and overviews. See “The CAD Drawing in common with CAD objects and are
Tools” on page 878. referred to as CAD-based.

Defaults and Preferences

The ways that objects in the program behave Object Snaps enable snapping to
as they are created and edited are affected by objects. See “Object Snaps” on page
a number of default and preference settings. 133.
See “Preferences & Default Settings” on
Angle Snaps enable snapping at
page 62.
Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps”
on page 135.
It is a good idea to be familiar with these
options and how they affect drawing Grid Snaps enable snapping to the
and editing in the program. Snap Grid. See “Grid Snaps” on page
136.

Snap Settings Bumping/Pushing enables bumping

and pushing behaviors. See
Select Edit> Snap Settings to access “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.
the three categories of Snap Settings
that determine how objects snap to one Edit Behaviors
another and whether they snap to allowed
angles or to points on a grid, as well as object Select Edit> Edit Behaviors to
bumping and pushing behaviors. access the six global edit behavior
modes that determine how dragging the edit

131
CAFull_RM.book Page 132 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Defaults and Preferences

handles with the left mouse button affects a current CAD point. See “Point Tools” on
selected object and may also affect how page 880.
objects are drawn.
Specify which behavior is used by selecting
The Default edit behavior provides Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/Resize
the most commonly used editing About Current Point or in the
options. See “Default” on page 137. Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors Panel”
The Alternate edit behavior provides on page 93.
an alternative to the Default behaviors
that may be more useful in some situations. Arc Creation Modes
See “Alternate” on page 138.
Select Edit> Arc Creation Modes to
The Move edit behavior allows you to access the five Arc Creation Modes
move a selected object using the that control how arcs and curved walls are
corner handles and the Move handle. See drawn.
“Move” on page 138.
Free Form Arc mode allows you to
The Resize edit behavior scales an define an arc by clicking and dragging
object as you drag a corner handle. along the desired path. See “Free Form Arc”
See “Resize” on page 138. on page 892.
The Concentric edit behavior allows Center/Radius/End Arc mode allows
you to resize objects so that the you to define the center and radius of
distance moved by each edge is the same as an arc, and then its length. See “Center/
all other edges. See “Concentric” on page Radius/End Arc” on page 893.
139.
Start/End/On Arc mode allows you
The Fillet edit behavior allows you to to define the start and end points of an
add a fillet at any corner of an object. arc, then adjust the curvature. See “Start/
See “Fillet” on page 140. End/On Arc” on page 893.
Start/Tangent/End Arc mode allows
Edit Object Parts you to define the start and end points
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit of an arc, its tangent and its curvature. See
Object Parts to toggle the ability to “Start/Tangent/End Arc” on page 893.
edit the individual segments of polyline- Arc About Center mode allows you
based objects and connected walls. See “Edit to draw an arc by defining the center
Object Parts” on page 145. and then the start and end points. See “Arc
About Center” on page 893.
Rotate/Resize About
Objects can be rotated or resized
about either their own centers or the

132
CAFull_RM.book Page 133 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Snap Behaviors
There are three categories of behavior when you begin an operation, but a
snap behavior in Chief different behavior when you end it.
Architect:
The Snap Behavior hotkeys are listed on the
• Object Snaps , which snap CAD right side of the Edit> Snap Settings
and architectural objects to other objects. submenu. See “Hotkeys” on page 114.
• Angle Snaps , which snap objects
To use snap behavior hotkeys
at specific angles.

• Grid Snaps , which snap objects 1. Select Edit> Snap Settings and
to points on a grid. toggle off the snap behavior category
that you wish to control using hotkeys.
Snap behaviors can be controlled in the
Preferences dialog and in the Plan or
2. Select a tool that you wish to draw with
Layout Defaults dialogs. See “Snap
or an object you wish to edit.
Properties Panel” on page 95 and “General 3. Begin drawing or editing and hold down
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68. the left mouse button without releasing.
4. Press and hold the appropriate key on
You can select Edit> Snap Settings to your keyboard to enable the snap behav-
quickly access Snap Behavior settings. ior associated with it.
To temporarily disable Snap Behaviors and 5. When you are finished using the snap
other move restrictions, press the Ctrl key behavior, release the hotkey but continue
while dragging an edit handle. See “Moving holding down your left mouse button.
Objects” on page 177.
6. If you wish, you can press and hold a
different hotkey on your keyboard and
Hotkeys continue the drawing or editing opera-
You can also temporarily enable individual tion.
Snap Behaviors during a mouse editing 7. When you are finished, release the left
operation using hotkeys. This can be helpful mouse button.
if you wish to use one particular type of snap

Object Snaps
Object Snaps allow you to position endpoints meet or roof plane edges so that
objects precisly relative to each other; they are colinear.
for example, to position lines so that their
Object Snaps can be turned on or off by
selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Object

133
CAFull_RM.book Page 134 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Object Snaps

Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or

in the Preferences dialog. See “Snap
Properties Panel” on page 95.
Object Snaps are indicated visually as you
create or edit objects. To remove any object
snap indicators that are visible on screen,
press the 1 (one) key. As you continue
drawing or editing, new indicators may Extension anchors and lines
appear.
Extension Snaps are indicated by extension
With the exception of On Object snaps, anchors, indicated by small blue circles.
have priority over all other types of snapping
Anchors display for Endpoint, Midpoint, and
in Chief Architect. Bumping/Pushing Quadrant snaps when these snap behaviors
overrides Object Snaps. See “Bumping/ are enabled.
Pushing” on page 178.
When an anchor is established, you can
Object Snap Locations create Tangent , Perpendicular and

There are many locations on an object that Orthogonal extension lines relative to it.
other objects can snap to. In addition to snap
points located on objects, Extension Snaps To use extension snaps
locate points away from objects. Each type
of object snap can be toggled by selecting 1. Toggle on Object Snaps and make
sure the extension snaps are enabled.
Edit> Snap Settings or in the
Preferences dialog. See “Snap Properties 2. Draw a Rectangular Polyline .
Panel” on page 95.
3. Select the Draw Line tool and move
Extension Snaps your pointer along the edges of the
polyline.
For some operations, it is helpful to snap to a
4. When your pointer passes over an end-
point far away from an original object, while
point or midpoint, an extension anchor is
maintaining a relationship to a point on that
created.
object. For example, you may want to snap to
a point exactly perpendicular to a line’s 5. Move your pointer perpendicular edge
endpoint. Extension Snaps are helpful in displaying the anchor to create a blue,
these situations. dashed extension line.
Only a limited number of anchors can exist at
one time; creating a new anchor removes the
oldest existing anchor. You can specify the
number of possible anchors in the

134
CAFull_RM.book Page 135 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Preferences dialog. See “Snap Properties

Panel” on page 95.
A B
Object Snaps Hotkeys
• Press the “1” key to clear out all current
extension anchors.
4.
• Hold down the “S” key to temporarily
disable Object Snaps. You are still able to
use Extension Snaps to existing anchors, 5.
so the “S” key can be used to avoid pick- 1.
ing up unwanted extension anchors. 3.
The S key can help establish extension
The “S”Key - Case Study snaps when other objects may interfere
In the following example, there are several To establish two extension anchors
lines. Suppose we want to start a line at the
intersection of two orthogonal extension 1. Drag the mouse over the endpoint for
lines drawn from two lines, A and B. To line A to establish the first endpoint
establish an extension anchor, we need to anchor.
drag the mouse over line A’s endpoint, but 2. Temporarily disable object snapping by
there are several lines between the endpoints holding down the “S” key.
of lines A and B. We need to establish the
two extension anchors without snapping to 3. Move the mouse to the end of line B.
the intervening objects. 4. Release the “S” key to establish the sec-
ond endpoint anchor.
5. Move the mouse to the intersection of
the two extension lines and draw the
new object.

Angle Snaps
It is often important that objects be Angle Snaps allow you to snap at either 15
drawn at exact angles. This can be degree angles or at 7.5 degree angles plus
accomplished using Angle Snaps. any additional Allowed Angles that you
specify. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
Angle Snaps allow you to draw lines, walls,
on page 68.
and other objects at specified Allowed
Angles. Angle Snaps also affect the way Angle Snaps can be turned on or off by
objects rotate, the radius of arcs, and a selecting Edit> Snap Settings> Angle
variety of other operations.

135
CAFull_RM.book Page 136 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Grid Snaps

Snaps , by clicking the toggle button, or Object Snap exists, the program uses that
in the Preferences dialog. instead of an Angle Snap.
Sometimes both Angle Snaps and Object
Angle Snap Settings Snaps apply. For example, suppose a wall is
drawn at 15 degrees using Angle Snaps and
You can change Allowed Angle settings for
another wall is approached. You can draw the
Angle Snaps in the Plan Defaults or Layout
new wall at 15 degrees while using
Defaults dialog. See “General Plan Defaults
Dialog” on page 68. Intersection Snaps to snap to a point on
the existing wall.
Specify 15 Degree or 7 ½ Degree angle
snaps. When 7 ½ Degree Angle Snaps are Use both object
selected, you can also specify Additional snapping and
Angles. These default settings are plan- angle snapping to
specific rather than global. create a 15-degree
line that intersects
Angle Snaps and an existing line
Object Snaps Now suppose that we don't want the new line
Angle Snaps have a higher priority than Grid to end on the existing line. Hold down the
“S” key to temporarily disable Object Snaps,
Snaps and On Object Snaps , but a lower
allowing only Angle Snaps. See “The
priority to all other Object Snaps. If a valid
“S”Key - Case Study” on page 135.

Grid Snaps
Grid Snaps allow you to snap objects zooming in and out, or for general layout
to points on an on-screen grid. The guidelines, but is not used for snapping.
display and size of this Snap Grid can be
controlled in the Plan or Layout Defaults Grid Snaps and Angle Snaps
dialog. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog”
on page 68. Of the three snap behaviors, Grid Snaps have
the lowest priority and are overridden by
Grid Snaps are turned on and off by selecting Angle Snaps and Object Snaps.
Edit> Snap Settings>Grid Snaps , by Grid snaps can work well with Angle Snaps.
clicking the toggle button, or in the Plan or For example, if the grid Snap Unit is set to
Layout Defaults dialog. 12" (1 foot), drawing a new wall at an
In addition to the Snap Grid, the Reference allowed angle snaps the line length to 0",
Grid is provided to give you a visual sense 12", 24", and so on.
of scale. The Reference Grid is useful for

136
CAFull_RM.book Page 137 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To draw a line or wall at an Allowed

Angle but with unrestricted length, dis-
able Grid Snaps and leave Angle Snaps on.

Edit Behaviors
There are six Edit Behavior modes access to the most commonly used edit
that determine how edit handles affect behaviors and should be selected as your
an object, and may also affect how objects preference in most situations.
are drawn. The currently active edit behavior
is a global preference setting, affecting all
When the use of a tool is described in
plan and layout files. this manual, it is assumed that the
Two of these modes, Default and Alternate, Default edit behavior mode is active.
are useful for most drawing and editing
needs and can be considered primary editing • Drawing - Standard click and drag
modes. Default mode, in particular, accesses drawing behavior is enabled. See
the most commonly used behaviors and is the “Creating Objects” on page 141.
best choice in most circumstances. • Resize/Reshape - Default allows you to
adjust the angle of any corner of a
The other four modes, Move, Resize,
polyline without affecting adjacent cor-
Concentric and Fillet, offer special editing
ners, changing the object’s shape.
behaviors that may be useful only in certain
situations and can be considered secondary.
You can specify which edit behavior mode is
active when the left mouse button is used in
the Preferences dialog, by selecting Edit>
Edit Behaviors , or by clicking the
corresponding toggle button, which can be
added to your toolbar. See “Behaviors Panel”
on page 93.
Each edit behavior can also be enabled using Default edit behavior
the different buttons on your mouse or by
pressing the keyboard keys associated with • For box-based objects, the Default mode
each. See “Using the Mouse” on page 29. functions the same as the Alternate mode.
• Movement - Default allows you to move
Default objects orthogonal, or at a right angle, to
any of their edges.
The Default mode is one of the
primary edit behavior modes. It offers • Rotation - In Default mode, objects snap
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.

137
CAFull_RM.book Page 138 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Edit Behaviors

You can temporarily enable the Default • Movement - Alternate allows you to
edit mode when another mode is active by move objects at Allowed Angles when
pressing Alt + Z or Alt + / while performing Angle Snaps are enabled, or orthogo-
an edit or drawing operation. nal to any of its edges when they are not.
See “Angle Snaps” on page 135.
Alternate • Rotation - Alternate snaps objects at
The Alternate mode is the second Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
primary edit behavior mode. You can temporarily enable the Alternate
edit mode when another mode is active
Note: Not all commands have an Alternate by pressing Alt or using the right mouse
edit behavior. If a selected tool does not, it
button while performing an edit or drawing
will not work when this edit mode is active.
operation.

• Drawing - Continuous drawing behavior Move

is enabled.
The Move mode allows you to move
• Resize/Reshape - Alternate allows you an object using edit handles that
to keep the angle between adjacent edges would otherwise be used for resizing, as well
fixed when a corner edit handle is moved. as with the Move handle.
Instead, adjacent corners move and adja-
cent edges lengthen or shorten. • Drawing - Standard click and drag
drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Move allows you to
move the selected object when any edit
handle is used.
• Movement - Move mode allows you to
move objects at Allowed Angles.
• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.

You can temporarily enable the Move

edit mode when another mode is active by
Alternate edit behavior pressing Z or / while performing an edit or
• Alternate allows you to drag an end han- drawing operation.
dle on an open polyline to change it from
a line to an arc or vice versa. Resize
The Resize edit behavior allows you
• Alternate overrides the Lock Center
to rescale an object. As you drag a
setting of arc-based objects.
corner edit handle of an object, you get an

138
CAFull_RM.book Page 139 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

exactly scaled version of the original. For button mouse while performing an edit or
example, you can resize an object to 50% of drawing operation. See “Using the Mouse”
its original size while maintaining the same on page 29.
proportions.
• Drawing - Standard click and drag Concentric
drawing behavior is enabled. The Concentric mode allows you to
• Resize/Reshape - Resize allows you to resize objects so that the distance
keep the angle between adjacent edges moved by each edge is the same. For
fixed when a corner handle is moved. example, you can resize an irregularly
shaped polyline so that each edge is exactly
ten feet in from the original position, which
is useful for creating site plans with setbacks.
• Drawing - Standard click and drag
drawing behavior is enabled.
• Resize/Reshape - Concentric allows you
to resize an irregularly-shaped polyline
so that each edge is moved the same dis-
tance from its original location.

Resize edit behavior

To proportionally resize an object,

always drag a corner edit handle and
not an edge handle.

• Movement - Resize allows you to move

an object orthogonal, or at a right angle,
to any of its edges.
• Rotation - In Resize Mode, objects snap Concentric edit behavior
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated.
• Concentric mode also allows you to
You can temporarily enable the Resize move opposite edges of an object so that
edit mode when another mode is active by each edge is moved the same distance
pressing X or using the X2 button on a five- from its original location.

139
CAFull_RM.book Page 140 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Edit Behaviors

Unit specified in the Plan Defaults dialog.

See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.

To concentrically resize an object with

no restrictions, set the Concentric Jump
value on the CAD Panel of the Preferences
dialog to zero and turn off Grid Snaps.

You can temporarily enable the

Concentric edit mode when another
mode is active by pressing C or using the X1
• Movement - Concentric mode allows button on a five-button mouse while
you to move an object orthogonal, or at a performing an edit or drawing operation. See
right angle, to any of its edges. “Using the Mouse” on page 29.
• Rotation - In Concentric mode, objects
snap at Allowed Angles as they are Fillet
rotated. The Fillet mode allows you to add a
In some cases, the Concentric and Resize fillet, or curve, at any corner of an
edit behaviors have the same result, such as object. Dragging a corner edit handle adjusts
when a circle is resized. Usually, though, the the fillet radius at that corner.
two behaviors are different because • Drawing - Standard click and drag
concentric resizing does not maintain the drawing behavior is enabled.
original ratio between an irregular polyline’s
• Resize/Reshape - Fillet allows you to
edges.
create a fillet at by dragging a corner edit
handle inward.

Resize edit Concentric

behavior edit behavior
In Concentric mode, objects resize in
Concentric Jump increments specified in
the Preferences dialog. See “Behaviors
Panel” on page 93. Fillet edit behavior
When the Concentric Jump distance is set • Movement - Move mode allows you to
at 0", objects resize according to the Snap move objects at Allowed Angles.

140
CAFull_RM.book Page 141 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Rotation - In Move mode, objects snap You can temporarily enable the Fillet
at Allowed Angles as they are rotated. edit mode when another mode is active by
pressing F while performing an edit or
The Fillet edit behavior adjusts all the
drawing operation.
corners of a box at once. The radius of each
corner is the same.
To produce fillets or chamfers of an
Fillet does not have an effect on circles, exact radius, set the Fillet Chamfer
ovals, ellipses or arc segments. Radius and use the Fillet two Lines or Cham-
fer Two Lines edit button. See “Fillet Two
Lines” on page 186 and “Chamfer Two Lines”
on page 187.

Undo and Redo

The Undo and Redo commands To Undo an action, select Edit> Undo ,
allow you to both undo the last
action performed, as well as redo actions that click the Undo button, or press Ctrl + Z
were recently Undone. on your keyboard.

The ten most recent actions can be Undone The Redo command is only available
or Redone, depending on your settings in the immediately after Undo has been used. To
Preferences dialog. See “General Panel” on Redo an Undone action, select Edit> Redo
page 79. Actions that can be Undone and , click the Redo button or press Ctrl +
Redone include creating, editing, and Y on your keyboard.
deleting objects.
Undo and Redo do not affect
changes made to the display by panning the
display or zooming in or out. See “Undo
Zoom” on page 731.

Creating Objects
In Chief Architect, there are five ways to While the size of the drawing area in Chief
create objects: by clicking to place an object, Architect is limited only by the resources on
by clicking and dragging to draw an object, your computer, it is best to begin your draw-
by entering coordinates, by placing a ing near the origin, 0,0,0. The current
distribution path or region, or by importing position of your mouse pointer displays in
custom symbols, drawings, pictures or the Status Bar at the bottom of the program
metafiles. window. See “3D Drafting” on page 28.

141
CAFull_RM.book Page 142 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Creating Objects

Click-to-Create Continue drawing the selected object until

another tool is selected.
Many objects, including doors and windows,
cabinets, library symbols, terrain objects, You can cancel any click-and-drag drawing
text, pictures and images are created by operation before it is completed by pressing
clicking. Select a tool or library object, then the Esc key on your keyboard, or by pressing
click in the drawing area to place the object any two mouse buttons at the same time.
at that location.
When the Alternate edit behavior is
Continue clicking to place the selected object active, a continuous drawing behavior is
until another tool is selected. enabled, allowing you to click at the start and
When most drawing tools are active or end points of line- and arc-based objects
library symbols selected for placement, a without dragging. See “Alternate” on page
preview outline follows your mouse pointer, 138.
indicating the size and shape of the object to
be created. The center point of the object’s To continuously draw by right-clicking
back edge will snap to active snap points 1. Select a tool that creates line- or arc-
when Grid Snaps or Object Snaps based objects.
are enabled1. 2. Right-click, drag and release the mouse
Many architectural objects can be created in button to draw the first object.
floor plan view or any 3D view. In order to 3. Move the pointer to a different location
place a stand-alone, click-to-create object in and notice the drawing indicator that
3D, it is necessary to click near a wall or begins at the object’s endpoint and fol-
within the Terrain Perimeter as these objects lows your pointer as it moves.
help orient the new object within the 3D 4. Click to create a second object begin-
space2. ning at the first object’s starting point
and ending where you clicked.
Clicking and Dragging 5. Continue clicking to create additional
Other objects, including walls and railings, objects until another tool is selected, the
straight stairs, and CAD and CAD-based Esc key is pressed, or two mouse buttons
objects are created by clicking and dragging are pressed at the same time.
to define either a path or an enclosed area.
Select a tool, then click and drag in the Entering Coordinates
drawing area to draw an object between your Objects created by clicking and dragging can
start and end points. also be drawn by entering coordinates. See
“3D Drafting” on page 28.
Coordinates can be either absolute or
relative. Absolute coordinates refer to a fixed
1.See “Snap Behaviors” on page 133.
point of origin at 0,0,0, while relative
2.See Terrain PerimeterTODO.

142
CAFull_RM.book Page 143 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

coordinates treat the current location of the from the start point rather than as X
selected object as the point of origin. and Y coordinates.
• The program remembers which option
To use the Enter Coordinates dialog you last used in this dialog.
1. Select any tool that requires you to click 6. Click OK to close the dialog and create
and drag to create an object. the object.
2. Click and begin dragging to draw the CAD lines, arcs and points can also be
object. created using the Input Line, Input Arc and
3. Before you finish dragging and with the Input Point dialogs. See “Input Point” on
mouse button pressed, press either the page 880, “Input Line” on page 884, or
Tab or Enter key on your keyboard. “Input Arc” on page 894.

4. In the Enter Coordinates dialog:

You can also move objects using the
Enter Coordinates dialog. Click and
drag the Move edit handle of an existing
object, then press the Tab key and proceed
with steps 3 and 4. See “Moving Objects” on
page 177.

Distributing Objects
You can place multiple copies of any object
• The Start Location, where you clicked in an evenly-spaced array either within a
and began dragging, displays on the region or along a path using the Distributed
right. Objects tools. See “Distributed Objects”
5. On the left, specify the desired New on page 666.
Location, or end point.
• Select Absolute to define the end point Importing Objects
using absolute coordinates on the snap
Custom symbols, drawings, pictures and
grid, or:
metafiles can be imported into the program
• Select Relative to Start to define the and placed in the drawing area with a click.
end point relative to the start point, as See “Importing & Exporting” on page 952
though the start point was at (0,0). and “Custom Symbols” on page 974.
• Check Polar to define the end point of
the new line by its Distance and Angle

143
CAFull_RM.book Page 144 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Selecting Objects

Selecting Objects
“Select” refers to selecting an object for Architect can be selected using the Select
editing. An object must be selected before it Objects tool. Select Edit> Select Objects,
can be edited. click the toolbar button or press the Space
bar on your keyboard to activate this tool.
In order for an object to be selected, it must
be both unlocked and visible in the current You can also select objects or open context
view. See “Layers” on page 116. sensitive menus using the right mouse button
when any tool is active. See “Contextual
When an object is selected, it displays edit
Menus” on page 33.
handles and a selection fill color. See “Colors
Panel” on page 74.
Selecting Similar Objects
In 3D views, a selected object will also
display lines representing the selected edge If a tool other than Select Objects is
or surface. The size of the edit handles does active, you can only select objects of that
not change as you zoom in or out and is set in type using the left mouse button. For
the Preferences dialog. See “Edit Panel” on
example, if the Straight Exterior Wall
page 92. To prevent them from stacking on
tool is active, you can only select walls using
one another, some edit handles may not
the left mouse button.
display as you zoom away from the selected
object. This can be useful for selecting an object
when many objects of a different type
When an object is selected, its edit toolbar
occupy the same space in floor plan view.
also displays, typically at the bottom of the
Chief Architect program window just above Objects can be selected using the right mouse
the Status Bar. See “The Edit Toolbar” on button, regardless of which tool is active.
page 32.
Information about the selected object or Right-Clicking
objects may also display in the Status Bar. Regardless of which tool is active, you can
See “The Status Bar” on page 34. select an eligible object by right-clicking on
A selected object remains selected until it once. When you right-click to select an
another object is selected, a different tool is object a contextual menu also appears,
activated, the Esc key on the keyboard is displaying the object’s edit tools. You can
pressed, or any two mouse buttons are turn contextual menus on or off in the
pressed at the same time. Preferences dialog. See “Contextual
Menus” on page 33.
Select Objects If a drawing tool is active and you right-click
to select an object, you can unselect it by
With the exception of temporary CAD
left-clicking in an empty space in the
points, any object created using Chief
drawing area. Although a drawing tool is

144
CAFull_RM.book Page 145 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

active, it is not used. If you then left-click a independent of the object’s other edges when
second time, the active tool will be used. Edit Object Parts is enabled.
Select Edit> Edit Behaviors> Edit Object
Selected Edge
Parts to enable or disable the ability to
When you click on a polyline- or box-based edit polyline segments individually. Edit
object, the edge that you click nearest
becomes the selected edge and displays an Object Parts can also be turned on or off
edit handle larger than those on other edges. in the Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel”
The handle on this edge may also display at on page 89.
the point where you clicked to select it.
Edit Object Parts also affects
connections between walls, railing and
fences, but does not affect CAD-based object
such as slabs and roof planes.

To use Edit Object Parts

1. Turn on Edit Object Parts .

2. Click on an individual edge of a
polyline, or a segment of wall, railing or
terrain path to select it.
This edge can be edited on the Selected Line
or Selected Arc tab of the object’s A selected Terrain Wall
specification dialog, as well as using a
variety of edit toolbar buttons. It can also be
moved using dimensions. See “Moving
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
The start and end points of a CAD-based
object’s selected edge may be indicated by an
S and an E when the object is selected. This Edit Object Parts off Edit Object Parts on
can be helpful when editing the edge in the
object’s specification dialog. See “Edit 3. Notice that it is no longer connected to
Panel” on page 92. the rest of the polyline or adjacent walls.
4. The individual segment can now be
Edit Object Parts edited entirely independent of its neigh-
bors.
Polyline-based objects are composed
of lines and arcs that are connected 5. To connect the segment to the polyline
end to end. The individual edges of open and again, turn off Edit Object Parts
closed polylines can be selected and edited

145
CAFull_RM.book Page 146 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Selecting Objects

and move the end handles so that they The marquee-select method can also be used
snap to the ends of adjacent segments. to group-select similar object types. For
example, click the Hinged Door child
Select Next Object button, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl key,
If there is more than one object in a drag a marquee, release the mouse button,
particular space, it may be difficult to and only door objects within the marquee are
select the desired object. When a nearby selected.
object is selected, click the Select Next
Object edit button or press the Tab key until To make marquee selection easier, you
the desired object becomes selected. This can turn off the display of objects you
function cannot be applied to groups of do not want to include in your selection set.
selected objects. See “Displaying Objects” on page 117.

Marquee Select Shift Select

Groups of objects can be selected by holding You can select a group of objects by adding
down either the Shift or Ctrl key when the them to the selection set one by one. Select
an object, hold down either the Shift or Ctrl
Select Objects tool is active and then key, and click additional objects to select
dragging a marquee around the objects to be them.
selected.
More than one type of object can be selected
You can specify whether objects must be using this method, but the ability to edit the
totally contained in or intersected by the group-selected items is limited to attributes
marquee, or whether an object’s center point that all selected objects have in common.
must be contained in the marquee, in the
Preferences dialog or using the Selection To remove an object from a selection set,
click it once more - again, with either the
Mode buttons, which can be added to
Shift or Ctrl key pressed.
your toolbars. See “Edit Panel” on page 92.
If an object is currently selected and a Select All
selection marquee is drawn around it, that
object becomes de-selected. If an object is Select Edit> Select All to select all objects
currently selected and a marquee is drawn drawn on the current floor, in the current
around other objects, the original object cross section/elevation view or CAD Detail
remains selected and the other objects are window, or on the current layout page.
added to the selection set.
Edit Area Tools
When using the marquee-select method, both
CAD and architectural objects included in The Edit Area Tools allow you to
the marquee are selected. To remove an define an area of your plan and select
object from the selection set, hold down the the objects within that area for editing. See
Shift key and click it. “Edit Area Tools” on page 209.

146
CAFull_RM.book Page 147 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Using a Fence To Fence Select a group of objects

The Fence Select edit tool allows you 1. Draw a CAD line, arc, open polyline,
to group-select multiple CAD and closed polyline or spline that crosses or
CAD-based objects in contact with the touches all the objects you wish to
selected CAD line, arc, polyline or spline. group-select.
Using a Fence to make a group-selection can 2. Click the Fence Select edit button.
be helpful in a number of situations, for
3. The originally selected object serves as a
example:
fence to select the objects it touches,
• When many CAD objects must be while becoming deselected itself.
selected, particularly when they occupy
4. You can hold either the Shift or Ctrl key
the same area.
and click objects to add or remove them
• When a selection marquee would be the from the selection set.
wrong shape or include too many objects.
• When a selection group needs to be You can keep all fences on their own
selected more than once. custom layer and turn off their display
when not needed. See “Layers” on page 116.
The Fence Select edit tool cannot be
used to select architectural objects - only Select Same Type
CAD and CAD-based objects. See
“Architectural vs CAD Objects” on page Rooms, cabinets, windows and doors
131. on the current floor can be selected
based on a set of attributes that you specify
Fences are often used with the Trim Objects using the Select Same Type edit tool. See
and Extend Objects edit tools. See “Select Same / Load Same” on page 208.
“Trim and Extend” on page 198.

Editing Line Based Objects

Objects are considered line-based when they “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
can be edited similar to CAD lines using page 160.
their edit handles.
Some objects, notably walls, have line-based
CAD lines, framing members, straight walls editing behavior only when selected on
and railings, straight stairs and straight roads certain surfaces. See “Editing Walls” on page
are examples of line-based objects. 231.
Most line-based objects can be connected to Wall openings such as doors and windows
other like objects to form polylines or have line-based editing behavior in floor plan
polyline-based objects. See “Editing Open view only but cannot be rotated, reversed or
Polyline Based Objects” on page 155 and converted to an arc. See “Editing Doors” on

147
CAFull_RM.book Page 148 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Line Based Objects

page 296 and “Editing Windows” on page Move

326. • Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object according to the currently
active Edit Behavior . See “Edit
Behaviors” on page 137.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.
Rotate
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object, either about its center or about the
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Objects” on page 188.
Other objects, such as stairs and roads, have Extend/Change Angle
additional edit handles that allow you to • Drag an end handle parallel to the
concentrically adjust the object’s width. selected line to change its length.

Using the Edit Handles • Drag an end handle at an angle to the

selected line to change its angle. When
When selected, a typical line-based object
Angle Snaps are on, the line snaps to
displays four edit handles.
Allowed Angles.
Any action performed using the edit handles • Right-click and drag it to change the
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa.
any two mouse buttons at the same time. See “Alternate” on page 138.
Adjust Width
The behavior of the edit handles may
depend on the currently active Edit Some line-based objects, such as stairs and
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137. roads, have additional handles that allow the
width of the object to be adjusted.

Extend/Change Angle

Move Rotate

Adjust Width

148
CAFull_RM.book Page 149 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Click and drag a small, round Expand • Click the Open Object edit button to
handle to increase or decrease the open the specification dialog for the
object’s width. By default, objects are selected object(s). See “Specification
resized in 1" increments. This Snap Unit Dialogs” on page 33.
is defined in the Plan Defaults dialog.
See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on • Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
page 68. copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
Using Dimensions elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting
Objects” on page 191.
Dimensions can be used to position
line-based objects relative to other • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
objects. See “Moving Objects Using edit button to create a copy of the
Dimensions” on page 831. selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Using Extension Line Snaps Place” on page 193.
Extension line snaps can be useful when • Click the Delete edit button to delete
editing line-based objects. See “Extension the selected object(s). See “Deleting
Snaps” on page 134. Objects” on page 196.
• Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the
Specification Dialog Object edit button to copy, move,
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Line-based objects can be edited using their object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
specification dialogs. See “Line Object Dialog” on page 200.
Specification Dialog” on page 888.
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button
Using the Edit Toolbar to make a series of copies at set intervals.
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
A selected line-based object can be edited in
a variety of ways using the buttons on the • Click the Accurate Move edit button
edit toolbar. to slow down the mouse speed when
using the edit handles. See “Accurate
The following toolbar buttons may display
Move” on page 179.
on the edit toolbar for a selected line-based
object: • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to make the selected
• Click the Select Next Object edit
object(s) parallel or perpendicular to a
button to select nearby objects instead of
straight edge. See “Using Make Parallel/
the selected object. See “Selecting
Perpendicular” on page 181.
Objects” on page 144.

149
CAFull_RM.book Page 150 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Arc Based Objects

• Click the Point to Point Move edit polyline-based object. See “Convert
button to accurately move the selected Polyline” on page 205.
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
page 179. ton to change a line-based object to an
• Click the Center Object edit button arc, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
to center an object along along a wall Arc” on page 186.
within a room or relative to a cabinet • Click the Fence Select edit button to
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. use the selected object(s) as a selection
• Click the Reflect About Object edit fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
button to reflect the selected object(s) • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
about another object. See “Reflecting ton, then click on a non-parallel line or
Objects” on page 190. arc to create an additional arc connecting
• Click the Move to Front of Group the two. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page
edit button to display the selected object 186.
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
drawing group. See “Move to Front of button, then click an edge adjacent to the
Group” on page 176. selected edge to chamfer the corner
• Click the Break Line edit button to between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
add a new corner or pivot point to the on page 187.
selected object. See “Break Line” on • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
page 185. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- intersect the selected object. See “Trim
ton to reverse the direction of the selected and Extend” on page 198. Not available
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on for Sun Angles or North Pointers.
page 191. • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
ton to convert the object into a special sected by the selected object. See “Trim
and Extend” on page 198. Not available
for Sun Angles or North Pointers.

Editing Arc Based Objects

Objects are considered arc-based when they CAD arcs, curved walls and railings, curved
can be edited similar to CAD arcs using their stairs, and curved roads are examples of arc-
edit handles. based objects.

150
CAFull_RM.book Page 151 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Most arc-based objects can be connected to

other like objects to form polylines or The behavior of the edit handles may
polyline-based objects. depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.

Resize Reshape
(changes radius) (moves center)

Move
Chord
Rotate

Extend Move Arc

Some objects, notably curved walls, have (along arc or chord) Center
arc-based editing behavior only when Move
selected on certain surfaces. See “Editing
• Two Move edit handles allow the arc to
Walls” on page 231.
be relocated without changing its shape.
Other objects, such as curved stairs and One is located at the center of the chord
roads, have additional edit handles that allow and the other, at the arc center.
you to concentrically adjust the object’s • If you would like to snap one of these
width. center points to another point, use that
handle when moving the arc. See “Align-
The currently active Arc Creation Mode
ing Arc Centers” on page 183.
determines how an arc-based object is
drawn. Once an arc is drawn, the active Arc • Click and drag the Move handle to move
Creation Mode does not affect it. See the object according the currently active
“Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
page 892. on page 137.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
Using the Edit Handles other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
When selected, a typical arc-based object restrictions can be overridden by holding
displays seven edit handles. down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.
Any action performed using the edit handles
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time.

151
CAFull_RM.book Page 152 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Arc Based Objects

Resize
• Drag the small, round Resize edit handle
to change the radius and included angle
of the arc while maintaining its center.

Move edit handle

Rotate
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the Resize edit handle
arc, either about its center or about the
Reshape
current CAD point. See “Rotating
Objects” on page 188. • Drag the small triangular Reshape
handle to change the length and location
Extend
of the center without moving the
• The end edit handles expand or contract endpoints.
the arc when moved along the arc radius
or chord.
• If you follow the path of the arc, the end
edit handles allow you to adjust the arc
length.
• The angle formed by the center point of
the arc and its two endpoints is referred to Reshape edit handle
as the Included Angle. If Angle Snaps
• If the object has a locked center, the
are on, the Included Angle of the arc, Reshape edit handle does not display.
as measured in degrees, can be rotated at See “Using Lock Center” on page 155.
Allowed Angles. See “Angle Snaps” on
Adjust Width
page 135.
• Right-click and drag it to change the Some arc-based objects, such as stairs, have
adjacent arc into a line, or vice versa. See additional handles that allow the width of the
“Alternate” on page 138. object to be adjusted.

Extend edit handles

152
CAFull_RM.book Page 153 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Using the Edit Toolbar

A selected arc-based object can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar.
The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for a selected arc-based
object:
Adjust Width
• Click the Select Next Object edit
• Click and drag a small, round edit handle button to select nearby objects instead of
to increase or decrease the object’s width. the selected object. See “Selecting
By default, objects are resized according Objects” on page 144.
to the Snap Unit defined in the Plan
• Click the Open Object edit button to
Defaults dialog. See “General Plan
open the specification dialog for the
Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
selected object(s). See “Specification
Dialogs” on page 33.
Using Dimensions
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
Dimensions can be used to position
copy the selected object(s) to the Win-
arc-based objects. Dimension lines
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
typically locate tangent extension lines and
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting
any extension lines that may be parallel to
Objects” on page 191.
those lines rather than the arc itself. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
page 831 and “Extension Snaps” on page edit button to create a copy of the
134. selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Using Extension Line Snaps Place” on page 193.
Extension line snaps can be useful when • Click the Delete edit button to delete
editing arc-based objects. See “Extension the selected object(s). See “Deleting
Snaps” on page 134. Objects” on page 196.
• Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the
Specification Dialog Object edit button to copy, move,
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Arc-based objects can be edited using their object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
specification dialogs. See “Arc Specification Object Dialog” on page 200.
Dialog” on page 895.

153
CAFull_RM.book Page 154 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Arc Based Objects

• Click the Multiple Copy edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to make a series of copies at set intervals. Polyline” on page 205.
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194. • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
• Click the Accurate Move edit button ton to change an arc-based object to a
to slow down the mouse speed when line, or vice versa. See “Change Line/
using the edit handles. See “Accurate Arc” on page 186.
Move” on page 179. • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
• Click the Point to Point Move edit edit button to convert the selected arc into
button to accurately move the selected a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Poly-
object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on line” on page 187.
page 179. • Click the Lock Center edit button to
• Click the Center Object edit button lock the selected arc-based object’s cen-
to center an object along along a wall ter. See “Using Lock Center” on page
within a room or relative to a cabinet 155.
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
• Click the Reflect About Object edit button to adjust the arc and attached
button to reflect the selected object(s) line(s) so they transition smoothly. See
about another object. See “Reflecting “Using Make Arc Tangent” on page 182.
Objects” on page 190. Only available when a selected arc is
attached on one or both ends to another
• Click the Move to Front of Group line or arc.
edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Fence Select edit button to
drawing group. See “Move to Front of use the selected object(s) as a selection
Group” on page 176. fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.

• Click the Break Line edit button to • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
add a new corner or pivot point to the ton, then click on a non-parallel line or
selected object. See “Break Line” on arc to create an additional arc connecting
page 185. the two. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page
186.
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but-
ton to reverse the direction of the selected • Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on button, then click an edge adjacent to the
page 191. selected edge to chamfer the corner
between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- on page 187.
ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
ton to lengthen other object(s) until they

154
CAFull_RM.book Page 155 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

intersect the selected object. See “Trim one of its Move edit handles or when the
and Extend” on page 198. Alternate edit behavior is enabled.
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button An arc-based object with a locked center
to shorten the length of object(s) inter- lengthens and shortens along its curve when
sected by the selected object. See “Trim it is resized. When this is not possible, its
and Extend” on page 198. radius changes. In either case, its center
remains locked in the same place.
Show Arc Centers
Locked-center arcs do not display a Reshape
When working with arc-based objects edit handle when selected. See “Using the
or circles, it can be helpful to see their Edit Handles” on page 151.
center points. Click the Show Arc Centers
When it is part of a polyline, a locked-center
and Ends toggle button on the utility toolbar
arc resizes along its arc rather than its chord
to turn on their display. You can also turn on
when an adjacent line or arc is moved. Thus,
their display in the CAD Defaults dialog. See
the radius remains constant for an unlocked
“CAD Defaults Dialog” on page 875.
center arc, while the center does not change
Arc-based objects can be aligned using their for a locked-center arc.
center points. See “Aligning Arc Centers” on
page 183.

Using Lock Center

Click the Lock Center edit button to
lock or unlock the selected arc-based
object’s center. When an arc’s center is
locked, it cannot be moved except by using Unlocked center Locked center

Editing Open Polyline Based Objects

Open polyline-based objects are composed Objects are considered open polyline-based
of individual line- and arc-based objects that when they can be edited similar to open CAD
are connected at their end points but do not polylines using their edit handles.
form an enclosed area.
Open CAD polylines, connected walls,
stairs, and roads are examples of open
polyline-based objects.

155
CAFull_RM.book Page 156 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Open Polyline Based Objects

center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc

Based Objects” on page 150.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
“Selected Edge” on page 145.
Any action performed using the edit handles
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time.

The behavior of the edit handles

Other objects, such as connected stair and depends on the currently active Edit
road segments, have additional edit handles Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
that allow you to concentrically adjust the
width of all segments of the object.
Move Move arc
segment Resize
polyline
If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking arc
on a CAD polyline edge selecst the indi- Move line
vidual edge rather than the entire polyline. segment
Reshape
See “Edit Object Parts” on page 145.
arc

Using the Edit Handles Extend

Reshape Rotate
A polyline can be composed of many
polyline
segments. See “Polylines” on page 900.
Move
When selected, an open polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate • Click and drag the Move handle to move
handle, a Reshape handle at the intersection the object according the currently active
of each segment, and an Extend handle at Edit Behavior .
each end.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
Each straight, line-based segment also has a other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
Move edit handle along its length. restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked

156
CAFull_RM.book Page 157 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Rotate active Edit Behavior and whether

• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
object, either about its center or about the ments may extend, contract, or change
current CAD point. Its position varies angle to maintain their connections.
depending on which edge is currently
Resize Arc
selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page
188. • Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
to change the radius, chord length and
Extend chord position of the arc segment,
• Click and drag an Extend handle to depending on the currently active Edit
lengthen or shorten the unconnected end
Behavior and whether the arc has a
of the selected line or arc segment, or to
locked center. Adjacent segments may
change the radius of the selected arc. See
extend, contract, or change angle to
“Editing Arc Based Objects” on page
maintain their connections.
150.
Reshape Arc
• Right-click and drag it to change the
adjacent line into an arc, or vice versa. • Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
See “Alternate” on page 138. dle to change the radius of the arc without
moving its end points. Only available if
Reshape
the arc has an unlocked center.
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Adjust Width
change the angle and/or length of the seg-
ments on either side of it, or the size of Some arc-based objects, such as stairs and
the object, depending on the currently roads, have additional handles that allow the
active Edit Behavior . width of the object to be adjusted.

Move Line Segment Adjust

Width
• The Move Line Segment edit handle is
found on straight segments of open
polylines and moves the straight section
according to the currently active Edit
Behavior . Adjacent segments may
extend or contract in their original direc- • Click and drag a small, round edit handle
tions to maintain their connections. to increase or decrease the object’s width.
Move Arc By default, objects are resized in 1"
increments. This Snap Unit is defined in
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
the Plan Defaults dialog. See “General
to change the radius and/or chord length
Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
or position, depending on the currently

157
CAFull_RM.book Page 158 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Open Polyline Based Objects

Using Dimensions elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting

Objects” on page 191.
Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape polyline-based objects. See • Click the Copy and Paste in Place
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on edit button to create a copy of the
page 831. selected object(s) at the same location as
the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Using Extension Line Snaps Place” on page 193.
Extension line snaps, especially tangent • Click the Delete edit button to delete
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline the selected object(s). See “Deleting
vertices. See “Extension Snaps” on page 134. Objects” on page 196.
• Click the Transform/Replicate
Using the Specification
Dialog Object edit button to copy, move,
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Open polyline-based objects can be edited object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
using their specification dialogs. See Object Dialog” on page 200.
“Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 901.
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button
Using the Edit Toolbar to make a series of copies at set intervals.
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
A selected open polyline-based object can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons • Click the Accurate Move edit button
on the edit toolbar. to slow down the mouse speed when
using the edit handles. See “Accurate
The following toolbar buttons may display Move” on page 179.
on the edit toolbar for a selected open
polyline-based object: • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to make the selected
• Click the Select Next Object edit straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
button to select nearby objects instead of another straight edge. See “Using Make
the selected object. See “Selecting Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. Not
Objects” on page 144. available when the selected edge is an
• Click the Open Object edit button to arc.
open the specification dialog for the • Click the Point to Point Move edit
selected object(s). See “Specification button to accurately move the selected
Dialogs” on page 33. object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to page 179.
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- • Click the Add to Library edit button
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted to add the selected object(s) to the library.
See “Adding a New Object” on page 700.

158
CAFull_RM.book Page 159 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Click the Center Object edit button • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
to center an object along along a wall edit button to convert the selected arc into
within a room or relative to a cabinet a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Poly-
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. line” on page 187. Only available when
the selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit
button to reflect the selected object(s) • Click the Lock Center edit button to
about another object. See “Reflecting lock the center of the selected curved
Objects” on page 190. edge. See “Using Lock Center” on page
155. Only available when the selected
• Click the Move to Front of Group edge is an arc.
edit button to display the selected object
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
drawing group. See “Move to Front of button to adjust the selected curved edge
Group” on page 176. and attached edge(s) so they form a
smooth shape. See “Using Make Arc
• Click the Break Line edit button to Tangent” on page 182. Only available
add a new corner or pivot point to the when the selected edge is an arc attached
selected object. See “Break Line” on on one or both ends to another line or arc.
page 185.
• Click the Fence Select edit button to
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- use the selected object(s) as a selection
ton to reverse the direction of the selected fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on
page 191. • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
ton, then click on an adjacent edge to cre-
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- ate an arc connecting the two. See “Fillet
ton to convert the object into a special Two Lines” on page 186. Cannot be used
polyline-based object. See “Convert if the adjacent edge is an arc.
Polyline” on page 205.
• Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit
• Click the Change Line/Arc edit but- button, then click on an edge adjacent to
ton to change a line-based polyline edge the selected edge to chamfer the corner
to an arc, or vice versa. See “Change between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines”
Line/Arc” on page 186. on page 187.
• Click the Record Walkthrough Along
• Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Path edit button to record a walk- ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
through movie of your model along the intersect the selected object. See “Trim
path defined by the selected polyline. See and Extend” on page 198.
“Walkthroughs” on page 948.
• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
to shorten the length of object(s) inter-

159
CAFull_RM.book Page 160 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects

sected by the selected object. See “Trim

and Extend” on page 198.

Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects

Closed polyline-based objects are composed Other objects, such as connected road
of individual line- and arc-based objects segments, have additional edit handles that
joined end-to-end and forming an enclosed allow you to concentrically adjust the width
area. of all segments of the object.
Objects are considered closed polyline-based
when they can be edited similar to closed If Edit Object Parts is enabled, clicking
CAD polylines using their edit handles. on a polyline edge selects the individual
edge rather than the entire polyline. See “Edit
Closed CAD polylines, slabs and roof planes Object Parts” on page 145.
are examples of closed polyline-based
objects. Using the Edit Handles
Some objects, notably walls, have closed A polyline can be composed of many
polyline-based editing behavior only when segments. See “Polylines” on page 900.
they are selected on certain surfaces in 3D
views. See “Editing Walls” on page 231. When selected, a closed polyline-based
object displays a Move handle, a Rotate
handle, and a Reshape handle at the
intersection of each segment.
Each straight, line-based segment has a
Move edit handle along its length.
Each curved, arc-based segment has its own
Move handle at the center of its chord, a
Resize handle and, if it has an unlocked
center, a Reshape handle. See “Editing Arc
Based Objects” on page 150.
When a polyline is selected, the edge that
you click nearest is called the selected edge,
and certain operations affect only this edge.
The Move handle of the selected edge is
larger than that of other edges. It displays
along the length of a line segment, or at the
center of the chord on an arc segment. See
“Selected Edge” on page 145.

160
CAFull_RM.book Page 161 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Any action performed using the edit handles the object, depending on the currently
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or active Edit Behavior .
any two mouse buttons at the same time.
Move Line Segment
The behavior of the edit handles may • The Move Line Segment edit handle is
depend on the currently active Edit found on straight segments of closed
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137. polylines and moves the straight section
according to the currently active Edit
Behavior . Adjacent segments may
Move arc Rotate
extend or contract in their original direc-
segment
Move Resize tions to maintain their connections.
polyline arc
Move Arc
Reshape
• Click and drag the Move Arc edit handle
arc
to change the radius and/or chord length
or position, depending on the currently
Reshape Move line
polyline segment active Edit Behavior and whether
the arc has a locked center. Adjacent seg-
Move ments may extend, contract, or change
• Click and drag the Move handle to move angle to maintain their connections.
the object according the currently active Resize Arc
Edit Behavior . • Click and drag the Resize Arc edit handle
• Movement may be limited or stopped by to change the radius, chord length and
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move chord position of the arc segment,
restrictions can be overridden by holding depending on the currently active Edit
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See Behavior and whether the arc has a
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178. locked center. Adjacent segments may
Rotate extend, contract, or change angle to
maintain their connections.
• The Rotate handle is used to rotate the
object, either about its center or about the Reshape Arc
current CAD point. Its position varies • Click and drag the Reshape Arc edit han-
depending on which edge is currently dle to change the radius of the arc without
selected. See “Rotating Objects” on page moving its end points. Only available if
188. the arc has an unlocked center.
Reshape
• Click and drag a Reshape edit handle to
Using Dimensions
change the angle and/or length of the seg- Dimensions can be used to move or
ments on either side of it, or the size of reshape closed polyline-based objects.

161
CAFull_RM.book Page 162 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects

See “Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on selected object(s) at the same location as
page 831. the original. See “Copy and Paste in
Place” on page 193.
Using Extension Line Snaps
• Click the Delete edit button to delete
Extension line snaps, especially tangent the selected object(s). See “Deleting
snaps, can be useful when editing polyline Objects” on page 196.
vertices. See “Extension Snaps” on page 134. • Click the Transform/Replicate

Using the Object edit button to copy, move,

rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
Specification Dialog
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate
Closed polyline-based objects can be edited Object Dialog” on page 200.
using their specification dialogs. See
“Polyline Specification Dialog” on page 901. • Click the Multiple Copy edit button
to make a series of copies at set intervals.
Using the Edit Toolbar See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.

A selected closed polyline-based object can • Click the Accurate Move edit button
be edited in a variety of ways using the to slow down the mouse speed when
buttons on the edit toolbar. using the edit handles. See “Accurate
Move” on page 179.
The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed • Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
polyline-based object: edit button to make the selected
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
• Click the Select Next Object edit another straight edge by either rotating
button to select nearby objects instead of the selected edge or the entire polyline.
the selected object. See “Selecting See “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular”
Objects” on page 144. on page 181. Not available when the
selected edge is an arc.
• Click the Open Object edit button to
open the specification dialog for the • Click the Point to Point Move edit
selected object(s). See “Specification button to accurately move the selected
Dialogs” on page 33. object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
page 179.
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- • Click the Add to Library edit button
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted to add the selected object(s) to the library.
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting See “Adding a New Object” on page 700.
Objects” on page 191.
• Click the Center Object edit button
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place to center an object along along a wall
edit button to create a copy of the

162
CAFull_RM.book Page 163 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

within a room or relative to a cabinet • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182. ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Reflect About Object edit polyline-based object. See “Convert
button to reflect the selected object(s) Polyline” on page 205.
about another object. See “Reflecting • Click the Change Line/Arc edit but-
Objects” on page 190. ton to change a line-based polyline edge
• Click the Move to Front of Group to an arc, or vice versa. See “Change
edit button to display the selected object Line/Arc” on page 186.
in front of other objects in the same • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
drawing group. See “Move to Front of edit button to convert the selected arc into
Group” on page 176. a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Poly-
• Click the Break Line edit button to line” on page 187. Only available when
add a new corner or pivot point to the the selected edge is an arc.
selected object. See “Break Line” on • Click the Lock Center edit button to
page 185. lock the center of the selected curved
• Click the Reverse Direction edit but- edge. See “Using Lock Center” on page
ton to reverse the direction of the selected 155. Only available when the selected
object(s). See “Reverse Direction” on edge is an arc.
page 191. • Click the Make Arc Tangent edit
• Click the Union edit button to join button to adjust the selected curved edge
two or more objects. See “Union, Inter- and attached edge(s) so they form a
section, and Subtract” on page 202. Not smooth shape. See “Using Make Arc
available for objects specified as holes. Tangent” on page 182. Only available
when the selected edge is an arc attached
• Click the Intersection edit button to on one or both ends to another line or arc.
create a new object defined by the areas
shared by the original objects. See • Click the Fence Select edit button to
“Union, Intersection, and Subtract” on use the selected object(s) as a selection
page 202. Not available for objects speci- fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
fied as holes. • Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
• Click the Subtract edit button, then ton, then click on an adjacent edge to cre-
click a second object to remove the area ate an arc connecting the two. See “Fillet
shared by both objects. See “Union, Two Lines” on page 186. Cannot be used
Intersection, and Subtract” on page 202. if the adjacent edge is an arc.
Not available for objects specified as • Click the Record Walkthrough Along
holes. Path edit button to record a walk-
through movie of your model along the

163
CAFull_RM.book Page 164 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Box-Based Objects

path defined by the selected polyline. See • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
“Walkthroughs” on page 948. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Chamfer Two Lines edit intersect the selected object. See “Trim
button, then click an edge adjacent to the and Extend” on page 198.
selected edge to chamfer the corner • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
between them. See “Chamfer Two Lines” to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
on page 187. sected by the selected object. See “Trim
and Extend” on page 198.

Editing Box-Based Objects

Objects are considered box-based when they Using the Edit Handles
can be edited similar to CAD boxes using
their edit handles. When selected, a box-based object displays
ten edit handles. Unlike polylines, boxes
Box-based objects are similar to closed must always have four sides with right-
polyline-based objects, but must always have angled corners.
four sides with right-angled corners.
Any action performed using the edit handles
In addition to the CAD Box tools, Text can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
objects, many library symbols, CAD blocks, any two mouse buttons at the same time.
pictures and images are examples of box-
based objects.
The behavior of the edit handles may
depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.

Extend Move

Resize

Rotate

• Click and drag the Move handle to move

the object according the currently active
Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
on page 137.

164
CAFull_RM.book Page 165 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Movement may be limited or stopped by

other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.

Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to move or
reshape box-based objects. See
• The four Resize handles located at each
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
corner are used to increase or decrease
page 831.
the size of the object.
Using the
Specification Dialog
Box-based objects can be edited using their
specification dialogs. See “CAD Box
Specification Dialog” on page 905.

• The four Extend handles display along Using the Edit Toolbar
each edge. If you select an object on an A selected closed polyline-based object can
edge, the Extend handle displays at the be edited in a variety of ways using the
point where you clicked; otherwise, it buttons on the edit toolbar.
displays at the center of the edge.
The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for a selected closed
polyline-based object:

• Click the Select Next Object edit

button to select nearby objects instead of
the selected object. See “Selecting
• The triangular Rotate handle located Objects” on page 144.
near the selected edge of the object is
used to rotate it either about its center or • Click the Open Object edit button to
the current CAD point. The pointer open the specification dialog for the
changes to a circular arrow when selected object(s). See “Specification
moved over this handle. See “Rotating Dialogs” on page 33.
Objects” on page 188.

165
CAFull_RM.book Page 166 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Spline Based Objects

• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to available when the selected edge is an
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- arc.
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted • Click the Point to Point Move edit
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting button to accurately move the selected
Objects” on page 191. object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place page 179.
edit button to create a copy of the • Click the Center Object edit button
selected object(s) at the same location as to center an object along along a wall
the original. See “Copy and Paste in within a room or relative to a cabinet
Place” on page 193. fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete • Click the Reflect About Object edit
the selected object(s). See “Deleting button to reflect the selected object(s)
Objects” on page 196. about another object. See “Reflecting
• Click the Transform/Replicate Objects” on page 190.
Object edit button to copy, move, • Click the Move to Front of Group
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected edit button to display the selected object
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate in front of other objects in the same
Object Dialog” on page 200. drawing group. See “Move to Front of
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button Group” on page 176.
to make a series of copies at set intervals. • Click the Convert Polyline edit but-
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194. ton to convert the object into a special
• Click the Accurate Move edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to slow down the mouse speed when Polyline” on page 205.
using the edit handles. See “Accurate • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Move” on page 179. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular intersect the selected object. See “Trim
edit button to make the selected and Extend” on page 198.
straight edge parallel or perpendicular to • Click the Trim Object(s) edit button
another straight edge. See “Using Make to shorten the length of object(s) inter-
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. Not sected by the selected object. See “Trim
and Extend” on page 198.

Editing Spline Based Objects

Objects are considered spline-based when using their edit handles. See “Splines” on
they can be edited similar to CAD splines page 908.

166
CAFull_RM.book Page 167 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Sprinkler lines, spline terrain curbs, spline Move

terrain walls and both round and kidney- • Click and drag the Move handle to move
shaped terrain features are spline-based the object according the currently active
objects.
Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
on page 137.
• Movement may be limited or stopped by
other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.
Rotate
• Click and drag the Rotate edit handle to
rotate the entire spline.
Reshape
Using the Edit Handles • The Reshape edit handles display along
the spline at each vertex. Click and drag a
When a spline is selected, several different
Reshape edit handle to change the length,
types of handles display. How many handles
angle and curve of adjacent segments
display depends on whether the Advanced
without affecting other reshape handles.
Splines edit button is on or not. See
“Advanced Splines” on page 170.
Any action performed using the edit handles
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time.

The behavior of the edit handles may

depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.

Resize
Reshape
• The Resize edit handles display along the
Move spline, between each vertex. Click and
drag a Resize edit handle to move the
adjacent vertices and lengthen or shorten
adjacent segments.
Resize

Rotate

167
CAFull_RM.book Page 168 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Spline Based Objects

is enabled. See “Lock Control Handle

Angle” on page 171.

Using the
Specification Dialog
Spline-based objects can be edited using
their specification dialogs. See “Polyline
Specification Dialog” on page 901.

Advanced Splines Using the Edit Toolbar

Additional edit handles, called Control A selected spline-based object can be edited
Handles, display beside each spline vertex in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
when Advanced Splines is enabled. See edit toolbar.
“Advanced Splines” on page 170.
The following toolbar buttons may display
on the edit toolbar for a selected spline-based
Control
Handles
object:

Select Next Object - Select

nearby objects instead of the
selected spline.
Tangent lines Open Object - Open the specifica-
through the vertex tion dialog for the selected
object(s). See “Polyline Specifica-
• Click and drag a round Control edit han- tion Dialog” on page 901.
dle to change the angle of the associated Copy/Paste - Copy the selected
tangent line. object(s) to the Windows Clipboard
so they can be pasted elsewhere.
See “Copy/Paste” on page 192.
Copy and Paste in Place - Create
a copy of the selected object(s) at
the same location as the original.
See “Copy and Paste in Place” on
page 193.
Delete - Delete the selected
object(s). See “Deleting Objects” on
page 196.

• If two tangent lines pass through a vertex,

the angle between them remains constant
as long as Lock Control Handle Angle

168
CAFull_RM.book Page 169 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Transform/Replicate Object - Trim Object(s) - Shorten the length

Copy, move, rotate, resize, or of object(s) intersected by the
reflect the selected object(s). See selected object. See “Trim and
“Transform/Replicate Object Dia- Extend” on page 198.
log” on page 200. Extend Object(s) - Lengthen other
Multiple Copy - Make a series of object(s) until they intersect the
copies of the selected object at set selected object. See “Trim and
intervals. See “Multiple Copy” on Extend” on page 198.
page 194. Convert Polyline - Convert the
Accurate Move - Slow down the object into a special polyline-based
mouse speed when using the edit object. See “Convert Polyline” on
handles. See “Accurate Move” on page 205.
page 179. Fence Select - Use the selected
Make Parallel/Perpendicular - object(s) as a selection fence..
Make the selected straight edge See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
parallel or perpendicular to another
Convert Spline to Polyline - Con-
straight edge. See “Make Parallel/
vert the selected spline into a
Perpendicular” on page 186.
polyline. See “Convert to Spline” on
Point to Point Move - Accurately page 208.
move the selected object(s). See
Record Walkthrough Along Path
“Point to Point Move” on page 179.
- Record a walkthrough movie of
Make CAD Block - Block the your model along the path defined
selected object(s) together. See by the selected spline. See “Walk-
“CAD Blocks” on page 912. throughs” on page 948.
Add to Library - Add the selected Advanced Splines - Turn on
object(s) to the library. See “Adding advanced splines for the selected
a New Object” on page 700. spline. See “Advanced Splines” on
Center Object - Center the page 170.
selected objects(s) along a wall Straighten Spline Segment -
within a room or relative to a cabi- Straighten a segment of an
net fixture. See “Center Object” on advanced spline. See “Straighten
page 180. Spline Segment” on page 170. Only
Reflect About Object - Reflect the available when Advanced Splines is
selected object(s) about another turned on.
object. See “Reflecting Objects” on Lock Control Handle Angle -
page 190. Maintain the relative angle between
Move to Front of Group - Display the vertex and its control handles.
the selected objects in front of other See “Lock Control Handle Angle”
objects in floor plan view. See on page 171. Only available when
“Move to Front of Group” on page Advanced Splines is turned on.
176.
Break Line - Add a new corner or Advanced Splines
pivot point to the selected object.
See “Break Line” on page 185. Click the Advanced Splines edit
button to display additional edit

169
CAFull_RM.book Page 170 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Spline Based Objects

handles called Control Handles. These edit Straighten Spline Segment

handles allow you to reshape the spline with
more control at each vertex. The Straighten Spline Segment edit
button is used to straighten a segment
Tangent line of an advanced spline between two vertex
points.

Vertex Control To use, first select the spline. Click the

Handles
Straighten Spline Segment edit button,
then click the spline between two vertices.
The line between the vertex and the control That portion becomes straight.
handles defines the tangent to the spline
through the vertex.
• Move the control handles at the end of
the line to change the direction of the
spline at that point. The spline curves
away from its tangent direction at the ver-
tex on its way to the next vertex.
• Change the shape of the spline by click- Click a spline segment Result
ing and dragging the control handles.
If you reselect the spline, you see that the
two control handles point toward the straight
section from each vertex point on either end
of the straight section.

Control handle Result

Notice that the control handles on either side

of a vertex maintain their relationship to each
other in a straight line. When one is moved,
the other moves to keep the tangent line
tangent with the vertex. Lock Control Handle Angle
You can specify all subsequently drawn The Lock Control Handle Angle edit
splines to be Advanced Splines in the button is available when Advanced
Preferences dialog. See “CAD Panel” on Splines is enabled, and is turned on by
page 89. default, as well. This tool maintains the
relative angle between the vertex and its
control handles.

Click the Lock Control Handle Angle

edit button to free the control of the relative

170
CAFull_RM.book Page 171 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

edit angles between the vertex and its control

handles. The control handles can now be
adjusted individually. The opposite handle
remains unaffected by the change. Notice
that the spline adjusts so that it is tangent to
the lines between the vertex and both of its
control handles. Result

Notice that the control handles are not colinear

Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

Objects created using the Circle Tools
are unusual in that no architectural The behavior of the edit handles may
objects share their functionalities. depend on the currently active Edit
Behavior. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.

Using the Edit Handles

When selected, circles, ovals and ellipses Reshape
display eleven edit handles. Move

Unlike Ovals and Ellipses , a Circle

Concentric
cannot be edited into any other shapes; it Resize
can only be a circle unless it is converted into
a polyline. See “Convert Curve to Polyline” Rotate
on page 187.
Any action performed using the edit handles Move
can be cancelled by pressing the Esc key or
any two mouse buttons at the same time. • Click and drag the Move handle to move
the object according the currently active
Edit Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors”
on page 137.

171
CAFull_RM.book Page 172 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Circles, Ovals and Ellipses

• Movement may be limited or stopped by

other objects or Snap Behaviors. Move
restrictions can be overridden by holding
down the Ctrl key while dragging. See
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178.
Rotate
• Click and drag the Rotate handle of an
oval or ellipse to change its orientation.
Concentric Resize
• The Concentric Resize edit handle dis-
plays on the perimeter of a circle between
a corner Reshape handle and the center.
Click and drag this handle to resize the
circle without moving its center point.

Reshape
• The eight edit handles beyond the perim-
eter are Reshape edit handles. Move them
in or out to resize and reshape an oval or
ellipse.

Using Dimensions
Dimensions can be used to move or
resize circle-based objects. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on
page 831.

• Unlike ovals and ellipses, circles cannot Using the

be reshaped. When a Reshape handle is Specification Dialog
dragged on a circle, it is only resized.
Circles, ovals and ellipses can be edited
using their specification dialogs. See “CAD
Circle/Oval/Ellipse Specification Dialog” on
page 898.

172
CAFull_RM.book Page 173 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Using the Edit Toolbar • Click the Multiple Copy edit button
A selected circle, oval or ellipse can be to make a series of copies at set intervals.
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
on the edit toolbar.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button
The following toolbar buttons may display to slow down the mouse speed when
on the edit toolbar for a selected circle, oval using the edit handles. See “Accurate
or ellipse: Move” on page 179.
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
• Click the Select Next Object edit
button to select nearby objects instead of edit button to make the selected
the selected object. See “Selecting straight edge parallel or perpendicular to
Objects” on page 144. another straight edge. See “Using Make
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. Not
• Click the Open Object edit button to available when the selected edge is an
open the specification dialog for the arc.
selected object(s). See “Specification
Dialogs” on page 33. • Click the Point to Point Move edit
button to accurately move the selected
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to object(s). See “Point to Point Move” on
copy the selected object(s) to the Win- page 179.
dows Clipboard so they can be pasted
elsewhere. See “Copying and Pasting • Click the Center Object edit button
Objects” on page 191. to center an object along along a wall
within a room or relative to a cabinet
• Click the Copy and Paste in Place fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182.
edit button to create a copy of the
selected object(s) at the same location as • Click the Reflect About Object edit
the original. See “Copy and Paste in button to reflect the selected object(s)
Place” on page 193. about another object. See “Reflecting
Objects” on page 190.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete
the selected object(s). See “Deleting • Click the Move to Front of Group
Objects” on page 196. edit button to display the selected object
• Click the Transform/Replicate in front of other objects in the same
drawing group. See “Move to Front of
Object edit button to copy, move, Group” on page 176.
rotate, resize, or reflect the selected
object(s). See “Transform/Replicate • Click the Extend Object(s) edit but-
Object Dialog” on page 200. ton to lengthen other object(s) until they
intersect the selected object. See “Trim
and Extend” on page 198. Not available
for ellipses.

173
CAFull_RM.book Page 174 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Architectural and CAD Blocks

• Click the Trim Object(s) edit button polyline-based object. See “Convert
to shorten the length of object(s) inter- Polyline” on page 205.
sected by the selected object. See “Trim • Click the Convert Curve to Polyline
and Extend” on page 198. Not available edit button to convert the selected circle,
for ellipses. oval or ellipse into a polyline. See “Con-
• Click the Convert Polyline edit but- vert Curve to Polyline” on page 187.
ton to convert the object into a special

Architectural and CAD Blocks

An architectural block is a group of objects CAD objects can be group-selected
joined together so that they behave as a and blocked together using the Make
single object. When an architectural block is CAD Block edit button.
created, it behaves as a single object while
The Explode CAD Block edit button
the components retain their own attributes.
breaks a CAD block into its individual
See “Architectural Blocks” on page 676.
components.
A CAD block is a group of CAD objects that
have been joined together so that they behave Add to Library
as a single object. Architectural objects
cannot be included in a CAD block, nor vice Architectural and CAD blocks can be
versa. See “CAD Blocks” on page 912. added to the library by clicking the
Add to Library edit button. See “Placing
Both architectural and CAD blocks can be Library Objects” on page 690.
added to the library for use in other plans.
Replace From Library
Blocking Objects
An architectural or CAD block can be
Architectural objects can be group- replaced by another object from the
selected and blocked together using the library by clicking the Replace from
Make Architectural Block edit button. Library edit button. An architectural block
The Explode Architectural Block edit can be replaced by an architectural object or
button breaks an architectural block block, while a CAD block can be replaced by
into its individual components. another CAD block. See “Replace From
Library” on page 693.

Displaying Objects
The display of objects in 2D and 3D views Objects” on page 117.
can be controlled by layer. See “Displaying

174
CAFull_RM.book Page 175 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Line and Fill Styles To display views in gray scale

Line style, weight and color can be 1. Select Tools> Display Settings> Color
controlled by layer or overridden in the
specification dialogs for many objects. See Off to toggle color off.
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.
2. Select Edit> Preferences to open
You can also toggle the on screen display of the Preferences dialog.
line weights on and off. See “Show Line 3. On the Appearance panel, check Obey
Weights” on page 996. Color On/Off Setting. See “Appear-
In addition, many objects have a fill style ance Panel” on page 71.
that can be specified in the objects’
specification dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on To display views in black and white
page 902.
1. Select Tools> Display Settings> Color
Color On/Off Off to toggle color off.
The display of color on-screen can be 2. Select Edit> Preferences to open
toggled on and off in all views except the Preferences dialog.
most rendered views by selecting Tools>
Display Settings> Color On/Off. 3. On the Appearance panel, uncheck
Obey Color On/Off Setting. See
You can set defaults to specify whether cross “Appearance Panel” on page 71.
section/elevations, camera views and
overviews using the Vector View rendering When color is toggled off and Obey Color
technique are generated with colors turned in On/Off Setting is unchecked, all lines
the 3D Settings dialog. See “Options Tab” appear in black and solid fills appear in either
on page 745. white or black, depending on which is closer
to the actual line or fill color when color is
The display of colors may or may not make a turned on. The background remains as
view easier to understand. Experiment to see defined in the Preferences dialog. See
what works for you, then set your default in “Colors Panel” on page 74.
the 3D Settings dialog for each view.
You can also print in color, black and white,
Colors are used in Vector Views to represent or gray scale. See “Print Dialog” on page
different materials. The colors can be printed 1006.
if you have a color printer, or can appear as
shades of gray on a black and white printer. Arc Centers and Ends
If you have assigned a picture file to
represent the texture of a material in rendered The display of arc center- and
views, the program can sample that picture endpoints, and the display of circle
file and define an approximate color to use in center points can be enabled by clicking the
all Vector views. See “Define Material Show Arc Centers and Ends toggle button
Dialog” on page 719.

175
CAFull_RM.book Page 176 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Objects

or in the CAD Defaults dialog. See “CAD Group, but still displays behind objects in the
Defaults Dialog” on page 875. Front Group.

Drawing Groups Move to Front of Group

Each object in a plan or layout file belongs to Click the Move to Front of Group
one of three drawing groups, which edit button to move the selected
influences whether it displays in front of or object(s) so that it displays in front of other
behind other objects. objects in the same drawing group. Move to
• The Default Group is where most Front of Group functions like the checkbox
objects are placed when first created. of the same name in the object’s specification
dialog.
• Objects moved to the Back Group dis-
play behind those in the other two draw-
ing groups.
• Objects moved to the Front Group dis-
play in front of those in the other two
drawing groups.
With the exception of imported pictures,
when an object is first created, it is placed in
the Default Group. Objects in this group
display in front of or behind one another
according to program-defined rules that
Move to Front of Group is useful for
cannot be modified.
creating a sense of depth or to improve a
Once a CAD or CAD-based object is created, drawing’s clarity. For example, you can
though, you can control how it displays move a solid circle representing rebar to the
relative to other objects using its front of a foundation wall with a concrete fill
specification dialog. See “Line Style Tab” on pattern in a cross section so that the rebar is
page 889. not masked by the wall’s fill pattern.
For example, you can move an object to the
Back Group or Front Group so that it Patterns and Textures
displays behind or in front of objects in the The appearance of architectural objects in 3D
other drawing groups. views is affected by the materials applied to
You can also check Move to Front of Group the objects’ surfaces. See “Materials” on
to display the object in front of other objects page 706.
in its drawing group, but not necessarily in Material patterns display in Technical
front of objects in other groups. Illustration, Line Drawing and Vector Views,
An object moved to the front of the Default while textures display in other rendered
Group, for example, displays in front of views. See “Rendering Techniques” on page
objects in that group and those in the Back 785.

176
CAFull_RM.book Page 177 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

You can turn the display of patterns in Vector Delete Surface

views on or off by selecting 3D> Toggle
In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
Patterns . Surface, then click a surface in the
In most rendered views, you can turn on or view to temporarily remove the surface from
off the display of textures by selecting 3D> the current view. See “Delete 3D Surface” on
page 757.
Toggle Textures .
Refresh Display
Low Detail Mode
Refresh Display redraws the current
Low Detail Mode suppresses patterns window to clean up extra lines, show
and textures and draws simplified missing items, and correct random on-screen
approximations of some objects in 3D. Select effects caused by changes to a model. Select
3D> Toggle Low Detail Mode to toggle Tools> Display Settings> Refresh Display
Low Detail Mode on or off. See “Low Detail or press the F5 key to refresh the on-screen
Display” on page 798. display.

Moving Objects
Objects can be moved individually and in When Object Snaps are enabled, a
groups using the edit handles, as well as a selected object snaps to its original location
variety of edit tools. if it passes over that location while being
moved.
Using the Edit Handles
The behavior of the Move edit handle varies
Select an object, then click the Move edit depending on the currently active Edit
handle and drag it to a new location. When
your pointer is over the Move handle, it Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
displays a four-headed arrow. 137.

• If the Default , Resize , Concen-

tric or Fillet edit behavior is
active, the object moves orthogonal, or at
a right angle to, any of its edges.

• If the Alternate edit behavior is

active, the selected object(s) can be
moved at Allowed Angles if Angle
As an object is moved, it jumps at set
Snaps are enabled, or orthogonal to
increments when Grid Snaps are
any of its edges if they are not. See
enabled. See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.
“Alternate” on page 138.

177
CAFull_RM.book Page 178 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Moving Objects

• If the Move edit behavior is active, the CAD Stops Move/

selected object(s) can be moved by click- Wall Stops Move
ing and dragging any edit handle that
would otherwise be used for resizing. See CAD and CAD-based objects can be set to
“Move” on page 138. stop at other CAD objects and/or at walls as
they are being moved. See “Line Style Tab”
Bumping/Pushing on page 889.

When Edit> Snap Settings> Some objects, such as cross boxes, framing
Bumping/Pushing is enabled, CAD members and insulation, are automatically
and CAD-based objects with CAD Stops set to stop when moved against other CAD
Move and/or Wall Stops Move enabled, as objects.
well as architectural objects, bump into and CAD Stops Move and Wall Stops Move do
can push one another as they are moved.
not function if Bumping/Pushing is
When an object bumps into another similar turned off.
object while it is being moved, it stops.
Continue dragging and the selected item Unrestricted Movement
resumes movement through the obstructing
object. The Maximum Bump Distance, or Many objects have restrictions placed on
the distance you must drag to override their movement by their own properties or
bumping, is set in the Preferences dialog. specification settings. Architectural objects,
See “Snap Properties Panel” on page 95. for example, bump into other 3D objects as
they are being moved when Bumping/
Bumping/Pushing also affects objects Pushing is enabled.
when they are moved using dimensions. See
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on CAD-based objects may be set to stop at
page 831. other CAD objects or at walls. See “Line
Style Tab” on page 889.
Walls, wall openings, cabinets, furnishings
and fixtures, and CAD and CAD-based Other move restrictions are activated by the
objects are examples of objects that can push Snap Settings . See “Snap Behaviors” on
other objects of these same types once they page 133.
have bumped into them. Instead of dragging
through the obstructing object(s), release the These restrictions can be overridden when
mouse button and then click and drag the necessary by holding down the Ctrl key
Move edit handle a second time in the same while dragging to move an object.
direction to push.
To move an object freely
Certain types of objects, notably roof planes,
and objects on locked layers can be bumped 1. Select the object.
but cannot be pushed. See “Layer Display 2. Hold down the Ctrl key.
Options Dialog” on page 121.

178
CAFull_RM.book Page 179 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3. Click the Move edit handle and drag it To nudge an object in 3D views, you can
to the new location. program the keys of your choice for use as
nudging hotkeys. See “Hotkeys” on page
You can also press the Ctrl key while
114.
dragging an object’s Move handle to override
move restrictions.
Point to Point Move
Accurate Move The Point to Point Move edit button
allows a selected object or group of
Click the Accurate Move edit button,
objects to be accurately moved.
then move the selected object(s) at a
slower speed than normal for greater
To use Point to Point Move
precision. Accurate Move can also be used
to resize, reshape or rotate objects. 1. Select one or more objects that you
would like to move, then click the Point
Accurate Move is not a toggle button: it
only affects the speed of the mouse during to Point Move edit button.
the next edit. The next time you want to use 2. Click a point that you want to accurately
this edit tool, you need to click it again. reposition.
You can also slow down the movement speed 3. Click the point in the plan where you
of a selection after you have started moving would like the selected point to be relo-
it by pressing the Shift key. Release the Shift cated when it is moved.
key to resume movement at normal speed. 4. The selected object(s) are moved so that
they maintain their position relative to
Nudging the point.
You can use your keyboard to move a Point to Point Move can be used with
selected object or objects by single Snap
the Copy/Paste edit button. See “To
Grid increments in 2D and 3D views1.
point to point copy” on page 196.
In floor plan view, the arrow keys are
programmed to nudge a selected object by Point to Point Move can also be used
default; however, you can program different with the Edit Area tools. See “Edit Area
buttons for nudging instead2. Tools” on page 209.
To nudge an object in floor plan view, select
it and press any of the four arrow keys: Up, Center Object
Down, Left or Right. The Center Object edit button allows
you to move walls, cabinets and other
objects so that they are centered along a wall
1.“Grid Snaps” on page 136. within a room or relative to a window or
2.TODO. cabinet.

179
CAFull_RM.book Page 180 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Aligning Objects

Move to Framing Reference Enter Coordinates

Framing members can be positioned Objects or the selected edges of some objects
relative to a Framing Reference using can be moved using the Enter Coordinates
the Move to Framing Reference edit tool. dialog. See “Entering Coordinates” on page
See “Framing Reference Markers” on page 142.
480.
Using the Transform/
Using Dimensions Replicate Object Dialog
Objects or the selected edges of some Objects and groups of objects can be
objects can be moved using moved relative to themselves or an
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using absolute location using the Transform
Dimensions” on page 831. Replicate Object dialog. See “Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog” on page 200.

Aligning Objects
It is often important to align objects such as itself. This does not align objects to the grid
text boxes, roof plane edges or walls, or to unless they were already snapped to the grid.
align objects on different floors. There are
See “Snap Behaviors” on page 133.
several methods to choose from.
Using Dimensions
Using Snap Settings
Create a temporary or manual
With Object Snaps on, you can snap the dimension relative to an object such as
edge of a selected object to that of another. a wall or line, and relocate the objects to the
Select an edge of an object. Drag it to the same dimension. See “Moving Objects
edge of another object to reveal an object Using Dimensions” on page 831.
snap point, then release the mouse.
Text objects can be aligned using set-
With Grid Snaps on and Angle
tings in the Text Specification dialog.
Snaps off, select the left side of the See “Aligning Text” on page 856.
object, and drag from the center move
handle. This snaps the selected side to the CAD Stops Move/
grid. Wall Stops Move
When both Grid Snaps and Angle CAD and CAD-based objects can be aligned
using another CAD object or a wall as a
Snaps on, objects snap at increments
guide. Check the CAD Stops Move and/or
equal to the Snap unit specified in the Plan
Wall Stops Move boxes in the objects’
Defaults dialog rather than onto the grid

180
CAFull_RM.book Page 181 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

specification dialogs, then move them until 4. If the first object is within 45 degrees of
they bump into the CAD object or wall that parallel to the second object, it is made
you wish to use as a guide for alignment. See parallel. Otherwise, it is made perpen-
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. dicular to the second object.

Using Make Parallel/ Select edge

Perpendicular
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular Click button
edit button allows you to make a
selected object parallel or perpendicular to
any straight edge. Click
wall
If you select an edge of a polyline-based
object, adjacent edges extend or contract to
maintain contact, but other edges are remain Result
unchanged. The selected edge rotates about
its endpoint if selected near the end, or about You can also make the selected edge parallel
its center if you click within its middle third. by rotating the entire object. See “Make
Parallel/Perpendicular with Polyline Based
The Make Parallel edit button displays Objects” on page 189.
for a selected CAD block instance when a
line, including a straight polyline edge, or
box edge within a block instance,straight
Center Object
polyline edge is selected. The entire block is The Center Object edit button can be
rotated to make the selected line or edge is used to center a variety of objects
perpendicular or parallel to the item along a wall within a room in floor plan
subsequently clicked on. view.

To use Make Parallel/Perpendicular Center Object can also be used to center

objects relative to windows and cabinets. At
1. Select an object such as a roof plane on least one wall must be present in the plan.
the edge that you would like to make
parallel or perpendicular to another To center an object in a room
object.
• Click near the center of the edge to 1. Select an object such a cabinet.
rotate it about the center.
2. Click the Center Object edit button.
• Click near an end to rotate the edge
about that end. 3. Click near a wall within a room to center
the selected object relative to the portion
2. Click the Make Parallel edit button of that wall defining the room.
3. Click a straight edge such as a wall.

181
CAFull_RM.book Page 182 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Aligning Objects

4. The object is moved relative to the wall If you click outside an exterior wall instead
you clicked closest to. of clicking the inside, you center the selected
• In the images below, the area physi- object along the edge of the Exterior Room.
cally closest to the vertical interior wall See “The Exterior Room” on page 271.
is highlighted for each room.
• Click in that area to center the door Using Make Arc Tangent
along the wall in that room. If a selected arc is attached on one or
both ends to another line or arc, the
Make Arc Tangent edit button displays.
Click this button to adjust the arc and
attached lines so they transition smoothly.

The door is centered in the room on the right

Before After

To use Make Arc Tangent

1. Select an arc-based object attached to

like objects one or both ends.

2. Click the Make Arc Tangent edit

button.
The door is centered in the room at the upper left
3. If the arc is attached to two objects, the
Radius of Tangent Arc dialog opens.

4. The radius from the center of curvature

to the middle of the arc-based object dis-
plays. Keep this radius or change it, and
The door is centered in the room at the lower left click OK.

182
CAFull_RM.book Page 183 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• If the arc is attached to two perpendicu- Floor” on page 359 and “CAD Defaults
lar lines, this dialog opens but the Arc Dialog” on page 875.
Radius field is not enabled.
To align center points easily, it is helpful to
5. The arc and attached segments adjust so
turn on Object Snaps and turn off Angle
that the arc radius matches the target as
closely as possible and the arc is made Snaps . See “Object Snaps” on page 133
tangent to the attached segments. and “Angle Snaps” on page 135.

Aligning Arc Centers Aligning Objects on

The center points of circles and arc-based
Different Floors
objects can be aligned, even if the objects are Objects on different floors can be aligned
on different floors, when the Reference
with one another using Object Snaps
Display is turned on and Show Arc Centers
and the Reference Display . See “Object
and Ends is enabled. See “Reference
Snaps” on page 133 and “Reference Floor”
on page 359.

Resizing Objects
Objects can be resized using the edit handles, To override any movement restrictions
specification dialogs, and the Transform/ caused by snap settings or the presence of
Replicate Object dialog. other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle.
Using the Edit Handles As an object is resized, any dimensions
Depending on the currently active Edit indicating its size will update to reflect yoru
changes. You can use dimensions as
Behavior , the end, corner and/or side
references to help you achieve the correct
edit handles can be used to resize a selected
size for most objects.
object. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.

When the Concentric edit behavior is Using the

active, dragging an object’s corner or end Specification Dialog
handle resizes it according to the Most objects can be accurately resized in
Concentric Jump value set in the their specification dialogs. See
Preferences dialog. See “Concentric” on “Specification Dialogs” on page 33.
page 139.
Objects can be resized about either their Using Dimensions
center points or the current CAD point. See
Many objects can be resized by
“Behaviors Panel” on page 93.
selecting an edge and then moving that

183
CAFull_RM.book Page 184 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Reshaping Objects

edge using dimensions. See “Using point using the Transform Replicate Object
Dimensions” on page 180. dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog” on page 200.
Using the Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog
Most objects can be resized about
either their centers or an absolute

Reshaping Objects
There is a variety of ways to reshape objects the Selected Line or Selected Arc tab of their
using the edit handles, specification dialogs specification dialogs. See “Polyline
and edit toolbar buttons. Specification Dialog” on page 901.
Some objects, notably circles and box-based
objects, cannot be reshaped - only resized. Using Dimensions
See “Resizing Objects” on page 183. Both temporary and manually drawn
dimensions can be used to increase or
Using the Edit Handles decrease the distance between the edge a
line- or polyline-based object and another,
Depending on the Edit Behavior in use, parallel edge or line.
the end, corner and/or side edit handles can
be used to reshape a selected object. See Angular Dimensions can be used to
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137. adjust the angle where two polyline segments
meet. See “Using Angular Dimensions” on
When a line-based, arc-based, or open-
page 189.
polyline based object is selected, you can
right-click and drag an end handle to change
a line into an arc or vice versa. This behavior Break Line
does not apply to closed polylines. The Break Line edit button can be
To override any movement restrictions used to break an individual line-, arc-,
caused by snap settings or the presence of or spline-based object into two segments.
other objects, press the Ctrl key while The edges of a polyline-based object can also
dragging an edit handle. be broken.

Using the Note: The Break Line edit button is not avail-
Specification Dialog able for box-based objects, objects created
with the Circle Tools, or some architectural
A variety of CAD and CAD-based objects objects such as stairs and trusses.
can be reshaped by editing values on either

184
CAFull_RM.book Page 185 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Break Line edit tool can be used to To create a complete break
create two types of breaks: partial breaks and 1. Click the object or edge that you want to
complete breaks. break into two segments.
When a partial break is created, a new corner
2. Double-click the Break Line edit
edit handle is placed at the location of the
button.
break. Partial breaks are also referred to as
joints, nodes or pivot points. 3. Click the edge to create a complete
break at that location.
• Click the Break Line edit button to
add a new corner or pivot point to the You can now click either side of the location
selected object. of the break and move the selected object or
edge completely independent of the object or
To create a partial break edge on the other side of the break.

1. Click the object or edge that you want to When Object Snaps are enabled, breaks
break into two segments. can be placed at snap locations such as
midpoints. See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
2. Click the Break Line edit button
once or press the 3 key. If you place a complete break at a polyline
corner, the adjacent polyline edges become
3. Click the edge to create a new corner disconnected.
edit handle at that location and two sepa-
rate edges on either side of that handle. Change Line/Arc
If you click and drag one of the edit handles
Select an individual line-based or arc-
on either side of the partial break, the edge
based object or a segment of a
moves at a right angle to itself and another
polyline-based object and click the Change
edge forms, connecting the moved edge with
Line/Arc edit button to convert the selected
the one on the other side that does not move.
segement from a line to an arc or vice versa.
You can remove an edge from a polyline-
based object by clicking and dragging a
corner handle until it snaps to an adjacent
corner handle.
When a complete break is created, the object
or edge is totally severed at that point.
With the exception of framing members,
complete breaks cannot be created on CAD-
based architectural objects. In the case of Make Parallel/Perpendicular
framing members, only complete breaks can
The Make Parallel edit button can be
be created.
used to reshape a polyline by making
a selected edge parallel or perpendicular to

185
CAFull_RM.book Page 186 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Reshaping Objects

another straight edge. See “Using Make 4. Click on the line or polyline segment
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181. that you want the selected line to con-
nect to with a fillet.
Fillet Two Lines 5. Continue filleting two lines by clicking
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool allows on one line, clicking the Fillet Two
you to connect two non-parallel line- Lines edit button, then clicking on
based objects using an arc of a specified the second line. The same Fillet Radius
radius. If the two lines are already connected, is used until you open the Fillet/
this arc is inserted between them. Chamfer dialog again and change it.
If the two objects are not connected and one Once two lines are filleted, the arc between
of them is an arc, both objects will extend or them can be edited. See “Editing Arc Based
contract as needed to become connected. No Objects” on page 150.
additional arc is created.
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool can also
The Fillet Two Lines edit tool is be used to join non-adjacent edges of a
available for a selected roof or ceiling plane; closed polyline as long as those edges are not
however, it cannot be used to create an arc at parallel. In doing so, polyline edges may be
a corner. Instead, it can only be used to removed.
remove edges.
To remove polyline edges
To use Fillet Two Lines
1. Click on a closed polyline segment that
1. Click on a line or polyline segment that you would like to connect to another
you would like to connect to another line segment.
or segment with a filleted corner.
2. Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but-
2. Double-click the Fillet Two Lines ton.
edit button to open the Fillet/Chamfer 3. Click on a non-adjacent edge of the
dialog. same polyline.

Chamfer Two Lines

The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool
allows you to create a straight corner
bevel of a specified size connecting any two
non-parallel lines. It can also be used to
extend an arc so that it joins to another arc.
3. Specify the desired Fillet Radius and
click OK. The Chamfer Two Lines edit tool is
used much the way as the Fillet Two Lines
edit tool. First, set the Chamfer Distance

186
CAFull_RM.book Page 187 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

in the Fillet/Chamfer dialog, then select a 2. Click the Convert Curve to

line, click the button and click a second line Polyline edit button.
to chamfer the two.
3. In the Convert Curve to Polyline dia-
Deleting Intervening Lines log, specify the number of sides you
would like the converted arc or circle-
Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Two based object to have.

Lines can also be used to eliminate parts

of a polyline. To use, fillet or chamfer two
non-adjacent lines that are in the same closed
polyline.

• The initial values in this dialog may

vary depending on the type of object
selected.
4. Click OK to convert the selected arc or
A dialog warns you that lines will be deleted circle-based object into a polyline with
if you proceed. Click OK to approve the the specified number of edges.
polyline edit and see the changes occur.
Convert to Spline
Convert Curve to Polyline Click the Convert to Spline edit
button to convert the selected polyline-
The Convert Curve to Polyline edit
based object into a spline. See “Convert to
button allows you to convert the
Spline” on page 208.
selected arc- or circle-based object to a
polyline composed of line segments.
Union, Intersection, Subtract
To convert curve to polyline Closed polyline-based
1. Select an arc-based object or circle. objects can be reshaped using
the Union, Intersection and Subtract edit
buttons. See “Union, Intersection, and
Subtract” on page 202.

Rotating Objects
Objects can be rotated individually and in By default, an object or group of objects
groups using a variety of methods. rotate about the center point of the selection
set. You can instead specify that objects

187
CAFull_RM.book Page 188 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Rotating Objects

rotate about the current CAD point. See Rotate/Resize About

“The Current Point” on page 882.
Objects can be rotated or resized about
either their own centers or the current
Using the Edit Handles
CAD point. See “Point Tools” on page 880.
Select an object, then click the triangular
Rotate edit handle and drag it in any
direction. When your pointer is over the
Rotate handle, it displays a curved arrow.
The angles of line-based objects can also be
changed by dragging an end handle in a
direction other than parallel to the object.
The object rotates about the opposite end You can specify which behavior is used by
point. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on selecting Edit> Edit Behaviors> Rotate/
page 147.
Resize About Current Point . When this
option is selected, objects rotate about the
When Angle Snaps are enabled, objects
current CAD point; when it is not selected,
snap to Allowed Angles as specified in the
object rotate about their centers.
Plan Defaults dialog as they are rotated. See
“Angle Snaps” on page 135. The Rotate/Resize About behavior can also
be specified in the Preferences dialog. See
To override any movement restrictions
“Behaviors Panel” on page 93.
caused by snap settings or the presence of
other objects, press the Ctrl key while
dragging an edit handle. Entering Coordinates
A rotated array of copies of the selected Objects can be rotated by entering
object(s) can be created using the Multiple coordinates or a distance and angle in the
Enter Coordinates dialog. See “Entering
Copy edit tool. See “To create an array Coordinates” on page 142.
of copies” on page 195.
Using Angular Dimensions
Using the
Specification Dialog Angular Dimensions are useful for
adjusting the angles of a variety of
The exact angle of some objects such as objects with straight edges.
lines, arcs, walls and the selected edges of
polylines can be specified on either the To change an angular dimension
General tab, Selected Line tab, or Selected
Arc tab of that object’s specification dialog. 1. Select CAD> Dimension> Angular
Dimension , then click and drag to
draw an angular dimension line between
the objects you want to move.

188
CAFull_RM.book Page 189 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Begin and end as close as possible to

the two objects you wish to locate.
2. Select the edge that you want to move.
3. Click the dimension value to open the
Set Angular Dimension dialog.
• The Previous Value is indicated
degrees, minutes and seconds.
Choose to either Rotate only selected edge,
as before, or to Rotate entire polyline. Your
setting remains until you access the Make
Parallel dialog again and change it.

Polylines rotate according to the current

Rotate/Resize About setting. See
“Behaviors Panel” on page 93.
4. Enter a value in the New Value field.
Using the Transform/
5. Select Rotate Edge to move the selected
Replicate Object Dialog
edge when OK is clicked or select
Rotate entire polyline to rotate the Objects and groups of objects can be
entire object the selected edge is a part rotated to a relative or absolute angle
of, maintaining the Previous Value of the using the Transform Replicate Object
angle. dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
6. Click OK to apply the change. Dialog” on page 200.

When an entire polyline is rotated using the Rotate View

Set Angular Dimension dialog, it rotates
around the vertex of the angle. To rotate everything in floor plan view,
including all objects on all floors, the
Make Parallel/Perpendicular Snap and Reference Grids, and the drawing
with Polyline Based Objects sheet, select Tools> Rotate View to open the
Rotate Plan View dialog.
The Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button usually adjusts the angle of
a selected polyline edge. See “Using Make
Parallel/Perpendicular” on page 181.
To rotate the entire polyline instead, double-
click the Make Parallel edit button to Enter the amount of degrees to rotate the
open the Make Parallel dialog. floor plan view in decimal units using either
positive or negative values.

189
CAFull_RM.book Page 190 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Reflecting Objects

The degrees rotated displays in ±180 degree Text objects rotate with the plan unless you
format. For example, if you enter 270 uncheck Rotate with plan in the Text
degrees, it displays as -90 degrees when the Specification dialog for each object. See
dialog is reopened. “Text Specification Dialog” on page 850.

Rotate View rotates a plan relative to its

The Rotate View tool does not rotate
original orientation. For example, entering objects; it literally rotates your view of
90 degrees twice results in a rotation of 90 those objects. As a result, it does not alter the
degrees, not 180 degrees. orientation of the plan in layout views or on
the printed page.

Reflecting Objects
There are several ways to reflect an object, 2. Select the object(s) to be reflected.
group of objects, or an entire plan about an
axis or another object. Either the original 3. Click the Reflect About Object edit
object(s) or copies of the original(s) can be button.
reflected. 4. Click the CAD line to reflect the selec-
tion about the line.
Reflect About Object 5. The selection is reflected around the
A selected object or objects can be CAD line, and the original is no longer
reflected about another object, there.
regardless of its angle, using the Reflect To retain a copy of the selected object(s) in
About Object edit tool. the original location, click the Copy/
Line-based objects are often used for Paste edit button before clicking the
reflecting a selection, but most objects have
Reflect About Object button.
an axis that can be used.
• When an open or closed polyline-based Using the Transform/
object is used as the reflective object, the
Replicate Object Dialog
edge that is clicked on acts as the axis.
• When a circle or box-based object such Objects and groups of objects can also
as a CAD box or cabinet is used as the be reflected horizontally or vertically
reflective object, the axis runs down the using the Transform Replicate Object
center of the object from back to front. dialog. See “Transform/Replicate Object
Dialog” on page 200.
To use Reflect About Object

1. Draw a CAD line to act as the reflection

line.

190
CAFull_RM.book Page 191 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Reverse Plan Reversing a plan rebuilds the entire model

and affects views sent to layout.
The Reverse Plan tool is a quick way
to mirror a plan so that everything is
Reverse Direction
swapped left to right.
Select a line-based, arc-based or
Select Tools> Reverse Plan to reflect an polyline-based object and click the
entire plan right to left, as though it were Reverse Direction edit button to reverse its
reflected about a vertical line. Reverse direction.
Plan reverses all floors associated with Reversing a line or polyline is useful with
the plan. certain line styles or with an arrow at one
end.

Copying and Pasting Objects

Objects can be cut, copied and pasted press Ctrl + V while in that application to
individually and as groups. They can be enable the Paste function.
copied from one floor to another, one view
window to another, and one file to another. Copy
Because copying uses the Windows
Clipboard, objects can be pasted into other Select Edit> Copy to copy the selected
applications, as well. object(s) to the Windows Clipboard.
To paste the selection in Chief Architect or
Objects cannot be pasted into any views that another application, select Edit> Paste or
they cannot be created in normally. Thus, press Ctrl + V while in that application to
CAD objects cannot be pasted into a 3D enable the Paste function.
camera view or overview.
Similarly, architectural objects cannot be Paste
pasted into CAD detail windows or onto a Select Edit> Paste to enable Paste
layout page. mode, then left- or right-click in the
A few objects, such as Terrain Perimeters current view to paste the selected object(s)
and camera symbols, cannot be copied. previously copied to the Windows Clipboard
at that location.
Cut Once pasted, these object(s) are selected.
Select Edit> Cut to remove the Objects pasted in 3D views are selected on
selected object(s) from the file and their top surfaces.
save them in the Windows Clipboard. To If the selection being pasted consists of text,
paste the selection in Chief Architect or it is placed in a Text object.
another application, select Edit> Paste or

191
CAFull_RM.book Page 192 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Copying and Pasting Objects

If the selection being pasted is an image, the • Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
Paste Image dialog opens.
ton or press the Esc key to return to the
selected objects’s main edit toolbar.
If you paste a selection in a file other than its
original source file, when you return to the
original, Paste mode is still enabled.

The Copy/Paste edit button can be used

with the edit handles in either of two ways:
by clicking or by dragging an edit handle.
The options in the Paste Image dialog and
their results are similar to those in the Screen To Copy/Paste by clicking
Capture Setup dialog. See “Creating Screen
Captures” on page 946. 1. Select an object or objects to copy.

2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,

Copy/Paste
select Edit> Copy from the menu or
Click the Copy/Paste edit button to press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
copy the selected object(s) to the Copy/Paste icon.
Windows Clipboard and immediately enable 3. If you wish to paste the copy in a differ-
the Paste function in Chief Architect. ent view or program window, open that
window.
The Copy/Paste edit button activates
4. If your cursor does not display the Copy/
Paste mode in which each available edit tool
Paste icon, select Edit> Paste from the
and handle makes a copy in addition to its
menu or press Ctrl + V.
primary function and four new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar. 5. Left- or right-click once to paste a copy
of the object at that location.
• Click the Sticky Mode edit button
remain in the current mode and place To Copy/Paste by dragging
multiple copies of the selected object(s).
1. Select an object or objects to copy.
• Click the Point to Point Move edit
button to make a copy of the selection at 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button,
a specific location. See “Point to Point select Edit> Copy from the menu or
Move” on page 179. press Ctrl + C. The cursor displays the
Copy/Paste icon.
• Click the Reflect About Object edit
button to make a copy of the selection 3. Drag an edit handle:
reflected about another object. See • Drag the Move edit handle to position
“Reflecting Objects” on page 190. the copy at a new location.

192
CAFull_RM.book Page 193 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Drag a corner handle to create a copy in Because multiple walls, railing and fencing
the same location but with a different cannot share the same space, the Copy and
size or shape. The result depends on Paste in Place edit button is not avail-
which Edit Behavior you use. See able for these objects.
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
4. You can resize or position the copy Paste Hold Position
accurately with respect to the original by When copying between different floors
watching the moved distance in the Sta- or view windows, you can paste a copy
tus Bar at the bottom of the screen. at the same absolute position as the original
selection using Paste Hold Position.
Sticky Mode
Normally, after an action is performed To use Paste Hold Position
using the edit tools or handles while in 1. Select the object(s) to be copied.
an edit mode such as Paste mode, you return
to the Main Edit Mode. Click the Sticky 2. Click the Copy/Paste edit button.
Mode edit button to remain in Paste mode 3. Switch to the desired floor or plan file
and continue pasting copies of the selected and select Edit> Paste> Paste Hold
object(s).
Position .
To exit Paste mode and return to the main
edit toolbar for the selected object, click the 4. A copy is placed at the same X, Y coor-
dinates on the new floor or in the new
Main Edit Mode edit button or press the plan as the original’s position.
Esc key on your keyboard. If you have not
pasted a copy of the selected object and Paste Special
immediately click Copy/Paste after
The Paste Special tool allows you to
returning to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky
choose a representation for the
Mode is still enabled. selection to be pasted.
Selections can be pasted as:
Sticky Mode is available when the Trim
Object(s), Extend Object(s), Copy/Paste
• Enhanced Windows Metafiles (EMF).
or Multiple Copy edit button is clicked. See See “Metafiles” on page 943.
“Trim and Extend” on page 198. • Device Independent Bitmaps (BMP). See
“Importing Pictures” on page 940.
Copy and Paste in Place • Unformated non-unicode text (TXT).
Click the Copy and Paste in Place • File Name (a path to a file). Depending
edit button to create a copy of the on the file type, it will be either opened or
selected object(s) at the same location as the imported (if supported).
original. The copy remains selected so you
• Unformatted text (HTML). Pastes as text.
can perform additional operations.

193
CAFull_RM.book Page 194 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Copying and Pasting Objects

• Model Objects - Chief Architect format, To use Multiple Copy

not compatible with other programs.
1. Select the object(s) to copy.
To use Paste Special 2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
1. Select an object, image, text or file on button.
your computer and copy it.
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
2. Switch to the desired Chief Architect you wish to make more than one set of
view window and select Edit> Paste> multiple copies.
Paste Special . 4. Click and drag the Move edit handle.
3. In the Paste Special dialog, select the Copies of the selection are made at regu-
desired representation for the selection lar intervals between the original and the
and click OK. pointer’s location.
4. Click in the drawing area to place the 5. Release the mouse button to place the
copy at that location. copies. The dragged distance determines
the number of copies placed.
Multiple Copy 6. If you clicked the Sticky Mode edit
`The Multiple Copy edit button makes button, you can drag the last object cre-
it easy to create regularly spaced ated to make additional copies.
copies of any object or group of objects,
7. Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
including CAD Blocks and Architectural
ton or press the Esc key to return to the
Blocks.
selected objects’s main edit toolbar.

Multiple Copy Dialog

Separate multiple copy intervals can be To set the copy intervals for these objects,
specified for: click the Multiple Copy button, then
• General objects
click the Multiple Copy Interval button
• Roof and floor trusses to open the Multiple Copy dialog.
• Rafters The specified intervals are retained between
• Floor and ceiling joists program sessions.
• Wall studs

194
CAFull_RM.book Page 195 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 Offset Between Copies When • Primary Number of Copies - Specify

Dragging - Click this radio button to the number of copies to be made.
specify the offsets, or copy intervals, at • Secondary Copies - Specify the number
which objects are copied as you drag with the of copies to be made when the Alternate
mouse.
edit behavior is active.
• Primary Offset - Specify the offset, or
copy interval, for each object type.
The intervals for automatically generated raf-
• Secondary Offset - You can also specify ters, joists, and studs are set on their respec-
a secondary offset, or copy interval, for tive tabs in the Build Framing dialog. See
each object type that is used when the “Build Framing Dialog” on page 467
Alternate edit behavior is active. See
“Alternate” on page 138. The Multiple Copy tool can be used
• Rotation Of All Objects - Specify the with the Alternate edit behavior to
copy interval, in degrees, to be used when create arrayed copies of objects.
objects are rotated as they are copied.
To create an array of copies
2 Evenly Distribute Copies When
Dragging - Click this radio button to 1. Select the object(s) to copy.
specify a set number of copies to be made as
you drag with the mouse. The further you 2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
drag, the wider the spaces between the button.
copies. These settings apply to all object
types. 3. Right-click to enable the Alternate
edit behavior and drag the either Move

195
CAFull_RM.book Page 196 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Deleting Objects

or the Rotate edit handle in any direc- Using Point to Point Move
tion. The Primary Offset or Primary
Number of Copies is used. The Point to Point Move edit button
can be used in combination with Copy/
4. Release the mouse button and move the
pointer in another direction. The Sec- Paste to make a copy of the selected
ondary Offset or Secondary Copies object(s) at a specified location. See “Point
value is used. to Point Move” on page 179.
5. Click the left or right mouse button to To point to point copy
place the array of copies.
1. Select the object(s) to be copied, click
A rotated array can be rotated about the the Copy/Paste edit button, then the
selected object’s center or a CAD point.
See “Rotate/Resize About” on page 188. Point to Point Move edit button.
2. Click at the start point and then at the
Using the Transform/ end point.
Replicate Object Dialog 3. An exact copy of the selected object(s)
is created at the end point while the orig-
Objects and groups of objects can be
inal remains unchanged.
copied and pasted using the Transform
Replicate Object dialog. See “Transform/
Replicate Object Dialog” on page 200. Using Reflect About Object
The Reflect About Object edit button
Copy Region as Picture can be used in combination with Copy/
The Copy Region as Picture tool Paste to make a reflected copy of the
allows you to copy any portion of the selected object(s), much the way Point to
screen and save it as a picture. See “Copy Point Move can. See “Reflect About
Region as Picture” on page 946. Object” on page 190.

Deleting Objects
Objects can be deleted in a variety of ways: • Entire categories of objects can be
• Select an object or group of objects, then deleted using the Delete Objects dialog.

click the Delete edit button, select If an object has a line with arrow or text
leader attached to it, the arrow or leader is
Edit> Delete from the menu, or press deleted if the object is deleted. To prevent the
the either the Delete or Backspace key on arrow from being deleted, drag the attached
your keyboard. end away from the object before deleting it.

196
CAFull_RM.book Page 197 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Delete Objects Dialog 3. In the Delete section, check the box for
each category of objects you want to
Use the Delete Objects dialog to delete. Click Select All to check all the
delete all objects of one or more boxes or Clear All to uncheck all boxes.
specified types in one room, on the current
• If “Roof Planes” cannot be selected,
floor, or in the entire plan.
they may be locked. See “Editing Roof
Planes” on page 387.
Although objects on locked layers can-
4. When the scope is set to Single Room:
not be selected, most can nevertheless
be deleted using the Delete Objects dialog. • Move your cursor into the drawing area
and click in a room of the plan to delete
To use the Delete Objects dialog objects of the selected type within that
room without closing the dialog.
1. Select Edit> Delete Objects to open • Continue clicking on rooms or choose a
the Delete Objects dialog. different Delete Scope.
• Click Done when all selections have
been deleted.
5. If you select All Rooms On This Floor
or All Floors, you do not need to click in
floor plan view. The OK button
becomes available, and clicking it closes
the dialog and delete the specified
objects.

Deleting Polyline Edges

There are number of different ways to delete
individual edges of polyline-based objects:

• Select Edit Object Parts . Select the

edge and delete. See “Edit Object Parts”
on page 145.
• Drag a corner handle until it overlaps an
adjacent corner handle to remove the
edge between them and merge them into
a single handle.
• Create a complete break at both ends.
2. Specify the Delete Scope as Single Select the edge and delete. See “To create
Room,All Rooms On This Floor, or All a complete break” on page 185.
Floors.

197
CAFull_RM.book Page 198 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Trim and Extend

• The Fillet Two Lines and Chamfer Delete Surface

Two Lines tools can be used to delete In any 3D view, select 3D> Delete
polyline edges. See “Reshaping Objects” Surface, then click a surface in the
on page 184. view to temporarily remove the surface from
the current view without permanently
affecting the object. See “Delete 3D Surface”
on page 757.

Trim and Extend

The Extend Object(s) and Trim Trim Objects
Object(s) edit tools allow you to
lengthen or shorten a variety of CAD objects Lines, arcs, polylines, circles and
and framing members. See “Framing” on framing items can be trimmed. The
page 460. trimming, or cutting, object may be any CAD
object, a group of CAD objects, or even a
When either the Extend Object(s) or Trim CAD block. Select the trimming object(s)
Object(s) edit buttons are clicked, its edit and click the Trim Object(s) edit button.
mode is enabled and three new edit buttons
display on the edit toolbar. The Trim Object(s) edit tool can be used
in three different ways:
• Click the Sticky Mode edit button
remain in the current mode and edit mul- • Individually clicking on objects to be
tiple objects or select multiple fences. trimmed.
• Selecting objects to be trimmed using a
• Click the Select Fence edit button, fence. See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
then click an object to use it as a fence.
See “Using a Fence” on page 147. • Selecting objects to be trimmed using a
temporary fence.
• Click the Main Edit Mode edit but-
ton or press the Esc key to return to the To trim by clicking
selected objects’s main edit toolbar.
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s)
If you did not do a fence selection and
through the objects to be trimmed.
then immediately click either Extend
Object(s) or Trim Object(s) after return- 2. Select the cutting line(s) and click the
ing to the Main Edit Mode, Sticky Trim Object(s) edit button.
Mode is still enabled.
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
you wish to click multiple objects to
trim them.

198
CAFull_RM.book Page 199 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4. Click each segment intersected by a cut- Extend Objects

ting line one-by-one to trim it back to
the cutting line. Lines, arcs, polylines and framing
items can also be extended. The
To trim using a fence boundary the items is extended to may be
any CAD object, group of CAD objects, or a
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s) CAD block.
through the objects to be trimmed.
As with Trim Objects , there are three
2. Draw a fence through the object seg-
ments to be trimmed. Be sure that the ways to use Extend Objects :
fence intersects the objects on the side of • Individually clicking on objects to be
the cutting line(s) that you want to edit. extended.
See “Using a Fence” on page 147.
• Selecting objects to be extended using a
3. Select the cutting line(s) and click the fence.
Trim Object(s) edit button. • Selecting objects to be extended using a
temporary fence.
4. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
you wish to trim objects using multiple
To extend by clicking
fences.
1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)
5. Click the Select Fence edit button.
you want the objects to extend to.
6. Click the fence(s) to trim the object seg-
2. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
ments intersected by the fence.
Extend Objects edit button.
To trim using a temporary fence
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
1. Draw the cutting line(s) or polyline(s) you wish to click multiple objects to
through the objects to be trimmed. extend them.
2. Select the cutting line(s) and click the 4. Click an object that you would like to
extend to the boundary line(s).
Trim Object(s) edit button.

3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if To extend using a fence

you wish to trim objects using multiple
1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)
temporary fences.
you want the objects to extend to.
4. Click and drag a temporary line to act as
2. Draw a fence through the objects to be
a fence, trimming the object segments
extended. See “Using a Fence” on page
intersected by it. Be sure to draw this
147.
fence on the side of the cutting object(s)
that you wish to edit. 3. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
Extend Objects edit button.

199
CAFull_RM.book Page 200 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Transform/Replicate Object Dialog

4. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if 2. Select the boundary line(s) and click the
you wish to extend objects using multi- Extend Objects edit button.
ple fences.
3. Click the Sticky Mode edit button if
5. Click the Select Fence edit button. you wish to extend objects using multi-
6. Click the fence to extend the objects ple temporary fences.
segments intersected by the fence until 4. Click and drag a temporary line to act as
they meet the boundary line(s). a fence, trimming the object segments
intersected by it.
To extend using a temporary fence

1. Draw the boundary line(s) or polyline(s)

you want the objects to extend to.

Transform/Replicate Object Dialog

Select any object or group of objects
and click the Transform/Replicate Caution: Always double-check the val-
Object edit button to open the Transform/ ues entered in the Transform/Repli-
Replicate Object dialog. cate Object dialog. Large numbers of copies
or large offsets or resize factors can result in
If multiple options are selected in the objects that are time-consuming to create or
Transform/Replicate Object dialog, they are may be off the screen.
performed in the order they appear in the
dialog, from top to bottom.

200
CAFull_RM.book Page 201 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Transform/Replicate Object Dialog

1 Number Of Copies - Select this • Select Relative to Current Point to

option, then specify the Number of move the object relative to the current
Copies to make. CAD point. See “Point Tools” on page
880. You can either specify its X Delta
2 Move - Select this option, then specify and Y Delta, or Angle and Distance, if
how far or where to move the object(s).
Polar is checked.
• Select Relative to Itself to move the
object relative to its current position.
When a CAD-based object is moved to
Specify the X Delta, Y Delta and Z
a new floor, only its display in floor plan
Delta values, which are the object’s view is moved - its physical locations in the
changes in position along each axis. model remains unchanged. See “Architec-
• Select Absolute Location to move the tural vs CAD Objects” on page 131.
object to an absolute location. You can
either specify its X and Y Position, or 3 Rotate - Select this option, then specify
Angle and Distance, if Polar is checked. the Angle to rotate the object(s).

201
CAFull_RM.book Page 202 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Union, Intersection, and Subtract

• Absolute Angle - Select this option to You can also specify the point the selected
rotate the object so that its orientation is object(s) is reflected about, below.
at an absolute angle.
• Relative Angle - Select this option to 6 Rotate/Resize/Reflect About - This
section is enabled when the Rotate,
rotate the object the specified angle rela- Resize and/or Reflect functions are selected.
tive to its current orientation.
• X Position - Specify the X coordinate of
You can also specify the point the selected the point to perform the selected edit
object(s) rotate about, below. function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
4 Select Resize, then specify the Resize • Y Position - Specify the Y coordinate of
Factor in decimals. A resize factor of 2
doubles the size of the object, while a resize the point to perform the selected edit
factor of 0.5 halves the object’s size. function(s) about when About Absolute
Point is selected.
You can also specify the point the selected
object(s) is resized about, below. • About Object Center - Select this option
to perform the selected edit function(s)
5 Reflect - Select this option, then about the object’s center.
specify which axis to reflect about.
• About Absolute Point - Select this
• Horizontally - Select this option to option to perform the selected edit func-
reflect the object horizontally. tion(s) about the specified point.
• Vertically - Select this option to reflect • About Current Point - Select this option
the object vertically. to perform the selected edit function(s)
about the current CAD point.

Union, Intersection, and Subtract

New closed polyline-based Union
objects and solids can be
created based on existing closed polyline- Use the Union edit button to combine
based objects of the same type or solid two or more closed polylines or solids
objects. The Union, Intersection and into a single object.
Subtract edit tools are provided for this The following example shows three closed
purpose. polylines and the single closed polyline that
results when the three are merged using the
Note: The Union Intersection and Subtract Union edit button.
edit tools are not available for objects speci-
fied as holes, such asSslab Holes or Custom
Countertop Holes.

202
CAFull_RM.book Page 203 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

5. The new polyline of the same type as the

originals is created and is selected. Its
shape is defined by the boundaries of the
two originals and, if the original objects
There are two methods of combining closed were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.
polylines or solids using the Union edit
button: the single selection and group To use the group selection method
selection methods.
1. Group-select two or more closed
Begin by creating two or more overlapping
polylines or solid objects.
objects of the same type. If one object is a
countertop, for example, the others should be 2. Click the Union edit button.
countertops, as well.
3. If the object is a polyline, choose to
If the original objects do not overlap, they retain or delete the original objects in the
will either not produce a new object or will dialog that opens.
be duplicated on top of themselves. 4. A new object of the same type as the
originals is created, is selected, and is
To use the single selection method superimposed over the originals if they
1. Select a single closed polyline or solid were retained.
object. This second method allows you to combine
more than two polylines simultaneously.
2. Click the Union edit button.
3. Click another closed polyline or solid.
Note: If the original objects do not overlap,
4. If the object is a polyline, choose to the Union edit tool duplicates them and then
retain or delete the original objects in the either deletes or retains the originals.
dialog that opens.
Intersection
Use the Intersection edit button to
create a single polyline based on the
overlap area of two or more closed polyline-
based objects or solids.

203
CAFull_RM.book Page 204 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Union, Intersection, and Subtract

The following example shows two closed 5. A new object of the same type as the
polylines and the single closed polyline that originals is created and is selected. Its
results when the Intersection edit button shape is defined by the area shared by
is used. the original objects and, if the originals
were retained, it is superimposed over
them and can be moved.

To use the group selection method

1. Group select two or more closed

polylines or solid objects.

2. Click the Intersection edit button.

3. If the object is a polyline, choose to
retain or delete the original objects in the
dialog that opens.
There are two methods of combining closed 4. A new object of the same type as the
polylines or solids using the Intersection originals is created, is selected, and is
edit button: the single selection and group superimposed over the originals if they
selection methods. The second method were retained.
allows you to work with more than two
objects simultaneously. Subtract
Begin by creating two or more overlapping Use the Subtract edit button to
objects of the same type. If one object is a subtract the area of one object that
countertop, for example, the others should be overlaps another object of the same type to
countertops, as well. create a third, new object.

If the original objects do not intersect, no This polyline

new object is created. selected first

To use the single selection method

1. Select a single closed polyline or solid

object.

2. Click the Intersection edit button.

3. Click another closed polyline or solid. This polyline
selected first
4. If the object is a polyline, choose to
retain or delete the original objects in the Originals
dialog that opens. There is one method for using the Subtract
edit button.

204
CAFull_RM.book Page 205 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To use the Subtract edit tool 4. If the object is a polyline, choose to

retain or delete the original objects in the
1. Draw two or more closed polyline-based dialog that opens.
objects or solids that overlap. One object
can be completely enclosed by another. 5. A new object of the same type as the
originals is created, is selected, and is
2. Select one or more of these objects you superimposed over the originals if they
want to remove a portion from as were retained.
defined by the area shared in common
with the remaining, unselected object.
Note: If the original objects do not overlap, the
3. Click the Subtract edit button and Subtract edit tool duplicates the first object
then click the unselected object. selected and then either deletes or retains it.

Converting Objects
CAD objects and many CAD-based objects CAD Detail from View does not truly
can be converted into a variety of other types convert objects in the current view into CAD
of objects. objects; instead, it creates a copy of the
original view composed of CAD objects
CAD to Walls instead of architectural objects, leaving the
CAD to Walls allows you to convert a original view intact.
2D line drawing into a 3D model.
Double CAD lines and arcs drawn to Convert Polyline
represent wall layers and other structural The Convert Polyline edit button lets
items can be converted to actual Chief you to turn CAD objects into CAD-
Architect walls, railings, windows, or based architectural objects such as counter
doorsHome Designer Pro walls and railings. tops and stair landings, special polylines
See “CAD to Walls” on page 240. such as materials list polylines, and a variety
of slab, hole and terrain objects.
CAD Detail from View
To convert a CAD object into one of these
Select CAD> CAD Detail from View 3D objects, select the object and click the
to create a CAD drawing of the
current view. See “CAD Detail from View” Convert Polyline edit button to open the
on page 918. Convert Polyline dialog.

205
CAFull_RM.book Page 206 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Converting Objects

Convert Polyline Dialog

Click the radio button beside one of the 3D Molding Polyline - Convert to a 3D
objects in this dialog, then click OK. molding polyline. See “3D Molding Polyline
Tool” on page 536.
Countertop - Convert the selected closed
polyline to a countertop. See “Custom Hole in Roof/Custom Ceiling - Convert the
Countertops” on page 549. selected closed polyline to a roof/ceiling
hole. Only available when the polyline is
Slab - Convert the selected closed polyline to
contained inside a single roof plane or ceiling
a slab. See “The Slab Tools” on page 370.
plane. See “Roof Hole/Skylight
Slab with Footing - Convert the selected Specification Dialog” on page 416.
closed polyline to a slab with footing. See
Hole in Ceiling Platform - Convert the
“The Slab Tools” on page 370.
selected closed polyline to a ceiling platform
Landing - Convert the selected closed hole. Only available when the polyline is
polyline to a landing. Only available when contained inside a single ceiling plane. See
the closed polyline is not a spline. See “Stair “Platform Holes” on page 358.
Landings” on page 435.
Hole in Floor Platform - Convert the
Material List Polyline - Convert the selected closed polyline to a floor platform
selected closed polyline to a materials list hole. Only available when the polyline is
polyline. See “Calculate From Area” on page contained inside a single floor platform. See
1049. “Platform Holes” on page 358.
Molding Polyline - Convert to a molding Polyline Solid - Convert the selected closed
polyline. See “Molding Polylines” on page polyline to a polyline solid. See “Polyline
535. Solids” on page 658.

206
CAFull_RM.book Page 207 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Revision Cloud - Convert the selected creating medians on curved roads. See
closed polyline to a revision cloud. See “Median” on page 636.
“Revision Clouds” on page 906.
Road Marking (Perimeter) - Convert to a
Sprinkler Line - Convert to a sprinkler line. road marking where the polyline represents
See “Sprinkler Tools” on page 629. the perimeter of the road marking. See “Road
Marking” on page 637. Only available when
Terrain Perimeter - Convert to the terrain
a terrain perimeter exists and the polyline is
permeter. See “Terrain Perimeter” on page
closed.
581. This option is only available when:
• The polyline is closed Road Stripe (Center Line) - Convert to a
road stripe where the polyline represents the
• A terrain perimeter does not yet exist centerline of the road stripe. See “Road
• Only one polyline is currently selected Marking” on page 637. Only available when
a terrain perimeter exists.
Elevation Line - Convert to an elevation
line. See “Elevation Lines” on page 584. Sidewalk (Perimeter) - Convert to a
Only available when a terrain perimeter sidewalk polyline where the polyline
exists. represents the perimeter of the sidewalk. See
“Polyline Sidewalk” on page 638. Only
Terrain Break - Convert to a terrain Break.
available when a terrain perimeter exists and
See “Editing Terrain Objects” on page 595.
the polyline is closed.
Only available when a terrain perimeter
exists. Sidewalk (Center Line) - Convert to a
sidewalk where the polyline represents the
Terrain Feature - Convert to a terrain
center line of the sidewalk. See “Straight
feature. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
Sidewalk” on page 638. Only available when
588. Only available when a terrain perimeter
a terrain perimeter exists.
exists.
Click OK to convert the object or objects.
Road (Perimeter) - Convert the selected
closed polyline to a road polyline where the The specification dialog appropriate to the
polyline represents the perimeter of the road. newly converted object opens, allowing you
See “Polyline Road” on page 636. Only to specify its height, material and other
available when a terrain perimeter exists. information.
Road (Center Line) - Convert to a road
where the polyline represents the center line Convert to Plain Polyline
for the road. See “Straight Road” on page Click the Convert to Plain Polyline
636. Only available when a terrain perimeter edit button to convert special
exists. polylines to plain polylines.
Road Median - Convert the selected After a special polyline is converted into a
polyline to a road median. This is helpful for plain polyline, it can be converted into a
special of the same or different type.

207
CAFull_RM.book Page 208 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Select Same / Load Same

Convert to Solid Unlike polylines, splines form smooth curves

rather than angled corners where their
Click the Convert To Solid edit direction changes. See “Splines” on page
button to convert the selected object 908.
into a Primitive object, or solid, so that it can
be used with other solids to create complex
Convert Spline to Polyline
structures. See “Primitive Tools” on page
649. Click the Convert Spline to Polyline
edit button to convert the selected
Convert to Symbol spline-based object into a polyline.

Create a 3D view of a custom object,

then select Tools> Symbol> Convert
to Symbol to convert the object into a
symbol. See “Convert to Symbol” on page
987.

Convert to Spline The spline is replaced by the new polyline

Click the Convert to Spline edit A curved portion in a spline is represented as
button to convert some CAD-based a number of smaller straight lines. You can
objects such as Custom Countertops or change a spline into a normal polyline that is
splines that have been converted to polylines made up of these straight lines using this edit
to spline-based objects. See “Editing Spline tool.
Based Objects” on page 167.

Select Same / Load Same

The Select Same/Load Same set of specified attributes as the selected
edit tools provide a fast way to object.
locate and modify rooms, cabinets, windows
With the exception of rooms, all selected
and doors in your plan based on attributes
objects can then be opened for specification
that you specify.
and/or edited using the toolbar buttons.
Select Same Type Although multiple rooms cannot be edited,

The Select Same Type edit tool the Load Values to Make Same edit tool
allows you to quickly select all can be used to quickly modify multiple
cabinets, doors, windows, or rooms on the rooms. Click any rooms that are not
current floor of your plan that share the same highlighted to change their attributes so that
they match those that you specify.

208
CAFull_RM.book Page 209 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Load to Make Same Value apply to other like objects on the current
floor.
The Load Values to Make Same edit
button can be used to apply the 2. Click the Select Same Type edit
selected attributes, or values, to any other button.
objects on the current floor that do not yet 3. In the Select Similar Objects dialog,
share them. check the box beside attributes that you
want to load into other similar objects
Load Values to Make Same becomes
and click OK. The set of attributes
available only after the Select Same
available varies depending on the type
Type edit tool has been used to select a of object selected.
group of objects that share the same
attributes. 4. All objects sharing all of the specified
Some attributes can only be used for attributes are now selected in the draw-
selecting objects and cannot be loaded from ing area.
one object to another. These attributes 5. Click the Load Values to Make
display in the Select Similar Objects dialog
Same edit button, then click any like
followed by an asterisk.
object that is not currently highlighted to
apply the specified attributes to it and
To use Select Same/Load Same
add it to the selection set.
1. Select a room, cabinet, window or door 6. You can continue selecting/loading
with attributes that you would like to objects until the Esc key is pressed or
another tool is activated.

Edit Area Tools

The Edit Area Tools allow you to Some objects, such as cabinets, are included
quickly define an area of your plan in the selection only if more than half of the
and select the objects in that area. Once object is contained within the marquee.
selected, they can then be repositioned,
A few objects, notably CAD points, are not
copied or deleted. Select Edit> Edit Area to
view the Edit Area Tools. affected by the Edit Area Tools .
Unlike other selection methods, the Edit
The Edit Area tools can cause wide-
Area Tools cut walls, railing and fencing spread changes across an entire plan
where the selection marquee intersects them, and should always be used with caution.
allowing you to edit only the selected portion
of these objects.

209
CAFull_RM.book Page 210 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Edit Area Tools

Edit Area Objects not currently displaying in floor plan

view are not affected.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area
and draw a rectangular marquee
Edit Area Polyline
around the area of the plan to be edited.
If a rectangular marquee’s shape does not
Edit Area affects all objects included in allow you to define an area precisely, use a
the selection marquee that are located on the closed polyline instead.
current floor, regardless of whether they are
displaying in floor plan view or not. Select a polyline that defines the desired area
in floor plan view and then select one of the
Edit Area Visible Edit Area Tools . The polyline becomes
temporarily highlighted and acts as an Edit
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area Area marquee.
Visible and draw a marquee around
the area of the plan to be edited.
Using the Edit Handles
Edit Area Visible only affects visible An Edit Area marquee displays edit handles
objects included in the selection marquee: that are similar to those of a closed polyline.
objects not currently displayed in floor plan See “Using the Edit Handles” on page 160.
view are unaffected.
• Click the Move edit handle to move the
entire selection set. See “Moving
Edit Area (All Floors) Objects” on page 177.
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area • Click the Rotate edit handle to rotate the
(All Floors) and draw a marquee entire selection set. See “Rotating
around the area of the plan to be edited. Objects” on page 188.
• Click and drag the Reshape and Resize
Edit Area (All Floors) affects all objects
edit handles at each corner and along
on all floors of the plan that are included in
each edge to adjust the size and shape of
the selection marquee, regardless of whether
the marquee. See “Using the Edit Han-
they display in floor plan view.
dles” on page 160.
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible Adjusting the size or shape of an Edit Area
marquee may change which objects are
Select Edit> Edit Area> Edit Area included in the selection set but does not
(All Floors) Visible and draw a otherwise affect those objects.
marquee around the area of the plan to be
edited.
Using the Edit Toolbar
Edit Area (All Floors) Visible affects all A selected Edit Area marquee and/or the
visible objects on all floors of the plan that objects within it can be edited in a variety of
are included in the selection marquee.

210
CAFull_RM.book Page 211 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. set. See “Point to Point Move” on page
See “Using the Edit Toolbar” on page 162. 179.
The following toolbar buttons may display • Click the Center Object edit button
on the edit toolbar for an Edit Area marquee: to center the selection along along a wall
within a room or relative to a cabinet
• Click the Copy/Paste edit button to
fixture. See “Center Object” on page 182.
copy the selection set to the Windows
Clipboard so it can be pasted elsewhere. • Click the Reflect About Object edit
See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on button to reflect the selection set about
page 191. another object. See “Reflecting Objects”
on page 190.
• Click the Delete edit button to delete
the selection set. See “Deleting Objects” • Click the Allowed Angles edit button
on page 196. to open the Place at Allowed Angles
• Click the Transform/Replicate Object dialog.
edit button to copy, move, rotate,
resize, or reflect the selection set. See Place at Allowed
“Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on Angles Dialog
page 200. If more than one percent of the
• Click the Multiple Copy edit button straight walls included in an Edit Area
to make a series of copies of the selection marquee are not at an allowed angle, the
set at regular intervals. Concentric copies Allowed Angles edit button displays.
are not possible using the Edit Area tools.
Click the Allowed Angles edit button to
See “Multiple Copy” on page 194.
display the Place at Allowed Angles dialog.
• Click the Accurate Move edit button
to slow down the mouse speed when
using the edit handles. See “Accurate
Move” on page 179.
• Click the Make Parallel/Perpendicular
edit button to rotate the Edit Area
marquee and the selection set so that the
selected marquee edge is parallel or per- Select the first option and click OK to rotate
pendicular to another straight edge. See the plan so that the largest group of off-angle
“Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on walls move to an Allowed Angle. This may
page 181. place this largest group at Allowed Angles,
but has two disadvantages.
• Click the Point to Point Move edit
• First, other groups of off angle walls
button to accurately move the selection
remain off angle.

211
CAFull_RM.book Page 212 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Edit Area Tools

• Second, any walls that were at an allowed Select the third option and click OK to do
angle before move off angle. The dialog nothing, which is the same as clicking
shows how much (weighted by length) of Cancel.
the selected walls are in each category.
You may want to rotate the majority of the
Select the second option and click OK to add walls to one of the normal allowed angles.
new entries to the Allowed Angles list and
Then, use an Edit Area tool to select
allow new walls to be placed at these angles.
everything again and select the second option
Walls already at Allowed Angles remain so.
to provide new angle entries to cover the
See “Angle Snaps” on page 135.
remaining walls.

212
CAFull_RM.book Page 213 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

213
CAFull_RM.book Page 214 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 7:

Walls, Railings, &

Fencing

Walls are the single most important building Chapter Contents

component in Chief Architect. By creating • Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults
walls and defining the rooms created by the • The Wall Tools
walls, you are telling the program how you • The Deck Tools
want the 3D model built. • The Fencing Tools
There are several ways that walls can be • Exterior and Interior Walls
created in Chief Architect. The most • Foundation Walls
common is to simply draw them with the • Pony Walls
Wall Tools. • Railings
• Invisible Walls
In addition, exterior walls can be generated • Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks
automatically when a new floor is built by • Hatch Wall
using another floor as a model. For more, see • Break Wall
“Adding Floors” on page 355. • Deck Railings
2D CAD lines can also be converted into • Deck Edge
actual walls using the CAD to Walls tool. • Fencing
• Drawing Walls
Another feature that can be used to generate • Connecting Walls
walls automatically is the House Wizard. • Displaying Walls
See “House Wizard” on page 926. • Editing Walls
• Editing Straight/Curved Wall
Combinations
• Aligning Walls

214
CAFull_RM.book Page 215 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Attic Walls • Exporting Wall Type Definitions

• Double Walls • Importing Wall Type Definitions
• CAD to Walls • Stepped and Raked Walls
• Wall Type Definitions • Wall Specification Dialog
• Wall Type Definitions Dialog • Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults

There are several defaults dialogs for Wall defaults can also be accessed by
walls. Default Settings can be accessed double-clicking the Wall Tools button.
by selecting Edit> Default Settings. Click
the “+” next to Walls to display the walls The settings in the various wall defaults
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click dialogs determine what wall types are drawn
the Edit button to open the Wall Defaults when the different wall tools are used. It is a
dialog associated with your selection. good idea to be familiar with these settings
and how they relate to your style of building.
See “Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.

General Wall Defaults

The General Wall Defaults dialog For quick access, the General Wall
controls the general behavior and Defaults button can be added to the
display attributes of all walls, railings and toolbar or you can press Alt+Q on your
fencing. keyboard.

1 3

2 4

1 Resize About - These radio buttons to it or a connected wall is deleted, its length
determine at which layer a wall’s length is preserved based on this setting. Resize
is measured. When a new wall is connected About also controls the location of snap

215
CAFull_RM.book Page 216 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults

points along walls as they are drawn or as Main Layer out. The inner line of the
they are connected to other walls. It also Main Layer does not move.
determines what part of a wall retains its • Inside Surface - Measure wall length at
position when the wall type or wall type the inside surface. Resize a wall from the
definition is changed. interior surface out. The interior surface
• Outer Surface - Measure wall length at does not move.
the outer surface. Resize a wall from the
exterior surface in. The exterior surface 2 Check Show Wall Length When
Editing to display a temporary
does not move.
dimension when a wall is drawn or edited.
• Main Layer Outside - Measure wall Wall length only displays when Display
length at the outer line of the Main Layer.
Temporary Dimensions is on. See
Resize a wall from the exterior side of the
“Display Temporary Dimensions” on page
main layer in. The outer line of the Main
826.
Layer does not move.
• Wall Center - Measure wall length at the 3 Enter the Wall Thickness to be used
center line. Resize a wall from its center. for Adjustable Thickness Types. See
The center line does not move, but wall “Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
layers on either side may.
4 Check Auto Rebuild Attic Walls to
• Main Layer Inside - Measure wall generate attic walls automatically when
length at the inner line of the Main Layer. the model changes. When unchecked, the
Resize a wall from the interior side of the automatic generation of attic walls is
suppressed.

Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults

Specify which wall types are drawn using the
Exterior and Interior Wall tools in
the Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults dialog.
You can also double-click the Straight or
Curved Exterior or Interior Wall toolbar
buttons to open this dialog.

216
CAFull_RM.book Page 217 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 Exterior Wall Tool - From the drop- Click the Define button to open the Wall
down list, select the wall type drawn Type Definitions dialog.
with the Exterior Wall tool.
3 Default Thickness for Railings,
Click the Define button to open the Wall Fencing, Invisible and Adjustable
Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type
Thickness Walls - Select a thickness for
Definitions Dialog” on page 243. these tools and wall types from the drop-
down list.
2 Interior Wall Tool - From the drop-
down list, select the wall type drawn by
the Interior Wall tool.

Foundation and Retaining Wall Defaults

Specify which wall types are drawn when the build a structure. See “Terrain Wall and Curb
Foundation and Retaining Wall Tools” on page 592.
tools are used in the Foundation and You can also double-click the Foundation
Retaining Wall Defaults dialogs. See
Wall or Retaining Wall button to
“Terrain Wall and Curb Tools” on page 592.
open these dialogs.
Unlike other walls, Retaining Walls Footing size and other information used
allow you to modify your terrain rather than when building foundations is also specified

217
CAFull_RM.book Page 218 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall, Railing and Fencing Defaults

here. For more information, see “Foundation

Defaults” on page 363.

Pony Wall Defaults

Specify the wall types used for the upper and You can also double-click either the Pony
lower portions of pony walls and other data Wall or Curved Pony Wall button to
associated with pony walls in the Pony Wall open this dialog.
Defaults dialog.

3 4

1 Upper Wall - From the drop-down list, 2 Lower Wall - From the drop-down list,
select the default wall type for the select the default wall type for the
upper portion of pony walls. lower portion of pony walls.
• Click the Define button to open the Wall • Height of Lower Wall - Specify the
Type Definitions dialog, where you can default height of the lower portion of
create and modify wall types. See “Wall pony walls.
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243. • Click the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog.

218
CAFull_RM.book Page 219 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3 Align Pony Wall - Specify the default • Select Show Lower Wall to display this
option for aligning the layers of the wall type in floor plan view instead of the
upper and lower pony walls. See “Wall upper wall type.
Types Tab” on page 256. • Check Hide Openings in Non-Dis-
played Parts of Walls to hide any doors
4 Display In Plan - Specify how pony and windows located in the parts of pony
walls appear in floor plan view.
walls that are not visible. When
• Select Show Upper Wall to display this
unchecked, these openings will display
wall type in floor plan view instead of the
along with those located in the visible
lower wall type.
parts of pony walls.

Railing and Deck Railing Defaults

Specify the types of railings created when the Double-click the Deck Tools parent
Railing and Deck Railing tools are used. button or any of its child tools except
Double-click either the Straight Railing Polygon Shaped Deck to open the Deck
Railing Defaults dialog.
or Curved Railing button to open the
Railing Defaults dialog and specify what The tabs in these dialogs are the same as their
type of railing is drawn when either Railing respective tabs in the Wall Specification
tool is used. dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
page 249.

Fencing Defaults
Double-click the Fencing Tools parent The tabs in this dialog are the same as their
button or either of its child tools to open the respective tabs in the Wall Specification
Fencing Defaults dialog and specify what
dialog. See “Wall Specification Dialog” on
type of fencing is drawn when using the page 249.
Fencing tool.

The Wall Tools

Select Build> Wall to access the Wall Tools. Select Build> Curved Wall to access
Tools. The type of wall drawn by each these tools.
wall tool is specified in its corresponding
defaults dialog. Exterior Walls
The Curved Wall tools are similar to The Exterior Wall and Curved
their corresponding Straight Wall Exterior Wall tools draw walls
using the default wall type specified for

219
CAFull_RM.book Page 220 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Wall Tools

exterior walls in the Exterior/Interior Wall Specification dialog. See “Pony Walls” on
Defaults dialog. See “Exterior/Interior Wall page 223.
Defaults” on page 216.
Railings
Interior Walls
The Railing and Curved Railing
The Interior Wall and Curved tools create railings. The type and
Interior Wall tools draw walls height of railings drawn with this tool are
using the wall type specified for interior defined in Railing Defaults dialog. See
walls. The interior wall type is defined in the “Railing and Deck Railing Defaults” on page
Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults Defaults 219.
dialog.
Invisible Walls
Note: Whether a wall is recognized as an Invisible walls are walls used to define
exterior or interior wall by the program is
separate room areas in a plan. They can
determined by its position in the model, not
by the tool used to draw it. See “Exterior and
display in floor plan view but not in 3D
Interior Walls” on page 222. views. You can also convert a normal wall
into an invisible wall and vice versa in the
Foundation Walls Wall Specification dialog. See “Invisible
Walls” on page 224.
The Foundation Wall and
Curved Foundation Wall tools Polygon Shaped Room
draw foundation walls according to the
information specified in the Foundation The Polygon Shaped Room tool
Defaults dialog. Foundation walls normally opens the New Polygon Shaped
have a footing and can be drawn on any floor Room dialog, where you can specify the
of the model, not just the foundation floor. exact size and number of sides of a new
See “Foundation Walls” on page 222. polygonal room and then click in floor plan
view to create that room. See “Polygon
Pony Walls Shaped Rooms and Decks” on page 225.

A Pony Wall, also called a split Hatch Wall

wall, is defined as a wall with two
separate wall types, one for the upper portion The Hatch Wall tool applies a hatch
and another for the lower portion. pattern to a wall that displays in floor
plan views. You must click the wall that you
The Pony Wall and Curved Pony Wall tools want to apply the hatch pattern to. You can
draw pony walls using the information then select the hatch and resize it if you want
specified in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. to only hatch a portion of a wall. See “Hatch
You can also convert a normal wall into a Wall” on page 226.
pony wall and vice versa in the Wall

220
CAFull_RM.book Page 221 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Break Wall few inches of each other but are not

connected. See “Fix Connections” on page
The Break Wall tool applies a break in 229.
a wall. Once a wall is broken, the two
wall segments are separate walls that can be
Define Wall Types
modified independent of each other. See
“Break Wall” on page 226. The Define Wall Types tool opens the
Wall Type Definitions dialog, where
Fix Wall Connections wall types can be created, copied and edited.
See “Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page
The Fix Wall Connections tool 243.
connects walls whose ends are within a

The Deck Tools

Select Build> Deck to access the deck complete with framing, but without a railing.
tools. No deck supports are created. See “Deck
Edge” on page 227.
Deck Railing
Polygon Shaped Deck
The Straight Deck Railing and
Curved Deck Railing tools draw The Polygon Shaped Deck tool opens
decks, complete with framing and bounded the New Polygon Shaped Deck
by a railing. If a foundation level exists, dialog, where you can specify the exact size
supports for the deck are also created. See and number of sides of a new polygonal deck
“Deck Railings” on page 227. room and then click in floor plan view to
create that deck room. See “Polygon Shaped
Deck Edges Rooms and Decks” on page 225.

The Straight Deck Edge and

Curved Deck Edge draw decks

The Fencing Tools

Select Build> Fencing or click the The Fencing and Curved
Fencing Tools to access the fencing Fencing tools are used to draw
tools. fences, which are similar to railings but by
default do not define room areas. Fencing is
created and edited much like walls and
railings, and normally used outside of a

221
CAFull_RM.book Page 222 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Exterior and Interior Walls

building and follows the shape of the terrain.

See “Fencing” on page 227.

Exterior and Interior Walls

Most walls are drawn using either the and then change the wall type in the Wall
Specification dialog.
Exterior Wall or Interior Wall tool.
The only difference between these two tools Whether a wall is recognized by the program
is the wall type used. You can specify the as an actual exterior or interior wall is based
default wall type for each tool in the Wall on the model, not by which tool you use to
Defaults dialog. draw the wall. Any wall that is entirely
To draw a wall using a different wall type, surrounded by interior room areas is
you can change the default wall type for considered an interior wall. Any wall
either tool in the Wall Defaults dialog. You exposed to the outside of the building is
can also draw a wall using the default type considered an exterior wall.

Foundation Walls
Foundation walls are similar to the wall layer. See “Foundation Tab” on page
interior and exterior walls but also 255.
have a footing. Foundation walls can either
Foundation walls are placed on the “Walls,
be created automatically when a foundation
Foundation” layer by default, but can be put
floor is created or manually by drawing them
on any layer you choose. In floor plan view,
using the Foundation Wall tool.
foundation wall footings are placed on the
The initial foundation wall type and footing “Footings” layer and cannot be moved; in 3D
size are specified in the Foundation views, they are on the “Walls, Foundation”
Defaults dialog. These values can be layer. See “Displaying Walls” on page 230.
changed for individual walls in the Wall
You can select the footing in 3D views and
Specification dialog. See “Wall
edit its size and shape using the edit handles.
Specification Dialog” on page 249.
You can draw a foundation wall on any floor
of a plan, not just on the foundation level.
Any wall can be specified as a foundation
wall, regardless of the tool used to draw it.
See “General Tab” on page 250.
Normally, the footing is centered on the wall,
but you can center the footing on the main

222
CAFull_RM.book Page 223 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Pony Walls
A Pony Wall, sometimes called a The height where the upper portion meets the
split wall, is a wall with two lower can be specified in 3D views. Because
separate wall types for the upper and lower the upper and lower sections of a pony wall
portions. are linked, if either portion is modified along
the division between the two, such as raking
or the stepping of a footing, the other portion
of the pony wall adjusts to match. See
“Stepped and Raked Walls” on page 248.
You can specify whether the upper or lower
portion of pony walls displays in floor plan
view in the Pony Wall Defaults dialog. This
option can also be set for individual walls in
the Wall Specification dialog.

Changing Wall Types

for Pony Walls
Walls drawn using the Pony Wall tool The upper and lower parts of a pony wall can
are created using the wall types and other be redefined as different wall types in the
information specified in the Pony Wall Wall Specification dialog.
Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall Defaults” You can assign any wall type to the upper
on page 218. pony wall; however, the Adjustable
You can also convert a normal wall into a Thickness Wall type cannot be used on the
pony wall and vice versa in the Wall lower pony wall.
Specification dialog. See “Wall Types Tab”
on page 256.

223
CAFull_RM.book Page 224 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Railings

Railings
Railings are created and edited Use a Doorway to produce a break in a
just like walls. By default, newels railing for a stairway or other access. This
and balusters do not display in floor plan keeps the railing continuous to maintain
view, but their display can be turned on. See room definition.
“Newels/Balusters Tab” on page 261.
A doorway in a railing displays in a 3D view
The default type for new railings is defined as an opening, with newels or posts placed
in the Railing Defaults dialog. See “Railing on each side. Posts are evenly spaced
and Deck Railing Defaults” on page 219. between railing ends and breaks and can be
If Panels is selected on the Railing tab of the specified at defined intervals.
Railing Specification dialog, you can
choose a Panel Type on the Newels/
Balusters tab . See “Newels/Balusters Tab”
on page 261.
When first drawn, railings have the No
Locate attribute, which prevents them from
being located by dimension lines. The No
Room Def attribute may also be helpful if
you do not want a railing to divide a room
into two separate areas. See “General Tab”
on page 250.

Invisible Walls
Invisible walls are used to create or
modify room definitions, most often by
defining smaller areas within larger rooms.
See “Room Definition” on page 267. These
smaller room areas can have different floor
or ceiling materials or heights, allowing
stepped areas to be created.
Invisible walls can display in floor plan view
but not in 3D views.
Common uses for invisible walls include
dividing the living and dining areas of a
single room, or separating a kitchen from an An invisible wall can be turned into a normal
adjoining nook. wall, or vice versa, by clicking the Invisible

224
CAFull_RM.book Page 225 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

check box in its Wall Specification dialog. • Cabinets, fixtures and furniture can be
See “General Tab” on page 250. moved freely through Invisible walls.
• Invisible walls can be drawn through a
Important Notes on cabinet to attach to the wall behind.
Invisible Walls • Invisible walls do not produce a short
• Floor, wall and ceiling areas are calcu- wall section to cover the gap where the
lated separately for rooms divided by level of the floor or ceiling changes. Use
invisible and normal walls. an invisible railing for this. See “Floor &
• Invisible walls are ignored by the Auto Ceiling Heights” on page 268.

Place Outlets tool; it functions as

though they were not present.

Polygon Shaped Rooms and Decks

Select Build> Wall> Polygon Shaped
Room to open the New Polygon
Shaped Room dialog and create a polygon
shaped room with regular sides.

The settings in these dialogs are independent

of one another and are saved between
sessions.

Select Build> Deck> Polygon Shaped To create a polygon shaped room or deck
Deck to open the New Polygon
Shaped Deck dialog and create a polygon 1. Click the radio button beside an option
shaped deck with regular sides. to specify whether you want to Define
Polygon by Side Length, Radius to
Vertex or Radius to Side.
2. Specify the desired Number of Sides.
3. Specify the desired Side Length.
4. Specify the desired Radius.
5. Uncheck Include Railing to produce a
deck platform defined by Deck Edges.

225
CAFull_RM.book Page 226 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Hatch Wall

This option is not available in the New 6. Click OK, then click once in floor plan
Polygon Shaped Room dialog. view to create the specified polygon
shaped deck.

Hatch Wall
The Hatch Wall tool fills any wall Once created, wall hatching can be selected,
segments except invisible walls with a edited and deleted much like other line-based
single hatch pattern in floor plan view. objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
Hatch Wall places a hatch pattern across all page 147.
layers of the selected wall, covering any fill
Like doors and windows, wall hatching
styles specified for that wall type.
cannot extend across multiple wall segments.
In many cases, it is preferable to create a wall Unlike these objects, hatching cannot be
type definition rather than use the Hatch located by dimension lines.
Wall tool because multiple fill styles can The wall hatch pattern and its line weight can
be created for display purposes. See “Wall be specified in the Wall Hatch Specification
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243. dialog. See “Wall Hatch Specification
To apply wall hatching, click the Hatch Wall Dialog” on page 264.

button, then click on a wall section. The When editing or deleting wall hatching,
hatch pattern covers the entire length and make sure that it is selected rather than the
width of the wall. wall by noting that “Wall Hatching” displays
in the Status Bar. See “The Status Bar” on
page 34.

Break Wall
To divide a wall or railing, select Once a break is placed, click the Select
Build> Wall> Break Wall and click Objects tool and select the original wall.
the wall. The wall is divided into two wall If edit handles display near the break, the
sections at the point where you click. wall was correctly broken.
The Break Wall tool remains active, so Walls separated by a break can be rejoined.
you can continue to place breaks in walls. Select one of the segments, then click on the
When you are finished, select a different end edit handle located at the break and drag
tool. it a few plan inches (mm) away from the
break. See “Connecting Walls” on page 229.
If a wall break is placed near the intersection
of two walls, the break is positioned at the
center of the intersection.

226
CAFull_RM.book Page 227 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Break Wall tool can be used to

create aligned walls on either side of a gap.
See “Creating a Nook” on page 236.

Deck Railings
Click and drag using the Deck When a room is defined using deck railing,
Railing or Curved Deck Railing its Room Type is automatically set to
tool to create decks on the exterior of a plan. “Deck”. See “Decks” on page 275.

Deck Edge
The Deck Edge tools are used to and drag using the Straight Deck Edge or
draw invisible railings, defining a Curved Deck Edge tool to draw deck edges.
deck room without enclosing it in rails. Click See “Decks” on page 275.

Fencing
Fencing in Chief Architect is created
and modified much like railings and
walls. Fences do not create room definition
and are normally used outside a structure to
divide the terrain or detail an exterior.
Fencing automatically follows the shape of
the terrain. You can choose to have the
Define the default fence style in the Fencing
fencing follow the terrain smoothly or to
Defaults dialog. See “Fencing Defaults” on
have each segment step as it follows the
page 219.
terrain. See “Railing Tab” on page 258.

227
CAFull_RM.book Page 228 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Drawing Walls

Drawing Walls
Walls are drawn similar to the way CAD Temporary Dimensions
lines are drawn and can be drawn in floor
plan view, camera views, and overviews. See Temporary dimensions will display along the
“Draw Line” on page 884. length of a wall as it is drawn when Display
Temporary Dimensions is toggled on
Draw exterior walls in a clockwise direc- and Show Wall Length When Editing is
tion so that the exterior surfaces face checked in the General Wall Defaults dialog.
outward while interior surfaces face inward. See “Display Temporary Dimensions” on
page 826 and “General Wall Defaults” on
Drawing walls to create a floor plan is simple page 215.
if you keep a few things in mind:
• Draw exterior walls first to define the Continuous Wall Drawing
building’s footprint, then draw the inte- You can draw walls continuously by right-
rior walls after the perimeter is in place. clicking, Alt+clicking or Alt+dragging. See
• To flip the layers of an existing wall, “To draw continuous lines” on page 884.
select it and click the Reverse
Layers edit button. Drawing Curved Walls
• Initial wall heights are determined by the Drawing a curved wall is similar to drawing
default floor and ceiling heights of the a CAD arc. See “Arc Tools” on page 894.
current floor. See “Floor Defaults Dia- As with CAD arcs, the method used to draw
log” on page 353. a curved wall depends on which Arc

Wall Openings Creation Mode is currently active. See

“Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
To create a door or doorway, do not draw page 892.
wall sections with a gap between them. Walls
A straight wall can also be converted into a
should be drawn to completely enclose
curved wall and vice versa using the Change
rooms, and then door and window objects
should be placed in the walls to create Line/Arc edit button. See “Change Line/
openings later. See “Doors” on page 292 and Arc” on page 185.
“Windows” on page 316.
Masonry fireplaces placed in walls are also To create a room in the shape of a cir-
considered to be types of wall openings. See cle, you must draw two curved walls.
“Fireplaces” on page 671.
Center
A curved wall always has a center point. The
center displays as a small cross when you

228
CAFull_RM.book Page 229 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

enable Show Arc Centers and Ends . Use Angle Snaps to draw walls at
See “Show Arc Centers” on page 155. specific angles. Modify the angle of an
existing wall by specifying a new angle in
the Wall Specification dialog, by dragging
an end edit handle to a new allowed angle, or
by using the Rotate edit handle. See “Angle
Snaps” on page 135.
As you draw a wall, note the temporary wall
that displays. The length and angle of this
temporary wall displays in the Status Bar at
Show Arc Center the bottom of the window as it is drawn.
Radius Drag the end of the temporary wall in a
circular motion. In the Status Bar, note that
The radius of a curved wall is measured from the wall jumps at defined angle increments.
the center to one surface or layer of the wall. Release the mouse button to draw the wall at
The radius can be defined on the General tab the length and angle last shown in the
of the Wall Specification dialog. You may information window.
elect to define the radius to the exterior or
interior wall layers. See “General Tab” on
House Wizard
page 250.
The House Wizard allows you to place
Wall Positioning and arrange room “objects” that can
then be converted into a fully editable house
If Use Snap Grid/Units is checked in the plan, including walls. See “House Wizard”
General Plan Defaults dialog, a new wall on page 926.
snaps to grid lines and line intersections as it
is drawn. See “General Plan Defaults
Dialog” on page 68.

Connecting Walls
In order for a room to be defined, walls must By default, walls are automatically joined
be connected to completely enclose an area. when their center lines are within a distance
See “Rooms” on page 266. defined by the larger of the two wall widths.
Draw a wall sufficiently close to an existing
wall and the program joins them at the Fix Connections
intersection of their Main Layers. The new Occasionally, one or more walls do
wall moves, extends, or contracts slightly to not properly connect. To clean up
meet the existing wall. Existing walls do not
move.

229
CAFull_RM.book Page 230 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Walls

most connections throughout the plan, select Removing Wall Breaks

Build> Walls> Fix Connections.
The Break Wall tool allows you to break
If you have only one connection to fix, the
a wall into two or more separate wall
Connect Walls edit button is faster to segments. See “Break Wall” on page 226.
use.
To merge two colinear walls separated by a
break,select one of the segments, then click
Connect Walls
on the end edit handle located at the break
Use the Connect Walls edit button to and drag it a few plan inches (mm) away
complete an intersection of two walls. from the break.
Select a wall, click the Connect Walls edit
If the two walls do not merge, either one or
button, then click on the other wall to
both walls have been moved and they are no
connect the two.
longer colinear, or one or both has been
If the unconnected wall ends are sufficiently edited in some way and they are no longer
close to one another, the tool connects them. identical. Open the Wall Specification
If the separation is too great, extend one dialog for each wall and determine how they
towards the other and try again. differ. See “Wall Hatch Specification
Dialog” on page 264.

Displaying Walls
While the composition and appearance display. By default, walls are placed on
of each wall type is controlled in the layers with “Walls” at the beginning of the
Wall Type Definitions dialog, the display of layer name, such as “Walls, Attic”.
walls in all views is controlled in the Layer
The display of the wall layers specified in the
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Wall Type Definitions dialog can be
Objects” on page 117.
controlled. If you turn off the display of the
The program installs with a number of layers layer called Walls, Layers, wall types display
intended for specifically for various types of with two lines representing the inside and
walls; however, you can specify any layers as outside surfaces. See “Displaying Objects”
the defaults for these walls. Once created, on page 117.
you can also place a selected wall on any
In addition, you can turn off the display of
layer. See “Layer Tab” on page 264.
non-structural layers and show only the
walls’ Main Layers by turning on the display
In Floor Plan View of the Walls, Main Layer Only layer. This
There are several options for controlling how allows you to create both fully configured
walls are displayed in floor plan view. In the walls and true framing layouts. The Walls,
Layer Display Options dialog, you can Main Layer Only layer affects the display of
specify whether or not various types of walls

230
CAFull_RM.book Page 231 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

walls in floor plan view only. See “The Main Displaying Pony Walls
Layer” on page 242. in Floor Plan View
Foundation Walls have footings that display Either the upper or lower portion of a pony
in floor plan view as long as the “Footings” wall can display in floor plan view. Only the
layer is turned on. See “Foundation Walls” portion that displays can be snapped to or
on page 222. aligned with walls above or below. See
It is often desirable to display the walls from “Aligning Walls” on page 235.
a floor other than the current floor. To do By default, the upper portion of a pony wall
this, select and display a reference floor. See displays in floor plan view. To show the
“Reference Display” on page 360. You can lower pony wall in floor plan view instead,
also specify which layers are included in the select Show Lower in Plan View in the
Reference Display Layer Set in the Layer Pony Wall Defaults dialog. See “Pony Wall
Display Options dialog. Defaults” on page 218.

In 3D Views You can also specify which part of an

individual pony wall displays in the Wall
Each layer of a wall is generated when you Specification dialog. See “Wall Types Tab”
create a 3D view. You can see the different on page 256.
layers in 3D using the Delete Surface
tool. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page 757. When Object Snaps are enabled, you
can only snap to the outer, inner and Main
A wall’s framing layer displays as a solid Layer surfaces of the part of the pony wall
layer rather than studs and plates until wall set to display.
framing is built. See “Framing” on page 460.
Wall framing is placed on the Framing, Wall By default, windows and doors in pony walls
layer by default. are visible in floor plan view regardless of
which part of the pony wall displays. You
While most objects in the program can can, if you wish, select Hide Openings in
display in floor plan view and 3D views, a Non-Displayed Parts of Walls in the Pony
few cannot. Invisible walls and wall hatching Wall Defaults dialog.
are examples of items that do not display in
3D, regardless of what layer they are placed
on.

Editing Walls
Walls can be selected individually and as a ways in which a wall can be edited depends
group in all views. When a wall is selected, it on the current view and which edge is
displays edit handles and an edit toolbar that selected. See “Selecting Objects” on page
can be used to edit it in various ways. The 144.

231
CAFull_RM.book Page 232 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Walls

Selecting Walls allowing you to rotate, move, and extend

or shorten the length of the wall.
• When you try to select a wall in a Cross
Section/Elevation or 3D view, the interior • Moving a wall in any view will move any
or exterior room it defines may be cabinets attached to that wall, as well.
selected first. • In a cross section/elevation view, the top
and bottom edges of straight and curved
Click the Select Next Object edit walls can be edited like closed polylines.
button or press the Tab key on your key- See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
board to select the wall itself. See Objects” on page 160. Only the top and
“Selecting Rooms” on page 270. bottom edges of walls can be broken,
angled or curved: the side edges cannot.
You can specify that the wall be selected • In a camera view or overview, click on an
first instead of the room in the interior or exterior surface to display the
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural same edit handles as in an elevation view:
Panel” on page 88. one at each corner and one on the top and
• In floor plan view, if wall hatching has bottom edges.
been applied to a wall using the Hatch • When a wall is connected to other walls
Wall tool, the hatching may be and Edit Object Parts is turned off,
selected first. Click Select Next Object it can only be moved perpendicular to
to select the wall itself. See “Hatch itself or, in the case of curved walls,
Wall” on page 226. perpendicular to its chord using the Move
edit handle. Unconnected walls can be
• The Edit Area tools allow you to moved at Allowed Angles.
select only part of a wall or walls. See • The footing of a foundation wall can be
“Edit Area Tools” on page 209. selected in 3D views and edited using the
edit handles.
Using the Edit Handles
• The Same Wall Type edit handles can be
Depending on the type of view, a wall enabled, allowing you to draw a new wall
displays a different set of edit handles when segment of the same type as the selected
selected. wall.
• In floor plan view, straight and curved
walls can be edited like other line- and Same Wall Type
arc-based objects. See “Editing Line Edit Handles
Based Objects” on page 147 and “Editing
When the Same Wall Type edit handles are
Arc Based Objects” on page 150.
enabled, two edit handles display just beyond
• In a camera view or overview, click on a selected wall’s Extend edit handles in floor
the top surface of a wall to display the plan view or when the top edge of the wall is
same edit handles as in floor plan view, selected in a 3D view.

232
CAFull_RM.book Page 233 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

the height of the walls that define it also

Same Wall Type edit handles change.
• The ceiling heights for all rooms on a
floor are controlled in the Floor Defaults
dialog for that floor. See “Floor Defaults
Dialog” on page 353. Whenever possible,
Click and drag a Same Wall Type edit it is best to set all ceiling heights using
handle at any angle to draw a new wall the defaults.
segment of the same type as the selected • The ceiling height of a single room can
wall. be set in its Room Specification dialog.
See “General Tab” on page 283.
• The default Floor and Ceiling Heights for
a given floor can be adjusted by editing
the top and/or bottom edges of the Exte-
rior Room in a 3D view. See “The Exte-
rior Room” on page 271.
To temporarily enable the Same Wall Type
edit handles, select a wall and click the Same • The top or bottom edge of any wall can
be adjusted independent of floor or ceil-
Wall Type edit button. You can also ing heights using the mouse in Cross Sec-
enable these handles globally in the tion/Elevation and 3D views.
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
• If the wall height of the Exterior Room is
Panel” on page 88.
adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor
or Ceiling Height of the entire floor is
In the Specification Dialog changed. See “The Exterior Room” on
The appearance and structure of walls can be page 271.
customized in the Wall Specification dialog.
See “Wall Specification Dialog” on page Moving Walls
249. Using Dimensions
Using the Edit Tools Automatic, manually-drawn, and
temporary dimension lines can be used
A selected wall or walls can be edited in a to move walls. Select a wall, then click on a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit dimension line that locates it. See “Moving
toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
1140.
Depending on your Dimension Defaults
settings, automatic and manual dimension
Wall Heights lines may locate wall surfaces or wall
The height of a wall is controlled by the dimension layers. See “Locate Objects Tab”
ceiling height of the room(s) it defines. If the on page 816
ceiling or floor height of a room is changed,

233
CAFull_RM.book Page 234 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

Bear in mind that temporary dimensions can 2. Click and drag a dimension line parallel
be set up to locate different wall layers than to the angled wall.
automatic and manual dimensions. As a
result, they may appear to give different 3. Click the Select Objects button,
measurements between the same walls. See then select the angled wall.
“Temporary Dimension Defaults Dialog” on 4. With the angled wall selected, click on
page 821. the End to End Dimension.
Only the portions of pony walls that display 5. In the inline text field, specify the
are located by dimensions. The upper and desired length of the angled wall.
lower parts of pony walls typically have 6. Click OK and the angled wall will move
different thicknesses, so which part you as needed so that it is the length that you
choose to display may affect your plan’s specified.
dimensions. See “Pony Wall Defaults” on
page 218. Locked vs. Unlocked Centers
The default for curved walls is an unlocked
Dimension Defaults and Temporary
Dimension Preferences settings can
center because it is easier to draw and edit
have a significant effect on wall position. It is when the center is unlocked.
recommended that you review these settings
Once walls are in place and curved walls are
and make sure that they meet your needs.
properly aligned with straight walls, it is a
good idea to lock the curved walls’ centers.
The length of a wall drawn at an angle in an
interior corner can be specified using an End To lock the center of a curved wall, select it
to End Dimension . The wall moves and click the Lock Center edit button.
closer to or away from the corner as needed See “Using Lock Center” on page 155. The
but does not break its connections to the curved wall remains selected, but its edit
walls forming the corner. handles change.
The locked status can also be changed in the
To resize an angled wall across a corner
General tab of the Wall Specification dialog.
See “General Tab” on page 250.
1. Select CAD> Dimension> End to End
Dimension .

Editing Straight/Curved Wall Combinations

If you move a straight wall connected to a changing the center of the arc, the walls lose
curved wall with a locked center and the their connection.
connection cannot be maintained without

234
CAFull_RM.book Page 235 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Make Arc Tangent

When an Extend edit handle of a curved wall
with a locked center is dragged with the If both ends of a curved wall are attached to
straight walls that are nearly tangent and the
Alternate Edit Behavior active, the
curved wall is selected, the Make Arc
locked center setting will be overridden. See
“Edit Behaviors” on page 137. Tangent edit button displays. Click this
button to open the Radius of Tangent
If you move a straight wall connected to a Curved Wall dialog.
curved wall with a locked center, the curved
wall extends along its curve and the straight
wall will either lengthen or shorten as needed
to stay connected to the curved wall.
If the connection between the straight and
curved wall cannot be maintained because of
the curved wall’s radius, it will be broken.

Here you can determine which wall layer the

radius of the curved wall is measuring.
Specify a layer and click OK. For more
information about Wall Layers, see “Wall
Type Definitions” on page 241.

Aligning Walls
Wall alignment refers to the way wall below. Walls may need to be aligned in a
segments line up with one another, either on variety of situations.
the same floor or on the floor above or

235
CAFull_RM.book Page 236 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Aligning Walls

Aligning Colinear Walls

Colinear walls are parallel walls connected
end to end and drawn on the same floor.
When colinear walls join end-to-end and
Object Snaps are enabled, the walls
snap.
The way that colinear walls snap together is
determined by the Resize About setting in
the General Wall Defaults dialog when
Object Snaps are enabled. See “General
Wall Defaults” on page 215.
4. Right-click the middle section of the
Creating a Nook wall to select the wall section.
Walls can be aligned across an opening such 5. Click the middle Move handle and drag
as a nook, so that they are colinear, using the the wall outward.
Break Wall tool. 6. Draw side walls to connect the wall back
to the rest of the house.
To align walls across a gap 7. Move these short walls using dimen-
sions to accurately size the nook.
1. Select a wall to build a nook into and
click the Break Wall edit button. Aligning Walls
2. Click at a point on the wall close to one Between Floors
side of the nook area. Do not worry Walls can be aligned between floors by
about exact placement right now.
clicking the Align With Wall Above and
3. Click again near the other side of the
nook. Two short lines at each location Align With Wall Below edit buttons.
where you clicked indicate Wall Breaks.
In order for these edit tools to be avail-
able, the areas of the walls in question
must be partially aligned, or overlapping.

To align walls between floors

1. Select a wall that you want to align with

another wall either above or below it.
2. If the wall is above or below the other
wall along only part of its length, you

236
CAFull_RM.book Page 237 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

must click on it along that part. Select Aligning Curved Walls

Tools> Reference Floors> Reference With Straight Walls
Display On to help make sure you
Curved walls can be drawn tangent to
click on the correct part of the wall.
an existing straight wall using the
3. When you have selected the wall at the Start/Tangent/End Arc Mode. See
desired location, click either the Align “Drawing Arcs - Arc Creation Modes” on
With Wall Above or Align With page 892.

Wall Below edit button. If both ends of a selected curved wall

are connected to other walls at angles
Aligning Curved Walls of 45 degrees or less, the Make Arc Tangent
edit button is available. Click this button to
Between Floors
move and resize the wall so that both ends
Curved walls are aligned between floors are tangent to the connected walls. See
using the same technique to align straight “Editing Arc Based Objects” on page 150.
walls. If the centers and radii of the walls are
The wall’s radius is usually changed by this
within a few inches of each other, the Align
action and a locked center automatically
With Wall Above and Align With Wall becomes unlocked. Once the wall is tangent,
Below edit buttons are enabled for the select it and drag its move handle until it is in
selected wall. The selected curved wall will the appropriate position.
take on the radius and center of the
referenced wall when the walls are aligned. Aligning Railing on
Different Floors
Aligning Pony Walls Two colinear Railings or Deck Railings on
Between Floors the same floor can be aligned one above the
When aligning a pony wall with either the other when they define rooms with different
wall above or below, it is important that the floor heights.
appropriate part of the pony wall display in
floor plan view. See “Displaying Pony Walls
in Floor Plan View” on page 231.
• To align a pony wall with the wall below,
make sure the lower pony wall displays
before using Align With Wall Below
. To align railing on different platforms
• To align a pony wall with the wall above,
make sure the upper pony wall displays 1. Click and drag to draw a Railing or
before using Align With Wall Below Deck Railing that divides a room such as
a deck in two.
.

237
CAFull_RM.book Page 238 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Attic Walls

Deck Railing Specification dialog,

2. Click the Select Objects button,
then click in one of the room areas. check Generate on Low Platform. See
“Railing Tab” on page 258.
3. Click the Open Object edit button, 5. Click and drag a second railing parallel
and on the General tab of the Room to the one drawn in step 1.
Specification dialog:
6. Select this second railing and click the
• Specify a Floor Height that differs
from that of the other by at least the Open Object edit button. On the
height of the railing, then click OK. General tab of the Railing or Deck
Railing Specification dialog, check the
• The default railing height is 36”, so for
best results the Floor Height should be box beside No Room Def and click OK.
changed by at least this amount. 7. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag
4. Click on the railing drawn in step 1, then it into the same position as the first rail-
ing. See “To move an object freely” on
click the Open Object edit button. page 179.
On the Railing tab of the Railing or

Attic Walls
In Chief Architect, walls are built between When you Rebuild Walls/Floors/
the floor and ceiling platforms of the room. Ceilings , all Attic Walls in the plan are
See “Floor & Ceiling Heights” on page 268. deleted and rebuilt unless Auto Rebuild
When the program detects an open space Attic Walls is also checked in the General
between a wall and the roof plane above it, it Wall Defaults dialog. See “General Wall
automatically creates an Attic Wall on the Defaults” on page 215.
floor above that wall to fill in the gap.
Attic Walls are typically found above Full Knee Walls
Gable Walls, forming a gable or closing the
Knee Walls are a bit like Attic Walls in that
top portion of a side wall beneath a shed
they are not meant to generate to full ceiling
roof.
height. Instead, they build upward until they
Attic walls are often found on the Attic floor, encounter a roof plane. Unlike Attic Walls,
but can be generated on other floors, as well. however, Knee Walls are used in the interior
See “The Attic Floor” on page 359. of a structure, typically to separate loft areas
from Attic rooms on the upper floor. See
Attic Walls are specified as such in the Wall
“Room Types” on page 271.
Specification dialog. If needed, you can
specify a regular wall as an Attic Wall. See Chief Architect does not specify walls as
“General Tab” on page 250. Knee Walls automatically. If an interior wall
is drawn in a location where the roof is lower
than the ceiling height, you should specify it

238
CAFull_RM.book Page 239 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

as a Knee Wall in the Wall Specification

dialog. See “Roof Tab” on page 252.

Double Walls
In some situations, such as for sound You can make floor platform rim joists touch
insulation, furring, or where the walls of two each other at the boundary between Split
modular home units meet, two walls are Framing walls or provide spacing to carry
drawn side-by-side. In instances such as sheathing over them by checking Build
these, specify both walls as Double Walls. platform to this layer for the appropriate
layer in the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
Two walls become Double Walls when they
For more information, see “Wall Type
are parallel, touching, and both specified as
Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
Double Walls in the Wall Specification
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 250. To create a pair of Split Framing walls,
specify both walls as such on the General tab
There are three types of Double Walls:
of the Wall Specification dialog.
Frame Through, Split Framing and Furred
Wall.
Furred Wall
Frame Through Furred Walls are placed against the inside
of a primary wall, typically an exterior wall.
Frame Through walls can be considered the
An example is a concrete wall furred out by a
basic Double Wall type. A Frame Through
framed wall with an air gap or insulation
wall could be used as a double wall between
between them. Another example is a thick
hotel rooms for sound insulation.
wall with two framed layers.
To create a pair of Frame Through walls,
Rooms are defined in the normal manner by
specify both walls as such on the General tab
the primary wall, but the layers of the Furred
of the Wall Specification dialog.
Wall are treated by the program as though
they were added to the primary. An air gap
Split Framing between the primary and furred walls should
Split Framing walls divide floor and ceiling be defined as a layer of one of the walls,
platforms, as well as any walls they intersect. usually the furred wall.
The split occurs at the boundary where the As with Frame Through walls, Furred Walls
two double walls touch and is useful for do not split platforms or connected walls.
separating modular home units. Unlike Frame Through walls, they do not
Chief Architect frames walls and platforms connect or frame to non-parallel walls like
separately on either side of the Split Framing normal walls. Instead, they connect to other
wall boundary, with no framing members Furred Walls.
crossing it.

239
CAFull_RM.book Page 240 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

CAD to Walls

To create a Furred Wall, specify the primary specify how an opening builds through the
wall as a Frame Through wall and the Double Walls on the Frame and Trim tab of
furred wall as a Furred Wall on the General the Door Specification dialog or the Casing
tab of the Wall Specification dialog. tab of the Window Specification dialog. See
“Door Specification Dialog” on page 303 or
Openings in Double Walls “Window Specification Dialog” on page 332.

Doors and windows placed in one Double

Wall extend through both walls. You can

CAD to Walls
The CAD to Walls tool can be used to with unique layer attributes. See “Layer
convert CAD lines in floor plan view Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
into architectural objects. Two or more
To convert the lines of an imported drawing
parallel CAD lines can be converted to both
straight or curved walls or rails. CAD lines using CAD to Walls , map its layers in
representing windows and doors can also be the Import Drawing Wizard. Do not check
converted. “Boxes” or “Polylines”. See “Select File” on
page 955.
All lines that you want to convert to walls
must be located on one layer. The same is When CAD objects are located properly,
true for windows, doors, and rails. It is select CAD> CAD to Walls to display
helpful to place like items on a single layer the CAD to Walls dialog.

240
CAFull_RM.book Page 241 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Convert CAD to Walls Dialog

1 2

1 Specify the source layers to be width of the wall type. Typically, only two
converted to walls, windows, doors, or wall types are used in a plan and an interior
rails. and exterior wall type are specified.

2 Click Define to view the Layer Display Conversion works better if lines representing
Options dialog and select a different windows and doors are on different layers,
source layer if needed. although it should still be satisfactory if they
are on the same layer. In either case, the arc
3 Specify wall types for the new walls. indicating door swing helps to identify a door
One, two, or neither can be specified.
and should be placed on the same layer as
To convert to a specific wall type, the lines doors.
must be within one inch or 25mm of that wall
Click OK to complete the conversion.
type’s width. If two wall types are specified,
Converted items are found in the Layer
new walls are converted to the one having
Display Options dialog.
the closest width. The new wall expands or
contracts about its centerline to reach the

Wall Type Definitions

Every wall in a plan is assigned a wall type, Material information in the Wall Type
and its Wall Type Definition determines its Definition can be calculated for take-offs in
structure, appearance in floor plan view and the Materials List. See “Materials Lists” on
default materials. page 1048.

241
CAFull_RM.book Page 242 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Type Definitions

Wall types can be viewed, edited and created material. All of these layers can be calculated
in the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See by the Materials List. Materials that are
“Wall Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243. applied to the outer layers of the wall layer
definition also defines how the wall displays
Walls fall into two categories: Adjustable
in 3D views.
Thickness walls and User Specified walls.
The Main Layer
Adjustable Thickness Walls
In most circumstances, the Main Layer
The Adjustable Thickness Wall type is a
should be specified as the structural layer of
generic, single-layer wall type that cannot be
the wall, particularly when the wall is a
edited in the Wall Type Definitions dialog.
framed type. The Main Layer determines
The Adjustable Thickness Wall is the default many things:
wall type for railings, deck railings and • Floor and ceiling platforms and automati-
fencing. Although its wall type definition cally built foundation walls normally
cannot be altered, you can specify its build to the outer edge of the Main Layer.
thickness in the Railing, Deck Railing and
Fencing Defaults dialogs, as well as on the • Exterior walls on different floors are
General tab of any wall, railing or fence aligned by the outer edges of their Main
using this wall type. See “Wall, Railing and Layers.
Fencing Defaults” on page 215. • Roof baselines are placed at the outer
edge of the Main Layer when roofs are
The program assigns materials and assumes
automatically generated. See “The Base-
certain characteristics of these walls when
line” on page 386.
the Materials List is generated.
• Roof base lines and gable/roof lines that
This wall type may be used in legacy plans are manually drawn snap to the edge of
created in previous program versions; this layer.
however, because of its limited editability, it
is not recommended for walls in new plans. • When wall framing is generated, stud
depth is based on the thickness of each
wall’s Main Layer.
User Specified Walls
All other wall type definitions in the program Wall framing will only generate in a wall
are considered User Specified Walls. Some when a framing material such as Fir
User Specified wall definitions are shipped Stud 16” OC or Metal Stud 24” OC is speci-
with the program and can be customized. fied for its framing layer. See “Material Types”
on page 707.
The 2D display qualities of user specified
walls are defined by the properties in the All of this information is reliant on the Main
Wall Type Defintions dialog.
Layer, so creating your wall type definitions
User Specified walls can have up to ten accurately beforehand and specifying the
layers defined, each representing a different Main Layer is very important.

242
CAFull_RM.book Page 243 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Dimension Layer • Where First Line Offset for Auto Exte-

Dimension line defaults can be set to locate rior Dimensions is measured from.
walls at their surfaces or at their Wall • How the minimum enclosed area
Dimension Layer. See “Locate Objects Tab” required by Auto Exterior
on page 816.
Dimensions is measured.
The Main Layer is the default Wall
The settings on the Locate Objects tab
Dimension Layer for installed wall types;
control how dimensions initially locate
however, this can be changed if need be in
walls. You can move a dimension line’s
the Wall Type Definitions dialog. In addition
extension or add new extensions to locate a
to the Wall Dimension Layer, the program
wall’s surfaces, its Main Layer Surfaces, and/
will locate the inside surface of the Main
or its center line.
Layer, as well.
Whether Surface or Wall Dimension Layer is iwalllay.dat and mwalllay.dat
selected on the Locate Objects tab of the
Dimension Defaults dialog determines a Two files in the Chief Architect program
number of aspects related to how dimensions directory contain some basic default Chief
locate walls: Architect wall type definitions: iwalllay.dat
(Imperial units) and mwalllay.dat (metric
• How Auto Exterior and Manual Dimen- units).
sions measure the lengths of walls.
If you open a .plan file containing no wall
• Where both Manual and Automatic
types, information from iwalllay.dat or
Reach are measured from.
mwalllay.dat is automatically imported,
• Where Extension line lengths and their adding basic wall types to your plan file.
Gap From Marked Object are measured
from.

Wall Type Definitions Dialog

The Wall Type Definitions dialog is using that wall type. Walls in other plan files
used to define new wall types and are unaffected.
redefine existing wall types in the current
If changes to a wall type affect its thickness,
plan file. Select Build> Wall> Define Wall
the position of any walls in the plan using
Types to open this dialog.
that wall type may be affected. See “General
You can also click the Define button on the Wall Defaults” on page 215.
Wall Types tab of the Wall Specification or
in most Wall Defaults dialogs.
Note: The definition of the Adjustable Thick-
Changes made to an existing wall type ness Wall cannot be edited. See “Adjustable
definition affect all walls in the current plan Thickness Walls” on page 242.

243
CAFull_RM.book Page 244 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Type Definitions Dialog

1
8

2 9
10

3 11
4 12
13
5
14
6
7

15

1 Click this drop-down list to display all Layer is usually the structural layer and is
available wall types in the current plan. wider than other layers in the wall assembly
Select a wall type from the list to display its diagram.
definition. You can rename a wall type by
typing in a new name. 3 Define the Thickness for each wall
layer. The layer thickness format can be
To create a new wall type, click New to changed by clicking the Num Style button.
define a new wall type from scratch or click
Wall layers are numbered and are listed from
Copy to copy the current wall type. The
exterior at the top to interior at the bottom.
copied wall type can then be renamed and
To select a layer for editing, click in its Layer
redefined.
Thickness text field. The arrow to the right of
To remove a wall type, select it and click the wall assembly diagram points to the
Delete. Wall types currently being used in selected layer, while the arrow to the left of
your plan or set as plan defaults cannot be the diagram points to its exterior surface.
deleted.

2 Main Layer - If the selected wall type You can also select a wall layer by
has multiple wall layers, select a radio clicking on it in the wall assembly dia-
button to specify the Main Layer. The Main gram at the bottom of the dialog.

244
CAFull_RM.book Page 245 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4 Select a wall layer and check Build Check By Layer if you want the line to
platform to this layer to build floor assume the attributes of the wall’s layer as
and ceiling platforms to this layer of the wall. defined in the Layer Display Options
This option can only be selected for one wall dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
layer: when you check this box for a layer, it 117.
becomes unchecked for the layer it was
Click the Library button to open the Library
previously selected for. By default, this
Browser to the Line Style category. See
option is checked for the Main Layer.
“Line Styles” on page 879.
5 Select a layer and check Dimension to
this Layer to have dimensions locate 9 Layer Material - Specify the material
calculated in the Material List and any
the selected layer of the current wall type.
fill patterns that display in 2D for the
This option can only be selected for a single
currently selected, or active, wall layer.
wall layer, and can only be selected for the
Main Layer or a layer located between the Click either of the two material preview
Main Layer and the exterior surface. By boxes and the Select Library Object dialog
default, this option is checked for the Main opens to the Materials library category.
Layer. Does not affect Interior Dimensions. Specify a material for the active layer in the
See “The Dimension Layer” on page 243. wall layer definition.

6 Total - Displays the total thickness of 10 Click Library Material to open the
the wall type definition. If you change Select Library Object dialog to the
the total thickness value, the thickness of the Materials library category. See “Select
Main Layer automatically updates to account Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
for the difference.
Click Plan Materials to open the Plan
7 Click the Insert button to create a new Materials dialog. See “Plan Materials
layer directly above the selected layer Dialog” on page 718 .
in the wall type definition.
11 Click the Fill Style button to open the
To insert a layer at the bottom or interior of Wall Layer Fill Style dialog and specify
the wall type definition, click on the bottom a fill style for the selected wall layer. This
line in the wall assembly diagram. dialog is similar to the Fill Style tab for CAD
objects. See “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
Click Delete to remove the currently active
layer. The arrow to the right of the wall Wall layer fill styles are overridden if you
assembly diagram points to the active layer. use the Hatch Wall tool on a wall in
floor plan view.
8 Wall Line - Define the Color, Style,
and Weight for the selected line in the
wall assembly diagram. The arrow to the left 12 Show as insulation in elevation -
Check this box to have insulation
of the diagram points to the active line. Any details generated in cross section views when
changes made in the dialog immediately
display in the diagram, illustrating how the the Autodetail tool is used. See “Auto
wall displays in floor plan view. Detailing” on page 755.

245
CAFull_RM.book Page 246 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Exporting Wall Type Definitions

13 Always generate 3D surfaces - Check layer. To select a layer, click on a layer in the
this box to generate outer wall surfaces diagram or click in its Thickness field.
in 3D when wall framing has been built.
The arrow to the left of the wall assembly
When unchecked, outer wall surfaces are not
diagram points to the selected wall line.
displayed when wall framing is built. This
checkbox only affects single-layer framed
15 Click the Num Style button to open the
wall types. Number Style/Angle Style dialog.
Here you can change the numbering format.
14 The arrow to the right of the wall See “Number Style/Angle Style Dialog” on
assembly diagram points to the selected
page 917.

Exporting Wall Type Definitions

Wall type definitions can be exported from
one Chief Architect plan file and imported
into another.
The wall type definitions available to export
from the current plan are listed in the Wall
Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall Type
Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
The File> Export> Wall Definitions
command exports all wall type definitions in
the current plan into a .dat file.
2. In the Save in drop-down, browse to the
To export wall type definitions location on your computer where you
would like to save the exported file.
1. Select File> Export> Wall Definitions • Any folders and .dat files in the current
to open the Export Wall Defintions File location display in the field below.
dialog. • Its possible you may see other .dat files
in this directory that are not wall defi-
nitions.
3. In the File name text field, type a name
for the exported file. Chief Architect
automatically attaches the file extension
.dat, which is the only file type available
in the Save as type field.
4. When both the Save in location and File
name are correct, click Save.

246
CAFull_RM.book Page 247 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Importing Wall Type Definitions

Importing wall type definitions into a plan is 3. Click on the .dat file you wish to import.
a convenient alternative to re-creating wall Its name will display in the File name
types that already exist in another plan. text field.
4. The only file type available in the Save
To import wall type definitions as type field is .dat.

1. Select File> Import> Wall Definitions 5. When the desired file is selected, click
to open the Import Wall Defintions File Open.
dialog. When wall type definitions are imported, the
names of the wall type definitions in the .dat
file are compared with those already present
in your plan. If the program finds identical
names, it will ask you if you want to replace
existing wall definitions with the same name.
Click Yes to replace existing files in the plan
file, or No to keep the definitions already in
the plan.
The imported wall type definitions are now
available in your current plan
2. In the Look in drop-down, browse to the
location on your computer where the file Wall type definitions that you use often
you wish to import is saved. should be saved in your default tem-
• Any folders and .dat files in the current plate plan. See “To create your own template
location display in the field below. plan” on page 52.

• Its possible you may see other .dat files

in this directory that are not wall defi-
nitions.

Stepped and Raked Walls

Stepped and raked walls can be easily Stepped Walls & Footings
created using the Break Line tool and One application for pony walls is a stepped
the wall’s edit handles in any 3D or Cross foundation. The lower part of the pony wall
Section/Elevation view. In many cases, is the concrete wall with footing, and the
working in a Backclipped Cross Section upper part of the pony wall is a framed wall
is easiest and allows the greatest accuracy. built to the first floor platform.

247
CAFull_RM.book Page 248 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Stepped and Raked Walls

In the illustration above, the lower pony wall Raked Walls

is a single layer concrete wall and the upper
part of the pony wall is faced with brick.

To create a simple raked wall:

1. Select the wall in cross section/elevation

or 3D view.
To add a step to a wall
2. Click one of the corner edit handles and
1. Select the wall in a Backclipped Cross drag that handle either up or down.
Section view. 3. To rake a wall at a specific angle, you
can use Angle Snaps , or draw a
2. Click the Break Line tool, then
click the top or bottom edge of the wall CAD Line at the desired angle.
to place the break. Select the raked edge of the wall, click
3. In addition to the corner handles, two the Make Parallel edit button, and
handles display along the broken edge. then click the CAD line. See “Using
Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on page
4. Select one of these two handles, and
181.
drag up or down.
5. A square step is created. Compound Raked Walls
The vertical edges of a wall cannot be The illustration below shows two walls
broken. meeting in a “V”. Both walls have three
By default, a stepped foundation wall angles across the top of the wall.
displays an “S” symbol at the location of the
step in floor plan view. The display of this
“S” is controlled in the Wall Defaults dialog.
See “Exterior/Interior Wall Defaults” on
page 216.

To create a compound raked wall, breaks

must be added to the raked edge. Each
section of the wall’s edge can then be
adjusted separately. Breaks cannot be added

248
CAFull_RM.book Page 249 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

to the vertical edges of a wall - only the 2. The new break point displays as an edit
horizontal edges. handle. Click this new handle and drag it
to create the desired angle.
To create a compound raked wall

1. In cross section/elevation view, select

the wall, click the Break Wall tool,
then click either edge to be raked.

Wall Specification Dialog

To open the Wall Specification dialog, select The settings in this dialog are alsosimilar to
a wall or group of walls and click the Open those in the Railing, Deck Railing and
Fencing Defaults dialogs. The settings in
Object edit button.
these defaults dialogs determine the initial
The tabs of the Wall Specification dialog are characteristics of railings, deck railings and
also found in the Railing, Deck Railing, and fencing when they are first drawn. See
Fencing Specification dialogs. “Default Settings” on page 63.

249
CAFull_RM.book Page 250 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

General Tab

1 4
2
3 5
6

7 8

Some items on the General tab are available

4 Specify the Wall Angle and Wall
only when they apply to the selected wall or Length of a straight wall. These
walls. options are not available for curved walls.
• Wall Angle - The current absolute angle
1 The Thickness of the selected wall of the wall in a floor plan view is shown.
displays here. It can be specified only
when the wall is an Adjustable Thickness Type in a new angle to rotate the wall
wall type. This option is not available for about its locked point.
layered wall types. • Wall Length - The current length is
shown. Type in a new length. The part of
2 Check Foundation to specify the the wall that extends or contracts is deter-
selected wall as a foundation wall.
More foundation wall settings are available mined by where it is locked.
on the Foundation tab.
5 Select a radio button to Lock the
selected wall at its Start, End or Center.
3 Check Railing to specify the selected When the Wall Angle or Wall Length of the
wall as a railing. More railing settings
are found on the Railing and Newels/ selected wall is changed, this part of the wall
Balusters and Handrail tabs. does not move.

250
CAFull_RM.book Page 251 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

6 Check any of the Options to modify the • Select Lock Center to lock the center of
selected wall accordingly. In most a curved wall.
cases, multiple options can be selected. • Select to Retain Wall Framing for this
• Check Invisible to specify the wall as wall, as seen in the wall detail view or in
invisible. Invisible walls are used to 3D framing, when the wall framing is
divide rooms areas that are not separated globally rebuilt.
by a wall or railing, such as a nook from a • Select Terrain Retaining Wall to treat
kitchen, and can display in floor plan the wall as a terrain retaining wall. See
view but not 3D views. “Terrain Breaks” on page 586.
• Select Stop at Platform to have the bot-
Select Railing and Invisible to place tom of the wall stop at the top surface of a
walls where there is a vertical break in
floor platform. This is the default for
the floor or ceiling level at the invisible
wall’s location. If railing is not selected, there
framed wall types.
will be a gap where the levels change. • Select Go Through Platform to have the
bottom of the wall go through a floor
• Select No Room Definition to display platform. This is the default for concrete
the wall in floor plan and/or 3D views but wall types.
not define or divide a room.
• Select No Locate to prevent dimension Whether a wall is a framed or concrete type is
lines from locating a wall. No Locate can determined by the material selected for its
be used for any wall that you do not want main layer. See “Wall Type Definitions Dia-
dimensioned. No Locate is selected by log” on page 243.
default for Railings and Invisible Walls.
• Select Stop at Ceiling to have the top of
• Select Invisible Beam to have the wall
the wall stop at the bottom of a ceiling
display as two lines in floor plan view.
platform.
This option is included for compatibility
with earlier versions and its use is not • Select Balloon Through Ceiling to have
encouraged. It does not create a beam. the top of the wall go through a ceiling
platform.
• Select Attic Wall to prevent the wall
from extending through the roof above. • Default Wall Top Height and Default
See “Attic Walls” on page 238. Wall Bottom Height are enabled if the
selected wall top and/or bottom height
• Automatic Wall displays for reference has been edited. Check these boxes to
and is checked whenever the selected restore the default heights.
wall was generated by the program. Typi-
cally automatic walls are also Attic walls. 7 Radius To - This section is only active
for curved walls and controls the
• Check Wall Butts Other Walls to con-
definition of the curved wall radius.
nect the selected wall at the surfaces of
other walls rather than at their main layer.

251
CAFull_RM.book Page 252 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

• Outer - Select this radio button to define Lock Ends - Select this button so that when
the radius from the center of the curved the radius is changed, the wall ends remain
wall to the outer surface of the wall. locked and the wall center changes.
• Inner - Select this radio button to define
the radius from the center of the curved 8 Check Double Wall to specify the
selected straight wall as a double wall.
wall to the inner surface of the wall. Two walls become double walls when they
• Outer Main - Select this radio button to are parallel, touching, and this box is
display or modify the radius from the checked for both. See “Double Walls” on
center of the curved wall to the outside of page 239.
the main layer of the wall. This section is only active for straight walls.
• Inner Main - Select this radio button to • Select Frame Through to create a basic
define the radius from the center of the double wall.
curved wall to the inside of the main
layer of the wall. • Select Split Framing to create a double
wall that splits platforms and connecting
• Radius - Displays the radius length as walls at its boundary.
defined by the above radio buttons. Mod-
ify this value to change the curvature of • Select Furred Wall to treat the selected
the wall. wall as additional layers added to another
wall.
Lock Center - Select this button so that
when the radius is changed, the wall center 9 Click the Num Style button to open the
remains locked and the wall ends change. Number Style/Angle Style dialog and
change the way the Wall Angle and Wall
Length values display. See “Number Style/
Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.

Roof Tab
Any automatically generated roof style other interacts with the roof plan, defining the
than a hip requires roof information to be portion of the roof plan that bears on it. See
defined in the exterior walls. On the Roof “Automatic vs. Manual Roofs” on page 375.
tab, you can specify how the selected wall

252
CAFull_RM.book Page 253 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 2

3
4

1 Roof Options - Specify the shape of • Check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom to pre-
the wall relative to the roof. vent the portion of a selected wall located
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable below an intersecting roof plane from
end over the selected wall. building.

• Check High Shed/Gable Wall to specify • Combine with Above Wall - This check
the selected wall as the high end of a shed box is available for a selected wall with
roof. an attic wall above it. Check this box to
frame the upper and lower portions of the
• Check Knee Wall to define the selected wall together as one when automatic
interior wall as a knee wall. Only an inte- framing is built. See “Wall Framing” on
rior wall can be defined as a knee wall. A page 461.
knee wall’s height is defined by the roof
above, not the ceiling height. See “Knee 2 Pitch Options - Specify the pitch or
Walls” on page 238. pitches of the roof plane(s) above the
selected wall.
• Check Extend Slope Downward to con-
tinue a roof down over a bumpout in an • Enter a value to define the Pitch of the
exterior wall. See “Extend Slope Down- roof plane bearing on the selected wall.
ward” on page 397.

253
CAFull_RM.book Page 254 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

• Check Upper Pitch to create a roof with • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return.
two pitches or, if the selected wall is a Specify a Sloping or Flat roof return. See
Full Gable Wall, a half hip condition. “Roof Tutorial” on page 191 of the
• Enter the Pitch of the second, upper roof. User’s Guide.

• Specify the Height that the Upper Pitch • Check the boxes to Include Frieze mold-
Starts at, or define the distance in from ing and Include Gutter on the roof
Baseline that the second pitch begins. returns.
The two values are dynamic. Press the
Tab key to update the relative numbers. 4 Specify the Overhang Length, which
is the horizontal distance from the
baseline to the eave. See “The Baseline” on
3 Check Auto Roof Return to generate page 386.
roof returns on the selected wall. In
most cases, roof returns only work for Full
Gable Walls. See “Roof Returns” on page 5 Lower wall type if split by butting
roof - Specify the desired wall type for
423. the portion of the selected wall located
• Specify the horizontal Length of the roof beneath an adjacent, abutting roof plane,
return in inches. should one be present. The upper portion is
defined on the Wall Types tab.
• Enter a value in inches to Extend the roof
returns from the overhang.

254
CAFull_RM.book Page 255 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Foundation Tab

1
2
3

4
5
6

1 Check Specify Foundation to turn the available when the footing bottom height has
selected wall into a foundation wall. been edited.
This produces a footing beneath the wall.
5 Center Footing on Main Layer -
2 The Thickness of the selected wall Check this box to center the footing on
displays here. It can be specified only the wall’s Main Layer. When unchecked, the
when the wall is the Adjustable Thickness footing is centered on the wall’s center line.
wall type. This option is not available for
layered wall types.
Note: Warning messages may display if the
foundation wall layer definition does not
3 Footing Width and Height - Define appear to be a foundation wall type.
the size of the footing below the
selected foundation walls.
The Height value will be unavailable if the 6 Specify the Footing Offset, which is
the distance between the center of the
bottom height of the footing has been edited. footing and the center of the wall. A positive
value offsets the footing to the right of the
4 Automatic Footing Bottom Height - wall’s center. A negative value offsets the
Check this box to restore the default
height of the selected wall’s footing. Only footing to the left of the wall’s center. The

255
CAFull_RM.book Page 256 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

left and right side of a wall is determined by page 92 for information about displaying
its start and end points. See “Edit Panel” on start and end points.

Wall Types Tab

2
3

4 5

1 Choose the selected wall’s Wall Type 2 Check Pony Wall to specify the
from the drop-down list of all currently selected wall as a pony wall having
available types. A preview of the selected different wall types on its upper and lower
wall type displays below the drop-down list. portions. See “Pony Walls” on page 223.
• Click the Define button to open the Wall
Type Definitions dialog to create or mod-
3 Specify the Lower Wall Type: the wall
type of the lower portion of the pony
ify existing wall types. See “Wall Type wall. A preview of the selected wall type
Definitions Dialog” on page 243. displays below the drop-down list.
• Click the Define button to open the Wall
The Adjustable Thickness Wall is the recom- Type Definitions dialog.
mended wall type for railings. See “Adjust-
able Thickness Walls” on page 242.
The Adjustable Thickness Wall cannot be
assigned to the Lower Pony Wall.

256
CAFull_RM.book Page 257 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4 Align pony wall - Specify how the • Select Inner surface to align wall types
layers of the selected wall’s Upper and at their interior surfaces.
Lower portions align.
• No change is used by default when mul- 5 Specify which part of the pony wall you
would like to Display in Plan view.
tiple pony walls with different alignment
• Select Default to display the portion of
settings are selected. Choose this to leave
the pony wall specified in the Pony Wall
the alignment as it was when the dialog
Defaults dialog. See “Wall, Railing and
was opened.
Fencing Defaults” on page 215.
• Select Outer surface to align wall types
• Select Upper Wall to display the upper
at their outer surfaces.
portion of this pony wall in floor plan
• Select Outer main to align wall types at view regardless of the default setting.
the exterior edge of their main layers.
• Select Lower Wall to display the lower
• Select Central main to align the centers portion of this pony wall in floor plan
of the main layers of both wall types. view regardless of the default setting.
• Select Inner main to align the wall types • When walls are group-selected, choose
at the interior side of their main layers. No Change to allow each wall in the
selction set to maintain its own setting.

257
CAFull_RM.book Page 258 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

Railing Tab

2
6
7

3 8
4 9
5 10

1 Specify Railing - Check this box to • Solid - Create a solid, wall style railing.
specify the selected wall as a railing The wall is the type defined by the cur-
and enable the other options on this tab. rent wall layer definition.
Railings can be also drawn directly using the
Railing or Deck Railing tools.

2 Railing Type - Select the radio button

for the desired railing type. A preview
of the selected type displays to the left.
The following illustrations show the results • Open - Create a railing with only a top
of each option. rail.
• Balusters - Create balusters.

258
CAFull_RM.book Page 259 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Middle Rail - Create a railing with a top

and a middle rail.

• No Rail - Eliminate rails, leaving only

pillars or posts (and overhead beam, if
selected).
• Post to Ceiling - Check this box to
extend the newel posts to the ceiling.

• Panels - Create a solid panel.

3 Post Length - Select the check box for 4 Check Exterior Materials to make the
the desired post length. balusters the same material as the rails
instead of having them be defined separately.
• Post to Rail - Create newel posts from You have more flexibility if you define
floor to rail height. This option is selected materials for each part on the Materials tab.
by default.
5 Shoe Options - Select the check box
for the desired placement of the bottom
rail, or shoe. If neither box is checked, the
shoe is placed at floor platform level.
• Raise Shoe - Raise the shoe 3-1/2” or 87
mm off the floor platform.
• Post to Beam - Create newel posts from
floor to an overhead beam placed just
under the ceiling height. This option is
used when placing a cross beam along the
top of the railing.

259
CAFull_RM.book Page 260 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

• No Shoe - Eliminate the shoe altogether.

9 Terrain Options - Select the check box
Balusters go right to the floor. for the desired fencing or railing
behavior on terrain. These options only apply
when railing or fencing is drawn outside of a
building on top of a defined terrain.
• Step Terrain - Check this box to have the
railing or fencing follow the terrain in
horizontal steps between each newel.
6 A preview of the railing displays here
and updates as options are changed. • Follow Terrain - Check this box to have
the railing or fencing follow the terrain
7 Check this box to display the preview smoothly.
in color.

8 Halfpost Options - Select the check 10 Generate on Low Platform - Check

box for the desired halfpost placement. this box to display the selected railing
on the lower floor platform when the railing
• No Halfpost - Check this box to prevent defines two room areas with different floor
a half-width post from being placed when heights. See “Aligning Railing on Different
a railing intersects a wall. Floors” on page 237.
• Square Halfpost - Check this box to use
a square halfpost where a railing intersect
with a wall.

260
CAFull_RM.book Page 261 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Newels/Balusters Tab

1
2
3
4
5

6
7
8
9

1 Railing Height - Specify the railing center of the railing. Use this when creating
height. a fence with the newels to one side of the
fence boards.
2 Baluster Width - Specify the width or
diameter of each baluster at its widest
6 Panel Type - Only available when the
point. For a Panel railing, this is the panel’s railing type has been specified as
thickness and can be no larger than the “Panels.” Select solid, framed, or Library to
railing’s total thickness, shown on the select a symbol to be used as a rail panel.
General tab.
7 Baluster Type - Only available when
3 Newel Width - Specify the width of the railing type is not specified as
each newel. For a library newel, this is “Panels.” Select square, round, or Library
its width or diameter at its widest point. Balusters and specify the on-center (O.C.)
spacing. Selecting Library from this drop-
4 Newel Height - This is the height from down list is the same as clicking the Library
the ground to the top of the newel.
button to the imediate right and allows you to
5 Newel Offset - Specify the amount select a symbol from the library to be used as
each newel should be offset from the a baluster.

261
CAFull_RM.book Page 262 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Specification Dialog

8 Newel Type - Select square, round, or 9 Check Default to use the Draw Newels/
Library Newels and specify the on- Balusters setting in the Railing
center (O.C.) spacing. Selecting Library Defaults dialog. Check Draw Newels/
from this drop-down list is the same as Balusters to draw newels and balusters in
clicking the Library button to the immediate floor plan view.
right and allows you to select a symbol from
the library to be used as a newel.

Wall Covering Tab

1
2

1 All wall covering materials applied to “Select Library Object Dialog” on page
the selected wall are listed here. Select 689.
one from the drop-down list to edit it or • Click Select to replace the current wall
remove it from the wall. covering with a new one from the library.
2 Add, replace or remove the selected • Click Delete to remove the current wall
wall’s wall coverings. covering from the selected wall.
• Click Add New to open the Select
Library Object dialog and apply a new 3 Specify the position of the current wall
covering. Preview panes of the current
wall covering to the selected wall. See wall covering also display here.

262
CAFull_RM.book Page 263 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Enter the heights of the current wall cov- • Check Interior and/or Exterior to apply
ering’s Top To Ceiling and Floor To the wall covering to the inside and/or out-
Bottom. The wall covering’s Width can side of the selected wall. Interior is
also be specified. checked by default. See “Wall Type Defi-
nitions” on page 241.

Handrail Tab
The settings on the Handrail tab are used to
specify the style and size of the handrailing
on a selected railing, deck railing, or fence.

1
2
3
4

1 Molding - The name of the currently specify a profile from the library to be used
selected handrail profile displays here. as a handrail.
If no handrail profile is selected, “Default
Handrail” displays here and a 2” (5 mm) 3 Click the Default button to remove a
custom handrail that has been specified
square profile is used.
and use the default handrail.
2 Click the Select button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and 4 Molding Specification - Specify the
desired handrail profile.

263
CAFull_RM.book Page 264 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

• Specify the Width and Height of the Layer Tab

handrail molding.
For information about the Layers tab, see
• A preview of the selected profile displays “Layer Tab” on page 125.
to the left. If no profile is selected, the
“Default Handrail” is used but does not
Materials Tab
display here.
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.
Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.

Wall Hatch Specification Dialog

To open the dialog, select a wall hatch and Fill Style Tab
click the Open Object edit button. See For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Hatch Wall” on page 220. “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Layer Tab
For information about the Layer tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 125.

264
CAFull_RM.book Page 265 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

265
CAFull_RM.book Page 266 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 8:

Rooms

When walls or railings create an enclosed Chapter Contents

area, a “room” is created. You can select • Room Definition
rooms defined in this manner like other • Floor Defaults
objects in Chief Architect. • Room Material Defaults
Rooms are assigned a Room Type. Each • Floor & Ceiling Heights
Room Type has predefined characteristics. • Selecting Rooms
For example, a room defined as Porch is • Room Types
assigned certain attributes that are different • Room Labels
than a Kitchen. • Decks
• Editing Rooms
Floor and ceiling heights, baseboard, chair- • Special Ceilings
rail, and crown moldings and materials can • Room Polylines
be defined room-by-room or for the entire • Room Specification Dialog
floor. • Room Finish Schedules

266
CAFull_RM.book Page 267 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Room Definition
A room is a totally enclosed area defined by If a room is drawn within a larger structure
any combination of joined walls or railings, and none of its walls connect to the exterior
visible or invisible. To be recognized as a walls, either directly or indirectly by
room by Chief Architect, a room must have connecting to walls that do, the program will
an unbroken perimeter. view this room as a separate building and
unexpected issues may result. Connect such
Unless otherwise specified, rooms generate
a room to the larger structure with an
floor and ceiling platforms automatically.
invisible wall or an invisible railing.
Most rooms are also automatically covered
by the roof when one is built. There are Room definition disappears if part or all of a
exceptions to this, such as rooms defined as surrounding wall is deleted. It is a good idea
Decks. to finalize the position of walls before
defining rooms with names and attributes
such as floor height and ceiling height.

Floor Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by to create 3D models - particularly floor and
selecting Edit> Default Settings. In ceiling heights. Moldings can also be
the Default Settings dialog, select Floor and specified in the Floor Defaults dialog.
click the Edit button to open the Floor
Only the defaults for the first floor of a
Defaults dialog for the current floor.
building can be set ahead of time. The
The default values for rooms are specified in program uses the setting from the first floor
the Floor Defaults dialog for the current to create subsequent floors. Once a new floor
floor. The Floor Defaults dialog contains is built, its floor defaults can be changed. See
important information that the program uses “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.

Room Material Defaults

The default materials used for rooms are • Garage, Porches.
specified based on the type of room. There
The Room Material Defaults dialog is
are four separate room types that can have
accessed by selecting Edit> Default
their default materials specified:
Settings . Expand the Materials
• General Rooms
category, select Room Materials, and click
• Kitchens, Baths, and Utility Rooms Edit. Select a room type to open the Room
• Decks Material Defaults dialog for that room type.

267
CAFull_RM.book Page 268 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Floor & Ceiling Heights

This dialog is similar to the Materials tab Wall Materials

found in many specification dialogs. See
“Materials Tab” on page 709. There are several ways that materials can be
assigned to walls, depending on how the
If a room type is assigned, the room uses one rooms and walls have been defined.
of the four defaults for its materials. If a
room type has not been assigned, the room When you create a room, the wall surfaces
uses the General Rooms default materials. use the default material specified in the Wall
Type Definition dialog. See “Wall Type
Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
Floor and Ceiling Materials
You can change a room’s wall material on the
Specify floor materials and subfloor material
Materials tab of the Room Specification
for the entire floor in the Room Material
dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 709. To
Defaults dialog or for individual rooms in
restore the default Wall Type material, click
the Room Specification dialog.
Plan Materials and select Use Default from
You can specify three separate ceiling the list. See “Plan Materials Dialog” on page
materials for a ceiling. 718.
Normally, only the Floor Covering and the In addition, you can change the surface
Ceiling Covering display in 3D views. If the material of an individual wall in the Wall
covering is specified as No Material, the Specification dialog. If you select Use
material below is visible. If no floor or Default as the material, the program refers to
ceiling material has been assigned, then the the material specified in the Room
program displays the default material for the Specification dialog. See “Wall
floor or ceiling. Specification Dialog” on page 249.
All floor and ceiling materials are used for When neither the wall nor the room has a
the calculation of the materials list. material assigned to it, the program refers to
the general material for walls in the Material
You can only assign unique ceiling materials
Defaults dialog. See “Material Defaults
to individual rooms when the checkbox Use
Dialog” on page 726.
Above Floor’s Platform for Ceiling is
unchecked in the Floor Defaults dialog. See
“Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.

Floor & Ceiling Heights

Default floor and ceiling heights are defined Use the Room Specification dialog to set
in the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor, floor heights on a room-by-room basis. See
including the foundation. Use the Floor “Room Specification Dialog” on page 283.
Defaults dialog to change these values on a
floor-by-floor basis. See “Floor Defaults” on
page 267.

268
CAFull_RM.book Page 269 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Different rooms on the same floor can have enclosing an area with solid walls, use
unique floor and ceiling heights, allowing Railings .
you to create:
• Split levels and bi-levels
• Sunken living rooms and garages
• Cathedral, vaulted, and coffered ceilings.
In 3D views, you can adjust the default floor
and ceiling height for the entire floor, the
floor and ceiling height for an individual
room, or the top and bottom heights of an
individual wall. See “In 3D Views” on page
278. Using Invisible Using an
Railings Invisible Wall

Visible or invisible, railings work well to

create room definition because they put a
railing where the two rooms meet and fill in
the vertical space between with a short wall.
An invisible wall does not fill in the vertical
space between the two levels.
Ceiling and floor heights are interrelated.
Changing the floor or ceiling height in one
room can affect floor and ceiling heights
above and below.
All floor and ceiling heights are measured • If a room’s floor is lowered, its ceiling
relative to zero, which is the default floor height is increased while the ceiling
height for Floor 1. Unlike other default floor below that room drops.
and ceiling heights, the default floor height
for Floor 1 cannot be changed, but the floor • If the floor is raised, the ceiling height
heights of rooms on Floor 1 can be edited decreases while the ceiling below that
individually. room is raised.
• If a ceiling is lowered or raised, the floor
In order to raise or lower a room’s floor or
above is lowered or raised as well.
ceiling height, you must give it a room
definition. To create room definition without If the rooms above a particular room have
more than one floor height, the room’s
ceiling is stepped.

269
CAFull_RM.book Page 270 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Selecting Rooms

In the following example, the lowest floor

height is 0, the next is 24, and the next is 48
inches. The ceiling height in each room is set
at 96 inches. An overview and cross section/
elevation view are shown.

In a situation like this, a Lowered Ceiling can

be used to cover any “steps” made by
different floor heights on the floor above. See
“General Tab” on page 283.

Split Levels
A split level can be created by raising or
lowering the floor and ceiling heights of
various areas of the plan.

Selecting Rooms
Room definition is established when a room
is completely enclosed by walls. You can
confirm that a room has room definition by
using the Select Objects tool to select it.
When a fully-enclosed room is selected, the
room highlights.

Note: The selection color can be specified in

the Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel”
on page 74.
The room at left is selected

Note: The selection color can be specified in

the Preferences dialog. See “Colors Panel”
on page 74.

270
CAFull_RM.book Page 271 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

As with many other objects in the program, Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
rooms can be group-selected, as well. Panel” on page 88.

The Exterior Room In 3D Views

You can also select the exterior of a model. Click on the floor of a room or on a wall
This allows you to control the building’s surface inside the room in a 3D or cross
exterior wall coverings and materials using section view using the Select Objects
the Room Specification dialog. tool. If you select another object instead of
Click just outside an exterior wall using the the room, click Select Next Object edit
Select Objects tool to select the Exterior button or press the Tab key until the room is
Room. When it is selected, a highlighted selected. The Status Bar indicates which
band around the plan’s exterior displays. object is currently selected.
This band represents the selection area for In camera views and overviews, the Exterior
the Exterior Room. Room can be selected by clicking once on
the exterior surface of an exterior wall using
the Select Objects tool, provided that
Select Room Before Wall in 3D is selected
in the Preferences dialog. See
“Architectural Panel” on page 88.

Note: If the wall height of the Exterior Room

is adjusted in a 3D view, the default Floor or
Ceiling Height of the entire floor is changed.
See “Floor Defaults” on page 267.

Using Select Same Type

The Exterior Room is selected
Click a room to select it, then click the
In camera views and overviews, the Exterior Select Same Type edit button and use
Room can be selected by clicking on the it to group-select rooms with shared
exterior surface of an exterior wall using the attributes. See “Select Same / Load Same”
Select Objects tool, provided that Select on page 208.
Room Before Wall in 3D is selected in the

Room Types
When a room is first created by enclosing an Once your floor plan is laid out, each room
area with walls, it is assigned a generic room should be assigned a Room Type in the
type of “Unspecified.” Room Specification dialog. See “General

271
CAFull_RM.book Page 272 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Types

Tab” on page 283. The Room Type applies • Exterior rooms are assumed to be open to
appropriate structural and display properties the outside and do not generate a roof
to the room. above them.
When you assign a Room Type, a label • Attic rooms are ignored by the program’s
showing the room’s Type displays in floor automatic roof generator.
plan view. • Garage, Slabs, and Porches are treated
You can edit the text of a room label in floor like exterior rooms in all cases except
plan view, but the type of room originally that they generate a ceiling and a roof
assigned remains until it is changed in the above them.
Room Specification dialog. See “Editing Floors and Foundations
Room Labels” on page 274. • Open Below is a unique type of interior
room. It has no floor platform and can be
Available Room Types used for defining stairwell openings.
There are three categories of room types: • Exterior walls of rooms default to create
Interior, Exterior and Hybrid. the foundation type specified in the
Foundation Defaults dialog.
Interior - Living, Dining, Family, Kitchen,
Nook, Bath, Master Bath, Master Bedrm, • Walls that define the garage have a foun-
Bedroom, Study, Office, Entry, Hall, Closet, dation under them defined by the
Dressing, Storage, Laundry, Utility and Foundation Defaults dialog with a con-
Unspecified. crete slab at the top of stem wall or grade
beam.
Exterior - Court, Deck, Balcony.
• The garage floor displays in 3D with the
Hybrid - Open Below, Garage, Slab, Porch, foundation floor, not the first floor.
Attic.
• Defining a room as Slab causes the floor
platform thickness to equal the slab thick-
Effects of Room Types ness value in the Foundation Defaults
The program applies specific structural and dialog.
display properties to rooms depending on the • Courts, decks and balconies do not gener-
assigned Room Type. ate foundations.
Living Area Doors and Windows
• All interior type rooms are included in • A window placed in a wall between an
Living Area calculations; exterior and exterior room and an interior room
hybrid rooms are not. always faces out toward the exterior.
Ceilings and Roofs • Windows placed between interior rooms
• Interior rooms have a ceiling and roof generate a warning message.
above them unless specified otherwise. • Door placed between interior and exterior
type rooms display threshold lines.

272
CAFull_RM.book Page 273 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Interior doors do not display thresholds. • Any outlet manually placed in an exterior
• Open Below rooms are treated as interior room automatically becomes a water-
rooms for window and door placement. proof outlet designed for exterior use.

Electrical Trim and Molding

• Moldings are not automatically drawn in
• The Auto Place Outlets tool adds exterior rooms.
outlets automatically to all interior rooms
except bathrooms. Only one outlet over • Baseboards and chair rails are not drawn
each sink is added for a bathroom. in Open Below rooms, but crown mold-
ing is.
• The Auto Place Outlets tool places Plan Check
fewer outlets in hybrid rooms.
• Plan Check uses the room type and
• The Auto Place Outlets tool does its characteristics for basic plan checking.
not place outlets in exterior type rooms, For example, a closet does not need a
Porches or Open Below rooms. smoke detector but a bedroom does. See
“Plan Check” on page 928.

Room Labels
A label can display in floor plan view for any Room Label Defaults
area defined as a room. There are two parts
to each room label: The initial settings that control the
size, font, color and other aspects of
• The Room Name, which is similar to a room label appearance are controlled in the
Text object and can be selected and Room Label Defaults dialog. See “Room
edited. See “The Text Tools” on page Label Defaults” on page 839.
841.
• The room area, which is not a standard Custom Room Labels
text entry and cannot be directly edited. The Room Names that display in room labels
You can assign a custom Room Name, move are often based on the Room Types assigned
a room label or even delete it without in the Room Specification dialog. You can,
affecting the Room Type. See “Room Types” however create a custom name for a selected
on page 271. room, also in the Room Specification
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 283.
Room labels can move or even disap- Before creating a custom Room Name,
pear when room entries are revalidated. assign the Room Type most similar to the
room’s actual use. For example, if you wish
to name a room “Guest Room”, begin by

273
CAFull_RM.book Page 274 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Labels

specifying it as a “Bedroom” since these Rooms, Standard Area can be measured to

rooms have similar uses. either the exterior main wall layer surface or
to the exterior wall surface. Specify which
When a Room Name is based on its Room
method you prefer in the Floor Defaults
Type, the name in the label will be in all
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 353.
capital letters. When a custom Room Name
is used, capitalization is user-defined.
You can customize room labels using a
If you wish to further customize a room’s variety of text macros. See “Text Mac-
label by adding text or a text macro, uncheck ros” on page 869.
Show Room Label in the Room
Specification dialog and create your own Editing Room Labels
label using a Text object. See “The Text
Tools” on page 841. Room labels are similar to simple Text
objects and can be changed, moved and
Displaying Room Labels resized much like any other text object. The
actual text of a room label cannot be
The display of room labels is controlled in modified, however.
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page If you delete a room label, the Room Type
121. You can specify how the area of rooms remains in the Room Specification dialog.
is calculated by the program by turning on To restore the label, check the Show Room
the display of one of these layers: Label check box in the Room Specification
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 283.
• Rooms, Standard Area is measured
from center of interior walls to either the
outside surface of exterior walls or exte- Note: If you use the Convert to Rich Text edit
rior wall framing, depending on the Liv- tool to convert a Room Label to a Text object,
ing Area to setting in the Floor Defaults it will no longer be display room size informa-
tion or update if the room type is changed.
dialog. It is rounded to the nearest square
See “Convert to Rich Text” on page 855.
foot or mm and does not include the area
within bay, box and bow windows.
Room Area
• Rooms, Interior Area is measured from
the inner surfaces of all the room's walls. Unlike the rest of a room label, the room area
Its format is set in the Floor Defaults dia- and dimensions are not standard text entries
log for the current floor. See “Format and cannot be edited or changed. The room
Tab” on page 354. area moves, resizes and rotates with the rest
of the room label, but you can turn the area
• Rooms, Interior Dimensions is also
and dimensions on or off separately in the
measured from the inner surfaces of the
Layer Display Options dialog.
room walls. Its format is set in the Floor
Defaults dialog for the current floor. The Interior Area room area calculation
includes the areas within bay, box or bow

274
CAFull_RM.book Page 275 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

windows, while the Standard Area and Living Area vs. Footprint
Interior Dimensions calculations do not.
The Living Area should not be mistaken for
You can also insert room areas as well as the footprint of the house. Only true livable
other information into text objects using Text areas are included in the Living Area
Macros. See “Text Macros” on page 869. calculation. Exterior and hybrid room types
such as Garage, Deck, and Porch are not
Living Area included. Neither is any room labeled Open
Below or Attic. See “Available Room Types”
The Living Area label displays the area of
on page 272.
the floor platform for living areas in a plan. It
is found near the bottom center of the plan as Living Area is measured from the outside
soon as a room area is defined by walls and/ surface or main layer surface of exterior
or railing. The area is recalculated every time walls, and to the center of walls or railings
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings . separating the living area from exterior or
hybrid room types.
The Living Area displays for an individual
building if half or more of that building's area To find the footprint of a floor
is living area. For example, a living area
label would not display for a detached garage 1. Click outside a plan, near an exterior
that contains a bathroom or small shop. wall. This selects the exterior “room”
You can choose not to display this label by surrounding the plan.
clearing the Show “Living Area” check box 2. Click the Make Room Polyline edit
in the Plan Defaults dialog or by turning off button. This creates a polyline surround-
the display of the Room Labels layer in the ing the plan from the exterior wall sur-
Layer Display Options dialog. face.
The Living Area label can be moved or 3. You can edit the polyline shape if you
deleted. To restore a deleted Living Area want to measure portions of a home.
label, select Tools> Checks> Plan
4. Select the Polyline and click the Open
Check . You can click the Done button
Object edit button. A Polyline Area
immediately, without actually completing
displays in the Polyline Specification
Plan Check.
dialog. If no area is shown, the polyline
is not closed.

Decks
You can define a room as a “Deck” in the To draw a deck, select Build> Deck> Deck
Room Specification dialog. See “General
Railing , then click and drag to draw a
Tab” on page 283. railing. Once room definition is established,

275
CAFull_RM.book Page 276 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Decks

the area defined by the deck railing is right mouse button) and drag in the
assigned the “Deck” room type. direction of the stairs. Holding the Alt
key produces a stairway that goes down
To create a deck without a railing, use one of
instead of up.
the Deck Edge tools. See “Deck Edge” on
page 227. 3. Place a doorway in the railing at the top
of the steps.
You can also create a regular, polygon-
shaped deck using the Polygon Shaped
The only time you should ever draw
Deck tool. See “Polygon Shaped Rooms stairs from an upper level down is when
and Decks” on page 225. you are going from a floor platform such as a
deck to the ground or finished grade. When
A room does not have to be defined by Deck stairs are drawn between two floor platforms,
Railing to be specified as a “Deck.” See they should be drawn from the lower floor
“Room Types” on page 271. platform to the upper floor platform.
By default, decks do not have roofs. If you
want to have a roof over a deck, check Roof Deck Framing
over this room in the Room Specification There are two ways to frame a Deck room in
dialog. See “Structure Tab” on page 286. Chief Architect: using Standard deck
To give the roof a visible means of support, framing or Advanced Deck Framing.
you can select the Post to Beam option in the • Standard deck framing includes joists and
Wall Specification dialog. See “Railing Tab” rim joists and is created when regular
on page 258. floor framing is generated using the
Build Framing dialog. See “Floor Tabs”
Deck Stairs on page 468.
There are two ways to create stairs from a • Advanced Deck Framing is created by
deck down to the terrain. selecting a Deck room and clicking the
Build Advanced Deck Framing edit
To create stairs using the Click Stair tool button. In addition to joists and rim joists,
deck planking is generated and beams
1. Select the Click Stair tool. and posts may be created, all based on the
settings in the Room Specification
2. Click within 12 inches of the deck rail,
dialog. See “Deck Tab” on page 288.
outside the deck.
Standard deck framing is built for a Deck
To draw a down stairway from a deck only if its Advanced Deck Framing has not
been generated.
1. Select Build> Stairs in floor plan If Standard deck framing is present when
view. Advanced Deck Framing is generated, it is
2. Place the pointer at the edge of the deck, deleted.
hold down the Alt key (or click with the

276
CAFull_RM.book Page 277 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To create Advanced Deck Framing Deck Planking

1. Select a Deck room that you wish to In 3D views, deck surfaces typically appear
have Advanced Deck Framing and click as solid platforms. This surface material can
be specified in the Room Specification
the Open Object edit button. dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 709.
2. In the Room Specification dialog, spec-
If Advanced Deck Framing has been built,
ify how deck planking, joists and beams
deck planking displays in 3D views instead
should be created. See “Deck Tab” on
of the deck surface. The display of deck
page 288.
planking is controlled by the “Framing, Deck
3. With the Deck still selected, click the Planking” layer in the Layer Display
Build Advanced Deck Framing Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options
edit button. Dialog” on page 121.
• If a floor is present below the selected Planking overhang, width, spacing and
Deck room, the Advanced Deck Fram- border can be customized in the Room
ing will be created there. If needed, Specification dialog. See “Deck Tab” on
posts for the deck may be generated page 288.
beneath any beams that are generated.
• If a floor is not present below the Editing Deck Framing
selected Deck, beams may be created
Once created, the individual planking and
but posts will not.
framing objects created by the Advanced
If changes are later made to the settings on
Deck Framing tool can be edited like
the Deck tab of the Room Specification
other framing objects. See “Editing
dialog, the Advanced Deck Framing must be
Framing” on page 487.
removed and then rebuilt for these changes to
take effect. The display of deck framing and planking is
controlled by the “Framing, Deck Framing”
To remove Advanced Deck Framing, select
and “Framing, Deck Planking” layers in the
the Deck room and click the Remove
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer
Advanced Deck Framing edit button. Display Options Dialog” on page 121.

Editing Rooms
Once a room is defined by walls or railings, dialog. See “Room Specification Dialog” on
its structure and appearance can be edited page 283.
using the edit buttons or the Room
As a general rule, only one room can be
Specification dialog. Floor and ceiling
selected and edited at a time; however, you
heights, floor platform structure, moldings,
can apply attributes to multiple rooms using
wall coverings and an array of materials can
all be specified in the Room Specification the Select Same Type and Load Values

277
CAFull_RM.book Page 278 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Rooms

to Make Same edit tools. See “Select 2. Click on the surface of a wall that faces
Same / Load Same” on page 208. the room to select it. When the room is
selected in 3D:
In 3D Views • The room highlights
• The Status Bar says “Room.” See “The
The floor and ceiling heights for floors, Status Bar” on page 34.
rooms, and individual walls can be edited
• Two edit handles display on the top and
using edit handles in camera views and
bottom edges of the highlighted wall.
overviews. The default floor and ceiling
heights for an entire model can be edited by 3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top
selecting the Exterior Room. See “The wall edge to adjust the room ceiling
Exterior Room” on page 271. height, or the handle on the bottom edge
to adjust its floor height. Temporary
Lowered ceilings cannot be edited in 3D. dimensions display.

To change default floor heights in 3D 4. As you drag a handle, notice that all
walls defining that room are affected.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
view of your plan. Although walls can To adjust the height of a wall in 3D
be edited in any 3D view, cross sections,
elevations, floor camera views, or floor 1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation
overviews are often best for editing view of your plan. Although walls can
walls. be edited in any 3D view, cross sections,
elevations, floor camera views, or floor
2. Click on the exterior surface of a wall to overviews are often best for editing
select the Exterior Room. The Status Bar walls.
indicates when the exterior room is
selected. 2. Click on a surface of the wall. By
default, the room will be selected. You
3. Click and drag the edit handle on the top can change this behavior in the
wall edge to adjust the default ceiling Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
height, or the edit handle on the bottom Panel” on page 88.
edge to adjust the default floor height.
Temporary dimensions display. 3. Click the Select Next Object edit
button to select the wall. The Status Bar
To adjust room heights in 3D says “Wall.” See “The Status Bar” on
page 34.
1. Create a 3D or Cross Section/Elevation 4. Click and drag the edit handles. Tempo-
view of your plan. Although walls can rary dimensions display in elevation
be edited in any 3D view, cross sections, views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
elevations, floor camera views, or floor Based Objects” on page 160.
overviews are best for editing walls.

278
CAFull_RM.book Page 279 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

the surfaces of the selected room. See

Note: Any rooms that do not update when the “Room Polylines” on page 282.
default floor or ceiling height is changed are
not using the default values. To use the • Click the Make Room Molding Polyline
default values for a specific room, open it for edit button to create a room molding
specification and check Default for any of the polyline. See “Room Molding Polylines”
room height values. See “Room Specification
on page 282.
Dialog” on page 283.
• Click the Expand Room Polyline
In the Specification Dialog edit button to create a room polyline that
Room structure and appearance can be ignores invisible walls and railings. See
customized in the Room Specification “Expand Room Polyline” on page 283.
dialog. See “Room Specification Dialog” on • Click the Calculate Materials for
page 283. Room edit button to create a materi-
als list of the contents of the selected
Using the Edit Tools room, not including walls. See “Calculate
A selected room can be edited in a variety of From Room” on page 1049.
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. • Click the Create Room Elevation
See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 1140.
Views edit button to create an interior
• Click the Make Room Polyline edit elevation view of each wall defining the
button to create a polyline that follows selected room. See “Cross Section/Eleva-
tion Views” on page 752.

Special Ceilings
By default, the program builds a flat ceiling dialog and the Ceiling Plane tool.
platform on top the wall plates of a room. Ceiling planes are drawn and can be edited
More varied and complex ceilings are made much like roof planes. See “Ceiling Planes”
using settings in the Room Specification on page 408.

Lowered Ceiling Height

You can define a Lowered Ceiling height to In the illustration below, the default ceiling
model a dropped ceiling without affecting height for the entire floor is 120", and the
the wall plate height. See “General Tab” on room on the right has a Lowered Ceiling
page 283. height of 96". The dashed line in the dialog
preview represents the lowered ceiling.

279
CAFull_RM.book Page 280 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Special Ceilings

Vaulted and Cathedral Ceilings

A cathedral ceiling has the same pitch as the 3. On the Structure tab, clear the check box
roof and is created using the underside of the for Ceiling Over This Room.
roof above the room. A vaulted ceiling
typically has a different pitch from that of the To create a vaulted ceiling
roof and is often framed using scissor
trusses. See “Scissors Trusses” on page 509. 1. To create a ceiling pitch different from
the roof’s, select Build> Roof> Ceiling
To create a cathedral ceiling Plane and draw ceiling planes. See
“Ceiling Planes” on page 408.
1. Build a roof for your plan. See “Roofs”
on page 374. 2. Select each ceiling plane and specify its
pitch. See “Ceiling Plane Specification
2. Select the room and open the Room Dialog” on page 409.
Specification dialog. See “Room Speci-
fication Dialog” on page 283.

Tray Ceilings
Tray ceilings are usually based on a hip-style the Room Specification dialog, the new
roof. If you use a hip roof and uncheck Ceil- ceiling follows the entire hip roof line.
ing Over This Room, on the General tab of

280
CAFull_RM.book Page 281 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Hip roof with cathedral Hip roof, ceiling over, ceiling Tray ceiling from floor plan
ceiling over. height raised and ceilings view. Note dashed lines for
rebuilt. changed ceiling direction.

Generally, only the lower part of a tray For this example, a hip roof is based on 8’
ceiling follows the roof line, with the rest ceilings. After the roof is built, the Ceiling
remaining flat. In this case, the ceiling needs Height is raised to 10’. The resulting ceiling
to remain checked for that room and the follows the roof pitch for 2’, then becomes a
ceiling height adjusted instead. flat ceiling.
The roof must be built before adjusting the Dashed lines in floor plan view show where
ceiling height for a coffered ceiling. Any the ceiling changes from sloped to flat. This
attempt to rebuild the roof after adjusting the line is located on the Ceiling Break Lines
ceiling height results in the roof itself being layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
raised to match the new ceiling height.

Other Special Ceilings

Soffits can be used in various ways to
enhance the 3D model. Soffits’ ability to
follow the slope of the roof offers unlimited
possibilities, such as exposed beams or
trusses and coffered ceilings. See “Special
Applications for Soffits” on page 660.

281
CAFull_RM.book Page 282 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Polylines

Polyline solids, framing members and locked

roof trusses can also be used for similar
purposes.

Room Polylines
Click the Make Room Polyline edit Make Room Molding
button to create a standard polyline Polyline Dialog
that follows the surfaces of the selected
room.
Room polylines and room molding polylines
are not affected when the room is altered.

Room Molding Polylines 1

To create a molding polyline that
follows the interior surfaces of a 2
room, select the room and click the Make
3
Room Molding Polyline button on the edit
toolbar.
Room molding polylines can be edited just
like other molding polylines. Their shape and 1 Select the type of molding to convert to
a molding polyline.
height can be altered and the molding profile
can be changed. Additional molding profiles Each option is only enabled if the selected
can also be assigned. See “Molding room has that type of molding applied to it.
Polylines” on page 535. When you convert a molding type to a mold-
ing polyline, the room molding turns off. See
“Moldings Tab” on page 290.
Use a room molding polyline to wrap a
molding around an object the molding • Base Molding - Select to convert the
would not normally wrap around. You can room’s base molding into a molding
also remove a portion of an existing room polyline.
molding by removing an edge of the polyline.
• Chair Rail Molding - Select to convert
See “Selected Edge” on page 145.
the room’s chair rail molding into a mold-
ing polyline.
• Crown Molding - Select to convert the
room’s crown molding into a molding
polyline.

2 Blank Molding - Select to generate a

blank molding polyline at the specified

282
CAFull_RM.book Page 283 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

height. The polyline follows the room To use the Expand Room Polyline tool
perimeter and has blank sections where the
polyline crosses windows and doors if these 1. Click in a room defined by at least one
objects are at the polyline height. invisible wall or railing.

3 Height - Specify the height of the blank 2. Click the Expand Room Polyline
molding. edit button.

Expand Room Polyline 3. Click the Make Room Polyline or

The Expand Room Polyline edit Make Room Molding Polyline edit
button displays when you select a button to create a polyline that follows
room separated from other rooms by the interior surfaces of walls, ignoring
invisible walls or railings and creates a invisible walls and railings.
polyline that ignores those invisible walls The Expanded Room Polyline tool does not
and railings. create a new room that can be opened for
specification; it only allows you to generate a
larger room polyline or room molding
polyline.

Room Specification Dialog

The Room Specification dialog controls the value to the default, replace the check mark.
structural characteristics and appearance of a See “Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
selected room. To open the Room
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Specification dialog, select a room and click
in the Floor Defaults dialog, but affect only
the Open Object edit button. the selected room See “Floor Defaults” on
Some values in this dialog are dynamic. A page 267.
value with Default checked is referenced Many of the settings in this dialog can be
from the Floor Defaults dialog. To return a included in a Room Finish Schedule. See
“Schedules” on page 1036.

General Tab
The General tab features a cross section and thicknesses rather than provide a scaled
diagram that shows the locations of the drawing of the model.
various heights and platform thicknesses that
If a room exists below the selected room, it
can be set here. This diagramis meant to
will be represented in the diagram. Only two
represent the relationships between heights
floors can included in the diagram: the floor

283
CAFull_RM.book Page 284 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Specification Dialog

that the selected room is located on, and the is positioned over two smaller rooms, the
floor below it. position of the pointer relative to the smaller
lower rooms determines which of the rooms
What appears in the diagram may be affected
displays as the floor below.
by the location where you clicked to select
the room. For example, if the selected room

1 The settings here control the Room • If you wish to use a custom name in the
Type, the appearance of the Room room label and schedule, uncheck Use
Label, and how the room appears in the Room Type, then specify the desired
Room Schedule. Room Name in the text field.
• Select the Room Type. This affects some
of the room characteristics. See “Room 2 Specify the Heights associated with the
selected room. In the cross section
Types” on page 271. diagram, items with arrows indicate which
• Check Show Room Label to display the parts of the structure move if changes are
room label in floor plan view. See “Room made to the settings here.
Labels” on page 273.

284
CAFull_RM.book Page 285 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Specify the Floor Height, which is the erence only. It can be changed on the
height of the subflooring above or below Structure tab.
the default first floor height of zero.
If the material for the current room floor is
• Specify the Ceiling Height, measured Concrete, and floors and ceilings have been
from the top of the subflooring to the bot- rebuilt since it was set to this, the Platform
tom of the ceiling framing. thickness defaults to the Slab thickness in the
• Lowered Ceiling height, measured from Foundation Defaults dialog, unless is was
the top of the subflooring to the bottom of explicitly set in the Structure tab.
the lowered ceiling framing. • Slab Thickness - The thickness of the
• Specify the Stem Wall Height, which is slab on the floor below (if any) is shown
the distance from the bottom of the floor here, but cannot be edited. The slab thick-
framing to the top of the foundation wall ness can be changed in the Foundation
footing. Only available if the room below Defaults dialog or on the Structure tab.
is defined by foundation walls.
3 Specify a Roof Group for the selected
• Specify the Floor Above Height, mea- room. The program builds a complete
sured from the top of the current floor’s roof plan for each set of rooms in the same
subfloor to that of the room above. Roof Group. This roof plan is not influenced
• Ceiling Below - The ceiling height for by any other parts of the structure where the
the room below is shown. This value can rooms are in different roof groups. This
be defined here, or in the specification for number is nearly always left zero. Change
that room. The values are linked. this number to break off a structure so that
the program does not automatically combine
• Platform Thickness - The thickness of its roof system with the main building.
the floor platform assembly, including the
subfloor and joists, displays here for ref-

285
CAFull_RM.book Page 286 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Specification Dialog

Structure Tab

1
2 10
3
4
5

6
7
8
9

1 If Floor Under This Room is checked, 4 Slab Foundation for This Room -
the room has a floor platform, as Check this box to change this room’s
specified below. If unchecked, the room has floor platform into a concrete slab. This slab
no floor platform. Available for Court, gets its thickness from the Foundation
Garage, Storage and Utility room types only. Defaults dialog. See “Building a
Foundation” on page 366.
2 If Ceiling Over This Room is checked,
the room has a flat ceiling. If it is This option is only available if there is no
unchecked, the ceiling follows the underside room or foundation room under the selected
of the roof or manually drawn ceiling planes. room.

3 If Roof Over This Room is checked, a 5 Floor for This Room is Supplied by
roof automatically generates over the the Foundation “Room” from the
room. If unchecked, no roof generates. Floor Below - Check this box to make the
current room similar to an Open Below
room, deleting its own floor platform. The

286
CAFull_RM.book Page 287 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

floor of the room below, which is often a Subfloor Thickness, this determines the
room on the foundation floor, then supplies depth of the platform under the room.
the floor of the current room. While the same
thing could be accomplished by naming the 8 Floor Structure Type - Select the type
of floor structure. Check Default to use
current room Open Below, this method
the structure type specified on the
allows the current room to retain its normal
appropriate floors tab of the Build Framing
designation as Living, Garage, etc. This is
dialog.
often used in situations where framed walls
are built above concrete curb walls, such as
9 Frame Lowered Ceiling - Check this
in garages. box if you want the program to frame a
lowered ceiling. Specify the thickness.
6 Subfloor Thickness - Set the thickness
of the subfloor under this room. The
10 Insulation (cross sections only) -
default value for this is set in the Build Check these boxes to generate
Framing dialog on the Floor tab for the insulation details in cross section views when
current floor (subfloor for floor “x”). Along the Autodetail tool is used. See “Auto
with the Floor Structure Thickness, this Detailing” on page 755.
determines the depth of the platform under
this room. Check Insulation Above Ceiling to generate
insulation details above the ceiling in cross
When viewing framing, this Subfloor
Thickness may be represented by a gap. To section views when the Autodetail tool
remove this gap, change the value to zero is used.
and rebuild the appropriate framing. Check Insulation Under Floor to generate
insulation details under the floor in cross
7 Floor Structure Thickness - Set the
thickness (or depth) of the selected section views when the Autodetail tool
structure under this room. Together with is used.

287
CAFull_RM.book Page 288 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Specification Dialog

Deck Tab
The options on the Deck tab are only
available for rooms designated as decks, and
control how Advanced Deck Framing is
generated. See “Deck Framing” on page 276.

1 Specify the appearance of the Deck • If you want to enter a Plank Direction,
Planking. remove the checkmark from Default.
• Specify how far the deck planking Over- Enter the direction as degrees.
hangs the rim joists. • Specify the Number of Border Planks.
• Enter the Width of the deck planking. These are planks that follow the outside
edge of the deck and may not be parallel
• Specify the width of the Gaps between with the rest of the deck planking. Border
the deck planks. planks generate as long as the length of
the inside edge is greater than 0”.

288
CAFull_RM.book Page 289 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Border planks are not generated for curved • If you want to specify joist Direction,
deck edges. uncheck Default. Enter the direction as
• Check No Border Against Walls to pre- degrees.
vent border planking from being gener- • Select the Type of deck joists from the
ated along any walls defining the deck. drop-down list. See “Framing Member
• Check Herringbone to produce a her- Types” on page 489.
ringbone pattern where the border planks
meet. 2 Specify the configuration of the Deck
Support Beams.

2 Specify the configuration of the Deck • Enter the Depth and Width of the beams
Support Joists. that support the deck.
• Enter the Depth and Width of the joists • Specify the Spacing between beams, as
that support the deck. measured from beam center to center.
• Specify the Spacing between joists, as • Select the Type of deck joists from the
measured from joist center to joist center. drop-down list.

289
CAFull_RM.book Page 290 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Room Specification Dialog

Moldings Tab
The settings in the Moldings tab are similar
to those found in other specification dialogs
throughout the program.

2
3
4
5

Chair rail, crown and base moldings can be

2 Click the Library button under each
assigned to a selected room on the Moldings type of molding to open the Select
tab. Moldings are placed around the wall Library Object dialog and browse the
surfaces of a room. They continue around the Moldings and Profiles library and select the
surface of any soffit that is attached to the molding desired profile. See “Select Library
wall at the molding height. Object Dialog” on page 689.

1 Previews of the selected Crown 3 Click the Clear button under a molding
Molding, Chair Rail and Base Molding type to remove the selected profile from
display in these panes. If no profile is the room. Unless the molding Height is set at
selected, a flat profile is used. 0”, a flat profile is still used.

290
CAFull_RM.book Page 291 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4 Specify a Height for the selected Wall coverings can be applied to exte-
molding profile. If no profile is
specified, a flat profile is used unless the rior rooms as well by selecting the exte-
Height is set at 0”. Molding heights can be rior room and opening it for specification. See
“Selecting Rooms” on page 270 for informa-
specified in 1/16”or 1 mm increments. tion about selecting exterior rooms.
A (D) following any value signifies that it is
a default value set in the Floor Defaults Fill Style Tab
dialog. If a value is not followed by a (D),
replace it with “d” to reset it to the default. For more information about the Fill Style tab,
see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
5 Specify a Distance Above Floor for
the molding type. Crown molding and Materials Tab
chair rail are measured to the top of the
profile while base molding is measured to the The Materials tab is found in the
bottom of the profile. specification dialogs for many different
objects, including rooms. Unlike most other
Wall Covering Tab objects, however, rooms have a number of
components that you can assign materials to
The Wall Covering tab of the Room but are not modeled in 3D views.
Specification dialog contains the same
elements as the Wall Covering tab of the Wall The following room component materials are
Specification dialog. When a wall covering included in the Materials List but are not
is assigned using the Room Specification visible in 3D:
dialog, that wall covering is applied to all • Ceiling Underlayments
walls in the selected room only. See “Wall
• Floor Underlayments
Covering Tab” on page 262.
• Subfloor
For more information about the Materials
tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.

Room Finish Schedules

Chief Architect can automatically produce a room size, structure, materials and molding.
room finish schedule with information about See “Creating Schedules” on page 1037.

291
CAFull_RM.book Page 292 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 9:

Doors

Chief Architect comes with tools for creating Chapter Contents

a wide variety of interior and exterior doors. • Door Defaults
In addition, the library offers a full line of • The Door Tools
specialty doors and doorways including • Displaying Doors
hinged, sliding, pocket, bifold, garage, and • Editing Doors
manufacturer specific products. • Changing Door Swings
• Centering Doors and Windows
• Special Doors
• Door Specification Dialog
• Door Schedules

292
CAFull_RM.book Page 293 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Door Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by made to individual doors after they have
selecting Edit> Default Settings. been placed do not alter the default settings.
Click the “+” next to Doors to show the door
You can save time by going over the settings
sub-headings. Select a subheading and click
in the Door Defaults dialog before doors are
the Edit button to open the defaults dialog
placed. Settings for interior and exterior
associated with your selection.
doors are similar and should both be defined.
Interior and Exterior Door defaults can also
The Interior Door Defaults and Exterior
be accessed by double-clicking the Door
Door Defaults dialogs look nearly the same
Tools parent button or Hinged Door as the Door Specification dialog. See “Door
child tool. Specification Dialog” on page 303. There are
only a couple of differences:
• Since default settings are specified here,
“Use Default” is not an option on some
drop-down lists as it is in the Door
Specification dialog.
• Only Doors and Doorways can be used as
defaults for Interior or Exterior doors:
Sliding, pocket, bifold and garage doors
cannot.
Some default settings, like the casing width
on the Frame & Trim tab, are dynamic and
update globally when a new value is entered.
The values in the Door Defaults dialog are
When you change a dynamic default,
initial values for interior or exterior doors.
existing doors in the model update. See
Individual doors can be edited by selecting
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
and opening them for specification. Changes

The Door Tools

To place a door, select the type you settings for exterior doors. If the wall is an
want from the Build> Door submenu. interior wall, the program places an interior
door based on the default settings for interior
With a door tool activated, click a wall to
doors. See “Door Defaults” on page 293.
place a door in the wall. If the wall is an
exterior wall or a wall that separates an Doors can also be placed in curved walls.
interior from an exterior room, the program See “Options Tab” on page 305.
places an exterior door based on the default

293
CAFull_RM.book Page 294 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Door Tools

Once placed, any door may be changed into The default pocket door dimensions are 2’-6”
any other type of door using the Door x 6’-8” high. A pocket door becomes a
Specification dialog. See “Door double pocket door if its width is four feet or
Specification Dialog” on page 303. greater.

Hinged Doors Bifold Doors

Select Build> Door> Hinged Door Choose Build> Door> Bifold Door
and click a wall where you want to and click a wall where you want to
place a hinged door. Hinged doors can be place a bifold door.
placed on interior or exterior walls. A hinged
The default interior single bifold door is 2’-
door becomes a double door when its width
6” x 6’-8”. A bifold door becomes a double
is four feet or greater.
bifold if its width is greater than three feet.
Doorways Bifold doors always display closed in all 3D
views.
Choose Build> Door> Doorway and
click a wall to place a doorway (an
Garage Doors
opening without a door). Doorways can be
placed on interior or exterior walls, or in Choose Build> Door> Garage Door
railings and fences to provide an opening. and click a wall to place a garage door.
You can assign a door from the library to a
The default garage door is 8’-0” x 7’-0” high.
doorway.
A garage door must be at least two feet wide.
Sliding Doors In floor plan view, dashed lines show the size
and location of the garage door when open.
Select Build> Door> Sliding Door
and click a wall where you want to Garage doors will build into a garage stem
place a sliding door. Sliding doors can be wall provided the room is designated as a
placed on interior or exterior walls. If placed garage before the door is inserted. See
in an exterior wall, the door is glass; if placed “Room Types” on page 271.
in an interior wall, it is a solid slab.
The Doors Library
The default sliding door dimensions are
5’-0” x 6’-8” with a 12” bottom frame and a The Doors library can be accessed by
6” frame on the sides and top. selecting Library> Library Browser.
The Door library contains a variety of
Pocket Doors customized interior and exterior doors, and
doors offered by specific manufacturers. The
Select Build> Door> Pocket Door Doors library also contains garage doors and
and click a wall where you want to
place a pocket door. gates that can be used with Fencing .

294
CAFull_RM.book Page 295 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To place a library door in a doorway:

1. Go to floor plan view or any 3D view.

2. Open the Library Browser.
3. Navigate through the Doors library cate-
gory until you find the custom door style To add a door to the doorway, select a Door
desired. Type other than Doorway from the drop-
4. Select the door in the Library Browser, down list in the Door Specification dialog or
then click on the doorway to place the click the Library button and select a door
selected door within it. If a door already style from the Doors library. See “General
exists, it is replaced. Tab” on page 304.
5. Continue clicking other doorways until You can also select a custom door from the
all changes have been made. library and drop it into a doorway in floor
plan view or any 3D view.
The Doorway Library
Select Library> Library Browser Creating Your Own Doors
and expand the Doorways category to You can create custom doors and doorways
access a library of special entryways and and save them in your own library for use in
doorways. Select a doorway and click a wall future plans. See “Custom Symbols” on page
to place it. 974.

Displaying Doors
The display of doors, door sizes, Doors in exterior walls and doors that open
opening indicators and headers is to exterior type rooms such as a garage,
controlled in the Layer Display Options porch, or deck have a threshold line across
dialog1. the opening in floor plan view.

In Floor Plan View

When the “Doors” label is turned on in floor Threshold
Line
plan view, door symbols represent the width
of the opening and the swing. If a door is
recessed, the affected wall layers will adjust
to accomodate the casing. If the “Doors” layer is turned off, doors and
their casing do not display but openings in
1.See “Displaying Objects” on page 117. the walls where they are located are visible.

295
CAFull_RM.book Page 296 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Doors

If the “Doors, Labels” layer is set to display,

labels are centered on the doors that they
represent. Label size is controlled in the
Door Schedule Specification dialog. See
“Label Tab” on page 1042.
The size displays in the format “3068”,
which is width by height in feet and inches.
A 3068 door is three feet, zero inches wide
and six feet, eight inches high. Metric door
dimensions format is “900x2100,” where the
first number is the width in mm.
Customized labels can also be specified for
individual doors in the Door Specification
dialog. See “Label Tab” on page 314.

In 3D Views
To display opening indicator arrows in vector Door showing opening indicator
views, turn on the “Opening Indicators”
Reverse door opening indicators on the
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
Architectural panel of the Preferences
dialog. See “Architectural Panel” on page 88.

Editing Doors
Before a door can be edited, it must be Select a blocked unit by clicking on it in any
selected. To select a door, click it when the view. To select a door that is a component of
Select Objects tool or any of the Door a blocked unit, click at the location of the
component in question, then click the Select
Tools are active. Doors and/or windows
can also be group selected and edited. See Next Object edit button. See “Selecting
“Selecting Objects” on page 144. Objects” on page 144.

Blocked units are made up of individual Doors can be edited using the edit handles,
doors and windows that have been grouped edit toolbar buttons, and in the Door
Specification dialog. See “Door
together to act as one object. You can create a
blocked door unit or by creating an Specification Dialog” on page 303.

Architectural Block composed of doors When you select a door in floor plan view,
and/or windows. See “Make Mulled Unit” the door size label indicates the width
on page 321. followed by the height. For example, a 3068
door is 3’-0” wide by 6’-8” high.

296
CAFull_RM.book Page 297 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Using the Mouse continue to drag and it resumes movement

past or onto the intersecting wall. Place a
In floor plan view, click either of the two end check in the Ignore Casing for Opening
handles and drag along the wall to change the Resize check box in the Plan Defaults dialog
width. The label showing the size updates as to turn off this behavior. See “General Plan
the handles are dragged. Click and drag the Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Move handle at the center to move the door
along the wall it is placed in. Use the
Using Dimensions
triangular Rotate handle to adjust the door’s
swing. If the door’s label displays, an Individual doors can be moved using
additional handle is available to move the the dimensions. See “Moving Objects
label. Using Dimensions” on page 831.
In 3D views, a selected door has five edit
handles: the Move handle at the center and a In the Specification Dialog
Resize handle on each edge. Click and drag Doors can be extensively customized in the
an edge handle to resize the door. Door Specification dialog. See “Door
Using the edit handles, a door resizes Specification Dialog” on page 303.
according to the currently active Edit
Using the Edit Tools
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on page
137. A selected door or doors can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
A door or window moved against an
toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
intersecting wall temporarily stops when the
1140.
casing meets the intersecting wall. You can

Changing Door Swings

Door swing direction and hinge Hinged Doors
side can be changed using the
Change Opening/Hinge Side and Change In addition to using the edit buttons, hinged
Swing Side edit buttons. doors’ hinge side and swing direction can be
changed using the triangular Rotate edit
handle.
Note: If the door is set to draw closed, the
swing as it appears in floor plan view has no
To adjust the angle of swing:
affect on the 3D view. See “Options Tab” on
page 305.
1. In floor plan view, select the door and
grab the triangular handle.
2. Drag to change the amount of swing.

297
CAFull_RM.book Page 298 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Changing Door Swings

To change the swing using edit buttons:

1. In floor plan view, select the door.

2. To change the hinge side, click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.

3. Release the mouse.

If you drag near the closed position, the door
snaps to a closed position.

To change the swing using edit handles:

1. In floor plan view, select the door and

grab the triangular edit handle.

3. To change the swing direction, click the

Change Swing Side edit button.

2. Drag the pointer along the path of the

new arc to change the hinge side and/or
swing direction.

Sliding Doors
To change the side of a sliding door that is
fixed, select the sliding door then click the
Change Opening/Hinge Side edit
button.
3. Release the mouse.

298
CAFull_RM.book Page 299 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Note: There must be enough room for the

entire door to fit in the opposite wall or the
door does not change.

As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge side of a pocket door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
To flip the fixed and moving sides of the handle.

door, click the Change Swing Side edit

Bifold Doors
button.
To change the side of a bifold door that is
fixed, select it then click the Change
Opening/Hinge Side edit button.

As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
sliding door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.

Pocket Doors To change the hinged side of the door, click

To change the direction of a pocket door, the Change Swing Side edit button.
select it and click the Change Opening/
Hinge Side edit button.

As with hinged doors, you can also change

the Opening/Hinge and Swing sides of a
bifold door by clicking and dragging the
triangular edit handle.

299
CAFull_RM.book Page 300 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Centering Doors and Windows

Garage Doors
To change the side of a garage door that it
faces, select it and click the Change Swing
Side edit button.

As with other door types, you can also

change the Swing side of a bifold door by
clicking and dragging the triangular edit
handle.

Centering Doors and Windows

The Center Object edit button allows
you to center the selected object along
a wall within a room or relative to a cabinet
or window.

To center a door or window along a wall

1. Select a door or combination of win-

dows and doors in floor plan view.

2. Click the Center Object edit button

then choose from one of the following
options:
• Click near a wall inside a room to cen-
ter the door along that wall in that
room.
• Click outside the house (on the exterior
room) near an exterior wall to center
the door along an exterior wall.

300
CAFull_RM.book Page 301 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Special Doors
Wrapped Openings that space. See “General Tab” on page 304 of
the Reference Manual.
Wrapped
openings of
Transoms Above Doors
various shapes
are available in Transom windows above doors are created
the Doorway the same as other stacked windows. See
Library. You “Grouped Windows” on page 320.
can also create a
wrapped Recessed Doors
opening by
placing a A door placed in a brick or stone wall is often
doorway in the recessed into the wall’s exterior. In the
wall and illustration below, the door to the right is
checking recessed, so the brick wraps the opening. The
Suppress door on the left is not recessed, so the casing
Casing in the Frame and Trim tab of the is outside the brick.
Door Specification dialog. Note that the You can specify a door as recessed in the
base molding wraps around the opening. See Door Specification dialog. See “Options
“Casing Tab” on page 307. Tab” on page 305.

Openings in Railings Importing Doors

Use the Doorway tool to open a railing You can import custom doors and save them
for a stairway or other access. in your own library for use in future plans.
See “Custom Symbols” on page 974.

Placing a Gable Over a Door

Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to produce a gable roof
over the selected door(s) the next time
automatic roofs are built. See “Gable Over
Door/Window” on page 423.

To open a railing across an entire section, You can manually edit or delete this gable
resize the doorway’s Width so that it is line at any time. Your changes take effect
greater than the length of the railing in the when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
Door Specification dialog. The opening can also be used with group selected doors.
resizes to the maximum width possible for

301
CAFull_RM.book Page 302 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Special Doors

Custom Muntins
Like windows, doors with glass can have
custom muntins. Custom muntins are created
from CAD lines. See “Custom Muntins” on
page 327.

Blocked Doors and Windows

Combinations of doors and windows can be
blocked. Blocked units are mulled together
and can be copied together as a unit. Blocked
units containing doors can be treated as
either windows or doors for materials list and
schedule generation. See “Make Mulled To create a doorway with railing
Unit” on page 321.
1. Place a Doorway at the desired loca-
Passthroughs tion in your plan.

To create a passthrough, place a Doorway 2. Select Build> Wall> Straight

at the desired location. Create a camera Railing , then click and drag to draw
view and select the doorway. Click and drag a railing parallel to the wall with the
the bottom edit handle up to the correct doorway.
height for the passthrough. 3. Click on the railing, then use the Resize
edit handles to adjust the length of the
You can also drag the top and sides to the
railing as needed. See “Using the Edit
correct dimensions or set them in the
Handles” on page 148.
Doorway Specification dialog.
4. With the railing selected, click the Open
Check Suppress Casing in the Doorway
Specification dialog if you want a wrapped Object edit button.
opening instead of casing. See “Casing Tab” 5. On the General tab of the Railing
on page 307 of the Reference Manual. Specification dialog, check No Room
Def and click OK. See “General Tab” on
Creating a Doorway page 250.
with a Railing 6. With the railing still selected, Ctrl + drag
it into position within the doorway. See
When a railing is specified as No Room Def,
“To move an object freely” on page 179.
it can be positioned within a Doorway .

302
CAFull_RM.book Page 303 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Positioning a railing in a doorway

Door Specification Dialog

The most precise method of editing an to all the selected doors. If interior doors are
individual door or group of doors is to use different from the exterior doors, they must
the Door Specification dialog. Door type, be selected and edited as a separate group.
size, casing, materials, shape, and more can
Select one or more doors and click the Open
all be specified in this dialog.
Object edit button to open the Door
If a group of doors is selected, changes made Specification dialog for the selected door(s).
in the Door Specification dialog are applied

303
CAFull_RM.book Page 304 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Door Specification Dialog

General Tab

1
2
3 5

6
7

1 Door Style - Define the door as slab, 3 Specify the Size and Position of the
glass, panel, or louvered, or select a selected door.
door style from the library. Select use • Specify the Width, Height, and Thick-
default to use the default door style set in the ness of the door.
Door Defaults dialog. See “Door Defaults”
on page 293. • Floor to Bottom - Specify the height of
the bottom of the door frame as measured
• Select “Library” from the list or click the from the subfloor.
Library button to choose a door symbol
from the library. Once a library door is • Specify the Swing Angle of the selected
selected, that door is added to the Door door in floor plan view, between 0° and
Style list. See “Select Library Object Dia- 180°. An angle of 0° displays the door as
log” on page 689. closed and an angle of 180° displays it as
wide open. If Draw Closed is unchecked
2 Door Type - Specify doorway, hinged, on the Options tab, the swing angle also
slider, pocket, bifold, or garage door. affects the door’s appearance in 3D.
Slider, pocket, bifold and garage are not
allowed as exterior door defaults. 4 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the
amount to add to Each Side, the Top

304
CAFull_RM.book Page 305 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

and the Bottom for the door’s framed rough

5 A preview of the door displays here.
opening. The rough opening should be large
enough to accomodate the door frame and
space for shims. If the Bottom Rough 6 Check Show Color to show the door in
color in the preview.
Opening value is greater than the Floor to
Bottom value, the difference is added to the
7 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
top of the rough opening when framing is which side of the door displays in the
built. preview.

Options Tab

1 5

2 6

7
3

4 8

1 Specify the number of Door Units or • Select Double Door to force the selected
panels that the selected door has. Not hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a dou-
available for garage doors. ble door, regardless of its width.
• Select Single Door to force the selected • Select Calculate From Width to use the
hinged, pocket or bifold door to be a sin- program defaults. Hinged, pocket and
gle door, regardless of its width. bifold doors default to Single Door when
less than four feet (1200 mm) wide. If the
width is greater than four feet, Double
Door is the default.

305
CAFull_RM.book Page 306 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Door Specification Dialog

• If a Slider door is selected, instead • Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the

choose Four, Three or Two Panel. door to the wall’s sheathing layer.

Note: The defaults for Calculate From Width

are not editable.

2 Door Swing - Specify how the selected

door swings. Most options here are Not Recessed
only available when the selected hinged or
pocket door is a Double Door. Not available
for bifold, slider or garage doors.
• Check Both Doors Swing to allow both
sides of a double door to swing. Available
for double doors only.
• Check Left Swing Only or Right Swing
Only to allow only the left or right side of Recessed (to Main Layer)
a double door to swing. Available for
double doors only.
• Check Swings Both Directions to allow
a door or both sides of a double door to
swing both directions.

3 Specify the number of Vertical Panels Recessed to Sheathing Layer

to be placed on a selected garage door.
Only available for garage doors.
6 In Curved Wall - Specify whether a
4 Check Tempered Glass to specify the door placed in a curved wall is Straight
selected door’s glass as tempered in the or Curved. Curved is selected for Pocket
Door Schedule. Doors and cannot be changed. See “Drawing
Curved Walls” on page 228.
5 The Recessed into Wall options allow .
you to recess the selected door into a
wall, away from the exterior surface. Only
available if the door is placed in a multi-
layered wall. See “Wall Type Definitions” on
page 241. Straight
• Check Recessed to activate the settings
that follow.
• Select To Main Layer to recess the door
to the wall’s Main Layer. Curved

306
CAFull_RM.book Page 307 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

7 3D Display - Specify whether the 8 Plinth Blocks - Add an Interior Plinth

selected door is drawn open or closed in Block and/or Exterior Plinth Block to
3D and cross section/elevation views. the selected door. Plinth blocks do not
display in 3D views, but are counted in the
If Draw Open is selected, the Swing Angle
Material List.
set on the General tab is used in 3D views.

Casing Tab
Changes made on the Casing tab can only be materials can also be included in Room
seen in 3D views. Door casing profiles and Finish Schedules.

1 Specify the casing for the selected door. • Check Suppress Interior Casing to have
a wrapped opening instead of casing.
• Select the Interior or Exterior radio but- • Define the Width of the selected casing.
ton to define the casing for that door side • Define the Reveal, the distance between
and display it in the preview image. This the inside edge of the door frame and the
choice is not available for interior doors, inside edge of the casing. Define the
which use the same values for both sides. Width of the selected casing.

307
CAFull_RM.book Page 308 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Door Specification Dialog

• Check Suppress Sill to prevent a sill Door and window casing and jamb can be
from being generated under the door. constructed three ways in curved walls:
• Click the Library button to select a • Straight - Both the door and casing are
molding profile for the casing1. A pre- straight. This can be used where the
view of the casing profile displays in the wall’s curvature is not too sharp and the
window above. opening is not too wide. It cannot be
selected for Pocket Doors, which must be
• Click the Clear button to remove a
curved if placed in a curved wall.
selected casing profile from the door.

2 Double Wall Options - This section is

enabled if the door is placed in a
Double Wall. See “Double Walls” on page
239.
Straight
• Select Through to create a single jamb
running through both Double Walls. This • Radial - A vertical surface that would be
option is selected by default. perpendicular to a straight wall has its
• If Enlarged is selected, casing is created plane pass through the wall's center of
only on the wall the door is inserted in. curvature.
The opening on the other wall is enlarged
to accomodate the casing.
• Select Double to place a second door in
the Double Wall opposite the selected
door. This second door cannot be Radial
selected. Casing is produced as with the
Through type window. • Parallel - A vertical surface that would
be perpendicular to a straight wall
3 Curved Wall Casing - This section is remains parallel to the line from the wall
enabled if the door is placed in a curved center through the opening center.
wall. See “Drawing Curved Walls” on page
228.

1.“Select Library Object Dialog” on

page 689. Parallel

Lintel Tab
The settings on the Lintel tab allow you to mitred joint. These settings are not available
assign a lintel,or top molding that meets the if the door has a reflected arch. See “Arch
side casing using a butt joint instead of a Tab” on page 311.

308
CAFull_RM.book Page 309 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Door lintel profiles and materials can be

included in Room Finish Schedules.

1
2

1 Select the Interior or Exterior radio • Define the Width of the lintel. This is
button to define the casing for that door independent of the Casing width.
side and display it in the preview image. This • Specify how far the lintel Extends on
choice is not available for interior doors, either side. A value of 1” (25 mm) aligns
which use the same values for both sides. it with the outside edges of the casing.
2 Specify a lintel for the selected door. • Check Wraps to wrap the lintel profile
back toward the wall.
• Check Use Exterior/Interior Lintel to
have a lintel on the selected side of the
door instead of the regular top casing.

309
CAFull_RM.book Page 310 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Door Specification Dialog

Frame & Lites Tab

The options on this tab are only available for
glass doors. See “General Tab” on page 304.

1 3

1 Specify the number of Lites, or panes

of glass, as well as their configuration.
• Specify the number of horizontal Lites
Across, between 1 and 8.
• Specify the number of Lites Vertical,
between 1 and 8.
Normal Diamond Prairie Craftsman
• Muntin Width - Specify the width of the
muntins used to divide the lites. • Normal style is the most common, with
the muntin bars going horizontally and
• Choose a Type, or style, from the drop-
vertically.
down list. Normal, Diamond, Prairie and
Craftsman styles are available. • Diamond style uses angled muntins to
divide the lites.
• Prairie style is based on the normal style,
but with all the central muntins removed,

310
CAFull_RM.book Page 311 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

leaving only the two outside muntins, • Check Concentric to produce muntins
both horizontally and vertically. For best radiating from a curved inner muntin that
results, Lites Across and Vertical should is concentric with the door’s arch. You
be set between 6 and 8. must have at least three lites across for
• Craftsman style is based on the normal this to be used.
style, but only the topmost horizontal
muntin is kept with all the portions of the
vertical muntins above it. For best results,
Lites Across and Vertical should be set
between 4 and 8.
1
2 If the door is defined as Round Top ,
you can specify a Ray Count of up to
10 radial muntin bars in the portion of the
door within the arch. There is one more pane 3 Frame - If the door is a glass, panel or
louvered door, you can specify the
of glass than the number of rays specified.
dimensions of the door’s rails and stiles.
• Specify the Width of the stiles and top
rail.
• Specify the height of the Bottom rail.

1.“Arch Tab” on page 311.

Arch Tab
The settings on the Arch tab are not available selected door has been assigned a lintel. See
if the selected door is a Sliding, Bifold or “Lintel Tab” on page 308.
Garage door. They are also unavailable if the

311
CAFull_RM.book Page 312 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Door Specification Dialog

1 Specifications - Define the style and

size of the arch.
• Select the Type of arch desired from the
drop-down list.

Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat

Top Top

Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear

gonal

• Specify the Height of the arch, as mea-

sured from the base of the arch to the top

312
CAFull_RM.book Page 313 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

of the window. The height can be defined unique configurations. Not available if a
for all arch types except Round Top and lintel is specified for the selected door.
Octagonal Arches. See “Lintel Tab” on page 308.
• The Radius can also be defined for Tudor • Select Full Arch to produce an arch with
and Double Arches. the apex at the door’s center.
• Select Left Arch to produce an arch with
2 Options - Define the orientation of the the apex on the door’s right side.
arch.
• Check Reflect to reflect the arch, top to • Select Right Arch to produce an arch
bottom. This is rarely used for doors, but with the apex on the door’s left side.
can be specified for windows to create

Hardware Tab
Many of the settings on the Hardware tab are dialog is used. See “Dynamic Defaults” on
Dynamic Defaults: if “use default” is page 67.
selected, the setting in the Door Defaults

1 Specify a Handle to be used on the • Select an Interior Handle and/or Exte-

selected door. rior Handle from the drop-down lists.

313
CAFull_RM.book Page 314 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Door Schedules

Select “Library” or click the Library Library button to select a hinges from
button to select a handle from the library. the library.
See “Select Library Object Dialog” on • Specify the distance In From Top/Bot-
page 689. tom of the door to the center of the top
• Specify the location of the door handles and bottom hinges.
In From Door Edge.
• Specify the location of the door handles Note: For hinges to look right, it is best to
have at least a 1/4" (6 mm) reveal for the inte-
Up From Bottom.
rior, or hinge side, door casing.

2 Specify the door’s interior and exterior

Locks. Layer Tab
• Select an Interior Lock and/or Exterior The Layer tab is available for a variety of
Lock from the drop-down lists. Select different objects. For more information, see
“Library” or click the Library button to “Layer Tab” on page 125.
select a lock from the library.
• Specify the location of the door locks Up Materials Tab
From Floor. The locks assume the same
In From Door Edge value as the handles. The Materials tab is available for numerous
objects. For more information, see
3 Specify the Hinges to be used on the “Materials Tab” on page 709.
door. Two hinges are placed for interior
doors, and three for exterior doors. Label Tab
• Select a style of Hinges from the drop-
The Label tab is available for a variety of
down list. Select “Library” or click the
different objects. For more information, see
“Label Tab” on page 1045.

Door Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
door schedule. See “Creating Schedules” on
page 1037.

314
CAFull_RM.book Page 315 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

315
CAFull_RM.book Page 316 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 10:

Windows

Chief Architect comes with a wide variety of Chapter Contents

windows. Fixed glass, hung, casement, • Window Defaults
sliding, awning, hopper, and louver window • The Window Tools
styles can all be created with the standard • Special Windows
Window tool, and even set as the default. • Grouped Windows
The shape of a window can be angled or • Window Levels
made into a round top or other arch styles. • Displaying Windows
Chief Architect can create bay, box, and bow • Editing Windows
windows at the click of a button. In addition, • Custom Muntins
the library contains many mulled window • Bay, Box, and Bow Windows
combinations and manufacturer-specific • Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs
products. • Window Specification Dialog
Once windows have been placed in the • Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog
model, the program can automatically • Bow Window Specification
generate a window schedule. See “Creating • Window Schedules
Schedules” on page 1037.

316
CAFull_RM.book Page 317 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Window Defaults
Default Settings can be accessed by For more information, see “Window
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Specification Dialog” on page 332.
Select Window from the Default Settings
There are three types of values set in the
dialog and click the Edit button.
Window Defaults dialog:
You can also double-click the Window
Tools parent button to open the Window 1. Dynamic Defaults: These values affect
Defaults dialog.
all existing and new windows that are
still set to the default specification. See
The settings in the Window Defaults dialog “Dynamic Defaults” on page 67. These
control the attributes of a window when it is settings are:
initially placed in a plan, so you should • Window Type
define the type of window that will be placed
• Sash Width
most often in your model.
• Sash Depth
The tabs in the Window Defaults dialog are • Casing Width
similar to those found in the Window
Specification dialog, with one exception.
2. Initial Values: These only affect new
windows, and changing the value has no
On the General tab of the Window Defaults affect on existing windows. These are:
dialog, you can specify the Minimum • Width, Height
Separation for windows and doors in mulled
• Floor to Top
units in the plan.
• Default Level
For more information, see “Dynamic
Defaults” on page 67.
3. Editing Limits: This affects both the
The Minimum Separation value in the
creation of new and the modification of
Window Defaults dialog specifies how close
existing windows/doors. There is one
windows in a mulled unit can be to each
only:
other. Define a value that specifies the
desired width for the shared casing. • Minimum Separation

The Window Tools

To place a window, select Build> Bay, box and bow windows can only be
Window and choose the desired placed in straight walls, while standard
window type. Click on a wall to place a windows can be placed in both straight and
window of the selected type at that location. curved walls.

317
CAFull_RM.book Page 318 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Window Tools

Standard Windows Box windows initially measure 4’-2” wide

with a depth of 1’-6”. The component
Select Build> Window> Window, windows are specified in the Window
then click on a straight or curved wall Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
to place a standard window at that location. the available space.
A standard window is a single window that is
not one of the special types such as bay, box,
bow, corner or blocked. These special types
are made up of multiple standard windows.
A standard window that is part of a special
window is called a component window. Bow Windows
A Bow Window is a group of
Bay Windows identical wall segments that form a
segmented curve. Select Build> Window>
The roof is affected by Bay, Box and Bow Window and click on a straight wall to
Bow Windows. These windows should produce a 5-section bow window.
therefore be placed before the roof is built.
Bow windows can be composed of between
two and twenty sections. The number of bow
A Bay Window is composed of three window components can be changed in the
wall sections, each with a single Bow Window Specification dialog. See
component window. The two side walls are “Bow Window Specification” on page 351.
at an angle to the main wall. Select Build>
Window> Bay Window and click on a The component windows are specified in the
straight wall to produce a bay window. Window Defaults dialog. Their sizes adjust
to fit the available space.
When initially placed, bay windows measure
2’-2” across at the front, 4’-2” across at the The 5-section bow below has a 4’-10” radius
back, and are 1’-0” deep. The component centered 3’-9” inside the wall, giving an
windows are specified in the Window opening 5’-10” across and a depth of 11½”.
Defaults dialog and their sizes adjust to fit
the available space.

Box Windows Note that for a bow with an odd number of

sections, the radial dimension is from the
A Box Window is a bay window with center of the arc to an outside corner where
side angles set at 90 degrees. Select two window sections join. The depth (11 ½”)
Build> Window> Box Window and click on is measured to the flat area of the center
a straight wall to produce a box window.

318
CAFull_RM.book Page 319 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

section, not to a corner. As a result, the radius Windows Library

is a bit greater than the sum of the depth and
the distance from the center of the bow’s Select Library> Library Browser,
curve to the exterior of the wall. then browse to Chief Architect
Libraries> Architectural> Windows to access
a selection of special windows. Select the
Note: Bay, box, and bow window areas are desired window, then click on a wall to place
not included in the living area or in room stan-
the window at that location.
dard area calculations. They are included in
room interior area calculations.

Special Windows
A variety of special windows can be created
using multiple standard windows, the edit
tools or custom symbols.

Creating Manual Bay, Box

and Bow Windows
Sometimes it is easier to draw bay, box and
bow windows manually than to use the
automatic tools. Bays created using walls can
have more than one window per section, To create a corner window, first create the
which is not possible using a bay window desired window on each side of the corner.
unit. The header height and the sill height of both
Bear in mind that moving a manually created windows must be the same.
bay, box or bow window is generally more
difficult than moving a unit created with one To move a window all the way into a
corner, check Ignore Casing for
of the Window Tools since it is Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults dialog.
composed of individual walls. See “General Plan Defaults Dialog” on page
68.
Corner Windows
Slant top, or shaped windows can be
Corner windows are produced when each
components of corner windows as long as
window has one edge at or past the interior
their heights are equal at the corners.
side of the adjacent wall.
Windows with single or two segment tops
can be used, but windows with three cannot.
If a two segment window is used, the
segment nearest the corner must be flat.

319
CAFull_RM.book Page 320 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Grouped Windows

Once the corner window is formed, its over the selected window(s) the next time
components and corner post size can be automatic roofs are built. See “Gable Over
adjusted using dimension lines. Blocked Door/Window” on page 423.
units can also meet at a corner this way.
You can manually edit or delete this gable
line at any time. Your changes take effect
Recessed Windows when the automatic roofs are rebuilt. This
A window or mulled unit placed in a brick or can also be used with group selected
stone wall is often recessed into the wall’s windows.
exterior, so the brick wraps the opening. The
window on the left is not recessed, so the Stained Glass
casing is outside the brick.
A selection of solid stained glass materials is
You can specify a window as recessed in the available in the Materials> Glass library. See
Window Specification dialog. See “Options “Materials” on page 706.
Tab” on page 335.
Vents
Importing Windows
A selection of attic, foundation and gable
You can import custom windows and save vents are available in the Library Browser.
them in your own library for use in future See “Libraries” on page 682.
plans. See “Custom Symbols” on page 974.
Vents are placed in the same manner as
regular windows and can be edited in much
Placing a Gable the same way, as well.
Over a Window
Click the Gable Over Door/Window
edit button to produce a gable roof

Grouped Windows
Windows can be grouped together to create a
wide variety of custom configurations.
Stacked windows are easy to create in 3D
views, particular Cross Section/Elevation
views, using their edit handles. See “Editing
Windows” on page 326.

320
CAFull_RM.book Page 321 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Notice how the windows and door in this The Minimum Separation value in the
example are separate, with a sections of wall Window Defaults dialog specifies how close
showing between them. Doors and/or mulled windows can be to each other. Define
windows can also be organized into a unit in a value that specifies the desired width for
which the casing connects the windows and the shared casing. See “Window Defaults”
door and no wall surface shows between on page 317.
them.
To help organize their display in floor plan
view, you can place stacked windows of
varying heights on different Window Levels.
See “Window Levels” on page 324.

Automatically Mulled Openings

To form a mulled group of windows and/or
doors, move them close enough together so
that their casings touch. Once the casings
touch, the windows are mulled together with
one casing between the two of them.
The sill of each window in the group must be Mulled Units in the Library
at the same level for them to share the middle
casing. The casing tops do not have to be at A selection of mulled window units is
the same level. The casings are modeled as if available in the Windows library. To place
they are one unit but the windows remain one in your plan, select it and click on a wall
separate objects for dimensioning and the in any view. See “Placing Library Objects”
Materials List. on page 690.

Windows can be automatically mulled to Make Mulled Unit

doors if the bottom of the window is at the
elevation of the floor, equal to the bottom of Windows and doors can be selected as
the door. a group and blocked together into a
single unit by clicking the Make Mulled
Unit edit button.

Make Mulled Unit

The Make Mulled Unit edit tool Wall openings in a mulled unit are referred to
allows you to block a group of as components. Components of a mulled unit
selected windows and/or doors into a single must be within 24” (600 mm) of one another
unit. in order to become a blocked unit; however,
their casings do not have to touch.

321
CAFull_RM.book Page 322 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Make Mulled Unit

Windows and doors in a mulled unit can be Mulling Stacked Openings

framed as a single opening or as multiple
openings, and can be listed as a single unit or Group selection can be done in floor plan
individual objects in the Materials List. See view or any 3D view. Floor plan views work
“Materials Lists” on page 1048. well for blocking windows that are side-by-
side, but a camera or elevation view is
To create a mulled unit needed to block vertically stacked objects.

1. In any view, group-select multiple win- To block stacked openings

dows and doors on the same wall that
are within 24” of each other. 1. In a cross section/elevation view, select
the door and the windows on level 1 and
2. Click the Make Mulled Unit edit 2 above it, then click the Make Mulled
button to create a block. Unit edit button.
The Make Mulled Unit edit tool can be 2. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the
used to block component windows and/or right and the window above it.
doors only if they meet the following 3. Repeat step 1 with the sidelight on the
requirements: left and the window above it.
• They must be placed in the same wall. 4. Group select the three vertically joined
• Adjacent objects be within 24” (600 mm) units and click the Make Mulled Unit
of one another (side to side or top to bot- edit button to join them side to side.
tom).
The configuration of the horizontal and
• The edges of adjacent components that vertical mullions in a mulled unit will vary
face one another must be parallel. depending on the order in which you block
• The edges of adjacent components that stacked openings.
face one another must be straight, not • If you form a mulled unit by first block-
curved. ing objects vertically, the vertical mul-
• The selected components can be adjacent lions of the larger unit will extend
vertically or horizontally, but not a com- continously from the bottom to the top of
bination of the two. Complex units can be the entire unit, breaking any horizontal
formed only by mulling several blocks mullions.
together. • If you form a mulled unit by first block-
Unlike automatically mulled openings, ing objects horizontally, the horizontal
adjacent component edges of mulled units do mullions of the larger unit will extend
not need to be the same length. from side to side, breaking any vertical
mullions.
In a complex unit composed of smaller units,
there may be a variety of ways to organize
the sub-units.

322
CAFull_RM.book Page 323 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Selecting Components windows category of the Materials List and

of Mulled Units in window schedules. This is the case even
with units that include one or more doors.
To select a component of a mulled unit, click
at the location of the component in question, If you check Treat as Door in the Mulled
Unit Specification dialog, the unit’s label is
then click the Select Next Object edit placed on the “Doors, Labels” layer but the
button or press the Tab key until that individ- unit itself remains on the “Windows” layer
ual component is selected. Only the compo- unless you change it. Units set to Treat as
nent clicked on is selectable using this Door are also included in the doors category
method. If you need to select a different com- of the Materials list and in door schedules
ponent, click on it and repeat the process. instead of window schedules.
The selected component may be on any You can, if you wish, also uncheck Single
window level in the mulled unit. If there are Label to display the labels of windows and
multiple levels, it is easiest to select the doors in a mulled unit individually. Labels
components in a 3D view. When you have are placed on the layers they would be on
selected an individual component, you can were the unit not mulled. Similarly, each
change its parameters in the Window component is listed in the Materials List
Specification dialog. See “Window category and schedule it would be in were it
Specification Dialog” on page 332. not mulled. See “Options Tab” on page 335.
If the selected component is not itself a
mulled unit and has no components above it, Editing Mulled Units
its Height and Arch parameters can be
A mulled unit moves as a single standard
changed. Changing the Height causes the
window in both floor plan and 3D views.
component top to move. The bottom remains
stationary. The components of a mulled unit cannot be
moved relative to one another. If this is
Displaying Mulled Units required, you will first need to explode the
mulled unit.
As with other windows, the display of
mulled windows is controlled in the To explode a mulled unit
Layer Display Options dialog. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 117. 1. Select the mulled unit.
Mulled units are placed on the “Windows”
2. Click the Explode Mulled Unit edit
layer by default and have a single label,
button.
which is on the “Windows, Labels” layer.
Mulled units are also included in the

323
CAFull_RM.book Page 324 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Levels

Window Levels
It is often necessary to position more than matches your default Window Type and
one window and/or door at the same location the Height is 12". Once the window is
along a wall in floor plan view: for example, placed in the plan, its parameters can be
to create an entry with side lites and transom. changed. See “General Tab” on page 333.
To help control and organize the appearance Typically, the Default Level is set as 0 (zero).
of stacked wall openings in floor plan view,
you can assign windows at various heights to Window Level Zero
different Window Levels.
Window Level 0 (zero) is the level that all
Window Levels do not define the height of a doors, bay, box and bow windows are always
window, just the appearance and behavior of placed on. Typically, it is also the initial level
windows and doors in floor plan view. that standard windows are placed on.
• In floor plan view, windows and doors on Because doors are always on Level 0 and
the Default Level display the line color because these line colors affect printouts, it is
and style of the layer they are on. See best to keep the Default Level at 0. If you do
“Layers” on page 116. change the Default Level, remember to
• Windows on any other level appear light change it back before printing.
gray, regardless of the layer they are on.
When you specify the default level as a value
other than zero, the initial window type
The Default Level changes to fixed glass and no Sill is created.
The Default Level is the Window Level that The Width of the window matches your
Standard Windows are initally placed on default Window Type and the Height is 12".
when created and affects several things: Once the window is placed in the plan, its
parameters can be changed. See “General
• In floor plan view, windows and doors on
Tab” on page 333.
the Default Level display the line color
and style of the layer they are on.
Creating Stacked Units
• When you click on stacked doors and
windows in floor plan view, those on the The door and windows in the illustration
Default Level are selected first. To select below were organized have been placed on
an opening on another level, use the different levels.
Select Next Object edit button. See
“Select Next Object” on page 146.
• When you specify the default level as a
value other than zero, the initial window
type changes to fixed glass and no Sill is
created. The Width of the window

324
CAFull_RM.book Page 325 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

always on level zero. The three windows

above the door are placed on level one, and
the round top window is placed on level two.
2 The first row above on the same floor is
1 represented by Window Level 1 and contains
any windows stacked above a single window
or door. The second row is represented by
0
Window Level 2 and contains all windows
stacked above two stacked windows, etc.
When you place a window in floor plan view
on a level greater than zero, the program
attempts to locate it over windows on lower
levels. Once placed, it can be moved to the
desired height in a 3D view or in the Window
Specification dialog. See “Editing
Windows” on page 326.
When you specify the default level as a value
other than zero, the initial window type
changes to fixed glass and no Sill is created.
The Width of the window matches your
default Window Type and the Height is 12".
Once the window is placed in the plan, its
parameters can be changed. See “General
Tab” on page 333.
Instead of using levels to manage stacked
windows, you may want to combine them
into a single blocked unit. See “Make Mulled
To create this entry, set the two windows on
Unit” on page 321.
either side of the door to level zero. A door is

Displaying Windows
The display of windows, window If the Windows layer is not set to display,
labels, openings, and headers in floor window casing, lites and other window
plan and 3D views can be controlled in the components are not visible, but the openings
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer in the walls where they are located can still
Display Options Dialog” on page 121. be seen.

325
CAFull_RM.book Page 326 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Windows

In Floor Plan View Customized labels for individual windows

can also be specified in the Window
Some window types, notably Sliding and Specification dialog. See “Label Tab” on
Double and Triple Casement windows, are page 1045.
distinguishable in floor plan view.
Windows in pony walls display in floor plan
view regardless of which part of the pony
Double Hung wall is visible. If you wish, you can instead
display only openings located entirely
Left Sliding portion of a pony wall that is set to display in
floor plan view. See “Pony Wall Defaults” on
page 218.
Triple Casement
In 3D Views
To show opening indicator arrows in vector
Window types in floor plan view
views, turn on the “Opening Indicators”
If the “Windows, Labels” layer is set to layer in the Layer Display Options dialog.
display, window labels show in floor plan
view, centered on the windows that they
represent. Label format and size is specified
in the Schedule Specification dialog. See
“Label Tab” on page 1042.
Window labels indicate the width, height and
window type. For example, a 3040 DH label
describes a 3’-0” wide by 4’-0” high double
hung window. The format of metric window
dimensions is “900x1200”, where the first Windows showing opening indicators
number is the width in mm and the second,
the height in mm. You can change the direction of indicator
arrows in the Preferences dialog. See
“Architectural Panel” on page 88.

Editing Windows
Before a window can be edited, it must be also be group-selected and edited. See
selected. Click on a window when the Select “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
Objects tool or any of the Window Tools To select a window that is part of a blocked
are active. Doors and/or windows can unit, click the component window, then click
the Select Next Object edit button. See

326
CAFull_RM.book Page 327 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

“Selecting Components of Mulled Units” on • A single window or a group of windows

page 323. can be moved with the center edit handle.
Windows can be edited using their edit • A door or window moved against an
handles, the edit toolbar buttons, and the intersecting wall temporarily stops when
Window Specification dialog. See “Window it is the casing distance from the inter-
Specification Dialog” on page 332. secting wall. You can continue to drag
and it resumes movement past or onto the
When you select a window in floor plan intersecting wall. Enable Ignore Casing
view, the window size label displays the for Opening Resize in the Plan Defaults
width followed by the height. For example, a dialog to turn off this behavior. See “Gen-
3036 window is 3’-0” wide by 3’-6” high. eral Plan Defaults Dialog” on page 68.

Using the Mouse Using Dimensions

• In floor plan view, click either of the two
Individual windows can be moved
end handles and drag along the wall to
using dimensions. See “Moving
change the width. The label showing the
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
size updates as the window is resized.
• In 3D views, a selected window has five In the Specification Dialog
edit handles: the Move handle at the cen-
ter and a Resize handle on each edge. Windows can be edited extensively in the
Click and drag an edge handle to resize Window Specification dialog. See “Window
the window. Specification Dialog” on page 332.
• Using the edit handles, a window resizes
according to the currently active Edit Using the Edit Tools
Behavior . See “Edit Behaviors” on A selected window or windows can be edited
page 137. in a variety of ways using the buttons on the
edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on
page 1140.
Note: Using the edit handles is the only way
to resize bay, box and bow window systems.

Custom Muntins
Design your own muntins for the glazing of a vertically, but should not overlap it in either
window or door. Muntins are formed from a direction by more than five percent.
CAD block composed of lines and arcs
drawn over window or door glass in a cross Creating Muntins
section/elevation view. The CAD block
should cover at least half the glass Custom muntins are created by
horizontally and one quarter of the area drawing their pattern using the CAD

327
CAFull_RM.book Page 328 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

tools, blocking the pattern to create a CAD each pane. When you click Load
block, and then selecting the window and Muntins , all CAD blocks are loaded.
clicking the Load Muntins edit button.
Custom muntins move with the opening and
To create custom muntins copy with their opening. They also stretch or
compress when the glass area is resized. This
stretching may not be perfect for non-
1. Create a Cross Section/Elevation
rectangular glass areas that are resized by a
view of the wall the window or door is
large amount.
in and Zoom in on the window or
door. Custom muntins can be created for the
components of Bay Windows , Box
2. Use the Draw Line and Draw Arc
Windows , and mulled units.
tools to design the desired muntins.
Try to make them start and end as close Editing Muntins
to the edge of the glass as possible.
3. When the muntin design is complete, Once blocked and loaded, custom muntins
group-select all lines and arcs and click cannot be edited. If you wish to make
changes to them, you must first remove
the Make CAD Block edit button. them.
See “Selecting Objects” on page 144.
4. Select the door or window and click the Removing Muntins
Load Muntins edit button to con- Remove custom muntins from a door
vert the CAD block into custom mun- or window by selecting the opening in
tins. cross section/elevation view and clicking the
If your window has more than one sash (a Unload Muntins edit button. The muntins
double-hung window, for example, has two), disappear and the original CAD block takes
you must create a separate CAD block for their place.

Bay, Box, and Bow Windows

Bay, Box and Bow Windows foundation wall is also a bay/box/bow, but
are created much the way without windows. If the foundation was
regular windows are: select a tool, then click generated before the window is placed, the
a wall to place that window type. foundation must be rebuilt or edited
manually.
Chief Architect automatically builds a
foundation under bay/box/bow windows
placed on floor 1 unless they are raised from
their original position. That section of the

328
CAFull_RM.book Page 329 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Editing Bay, Box and Next Object edit button or press the Tab
Bow Windows key.
Bay, box and bow windows are edited • Only the bay or box window component
similar to regular windows, with one that was clicked on is selected using this
exception: in floor plan view, a diamond- method. If you need to select a different
shaped Depth edit handle displays on the component, click on it and repeat the pro-
section. Drag this Depth handle outward to cess.
increase the depth, or inward to decrease the • In a bow window, all components are
depth of the unit. See “Editing Windows” on identical, so only one component can be
page 326. selected. Changing this component
changes them all.

Resizing Components
An individual component window can be
resized using the edit handles, by changing
Depth edit handle on a bay window settings in the component’s Window
Specification dialog, or by using the
Bay, box and bow windows can also be Transform/Replicate Object dialog. See
edited in their respective specification “Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
dialogs. See “Bay/Box Window page 200.
Specification Dialog” on page 349 or “Bow
Window Specification” on page 351. When a bay/box/bow window is first created,
there is room for one standard trimmer on
each side of each component window. When
Displaying Bay, Box
the bay as a whole is moved and resized, its
and Bow Windows components automatically resize so that a
The display of bay, box and bow windows is standard trimmer is still accomodated.
controlled in the Layer Display Options If you increase a component window’s width
dialog. Bay, box and bow window width and to the point where there is not enough room
radius dimensions, which display in floor for standard trimmers, a thinner trimmer can
plan view, are placed on the Dimensions, be used. The size of this thinner trimmer is
Manual layer. See “Displaying Objects” on specified in the Build Framing dialog. See
page 117. “Openings Tab” on page 473.

Component Windows If a component window is resized, it retains

its size if at all possible when the containing
A component window within a bay, box or bay/box/bow window is moved or resized. If
bow window can be resized like any other the bay is resized in such a way that the
standard window. To select a component component is too large to fit even with a
window, click at the location of the thinner trimmer, the component resumes its
component in question, then click the Select

329
CAFull_RM.book Page 330 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs

default behavior, resizing as the containing Lowering the Ceiling

bay window is resized.
To lower the ceiling and the wall heights,
select the window in a 3D view. When the
Ceilings
window is selected, grab the top handle and
When originally drag toward the floor. The ceiling is lowered,
created, the ceiling which lowers the height of the walls. Any
within a bay, box, or roofs that are subsequently built are affected.
bow windows is the
same height as the Creating a Bench Seat
default ceiling for that
floor. To create a bench seat or garden window,
follow the same step for lowering the ceiling
Both the top and except this time drag the lower handle
bottom heights of these toward the ceiling.
window units may be
When you raise the bottom of the window to
adjusted from a 3D
create a bench seat, the exterior walls that
view.
create the window do not reach the ground.
Use the following When you build a foundation, the foundation
techniques for is not produced under a window unit that has
modifying any bay, box, or bow window. bench seats.

Bay, Box, Bow Windows & Roofs

Several different roof styles are available for
bay, box and bow window units.

Hip Roofs
Unless a different option is selected, a hip
roof is built above the unit when roofs are
automatically generated.

If a different style of roof is desired, the

window’s specification dialog can be used to
change the style of roof that is be generated
over a bay, box or bow window.
See “Bay/Box Window
Specification Dialog” on page 349.

330
CAFull_RM.book Page 331 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Place Under Roof Slope With this option the bay, box, or bow
windows is tucked under the roof eave.
To have the main roof plane extend down
over the window unit while following the
shape of the unit, select Extend Existing
Roof Over. Rebuild the roofs to see the
changes.

Place Under Roof - Rectangular

To extend the roof plane down over a bay,
box or bow window with a rectangular roof,
ignoring the shape of the unit, select both
Extend existing roof over and Rectangular
roof over in the specification dialog. The
For this roof style to work successfully, the Rectangular roof over option does not work
ceiling heights of the window unit and the in combination with Use existing roof since
room containing it must be the same. This the existing roof does not cover the window
does not work if you have lowered the unit.
ceiling for the window unit.
See the previous section for directions on
If a header is desired over the bay, box or extending the roof down over bay, box or
bow window, first build the roof correctly, bow windows.
then lower the ceiling of the bay, box or bow
window in 3D. Once the ceiling is lowered,
select Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings .
This fills in the area between the header and
the roof. Do not rebuild roof planes, if you
do, a lower hip roof over the window unit is
created.

Use Existing Roof

To generate a standard roof with no Rectangular Hip Roof
allowances made for bay, box, or bow
windows below, check Use Existing Roof. To create a rectangular hip roof, select only
Rectangular roof over, then rebuild the
roof.

331
CAFull_RM.book Page 332 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

2. Delete the front hip section.

3. Select each side roof plane at the gable
end and drag it out to set the overhang.
4. Once the roof planes are shaped prop-
erly, open the Build Roof dialog and
select the Build Fascia, Gutters option
to complete the roof. Do not select Build
Roof Planes.

Gable Roof
A gable roof is not one of the automatic
options for the roof above a bay, box or bow
window. A gable can be created by manually
editing the rectangular hip roofs that are
automatically created. See “Roof Planes” on
page 385.

To create a gable over a bay window

1. Select each side hip sections on the front To create a gable roof over a normal
angled edge. Select the front ridge cor- window, use the Gable Over Door/
ner handle and drag the roof section for- Window edit button. See “Gable Over Door/
ward until the fascia is straight and let it Window” on page 423.
snap to the edge of the front hip section.

Window Specification Dialog

To open the Window Specification dialog, The settings in this dialog are also similar to
select a window or a group of windows and those in the Mulled Window Specification
click the Open Object edit button or dialog for mulled units. Although similar, a
double-click the window using the Select number of the options cannot be edited when
a mulled unit is selected. See “Grouped
Objects or Window tool. Windows” on page 320.
The settings in this dialog are similar to those
in the Window Defaults dialog. See
“Window Defaults” on page 317.

332
CAFull_RM.book Page 333 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1
2
5

3
4

6
7

1 Window Type - Select the type of the list is the Default type set in the Window
window from the list. The first entry in Defaults dialog.

Window Types

333
CAFull_RM.book Page 334 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

2 Specify the Size and Position of the rough opening. The rough opening should be
selected window. large enough to accomodate the window
• Specify the Width and Height of the frame and space for shims.
window.
4 Swing Direction - Select from the
• Floor to Top - Specify the height of the available hinge options. The preview in
top of the window frame as measured the dialog updates as options are changed.
from the subfloor. Only available for Casement, Double and
Triple Awning, and Double and Triple
• Movable Size - Specify the dimension of
Hopper windows.
the movable portion of the window. A
value of 0 defaults the movable size to
5 A preview of the window displays here.
whatever is normal for that type of win-
dow. Not available for Fixed Glass, Sin-
gle or Double Casement, Single Awning 6 Check Show Color to show the
window in color in the preview.
or Hopper, or Louvered windows.
7 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
3 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the which side of the window displays in
amount to add to Each Side, the Top
the preview.
and the Bottom for the window’s framed

334
CAFull_RM.book Page 335 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Options Tab

1 4

5
2

1 Options - • Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the

window as though it were reflected about
• Check Interior Corner Block to count a vertical line through its center.
interior corner blocks in the materials list.
These do not display in 3D views. 2 The Mulled Units are available when a
mulled unit is selected. See “Displaying
• Check Exterior Corner Block to count Mulled Units” on page 323.
exterior corner blocks in the materials • Select Treat as Door to include the unit
list. These do not display in 3D views. in door schedules and the Door category
• Check Egress to specify the window as of the Materials List rather than in the
an egress window in the Window Sched- Window schedules and Materials List
ule and Materials List. category. Only available when the
selected unit contains a door.
Consult your local building and fire code • Uncheck Single Label to produce labels
authorities for your local egress window and Materials List and schedule entries
requirements. for each component of the unit. When
checked, the unit is treated as a single

335
CAFull_RM.book Page 336 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

object for labeling in floor plan view, in wall. Check Recessed to enable these
schedules and in the Materials List. options.
• Uncheck Single Wall Hole to produce • Select To Main Layer to recess the
individually framed wall openings for window to the wall’s Main Layer.
each unit in a mulled unit. When this box • Select To Sheathing Layer to recess the
is checked, a single wall opening with window to the wall’s sheathing layer.
one header for the entire unit is produced.

3 Specify the Mullion Depth for the

casing between the components of a
blocked unit, measured from wall surface.
Positive values move the mullion surface Not Recessed
towards the wall center; negative values,
away from it. Only available when a mulled
unit is selected.
• Specify the Inside depth of the mullion Recessed (to Main Layer)
on the interior surface of the wall.
• Specify the Outside depth of the mullion
on the exterior surface of the wall.
Recessed to Sheathing Layer
4 The Recessed into Wall options allow
you to recess the selected window or
mulled unit into a wall, away from the 5 Vertical Stacking - Specify the
window Level that the selected window
exterior surface. Only available if the
is placed on. See “Window Levels” on page
window or mulled unit is in a multi-layered
324.

Casing Tab
Changes made on the Casing tab can only be and materials can also be included in Room
seen in 3D views. Window casing profiles Finish Schedules.

336
CAFull_RM.book Page 337 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 Specify the casing for the selected • Click the Library button to select a
window or mulled unit. molding profile for the casing. A preview
• Select the Interior or Exterior radio but- of the casing profile displays in the win-
ton to define the casing for that window dow above. See “Molding Profiles” on
side and display it in the preview image. page 533.

• Check Suppress Exterior/Interior Cas- • Click the Clear button to remove a

ing to have a wrapped opening instead of selected casing profile from the window.
casing on the selected side of the window.
2 Double Wall Options - This section is
• Define the Width of the selected casing, enabled if the window is placed in a
including the Apron, if one is being used. Double Wall. See “Double Walls” on page
If a Lintel is defined, this setting does not 239.
affect the top. See “Lintel & Sill Tab” on • Select Through to create a single frame
page 338. running through both Double Walls. This
• Define the Reveal, the distance between option is selected by default.
the inside edge of the window frame and • If Enlarged is selected, casing is created
the inside edge of the casing. only on the wall the window is inserted

337
CAFull_RM.book Page 338 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

in. The opening on the other wall is • Radial - The sides of the casing or jambs
enlarged to accomodate the casing. are inserted in the wall at an angle that
• Select Double to place a second window passes through the center of the curve.
in the Double Wall opposite the selected
window. This second window cannot be
selected. Casing is produced as with the
Through type window. Radial

3 Curved Wall Casing - This section is • Parallel - The sides of the casing are
enabled if the window is placed in a inserted in the wall at a right angle to the
curved wall. See “Drawing Curved Walls” on line tangent to the curved wall at the cen-
page 228. ter of the window.
Door and window casing and jamb can be
constructed three ways in curved walls:
• Straight - Both window sash and casing
Parallel
are straight. Straight casing may not fit
properly into a wall if the window is too Normally, parallel casing has a straight sash.
wide or the curvature of the wall, too Radial casing is more like traditional curved
tight. windows, and typically has a curved sash.

Straight

Lintel & Sill Tab

The settings on the Lintel tab of the Window been assigned a reflected arch. See “Arch
and Mulled Window Specification dialogs Tab” on page 345.
allow you to assign a sill and lintel, or top
The profiles and materials of window lintels
molding that meets the side casing using a
and sills can be included in Room Finish
butt joint instead of a mitred joint. These
Schedules.
settings are not available if the window has

338
CAFull_RM.book Page 339 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1
2

1 Select the Interior or Exterior radio • Click the Library button to select a
button to define the lintel and/or sill for molding profile for the lintel. A preview
that window side and display that side in the of the lintel profile displays in the win-
preview image. dow to the left of the button. See “Mold-
ing Profiles” on page 533.
2 Specify a lintel for the selected window • Click the Clear button to remove a
or mulled unit.
selected lintel profile from the window.
• Check Use Exterior/Interior Lintel to
have a lintel on the selected side of the
3 Specify the sill for the selected window
window instead of regular top casing. or mulled unit.
• Define the Width of the selected lintel. • Check Use Exterior/Interior Sill to have
This is independent of the Casing width. a sill on the selected side of the window.
• Specify how far the lintel Extends on • Specify how far the sill Extends on either
either side. A value of 1” (25 mm) aligns side. A value of 1” (25 mm) aligns it with
it with the outside edges of the casing. the outside edges of the casing. If an
• Check Wraps to wrap the lintel profile Apron is specified, it is also affected.
back toward the wall. • Check Wraps to wrap the sill profile
back toward the wall. If checked, the sill

339
CAFull_RM.book Page 340 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

extends on 1” (25 mm) further on each the sill profile displays in the window to
side of the window. the left of the button. See “Molding Pro-
• Check Apron to include an apron under files” on page 533.
the sill. • Click the Clear button to remove the
• Click the Library button to select a selected sill profile from the window.
molding profile for the sill. A preview of

Sash & Frame Tab

The settings in the Sash & Frame tab are not
available in the Mulled Window
Specification dialog.

2
3

1 Specify the size and position of the and sliding windows. This is also the
Sash. Increasing the Side, Middle, Top width of the top portion of the window
or Bottom decreases the area of the glass. when an arch is specified.
• Specify the Side width of all vertical sash • Specify the Middle width of horizontal
members: those at the window sides as components between the top and bottom
well as the central members of casement sash in double hung, double and triple

340
CAFull_RM.book Page 341 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

awning, and double and triple hopper positive value moves the frame towards
windows. It does not affect casement and the wall’s exterior while a negative value
sliding windows. moves it towards the interior.
• Specify the Top and Bottom sash widths.
The Top value is not used if the window
has an arch.
• Specify the Depth, or thickness, of the
sash stock measured from the exterior to
the interior.
• Specify the Inset, the distance between
the frame and the outermost sash. If there
is no frame, the inset is measured from
the outer surface of the wall’s main layer.

2 Specify the size and position of the 3 Curved Sash Options - Specify
Frame. If this value is set to zero, the whether a window placed in a curved
wall’s main layer thickness is used as the wall is also curved or is straight. Normally, a
frame depth. curved sash is used with radial casing. See
• Specify the Side, Top and Bottom widths “Casing Tab” on page 336.
of the window frame.
• Specify the Frame Depth. This value Radial Casing
cannot be less than the wall’s main layer
thickness.
• Specify the Inset, the distance that the Straight Sash
window frame is inset from the exterior
of the main wall layer. Normally, the
outer surface of the frame aligns with the
outer surface of the main wall layer. A Curved Sash

Lites Tab
The Lites tab allows you to add muntins to A window that has been modified using the
various window styles and shutters. There Shape tab cannot have divided lites or
are four possible styles of muntin bars for shutters added. You can, however, create
regular windows, plus two additional options Custom Muntins for such a window. See
for arch top or round top windows. “Custom Muntins” on page 327.

341
CAFull_RM.book Page 342 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

A maximum of 8 lites can be specified in

either direction.

1 Specify the number, position and style

of Lites for the selected window.
• Enter the number of horizontal Lites
Across in each sash.
• Enter the number of vertical Lites Verti- Lites in fixed Lites in moveable
cal in each sash.
• Muntin Width - Specify the width of the Note: Because the fixed window in a Triple
bars that divide the panes of glass. Sliding window is twice the size of the mov-
able windows, the fixed section has a vertical
• Check or uncheck Lites in Fixed and muntin bar. To eliminate this, clear the Lites in
Lites in Moveable to specify either one fixed check box.
or both of the sashes to have divided lites.
• Select a Type, or style, of window lite
from the drop-down list.

342
CAFull_RM.book Page 343 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Lites vertical should be set between 4 and

8.
1
2 If the door is defined as Round Top ,
you can specify a Ray Count of up to
10 radial muntin bars in the portion of the
door within the arch. There is one more pane
• Normal style is the most common, with of glass than the number of rays specified.
muntins going horizontally and vertically.
Colonial windows are an example of the
normal style.
• Diamond style uses angled muntin bars
to divide up the lites. French windows are
an example of the diamond style.
• Prairie style is based on the normal style,
but with all the central muntin bars • Check Concentric to produce muntins
removed, leaving only the two outside radiating from a curved inner muntin that
muntin bars both horizontally and verti- is concentric with the door’s arch. You
cally. To be effective, both the Lites must have at least three lites across for
across and the Lites vertical should be set this to be used.
between 6 and 8. Federal or Federation
windows are an example of the Prairie
style.
• Craftsman style is based on the normal
style, but only the topmost horizontal
muntin bar is kept with all the portions of
the vertical muntin bars above it. To be
effective, both the Lites across and the
1.“Arch Tab” on page 345.

Shape Tab
Any type of non-symbol window may be
shaped. All “shaped” windows are defined as Note: Settings on the Shape tab that refer to
“Fixed Glass” on the General tab. the left and right side of the window describe
the window when viewed from the exterior.

343
CAFull_RM.book Page 344 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

1
5

1 Window Width displays for reference. • Specify the Height of the left inner cor-
It can be changed in the General tab. ner, as seen from the exterior, measured
from the bottom of the window.
2 Left Side - Specify the Height of the • Specify the Offset of the left inner cor-
left upper corner, as viewed from the
exterior, measured from the bottom of the ner, as measured from the left side of the
window. Unless changed, this matches the window. Minimum value is 1” (10 mm).
window height. Minimum value is 1/4” (4 An additional Right Inner Corner can be
mm). specified in a similar manner.
The height of the Right Side can be specified
in a similar manner. 4 Check Raise Bottom Left to raise the
height of the bottom left corner.
Check Left Inner Corner to add an • Specify the Height of the bottom left cor-
3
additional corner along the top edge. ner, as seen from the exterior, measured
from the bottom of the window. This
value cannot exceed the Height of the
Left Side.

344
CAFull_RM.book Page 345 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The height of the Bottom Right corner can

be raised in a similar manner.

5 Click Match Roof to match the angle • A has different left and right heights with
of the top of the window to the pitch of
the roof on a gable end. The window no Inner corner added.
maintains the angle even when resized and • B has matching left and right heights with
repositioned. Left and Right Inner Corner an added Inner corner.
must both be unchecked for this to work.
• C is the same as B, except that the left
This option does not work for curved roofs.
and right heights have been shortened to
• Click Revert to restore the window to its 1/4”.
original shape, type and arch settings.
• D is the same as B except it has two
A shaped window must have two vertical added Inner corners.
sides at least 1/4” high. • E is the same as A except that Raise Bot-
The following diagram represents added tom Right has been defined.
Inner corners using open circles and the left
and right corners using solid black circles: 6 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
which side of the window displays in
the preview. This can significantly affect a
shaped window’s appearance in the preview,
as the Left and Right Side settings always
refer to the window as seen from the exterior.

Arch Tab
The settings on Arch tab of the Mulled rectangular top openings whose tops are at
Window Specification dialog defins the the same height.
overall shape of the blocked units top. If you
A window that has been modified using the
intend to arch the top of a blocked unit, the
Shape tab cannot have an arched top.
top components should be constructed with

345
CAFull_RM.book Page 346 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

1 Specifications -Define the style and

size of the arch.
• Select the Type of arch desired from the
drop-down list.

Round Broken Gothic Elliptical Flat

Top Top

Tudor Double Trifoil Octo- Dogear

gonal

346
CAFull_RM.book Page 347 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Note: The settings on the Shape tab take pre-

2 Options - Define the orientation of the
arch.
cendence over those on the Arch tab. If the
window’s Shape has been modified, you can • Check Reflect to reflect the arch, top to
select an Arch but it will have no effect on the bottom. Not available if a lintel is speci-
window’s appearance. fied for the selected window. See “Lintel
& Sill Tab” on page 338.
• Specify the Height of the arch, as mea- • Select Full Arch to produce an arch with
sured from the base of the arch to the top the apex at the window’s center.
of the window. The height can be defined
• Select Arch on Left to produce an arch
for all arch types except Round Top and
with the apex on the window’s right side.
Octagonal Arches.
• Select Arch on Right to produce an arch
• The Radius can also be defined for Tudor
with the apex on the window’s left side.
and Double Arches.

Treatments Tab
The settings on the Treatments tab allow you exterior of the selected window or mulled
to assign embellishments to the interior and unit.

5
2

4 6
7

347
CAFull_RM.book Page 348 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Window Specification Dialog

1 Specify Interior treatments for the • Check Louver for louvered shutters.
selected window or mulled unit. Uncheck this for solid shutters. If Outside
• Specify a style of Curtains by selecting Casing is checked, the louvers face out-
“Use Default”, “None” or “Library” from ward, away from the wall; if checked,
the drop-down list. louvers face toward the wall.

• Click the Library button or select

“Library” from the Curtains drop-down Note: If there is not enough room for a shutter
on one side of the window because it is too
list to choose a style of curtain from the
close to another wall opening or to a wall cor-
library. See “Select Library Object Dia- ner, a shutter will not be created.
log” on page 689.
• Specify the Height Off Floor of the bot- • Specify a Capital in the same manner
tom edge of the curtains. that Curtains are chosen, above.
• Specify the Height Above Casing of the • Specify the Height and Width of the
top of curtains. capital.
• Specify a style of Blinds in the same • Specify a Sill in the same manner that
manner that Curtains are chosen, above. Curtains are chosen, above.
• Specify the Height of the sill.
2 Specify Exterior treatments for the
selected window or mulled unit. • Specify the distance that the sill Extends
• Check Shutters to apply shutters to the past the side casing.
window’s exterior and enable the settings
below to customize them. 3 A preview of the window displays here.
• Check Set Width by Window to assign a
shutter width exactly half that of the win- 4 Check Show Color to show the
window preview in color.
dow, excluding casing. If unchecked, you
can Specify Width; however, if the win-
5 Select Interior or Exterior to specify
dow is later resized, the shutters width which side of the window displays in
will not adjust in response. the preview.
• Check Outside Casing to position shut-
ters outside the window casing, as deco- Layer Tab
rative shutters often are. Uncheck this to The settings on the Layer tab are the same as
position the shutters just outside the win- those found on the same tab in dialogs
dow frame, like functional shutters. throughout the program. See “Layer Tab” on
• Check No Arch for shutters with flat tops page 125.
that reach the bottom of the curved por-
tion of an arched window. Only available Materials Tab
when an Arch is selected. See “Arch Tab”
on page 345. The settings on the Materials tab are the
same as those found on the same tab in

348
CAFull_RM.book Page 349 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

dialogs throughout the program. See Label Tab

“Materials Tab” on page 709.
The settings on the Label tab are the same as
The settings on the Materials tab of the those found on the same tab in dialogs
Mulled Window Specification dialog apply throughout the program. See “Label Tab” on
to all components of the blocked unit. Any page 1045.
settings made for individual components of
the blocked unit are overridden here.

Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog

To open the Bay/Box Window Specification do not have a defaults dialog. Many of these
dialog, select a bay or box window and click same options are available for Bow
the Open Object edit button. windows. See “Bow Window Specification”
on page 351.
The options in this dialog can be set for
individual objects only: bay or box windows

General tab

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

1 Bay Angle - Enter the angle of the side 2 Has Component Windows - Uncheck
components of the bay window in this box to remove the component
degrees. Enter 90 degrees to create a box windows of the bay/box window unit.
window.

349
CAFull_RM.book Page 350 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Bay/Box Window Specification Dialog

3 Use Existing Roof - Check this box if components, which allows the component
the existing roof needs no changes to width to increase.
accomodate the bay window.
10 No Framing Between Components -
4 Extend Existing Roof Over - Check Check this box to remove both studs
this box to extend the existing roof between the bay components.
plane to cover the bay window below.
11 Components Recessed - Check this
5 Rectangular Roof Over - Check this box if the window is placed in a brick
box to create a roof over the bay wall and you want to recess the exterior
window that is square across the end instead casing to produce a brick molding.
of following the profile of the roof. See “Bay,
Bay window components default to a size
Box, Bow Windows & Roofs” on page 330.
that allows one standard trimmer when a bay
6 Suppress Dimension - Check this box is first created. When the bay as a whole is
to suppress the automatically-produced moved and resized, its components auto-
dimensions that show the size of the bay or matically resize to fit a standard trimmer.
box window.
12 To Sheathing Layer - Check this box
7 No Labels - Check this box to suppress to recess the components to the
the label in floor plan view and to sheathing layer instead of the outside layer
prevent the Bay window from being included (typically brick) as in item 11.
in the materials list or Window Schedule.
13 Connect Outer Casing - Check this
8 Single Label for Entire bay - Check box to have the exterior casing
this box to create one label to list the surround all three bay component windows
Bay window in the Materials List and together, not separately, on the exterior.
schedules. Mullions are provided between components.
This is how casing is always done for the
9 No Trimmers for Components - A interior.
normal window has two framing studs
on either side. The trimmer stud is against
the window and ends where it butts to the Layer Tab
bottom of the header. Check this box to For information about using the Layer tab,
eliminate the trimmer stud for bay see “Layer Tab” on page 125.

350
CAFull_RM.book Page 351 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Bow Window Specification

2
3

Many of the options in this dialog are the

2 Suppress Standard Dimension -
same as the Bay/Bow Window Check this box to suppress the
Specification. See “Bay/Box Window dimensions showing width and depth of the
Specification Dialog” on page 349. bow.
Three options are unique to the Bay/Bow
3 Suppress Dimension to Center -
Window Specification dialog: Check this box to suppress the radial
dimension.
1 Define the Number of sections to
increase or decrease the number of
components in the window.

Window Schedules
Chief Architect can automatically produce a
window schedule. See “Creating Schedules”
on page 1037.

351
CAFull_RM.book Page 352 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 11:

Multiple Floors

Chief Architect allows for multiple floors in Chapter Contents

a plan. Floors that are based on the first floor • Floor Defaults Dialog
footprint can be easily added at any time. • Working With Multiple Floors
Floors can also be deleted and moved at any • Floor Tools
time. • Adding Floors
Chief Architect also supports special floors • Exchanging Floors
for foundations and attics. Only one • Deleting Floors
foundation level and one attic can exist in a • Floor and Ceiling Platforms
plan. Foundations are discussed in their own • Copying Floors
chapter. See “Foundations” on page 362. • Rebuilding Walls, Floors & Ceilings
• The Current Floor
Only one floor can be active at a time. This • The Attic Floor
floor is referred to as the current floor. One • Reference Floor
additional floor can be displayed (but not
edited) for reference in the same view.

352
CAFull_RM.book Page 353 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Floor Defaults Dialog

The default settings for the current In addition, the Floor Defaults button
floor can be accessed by selecting can be added to a toolbar for quick
Edit> Default Settings, then choosing Floor access to the Floor Defaults dialog. See
from the category tree in the Default “Toolbar Customization Dialog” on page
Settings dialog. See “Defaults and 107.
Preferences” on page 63.
The Floor Defaults dialog is similar to the
The Floor Defaults dialog can also be Room Specification dialog, but controls the
opened by double-clicking the Floor default settings for all rooms on the current
Tools button. floor. See “Room Specification Dialog” on
page 283.

General Tab

1
2
3

353
CAFull_RM.book Page 354 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Working With Multiple Floors

Three settings on the General tab of are

2 Check Default to no ceiling to have
unique to the Floor Defaults dialog. newly defined rooms have no ceiling
above them.
Note that in the Floor Defaults dialog, the
only Height value that can be specified is
3 On Floor 1 only, define the wall layer
Ceiling Height (B). that you would like to calculate the
Living Area To. See “Living Area” on page
275.
Note: You can also set the default ceiling
height for a floor by raising or lowering the
wall height of the Exterior Room in a 3D view. Moldings Tab
See “The Exterior Room” on page 271.
The settings on the Moldings tab are similar
to those in the Room Specification dialog.
1 Check Use Above Floor’s Platform for See “Moldings Tab” on page 290.
Ceiling to create a single ceiling
platform for the entire floor, which prevents
unique materials from being assigned to the Format Tab
ceiling in individual rooms. This box is The settings on the Format tab control the
normally left unchecked. dimension format of Room Labels on the
current floor. They are similar to the settings
in the Dimension Defaults dialog. See
“Primary Format Tab” on page 812.

Working With Multiple Floors

When a new, blank plan is opened, the plan The Reference Floor is a single floorthat can
name is Untitled 1.plan. be shown for reference in addition to the
current floor, similar to an overlay. The
Once the plan file is saved, the title bar
reference floor is visible but not editable.
displays filename:Floor Plan, indicating:
Objects snap to the reference display, helping
• The active drawing file is filename. align items with other floors.
• The file is a .plan file. All other floors can be shown in 3D views
• The active view is floor plan view. but not floor plan view.
Any model can have up to 30 floors, plus a
foundation and attic. Floors can be added, To view more than one floor of your plan
deleted, copied, and swapped. All floors and at a time, open the plan file again. This
the foundation are visible in most 3D views. creates a new editable window of the same
file that can show any floor. Changes made in
The Current Floor is the active floor. There this new window are also reflected in the orig-
can be only one active floor at a time. When inal window.
a plan file is first opened, the current floor is
always Floor 1.

354
CAFull_RM.book Page 355 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Floor Tools
Select Build> Floor to access the Choose Build> Floor> Build
floor tools. Foundation to open the Foundation
Defaults dialog and build a foundation floor.
Select Build> Floor> Build New
See “Building a Foundation” on page 366.
Floor to build a new floor. A new
floor can be generated based upon the Select Build> Floor> Delete
perimeter of the floor below or a blank floor Foundation to remove the foundation
can be created and drawn from scratch. See from the plan. See “Deleting Foundations”
“Adding Floors” on page 355. on page 369.
Select Build> Floor> Insert New Select Build> Floor> Hole in Floor
Floor to insert a new floor below the Platform to draw a hole in a floor
current floor. See “Adding Floors” on page platform on the current floor. See “Platform
355. Holes” on page 358.
Choose Build> Floor> Delete Select Build> Floor> Hole in Ceiling
Current Floor to remove the current Platform to draw a hole in a ceiling
floor from the plan. For more information, platform on the current floor. See “Platform
see “Deleting Floors” on page 358. Holes” on page 358.
Select Build> Floor> Exchange Choose Build> Floor> Rebuild
With Floor Above to move the Walls/Floors/Ceilings to force Chief
current floor up one floor and the floor above Architect to recalculate the relationship
it down. See “Exchanging Floors” on page between the walls, floors, and ceilings in
357. your model. See “Rebuilding Walls, Floors
& Ceilings” on page 358.
Choose Build> Floor> Exchange
With Floor Below to move the Select Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs
current floor down one floor and the floor to force the rebuild of any slabs in the
below it, up. See “Exchanging Floors” on plan.
page 357.

Adding Floors
New floors can be added in floor plan view To create a new floor
and 3D views.
1. Select Build> Floor> Build New
Floor to open the New Floor dialog.
Two options are available.

355
CAFull_RM.book Page 356 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Adding Floors

helpful to turn on reference layers in order to

align walls with bearing walls below. Items
snap to the reference floor display. See
1 “Reference Floor” on page 359.
2 2. Select one of the two options and click
OK. A new floor is added based on the
settings in the Floor Defaults dialog.
See “Floor Defaults Dialog” on page
1 Most often, Derive new 2nd floor plan 353.
from the 1st floor plan is used. This
option creates an upper floor with exterior 3. The new floor becomes the current floor
walls of the same type generated over the in floor plan view. If, however, the new
exterior walls of the floor below. Roof floor is created in a 3D view, the camera
directives associated with the walls on the remains on its original floor and does
floor below are also duplicated; however, not move.
interior walls are not. See “Roof Tab” on
page 252. Note: Chief Architect allows only one floor,
• Check Move Highest Floor’s Roof Up the foundation/basement, below the first floor.
to move any roof planes displaying on Keep this in mind when you begin an as-built
the highest floor in the plan up one or plan for a multi-story building.
floor when the new floor is created.
Roof planes displaying on floors other Inserting Floors
than the top floor are unaffected. This A floor can be inserted beneath the current
option is not available when Auto floor in both floor plan view and 3D views.
Rebuild Roofs is enabled. See “Build
Roof Dialog” on page 377. If you are in a 3D view, begin by selecting
Tools> Reference Floors> Change Floor/
When Move highest floor roof up is Reference and select the floor you would
checked, roof planes on the top floor like to insert a floor under as the Current
will move even if roof planes are locked and Floor. See “Change Floor / Reference” on
manually edited roof planes are set to be page 359.
retained. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
To insert a floor
2 Make new (blank) plan for the 2nd
floor - This option is typically selected 1. Select Build> Floor> Insert New
only if none of the exterior walls are directly
above the existing walls on the floor below. Floor . The Insert Floor dialog
This creates a blank floor above the current opens.
floor. If you choose this method, it may be

356
CAFull_RM.book Page 357 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Make new (blank) plan - Select this

option to insert a blank floor below the
current floor.
3. Click OK. The existing floor any any
floors above it are moved up, and a new
floor is created below.

2. Select one of the two available options: Adding a Foundation

• Derive new x floor plan from the x To add a foundation, select Build> Floor>
floor plan - Select this option to insert
Build Foundation . See “Building a
a new floor below the current floor,
Foundation” on page 366.
based on the exterior walls of the cur-
rent floor.

Exchanging Floors
Select Build> Floor> Exchange The floor that was moved becomes the
With Floor Above or Exchange current floor at its new location. You can
With Floor Below to swap the current floor easily move a floor up or down several floors
with the floor above or below. by using either one of these buttons
repeatedly.

Copying Floors
The Edit Area tools can be used to make Copying Between Plans
copies of entire floors in a plan. See “Edit While you can copy and paste floors from
Area Tools” on page 209. You can use these one plan file to another, this is not always the
tools to: best approach.
• Make a copy of an existing floor to be • To make a copy of the plan for backup or
pasted onto a new floor.
your records, use Save As to save the
• Make a copy of all existing floors in a file using a new name. See “Saving a
plan to be pasted into a different plan. Plan or Layout File” on page 46.
You can also copy the information on a floor • To copy the model into another plan with
by pressing Ctrl + A (Select All), then using multiple structures, consider exporting it
Copy and Paste Hold Position . See as a symbol and importing it into the new
“Paste Hold Position” on page 193. plan. See “Custom Symbols” on page
974.

357
CAFull_RM.book Page 358 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Deleting Floors

Deleting Floors
Select Build> Floor> Delete Current
Floor to remove the current floor When a floor is deleted, all objects on
from the plan. If there is a floor above, it that floor are deleted with it, including
becomes the current floor; if there is no floor locked roof planes and any other objects on
locked layers. See “Locking Layers” on page
below, the floor beneath becomes the current
117.
floor.

Floor and Ceiling Platforms

In many ways, floors in Chief Architect are rectangular polyline that forms a hole in the
defined by the floor platforms below them designated platform.
and the floor and/or ceiling platforms above.
You can also create a hole in a floor or
ceiling platform by drawing a closed CAD
Platform Holes polyline and then using the Convert
Select Build> Floor> Hole in Polyline edit button to convert it into a
Floor Platform or Hole in platform hole. See “Convert Polyline” on
Ceiling Platform, then click and drag a page 205.

Rebuilding Walls, Floors & Ceilings

When you make a change to the walls You can direct the program to rebuild walls,
or to the floor or ceiling platforms in floors and ceilings at any time, however, by
your plan, they may not immediately resize selecting Build> Floor> Rebuild Walls/
or move in the 3D model. The program does Floors/Ceilings .
detect such changes, though, and the next
time you generate a 3D or section/elevation If you do not want the program to rebuild
view, walls, floors and ceilings are rebuilt. walls, floors and ceilings when a 3D view is
created, uncheck Auto Rebuild Floors &
By default, walls, floors and ceilings are also Ceilings in the 3D Settings dialog. This may
rebuilt when an automatic roof is generated. speed up plan view editing for very large
See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 377. plans. See “3D Settings Dialog” on page 744.

The Current Floor

Only one floor can be active at any given Current Floor, and is the only floor that can
time. The active floor is referred to as the be edited.

358
CAFull_RM.book Page 359 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

If you want to edit two different floors at the Floor/Reference button, which can be
same time, you can open the plan again. This found between the Down One Floor and the
opens a second window on the current open Up One Floor buttons.
plan that has the same editing abilities as the
first. Only one of these windows can be Floors become available once they have been
active at any given time. built. The Attic and foundation levels are
also accessible using these tools.
Floor Up / Floor Down
Change Floor / Reference
If you are working with
more than one floor, you can If there are multiple floors, select
select Tools> Reference Floors> Up One Tools> Reference Floors> Change
Floor or Down One Floor to switch from Floor/Reference to open the Change Floor/
one floor to another. Reference dialog, where you can select both
the current floor and which floor is used in
You can also change the current floor in floor the Reference Display, as well as control the
plan, cross section/elevation and 3D views. appearance of the Reference Display.
The current floor displays on the Change

The Attic Floor

Chief Architect automatically creates In some situations, you may find it necessary
a floor above the top numbered floor to draw one or more walls on this floor;
level of each plan. This floor is called the however, even if you enclose an area with
Attic floor and has only one purpose: to walls, rooms cannot be created on the Attic
provide a space for automatically generated floor.
Attic walls. See “Attic Walls” on page 238.
If you wish to create an attic loft or storage
Because the Attic floor is not meant to be a area in your plan, you will need do so on a
living area, a warning message will display if numbered floor level.
you try to draw walls or other objects on this
floor.

Reference Floor
When there is more than one floor in a When the Reference Display is turned on, the
model, it is often helpful to see how different floor that you were last on prior to the current
floors relate to each other. Any floor can be floor is used as the Reference Floor. Objects
shown as the Reference Floor along with the on the current floor can snap to objects on the
current floor. Reference Floor; however, objects on the
Reference Floor cannot be selected or edited.

359
CAFull_RM.book Page 360 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Reference Floor

Reference Display Change Floor / Reference

To display the Reference Floor, select By default, the floor below the current
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference floor is the Reference Floor, but any
Display or press F9 on your keyboard. The floor can be referenced using the Change
reference floor can also be toggled on or off Floor/Reference dialog. To open the dialog,
quickly in floor plan view by clicking the select Tools> Reference Floors> Change
Reference Display toggle button on the Floor/Reference button.
utility toolbar.
If the Reference Display is on when a floor
plan view is sent to layout, the Reference 1
Display is always on in that layout view and 2
cannot be turned off.
If the Reference Display is turned on when a
view is printed, it will be included in the
printed output. See “Display Options and
Printing” on page 995. 3

Note: If the current floor and the Reference 4

Floor have edges that line up, the Reference
Floor may be difficult to see on screen. When
lines of two different colors are superimposed
upon each other, discoloration may result.
1 The Reference Floor currently used for
reference is highlighted here. You can
Reference Display Options
select another floor.
The display of objects in the
Reference Display is controlled by 2 The Current Floor is highlighted here.
You can select another floor to make it
layer set. You can control the appearance of
the current floor.
the layer set currently in use by selecting
Tools> Reference Floors> Reference 3 The Reference Display Layer Set,
Display Options. See “Layer Display which controls which layers are visible
Options Dialog” on page 121. in the reference display, shows here. The
Reference Display Set is active by default.
The current Reference Display layer set can
Select another layer set from the drop-down
be specified in both the Change Floor/
list to use it for the reference display.
Reference and Layer Set Management
dialogs. See “Layer Set Management” on
page 119.

360
CAFull_RM.book Page 361 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

may cover objects on the current floor

While any layer set can be used as partially or completely.
the Reference Display Layer Set, for
best results you should use the default • Use Object Settings displays the line and
Reference Display Set or create a new fill styles of objects in the Reference Dis-
layer set specifically for reference display play that aren’t using their default line
purposes. See “Layer Sets” on page 118. and fill styles. When this is unchecked,
objects display according to their layer
settings in the Reference Display Set.
4 Display Options allow you to control
how the lines and fill patterns of objects • Use XOR Drawing changes the color of
in the Reference Display appear. lines in the Reference Display that are
• Select Draw First to draw the Reference drawn on top of one another. Lines with
Display before drawing the objects on the identical properties do not display.
current floor. The lines and fill patterns of
objects in the Reference Display display Swap Floor/Reference
behind the current floor.
If one floor is defined as the current
• Select Draw Last to draw the Reference floor and another floor is defined as
Display after the objects on the current the reference floor, select Tools> Reference
floor are drawn. The lines and fill pat- Floors> Swap Floor/Reference to switch
terns of objects in the Reference Display the status of the two floors.
display in front of the current floor, and

361
CAFull_RM.book Page 362 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 12:

Foundations

There are three foundation types in Chief Chapter Contents

Architect: footing, slab, and piers. All three • Foundation Defaults
can be generated automatically or manually. • Building a Foundation
The foundation type can be specified in the • Displaying Foundations
Foundation Defaults dialog when the • Editing Stem Wall Foundations
foundation is built. • Editing Slab Foundations
There can be only one foundation level in • Aligning Foundation Walls
your plan, Level 0. Foundation walls can be • Deleting Foundations
drawn on upper floors using the Foundation • Foundations and Rooms
Wall tool. • The Slab Tools
• Editing Slabs
• Editing Piers and Pads
Always consult registered geotechnical • Slab Specification Dialog
and civil engineers for information
regarding the proper foundation for your site.

362
CAFull_RM.book Page 363 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Foundation Defaults
Default Settings are accessed by Because the settings in the Foundation
selecting Edit> Default Settings. Defaults dialog determine foundation type,
Select Foundation and click the Edit button this dialog opens automatically when Build>
to open the Foundation Defaults dialog. Floor> Build Foundation is selected.
The Foundation Defaults dialog allows you See “Building a Foundation” on page 366.
to specify stem wall height, footing size, slab
thickness, presence of treated sill plates, and The Foundation Defaults dialog cannot
other characteristics of a foundation. These be used to edit the foundation after it
values determine how a new foundation is has been built. The foundation must be
built and the sizes for foundation walls, slabs deleted and rebuilt. See “Deleting Founda-
and footings added to an existing foundation. tions” on page 369.

Foundation Tab

3 6

4
7
5

1 Three different Foundation Types can • Select Walls with Piers to generate a
be created in Chief Architect. Select the pier and grade beam foundation. The
radio button next to the desired type. floor framing rests directly on top of the
• Select Walls with Footings to produce a grade beam.
foundation composed of stem walls with • Select Monolithic Slabs to build a slab
footings that run continuously under the foundation with a perimeter footing. This
base of the walls. slab is the floor platform for the first

363
CAFull_RM.book Page 364 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Foundation Defaults

floor. It is visible on Floor 0 and can be See “Room Specification Dialog” on

selected and edited. See “Editing Slabs” page 283. To remove this slab, specify
on page 371. the room areas in the basement as “Open
Below”. See “Room Types” on page 271.
Each type of foundation has different default
settings, options, and behaviors.
3 When Walls with Footings is selected,
specify the Footing Size.
2 The Wall settings are available when • Specify the Width and Height of the
Walls with Footings or Walls with Piers
is selected. footing. To generate a foundation with a
stem wall and no visible footing, set the
• Select a Wall Type for automatically
footing width to the same dimension as
generated foundation walls from the
the stem wall.
drop-down list.
• If the Minimum Wall Height is sufficient
• Click the Define button to open the Wall
to produce an automatic slab floor in the
Type Definitions dialog and change the
basement, the bottom of this slab rests on
definition of the selected wall type. See
the top of the footing. The footing can be
“Wall Type Definitions” on page 241.
subsequently lowered by increasing Stem
Wall Height for the first floor room
Note: If you plan to turn the foundation wall above the foundation.
into a pony wall, a wall type other than
Default (concrete) must be selected. 4 Treated Sill Plate Size - Enter a Width
and Height for the treated sill plate,
• Specify the Wall Thickness of founda- also referred to as a mudsill. If either value is
tion walls and grade beams. Only avail- set to zero, no sill plate is produced. A sill
able when “Adjustable Thickness Wall” plate is only produced if the Main Layer of
is selected above. See “Adjustable Thick- the wall above is a framing type.
ness Walls” on page 242.
5 Check Show “S” Markers on Step
• Specify the Min. Wall Height, which is Foundation to include an “S” symbol
the minimum height for foundation walls in floor plan view anywhere there is a step in
and grade beams and includes the treated foundation wall height.
sill plate.
• If the Minimum Wall Height is at least 6 The Piers options are only available
when Walls with Piers is the selected
72” (1800 mm), a slab floor is generated Foundation Type.
above the footing and the Basement
• Specify the Diameter, Depth and Maxi-
Ceiling Height displays to the right as a
mum Separation of the piers.
reference. This is the distance from the
top of the slab floor to the basement ceil-
7 The Slab options are only available
ing and is equal to the Minimum Wall when Monolithic Slab is the selected
Height minus the Slab Thickness. Foundation Type.

The ceiling height can be changed later.

364
CAFull_RM.book Page 365 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Specify the Slab Thickness, which is the Walls with Footings is the selected Foun-
thickness of the slab produced above the dation Type.
footing or at the top of the stem wall.
If Slab at top of Stem Wall is selected, all
rooms on the first floor are automatically set
Note: Monolithic slabs are rebuilt whenever to Floor for this room is supplied by the
you Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings foundation room from the floor below, as
noted in the Room Specification dialog. See
• Check Slab at top of Stem Wall to raise “Structure Tab” on page 286.
the slab so its top is flush with the top of
the stem walls. Only available when

Options Tab
The Options tab allows you to include rebar Some options on this tab may be unavailable
and other materials related to the foundation depending on the foundation type selected on
in the Materials List. See “Materials Lists” the Foundation tab.
on page 1048.

1 2 3

4
5

1 #bars/course - Specify the number of Horizontal and Vertical rebar courses in the
rebar in the Footing, the number of stem walls, and the number of rebar layers in

365
CAFull_RM.book Page 366 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Building a Foundation

the slab. If piers are used, specify how many

3 Bar size - Define the rebar size in 1/8th
rebar are used per pier. Rebar does not inches. 4 represents 4/8, or ½ inch.
display in cross section/elevation views, but
Use Mesh - Select the check box to
is added to the Materials List. 4
reinforce the slab floor with mesh
2 Course Spacing - Define the Wall instead of rebar, or uncheck it to use rebar.
Horizontal and Wall Vertical spacing
for the rebar in the stem wall, and in Slabs. If 5 Select either Foam Seal, Termite
Flashing or both. These options are
slabs are to have rebar instead of mesh, this
added to the Materials List, but do not
spacing value applies to both directions.
display in the model.

Building a Foundation
Foundations can be built automatically To build an automatic foundation
or drawn manually. A combination of
the two methods can also be used. 1. Select Build> Floor> Build Founda-
Three foundation types are available: walls tion .
with footings, walls with piers and 2. Specify the desired foundation type and
monolithic slabs. The first two options are other information in the Build
created using walls; the last creates concrete Foundation dialog. The settings in this
slabs with footings. dialog are similar to those in the Foun-
Automatically built foundations are placed dation Defaults dialog. See “Foundation
on Floor 0 and are based on wall positions Defaults” on page 363.
and floor heights on Floor 1. At least one 3. In the New Floor dialog, select Derive
room must be defined on Floor 1 for a new Foundation plan from the 1st
foundation to be automatically generated. If floor plan and click OK to build a foun-
no rooms are defined on Floor 1, a blank dation based on Floor 1.
Floor 0 is created.
If you prefer, you can instead select Make
Once a foundation is generated, you can add new (blank) plan for the Foundation to
walls, piers, and slabs to customize it. create an empty foundation level where you
can manually draw foundation walls or slabs.
There can be only one Floor 0 per plan. If
your plan requires a foundation on more than In most cases, it is preferable to base Floor 0
one floor, you will need to draw the required off the first floor plan and then manually edit
foundation walls or slabs yourself. the foundation as needed.

366
CAFull_RM.book Page 367 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Displaying Foundations
The display of foundation walls, In floor plan view, footings are drawn with
footings and piers is controlled in the dashed lines and walls with solid lines.
Layer Display Options dialog on the Walls,
Automatically generated piers are drawn
Foundation and Footings layers. The
using a dashed line and are centered on the
Footings layer controls the display of
grade beam. The grade beam is represented
footings and foundation piers. The
by two solid lines. It aligns with the wall
Foundation layer controls the display of
above unless specified otherwise.
foundations in 3D views. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 121.

Editing Stem Wall Foundations

Foundation stem walls can be selected and 2. Specify the desired Stem Wall Height
edited much like other walls. See “Editing in the Room Specification dialog. See
Walls” on page 231. “General Tab” on page 283.
Footing size can be changed on a wall by 3. If you wish to reduce the Stem Wall
wall basis in the Wall Specification dialog. Height, you will first need to reduce the
See “Foundation Tab” on page 255. Ceiling Height value by the same
amount.
Stem Wall Height
If adjacent rooms have stem wall
When a foundation is created, all of Floor 0
heights that differ by at least 1/16 of an
uses the stem wall height specified in the inch, the stem wall separating them uses the
Foundation Defaults dialog, larger of these two values.
This height is measured from the bottom of
floor platform of Floor 1 to top of the stem In 3D views, individual stem walls can be
walls’ footings. If Floor 1 has multiple floor selected and edited. In most cases,this
platform heights, the foundation stem walls method should only be used for stepping the
will be stepped. bottom of the foundation wall. See “Stepped
Walls & Footings” on page 248.
Once a foundation is created, stem wall
heights can be adjusted either on a room-by- In addition, in 3D views you can select and
room basis or for individual walls. edit the top and bottom heights of an
individual stem wall’s footing. This method
To change a room’s stem wall height is helpful if you need two different footing
depths in the same stepped wall.
1. Select a room on Floor 0 and click the
Open Object edit button.

367
CAFull_RM.book Page 368 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Slab Foundations

Aligning Foundation Walls

By default, the exterior surface of the main
layer of the foundation stem walls aligns
with the exterior surface of the main layer of
the walls above. See “Wall Type Definitions”
on page 241.
If there is only one layer for both the stem
wall and the first floor wall above it, the
exterior surfaces of the walls align. The
footing is centered on the stem wall unless
this option is unchecked in the Wall
Specification dialog. See “Foundation Tab”
on page 255.

Editing Slab Foundations

Monolithic slabs can be edited in both 2D moved, you can update the slabs by selecting
and 3D views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Build> Floor> Rebuild Slabs.
Based Objects” on page 160. In the Rebuild Monolithic Slabs dialog,
The footing size for a monolithic slab can be click Rebuild Slabs to delete all existing
specified in the Slab Specification dialog. slabs and rebuild them to match the current
See “Slab Specification Dialog” on page footprint of the walls.
372. Any changes you may have made to the slab
Monolithic slab foundations can also be are lost when slabs are rebuilt.
updated by editing the footprint of the floor
above then deleting and rebuilding the
foundation.

Rebuild Slabs
If the walls defining the area of a
monolithic slab foundation or a room
specified as having a slab foundation are

Aligning Foundation Walls

By default, the exterior surface of the main
layer of the foundation stem walls aligns

368
CAFull_RM.book Page 369 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

with the exterior surface of the main layer of exterior surfaces of the walls align. The
the walls above. See “Wall Type Definitions” footing is centered on the stem wall unless
on page 241. this option is unchecked in the Wall
Specification dialog. See “Foundation Tab”
If there is only one layer for both the stem
on page 255.
wall and the first floor wall above it, the

Deleting Foundations
Select Build> Floor> Delete Founda- Deleting and rebuilding the foundation is
tion to delete the entire foundation often the quickest way to update the model
floor. when substantial changes are made to Floor 1
after the foundation is built.
You can also select and delete individual
foundation walls and slabs by clicking the
Note: To change the foundation type, you
Delete edit button or pressing the Delete should delete and rebuild the foundation.
key. See “Deleting Objects” on page 196.

Foundations and Rooms

When a foundation plan is created, rooms Two options on the Structure tab of the
included in the Living Area calculation Room Specification dialog affect the
generate a spread footing, grade beam, or foundation: Slab foundation for this room
slab foundation below them. Garage rooms if the foundation is a monolithic slab, and
generate slab foundations, but exterior rooms This foundation ‘room’ supplies the floor
such as Decks do not. for the room above if the foundation is
composed of footings or piers. See
Foundation walls are not generated under
“Structure Tab” on page 286.
interior walls on Floor 1 unless:
• They separate the garage from the rest of Garages
the plan;
A room labeled “Garage” on the first floor
• They separate rooms with different floor
produces an automatic footings or pier
heights.
foundation with a slab floor.
To produce this foundation, the following
Note: To remove the concrete slab or part of
the slab in the basement area, select a base- options are checked on the Structure tab of
ment room and define it as Open Below in the the Room Specification dialog for the
Room Specification dialog. foundation “room” under a Garage:
• Ceiling over this room is not checked.

369
CAFull_RM.book Page 370 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Slab Tools

• This foundation ‘room’ supplies the The floor height of the garage and the top of
floor for the room above is checked. stem wall must be properly defined relative
to the zero level of the first floor. Typically,
On the Structure tab of the Room
the garage area in the foundation must be
Specification dialog for the Garage itself,
selected and the floor height or slab to stem
“Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
wall top raised if it is to be less than 24"
Foundation ‘Room’ from the Floor
below the zero level of the main floor.
Below” should be checked. See “Structure
Tab” on page 286.
Basement Rooms
These settings create a 4" slab to sit on top
of the footings, with a short stem wall around When a foundation is assigned a Minimum
the garage. Stud walls are placed on top of Wall Height of 72” (1800 mm) or greater, a
the stem wall when framing is built. slab floor is automatically generated. The
resulting basement can be divided into
If Floor for This Room is Supplied by the
separate rooms using Interior Walls or
Foundation “Room” from the Floor Below
any wall type you wish.
is selected, a Floor Overview of the
foundation plan includes the slab. A Floor If the rooms in a basement have different
floor heights, it is best to separate them using
Overview on Floor 1, on the other hand,
shows no garage floor. walls specified as Foundation Walls .

The Slab Tools

Select Build> Slab to access the Slab Once created, slabs can be edited like other
Tools. The Slab Tools are designed for closed polylines. See “Editing Closed-
more generic purposes than foundations and Polyline Based Objects” on page 160.
should not be substituted for a foundation
plan. The settings in the Foundation Slab Holes
Defaults dialog do not affect slabs created
with the Slab Tools. A hole can be placed in a slab or
in the floor of a foundation slab
with footings. Select Build> Structure>
Slabs
Slab Hole or Build> Structure> Slab Hole
Select Build> Structure> Slab or With Footing, then either click or click and
Build> Structure> Slab With drag within an existing slab to create a hole.
Footing, then either click or click and drag a
rectangle to draw a slab. See “Rectangular Piers & Pads
Polyline” on page 903.
Piers and pads can be manually
placed under walls, railings, or

370
CAFull_RM.book Page 371 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

beams on any floor. Select Build> Slabs and the

Structure> Round Pier or Build> Materials List
Structure> Square Pad and click in floor
plan view to place a pier or pad. If the slab material type is specified as
Concrete or Volume, the materials list
The pier or pad placed uses the specified in calculates the total volume of the slab and all
the Foundation Defaults dialog. footings. See “Define Material Dialog” on
For information about editing Piers and Pads, page 719.
see “Editing Piers and Pads” on page 371.

Editing Slabs
Slabs and Slab Holes can be selected in 2D 3D views. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
and 3D views both individually and as a Based Objects” on page 160.
group and can be edited using the edit
handles, the edit toolbar and the Slab Using the Edit Tools
Specification dialog. See “Slab Specification
Dialog” on page 372. One or more selected Slabs or Slab Holes
can be edited in a variety of ways using the
buttons on the edit toolbar. As with most
Using the Mouse
objects, slabs can be copied, replicated,
Slabs and Slab Holes can be edited like other moved, deleted, etc. See “Edit Toolbar
closed-polyline base objects in both 2D and Buttons” on page 1140.

Editing Piers and Pads

Round Piers and Square Pads can be selected allow the pier or pad to be resized and moved
individually and in groups in 2D and 3D along the wall it is placed beneath. See
views and edited using their edit handles and “Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147.
edit toolbars.
In 3D views, piers and pads can be edited
There are several ways to move piers and like CAD boxes. See “Editing Box-Based
pads; however, they must always be Objects” on page 164.
positioned under a wall. A pier or pad can
only be moved away from the wall it is Using Dimensions
placed beneath if it is moved to another wall.
In floor plan view, piers and pads can also be
moved using dimensions. See “Moving
Using the Mouse
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
In floor plan view, piers and pads can be
edited like CAD lines. Three edit handles

371
CAFull_RM.book Page 372 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Slab Specification Dialog

Using the Edit Tools

If you move a foundation wall or beam,
any piers or pads it contains move with A selected pier or pad can be edited in a
it. variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. As with most objects, piers and pads
can be copied, replicated, moved, deleted,
etc. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
1140.

Slab Specification Dialog

Select a slab and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Slab Specification
dialog.

General Tab

1
2

1 Check Hole in Slab to convert the 3 Thickness - Specify the thickness of

selected slab into a slab hole. A slab the selected slab.
hole must be contained within a larger slab.
4 Has Footing - Check this box if you
Top Height - Specify the height of the want the slab to have footings, and
2
selected slab’s top surface. specify the Height and Width for those
footings.

372
CAFull_RM.book Page 373 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Polyline Tab Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Specification Dialog” on page 888.

Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Materials Tab
Use this tab to select a material to apply to
The perimeter, total area, and volume of the the terrain surface in 3D views. This material
selected slab displays here. The volume is is not calculated in the Materials List.
the amount of concrete required to pour the
slab. For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.
Selected Line Tab
For information about using the Selected
Line tab, see “Polyline Specification Dialog”
on page 901.

373
CAFull_RM.book Page 374 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 13:

Roofs

Chief Architect’s manual and automatic Roof Chapter Contents

Tools allow you to draw almost any roof • Roof Defaults
style. • Automatic vs. Manual Roofs
Proficiency with the Roof Tools can be • The Roof Tools
attained only through practice, but mastering • Build Roof Dialog
these tools saves you time and effort in plan • Roof Planes
development. • Displaying Roof Planes
• Editing Roof Planes
• Roof Plane Specification Dialog
Verify that all roof planes join as • Automatic Roofs
intended. The program does not con-
• Roof Baseline Polylines
firm correct geometry between manually
designed or edited roof planes. It is possible • Roof Baseline Specification Dialog
to design and edit roof planes with hips and • Curved Roof Planes
valleys that do not meet properly. • Ceiling Planes
• Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog
• Gable/Roof Line
• Skylights
• Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog
• Dormers
• Editing Auto Dormers
• Dormer Specification Dialog
• Roof Returns and other Details
• Roof Pitches in Degrees

374
CAFull_RM.book Page 375 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Roof Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings, to open
the Default Settings dialog for a Iif Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the
variety of drawing tools, several of which Build Roof dialog and you change floor
directly affect roof generation. or ceiling heights, floor or ceiling platform
depths, wall positions or roof directives in
walls, the roof rebuilds to reflect your
Build Roof Dialog changes. See “Rebuilding Roofs” on page
401.
While not listed in the Default Settings
dialog, the Build Roof dialog functions as
the defaults dialog for roofs. Many, but not Wall Specification Dialog
all, initial default values for both manually By default, when an automatic roof is built, a
drawn and automatically generated roofs are roof plane is generated over each exterior
set in this dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” wall, creating a hip roof.
on page 377.
Any deviations from this default hip roof,
such as a gable or a different pitch, can be
Framing Defaults
specified in the Wall Specification dialog for
Default settings for framing can be specified any exterior wall. See “Roof Tab” on page
in either the Build Roof or the Framing 252
Defaults dialog. Framing defaults control the
depth of roof planes as well as the depth of Dormer Defaults
floor and ceiling platforms, which influence
roof plane heights. See “Framing Defaults” The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
on page 461. determine the initial settings for automatic
dormers and are much like those in the
Dormer Specification dialog. See “Dormer
Floor Defaults
Specification Dialog” on page 420.
The initial heights of floors and ceilings,
The Dormer Defaults dialog can be opened
which influence roof heights, are specified in
from the Default Settings dialog or by
the Floor Defaults dialog for each floor. See
double-clicking either of the Auto
“Floor Defaults Dialog” on page 353.
Dormer tools.

Automatic vs. Manual Roofs

Chief Architect can create just about any roof including curved roof planes, can be created
style. Most common roof styles such as hips manually. The manual roof tools allow you
and gables can easily be generated to create any roof system that can be
automatically. More complex roof styles, represented using roof planes.

375
CAFull_RM.book Page 376 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Roof Tools

Automatically Bay, bow, and box windows also produce

Generated Roofs roof planes automatically. For information
about these windows and the roof styles that
The quickest and easiest way to create a roof can be used with them, see “Bay, Box, Bow
is automatically. By default, a roof plane is Windows & Roofs” on page 330.
generated over each exterior wall, creating a
hip roof. The program automatically joins Manually Drawn Roofs
the roof planes at ridges and valleys. See
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 377. Any roof system that can be created
automatically can also be created manually.
Any deviations from the default hip roof can Each roof plane is drawn and edited
be specified on the Roof tab of the Wall individually, offering full control over the
Specification dialog for any exterior wall. process and limiting the possibilities only to
Here, you can specify a Full Gable Wall, your imagination.
High/Shed Gable Wall, or other options
instead of a default hip roof. You can also
specify a different overhang, pitch, an upper Note: You cannot manually draw or edit roof
planes when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled
pitch, and the elevation where the upper
in the Build Roof dialog. See “Build Tab” on
pitch begins for the roof plane that rests on page 378.
the selected wall. See “Roof Tab” on page
252.
Using Both Techniques
Roofs can also be automatically generated
Another useful option is to start with an
based on a roof baseline polyline. When a
automatically generated roof and use manual
roof baseline polyline is used, information
design techniques to finish it. Using both
that determines where and how roof planes
automatic roof generation and the manual
are generated is contained in the Roof
roof drawing and editing techniques, you can
Baseline Specification dialog. See “Roof
quickly design highly customized roof
Baseline Polylines” on page 401.
systems.

The Roof Tools

Select Build> Roof to access the Roof Roof Plane
Tools.
Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane to
draw a roof plane manually. See
Build Roof
“Roof Planes” on page 385. You can also
Select Build> Roof> Build Roof to double-click the Roof Plane button to open
open the Build Roof dialog and the Build Roof dialog.
specify the settings for automatically
generated and manually drawn roofs. See
“Build Roof Dialog” on page 377.

376
CAFull_RM.book Page 377 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Auto Dormer
Note: You cannot use the Roof Plane tool
when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
Build Roof dialog. See “Manually Drawn and click within a roof plane to place a
Roofs” on page 376. dormer. See “Dormers” on page 417.

Ceiling Plane Edit All Roof Planes

Select Build> Roof>Ceiling Plane to Select Build> Roof> Edit All Roof
draw a ceiling plane manually. Ceiling Planes to open the Roof Plane
planes are drawn and behave much like roof Specification dialog and edit all roof planes
planes. See “Ceiling Planes” on page 408. in the entire plan at once. See “Roof Plane
Specification Dialog” on page 392.
Gable/Roof Line
Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof
Delete Roof Planes
Line to draw a gable line that Select Build> Roof> Delete Roof
generates a gable along a baseline edge when Planes to delete all roof planes in the
roofs are automatically generated. See plan. See “Delete Roof Planes” on page 377.
“Gable/Roof Line” on page 412.
Delete Ceiling Planes
Skylights
Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes
Select Build> Roof> Skylight, then to delete all manually drawn ceiling planes in
draw a rectangle over an existing roof the plan. See “Delete Ceiling Planes” on
plane to create a skylight. The skylight, sky- page 377.
light shaft, and ceiling hole (if a ceiling
exists) are drawn at the same time. See Fix Roofs
“Skylights” on page 414.
Select Build> Roof> Fix Roofs to
Auto Floating Dormer remove breaks where a single edge of
one roof plane meets the broken edge of
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating another along a ridge, hip or valley. Fix
Dormer and click within an existing Roofs does not affect eave edges. See
roof plane to place an auto floating dormer. “Aligning Roof Edges” on page 388.
See “Dormers” on page 417.

Build Roof Dialog

The Build Roof dialog is used to Roof dialog, select Build> Roof> Build
automatically produce roof planes and Roof.
roof baseline polylines. To open the Build

377
CAFull_RM.book Page 378 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Roof Dialog

Roof planes and roof baseline polylines are Use the Build Roof dialog to automatically
generated based on the roof directive settings produce roof planes and roof plane baselines
for each of the exterior walls in the plan. See based on the roof directive settings for each
“Wall Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on of the exterior walls in the plan. See “Wall
page 397. Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
397.
You can also double-click the Roof Tools
If you make changes to any of the settings,
button or the Roof Plane button to open you will need to build the roof again for them
this dialog. to take effect.
The settings in the Build Roof dialog act as The settings in this dialog are similar to those
defaults for both manually drawn and found in the Roof Plane Specification
automatic roofs. dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
Dialog” on page 392.

Build Tab

1 8
9
2
3 10
3
4 11
5 12
13
6 14
7
15
16

1 Check Build Roof Planes to build a

new roof structure over the entire

378
CAFull_RM.book Page 379 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

model. Unless you specify otherwise, the

6 Pitch - Enter a value to describe the
program discards the existing roof planes pitch in a ratio over 12. This affects all
and produces new ones. roof planes as they are created but does not
update existing roof planes. For a conversion
2 Specify whether roof baseline polylines to degrees, see “Roof Pitches in Degrees” on
are created or used. See “Roof Baseline
page 426.
Polylines” on page 401.
• Check Make Roof Baseline Polylines to 7 Roof Overhang - The overhang is
delete the existing roof and to create roof measured from the exterior Main Layer
baseline polyline(s) based on the exterior wall surface horizontally to the end of the top
wall layout and roof information defined of the rafter. It does not include frieze
in those walls. If checked, Build Roof thickness, gutters, sheathing or siding. See
Planes becomes unchecked. “The Main Layer” on page 242.

• Check Use Existing Roof Baselines to • Eave is the overhang at the eaves and is
produce a roof plan based on your roof always the overhang for a roof plane hav-
plane baseline polyline(s) instead of the ing the default Pitch specified above. If
exterior wall layout. the pitch for a particular roof plane is set
differently, its overhang may try to main-
3 Check Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings tain its fascia at the same height. Over-
to rebuild the walls and floor and hang can be greater for a shallower pitch,
ceiling platforms of your model before the lesser for a greater pitch.
roof is built. It is independent of Build Roof
• Gable is the overhang dimension at gable
Planes and helps ensure that your roof is
ends or rake walls.
generated based on the most up-to-date
model. See “Rebuilding Walls, Floors &
8 Auto Rebuild Roofs - If you check this
Ceilings” on page 358. option, the program automatically
rebuilds the roof if you make a change that
4 Check Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze affects the generation of roofs, such as
to regenerate fascia, gutters, and frieze
changes to exterior walls or ceiling heights.
boards. See “Fascia, Gutters & Frieze” on
page 424.
9 Check Lock Roof Planes to lock the
“Roof Planes” layer and prevent
You can check this box to rebuild Fascia,
changes from being made to the roof plan
Gutters, Frieze without rebuilding the roof.
either manually or automatically. See “Layer
This function is automatically invoked after Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
you manually edit roof planes or draw new
When Lock Roof Planes is selected, Build
roof planes if Auto Rebuild Walls/Floors/
Roof Planes cannot be selected.
Ceilings is checked in the 3D Settings
dialog. See “Options Tab” on page 745. If you check Move highest floor roof up
when you create a new floor, roof planes on
5 Uncheck Allow Low Roof Planes only the highest floor will move up, even if they
when an upper floor overhangs roof
are locked. See “Adding Floors” on page
planes below.
355.

379
CAFull_RM.book Page 380 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Roof Dialog

10 Check Retain Manually Drawn Roof 13 Raise Off Plate - Enter a positive value
Planes and/or Retain Edited Roof in this field to produce the trusses with
Planes to retain manually drawn and/or an energy heel to allow for more insulation.
automatic roof planes that have been The distance is measured along the outside
manually edited, including roof planes over main wall layer, up from the top plate up to
exploded dormers, when roof planes are the bottom side of the top chord.
automatically generated.
Enter a negative Raise Off Plate value to
If a newly generated roof plane is coplanar control the Birdsmouth Depth. For example,
with a retained plane, and area by which they for the Birdsmouth Depth of 3”, enter -3”.
overlap is at least half the area of least half of The location of the baseline may change if
either of them, the new roof plane is deleted you use the Raise Off Plate setting to
and only the retained plane is kept. specify the birdsmouth depth. See
“Birdsmouth Depth” on page 391.
11 Check Ignore Top Floor to ignore the
top floor when roof planes are To control the Birdsmouth Depth in this
generated. Roof planes are built on the top manner, you must also check Same Roof
plates of the walls below the top floor. Height at External Walls.

12 Check Trusses to raise the roof so that Note: If trusses is not checked, and Raise Off
the bottom edge of the truss top chord
(or rafter) is flush with the top of the wall. Plate is set to zero, the program generates a
birdsmouth cut. To eliminate the birdsmouth
Incorrect--Trusses is cut, you must set Raise Off Plate to at least
not checked. 1/16” (1 mm).

14 Specify how you would like the eaves

of roof planes with different pitches to
Correct--Trusses meet. See “Aligning Eaves” on page 389.
is checked.
• Check Same Roof Height at External
Walls to keep bearing walls the same
height and change horizontal roof over-
hang distances as needed so that eaves
meet correctly. See “Aligning Eaves” on
When Trusses is checked, the size of the roof page 389.
rafter framing is the Top Chord size from
the Trusses tab in the Framing dialog. When checked, this option ignores any
When Trusses is cleared, the size of the roof overhang values you may have entered in
framing is the Rafter size from the Roof tab the Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
the Framing dialog. If trusses are laid out Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
without selecting the Trusses box, the roof 397.
uses the rafter size instead. The “Incorrect”
diagram shows this problem. Uncheck this option to raise or lower

380
CAFull_RM.book Page 381 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

some roof planes relative to the wall’s top segement that covers a curved wall. This
plate, allowing all horizontal overhangs value is only used when roofs are
to be the same unless a non-default value automatically generated. A smaller angle
has been entered in the Wall produces more roof planes.
Specification dialog.
• Check Same Height Eaves to keep the 16 Min. Alcove - Specify the minimum
width of an alcove (depression into an
eave height for all roof planes the same. otherwise straight exterior wall). Any alcove
Roof planes are raised and lowered as less than the specified width is treated as
needed so that eaves meet correctly. though the exterior wall continues straight
across. Alcoves that measure wider than this
The eave height used when this box is value are not roofed over; they cause a
checked is that of a roof plane using the change in roof planes.
default Pitch and Overhang values. When
this box is checked, all roof planes are Following is an example showing this
affected, including those that do not need difference. If Min Alcove is 36", a 36" wide
adjustment in order to align with adjacent alcove requires a change in the roof line.
planes. Each wall of the alcove has an eave. On the
right, the alcove is less than the 36"
When Same Height Eaves is checked, minimum, so the roof passes right over it.
any non-default overhang values speci-
fied in the Wall Specification dialog are
used. Roof planes are raised or lowered
so that the eave height is the same,
regardless of the horizontal overhang.

15 Segment Angle at Curved Wall -

Enter the maximum angle for a roof

381
CAFull_RM.book Page 382 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Roof Dialog

Options Tab

3
1
4

1 Square Cut or Plumb Cut - Select • You can specify the Length of the boxed
either option to determine how the eaves or check Default to Overhang to
rafter tails are cut. This change displays only extend the boxed eave from the edge of
after you have rebuilt roofs. Individual roof the roof to the exterior main layer of the
planes can have this defined in their own wall, covering the overhang area.
Roof Plane Specification dialog.

2 Check Boxed Eave to produce

horizontal boxed eaves or uncheck it
for sloping eaves. You can also change this
for individual roof planes in the Roof Plane
Specification dialog.
• Higher Eaves Boxed - If the selected
roof plane contains more than one eave,
check this box to box the higher eaves as
With Boxed Eave checked
well.

382
CAFull_RM.book Page 383 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

is available in the Roof Plane Specification

dialog.
• Uncheck Gutter to not include gutters on
subsequently-built roof planes. This
option affects both the Materials List and
3D views.
• Check Edge Flashing to calculate edge
flashing in the Materials List..
• Check Ridge Vent to calculate ridge
With Higher Eaves Boxed checked
venting in the Materials List.

3 Specify the Thicknesses of the roof’s • Check Ridge Cap Shingles to count
non-framing structural components. ridge cap shingles in the Materials List.
The materials for these components are
• Check Metal Drip Edge at Eave to cal-
specified on the Materials tab.
culate metal drip edge along the eaves in
• Specify the Thickness of the Roof Sur- the Materials List.
face material.
• Check Metal Drip Edge at Gable to cal-
• Check Sheathing to include a sheathing culate metal drip edge along any gable
material above the roof framing of subse- eaves in the Materials List.
quently built roof planes and specify its
• Check Valley Flashing to calculate val-
Thickness.
ley flashing in the Materials List.
• Check Soffits to include soffits under the
eaves of subsequently built roof plane 5 3D Display - Check Show All Ridges
eaves and specify their Thickness. to display a line along all ridges and
valleys in Vector Views. This includes the
• Check Ceiling to include a ceiling mate- hip ridges between roof planes forming the
rial under the roof framing on subse- conical roof above a curved wall.
quently built roof planes and specify its
Thickness. Framing Tab
4 Specify the material components to The settings on the Framing tab of the Build
Supply for subsequently-built roof
Roof dialog are the same as those on the
planes. When checked, these items are
Roof tab of the Build Framing dialog.
calculated in the Materials List. See
Changes made in one dialog are also applied
“Materials Lists” on page 1048. Only Gutter
in the other. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.

Rafter Tails Tab

The settings on the Rafter Tails tab allow you The settings on this tab function like those on
to specify a rafter tail profile for exposed the Moldings tab found in many dialogs in
rafter ends under roof eaves. See “Rafter the program. See “Moldings Tab” on page
Tails” on page 425. 540.

383
CAFull_RM.book Page 384 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Roof Dialog

1
2
3

1 The name of the selected rafter tail 3 Profile Specification - A preview of

Profile displays here. the selected profile and sizing
information are found here.
2 Add, replace or remove a rafter tail • Uncheck Stretch to Fit Rafter to use the
profile.
rafter tail profile’s default size. When
• Click Add New to select a profile from
checked, the profile is sized by the pro-
the Select Library Object dialog. See
gram to match the roof rafters.
“Select Library Object Dialog” on page
689. Only available when no profile is • The default Height and Width of the raf-
currently selected. ter tail profile display here for reference,
but cannot be changed. If you need differ-
• Click Select to replace the currently
ent dimensions, you can create your own
selected profile with a new one from the
profile. See “Molding Profiles” on page
Select Library Object dialog. Only avail-
533.
able when a profile is already selected.
• Specify the distance that the rafter tail
• Click Delete to delete the currently
profile should Extend past the inside sur-
selected profile. Only available when a
face of the subfascia. This distance is
profile is already selected.
measured along the top of the rafter tail,

384
CAFull_RM.book Page 385 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

so it is greater than the length as mea- Materials Tab

sured in floor plan view.
The settings on the Materials tab allow you
to specify materials for the roof’s various
Gutter Tab
components. For information about using the
The settings on the Gutter tab allow you to Materials tab, see “Materials Tab” on page
specify a gutter profile for the eave ends of 709.
roof planes. The settings on this tab are like
those on the Moldings tab found in many Roof Styles Tab
dialogs in the program. See “Moldings Tab”
on page 540. The Roof Styles tab provides links to tutorial
information about creating different roof
styles automatically. Click on a roof style to
Frieze Tab
launch the online Help to a page with
The settings on the Frieze tab allow you to information about the roof style you selected.
specify a frieze molding profile. The settings See “Roof Tutorial” on page 191.
on this tab are like those on the Moldings tab
found in many dialogs in the program. See
“Moldings Tab” on page 540.

Roof Planes
When creating a roof, it is helpful to know 2. As in the following example, click and
how to draw a roof plane manually and be drag a baseline from point 1 to point 2.
familiar with its parts.

Drawing Roof Planes

Roof planes are CAD-based objects
that are created and edited like much
closed polylines, and also have pitch,
elevation and structural properties.
Before drawing roof planes, you should set
your roof defaults so that the 3D attributes of
Line 1 - 2 is the baseline
your roof planes are correct. See “Roof
Defaults” on page 375. 3. Release the mouse button at point 2 and
move your cursor in the upslope direc-
To draw a roof plane tion. As you move the cursor, a preview
outline of the roof plane displays.
1. Select Build> Roof> Roof Plane .

385
CAFull_RM.book Page 386 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Planes

4. Click at point 3 to build the roof plane.

Point 3 is located on the ridge edge of Straight up from outside
the roof plane. of main wall layer at top
surface of roof framing

Note: You cannot manually draw roof palnes

when Auto Rebuild Roofs is enabled in the
Build Roof dialog. See “Build Tab” on page
378.

The upslope mark displays at the center

point of the baseline and indicates the
upslope direction of the roof plane.
The distance from the outer main layer of the Location of Roof Baseline in cross-section
wall to the end of the eave is the overhang. In floor plan view, the baseline displays as as
separate line within its roof plane and can be
The Baseline selected and edited independent of the roof
plane. In most cases, moving a roof plane’s
The initial height of any roof plane - manual
baseline is not recommended; however, it
or automatic - is determined by its baseline.
can be resized without causing any
The baseline of the roof plane is normally unexpected results.
located over the outer main layer of the wall
A baseline has a tick mark at its center point
and is used as the pivot point for the roof
which indicates the direction that the roof
plane when the pitch is changed.
plane slopes upward. You cannot redefine the
The baseline height is determined by the direction of the slope. If the upslope tick is
following formula: pointing the wrong direction, either rotate the
roof plane or delete it and draw another.
Elevation of the wall top plate
+ Vertical Rafter Depth When drawing the baseline of a roof plane,
here are some things to consider:
- Vertical Birdsmouth Depth
• A baseline does not have to be drawn
= Baseline Height over a wall, although it often is.
In a cross section, the baseline is located • A baseline drawn along a wall should be
directly above the outer surface of the main drawn over the outer edge of the wall’s
wall layer, at the top surface of the roof main layer. It tries to snap to that layer.
framing.
• The elevation of the top plate is defined
by the ceiling height in the room. If the
roof plane is not drawn over a wall, it’s
height is based on the default ceiling
height value for the current floor.

386
CAFull_RM.book Page 387 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• If a baseline is drawn over the top of any plane at the point where you started
other roof plane, the baseline height drawing.
equals the height of the existing roof

Displaying Roof Planes

Roof planes are drawn on the “Roof The appearance of curved roof planes in 3D
Planes” layer by default, although you views can be controlled by adjusting the
can place a roof plane on any layer. See Facet Angle in the Roof Plane
“Line Style Tab” on page 411. Specification dialog. See “General Tab” on
page 393.
You can also choose to display frieze
molding, gutters, gable lines, the overhang
area, roof openings, valley truss bases and Display on Floor Above/Below
roof baseline polylines. See “Layer Display In floor plan view, roof planes
Options Dialog” on page 121. can display on any floor without
If the “Roof Planes” layer is turned off and affecting their height in 3D.
Auto Rebuld Roofs feature is turned on, To move the display of a roof plane to a new
changes made to the plan that cause the roof floor, select it in floor plan view and click
to rebuild will not automatically turn on the either the Display on Floor Above or
display of the roof planes. See “Rebuilding Display on Floor Below edit button. The
Roofs” on page 401. display of group-selected roof planes can
also be controlled in this manner.

Editing Roof Planes

A selected roof plane can be edited in 2D and edited roof planes and do not want them to be
3D using edit handles, edit toolbar buttons, replaced, be sure to check Retain Edited
the Roof Plane Specification dialog and the Roof Planes. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
Material Painter .
2D Shape and 3D Orientation
Roof planes cannot be edited while There are two basic aspects to editing roofs:
Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned on. If you 2D shape and 3D orientation.
try to do so, the program will prompt you to • The 2D shape of a roof plane can be
turn it off.
edited just like a CAD polyline. As a roof
plane is reshaped in 2D, the program
By default, all roof planes are deleted and maintains its height and pitch in 3D. See
replaced whenever the roof is rebuilt using “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects”
the Build Roof dialog. If you have manually on page 160.

387
CAFull_RM.book Page 388 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Roof Planes

• The 3D orientation of a roof plane is

defined by its height and pitch and can be If opposite sides of a roof plane are par-
edited in the Roof Plane Specification allel, Temporary Dimensions will display
dialog. See “General Tab” on page 393. between them when one side is selected.

An understanding of these two concepts Sometimes, what appears to be a single,

allows you to design almost any kind of roof. straight roof plane edge may actually be
A roof plane’s display and appearance can be broken into two or more edges, which can
customized. See “Displaying Roof Planes” affect your ability to align the edge properly.
on page 387 and “Roof Plane Specification A single edge will have three edit handles; if
Dialog” on page 392. more than three display, more than one edge
is present. An extra handle can be removed
Adding a Step to an Edge removed manually by dragging it into an
adjacent handle. You can also use Build>
You can make a step, or jog, in the edge of a
roof plane by selecting it, clicking the Break Roof> Fix Roofs . See “Fix Roofs” on
page 377.
Line edit button and then clicking on the
roof edge. See “Break Line” on page 184. When Bumping/Pushing is enabled and
CAD Stops Move is checked in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog, a roof plane will
bump against another roof plane, CAD or
CAD based object as it is moved. Roof
planes cannot push these objects, however.
See “Bumping/Pushing” on page 178.

Join Roof Planes

Two roof planes can be joined at
adjacent edges in both 2D and 3D
using the Join Roof Planes edit button. To
use this tool, you must first identify which
Aligning Roof Edges edges of the roof planes can extend to meet at
After moving a corner edit handle, it may be a ridge, hip, or valley. The program will try
difficult to make an edge parallel to an eave to join the two planes along the line where
or a wall. Use the Make Parallel/ they intersect whenever possible.
Perpendicular edit button to align a roof
To use Join Roof Planes
plane edge with a wall, another roof plane
edge, or another object with a straight edge. 1. Select a roof plane on the edge to be
See “Using Make Parallel/Perpendicular” on joined to another plane.
page 181.

388
CAFull_RM.book Page 389 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2. Click the Join Roof Planes edit but-

ton (or press 2 on the keyboard).
3. Click on a second roof plane on the edge
that should join to the selected edge of
the first plane.
If the roof planes are not close enough, or
their shape is not correct, you may need to
align their edges, remove extra edges, or roof plane
move them closer. intersections
When roof planes adjust, the program joins marked with
an “X”
the planes at the proper location and the
adjacent edges extend or contract to remain
connected. If the joining of the two will Aligning Eaves
completely eliminate or reverse an adjacent It is not uncommon for roof plans to feature
edge, the connection cannot be made. more than one pitch. In order for the eaves of
roof planes with different pitches to meet
Locating Intersections correctly at ridges and hips, you must control
When roof planes of differing slopes meet, the roof planes’ heights and their horizontal
they create a ridge, hip, or valley. While the overhang distances. Two options in the Build
Roof dialog allow you to control how the
Join Roof Planes edit button is normally eaves of automatically generated roof planes
used to move edges to make the planes meet, align. See “Build Tab” on page 378.
these edges can also be moved by placing
• Same Roof Height at Exterior Walls
snap points where the ridge, hip or valley
maintains the default height of roof
should be. Once you know where the planes
planes where they bear on exterior walls.
will meet, you can drag edges or corners to
The horizontal overhang distances of any
those points, joining the roof planes.
non-default roof planes are adjusted so
that they continue to join correctly with
To find a roof plane intersection
default roof planes.
1. Select the roof plane you would like to • Same Eave Heights maintains the
place meeting points on. default roof plane height at the eaves as
2. Click the edge of another roof plane to well as any non-default horizontal over-
project this edge forward in space and hang distances . All roof planes are raised
place an “X” where it would meet the or lowered so that they all have the same
selected roof plane. height at the eaves as default roof planes.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the ridge edge Roof planes that do not join other roof planes
and both fascia edges. You should have with different pitches at ridges or hips are
three points located on the larger roof referred to as Independent.
plane, the “tie-in” points.

389
CAFull_RM.book Page 390 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Roof Planes

• When Same Roof Height at Exterior planes displaying on the top floor up one
Walls is checked, Independent roof floor. See “Adding Floors” on page 355.
planes are not affected and will maintain
any non-default overhang values. Change Roof Pitch or
• When both Same Roof Height at Exte- Height Dialog
rior Walls and Same Eave Heights are
This warning dialog displays when you
checked, the overhangs of Independent
attempt to snap the corner or an edge of a
roof planes will be adjusted to preserve
roof plane near the edge of another roof
their heights at both the exterior walls
plane that does not match vertically. The
and the eaves.
Change Roof Pitch or Height dialog gives
you the option to move the roof plane
Move to be Coplanar vertically, or pivot it about a point and
The Move to be Coplanar edit button change the pitch.
allows you to move the selected roof In this case, the current roof plane would
plane to be coplanar (in the same plane) with have to raise its pitch or height in order to
the next selected roof plane. You can use this meet the second roof plane at the corner that
tool in both 2D and 3D views. The results you moved.
can be easily seen in a cross section view.
The two roof planes must have parallel
baselines for this to work.
1
Raising/Lowering
Roof Planes
2
Roof planes can be raised or lowered in the
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Begin by
locking the Pitch, then change the value of
the Baseline Height. See “General Tab” on 3
page 393. 4
6
5
You can open the specification dialog
for all roor planes in an entire plan by
selecting Build> Roof> Edit All Roof Planes. 1 The amount of vertical displacement
between the selected roof plane and
another nearby roof plane displays here.
You can also raise or lower roof planes in the
Transform/Replicate Object dialog. See Pivot Roof Plane About - Select
“Transform/Replicate Object Dialog” on
2
which part of the selected roof plane to
page 200. use as pivot point when its pitch is adjusted
to meet the other roof plane.
In addition, when a new floor is added to a
plan, you can choose to move any roof

390
CAFull_RM.book Page 391 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3 Raise/lower (no pivot) - Select this Birdsmouth Depth

option to maintain the current pitch and
raise or lower the entire plane to connect the The birdsmouth is the notch cut into a rafter
roofs. This may affect plate heights of the where it rests on the wall top plate. To
walls below. control its vertical depth, specify the desired
depth as a negative number for the Raise Off
4 To prevent this dialog from displaying, Plate value in the Build Roof dialog. See
check Don’t show again during this “Build Tab” on page 378.
session. The dialog does not display again
until you have terminated and restarted the There are two ways to create a roof plane
program. with no birdsmouth:
• Check Trusses (No Birdsmouth) in the
5 Click Yes to make the selected change Build Roof dialog before drawing the
so the roofs meet. The roof plane either
roof plane.
changes pitch or is raised or lowered.
• Specify a Raise Off Plate value of at
6 Click No to leave the roof plane least 1/16” in the Build Roof dialog.
unchanged. The roof planes will not
meet vertically. To change the birdsmouth depth after the
roof is built, you can move the roof planes up
or down, or change the pitch. For example, if
Unless you have a specific reason to you lock the pitch and raise the roof plane by
adjust the roof plane this way, it is one inch, you decrease the birdsmouth depth
usually best to select No. by one inch.

Changing the Locking Roof Planes

Baseline Angle
When the roof plan is correct, roof planes
A roof plane baseline can be selected like can be locked to prevent accidental changes.
any line and edited. If the baseline coincides The Build Roof dialog has a Lock Roof
with a roof edge then select that roof edge Planes check box to prevent accidental
and press the Tab key to select the baseline. editing or rebuilding. See “Build Tab” on
The Status Bar tells you when the roof plane page 378.
baseline is selected.
You can also protect roof planes from
accidental changes by locking the “Roof
If the roof plane baseline is moved in Planes” layer in all layer sets. See “Layer
floor plan view, its height does not Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
change. This means that moving a roof plane
baseline toward the ridge lowers its height Locking roof planes will not prevent roof
where it meets the bearing wall. planes from being deleted if the floor they
are on is deleted.
The baseline angle can be set in the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. See “General
Tab” on page 393.

391
CAFull_RM.book Page 392 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Plane Specification Dialog

Deleting Roof Planes key or click the Delete edit button to

There are several ways to delete roof planes. delete it from the plan. See “Deleting
Objects” on page 196.
Delete the entire roof quickly by
selecting Build> Roof> Delete Roof Generally speaking, roof planes cannot be
Planes. deleted if they are locked. An exception to
this rule occurs when an entire floor of a plan
You can also delete all roof planes at is deleted. Any roof planes present on a floor
once in the Delete Objects dialog. will be deleted when the floor is deleted,
See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 197. locked or not. See “Deleting Floors” on page
In addition, you can select any roof plane or 358.
group of roof planes, then press the Delete

Roof Plane Specification Dialog

Select one or more roof planes and click the You can also open this dialog for all roof
Open Object edit button to open the planes in the entire plan by selecting Build>
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Roof> Edit All Roof Planes .

392
CAFull_RM.book Page 393 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1 5

3 7

There are four values that define the 3D If you lock the Pitch and change a Height
orientation of a roof plane: Ridge/Top value, the roof plane moves vertically,
Height, Baseline Height, Fascia Top keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. For
Height and Pitch. a conversion to degrees, see “Roof Pitches in
Degrees” on page 426.
Locking any of the Height values defines
that value as the pivot point for the selected Changing these values does not affect the 2D
roof plane. Each of these dimensions is representation of the roof plane.
measured from the first floor default
elevation of 0' - 0".

393
CAFull_RM.book Page 394 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Plane Specification Dialog

1 Specify the Height of the selected roof 4 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth
plane(s). for the selected roof plane. The default
• Define the Ridge/Top height of the rafter depth is set in the Build Framing
selected roof plane, or lock this value to dialog. See “Build Framing Dialog” on page
make it the roof plane’s pivot point. 467.

• Define the Baseline height, or lock this 5 Information about the structure of the
value to make it the pivot point. selected roof plane(s) displays here for
reference.
• Definethe Fascia Top height, or lock this
value to make it the pivot point. • Birdsmouth Depth - The plumb or verti-
cal depth of the birdsmouth cut. To
2 Specify the Pitch for the selected roof change it, move the roof plane some way.
plane, or lock this value to move the For example, if you lock the pitch and
roof plane vertically when a Height value is raise the roof plane by one inch, you will
changed. decrease the birdsmouth depth by one
• Check Pitch in Degrees to display the inch. See “Birdsmouth Depth” on page
pitch value in this dialog in degrees. Val- 391.
ues between -80 and 80 degrees are • The Vertical Rafter Depth is defined by
acceptable. measuring a plumb line across the rafter.
The degree of pitch affects the Vertical
3 Set the Baseline angle. A positive rafter width. The greater the pitch, the
value causes the baseline to tilt upward
from its start point. A negative value causes greater the vertical rafter depth.
it to tilt downward. The wall top under this • Top of Plate is is defined by the ceiling
baseline will then tilt with it. height for the room.
The baseline height is specified at the start or • Overhang from Baseline is the horizon-
end of the baseline using the Start and End tal overhang measured from the baseline
radio buttons. In floor plan view, the baseline to the eave.
direction is clockwise around the house.
6 Mark as Edited - When an automatic
roof plane is moved or reshaped, the

394
CAFull_RM.book Page 395 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

program marks it as "edited". You can check Options Tab

Retain Edited Roof Planes in the Build
Roof dialog to prevent these marked planes The settings on the Options tab are the same
from being deleted when the roof is rebuilt. as those on the same tab of the Build Roof
Checking Mark as Edited also marks an dialog, but affect the selected roof plane
automatically generated roof plane, even if it only. See “Options Tab” on page 382.
has not been edited. Edited planes can also
be unmarked. Framing Tab
The settings on the Framing tab are the same
7 Curved Roof - Specify the selected as those on the Roof tab of the Build
roof plane as curved, then define the
curve by specifying the roof plane’s Angle at Framing dialog, but apply to the selected
eave, Angle at ridge and Radius to roof roof plane only. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
surface. See “Curved Roof Planes” on page
404. Rafter Tails Tab
• These three values are interrelated - when The settings on the Rafter Tails tab are the
one is changed, the other two adjust same as those on the same tab of the Build
accordingly. You may find it helpful to Roof dialog, but affect the selected roof
first specify the Radius value, then the plane only. See “Rafter Tails Tab” on page
Angle values. 383.
A flat roof plane with a pitch of 0 has angles
of 0 at both the ridge and eave, as well as a Frieze Tab
radius of 0. The settings on the Frieze tab allow you to
• Uncheck Automatic Facet Angle to specify a frieze molding profile. The settings
specify the Facet Angle, which is the on this tab are like those on the Moldings tab
angle at which curved roof surfaces are found in many dialogs in the program. See
broken in 3D views. The default value is “Moldings Tab” on page 540.
7.5°; a smaller value produces a smoother
curve while a larger value may generate Polyline Tab
more quickly in 3D.
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
The Facet Angle value must divide into roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
360° evenly; if it does not, the program its Volume.
will choose the nearest value that does.
Selected LineTab
8 Click the Num Style/Angle Style The Selected Line tab is similar to the Line
button to change the way numbers
display in the dialog. See “Number Style/ tab of the Line Specification dialog. See
Angle Style Dialog” on page 917. “Line Tab” on page 888.

395
CAFull_RM.book Page 396 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Automatic Roofs

Line Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see The settings on the Materials tab allow you
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. to specify materials for the selected roof
plane’s various components. For more
Fill Style Tab information, see “Materials Tab” on page
709.
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Automatic Roofs
When roofs are automatically generated, a roof), you can change the settings in the Wall
roof plane is created over each exterior wall Specification dialog. See “Wall
by default, resulting in a hip roof. Specification Dialog” on page 249.
To automatically generate a roof plane using For more information about creating
values other than the defaults or to not different roof styles, see “Roof Tutorial” on
generate a roof plane bearing on a particular page 191 of the User’s Guide.
wall (as with a gable or the sides of a shed

396
CAFull_RM.book Page 397 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Wall Specification Dialog - Roof Tab

1
2

4
5

1 An automatically generated roof style Knee walls are usually found next to top
other than a hip requires one of the floor Attic room areas.
Options to be checked.
• Check Full Gable Wall to create a gable Extend Slope Downward
with a ridge centered above the selected • Check Extend Slope Downward to
wall(s). extend the roof plane downward over a
• Check High Shed/Gable Wall for the bumpout, instead of creating additional
wall under the high side of a shed roof. It roof planes. The two connecting walls
can produce ridges, but it may also be that create the bumpout must be Full
used for gable ends that have a raked Gable walls.
wall. In the following bottom image, the outer
• Check Knee Wall to define an interior bumpout wall has the Extend Slope Down-
wall whose height is defined by the roof ward check box selected. The two short side
plane above it, not the ceiling height. walls are Full Gable Walls.

397
CAFull_RM.book Page 398 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Automatic Roofs

Full Gable
Wall

Before After
Extend Slope
Downward
• Check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom to • Starts at - Specify either the Height or
have the bottom of the selected wall the distance in from Baseline where the
clipped by the roof plane below, as where second roof plane begins.
a floating dormer wall meets the main
roof plane. To determine either of these values in an
elevation view
Pitch
1. Create the model.
Any exterior wall can define the pitch
2 2. Generate the roof using only the first
of the roof plane built above it. pitch. Be sure to define all the roof infor-
If the Pitch value is followed by a [D], the mation for each wall (gable, hip, first
value is the default pitch as set in the Build pitch, etc.).
Roof dialog. The minimum pitch is ¼” in 3. Create a cross section view of the house
12” or 20 mm in 1000 mm. that includes the roof plane that will
• Pitch - Specify the pitch for the roof have the second pitch. See “Cross Sec-
plane above this wall if different from the tion/Elevation Views” on page 752
default roof pitch set in the Build Roof 4. Using the CAD tools, place a temporary
dialog. If a roof plane is specified with point near the location where you want
two pitches, this field controls the pitch the second pitch to start.
of the lower roof plane.
• Using the End-to-End Dimension
• Upper Pitch - Check this to define the tool, drag a dimension line from the
pitch for a second roof plane above this first floor 0'-0" to the temporary point.
wall. Mansard, gambrel, gull wing and
half-hip are examples of roof styles that • Using the End-to-End Dimension
use two pitches. tool, drag a dimension line from the
baseline to the vertical plane of the
temporary point.

398
CAFull_RM.book Page 399 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3 Overhang - Specify the overhang of

the roof plane to be generated above the
selected wall. This setting only takes effect
when Same Height at Exterior Walls is
unchecked in the the Build Roof dialog,
which is also where the default Overhang
value is set. See “Build Tab” on page 378.

4 Lower Wall Type If Split By Butting

Roof - Designate a wall to be split into
5. Enter either of these values in the Wall a pony wall. It is split by roof planes that
Specification dialog. You can press the abut its outside surface. The upper portion
Tab key to update the other value. Click retains the same type. This is defined on the
OK to close the dialog. Wall Types tab of the Wall Specification
dialog, and the lower portion specified here.
See “Wall Types Tab” on page 256.

5 Check Auto Roof Return to generate

roof returns on the selected wall. In
most cases, roof returns only generate on
Full Gable Walls.
• Specify the roof return’s horizontal
Length.
• Enter a value to Extend the roof returns
6. Open the Build Roof dialog, check from the overhang.
Build Roof Planes and click OK to • Specify a Gable, Hip, or Full roof return
rebuild the roof. and whether the roof return is Sloping or
Flat. See “Roof Returns” on page 423.
• Check the boxes to Include Frieze mold-
ing and/or Include Gutter along eave
edges.

Curved Walls and Roofs

Automatically generated roof planes are
placed over curved walls at specified
increments. In the Build Roof dialog, you
Note: You can control how the roof over a can specify the degree increments for the
bay, box or bow window is build in the win- roof over curved walls, from 6 to 90 degrees.
dow’s specification dialog. See “Bay/Box The lower the number, the more roof sections
Window Specification Dialog” on page 349. are created over the curved wall.

399
CAFull_RM.book Page 400 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Automatic Roofs

The following illustrations show a roof

created at two different curved increments:
30 degrees and 15 degrees.

Concave Curved Walls & Roofs

Concave curved walls can produce roof
planes that follow them. If the concave area
is too small, simpler roof planes are pro-
duced. To follow the curved wall, the section
baselines must be longer than the Min.
Alcove value on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog. If baselines are shorter, the
automatically generated roofs are simplified
by either:

1. Ignoring the curved wall, as if the walls

on either side extended to their meeting
point and the roof was produced.
2. Spanning the concave curved wall with
a straight baseline and produce a roof
plane for it from that.

400
CAFull_RM.book Page 401 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Changes made to floor heights, ceiling

heights, or floor or ceiling platform
thicknesses will also cause the roof to be
automatically rebuilt.
When the roof is rebuilt using Auto Rebuild
Roof or Build Roof Planes in the Build
Roof dialog, all roof planes in the plan, both
automatically generated and manually
drawn, are deleted and replaced.
• To preserve any manually drawn roof
planes, check Retain Manually Drawn
Roof Planes on the Build tab of the Build
Roof dialog before the roof is rebuilt.

Rebuilding Roofs • To preserve any automatically generated

roof planes that you have edited, check
By default, when changes are made to the Retain Edited Roof Planes on the Build
model, the roof does not update to reflect tab of the Build Roof dialog before the
these changes. This is the case even if the roof is rebuilt.
roof was automatically built.
Roof planes cannot be edited or manually
When Auto Rebuild Roofs is checked in the drawn when Auto Rebuild Roofs is turned
Build Roofs dialog, on the other hand, any on. If you try to either edit or draw a roof
changes made to the position of an exterior
plane using the Roof Plane tool, a
wall or to its roof directives will prompt the
warning message will display.
roof to regenerate to reflect these changes.
See “Build Tab” on page 378.

Roof Baseline Polylines

Typically, the program builds an automatic To create roof baseline polylines
roof based on the settings in the Build Roof
dialog and on the Roof tab of the Wall 1. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof .
Specification dialog, along with the layout
2. On the Build tab of the Build Roof
of the exterior walls and floor and ceiling dialog, check Make Roof Baseline
heights. Polylines.
If you want to build a roof that diverges from 3. Click OK. A set of roof baselines is cre-
the footprint of your building as well as the ated along the outside edge of the Main
roof directives in the exterior walls, you can Layer of the exterior walls, forming one
use Roof Baseline Polylines. or more closed polylines.

401
CAFull_RM.book Page 402 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Baseline Polylines

As with roof planes, the heights of Roof Roof Baseline Polylines always form a
Baseline Polylines are determined by ceiling closed area with straight sides only. They
heights in the plan. If roof planes will be cannot be severed or curved, but additional
built at more than one height, a separate joints or corners can be added.
baseline polyline is created for each height.
When a new roof is built, it follows the shape
Once created, a Roof Baseline Polyline can of the Roof Baseline Polyline even if that
be edited in a variety of ways, then used as shape does not follow the exterior walls.
the basis for the roof then next time it is built
In addition to length and direction, each Roof
automatically.
Baseline Polyline edge has roof directives
To create a new roof using the directives in associated with it, much like the roof
your Roof Baseline Polyline(s), check Use directives in individual walls. See “Wall
Existing Roof Baselines in the Build Roof Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
dialog and click OK. See “Build Tab” on 397.
page 378.
An Example
Displaying Roof
For a simple example of roof plane baseline
Baseline Polylines editing, consider an L-shaped house, with a
Roof Baseline Polylines are placed on the rectangular roof. The inner part of the ’L’ is a
Roofs, Baseline Polylines layer by default patio that is covered under the same roof.
and can display in floor plan view only. See
“Displaying Objects” on page 117.
Roof directive information displays along
each edge of the polyline, including:
• The pitch along that edge, or
• V - vertical (against wall)
• G -gable/shed
• K - knee wall
• L - lower (extend slope downward).
On the left is the roof plane baseline as it was
Editing Roof originally produced and the roof plan it
Baseline Polylines creates.

A Roof Baseline Polyline’s shape can be To model the roof plan shown on the right
edited much like a CAD polyline using its
edit handles and edit toolbar buttons. See 1. Select the Roof Baseline Polyline along
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on its bottom-most edge.
page 160.

402
CAFull_RM.book Page 403 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2. Click the Fillet Two Lines edit but- (those on the inside of the L) to join the
ton. See “Reshaping Objects” on page two selected lines.” Click OK.
184. 5. Open the Build Roof dialog and select
3. Click the left-most edge to remove the the Build Roof Planes and Use Existing
two intervening edges. Roof Baseline check boxes to model the
roof plan shown on the right side of the
4. A message box informs you that “The image above.
system must delete intervening lines

Roof Baseline Specification Dialog

Like walls, each line of a roof baseline Select any edge of a roof baseline polyline
polyline contains roof directives that affect click the Open Object edit button open
automatic roof generation. the Roof Baseline Specification dialog.

Roof Baseline Tab

1
2

1 Options - wall. This is similar to checking High Shed/

Gable Wall.
The first four checkboxes, Full Gable Wall,
2 Specify the Pitch for the selected edge
High Shed/Gable Wall, Knee Wall, and of the Roof Baseline Polyline. This
Extend Slope Downward are the same as overrides the default pitch set in the Build
those in the Wall Specification dialog. See Roof dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
“Wall Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page 377.
page 397.
The Pitch, 2nd Pitch and Starts at entries are
Check Against Wall if the roof plane rising the same those in the Wall Specification
from this baseline butts against an exterior dialog.

403
CAFull_RM.book Page 404 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Curved Roof Planes

3 Baseline height - This is the height of Selected LineTab

the entire Roof Baseline Polyline, not
just that of the selected edge. See “The This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
Baseline” on page 386. Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
page 888.
Polyline Tab
Line Style Tab
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and For information about the Line Style tab, see
its Volume. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Curved Roof Planes

Any roof plane can be turned into a curved and a cross section/elevation view may
roof plane in the Roof Plane Specification be helpful.
dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
Dialog” on page 392.
One way to produce a barrel roof is using a
single roof plane that starts out flat (zero
pitch) and covers the entire building.

Curving a Single Roof Plane

4 in 12 pitch Shed roof
To curve a roof plane
2. Select the roof plane in floor plan view
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x
24', set three of the walls as High/Shed and click the Open Object edit but-
Gable walls on the Roof tab of the Wall ton to open the Roof Plane
Specification dialog for that roof plane.
Specification dialog and automatically
generate a roof. The initial pitch does 3. Change the Pitch from 4 in 12 to 0 in 12
not matter. Tiling the floor plan view to flatten the roof.

404
CAFull_RM.book Page 405 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4. On the General tab, check Curved

Roof. Notice that the angle values are
currently at zero.
5. Change the Angle at eave from zero to 7. Change the Radius to roof surface to a
15 and press the Tab key. Notice that the smaller number, such as 50.
other values update. All three values are
interrelated and dynamic. Changing one
changes the others. In order to maintain
the underlying 0 in 12 pitch (the chord
of the curved roof), the other end of the
roof plane must compensate.

A radius of 50 could not be achieved unless

the walls were closer together. The curved
roof plane accepts the minimum radius,
6. Change the Angle at Ridge from -15 which in this case is 116.5.
degrees to -45 degrees.
Curving Two Roof Planes
You can also create a barrel roof using two
roof planes. We’ll use the same basic 24' x
18' plan we used before, designate the two
opposite walls as gable walls, and generate a
gable with a 12 in 12 (45 degree) pitch. The
12 in 12 pitch often underlies curved roofs

405
CAFull_RM.book Page 406 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Curved Roof Planes

because it allows the curved roof to be nearly

vertical at the eave and nearly flat at its peak.

To curve two roof planes

1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x

24', set the two end walls as Gable
Walls, and automatically generate a roof
at a 12 in 12 pitch.

5. In floor plan view, select both roof

planes and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Roof Plane
2. Select one of the roof planes and click Specification dialog.

the Open Object edit button to open 6. Set the Angle at ridge to 0 and click
the Roof Plane Specification dialog. OK.
3. Check Curved Roof and notice that the
Angle values are the same.
4. Change the Angle at ridge from 45 to 0.
This makes the roof plane nearly flat at
the ridge. The Angle At Eave will
update to maintain the 12 in 12 pitch.
Notice that the program changed the Angle at
Ridge from 0 to 1 so that the eave does not
become vertical at 90°. Curved roofs are not Similar results can be achieved using two
allowed to be vertical or inverted. roof planes instead of one. Because the
curvature can be set independently for each
roof plane, using two roof planes allows
more variation.

406
CAFull_RM.book Page 407 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Compound Curved the same as 8 in 12. Notice that the

Roof Planes Angle at Eave is almost flat.

Compound curves can be created using two

or more curved roof planes or a combination
of straight and curved roof planes. To
illustrate this, we’ll produce a flared Asian
style roof eave that is almost flat at the eave
edge and merges into an 8 in 12 pitch roof.
Before curving roof planes or joining the
edges of any curved plane, make sure all flat
roof planes are joined as well as possible.
After this you can curve the roof planes and
then make any curved join edges.
4. To create the high roof plane, use the
To create a compound curved roof
Roof Plane tool and draw the base-
1. Draw a simple four wall structure 18' x line of the roof plane along the top, or
24', set the two end walls as Gable ridge edge of the curved roof plane in
Walls, and automatically generate a roof floor plan view. The bottom edge of the
at a 4 in 12 pitch. new roof plane snaps to the top of the
2. Turn on Display Temporary Dimen- curved plane.
sions , select one of the roof planes 5. Select the two new roof planes, open
in floor plan view at its ridge edge and them for specification and change their
pull it back so that it is 4 feet from the pitch to 33.6901. Viewed in 3D, the
wall. Do the same to the other roof planes appear to join together into one.
plane.

3. Select both roof planes in floor plan Upper roof planes with pitch set (using
view and check Curved Roof in the degrees) to match the ridge edge pitch
Roof Plane Specification dialog. Set of the lower curved roof planes
the Angle at Ridge to 33.6901, which is

407
CAFull_RM.book Page 408 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Ceiling Planes

Ceiling Planes
Ceiling planes are drawn the same unchecked in the Room Specification
way as roof planes and are edited dialog. See “Structure Tab” on page 286.
using the same tools. They are useful for • The baseline of a ceiling plane should be
creating custom vaulted ceilings. drawn along the outer surface of the bear-
ing wall’s Main Layer. This allows the
ceiling plane to extend over and be sup-
ported by the wall. See “The Main
Layer” on page 242.
• The sloping edge at the side of a ceiling
plane should butt to the inside of the wall.
• Ceiling planes act independent of the roof
planes above.
Ceiling planes • Usually, the pitch of a ceiling plane is
lower than the pitch of the corresponding
roof plane.
• Ceiling planes can be joined together
using the Join Roof Planes edit but-
ton. See “Join Roof Planes” on page 388.
• Select a ceiling plane and click the Open

Cross Section showing ceiling planes. Object edit button to open the
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. See
Ceiling planes are drawn using the same “Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog” on
pitch as roof planes, specified in the Build page 409.
Roof dialog. See “Build Roof Dialog” on
page 377. Displaying Ceiling Planes
If you wish, you can specify the desired pitch Ceiling planes have their own layer in the
in the Build Roof dialog before drawing a Layer Display Options dialog, although
ceiling plane, or you can change the pitch once created, they can be placed on any
after it is drawn in the Ceiling Plane layer. See “Displaying Objects” on page 117.
Specification dialog. See “Ceiling Plane
Specification Dialog” on page 409. Editing Ceiling Planes
There are a few things to remember when Ceiling planes can be edited much like roof
drawing ceiling planes. planes using their edit handles and edit
• Ceiling planes should be created over toolbar buttons. See “Editing Roof Planes”
rooms that have Ceiling Over this Room on page 387.

408
CAFull_RM.book Page 409 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Ceiling planes can also be edited in the Ceiling planes can also be deleted at
Ceiling Plane Specification dialog. once in the Delete Objects dialog.
See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page 197.
As with roof planes, the ceiling planes layer
can be locked to prevent editing. In addition, you can select any ceiling plane
or group of ceiling planes, then press the
Deleting Ceiling Planes Delete key or click the Delete edit button
Select Build> Roof> Delete Ceiling Planes to delete it from the plan. See “Deleting
to delete all ceiling planes in the current plan. Objects” on page 196.

Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

Select a ceiling plane and click the Open The Ceiling Plane Specification dialog is
Object edit button to open the Ceiling similar to the Roof Plane Specification
Plane Specification dialog.
dialog. See “Roof Plane Specification
Dialog” on page 392.

409
CAFull_RM.book Page 410 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Ceiling Plane Specification Dialog

General Tab

5
1
6

There are four values that define the 3D

1 Specify the Height of the ceiling plane.
orientation of a ceiling plane: Bottom at
Ridge, Inside Bottom, Outside Bottom and • Bottom at ridge - Set the highest point
Pitch. on the underside of the ceiling plane.
Locking any of the Height values defines • Inside Bottom - Set the underside height
that value as the pivot point for the selected at the lowest point on the ceiling plane. If
ceiling plane. Each of these dimensions is the plane is drawn over a wall, this is
measured from the first floor default located at the inside surface of the wall’s
elevation of 0' - 0". Main Layer.
If you lock the Pitch and change a Height • Outside Bottom - Only available when a
value, the ceiling plane moves vertically, ceiling plane is drawn over a wall, this is
keeping the same slope. It will not pivot. the height of the lower edge of the ceiling
rafters, were they not clipped by the wall
Changing these values does not affect the 2D
below.
representation of the ceiling plane.

410
CAFull_RM.book Page 411 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2 Specify the Pitch of the selected ceiling Main Layer surface of the wall. The base-
plane. For a conversion to degrees, see line is typically drawn over the outside
“Roof Pitches in Degrees” on page 426. Main Layer surface, so this value is equal
• Check Pitch in degrees to display the to the wall’s Main Layer thickness.
Pitch value in degrees. • Clip End - Only appearing when a ceil-
ing plane is drawn over a bearing wall,
3 Curved Roof - Specify the selected this is the amount a ceiling rafter’s under-
ceiling plane as curved, then define the
side must be clipped at its lower end to
curve by specifying the ceiling plane’s Angle
rest on the wall top plate. This is equal to
at eave, Angle at ridge and Radius to roof
the ceiling plane’s rise in slope over the
surface.
distance of the Overhang from inside
These three values are interrelated - when bottom.
one is changed, the other two adjust accord-
ingly. You may find it helpful to first specify The Outside Bottom value plus the Clip
the Radius value, then the Angle values. end value equals the Top of Plate value.
A flat ceiling plane with a pitch of 0 has
6 Specify the Ceiling Thickness, which
angles of 0 at both the ridge and “eave”, as is the thickness of the bottom surface of
well as a radius of 0. the ceiling plane.

4 Rafter Depth - Specify the rafter depth 7 Click the Num Style/Angle Style
for the selected ceiling plane. The button to change the way numbers
default rafter depth is the same as that for display in the dialog. See “Number Style/
roof planes and is set in the Build Framing Angle Style Dialog” on page 917.
dialog. See “Build Framing Dialog” on page
467. Polyline Tab
5 Information about the selected ceiling The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
plane’s structure displays here for roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
reference. its Volume.
• Vertical Rafter Depth - This is defined
by measuring a plumb line through a raf- Selected LineTab
ter. The greater the pitch, the greater the
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
vertical rafter depth.
Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
• Top of Plate - This is the top plate height page 888.
of the bearing wall, which also defines
the ceiling height of the room. Line Style Tab
• Overhang from inside bottom - Only
For information about the Line Style tab, see
appearing when a ceiling plane is drawn
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.
over a bearing wall, this is the horizontal
distance from the baseline to the inside

411
CAFull_RM.book Page 412 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Gable/Roof Line

Fill Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902. “Materials Tab” on page 709.

Gable/Roof Line
The Gable/Roof Line tool can be To create a Gable/Roof Line
used to create a gable above the
bearing wall of a hip roof plane. 1. Select Build> Roof> Gable/Roof
Line , then click and drag to draw a
This tool can be helpful when you want to
line outside of the exterior wall that you
maintain a roof plane baseline where there is
want to create a gable over.
no wall below, such as across the front of an
alcove. 2. Position the Gable/Roof Line within 10
feet (2260 mm) of the wall’s Main
You can also create a Gable/Roof Line using Layer.
the Gable Over Door/Window edit • Make sure that the Gable/Roof Line is
button. See “Gable Over Door/Window” on exactly parallel to the exterior wall.
page 423.
3. Resize the Gable/Roof Line so that it is
Gable/Roof Lines can be selected and edited the length of the desired gable.
much like regular CAD lines. See “Editing • The length of the Gable/Roof Line
Line Based Objects” on page 147. determines the gable width at the wall
If an entire wall supports a gable, the wall Main Layer, not at the overhang.
should be defined as a Full Gable Wall in • At the larger roof eave, a gable roof is
the Wall Specification dialog. See “Wall wider than the gable line by twice the
Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page overhang distance.
397.
4. Select Build> Roof> Build Roof
and regenerate the roof. See “Build Roof
Dialog” on page 377.

412
CAFull_RM.book Page 413 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Before, with default roof generation

A Gable/Roof Line drawn across the

alcove causes roof planes to span across the
alcove when roofs are automatically
generated.

Result, after automatic roof generation

Covering Alcoves
A Gable/Roof Line can also be used to
maintain a roof plane baseline where there is
no wall below. For example, a house may Gable/roof lines drawn to extend roof planes
have a large alcove and you want the roof The program models a hip in that area. When
plane to extend across the alcove, rather than extending roof planes across alcoves, the
wrap into it. gable/roof line must be drawn inline with the
wall’s main layer.

413
CAFull_RM.book Page 414 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Skylights

Gable/roof line extends past end of side wall

Result, after automatic roof generation If the line is drawn along or in front of the
Main Layer of the bay’s outer wall, the
Covering a Bay resulting gable will extend only to the eave
of the larger roof. Draw the line beyond the
A Gable/Roof Line drawn across a bay bay’s outer wall to extend out to cover the
causes a gable to be build above the bay bay.
when roofs are automatically generated.

Gable/roof line used to create a gable over a bay Gable/roof line drawn beyond outer wall of
bay results in gable extending to cover bay
In order for the gable to be built, at least one
end of the gable/roof line must extend past
the side walls of the bay.

Skylights
A skylight can be created by selecting The Skylight tool places a flat panel
Build> Roof> Skylight and drawing a skylight into a roof hole, produces a hole in
rectangular polyline within a single roof the ceiling platform below, and automatically
plane. You can also simply click once within generates the skylight shaft between these
a roof plane to place a 2’ x 2’ skylight. two holes.

414
CAFull_RM.book Page 415 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To place a skylight in a vaulted ceiling, Editing Skylights

uncheck Ceiling Over This Room in the
Room Specification dialog, draw the ceiling Skylights can be selected individually or in
planes to produce the vault and edit them as groups. Once selected, skylights can be
needed, and then draw the skylight. See edited using the edit handles, edit toolbar
“Structure Tab” on page 286. buttons, or the Roof Hole/Skylight
Specification dialog. See “Roof Hole/
Skylight Specification Dialog” on page 416.
Note: If a sloped ceiling plane is present
under the skylight, a hole in this ceiling plane Skylights must remain contained by a single
is automatically produced. This hole is visible, roof plane. If the roof plane is deleted, any
and may be located directly under the roof skylights or holes it contains are also deleted.
hole. It can be moved and edited separately. Aside from this restriction, skylights can be
edited much like standard closed polylines.
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Objects” on page 160.
If you clear the Skylight check box in the
Roof Hole/Skylight Specification dialog,
the curb and glass for the skylight is removed
but the opening remains.
By default, the flat ceiling hole does not
display separately; but it can be edited
separately, and even deleted entirely. See
“Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog”
on page 416.

415
CAFull_RM.book Page 416 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

Roof Hole/Skylight Specification Dialog

General Tab

1
2

1 Check Skylight to specify this polyline • Plumb Sides - The framing for the sky-
as a skylight. If unchecked, the curb light is plumb-cut.
and glass for the skylight are removed but the • Plumb/Square - The bottom edge is
opening remains. plumb-cut, the top edge square-cut.
12 Skylight Frame Width and Height - 4 Specify how the selected skylight/roof
Define the width and height of the hole’s Ceiling Hole should be built.
frame or curb of the skylight. These options are only available if the room
below has a default ceiling specified in the
3 Angle for Inside Hole Rim - Defines Room Specification dialog. See “Structure
the shape of the skylight well where it
passes through the roof plane. Tab” on page 286.
• Square Sides - The framing for the sky- • Select Skylight Automatically Gener-
light is cut square to the pitch of the roof. ates Ceiling Hole to automatically gener-

416
CAFull_RM.book Page 417 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

ate and maintain the skylight hole in a flat Polyline Tab

ceiling. This option is the selected for
skylights in valuted ceilings. The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
roof plane’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
its Volume.
Note: Holes automatically produced in a
sloping custom ceiling plane by a new sky-
light must be manually maintained.
Selected LineTab
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
• Select Manually Edit Ceiling Hole Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
Polyline to edit the flat ceiling hole page 888.
polyline manually. Click OK to return to
floor plan view and edit the ceiling hole Line Style Tab
polyline. When this option is selected, the
ceiling hole polyline and the skylight can For information about the Line Style tab, see
be selected separately in floor plan view. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
• Select Do not generate ceiling hole to
generate a hole through the roof plane but Fill Style Tab
not the ceiling. For information about the Fill Style tab, see
• Uncheck Generate shaft to ceiling hole “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
to generate a roof hole and a ceiling hole,
but no vertical surfaces connecting them. Materials Tab
When checked, a shaft between the two is
For information about the Materials tab, see
produced. Not available if Do not gener-
“Materials Tab” on page 709.
ate ceiling hole is selected.

Dormers
Dormers can be drawn manually • Automatic Dormer side walls cannot be
or placed automatically using the positioned above other walls in the plan.
Auto Dormer tools.
If you click within a roof plane to place an
Automatic Dormers can be placed only automatic dormer, but click too close to an
under certain conditions: eave or the ridge, a dormer will not be
• Automatic Dormers can only be placed created; however, its outline will. Move this
entirely within a single roof plane. They outline box to a location that meets the
cannot extend past the eaves or ridge of dormer’s requirements and it will be created.
this roof plane. Automatic dormers reside by default on their
own layer, “Auto Dormers”. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 121.

417
CAFull_RM.book Page 418 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Dormers

Auto Floating Dormer within this roof plane in floor plan view to
create the dormer. Normally it does not
Select Build> Roof> Auto Floating matter what floor the dormer is on, but it may
Dormer and click the roof plane need to be on a certain floor so that the
where you would like to place the center of dormer walls do not interfere with walls or
the dormer's front wall. railings in the room below it. To do this, it
The bottom edges of all floating dormer may help to display the underlying roof plane
walls are cut off by the underlying roof on the appropriate floor using the Roof
plane. To produce such a dormer manually, Plane Specification dialog. See “Roof Plane
check Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom for the Specification Dialog” on page 392.
dormer walls on the Roof tab of the Wall If the dormer is defined on the floor above
Specification dialog. and the room below has a flat ceiling, then
Usually no room is defined by the walls of defining a room, which is automatically
this type of dormer. The images below show Open Below, causes a hole to be produced in
both the outside and inside of a typical the ceiling under the dormer.
floating dormer.
Auto Dormer
Select Build> Roof> Auto Dormer
and click on a roof plane where you
want the center of the dormer's front wall to
be.
The walls of an auto dormer go to the floor
and meet a knee wall on either side on the
back of the dormer. This knee wall must run
parallel to the underlying roof plane.
• If you are creating a (non-floating) auto
dormer, a knee wall must already exist.
The dormer side walls run back to the
knee wall and the knee wall is broken
where the dormer walls meet it.
• The knee wall does not have to be desig-
nated as such on the Roof tab of the Wall
A floating dormer can be placed in floor plan Specification dialog unless you are gen-
view on the same floor where its underlying erating an automatic roof.
roof plane displays, or it can be placed on the
• A non-floating dormer must always be
floor above. Which floor it should be on does
created on the same floor as the knee
not depend on which floor the underlying
walls.
roof plane is on, but you must always click

418
CAFull_RM.book Page 419 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Manually Drawn Dormers

Once you are familiar with Chief Architect’s
roof tools, drawing dormers manually can be
quite simple. There are several different
ways to draw dormers; some methods work
better in certain applications.
A variety of resources is available at
www.chiefarchitect.com with information
about drawing dormers manually. See, too,
“Manually Drawn Dormers” on page 207 of
the User’s Guide.
There are a few things to keep in mind.
• Walls extend upward until they meet an
overlying roof plane.
• A wall can also be cut by underlying roof
planes if Roof Cuts Wall at Bottom is
checked in the Wall Specification dialog.
For this to work properly, the edge of the
roof plane must extend completely
through the width of the wall. See “Wall
Specification Dialog - Roof Tab” on page
The initial width, height, roof style and other 397.
settings of Auto Dormers are set in the
• Polylines can be converted into a Hole in
Dormer Defaults dialog. See “Dormer
Roof/Ceiling that allows walls to extend
Defaults” on page 375.
above or below the roof line. See “Con-
vert Polyline Dialog” on page 206.

Editing Auto Dormers

Auto Dormers are a collection of objects that Using the Mouse
behave as one. When a dormer is selected, it
can be edited using its edit handles, edit When selected, an auto dormer displays three
tools, and specification dialog. See “Dormer edit handles. The Move handle displays over
Specification Dialog” on page 420. the front wall and allows you to relocate the
dormer. Two resize handles display on the
If you click the Explode Dormer edit side walls and allow you to change the width
button, the dormer’s individual components of the dormer.
can be edited.

419
CAFull_RM.book Page 420 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Dormer Specification Dialog

See “Editing Windows” on page 326. You

can place several windows in the front wall.
Unless the dormer's window has been edited
or changed in the Window Specification
dialog, when the dormer width is changed, its
width changes automatically to fill the front
Move Resize dormer wall. If the window has been edited,
its width stays fixed. If a change to the
There are some things to keep in mind when dormer makes its front wall too short to hold
editing auto dormers and auto floating the window, the window reverts to auto
dormers using the mouse. width.
• Dormers move at 90 degree angles unless
the Ctrl key is pressed before moving Exploding Dormers
them.
Click the Explode Auto Dormer edit
• The dormer must be contained within one button to explode the auto dormer into
underlying roof plane. its component parts. The dormer walls, roof
• Auto dormers cannot be moved beyond planes, window, and hole in the roof/ceiling
the required knee wall. can be edited individually.
The program treats roof planes over an
Editing the Window exploded anto dormer as though they were
Dormer windows can be selected, edited, manually drawn, allowing you to protect
deleted and replaced just like other windows. them from being rebuilt in the Build Roof
dialog. See “Build Tab” on page 378.

Dormer Specification Dialog

Select a dormer or dormers and click the The settings in the Dormer Defaults dialog
Open Object edit button to open the are much like those in the Dormer
Specification dialog, but apply to all
Dormer Specification dialog.
dormers as they are created rather than to a
selected dormer.

420
CAFull_RM.book Page 421 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1 6
2
7
3
8
9
4 10
11

1 Specify the Roof Type above this Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel,
dormer. You can choose from Hip, Curved Eave, Hip Curved Eave or Eyebrow.

Hip, Gable, Shed, Gambrel, Mansard, Barrel, Curved Eave,

Hip Curved Eave, and Eyebrow dormer roof types

2 Specify the Pitch of the dormer roof Initially, the default dormer pitch matches the
planes. roof pitch for all dormer roof types except

421
CAFull_RM.book Page 422 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Dormer Specification Dialog

Shed, which has a default 3 in 12 pitch. For flat. The top dormer window casing is
Gambrel and Mansard types, this applies to usually close to this height.
the lowest, or eave, roof planes.
Unlike other dormer types, shed dormer
Check Pitch in Degrees to display the pitch height is measured from the same bottom
in degrees. point to where the underside of the dormer
rafter meets the dormer front wall interior.
3 The Second Pitch specifies the upper • Check Set to Existing Ceiling to assign
roof of a Gambrel, Mansard, curved
eave, and hip curved eave. Specify the the ceiling height of the room behind the
Distance In from the lower roof plane eave dormer to the dormer.
to where the upper roof plane starts. • Height to Reach Existing shows the dif-
ference between the dormer height where
4 Plumb or Square cut eaves can be the inside of the wall meets the underside
specified for dormer roof planes, as
well as Gutters and Boxed Eaves. of the roof and the ceiling of the room
behind it.
Check Include Frieze to include frieze
boards on this dormer. 8 Width is measured between the outside
surfaces of the dormer side walls.
5 Overhang, Fascia Depth for gable
fascia, Eave Fascia Depth and Rafter 9 Form Room Inside Dormer is used
Depth can also be set. only for floating dormers and creates a
flat ceiling in the dormer. If you check this
6 The Wall Type for the dormer walls is option, you should define the dormer on the
set here. floor above the room it is positioned over. If
this room has a flat ceiling, checking this
7 Specify the Height of the dormer, as option makes a hole in the ceiling under the
measured from where the top of the
underlying roof plane meets the dormer front dormer. This option should normally be left
wall exterior to where the underside of the unchecked.
dormer rafter meets the dormer side wall
interior. 10 If Set Inside Window Trim Width is
checked, the inside casing width for
dormer windows defaults to the Inside
Window value entered below. Dormer
windows can appear too narrow on the
outside due to the space required for the
Dormer inside casing to clear the inside surfaces of
height
the side walls. This value sets the width for
the inside casing of the dormer window.
Dashed line indicates
interior dormer side wall. 11 Roof Returns can be specified only for
gable dormers. See “Roof Returns” on
This top height is called the dormer ceiling page 423.
height, even if the ceiling in the dormer is not

422
CAFull_RM.book Page 423 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Roof Returns and other Details

Chief Architect provides a selection of tools
to add details to your roof design.

Roof Returns
A roof return is a small decorative roof plane
that connects to the low side of a gable roof
overhang and extends below the upper
triangular portion of the gable wall. There Full Return
are three styles of roof returns that can be
produced automatically. It is not difficult to manually draw roof
returns using small roof planes, but it is
The first two styles are called Gable and Hip
quicker to produce them automatically.
returns since the return ends in a gable or hip.
The settings that generate auto roof returns
are found in the Wall Specification dialog.
See “Roof Tab” on page 252.
These roof return settings are also found in
the Dormer Specification dialog for gable
roof dormers and function similarly. See
“General Tab” on page 421.

Gable Over Door/Window

Click the Gable Over Door/Window
Hip Return Gable Return edit button to add a small gable
dormer over one or more selected doors or
The third is called a Full return because it windows the next time automatic roof planes
extends under the entire gable, connecting are built.
both sides.
The Gable/Roof Line displays in floor plan
view when the Roofs, Gable Lines layer is
set to display.

423
CAFull_RM.book Page 424 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Returns and other Details

whenever Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze is

checked in the Build Roof dialog. See “Build
Tab” on page 378.
The materials used for fascia, gutters and
frieze can be specified in the Build Roof
dialog. See “Materials Tab” on page 385.
Fascia, gutters and frieze molding display in
3D views and are included in the materials
list. You can also display them in floor plan
view, if you wish. See “Layer Display
Options Dialog” on page 121.
Fascia
The material specified for fascia in the Build
It is located about 12 inches (300 mm) Roof dialog displays as part of the roof plane
outside the wall and extends a foot on either rather than as a separate object.
side of the opening. Once produced, a gable
line can be moved, stretched, and edited. See In addition, fascia boards are generated when
“Gable/Roof Line” on page 412. roof framing is generated and are placed on
the “Framing, Roof” layer. The fascia
The Gable Over Door/Window edit material is not applied to these framing
button is not available for doors or windows members, however.
placed in Full Gable Walls or if a bay, box or The width and depth of fascia and eave fascia
bow window is selected. See “Bay, Box, can be specified in the Build Framing dialog.
Bow Windows & Roofs” on page 330. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
If you move or resize the door or window(s), If you would like to create shadow boards, or
the associated Gable/Roof Line does not built-up fascia, you can do so using 3D
update until the roof is built again.
Molding Polylines . See “3D Molding
To remove a Gable Over Door/Window, Polyline Tool” on page 536.
select the door or window(s) and click the
Gutters
Delete Gable Over Opening edit button,
or select the gable line and click the You can select a gutter profile on the Gutter
tab of the Build Roof dialog. See “Gutter
Delete edit button. The next time the
Tab” on page 385.
roof is built, the gable will be removed.
Gutters are placed on the “Roofs, Gutters”
Fascia, Gutters & Frieze layer. By default, this layer is locked and
displaying in 3D views but not in plan view.
Fascia, gutters and frieze molding can be
added to roof planes. They are generated

424
CAFull_RM.book Page 425 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Rafter Tails
Rafter tails are the rafters ends that overhang
the bearing walls and are located under the
eaves. They can be the full rafter depth or
trimmed to the depth of the soffits. Rafter
tails can also be partially enclosed by soffits,
and sometimes feature decorative profiles.
To produce a particular type of rafter tail, set
the correct defaults before you build both the
If you do not want gutters built, open the
roof planes and the roof framing:
Build Roof dialog, select Build Fascia, Gut-
ters, Frieze on the Roof tab, and then
To create full-depth exposed rafter ends
uncheck Gutters on the Options tab. The
fascia and frieze are rebuilt, but not the • Uncheck Soffits on the Options tab of the
gutters. Any existing gutters are deleted. Build Roof dialog. See “Options Tab” on
page 382.
To delete a gutter on a specific roof plane,
select the roof plane and uncheck Gutter in • Uncheck Generate Fascia and Generate
its Roof Plane Specification dialog. When Eave Sub Fascia on the Framing tab of
Gutter is unchecked, a gutter will not be the Build Roof dialog. See “Roof Tab”
generated on this roof plane next time you on page 477.
Build Fascia, Gutters, Frieze. See “Options
Tab” on page 382. To create hidden, trimmed rafter ends
• Check Soffits on the Options tab of the
Frieze Molding
Build Roof dialog.
Automatically generated frieze boards are • Check Trim To Soffits on the Framing
3D Molding Polylines placed along all tab of the Build Roof dialog.
exterior walls directly under the eaves.
Frieze does not generate along railings; To create full-depth, partially-exposed
however, if an attic wall is built above a rafter ends
railing, it can generate along that wall. • Check Soffits on the Options tab of the
You can specify one or more frieze molding Build Roof dialog.
profiles in the Build Roof dialog. See “Frieze • Uncheck Trim To Soffits on the Framing
Tab” on page 385. tab of the Build Roof dialog.
Frieze moldings are placed on the “Roofs, • Specify the desired Eave Sub Fascia
Frieze Molding” layer. By default, this layer Depth on the Framing tab of the Build
is locked, turned on in 3D views but not in Roof dialog.
plan view.

425
CAFull_RM.book Page 426 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Pitches in Degrees

To add a decorative profile to rafter tails

Soffit height is determined by the depth
• Set soffits and fascia as needed to pro-
of the eave subfascia, which is set on
the Framing tab of the Build Roof dialog. duce the desired rafter tail exposure, as
described above.
• Select a rafter tail profile on the Rafter
Tails tab of the Build Roof dialog. See
“Rafter Tails Tab” on page 383.

Roof Pitches in Degrees

426
CAFull_RM.book Page 427 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

427
CAFull_RM.book Page 428 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 14:

Stairs & Landings

Staircases can be composed of one or more Chapter Contents

straight or curved stair sections and landings • The Stair Tools
in nearly any combination. Stair sections can • Anatomy of a Staircase
be edited individually or as a group. Starter • Drawing Stairs
treads can be defined, stair sections can be • Displaying Stairs
flared, treads can be wrapped, and curved • Merging Stair Sections
sections can be turned into winders. • Editing Stairs
Landings can be created automatically or • Winders
manually and their shape customized. You • Stair Landings
can edit an existing landing, or create a • Maintaining Tread Width
landing from a closed CAD polyline. • Flared Stairs and Curved Treads
Landing heights can be defined or you can let • Starter Treads
them automatically adjust as needed. • Wrapped Stairs
• Other Special Railings & Stairs
Stairwells can be created automatically or • Creating a Stairwell
manually and can be seen in all 3D views. • Rooms Below Staircases
Stairs can be drawn, selected and edited in • Staircase Specification Dialog
3D views. • Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Local building and fire authorities must

be consulted for specific stair construc-
tion codes and access requirements.

428
CAFull_RM.book Page 429 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Stair Tools

Select Build> Stairs to access the Stair same floor with a single click of the mouse.
Tools. Click the low side, within a few feet of where
the floor changes height.
Straight Stairs
Curved Stairs
To draw a straight staircase select
Build> Stairs> Straight Stairs, then Select Build> Stairs> Curve to
click and drag in floor plan or a 3D view. Left or Curve to Right and click
once in floor plan view to place a curved
Click Stairs staircase. For more information about creat-
ing curved stairs, see “Creating Curved
Select Build> Stairs> Click Stairs to Stairs” on page 430.
create stairs between levels on the

Anatomy of a Staircase
Stairs are often described in terms of rise and Rise - The height of a riser.
run. Rise is typically between 6" and 8", and
Riser - The vertical member of stairs
the run between 10" and 12". In metric plans,
between the treads.
rise is 177 to 190 mm, and the run about 250
mm. Run - The width of a stair tread.
Runner - The carpet that runs down the
A good rule of thumb is that rise plus center of the staircase.
run should equal 18" for a comfortable
stair step. Any rise over 7 1/2” is considered Shoe - The bottom railing, placed on the
steep regardless of the run. landing floor, that anchors the balusters at
landings.
Balusters - The vertical members that run
Stringer - The inclined support member of a
between the handrail and the treads.
staircase that supports the treads and risers.
Bracket - Decorative L-shaped supports on
Tread - The horizontal member of a stair the
the exposed side of stairs below each tread.
foot is placed on.
Landing - The platform connecting two stair
Winder - A wedge-shaped stair tread used
sections.
where curved or angled stairways change
Newels - The end post of a stair railing direction.
located at landings and the beginnings and
endings of new stair sections.

429
CAFull_RM.book Page 430 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Drawing Stairs

Drawing Stairs
Stairs can be drawn in floor plan and 3D be dragged until it stops at the railing or
views but not in cross section/elevation wall defining the stairwell.
views.
Stairs can be drawn from the current floor
level downward; however, drawing stairs
To draw straight stairs
between floors in this manner is not
1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight recommended. Drawing stairs downward
should only be used to create stairs between a
Stairs .
room such as a porch or deck and the ground.
2. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
To draw stairs going downward

1. Select Build> Stairs> Straight

Stairs .

Stairs drawn on one floor in the UP direction 2. Hold down the Alt key or the right
begin at that floor level and automatically adjust mouse button.
rise and run to connect with the floor above. 3. Click and drag to create straight stairs.
If the finished grade is known, you can also
There are a few things to keep in mind when
create a “room” outside the structure using
drawing stairs.
invisible walls and establish the floor height
• Before stairs are created, make sure that for that area to match the finished grade.
the heights for both the lower and upper
Click Rebuild Walls/Floors/Ceilings
floors are correctly defined.
calculate the floor platform at the lower
• Stairs are drawn going UP, so they should elevation, then draw a normal staircase in an
be drawn from the lower of the two floors upward direction from the lower platform to
they connect. the upper platform. The program will
• Stairs adjust their riser and tread dimen- correctly connect the two heights.
sions to connect two floor heights if pos-
sible. The rise and run are calculated so Creating Curved Stairs
that the steps are consistent in size.
Curved Stairs can be created in
• If you have the Reference Display floor plan view by selecting
turned on, stairs snap to the reference dis- Build> Stairs> Curve to Left or Curve to
play. See “Reference Display” on page Right. Click to place a 90 degree curved stair
360. section that can then be edited.
• If a stairwell room has been defined on You can also curve straight stairs by drawing
the floor above, the top of the stairs can them against a curved wall.

430
CAFull_RM.book Page 431 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Select the stairs, hold down the Alt key

(or right-click), and drag an end edit han-
dle. See “Alternate” on page 138.

+ Alt

Straight stairs drawn along a curved wall

In addition, you can change a straight stair

section into curved stairs, or vice versa:
• Select the stairs and click the Change
Line/Arc edit button. See “Change
Line/Arc” on page 185.

Displaying Stairs
The display of stairs in all views is only multi-floor views show the upper floor
controlled in the Layer Display with the platform opening and the lower
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on floor with the staircase simultaneously.
page 117.
You can specify whether newels and
In floor plan view, stairs display on the floor balusters display in floor plan view in the
they were drawn on and are only visible from Staircase Specification dialog. See
the floor above if there is a stairwell. “Newels/Balusters Tab” on page 455.
Stairs have an UP arrow on the floor they To see the center of a stair section curve,
were created on and a DN arrow when click Show Arc Centers and Ends . See
viewed from the floor above. “Show Arc Centers” on page 155.
Although stairs span between two floors,
they can only belong to one floor. As a result,

Merging Stair Sections

Any combination of straight or curved stair up of subsections and, if there are no
sections can be merged to create a single stair landings, functions as a single unit.
section. The resulting stair section is made

431
CAFull_RM.book Page 432 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Merging Stair Sections

Stair subsections must be created in the same subsection. See “Using the Mouse” on page
direction if they are to be merged. Multiple 433.
stairs drawn in the UP direction may be
Subsections can be joined into a single stair
merged, and multiple stairs drawn DOWN
section without being aligned. If the stair
may be merged, but combinations of UP and
sections are parallel, the selected section
DOWN stairs do not merge.
moves so that it joins properly with the other.
Stair subsections merge at the center points
It is possible to merge stair sections that are
of their upper and lower risers.
not parallel, but they may not merge properly
if they are not precisely aligned.
To merge stair sections

1. Position the sections so they are in the

desired relationship to each other.
2. Select either stair section so that its edit
handles display.
3. Click the Extend handle on the end to be
merged and drag it to the point where the
Caused by
two stairs are to meet.
misalignment

Merging unaligned stair sections

The one method for joining stair sections at

different angles is to use curved stairs and
create winders. See “Winders” on page 434
and “Curved Stairs” on page 429.

Lock Tread Width

When a stair section with Lock Tread
Width selected in the Staircase
Merging parallel stair sections Specification dialog is resized, the length
expands or contracts one full tread at a time.
A staircase consisting of merged subsections
resembles a single stair section in floor plan When Lock Tread Width is checked, it can
view. The UP (or DN) arrows join, becoming be difficult to merge the section with another
a single direction arrow. section or landing. If this is a problem, you
can temporarily uncheck Lock Tread
When a subsection is clicked, the entire
Width. After the stairs are merged, the tread
staircase is selected. Most of the edit handles
width can be locked again. See “General
display within the boundaries of the selected
Tab” on page 450.

432
CAFull_RM.book Page 433 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Curved Subsections 3. Click the Change Line/Arc edit

Stair subsections attached at both ends by button. The center section turns into a
other sections do not have a free end that can curved stair section.
be dragged into a curve. In this situation,
change the middle sub-section to a curve
using the Change Line/Arc edit button.
See “Change Line/Arc” on page 185.

To curve an enclosed stair subsection

1. Draw three straight stair sections and

connect them end to end.
2. Select the middle subsection.

After using Change Line/Arc

4. Use the Change Curve edit handle to

adjust the curvature of the middle sec-
tion as needed.
Stairs joined in this manner can easily be
turned into winders. See “Winders” on page
434.

Select the middle stair subsection

Editing Stairs
Staircases can be selected and edited in floor customize the staircase in many ways. The
plan view and 3D views. See “Selecting edit handles for stairs are similar to those of
Objects” on page 144. other objects. See “Editing Objects” on page
130.
Using the Mouse • Straight stair sections are edited like
When a staircase is selected edit handles lines. They have additional edit handles
display. These edit handles can be used to for resizing the width of the stair section.

433
CAFull_RM.book Page 434 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Winders

See “Editing Line Based Objects” on Adjusting the Radius

page 147. of Curved Stairs
• Curved stair sections edited like arcs and
The easiest way to match the radius of a stair
also include edit handles for resizing the
section to the radius of a curved wall is to
stair’s width. See “Editing Arc Based
draw a staircase near one side of the curved
Objects” on page 150.
wall using the Straight Stairs tool. The
• When stair sections are merged, the edit
stairs snap to the wall, and the radius of the
handles display a little differently
new staircase is defined. See “Creating
depending on what subsection is
Curved Stairs” on page 430.
currently selected. See “Merging Stair
Sections” on page 431. Existing curved stairs can be aligned with an
• When moving merged stair sections, all existing curved wall by aligning their
merged stair sections also move. centers, much the same way that curved
stairs on different floors can be aligned. See
• Several additional edit handles display on “Aligning Objects” on page 180.
a staircase if the Flare/Curve Stairs
If there is no curved wall, the radius of a stair
edit button has been clicked. See “Flared
section can be aligned to a CAD arc or circle.
Stairs and Curved Treads” on page 440.
To align curved stairs to an object
Using the Edit Tools
1. Align the centers of the CAD object and
A selected staircase or staircases can be
the staircase. See “Aligning Objects” on
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
page 180.
on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1140. 2. Select the curved stairs and move the
side nearest to the arc or circle edge
using the Resize edit handle.
Finally, restore the stair width by dragging
from the other side handle or using the Stair
Specification dialog.

Winders
Winders are steps located where a staircase Curved stair sections are typically used to
turns and are narrower on the inside of the create winders, although straight stairs can
turn than they are on the outside. A staircase also be used. See “Creating Curved Stairs”
defined as a winder expands to fill in any on page 430.
gaps between the side of the stairs and
nearby walls.

434
CAFull_RM.book Page 435 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

To create winders

1. In an enclosed room area, place and con-

nect the stair sections that you want to
be winders.
2. Select any subsection of the stairs and
click the Open Object edit button to Winders extend to nearby walls
open the Staircase Specification dia-
log. 4. The steps nearest the wall corner adjust
3. On the General tab, place a check in the their shapes and extend into the corner
box beside Winder and click OK. after the stair is changed to a winder.

Winders must be in a room with valid

room definition. You cannot create
winders in an area composed of only 2 corner
walls. If this configuration is needed, enclose
the area in with Invisible walls so that a room
area is defined.

Stair Landings
Stair landings are platforms between stair
sections and can be created in either of two
ways.

To create a landing between stair sections:

1. Draw two stair sections going UP. They

can be at any angle.
2. Click between the two sections using the Creating a stair landing

Straight Stairs tool to create a land- Multiple stair sections can be connected to
ing. Notice that only one direction arrow one landing. For example, two or three stair
displays after the sections are joined by sections might meet at a landing with a single
a landing. stair section continuing to the next level.
To be linked by a landing, all sections must
be drawn in the same direction (UP is
preferable) and the top of one section should
be near the bottom of the next.

435
CAFull_RM.book Page 436 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Stair Landings

Stair sections connected with a landing will Unlocked Landings

move together as a single unit unless Stair
Sections Move Independently is checked in By default, a new stair landing is unlocked,
the Preferences dialog. See “Architectural so the stair sections attached to it determine
Panel” on page 88. its height. If the entire stair system forms a
single path from the lower to the upper floor
A landing formed between two stair sections with each landing connecting only two stair
having less than a 90 degree angle between sections, the program can set landing heights
them are created with a short edge not less without any difficulty.
than 6” (150 mm). This is because most
building codes require the shortest tread to be
at least 6” wide. This edge can be manually
edited to less than 6” if needed.

Custom Shaped Landings

Landings can be edited like other closed
polyline-based objects. You can add or
remove edges, convert an edge from straight In this example, two stair sections of the
to curved, or vice versa. A curved landing same length are located within a stairwell
creates curved railings. See “Editing Closed- and connected by a landing. Both stair
Polyline Based Objects” on page 160. sections have seven treads. Because the
landing height is set automatically according
You can also create a stair landing out of to the number of treads, all treads have the
closed polyline created with the CAD tools same tread width and riser height.
using the Convert Polyline edit button.
See “Convert Polyline” on page 205.

Landing Height
Landing height can be either user-defined or
controlled by the program. A landing with a
height that has not been specified by the user
is considered unlocked, and its height will
adjust automatically as the stairs attached to
it are modified.
If you specify a landing’s height, that landing
becomes locked and will maintain that height
no matter how the stairs connected to it are
adjusted.

436
CAFull_RM.book Page 437 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

may want to define the exact height of the

landing instead of letting the program define
it for you.

Locked Landings
A locked landing has a specifically defined
height that does not adjust automatically
when there are changes in the attached stairs.
Instead, the stairs adjust to the landing.
For example, start with the same staircase
used to illustrate unlocked landings, with one
change: the landing height is now defined at
75 inches (190 mm).

An unlocked landing maintains consistent stairs

Since both stair sections are the same length,

7 treads 6 treads
the landing height is a half of the total height
in each
between the two connected floors. section 8 treads
A change to either stair section affects the
Unlocked landing Landing locked at 75"
height of the connected landing and the other
stair section. The program tries to maintain Notice that a tread is subtracted from the top
the connection to the floor above, and the and added to the bottom. The program makes
landing adjusts in height so that the entire this adjustment to keep the riser heights
stair system has the same riser height, within a reasonable range.
regardless of how many stairs are placed on
each side of the landing. The stair sections no longer relate to each
other when they are attached to a locked
If more than two stair sections meet at a landing. Changes to one stair section do not
landing, the relationship between them affect the other.
becomes more complex. In this situation, you

437
CAFull_RM.book Page 438 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Stair Landings

You can use a locked landing to break up a

complex network of stairs and landings into
smaller pieces with known starting and
ending heights.

To lock a landing

1. Select the landing and click the Open

Object edit button to open the Stair
Landing Specification dialog.
2. The Height value displays with a “[D]”,
indicating that the landing height is
defined by the stair sections.

3. Remove the “[D]” and enter the desired

height.
Locked landings produce
independent stair sections

In this example, each set of stairs is adjusted 4. The landing moves to that height. Once
so it bridges the height from the floor to the you have defined a height for the land-
landing. Since the landing height is above the ing, all stairs that meet that landing are
halfway mark, the upper stair section has redefined.
very shallow (5") riser height, and the lower
section has a steeper (7-1/2") riser height. To unlock a landing
When a locked landing is used, the Staircase 1. Select the landing and click the Open
Specification dialog shows only the selected
stair section and those connected to it by Object edit button to open the Stair
unlocked landings, rather than the entire stair Landing Specification dialog.
system. 2. Enter a “d” in the Height field and press
When a stair section is moved, all unlocked the Tab key. The current default height
landings and any stair sections connected to reappears with “[D]” after it. Then land-
those landings move as well. A locked ing changes to the appropriate height
landing, does not move when attached stairs when you close the dialog. See
are moved. To move a stair section “Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
independently, select this option in the
Preferences dialog. See “Architectural
Panel” on page 88.

438
CAFull_RM.book Page 439 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Maintaining Tread Width

Most building codes require staircases to There are two ways to keep tread width even
maintain consistent tread width. throughout a stair section made of multiple
subsections.
Walk Line
Lock Tread Width
By default, Chief Architect measures the
length and tread width of a stair section along The first way to maintain tread width is to
a walk line. The walk line is typically located Lock Tread Width to a specified value in
12" or 30 cm from the edge of the stair the Staircase Specification dialog. See
section. On curved stairs, it is measured from “General Tab” on page 450.
the inside edge of the curve.
Once locked, any changes to the length of the
The walk line distance from the staircase stair section are by maintaining the specified
edge can be specified on the Style tab of the tread width and instead changing the number
Staircase Specification dialog. See “Style of treads.
Tab” on page 453.
A stair section consisting of multiple
Alternatively, you can turn the walk line subsections must have the tread width locked
feature off and tread width will be measured so the tread width of each subsection is set to
at the tread center. See “Style Tab” on page the same value.
453.
Ignore Subsection
Boundaries
Uniform tread width can also be maintained
by selecting Ignore Subsection Boundaries
in the Staircase Specification dialog. This
maintains a consistent tread width
throughout a stair section without regard to
Walk Line at 12" Center Line subsection boundaries. The tread width value
may change when the stair section is edited,
When the walk line is used on a curved stair but remains consistent throughout all
section, the number and/or width of treads in subsections. See “General Tab” on page 450.
a section or subsection changes when the
inner edge is moved because the walk line is Because the program is ignoring the
measured from this inner edge. You should boundaries where one stair section merges
set the stair section width to its final value as with another, the treads where a straight
early as possible. section joins a curved section may angle to
accomodate the adjustment.

439
CAFull_RM.book Page 440 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Flared Stairs and Curved Treads

These are the subsection boundaries. Check Ignore Subsection

Note that they are straight, exactly as Boundaries to have the
created. The walk line around the program adjust all the treads
center treads is too narrow. of a stair system so that they
maintain consistent width along
the walkline. Note that it
adjusted the boundary lines to
accomodate the walk line along
the center stairs.

Flared Stairs and Curved Treads

Any stair section can be flared and/or
its treads curved using the Flare/
Curve Stairs edit button.
Only exposed sides of a stair section can be
flared. If one side of a stair section is against
a wall or wrapped (see “Wrapped Stairs” on
page 444), only the exposed end can be
flared.

Flaring, curved treads, and special

treads should be the last changes that
you make to any stairs.

Creating a Flared Stair

Flared stairs grow wider near one end,
typically sweeping outward at the bottom.
Stairs can also be flared at the top or on both To create flared stairs
ends.
1. Create the stairs and connect them to a
landing, floor platform edge, or another
stair section.
2. Specify the section width, tread width,
and any other needed information.

440
CAFull_RM.book Page 441 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

3. Select the stairs and click the Flare/ Adjusting the Flare Radius
Curve Stairs edit button. New Flare After a flared staircase has been created, you
edit handles display on all four corners may want to soften the radius of the flare.
of the stairs.
4. Drag one of the corner handles to flare
that corner. As you drag the flare, the
Status Bar shows the distance the side
handle moves. This allows you to move
the opposite handle the same amount.

Flare
dimensions
display in the
Status Bar

Creating flared stairs

The four handles at the sides and the four
5. When you are finished editing the flare, handles at the corners flare the stair section
click the Main Edit Mode to restore when dragged outward. The two handles in
the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool- the center of the section move the starting
bar buttons. point for flaring along the stair section.

To adjust the flare radius

Symmetrically Flared Stairs
First, adjust the curvature of the flared
Use the dimension information that displays
section.
in the Status Bar as a reference to create
symmetric flares on both sides. 1. Select the flared stair and click the

Flare Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to

dimensions access the flare handles again.
display in the 2. Select the handle along the flared edge
Status Bar of the stair. Drag this handle outward
very slightly. This forms a more gradual
flare.

Creating symmetrically flared stairs

441
CAFull_RM.book Page 442 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Flared Stairs and Curved Treads

To curve the edges of flared treads

1. Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to
access the flare handles again.
2. Drag a corner edit handle upward one
tread width or less.

Adjusting the flare curvature

Then, adjust the starting point of the flare:

1. Select the flared stair and click the

Flare/Curve Stairs edit button to
access the flare handles again.
2. This time, drag the lower of the two cen- Curving the edges of flared treads
tral handles upward. The handle above it
moves with it. This moves the start point 3. When you are finished editing the curve,
for the bottom flare from the middle of click the Main Edit Mode to restore
the section toward its top, making the the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
flare even more gradual. bar buttons.
This type of tread curving works only on
flared edges and concentrates the curvature
at that edge.
Flared treads can also be curved using the
Curve edit handle, which curves the treads
more uniformly.

Curving the Treads

Adjusting the flare’s starting point
When treads are curved, all treads in the
Treads Perpendicular to Flare section show some degree of curvature.
Flared stairs often look best when the treads Treads close to the curved end have a greater
curve to meet the flared side perpendicular to curve than those at the opposite end, but both
the radius. ends can be curved.

442
CAFull_RM.book Page 443 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2. Drag the edit handle at the center of the

bottom edge a small distance to curve
the treads.

Creating curved stair treads

3. When you are finished editing the curve,

To curve stair treads
click the Main Edit Mode to restore
1. Select the staircase, then click the Flare/ the stairs’ regular edit handles and tool-
bar buttons.
Curve Stairs edit button.

Starter Treads
The first and second treads of a
staircase can be turned into starter
treads by clicking the Starter Tread edit
button. Starter treads extend to the side of the
staircase, have rounded edges and are
common on traditional staircases.
A starter tread can be added only to open
sides of a stair section. If one side of a stair
section is against a wall or wrapped (see
“Wrapped Stairs” on page 444), only the
exposed tread end can become a starter tread.

443
CAFull_RM.book Page 444 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Wrapped Stairs

To create starter treads 6. Drag either of the two square handles

upward to increase the width of the
1. Click on a staircase to select it. rounded ends of the tread.
2. Click the Starter Tread edit button.
An edit handle displays on each end of
both the first and second treads.

7. Drag the edit handle on the second tread

outward from the stair section to create a
second starter tread.
3. Drag either of the handles on the first
tread outward from the stair section. If
the stair section is against a wall, only
one handle displays on the side opposite
the wall.
4. As you drag, the ends of the tread
become rounded. 8. To make changes to existing starter
treads, select the stairs, click the Starter
Tread edit button and repeat the
above steps as needed.
9. When you are finished editing the starter
5. Two additional edit handles display on treads, click the Main Edit Mode to
each side of the tread, along the back restore the stairs’ regular edit handles
edge. and toolbar buttons.

Wrapped Stairs
Check Allow Wrap on the Style tab of the To wrap stairs around a deck
Staircase Specification dialog and the
selected stairs can be wrapped around the 1. Draw a deck if you have not already
corner of a deck or landing. Curved stairs done so. See “Decks” on page 275.
and stairs with multiple subsections cannot 2. Use the Click Stairs tool to draw a
be wrapped. See “Style Tab” on page 453. stair section on each side of the corner
Edits made to any of the wrapped stair around which you want them to wrap.
sections apply to all adjacent (wrapped) 3. Draw a second set of stairs on the other
sections. edge of the deck the same way.

444
CAFull_RM.book Page 445 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

4. If necessary, move the stair sections 2. Click between them to create a landing.
toward the corner of the deck. The two 3. Rotate one stair section 180°.
sections merge to form wrapped steps.

You can also draw stairs down from a

deck by right-clicking to draw them or by
pressing the Alt key while you drag. See “To
draw stairs going downward” on page 430.

4. The stairs wrap around the corner.

Notice that the Up arrow displays on the
most recently edited stair section.

To wrap stairs around a landing

1. Draw two perpendicular Straight

Stair sections.

Other Special Railings & Stairs

Partial Railings
A staircase can be enclosed on one side by a
combination of wall and railing.

445
CAFull_RM.book Page 446 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Other Special Railings & Stairs

rior wall is 4" thick, setting this value to

4" should be sufficient.
5. On the Style tab, increase the Stringer
Bottom value to enclose the area under
the stairs with railings. The best value
depends on the design of your stairs.
6. On the Newels/Balusters tab, remove the
check from either Right or Left Railing
at Wall, depending on the position of
the stairs and wall in your plan.

7. Click the Object Snaps toggle but-

ton to temporarily turn off Object Snaps.
Partial railings can be created by specifying See “Object Snaps” on page 133.
the stairs as winders and increasing the Max 8. Select the stairs and use the side edit
Tread Contraction in the Staircase handle to move the edge of the stairs to
Specification dialog. See “Style Tab” on approximately the middle of the wall.
page 453.
The Max Tread Contraction defines the
largest distance that any section of the stair
system is allowed to move inward when the
stairs are turned into winders. If any point on
the edge of the stairs would have to move
inward more than this defined amount in
order to locate the surface of the wall, the
stairs do not contract and snap to that wall.

To create a partial stair railing

1. Create a staircase and draw an Interior Resizing stairs to the middle of the wall
Wall against, but not underneath, the
9. You may need to Zoom in on the
stairs.
stairs and wall to move the stair edge.
2. Select the stairs and click the Auto
Stairwell edit button to create a Solid Railings
stairwell.
To create a solid rail along a staircase, create
3. On the General tab of the Staircase the solid rail against, but not underneath, the
Specification dialog, check Winders. stairs. The solid railing recognizes the
4. On the Style tab, define the Max Tread adjacent stairs and climbs alongside them.
Contraction (for Winder). If the inte- See “Railing Tab” on page 258.

446
CAFull_RM.book Page 447 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Steel Stringer

To make a steel stringer with concrete

treads:

1. On the Style tab of the Staircase

Specification dialog, set the Tread
Thickness to 2 inches or more.
If any balusters show beyond the railing, 2. Select the Single Stringer check box.
eliminate them by unchecking Left railing 3. On the Materials tab, set the Tread
or Right railing in the Staircase material to Concrete and the Riser/Trim
Specification dialog. See “Style Tab” on
material to steel.
page 453.
Masonry Stairs
Concrete Stairs

To make a solid concrete staircase: To make a set of masonry stairs:

1. On the Style tab of the Staircase 1. Set the Tread Overhang to zero.
Specification dialog, set the Tread
Overhang to zero. 2. Set the Tread Thickness to the thick-
ness of the masonry material.
2. Set the Tread Thickness to zero.
3. On the Materials tab, set the Tread
3. Remove any check from Open Risers. material to the masonry material and the
4. On the Materials tab, set the Tread and Riser/Trim material to concrete.
the Riser/Trim materials to Concrete.

447
CAFull_RM.book Page 448 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Creating a Stairwell

Creating a Stairwell
An interior staircase must be located in a Floor. See “Reference Floor” on page
stairwell, an opening to the floor above. A 359.
stairwell is an Open Below room type on the 3. Select Tools> Reference Floors>
floor above.
Reference Display to show the Ref-
If you create a stairwell away from other erence Floor, including the stairs. If the
walls so the Open Below is created in the stairs do not display with the reference,
center of another room, connect a wall of the make sure the Reference Display Set is
Open Below room to another wall using an selected in the Layer Display Options
invisible wall. dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on
page 117.
Creating a Stairwell
Automatically 4. On the upper floor, use the Railing
tool to create a room around the stairs.
To create a stairwell that matches the Use the edit handles to position the rail-
perimeter of a selected staircase, click ings as needed.
the Auto Stairwell edit button. This button is
only available when a living space exists
above the staircase. It will not be available if
the space above is Open Below or on the
Attic Floor.

Auto Stairwell automatically creates a

room on the floor above enclosed by railings,
defined as Open Below in the Room
Specification dialog, and given a Stairwell 5. Select the railings one at a time and drag
room label. This room can be selected and them into position.
edited like any other room. 6. When the railings are positioned prop-
erly, select Tools> Reference Floors>
Creating a Stairwell Manually Reference Display to turn off the
Stairwells can also be created manually. display of the Reference Floor.
7. Click inside the room using the Select
To create a manual stairwell
Objects tool to select it, then click
1. Draw a two-story building. Create the
the Open Object edit button.
staircase on the first floor.
8. On the General tab of the Room
2. Make the second floor the Current
Specification dialog, select Open
Floor and the first floor the Reference
Below from the Room Type list. Click
OK to close the dialog.

448
CAFull_RM.book Page 449 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

If the doorway is specified larger than

the railing, the door maximizes to fit the
space available.

9. Place a Doorway in the railing at the

top step for an opening.
10. Select the doorway and define a large
width in the Door Specification dialog.

Rooms Below Staircases

Rooms such as closets or storage areas are • On the Fill Style tab, select None
commonly located beneath staircases. (Transparent) so the walls and other
objects under the stairs can be seen.
To create a room below a staircase 2. On the same floor as the staircase, draw
1. Draw a staircase, select it, and click the the Interior Walls under them, fol-
Open Object edit button to open the lowing their shape.
Staircase Specification dialog. 3. Reposition the walls as needed, making
• If Winders are specified for this stair- sure that each is entirely under the stairs.
case, set Max Tread Contraction to 2" 4. The wall at the foot of the stairs should
on the Style tab to allow walls to be be placed no closer to the bottom than
built entirely under the staircase. the second step.
5. Add a door and specify the Room Type.

449
CAFull_RM.book Page 450 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Staircase Specification Dialog

Staircase Specification Dialog

Staircases can be defined with the greatest Specification dialog for the entire stair
accuracy using the Staircase Specification system.
dialog.
If more than one stair section attaches to an It is recommended that all floor heights,
unlocked landing, information about all the ceiling heights and platform thicknesses
linked stair sections is available in the be established before using the Staircase
Specification dialog.
specification dialog.
If a stair section is composed of multiple To open the Staircase Specification dialog,
subsections, the complete section may be select a stair section and click the Open
adjusted as a unit, or by defining each of its
Object edit button or double-click a stair
individual subsections. Any section or
subsection can be used to open the Staircase section using the Straight Stairs or
Select Objects tool.

General Tab

1 4
5
2
6

1 The comment line tells whether or not does not, the Make Reach button displays.
the staircase reaches the next floor. If it Click this button to add risers to the stairs.

450
CAFull_RM.book Page 451 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The stair jack extends, raising the bottom move. If you change the length of the section
edge of the stair section until the staircase you originally selected, the end of that
reaches the next floor. section nearest where you clicked moves,
along with any unlocked landings and
Make Reach will also extend stairs drawn in
sections connected to it.
a downward direction until they reach the
terrain. Tread Width - Click the column title, then
specify the run of each individual tread. To
2 Structural information about the lock this value, check Lock Tread Width.
staircase displays here. This
information cannot be edited directly, but If you do not specify the tread width of each
updates with changes made in the dialog. subsection, the tread width for the whole
section is the same.
If you modify a value, press the Tab key to
update this information. If a landing is created by clicking between
two stair sections and one of them has locked
3 The specifications for each stair section tread width, the staircase formed from them
display and can be edited here. This
has locked tread width. Any landings and
section expands if the number stair sections
sections connected to this new staircase
and subsections increases.
adjust to meet it and then have locked tread
A stair section can be modified as a complete width as well.
unit or by subsection.
Five values can be changed. To change Note: You cannot both Lock Tread Width
Tread Width or Riser Angle, click the and Retain # Treads in the same staircase. If
column title to activate the fields below. a landing is created between two stair sec-
tions and one has locked tread width, the
A change in one value usually affects other entire staircase has locked tread width.
values in the same row. You may need to
reposition the staircase after the changes. # Treads - Define the number of treads in a
stair section or subsection. If you enter a
Section # - Identifies the stair sections. If
value and want to prevent it from changing,
Retain # Tread in Subsections is checked,
check Retain # treads in either Sections or
subsections are also identified.
Subsections to lock the value.
Length - Define the run, or length, of each
Sec. Width - Define the width of a section.
section measured along the Walk Line. The
Only one width can be defined for a section;
length is equal to the number of treads
all subsections in the same section have the
multiplied by the tread width and can be
same width.
defined with a specific value.
Rise Angle - Define the steepness of the stair
Before you change the length, you may want
section.
to first select Retain # Treads.
The maximum angle is 42 degrees. To
When the length of a section changes, all
exceed the 42 degree limit, decrease Length,
other stairs and landings connected to it also
Tread Width and/or # Treads.

451
CAFull_RM.book Page 452 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Staircase Specification Dialog

Winders - Check this box to specify the average of all subsections. Check Lock
selected section as winders. This affects the Tread Width or Ignore Subsection
section as a whole, even if it is defined by Boundaries to ensure that the tread width
subsections. If multiple sections are shown is the true tread width throughout the
separated by landings, each section can be entire section. See “Lock Tread Width” on
individually specified as winders. page 439.

4 Click the Revert button to restore all Ignore Subsection Boundaries - Check this
values as they were when the dialog box to maintain tread width throughout a
was first opened. Revert only works within stair section composed of merged
the same editing session. subsections, regardless of subsection
boundaries. See “Ignore Subsection
If you select and then clear one of the Retain
Boundaries” on page 439.
# treads in check boxes, the settings also
revert. Retain #treads in: Sections - Check this box
to lock the number of treads in stair sections
5 Best riser height of ___ inches (mm) as a whole. This does not define the distribu-
requires ___ risers to reach ___
tion of treads throughout the different sub-
inches to next floor. This area describes the
sections, and does not include landings.
ideal rise and run for the selected staircase.
Note the number of inches (mm) to the next Retain # treads in: Subsection - Check this
floor; this value includes the ceiling height of box to specify the number of treads in each
the room plus the platform thickness of the subsection.
floor above.
If either check box is selected, any change in
If a landing is locked, its height is used to the length of a stair section is evenly
calculate this information. See “Locked distributed among the treads in that section
Landings” on page 437. or subsection. No new treads are added.

6 These options control the behavior of All stair sections linked by unlocked
the stair sections. landings to a selected stair section display in
the lower part of the dialog. If you select
Lock Tread Width - Check this box to lock
Retain # treads in: Subsection, all
the tread width value. If subsections are not
subsections display as well.
shown, the tread width for each section is the

452
CAFull_RM.book Page 453 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Style Tab
The settings on the Style tab affect all stair
sections and subsections.

2 7

3 8

4 9

5
6

1 Stringer at Wall - Check this box to setting only affects those stringers that are
produce a raised stringer top baseboard not against a wall.
trim at the sides of the stair sections against
Large Stringer Base - Check this box to
walls. This baseboard follows the slope of
widen the stringer at the foot of the staircase.
the stair.
This is helpful when walls are created below
Single Stringer - Check this box to form a the stairs.
single 5-inch (125-mm) thick stringer in the
center of the staircase.
Checking Single Stringer automatically
checks the Open Risers box and clears the
Closed Stringer and Stringer at Wall
boxes. You may want to increase the tread
thickness when this is checked.
Large Stringer Base shown at right
Closed Stringer - Check this box to raise
each exposed stringer to cover the sides of Extend Stringer Top - This box is checked
the treads. If this is checked, no central by default. This option extends a triangular
stringer is applied to open riser stairs. This

453
CAFull_RM.book Page 454 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Staircase Specification Dialog

portion of the stringer under the landing or generate along the bottom of the skirt, and
platform at the top of the stairs. doors cannot be placed in it.
Specify the height of the Stringer Top when The recommended way to enclose the area
Stringer at Wall or Closed Stringer is beneath stairs is to use walls. See “Rooms
selected. This is measured along the plane of Below Staircases” on page 449.
the riser face from the top of a tread to the
Open Risers - Check this box to eliminate
top of the stringer. It cannot be less than 2
the riser face under each tread and expose the
inches (5 cm).
stringers. If Closed Sides is also selected, no
Specify the height of the Stringer Bottom. central stringer is supplied.
This is measured from the top back corner of
a tread down to the bottom edge of the 5 Show Arrow - Check this box to show
the UP arrow or DN arrow in floor plan
stringer. It must be equal to or greater than
view.
the riser height.
6 Use Exterior Materials - Select the
2 Runner - Check this box to add a check box to have the entire staircase
carpet runner to all sections connected
use the same material as the railing.
by unlocked landings. Specify the Runner
Materials can be defined for the individual
Width. The default value of 0 does not create
parts of a staircase if this is not checked.
a runner.
Runner not Tucked - Normally, carpet 7 Max Tread Contraction (for Winder)
- Define the amount a tread may
runners are tucked under the tread overhang.
contract to create a winder. See “Partial
Check this box to have the runner span
Railings” on page 445.
directly from the tread front tothe bottom of
the riser below.
8 Tread Overhang - Specify the distance
that the tread overhangs the riser.
3 Use Walk Line - By default, Chief
Architect calculates the tread width Tread Thickness - Specify the tread
based on a walk line. Specify how far from thickness.
the edge of the stairs the Walk Line is
measured. This is normally 12 inches.
Uncheck the box to disable this function.
1
Show Walk Line - Check this box to show
the Walk Line in floor plan view. 8
8
For more information, see “Walk Line” on
page 439.

4 Open Underneath - Uncheck this box Tread Overhang, Tread Thickness, Stringer Top
to add a skirt below the staircase along
the two sides. It looks like a wall in 3D, but it
has only a single face. Base molding does not 9 Nosing at Top Landing - This option
produces tread nosing attached to

454
CAFull_RM.book Page 455 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

platform edge at the top of stairs. Landing platform edge at the top of the stairs.
edges are not affected. Checking this allows stair risers to match all
the way to the top of the platform. Landing
Riser Surface at Top Landing - Check this
edges are not affected.
box to produce a riser surface against the

Newels/Balusters Tab

1
6
2
3

1 Rail Height - Specify stair and landing • Baluster Type - Select Square, Round,
rail height. or Library balusters. Selecting Library
• Stair Rail Height defines the height from from the drop-down list is the same as
tread surface directly over the riser to clicking the Library button to the right
railing top. and allows selection of a baluster from
the library.
• Landing Rail Height defines the height
of the landing rail top from the landing • Baluster Width - Specify the width of
surface. each baluster. For Library balusters, this
is the width, or diameter, at its widest
2 Check Draw Newels/Balusters to point.
display newels and balusters in floor
• No Shoe for Rail - This option applies
plan view. This displays the Newels and
only to landing rails. Uncheck this box to
Balusters only for the selected stair section.
place a low rail on the landing surface
3 Baluster specifications. that receives the baluster bottoms.
• Cut Baluster Top - Each tread normally
has two to three balusters, growing lon-

455
CAFull_RM.book Page 456 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Staircase Specification Dialog

ger toward its back. The default is to use

6 Railing specifications.
the same baluster and cut it off at the bot-
tom to shorten it toward the tread front.
• Railing - Select either or both check
Check this box to cut the balusters at the
boxes to specify placement of railings on
top instead.
stair sections and landings where they are
4 Newel specifications. not against a wall.
• Railing at Wall - Check to specify the
• Newel Type - Select Square, Round, or placement of wall railings.
Library newels. Selecting Library from
the drop-down list is the same as clicking
the Library button to the right and
allows selection of a newel from the
library.
• Newel Width - Specify the width of each
newel. For Library newels, this is the
width, or diameter, at its widest point.
• Newel Height - Specify the height from
the landing surface to the top of the
newel. This is used only when Rail
passes over Newel is unchecked. • Railing Transitions - Check to specify
• Newels at First Tread - Check this box the placement of “gooseneck” connec-
to place a newel where the rail starts at tions between stair and landing railings.
the base of the stairs. A newel is placed This option only has an effect when Rail
only on a side of the stairs not against a Passes Over Newel is checked.
wall.
• Rail Passes Over Newel - Adjust the
newel height to reach the bottom of the
rail that passes over it. Checking this
causes the Newel Height to be ignored.

5 Bracket - Click the Library button to

apply a 1/4 inch thick bracket to the
side of the stringer under each riser. Brackets
are applied only where the side of the stairs is
not against a wall. The stringer on that side is
moved in 1/4 inch to accomodate the bracket. Checking both Railing Transitions and
Smooth Transitions produces a handrail like
this:

456
CAFull_RM.book Page 457 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Smooth Transitions - Check to specify

the placement of smooth connections
between stair and landing railings.

Handrail Tab

1
2
3
4 5

1 Molding - Shows the current handrail 4 Preview Pane - Shows the selected
profile. This says “Default Handrail” molding profile. No preview displays
unless you select a custom handrail profile. for the Default Handrail option, which is
rectangular.
2 Select - Click this button to open the
Select Library Object dialog and
choose a profile from the library. Note: Handrails are shown on their side,
rotated counter-clockwise by 90 degrees.
3 Default - Click this button to remove a
specified handrail and use the default.
5 Width and Height - Specify the width
and height of the railing.

457
CAFull_RM.book Page 458 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Line Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about using the Line Style For information about using the Materials
tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 889. tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.

Fill Style Tab

For information about using the Fill Style
tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 899.

Stair Landing Specification Dialog

Select a landing and click the Open
3 No Rail on Selected Edge - Suppress
Object edit button to open the Stair railing on the edge nearest to where you
Landing Specification dialog.
clicked when selecting this landing.

General Tab Polyline Tab

For information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 901 .

Selected Line Tab

1 For information about the Selected Line tab,
2 see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.

3 Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see
1 Height - Specify the height of the see “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
landing. Enter a “D” to unlock the
landing height and use the default height. Fill Style Tab
The default height is determined by corrected
stair sections when you exit the dialog. See For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Locked Landings” on page 437. “Fill Style Tab” on page 899.

2 Thickness - Enter a thickness for the Materials Tab

landing. Enter a “D” to use the default.
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

458
CAFull_RM.book Page 459 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

459
CAFull_RM.book Page 460 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 15:

Framing

In Chief Architect, framing can be produced Chapter Contents

both manually and automatically, and can be • Framing Defaults
calculated in the Materials List. • Manual vs. Automatic Framing
Manual framing members are drawn by • The Framing Tools
clicking and dragging, like drawing a CAD • Build Framing Dialog
line. Automatic framing for the major • Framing Reference Markers
components of a 3D model (floors, ceilings, • Bearing Lines
walls and roofs) can be generated using the • Joist Direction Lines
Build Framing dialog. • Displaying Framing
• Editing Framing
Both manually drawn and automatically • Keeping Framing Current
generated framing members can be selected • Framing and the Materials List
and edited in 2D and 3D views. • Framing Specification Dialog
Trusses are covered in their own chapter, • Post Specification Dialog
“Trusses” on page 494.

460
CAFull_RM.book Page 461 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Framing Defaults
Select Edit> Default Settings to open on a room by room basis in the Room
the Default Settings dialog. Select Specification dialog, or for individual
Framing from the list, then click the Edit platforms using Joist Direction lines.
button to open the Framing Defaults dialog. See “Structure Tab” on page 286 and “Joist
Both automatic and manually-drawn framing Direction Lines” on page 482.
are generated according to the settings in the
Framing Defaults dialog. Wall Framing
This dialog is nearly identical to the Build Like other types of framing, wall framing is
Framing dialog in both appearance and generated based on settings in the Framing
function. The only difference is that the Defaults dialog. See “Wall Tab” on page
Build Framing dialog has checkboxes that 471, “Openings Tab” on page 473 and
allow you to automatically generate different “Headers Tab” on page 474.
types of framing in your plan. See “Build
In addition, though, wall framing is
Framing Dialog” on page 467.
dependent on settings from other sources:
Any changes made in the Framing Defaults • The wall type definition settings used by
or Build Framing dialogs will affect each wall type in the plan. See “Wall
subsequently drawn or generated framing, Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
but not framing already present in the plan.
• The definition of the framing material
assigned to each wall type used in a plan.
The settings in the Framing Defaults See “Material Types” on page 707.
dialog directly affect a variety of impor-
tant structural elements in each plan which In order for wall framing to automatically
determine floor, ceiling and roof heights; so it generate, a wall’s framing layer must be set
is best to set your Framing Defaults before as its Main Layer and its framing material
building your model. See “Drawing a Plan” on
just be a Framing type. See “The Main
page 35.
Layer” on page 242.
Floor and Ceiling Framing
Roof Framing
Floor and ceiling platform depths contribute
Settings on the Roof and Trusses tabs of the
to the overall height of a structure, so their
Framing Defaults dialog determine the
default values should be set as early as
structure of roof planes and how they rest on
possible. See “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
bearing walls, so it is important tht their
If you plan to draw floor trusses, also see default values be set before building the roof.
“Trusses Tab” on page 479. See “Roof Tab” on page 477 and “Trusses
Tab” on page 479.
The default floor and ceiling platform
settings for a given floor can be overridden

461
CAFull_RM.book Page 462 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Manual vs. Automatic Framing

If changes are made to these defaults that you need to rebuild the entire roof - not just the
need to apply to the entire roof plan, you will roof framing. See “Roofs” on page 374.

Manual vs. Automatic Framing

Platform, roof, and wall framing can be then click OK to build wall framing once
produced manually or automatically. In most based on the current state of the model.
cases, automatically-generated framing is • Select the Automatic checkbox, then
preferable because it is faster than manually click OK to build automatic framing
placing, replicating and editing numerous every time a change is made to that struc-
individual framing members. tural component in the plan. For example,
In many plans, though, framing is drawn check Automatic Wall Framing on the
using both approaches. For example, a Wall tab to rebuild all wall framing any
combination of automatically generated time a wall is affected by changes to the
rafters and manually drawn trusses can be model.
used to model a roof framing plan. See
“Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing” on Manual Framing
page 501.
Framing objects can also be drawn manually.
Regardless of how it is created, individual With the exception of Posts, framing objects
framing members can be selected and edited. are drawn by clicking and dragging in a
See “Editing Framing” on page 487. straight line, the way other line-based objects
are. See “Draw Line” on page 884.
Automatic Framing The manual framing tools are organized into
Automatic framing of floor and ceiling families: general framing, floor and ceiling
platforms, walls and roofs can be generated framing and roof framing. The family that a
using the Build Framing dialog. The settings drawing tool belongs to determines where it
in this dialog control the size, spacing, and can be used:
type of framing drawn in a plan, and related • Roof framing objects can only be drawn
structural information for the major within the area of one or more roof
components of the 3D model. See “Build planes.
Framing Dialog” on page 467.
• Floor and ceiling framing objects can
Automatic framing of a particular structural only be drawn within one or more floor
component is not generated until the Build or ceiling platforms.
Framing dialog is opened to the appropriate
tab and one of two checkboxes selected: • General Framing objects and
• Select the Build checkbox to build auto- Posts can be drawn anywhere in a
matic framing once. For example, check model.
Build Wall Framing on the Wall tab,

462
CAFull_RM.book Page 463 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• General Framing objects can also be Framing in the Wall Specification dialog.
drawn in CAD Details. See “CAD See “General Tab” on page 250.
Details” on page 917.
Mixing Rafters and Trusses
• Wall Bridging can only be drawn in
If you plan to mix roof trusses with rafters
a Wall Detail window. See “In Wall
and/or ceiling joists, you can save time by:
Detail Views” on page 486.
• Check Trusses (No birdsmouth) in the
Rebuilding Framing Build Roof dialog before automatically
building or manually drawing a roof. See
It is important to remember that by default, “Build Roof Dialog” on page 377.
framing does not update automatically when
• Draw and position all roof trusses before
changes are made to the model. For example,
using the automatic framing generator to
if a window is moved or resized, the wall
produce rafters and ceiling joists. See
framing must be rebuilt. If the footprint is
“Floor and Ceiling Trusses” on page 495.
enlarged, the wall framing and any roof or
platform framing that is affected must be Some other important things to consider:
rebuilt. • Rafters and joists that are parallel to a
You can direct the program to rebuild the roof truss are not generated closer than 14
automatic framing of floors/ceilings, walls inches (350mm) to the truss.
and/or roofs every time a change to the • Automatically produced rafters and joists
model affects one of these components. To do not cross an existing truss, but do gen-
do this, select the Automatic checkbox on erate from the eave inward until they butt
the Floor, Wall and/or Roof tabs of the Build into a truss.
Framing dialog.
• Rafters and hip ridges can pass over a
To learn more, see “Keeping Framing drop hip truss. See “Drop Hip or Califor-
Current” on page 488. nia Hip” on page 507.
When automatic framing associated with a • Lookouts can pass over a reduced gable
particular tab in the Build Framing dialog is truss.
built, any previously existing automatically • When rafters are parallel to trusses, the
produced framing of the same type is deleted tops of the rafters are placed in line with
and replaced. the tops of the trusses. Since the depth of
With the exception of wall framing, a rafter is normally greater than that of a
manually drawn framing is unaffected when truss's top chord, the lower rafter edge is
automatic framing is rebuilt and remains below the top plate of the supporting
along with the newly produced automatic wall, requiring a birdsmouth cut into the
framing. By default, manually drawn wall rafter. If the truss is raised to provide
framing is deleted when automatic framing is space for insulation, the rafter may not
rebuilt; however, you can prevent this from need to be cut at all. If the truss is raised
occurring by checking Retain Wall

463
CAFull_RM.book Page 464 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Framing Tools

too much, the rafter may not rest on the priate floor or ceiling framing. See
top plate at all. “Floor Tabs” on page 468.

Framing with Beams To build joists that butt against a beam

Floor/Ceiling Beams can be drawn in a 1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the

plan either before or after automatic framing desired location in your plan.
has been generated. If a beam is created
before automatic framing, you can specify 2. Select the beam and click the Open
whether joists bear on the beam or hang on Object edit button. On the General
its sides. tab of the Beam Specification dialog:
• Specify the desired Depth value and
To build joists that bear on a beam then lock it.
• Specify the Bottom Height value so
1. Draw a Floor/Ceiling Beam at the that it is equal to the Ceiling Height of
desired location in your plan. the room(s) over which the beam is
2. Select the beam and click the Open placed.
• Uncheck Bearing Beam.
Object edit button. On the General
tab of the Beam Specification dialog, 3. If necessary, select Build> Framing>
confirm that: Joist Direction Line and draw a line
• The Top Height value is equal to the perpendicular to the beam and within the
Ceiling Height of the room(s) over floor or ceiling platform.
which the beam is placed. 4. Click OK, then select Build> Framing>
• Bearing Beam is checked.
Build Framing and build the appro-
3. Click OK, then select Build> Framing> priate floor or ceiling framing. See
Build Framing and build the appro- “Floor Tabs” on page 468.

The Framing Tools

Select Build> Framing to access the The default settings for framing members are
automatic and manual Framing Tools. derived from their respective tabs in the
Framing Defaults dialog.
The Framing Tools family has three separate
parent buttons: General Framing Tools , Most types of framing can be created both
manually and automatically. Once created,
Floor/Ceiling Framing Tools , and Roof both automatically generated and manually
Framing Tools . drawn framing members can be selected and
edited. See “Editing Framing” on page 487.

464
CAFull_RM.book Page 465 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Automatic wall bridging can be created when

As a general rule, horizontal framing wall framing is built or rebuilt. See “Wall
members are referred to as "joists" Tab” on page 471.
(floor/ceiling platform framing); vertical fram-
ing members are referred to as "studs" (wall
framing); and sloped framing members are Post
referred to as rafters (roof framing).
Posts can only be placed manually. To
do so, select Build> Framing> Post
Build Framing and click in floor plan view. Placing a post
Select Build> Framing> Build on the lowest level of a plan also creates a
Framing to open the Build Framing footing.
dialog. Here, you can define settings that
control how framing is drawn and generate Rafter
automatic framing. See “Build Framing Rafters can be drawn both manually
Dialog” on page 467. and automatically. To draw a rafter
manually, select Build> Framing> Rafter,
General Framing in floor plan view, then click and drag in a
General Framing objects are generic, straight line within a roof plane.
framing members that can be drawn Rafters are edited like other framing
outside of a floor or ceiling platform or roof members, except that you cannot set the
plane. Select Build> Framing> General height. If a rafter is moved, its height and
Framing, then click and drag in a straight slope are automatically reset to fit under the
line to create one of these objects. In floor roof plane at its new position.
plan view, a horizontal framing member is
created; in a Wall Detail, vertical members Roof Blocking
can also be drawn. See “In Wall Detail
Views” on page 486. Roof blocking can only be drawn
manually. To do so, select Build>
Wall Bridging Framing> Roof Blocking in floor plan view
and click and drag in a straight line within a
Wall Bridging can be created both roof plane.
automatically and manually, but can
only be drawn manually in a Wall Detail Each run of blocking has gaps where it
Window. To do so, open a Wall Detail and crosses rafters, trusses or other blocking but
select CAD> Boxes & Framing> Wall behaves as a single object.
Bridging, then click and drag in a straight Blocking is typically drawn perpendicular to
line across the wall in the view. See “In Wall the rafters, but at the same pitch. so blocking
Detail Views” on page 486. as seen in floor plan view represents the
Each run of bridging has gaps where it position of the top of the blocking.
crosses studs, but behaves as a single object. Before drawing Roof Blocking:

465
CAFull_RM.book Page 466 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Framing Tools

• Specify whether you want In Line, Stag- • If there is no floor platform above, a ceil-
ger blocking, or Cross bridging in the ing joist is drawn.
Framing Defaults dialog. • If there is a floor platform above, a floor
• Build the roof framing. See “Roof Tab” joist is drawn.
on page 477.
If you want to draw floor joists for Floor 1,
In 3D, roof blocking is tilted to follow the for example, you must do so on Floor 0. See
pitch of the roof plane in which it is drawn. “Foundations” on page 362.
Joists can be automatically generated for
Roof Truss multiple floors in the Build Framing dialog.
Roof trusses can only be drawn See “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
manually. To do so, select Build>
Framing> Roof Truss in floor plan view Ceiling joists, floor joists and rafters
and click and drag in a straight line within have their own layers. Proper layer
one or more roof planes. Roof planes and assignment maximizes display and materials
either a default or manually drawn ceiling flexibility.
must be present before a roof truss can be
drawn. See “Roof Trusses” on page 495. Joist Blocking
Joist blocking can only be drawn
Roof Beam manually. To do so, select Build>
Roof beams can only be drawn Framing> Joist Blocking in floor plan view
manually. To do so, select Build> and click and drag in a straight line within a
Framing> Roof Beam in floor plan view floor or ceiling platform.
and click and drag in a straight line. Roof Each run of blocking behaves as a single
beams are normally be drawn across rafters object.
and placed directly under them.
Before drawing Joist Blocking:
Joist • Specify whether you want In Line, Stag-
ger blocking, or Cross bridging in the
Floor and ceiling joists can be drawn
Framing Defaults dialog.
both manually and automatically. To
manually draw a joist, select Build> • Build the floor and/or ceiling platform.
Framing> Joist in floor plan view, then See “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
click and drag in a straight line within a floor
or ceiling platform. Floor/Ceiling Truss
Joists are always drawn as the ceiling Floor and ceiling trusses can only be
framing for the current floor. See “The drawn manually. To do so, select
Current Floor” on page 358. Whether a floor Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss in
or ceiling joist is drawn is determined by the floor plan view and click and drag in a
presence of a floor platform above. straight line within a floor or ceiling

466
CAFull_RM.book Page 467 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

platform. See “Floor and Ceiling Trusses” on can only be drawn manually. To place one,
page 495. select Build> Framing> Framing
Reference Marker in floor plan view and
Floor/Ceiling Beam click to place a framing reference marker.

Floor and ceiling beams can only be A Framing Reference Marker can also
drawn manually. To draw one, select
Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Beam in be created by placing a Marker and then
floor plan view and click and drag in a specifing its type. See “Markers” on page
straight line within a floor or ceiling 867 and “Framing Reference Markers” on
platform. page 480.

Beams can be drawn in two different ways: Bearing Line

• Under Joists places the beam underneath
Bearing Lines direct the program to
the joists so the joists can bear on it.
lap or butt joists and/or rafters where
• With Joists places the top of the beam they cross the line instead of framing across
even with the tops of the joists it sup- it to the next wall and can only be drawn in
ports. The joist then butts against it. See floor plan view. To draw one, select Build>
“Posts/Beams Tab” on page 475. Framing> Bearing Line and click and drag
in a straight line. See “Bearing Lines” on
Beams should be placed before joists page 482.
are produced by automatic framing. If
With Joists is specified, the joists are cut by Joist Direction
and butted against the beam. If Under Joists
is specified, the joists are automatically Joist direction lines define the
butted or lapped over the beam. direction in which joists run in a floor
or ceiling platform and can only be drawn in
Framing Reference Marker floor plan view. To draw one, select Build>
Framing> Joist Direction and click and
Framing Reference Markers are drag within a floor or ceiling platform. See
reference points that specify how to “Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
lay out automatically-produced framing and

Build Framing Dialog

Automatic framing can be generated The Build Framing dialog is organized so
by selecting Build> Framing> Build that each major structural component of the
Framing to open the Build Framing dialog. model has its own tab or tabs. The number of
This dialog can also be accessed by double- tabs in the dialog varies depending on how
clicking either the Framing Tools button many floors are in your model. There is be a
tab called “1st” for the first floor, “2nd” for
or the Rafter tool. the second floor, and so on.

467
CAFull_RM.book Page 468 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Framing Dialog

• Floor and ceiling framing settings are • Roof framing settings are fouind on the
found on the Floor tabs. See “Floor Tabs” Roof and Trusses tabs. See “Roof Tab”
on page 468. on page 477 and “Trusses Tab” on page
• Wall framing settings are located on the 479.
Wall, Openings and Headers tabs. See • You can set the default materials used for
“Wall Tab” on page 471, “Openings Tab” framing on the Materials tab.
on page 473 and “Headers Tab” on page
474.

Floor Tabs
The Build Framing dialog opens to the Build Floor Framing check box will be
framing tab for the current floor, such as available. If there is no living space above
Foundation, 1st or 2nd. Each tab specifies the floor, the Build Ceiling Framing check
framing for specific floors or assemblies. box will be available instead.
Switch between tabs to define all settings. The platform structure settings defined here
The floor framing information for a given affect all rooms on the floor, but can be
floor is found on the Floor tab for the floor overridden for individual rooms in the Room
below it, because that is where the framing Specification dialog or for individual
will display in floor plan view when it is platforms using Joist Direction lines.
generated. For example, the floor framing See “Structure Tab” on page 286 and “Joist
information for Floor 2 is found on the 1st Direction Lines” on page 482.
tab, while the floor framing for Floor 1 is
found on the Foundation tab. By default, joists will automatically generate
in the direction that results in the shortest
To automatically generate the floor framing span; however, you can produce different
for Floor 1, a foundation on Floor 0 must be
present. If a Floor 0 has not been built, the results using Bearing Lines , Floor/Ceil-
Build Floor Framing check box on the ing Beams and/or Joist Direction
Foundation tab will not be available. lines. See “Bearing Lines” on page 482 and
“Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
Each Floor tab is divided into two halves:
• The right half is for floor framing specifi-
cations, and applies to the model when
the floor above is living space.
• The left half is for ceiling framing speci-
fications, and is relevant only when the
floor in question is the top floor of the
plan.
If there is living space above the floor
corresponding to a particular Floor tab, the

468
CAFull_RM.book Page 469 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1
2 8
3 9
4 10

5 11

6 12
7 13

1 Check Automatic Floor/Ceiling coincide with rafters. Be sure to build the

Framing to regenerate floor and ceiling roof framing first if you are doing this.
framing whenever changes are made to the
A Framing Reference Marker is not usually
model. See “Automatic Framing” on page
used for both ceiling joists and nearby rafters
462.
that run the same way because one is placed
2 Check Build ceiling framing to on top of the other.
generate or regenerate ceiling framing
For floor joists, the starting point for a joist
when the OK button is clicked. Build Ceiling
layout is always the Framing Reference
Framing is only available when there is no
Marker. See “Framing Reference Markers”
living space above at least part of the current
on page 480.
floor.
4 Specify whether the ceiling framing
3 Use Framing Reference - This applies members Lap or Butt over bearing
to ceiling framing only. The Framing
walls. The lap is eight inches (200 mm) and
Reference Marker is the starting point for
centered over the support.
framing layout. If a reference is placed, the
center of the first joist is placed at this point • When a Framing Reference Marker is
and spacing goes from there. If joists are used and Butt Over Support is checked,
lapped, the surface is placed at this point. the joists are placed at reference spacing.

If the check box is cleared, the program • If Lap is checked, the surfaces where the
attempts to position ceiling joists so that they joists lap are placed at reference spacing,

469
CAFull_RM.book Page 470 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Framing Dialog

so that joists are placed on either side of is only available when there is no living
the framing reference locations. space above at least part of the current floor.

5 Specify the spacing and size of the 9 Check Rim Joist to automatically
ceiling framing. produce a rim joist across the ends of
• Enter a value for the Spacing of ceiling the floor joists. If this is unchecked, line
joists above the current floor. blocking across the ends of the floor joists is
usually drawn in later.
• Specify the Joist Width, which is their
horizontal thickness. 10 Specify if the framing members Lap or
Butt over bearing walls. See #4, above.
• Specify the Joist Depth , which is their
vertical depth. This value affects the ceil-
11 Specify the spacing and size of the floor
ing platform thickness. framing.
The Joist Depth affects ceiling platform • Enter a value for the Spacing of floor
thicknesses and be overridden per room in joists above the current floor.
the Room Specification dialog. See • Specify the Subfloor Thickness, which
“Structure Tab” on page 286. is the thickness of the floor sheathing.

6 Select the Type of ceiling joist from the • Specify the Joist Width, which is their
drop-down list. See “Framing Member horizontal thickness.
Types” on page 489. • Specify the Joist Depth, which is their
The Type can be overridden per room in the vertical depth.
Room Specification dialog. See “Structure The Subfloor Thickness and Joist Depth both
Tab” on page 286. affect floor platform thicknesses and can be
overridden per room in the Room
7 Blocking / Bridging specifies how Specification dialog. See “Structure Tab” on
blocking is manually drawn after joists
have been placed. See “Joist Blocking” on page 286.
page 466. When viewing framing, Subfloor Thickness
• In Line produces blocking pieces that may be represented by a gap. To remove this
align with each other. gap, change the value to zero and rebuild the
• Stagger produces blocking that alternates framing. See “Structure Tab” on page 286.
on either side of the line you draw. If the material Concrete is applied to the
• Cross produces cross bridging that looks floor, platform thickness is specified in the
like in line blocking in floor plan view, Foundation Defaults dialog. See “Building
but shows as cross bridging in 3D views a Foundation” on page 366.
and the materials list.
12 Select the Type of floor joist from the
drop-down list. See #6, above.
8 Check Build floor framing to generate
or regenerate floor framing when the
OK button is clicked. Build Ceiling Framing

470
CAFull_RM.book Page 471 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

13 Specify how Blocking / Bridging is

manually drawn after joists have been
placed. See“Joist Blocking” on page 466.

Wall Tab
The Wall, Openings, and Headers tabs are all
referenced by the program to determine how You can still make changes to your plan
walls are framed. The settings on these three once you have framed your model. If
tabs define how automatic framing generates your changes affect framing, if a wall or ceil-
ing were moved for instance, rebuild framing
and how wall framing is calculated for the
to update the model.
Materials List.

1 2

1 Specify how Wall studs and bridging changes are made to the model. See
are built. “Automatic Framing” on page 462.
• Check Build Wall Framing to build wall • Check Use Wall Framing Material to
framing for the entire model. Framing is use the stud thickness and spacing
built in walls whose Main Layer material defined for the framing material used by
type is “framing”. See “Wall Type Defi- each wall type. See “Define Material
nitions” on page 241. Dialog” on page 719. Uncheck this box
• Check Automatic Wall Framing to to use the thickness and spacing values
regenerate wall framing whenever below for all wall types.

471
CAFull_RM.book Page 472 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Framing Dialog

• Specify the Stud Thickness for all walls angles are framed. 90 degree corners are not
in the plan. Stud depth is set by each affected by these settings.
wall's Main Layer thickness. Not avail- • Select Mitre Plate Ends to mitre the
able when Use Wall Framing Material is ends of the top and bottom plates. If
used. unchecked, top and bottom plates will be
• Specify the Stud Spacing for all walls in butted together.
the plan, starting from the Framing Ref- • Select Rotate End Studs to rotate the
erence Marker, if one is present. See studs closest to mitre ends to the angle of
“Framing Reference Markers” on page the mitre. If unchecked, studs will remain
480. Not available when Use Wall Fram- perpendicular to the angle of the walls.
ing Material is used.
• Select Horizontal Frame Thru to frame
• Check Build Wall Framing Details through the horizontal walls in floor plan
from Exterior to have Wall Detail views view, butting vertical walls against them.
display from the exterior of the plan If unchecked, walls that are vertical in
rather than the interior. See “In Wall floor plan view will frame through.
Detail Views” on page 486.
Specify where and how Bridging is drawn.
See “Wall Bridging” on page 465.
• Check Exterior to automatically produce
bridging on external walls when wall
framing is built.
• Check Interior to automatically produce
bridging on internal walls when wall
framing is built.
• In Line produces bridging pieces that
align with each other.
• Stagger produces bridging that alternates
on either side of a center line along the
wall.

2 Define how top and bottom Plates are

generated.
• Specify the Number of Top Plates, as
well as their Thickness.
• Specify the Number of Bottom Plates,
as well as their Thickness.

3 Mitre Ends of Angle Walls - Specify

how wall corners that are not right

472
CAFull_RM.book Page 473 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Openings Tab
The rough openings for doors and windows
can be specified in the Door and Window
Defaults dialogs. See “Default Settings” on
page 63.

1 2

1 Specify when to build more than one • Specify the Bay Component Thickness,
Trimmer, or stud shortened to support which is the thickness of a thinner trim-
a header, based on wall opening width. mer for bay/box/bow window component
• Double Trimmer At - Openings up to headers if a standard trimmer does not fit
this value in width have two trimmers on after the component window is manually
each side. resized. See “Resizing Components” on
page 329. The default for this value is 3/
• Triple Trimmer At - Openings up to this 4” (20mm).
value in width have three trimmers.
• Specify the Max Bay Trimmers , which 2 Specify the construction of the window
Sills, which refer to the framing below
is the maximum number of trimmers that
the window rather than the finished sill.
a bay, box or bow window with a lowered
top height can have on each side of the • Specify the Thickness for window sills.
opening. Enter 0 to suppress trimmers for • Check Double Sill to specify a double sill
bay/box/bow window opening headers. for all windows.

473
CAFull_RM.book Page 474 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Framing Dialog

Headers Tab

Chief Architect does not calculate loads or bearings. It is dependent upon user input
and does not attempt any structural analysis. Always consult your local building
authorities and contact a licensed engineer for structural calculations.

1
3
4
5
6
2

1 Specify the header depth dependent on 3 Specify the Thickness of all headers.
the opening width. These values should
be set so that the wider the opening, the
deeper the header. 4 Specify the Count of boards required to
make a header. Using this number, the
2 Check Precut to show precut headers program generates a count of header stock
in the Materials List. Precut headers are for you in the Materials List.
shown only if the walls have been framed.
When using stock as thin as 1-1/2 inches,
If this is unchecked, the Materials List headers are usually doubled or laminated, so
produces a total footage for all headers. the default number of boards making up a
When checked, each different length of header in Count is 2.
precut header is listed separately. Note that
the total number of headers is twice the 5 If the top of the rough opening is closer
to the top plate than the value in Max
number of openings if Count is set to 2.
Depth, a solid header is produced to fill the
entire area. This disables the building of

474
CAFull_RM.book Page 475 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

short cripple studs between the top of the

6 Specify the Type of material used for
header top and bottom of the plate. The headers. See “Framing Member Types”
default of 12 1/16 inch works well for 6’8” on page 489.
headers in 8’0” walls.

Posts/Beams Tab
Posts and beams not produced with the
automatic framing. They can only be drawn
manually.

2
3
1 4

5
6

1 Specify the size of the beams in the 3 Specify the Rebar and Wrap for
plan. concrete beams. Only available if the
• Specify the beams’ vertical Depth. beam Type is “solid concrete”.

• Specify the beam Thickness, which • Specify the Size Number for both Rebar
appears as width in floor plan view. and Wrap.
• Specify the # Bars, or number of bars, for
2 Select the Type of beam from the drop- both Rebar and Wrap.
down list. See “Framing Member
Types” on page 489. • Specify the distance both Rebar and
Wrap Extend.

4 Under Joists/With Joists - A beam can

be drawn under the joists or up in the

475
CAFull_RM.book Page 476 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Framing Dialog

floor platform with the joists. If floor joist • Specify the Width of the automatically
depths and subfloor thickness have been set produced footing under a new post.
in the Build Framing dialog, the beam height • Specify the Height of the automatically
is properly positioned even if the joists have produced footing under a new post.
not yet been produced. If With Joists is
specified, the beams should be drawn before • Select the Square or Round radio button
framing is automatically produced. Then the to specify the shape of post footings.
joists are broken and butted to the beam. • Specify the Size Number and number of
bars (# Bars) for post footing Rebar.
5 Outer Layer/Main Layer - When a
beam is drawn along and over an
exterior wall, its outer surface snaps to either
the wall’s outer layer or outer main layer, as
specified here.
Posts are produced manually by clicking in
floor plan view where a post is desired using
the Post tool.

6 Post Initial Values -

• Dimension - A post is created initially
square with each side having this dimen-
sion. It can be subsequently edited to
have a rectangular shape with any dimen-
sions.
• Select the Type of post from the drop-
down list.
• Specify the Rebar and Wrap for posts.
See #3, above. Only available if the post
Type is “solid concrete”.

7 Post Footing Initial Values - When a

post is created on the lowest floor of a
plan and inside a floor platform, a footing for
it is automatically produced and included in
the Materials List. See “Materials Lists” on
page 1048.
• Specify the Top (from floor) value,
which is the distance from the top of the
footing to the bottom of the floor plat-
form.

476
CAFull_RM.book Page 477 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Roof Tab
The settings on the Roof tab of the Build
Framing dialog are exactly the same as those
on the Framing tab of the Build Roof dialog.
See “Build Roof Dialog” on page 377.

1 3

1 Roof - Note: Use Framing Reference is useful when

framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a hip
• Check Build Roof Framing to build roof roof. See “Framing References and Roof
framing for the entire model. Only avail- Framing” on page 481.
able if roof planes are present in the plan.
See “Roofs” on page 374. • Check Angled Dormer Hole to create a
• Check Automatic Roof Framing to 5-sided hole in a roof plane to accomo-
automatically rebuild roof framing if date a gable dormer. The two top edges of
changes are made to the roof plan. See the hole are located under the dormer val-
“Automatic Framing” on page 462. leys, and an angled double-header runs
between the doubled rafters on one side
• Check Use Framing Reference to use a
to the ridge. A shorter angled doubled
defined starting point for rafter layout.
header frames the opposite valley.
See “Framing Reference Markers” on
page 480.
If Angled Dormer Hole is unchecked, a
rectangular hole is framed under the dor-

477
CAFull_RM.book Page 478 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Build Framing Dialog

mer. A double header is placed where the • Select the Rafter Type from the drop-
peak of the dormer roof meets the main down list. See “Framing Member Types”
roof plane, and rafters are placed under on page 489.
the dormer valleys.
2 Specify how Blocking/Bridging is
manually drawn after rafters have been
If the double header does not fit within
placed. A row of blocking is drawn and can
the main roof plane, angled headers are
be moved and edited as a single object, but
produced regardless of this setting.
displays as separate pieces separated by the
rafters. See “Roof Blocking” on page 465.
• In Line produces blocking pieces that
align with each other.
• Stagger produces blocking that alternates
on either side of the line you draw.
• Cross produces cross bridging that looks
like in line blocking in floor plan view,
rectangular dormer Angled Dormer Hole but shows as cross bridging in 3D views
hole and the materials list.
• Uncheck Generate Fascia if you do not 3 Specify the desired Width and Depth
want fascia boards on the roof eaves. If for Rafters, the Ridge, Lookouts,
unchecked, the Gable Fascia and Eave Gable Sub Fascia, Eave Sub Fascia, Gable
Fascia options under Roof Size will be Fascia, Eave Fascia and Blocking.
unavailable.
• Uncheck Generate Eave Sub Fascia if
you do not want subfascia boards on the
roof eaves. If unchecked, Eave Sub Fas-
cia under Roof Size will be unavailable.
• Uncheck Trim To Soffits to generate
full-depth rafters all the way to the sub-
fascia. If checked, rafter depths are
trimmed to the top surface of the soffits
in the eave area. See “Rafter Tails” on
page 425.
• Specify the Spacing of automatically
generated rafters. This also sets the initial
offset value for laying out rafters using
the Multiple Copy edit button. See
“Multiple Copy” on page 194.

478
CAFull_RM.book Page 479 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Trusses Tab
The parameters set in this tab apply to any The program uses these values to model
subsequently drawn trusses. They can be trusses for graphic representation only.
overridden for any selected group of trusses
using the Truss Specification dialog. See
Chief Architect does not engineer
“Trusses” on page 494. trusses. Always consult an engineer or
truss company to have your trusses profes-
sionally designed.

1 3

2 4
5

1 Member Depth - Specify the depth of needed to support the chords at or closer than
the truss chords and webbing. the specified maximum spans.
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord.
3 The Maximum Span settings control
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. the maximum length between junctions
of the supporting webbing to the Top Chord
• Specify the depth of the Webbing
and Bottom Chord. Changing these values
2 For triangular trusses, check Require may cause different truss configurations such
Kingpost to require a vertical member as kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink,
from the roof peak to the bottom chord. fan, howe, or double howe to be represented.
If this is not checked, a vertical member may These distances are measured horizontally
still be supplied, depending on what is for both roof and floor and ceiling trusses. In

479
CAFull_RM.book Page 480 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Framing Reference Markers

some instances, especially in more complex spacing can be set in the Multiple Copy
trusses, making these spans equal may result dialog. See “Multiple Copy Dialog” on page
in the webbing appearing more normal or 194.
standard. See “Trusses” on page 494.
Materials Tab
4 Select either Roof or Floor/Ceiling to
specify whether the settings apply to The Materials tab sets the default materials
Roof or Floor/Ceiling trusses. used for framing objects in 3D views. These
material specifications are not used for
4 Specify the Ceiling Step, which is the material take-offs. Materials List information
maximum distance its bottom chord can
step down to locate a ceiling on the floor is derived from the structure type of each
below the top floor. See “Ceiling Steps” on framing object.
page 497. Changes made on the Materials tab of the
Build Framing dialog only affect
Truss Spacing subsequently created framing, whether it is
automatically generated or manually drawn.
Trusses are always drawn manually, so while
their depth, span and kingpost defaults are The settings in the Materials tab of the Build
specified in the Build Framing dialog, their Framing dialog are the same as in many
spacing is not. other specification dialogs. See “Materials
Tab” on page 709.
Trusses are typically replicated using the
Multiple Copy edit button, and their

Framing Reference Markers

Framing Reference Markers are
reference points that specify how to It is a good idea to place a single fram-
lay out automatically-produced framing. ing reference marker on Floor 1. If no
Layout for wall, ceiling and floor framing framing reference markers exist in your plan,
the point at 0, 0 is used as the framing refer-
starts at the framing reference marker closest ence marker location and unexpected results
to the center of the area to be framed. may occur.
If no framing reference marker is found on
the floor being framed, the closest framing The placement of automatically generated
reference marker on the first floor is used. wall framing is based on the framing
Normally, a single framing reference marker reference marker; however, floor, ceiling and
on Floor 1 is used for the entire model. roof framing placement is not.
You can elect to use the framing reference
marker for positioning rafters and ceiling

480
CAFull_RM.book Page 481 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

joists in the Build Framing dialog. See

The Move to Framing Ref edit button
“Build Framing Dialog” on page 467.
may also reference spacing specific to a
particular floor or ceiling platform. See
Placing Framing “Joist Direction Lines” on page 482.
Reference Markers
A group of selected framing objects that are
To place a Framing Reference Marker, select all parallel to each other can be moved using
Build> Framing> Framing Reference
the Move to Framing Ref edit button.
Marker . Click in floor plan view to Only one of the objects in the group is
place the framing reference marker. compared to the framing reference marker
and moved; the remaining objects are simply
When Object Snaps are enabled, moved the same amount as the first object.
framing reference markers snap to framing Ideally, therefore, the group should have
members and other CAD-based objects first, proper spacing relative to each other before
and then to a wall main layer surface or the move.
corner if possible.
To move framing objects to a framing
Framing Reference Markers can be reference marker
modified just like other markers. See
“Markers” on page 867. 1. Group select the framing objects.
When automatic framing is produced using
the framing reference marker, a corner of the 2. Click the Move to Framing Ref edit
first framing member snaps to this point and button.
all other framing members are laid out from 3. The framing members are moved to the
there. nearest Framing Reference Marker.

Using Framing References Framing References and

Manually drawn framing and
Roof Framing
automatic framing that was not Framing Reference Markers are useful when
generated based on a framing reference framing a gable roof, but not necessarily a
marker can be moved the correct distance hip roof. When a Framing Reference is used,
from a framing reference marker using the common rafters on either side of a hip rafter
Move to Framing Ref edit button. do not meet in the same place.
When a framing member is moved relative to If the Framing Reference is not used, the
a framing reference marker using the Move automatic framing utility starts common
to Framing Ref edit button, the on- rafter spacing from each end of the
center spacing distance set in the Build horizontal ridges, which results in common
Framing dialog is used. rafters on either side of hip jacks meeting
each other.

481
CAFull_RM.book Page 482 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Bearing Lines

Bearing Lines
Bearing Lines direct the program to Bearing lines snap to the center of nearby
lap or butt joists and/or rafters where parallel walls when framing is built.
they cross the line instead of framing across
it to the next wall.

Select Build> Framing> Bearing Line ,

then click and drag to draw a bearing line as
you would draw a CAD line. Bearing lines
are edited just like CAD lines or polylines, as
well. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 147 or “Editing Open Polyline Based
Objects” on page 155.
If a bearing line exists, the program laps or
butts the joist and/or rafters over the line, Joists butting over a Bearing
depending on the option selected in the Build Line and interior wall
Framing dialog. See “Floor Tabs” on page
A platform can be split into two by a bearing
468.
line, and the joist direction and/or depth can
be specified separately on each side of the
bearing line. Each platform takes on
properties given by the joist direction line it
contains. See “Joist Direction Lines” on page
482.

Placing a Floor/Ceiling Beam in a plan

can also have the same effect as a Bearing
Line when Bearing Beam is checked in its
Beam Specification dialog. See “Framing
Joists lapping over a Bearing Line
Specification Dialog” on page 490.
A bearing line should start outside the floor
or ceiling platform and end outside of it,
passing completely through the building.

Joist Direction Lines

A Joist Direction line defines the floor or ceiling platform in which it is drawn,
direction in which joists run in the as well as their depth and spacing.

482
CAFull_RM.book Page 483 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

If a direction line is not specified, joists are Select Build> Framing> Joist
run the way that results in the shortest span Direction and draw a joist direction line
using the depth and spacing settings in the just as you would draw a CAD line.
Framing Defaults dialog.
The text along the joist direction line states
Each floor in a plan can have more than one the joist size and spacing for the platform.
floor platform, and each floor platform can These values reflect the settings in the
have its own joist direction. Framing Defaults dialog. See “Floor Tabs”
on page 468.

Joist Direction
Specification Dialog
A Joist Direction Line controls the joist
depth and spacing information for the floor
or ceiling platform in which it is drawn.
To change this information, select a joist
direction line and click the Open Object
edit button. The Joist Direction
Specification dialog opens.

• Define the joist Spacing for the platform.

• Define the Depth for these joists.

483
CAFull_RM.book Page 484 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Joist Direction Lines

Normally, the program produces a floor

Note: This is not the recommended method platform under the second floor living area
for specifying joist depth. You should instead and a ceiling platform under the eave area,
use the settings in the Room Specification which is not a room area.
dialog.
This is fine if the first floor has supporting
The Joist Direction Line affects the joists in walls or a large beam under the second floor
the entire platform, but does not change the kneewalls. If it does not, the floor platform
settings in the Build Framing or Room should extend to the first floor outside
Specification dialogs. Settings in the Joist supporting walls, replacing the ceiling joists.
Direction Specification dialog affect
Use joist direction lines to define separate
subsequently produced framing only in the
floor platforms under the second floor living
platform that contains the selected joist
area and ceiling platforms under the attic
direction.
eave area or one continuous framed platform
across both spaces.
Using Joist Direction Lines
To connect a floor and ceiling platform into a
Two Joist Direction lines, one on either side
of a Bearing Line, can divide a single floor single platform, draw a Joist Direction
or ceiling platform into two, allowing you to line that crosses the boundary between them.
define different framing specifications for Following is a diagram of the original
each area. framing with the new Joist Direction Line
A less common application would be to use a spanning the knee wall area.
single joist direction line across two separate
platforms in order to define a single framing New Joist
specification for both platforms. This is Direction Line
illustrated by the following example:
A 1 1/2 story house is shown in cross section
in the diagram.
Original
Framing

Ceiling Platform Floor Platform

484
CAFull_RM.book Page 485 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

(Note: Several framing members have been

deleted to make the new Joist Direction Line
more visible.)
Although the framing of the 2nd floor
platform is being edited here, the joist
direction is drawn on the first floor. In Chief
Architect, floor platform framing displays Knee Wall on 2nd
with the floor below, so its joist direction Floor shown in
reference
information must be placed there, as well.
Next, rebuild the floor framing for the
second floor and the ceiling framing for the
first floor. The floor framing now spans into
the area which was previously framed using
ceiling joists.

The 3D view of the framing also reflects the

change.

Floor and Ceiling

Joists combined

Displaying Framing
The display of framing members is In Floor Plan View
controlled in the Layer Display
Options dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on Joists, rafters and trusses are represented in
page 117. floor plan view by line-based CAD objects

485
CAFull_RM.book Page 486 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Framing

that are essentially long, thin rectangles. See You can also use the Delete Surface tool
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147. to temporarily delete the surfaces of wall
If you prefer, framing and trusses can instead layers or other objects that block the view.
be represented by a single line. See “Line In cross section/elevation views, framing
Properties Panel” on page 90. objects that are cut by the cross section plane
By default, framing polylines have a solid display as boxes containing an ’X’.
white fill, and new members display in front
of older ones, helping to distinguish newer In Wall Detail Views
members from those drawn previously. You
Wall Details are a special type of wall
can specify whether new framing members
elevation view in which only the studs, plates
are drawn with this fill. See “CAD Defaults
and headers used to frame a selected wall
and Preferences” on page 875.
display. They are the only views in which
In 3D Views Wall Bridging can be built. See “Wall
Bridging” on page 465.
The easiest way to view framing in 3D is to
use either the Orthographic Framing A Wall Detail view for each framed wall in
your plan is automatically created by the
Overview or Perspective Framing program and saved in the Project Browser
Overview tool, which display the model when wall framing is built. See “The Library
using the 3D Framing Set layer set. See Browser” on page 683.
“Framing Overview” on page 752.
After wall framing has been built, select a
Framing objects can display in other 3D and wall and click the Open Wall Detail edit
cross section/elevation views, although by button to open its Wall Detail. See “Editing
default they are not set to do so. If you wish Walls” on page 231.
to see framing in other views, turn on the
framing layers in the appropriate layer set. Most wall framing members occupy the
entire thickness of the wall’s framing layer.
To reveal framing covered by other objects Some, notably doubled headers or corner
or wall layers, use the Delete Surface sheetrock nailers, may be turned sideways.
tool. See “Delete 3D Surface” on page 757. Double or triple headers display one behind
the other in a Wall Detail. You can select
In Cross Section/ them using the Select Next Object edit
Elevation Views button. See “Select Next Object” on page
146.
To display framing in a cross section/
elevation view, make sure the framing layers By default, Wall Details show walls as
are turned on in the default layer set for viewed from the interior. You can specify
Cross Sections. See “Layer Set Defaults whether Wall Details are viewed from the
Dialog” on page 129. interior or exterior in the Build Framing
dialog. See “Wall Tab” on page 471.

486
CAFull_RM.book Page 487 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The framing members of an individual wall Wall Specification dialog. See “General
can be selected and edited in its Wall Detail. Tab” on page 250.
If you rebuild wall framing after manually
As with regular 3D views, Wall Details can
editing in a Wall Detail, your changes will be
be sent to layout and printed. See “Layout”
lost. To protect changes made to a wall’s
on page 1014 and “Printing & Plotting” on
framing, check Retain Wall Framing in the
page 992.

Editing Framing
Framing members can be individually • Click a side surface to display the same
selected in all views. Some framing members edit handles as in an elevation view, one
can be group selected. Once selected, at each end and one at the center.
framing members can be edited using the edit • Zoom in and click on the appropriate
handles, edit toolbar buttons, or the Framing edge to display edit handles that control
Specification dialog. See “Framing the width and depth of framing members.
Specification Dialog” on page 490.
Using Dimensions
Using the Edit Handles
Framing members can be both moved and
Framing members can be drawn, edited and resized using dimensions. See “Moving
moved much the way CAD lines can. See Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
“Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147.
In Cross Section/Elevation views, joists and Using the Edit Tools
rafters cut by the cross section and displaying
A selected framing member can be edited in
a cross box can also be edited. See “Editing
a variety of ways using the buttons on the
Box-Based Objects” on page 164. Also, in
edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on
Cross Section/Elevation views headers can
page 1140.
be edited like closed polylines. See “Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
160. Mitered Joints
In a camera view or overview, the handles Mitered joints can be created using the Fillet
that display on a framing member depend on Two Lines edit button. Click on the end
where it is clicked for selection and your edge of a framing member such as a joist,
current zoom factor.
click the Fillet Two Lines edit button,
• Click the top surface to display the same then click on the end edge of another nearby
edit handles as in floor plan view, allow- joist to extend one framing item to another
ing you to rotate, move, and extend or framing item and join them with angled cut.
shorten the length of the member. See “Fillet Two Lines” on page 186.

487
CAFull_RM.book Page 488 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Keeping Framing Current

Roof and Floor Trusses objects in the program are. See “Deleting
Objects” on page 196.
Roof and floor trusses cannot be edited like
regular framing members can and are Categories of framing, such as wall
discussed in their own chapter. See “Editing framing or floor and ceiling framing,
Truss Envelopes” on page 499. can also be deleted in the Delete Objects
dialog. See “Delete Objects Dialog” on page
Deleting Framing 197.

Individual and group-selected framing

members can be deleted the way other

Keeping Framing Current

When you modify your plan, move walls, made to that structural component in the
raise or lower platforms or redesign the roof, plan. For example, check Automatic
any framing present in the plan will not Wall Framing on the Wall tab to rebuild
update to reflect your changes. In order for all wall framing any time a wall is
the framing to be updated, you must affected by changes to the model.
regenerate automatically produced framing
When floor, ceiling or roof framing is
and either edit or delete and replace manual
regenerated, all automatically produced
framing.
framing objects and any copies of them are
For this reason, it is recommended that you deleted and new framing is calculated. See
wait until your model is finished, or nearly “Rebuilding Framing” on page 463.
finished, before creating framing. See
“Drawing a Plan” on page 35. Manual Framing
It is vital to remember that manually drawn
Automatic Framing
framing objects and copies of them are not
Automatically-generated framing can be retained when automatic framing is rebuilt.
rebuilt using either of two checkboxes in the
If a plan is not final, therefore, do not spend a
Build Framing dialog:
lot of time altering or copying automatically
• Select a Build checkbox to build auto- produced framing objects. It is best to wait
matic framing once. For example, check until your design is final before doing
Build Wall Framing on the Wall tab to manual framing work.
build wall framing once based on the cur-
rent state of the model. If the model is
changed later, you may need to do this
again.
• Select an Automatic checkbox to build
automatic framing every time a change is

488
CAFull_RM.book Page 489 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Framing and the Materials List

Each framing member created in a plan is and the Materials List produces a count
counted in the Materials List. This list is as of the rafters found in the model.
accurate as the framing in the plan that
produces it. See “Materials Lists” on page Framing Member Types
1048.
There are a variety of framing member types
Depending on what a framing member is available for use in Chief Architect: lumber,
used for, it may be listed as R (Roofing), SF I-joist, glulam, engineered lumber, lvl, steel
(Sub Floor), or F (Framing – general). I, steel box, solid concrete, C channel, and U
R (Roofing) includes trusses, rafters and channel.
sheathing . You can select any of these types as the
SF (Sub Floor) lists floor and ceiling framing default for floor and ceiling framing,
joists including sheathing. headers, beams and roof framing. See “Build
Framing Dialog” on page 467.
F (Framing – general) includes all wall
framing, posts and General Framing objects. You can also specify the type for individual
framing members in their specification
It is important to note that the framing in the dialog. See “General Tab” on page 490.
Materials List can be calculated in either of
two ways: Changing the framing member type does not
affect how framing is placed, but it does
• If no framing has been produced in the change its appearance in cross section and
model, then the amount of framing that 3D views and in the Materials List.
would be produced is estimated as accu-
rately as possible. Total lineal footage for
Framing Materials and
various depths of rafter and joist material
is given, rather than a quantity of specific the Materials Tab
lumber lengths and sizes. The settings on the Materials tab of the Build
• If framing objects exist, then the framing Framing and Framing Specification dialogs
members are counted instead of esti- specify the materials used for framing
mated for the Materials List. objects in 3D views. These material
specifications are not used in the Materials
Roof framing is treated the same way. List, however.
• If no roof framing objects are found, an
Materials List information is derived from
estimation is done.
the structural use of each framing object and
• If even one rafter is created, the program its Type - not the texture on its surfaces in 3D
assumes roof framing has been produced views.

489
CAFull_RM.book Page 490 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Framing Specification Dialog

Framing Specification Dialog

Select a floor or ceiling joist, wall stud or The options available in this dialog may vary
rafter and click the Open Object edit depending on the type of object selected.
button to open the Framing Specification The settings in this dialog are similar to those
dialog for the framing member type selected. in the Beam Specification dialog. See
“Framing with Beams” on page 464.

General Tab

1 3
4
5
6

1 Depth and Height - Click the radio • Specify the Top Height of the post, as
button beside one of the height values measured from the first floor subfloor at
to lock it, then change a value that remains 0”. For a rafter, this is the top height at its
available. Changing the Top Height, Bottom low end.
Height or Depth may change the other two • Specify the Bottom Height of the post,
values. as measured from the first floor subfloor

490
CAFull_RM.book Page 491 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

at 0”. For a rafter, this is the bottom • Select Lock End to resize or rotate the
height its low end. object about the location where you
• Specify the Depth of the framing object. stopped drawing it.
For a rafter, this is the depth measured
perpendicular to the roof plane. 3 Check Bearing Beam to specify the
selected Floor/Ceiling Beam as a load-
• Click the radio button beside Raise/ bearing beam. When checked, automatically
Lower to enable it, then enter a value to generated joists run perpendicular to the
raise or lower the framing object from its selected beam and either lap or butt over it,
current position. Once a value is entered, as specified in the Build Framing dialog. See
the other controls are disabled. The “Floor Tabs” on page 468. Only available for
amount is added to both the top height Floor/Ceiling Beams.
and the bottom height when you click
OK, and does not affect the depth. 4 Set the framing member’s Thickness,
which appears as its width in floor plan
• Manual Rafter Height - Normally, the view.
height of each Rafter or Roof Beam end
is reset after any move or edit so that it is 5 Type - Select a type of structural
member from the drop-down list. See
located just under the roof surface. Check
“Framing Member Types” on page 489.
this box to allow the height of the object
to be changed. Only available for Rafters
and Roof Beams. Note: If the beam Type is specified as con-
crete, the beam does not appear as such in
2 Length and Angle - Lock the point the Materials List. Instead, the amount of
about which you want like the selected concrete required for all such beams and for
object to resize and/or rotate, then specify its all such posts is listed. In addition, the square
exact length and angle. footage required for beam forms, and for post
forms is also listed.
• Length of the framing object. Rafter
length is measured along the top of the
rafter, and so is greater than the length 6 Specify the Rebar and Wrap for
concrete beams. Only available for
measured in floor plan view. Beams when “Solid Concrete” is selected
• Angle of the framing object in floor plan from the Type drop-down list.
view. Changing this rotates the object • Specify the Size Number for both Rebar
about the location specified by the radio and Wrap.
buttons described below.
• Specify the # Bars, or number of bars, for
• Select Lock Center to resize or rotate the both Rebar and Wrap.
object about its center point.
• Specify the distance both Rebar and
• Select Lock Start to resize or rotate the Wrap Extend.
object about the location from which you
started drawing the framing object.

491
CAFull_RM.book Page 492 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Post Specification Dialog

Line Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. “Materials Tab” on page 709.

Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Post Specification Dialog

General Tab

1
3
4

1 Post Height - Click the radio button Height, Bottom Height or Total Height may
beside a height value to lock it, then change to the other values.
change an unlocked value. Changing the Top

492
CAFull_RM.book Page 493 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Specify the Top Height of the post, as

3 Type - Select a type from the drop-
measured from the first floor subfloor at down list. See “Framing Member
0”. Types” on page 489.
• Specify the Bottom Height of the post,
as measured from the first floor subfloor 4 Specify the Rebar and Wrap for
concrete posts. Only available when
at 0”. “Solid Concrete” is selected from the Type
• Specify the Total Height of the post, drop-down list.
which is the difference between the Top • Specify the Size Number for both Rebar
and Bottom Heights. and Wrap.
• Click the radio button beside Raise/ • Specify the # Bars, or number of bars, for
Lower to enable it, then enter a value to both Rebar and Wrap.
raise or lower the post from its current
• Specify the distance both Rebar and
position. When Raise/Lower is selected,
Wrap Extend.
the other controls are disabled. The
amount is added to both the top height
and the bottom height when you click Note: If a concrete Type is specified, the post
OK, and does not affect the total height. is not listed as such in the Materials List.
Instead, the amount of concrete required for
2 Post Width 1 & 2- Specify the post all concrete beams and posts is listed. The
square footage required for beam forms, and
width in each dimension.
for post forms is also listed.
• Specify the Angle of the post’s rotation.

493
CAFull_RM.book Page 494 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 16:

Trusses

There are two basic ways to frame a roof.

The first is commonly called “stick framing,” Always have your truss designs
or sometimes “handstacking” or “cut-and- approved by a licensed engineer.
stack.” This type of roof incorporates
framing such as rafters, ridges, and ceiling Chapter Contents
joists. See “Framing” on page 460. • Truss Defaults
• Floor and Ceiling Trusses
The other method is to use prefabricated,
• Roof Trusses
engineered roof trusses. Chief Architect
• Editing Trusses
allows you to design and display a wide
• Editing Truss Envelopes
variety of trusses.
• Truss Labels
• Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing
Disclaimer • Truss Bases
Chief Architect does not engineer trusses. • Truss Base Specification Dialog
The trusses displayed by Chief Architect are • Hip Trusses
for illustrative purposes only. They can show • Girder Trusses
how trusses are used in your plan, and help • Scissors Trusses
you communicate to the licensed engineer • Roof Truss Specification Dialog
who produces your final truss design where • Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog
you want your trusses and how you would
like them to work.

494
CAFull_RM.book Page 495 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Truss Defaults
The default settings for floor, ceiling The overall depth of individual floor and
and roof trusses are set in the Framing ceiling trusses are based on the thicknesses
Defaults dialog. Select Edit> Default of the platforms in which they are drawn. See
Settings and in the Default Settings dialog, “Floor Tabs” on page 468.
select Framing and click the Edit button.
The structure of roof trusses is determined by
The default settings for truss chord and the position of the roof plane(s) above and
webbing depth, maximum span, and kingpost the ceiling plane(s) below. See “Roof Planes”
are set in the Framing Defaults dialog. See on page 385 and “Ceiling Planes” on page
“Trusses Tab” on page 479. 408.

Floor and Ceiling Trusses

Floor and ceiling trusses can be used Roof trusses seek an exterior wall and adjust
instead of joists to frame platforms. their length automatically. Floor trusses do
As with manually-drawn floor and ceiling not, but if you start or end your truss close to
framing, the room type above determines a wall surface or CAD object, the truss snaps
whether a floor or ceiling truss is drawn. For to the surface or object.
example, a truss drawn on the first floor of a
The Trusses tab of the Build Framing dialog
single story home will be a ceiling truss,
contains default settings for floor and ceiling
while a truss drawn on the first floor of a
trusses. See “Trusses Tab” on page 479.
two-story building will be a floor truss for
These default settings can be overridden by
the 2nd floor.
the settings in the Floor/Ceiling Truss
To place a floor or ceiling truss in your plan, Specification dialog. See “Floor/Ceiling
select Build> Framing> Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog” on page 513.
Truss . Click and drag to create a truss in
floor plan view.

Roof Trusses
Roof trusses can only be drawn If you intend to use roof trusses, you need
manually, and can only be created first to build your roof planes with this in
where roof and ceiling planes already are mind. Before building the roof, select the
present. Select Build> Framing> Roof Trusses (no birdsmouth) check box in the
Truss, then click and drag in floor plan view Build Roof dialog. When this is checked,
within one or more roof planes to manually roof plane thickness is based on the default
draw a roof truss. Top Chord Depth set in the Framing

495
CAFull_RM.book Page 496 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Trusses

Defaults dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on page happens, it will end exactly on the surface of
479. the existing truss, producing a girder truss.
See “Girder Trusses” on page 509.
If Trusses (no birdsmouth) is not checked,
the roof plane thickness is determined by the Trusses can end on interior walls. You can
rafter Depth setting on the Roof tab. draw a truss that partially crosses the
building by starting and/or ending it within
Draw a truss as you would a CAD line, by
two feet (600mm) of an interior wall. The
dragging from the start of the truss to the
truss extends over the wall’s Main Layer. Its
end. The first truss can be drawn over a gable
end lines up with the Main Layer surface on
end wall or at the ridge end of a hip roof. The
the far side of the wall.
program shapes the truss so that it fits
properly between the roof and ceiling planes.
Roof Truss Webbing
Roof Truss Placement The webbing in a newly drawn truss is
controlled by the Top Chord and Bottom
A roof truss can only exist in the space
Chord settings in the Framing Defaults
defined by the roof planes above it and the
dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on page 479.
ceiling planes below it. This is because the
shape of a truss is defined by the location of Changing these default values may cause
the roof and the ceiling. different truss configurations such as
kingpost, queenpost, fink, double fink, fan,
If Ceiling over this room is unchecked in
howe, or double howe to be represented.
the Room Specification dialog, you must
manually draw a Ceiling Plane before a When Trusses (no birdsmouth) is selected
roof truss can be drawn over that room. See and Raise Off Plate is zero, the bottom edge
“Structure Tab” on page 286. of the bottom chord bears on the top of the
exterior supporting walls at the outside edge
If the program either does not find both roof of the Main Layer.
and ceiling planes, or if there is not enough
room between them, to model a truss, a The bottom chord can be raised to produce
warning message displays. For example, if an energy heel using the Raise Off Plate
you draw a truss in a roof overhang where setting in the Build Roof dialog.
there is no ceiling , this message displays:
Attic Trusses
“Roof and ceiling surfaces too close together
or cannot be found, so cannot make truss.” Attic trusses, a variation of roof trusses, can
be drawn if a plan contains an Attic area on
The incorrect truss may still display in floor both sides and above an upstairs room, such
plan view with a label of the form “TR-*”. If as in a Cape Cod style home. The following
it does, it should be deleted or moved. See is a typical cross section view of a building
“Editing Trusses” on page 498. with attic trusses:
One or both ends of a truss may be truncated
if they are drawn across another truss. If this

496
CAFull_RM.book Page 497 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2. Select the Attic Truss check box and

click OK. See “Roof Truss Specification
Knee walls
Dialog” on page 510.
The final product can be scrutinized in a
framing overview or in the Truss Detail
window. See “Truss Details” on page 499.

Flat ceilings Ceiling Steps

Certain conditions must be met before an If a roof truss is drawn across areas with
attic truss can be built: different ceiling heights on the top floor of a
plan, the bottom chord will automatically
• The structure should be sufficiently wide step to accomodate those ceiling heights.
to allow for a loft and attic spaces.
In addition, a roof truss can be made to
• The loft area must be on a living floor. It
recognize ceiling heights on two different
cannot be on the Attic floor. See “The
floors: one on the top floor of the structure
Attic Floor” on page 359.
and one on the floor below.
• The loft area must have Attic rooms on
both sides. See “Room Types” on page
271.
• The loft area must be separated from the
Attic rooms on both sides by Knee Walls.
See “Knee Walls” on page 238.
• A flat ceiling in the loft area and a floor
below must be present.
• The roof pitch must be steep enough to
provide appropriate ceiling height for the
loft area. Typical pitches for such a con-
dition are 8 in 12 or greater.
• The roof should bear on the walls of the To create a ceiling step
floor below the loft area and form contin-
uous planes from ridge to baselines. 1. The area in which the step is to be pro-
duced must be a separate room specified
Once these conditions are met, a roof truss is as an “Attic”. See “Room Types” on
ready to be designated as an attic truss. page 271.
2. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
1. Select the roof truss in floor plan view
and click the Open Object edit
and click the Open Object edit
button to display the General tab of the
button to display the General tab of the
Roof Truss Specification dialog.
Roof Truss Specification dialog.

497
CAFull_RM.book Page 498 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Trusses

3. In the Ceiling Step field, specify the dis- • Check Force Truss Rebuild, then click
tance that the bottom chord must step OK to regenerate the truss.
down to locate the ceiling platform of
the room beneath the Attic. 4. You can now use the Multiple Copy
edit tool to replicate your truss within
• If the Ceiling Step value will place the
the area of the roof plan requiring a step.
bottom of the stepped bottom chord
within the ceiling platform, a step will For best results, you may want to make sure
be created to the bottom of the ceiling that the Bottom Chord is the same depth as
platform. the ceiling platform framing. See “Structure
Tab” on page 286.

Editing Trusses
Trusses can be selected like other objects in If a truss has been locked, the size does not
Chief Architect. See “Selecting Objects” on update if the truss is moved, but maintains its
page 144 for more information. original settings. See “Roof Truss
Specification Dialog” on page 510.
Once selected, trusses can be edited using
dimensions, their edit handles, the edit The depth of truss chords can be changed in
toolbar buttons, or by opening them for the truss’s specification dialog, but not using
specification. the edit handles.
Trusses can be deleted all at once in the When a roof truss is moved, it snaps to two
Delete Objects dialog. See “Delete Objects things:
Dialog” on page 197. • If drawn along an exterior wall, it snaps
so that its outer surface is flush with the
Using Dimensions outer surface of the wall's main layer.
Trusses can be relocated precisely using • The center line can snap to the edge or
dimensions. See “Moving Objects Using corner of a nearby roof plane.
Dimensions” on page 831.
To prevent this, special snapping, check No
special snapping in the Roof Truss
Using the Edit Handles Specification dialog. See “General Tab” on
When selected in floor plan view, trusses edit page 510.
like lines. See “Editing Line Based Objects” When selected in Cross Section/Elevation
on page 147. views and 3D views, trusses edit like closed
When a truss is moved, its shape updates to polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline
conform to the roof and ceiling plane Based Objects” on page 160.
positions in its new location. Like joists or rafters, trusses can be selected
and moved in 3D views. The only difference

498
CAFull_RM.book Page 499 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

is that the Lock Truss and Webbing setting 2. Click the Multiple Copy edit
in the Roof Truss Specification dialog button.
prevents the truss from moving back to
between the roof and ceiling planes the next 3. Click the Multiple Copy Interval
time it is edited or otherwise changed. edit button to open the Multiple Copy
dialog. See “Multiple Copy” on page
Using the Edit Tools 194.
A selected truss can be edited in a variety of 4. Enter the correct spacing in the All
ways using the buttons on the edit toolbar. Trusses box. Once set, click OK.
See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page 1140. 5. Select the truss and use the Move edit
handle to drag it perpendicularly. The
Copying Trusses pointer becomes a four-headed arrow
When a truss has been edited to suit your when it is over the Move handle.
needs, use the Multiple Copy edit tool to 6. New trusses appear as you drag. Drag as
create duplicates at specified intervals. The far as necessary to produce all desired
copies conform to the roof and ceiling plane trusses. Each truss is created according
positions in their new location. to the particular Roof/Ceiling/Truss
Base planes above and below it.
To use Multiple Copy When replicated, trusses and their labels may
become different from the original as a result
1. Select the truss to be copied in floor plan of the roof and ceiling planes around them.
view. See “Truss Labels” on page 500.

Editing Truss Envelopes

When a truss is viewed at a 90° angle in a 3D The Lock truss and webbing attribute is set
view, its envelope, or shape, can be edited. after editing so that the truss does not reshape
Click on the truss to select it and edit handles itself back between the roof and ceiling
display on a surrounding polyline. Change planes the next time it is edited or otherwise
the shape of this polyline and the truss changed. See “Roof Truss Specification
regenerates inside it. Use this function to Dialog” on page 510.
change overhang or truss end details rather
than the overall truss shape.

Truss Details
When you draw the first truss, the program
automatically creates a CAD detail named

499
CAFull_RM.book Page 500 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Truss Labels

Truss Detail. Open the Truss Detail by diagram gives a number that designates this
selecting CAD> CAD Detail Management truss type in floor plan view and in the
and selecting it from the list. Materials List. The quantity of each type is
also listed.

Note: The Truss Detail is for display of

trusses only. Editing the members that make
up the trusses in the Truss Detail is not rec-
ommended.

To restore an edited Truss Detail

1. Delete any new members you have

drawn in the detail view.
2. In floor plan view, select the truss and
click the Open Object edit button to
open the Roof Truss Specification dia-
All the trusses used in your plan are log.
displayed in the Truss Detail. If several 3. Click OK and the truss regenerates
trusses are identical, only one diagram is along with its Truss Detail diagram.
drawn. The label at the lower left of the

Truss Labels
Roof and attic trusses are labeled in floor built differently and displays a different
plan view in the format TR-xx. The xx are label.
numbers following the consecutive order in
Truss labels are centered on the truss that
which each distinct truss configuration or
they represent. If the truss is moved or
type was created.
deleted, the label is moved or deleted as well.
For example, the first truss type created is Truss labels cannot be selected by
labeled TR-1; the second, TR-2; and so on. themselves. Truss labels are selected when
Truss labels also display in the Truss Detail the truss is selected. Truss labels are located
and the Materials List. Floor and ceiling on their own layer, so their display can be
trusses are labeled FTR-xx. controlled in the Layer Display Options
dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
A copied truss has the same label as the
on page 121.
original if the conditions at the location of
the copy are the same as the original. If
conditions are different, the copied truss is

500
CAFull_RM.book Page 501 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Mixing Trusses with Stick Framing

After the trusses for your roof are in place, and common rafters at the end of a hip roof
the Build Framing dialog can be used to can pass over a drop hip truss.
create roof framing in areas not framed by
Lookouts at a gable end are modeled to pass
the trusses. See “Roof Tab” on page 477.
over a truss at the gable and end at the next
The framing produced is extended or truss in. Both standard and hip ridges are
truncated where it encounters a truss. The chopped into blocking between the trusses.
exception to this truncation is that hip ridges

Truss Bases
A Truss Base is a closed polyline that
defines the area in which valley fill
roof trusses are to be built across and above
the tops of normal, full size roof trusses.

Valley fill trusses (shown darker)

Truss Base (in red) with valley fill trusses
Valley fill trusses are often used in reverse
gable conditions, where a roof ridge builds Normal roof trusses are built between roof
onto a roof plane that has a ridge running at a planes and ceiling planes. See “Roof
different angle. A classic example of this is Trusses” on page 495. Valley fill roof trusses
an “L” shaped house with a gable roof. The created using a Truss Base, on the other
main portion of the house is trussed through hand, are built between a larger, supporting
from end to end with normal trusses. Starting roof plane below and overbuilt roof planes
at its outside end, the smaller wing is trussed above.
with normal trusses until the main house is
Truss bases are drawn and can be edited
reached. Where the wing’s roof builds over
much like roof planes, with some limitations.
the main house, valley fill trusses are used.
See “Truss Base Specification Dialog” on
page 504.

501
CAFull_RM.book Page 502 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Truss Bases

To work correctly, a truss base must be in the

same plane with the underlying roof plane,
so their baselines should be colinear.

To create a truss base

1. Create an L-shaped house with a reverse

gable roof.

3. Move the pointer and click on the point

where the gable intersects the main roof.

The triangular area of overlap between the

main roof and the gable must be defined as a
Truss Base.

2. Select Build> Roof> Truss Base ,

then draw a baseline that is colinear with
the baseline of the roof plane that will 4. A rectangular Truss Base is created. Use
support the overbuild. See “The Base- its edit handles to reposition it and
line” on page 386. change its shape as needed.
• The two angled sides should be colin-
ear with the roof valleys.
• The straight bottom edge must remain
colinear with the Truss Base baseline
and that of the underlying roof plane.

502
CAFull_RM.book Page 503 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

the Move edit handle up to the peak of

the Truss Base.
• Copies of the truss appear as you drag
the pointer.
• The truss copies all appear to be full
length until you release the mouse.

5. Draw the normal Roof Trusses

across the length of the main portion of
the house. See “Roof Trusses” on page
495.
• The trusses of the underlying roof gen-
erate through the Truss Base, but stop
at the Truss Base’s bottom edge so that
no overhang is produced in that area. Trusses drawn perpendicular to the
baseline of a Truss Base go under the
Truss Base. Trusses drawn parallel to the
baseline of the Truss Base become valley fill
trusses drawn over it..

8. When you release the mouse button, any

copies drawn in the Truss Base are
clipped by it.

6. When the trusses of the underlying roof

are in place, draw the first truss of the
reverse gable and position it over the
outer wall.
7. With this truss selected, click the
Multiple Copy edit button and drag

503
CAFull_RM.book Page 504 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Truss Base Specification Dialog

Editing Truss Bases Truss bases can be edited much the way roof
planes can, with some limitations. They are
A selected truss base can be edited in floor not actual 3D objects, so they cannot be
plan view using edit handles, edit toolbar assigned materials, moldings or other design
buttons, and the Truss Base Specification attributes; however, their shape, height, pitch
dialog. and display can be edited. See “Editing Roof
Planes” on page 387.

Truss Base Specification Dialog

Select a truss base and click the Open This dialog is almost identical to the Roof
Plane Specification dialog. Although truss
Object edit button to open the Truss
Base Specification dialog.
bases are not the same as roof planes, Chief
Architect handles the positioning of the two
in a similar manner.

General Tab

3
1 4

504
CAFull_RM.book Page 505 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Four values define 3D orientation of a truss

3 Rafter Depth - The truss base is a
base: Ridge/Top Height, Baseline Height, plane used by the program to place
Fascia Top Height, and Pitch. These values trusses, so it has no rafters. This value should
are related; if one is changed, the others be the same as that for the surrounding roof
change as well. plane in order to align the truss base with it.
These values are measured from the first
4 The Vertical Rafter Depth, Top of
floor elevation of 0’ 0". Baseline Height and Plate and Overhang from Baseline
Pitch should be set identical to those for the values are shown for reference.
roof plane that surrounds the truss base.
Click the radio button to the right of a value Options Tab
to define it as the pivot point for the truss Click Up to display the truss base up one
base and prevent it from being changed. floor, or click Down to show it on the floor
Changing these values does not affect the 2D below. If no higher or lower floor exists, the
representation of the truss base. option is not available.

1 Specify the Height of the selected truss Polyline Tab

base.
For information about the Polyline tab, see
• Specify the Ridge/Topheight, which is
“Polyline Tab” on page 901.
the truss base’s highest point.
• Specify the Baseline height. Selected Line Tab
• Specify the Fascia topheight, which is
For information about the Selected Line tab,
the truss base’s lowest point. Usually, this
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
is the same height as the Baseline.

2 Specify the Pitch of the selected truss Line Style Tab

base. If you lock the pitch and change
one of the Height values, the truss base For information about the Line Style tab, see
moves vertically keeping the same slope. “Line Specification Dialog” on page 888.

• Check Pitch in degrees to display pitch

Fill Style Tab
in degrees rather than run-and-rise units.
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Hip Trusses
A variety of different hip truss configurations • Drop Hip or California Hip trusses
can be created, including: • Subgirder Hip trusses
• Step Down Hip trusses

505
CAFull_RM.book Page 506 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Step Down Hip

Step Down Hip

Step Down hip roofs are the quickest style of In the following illustration, the flat-topped
hip truss framing to produce. trusses are hip trusses. Alternating hip
trusses are colored differently for clarity.

Step Down Hip Roof

Jack Trusses

Hip Trusses
Hip Jack

To create a step down hip truss system 4. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw hip
jacks along the hip ridge from the last
1. First, draw a Roof Truss at the apex truss out into the overhang.
of the triangular hip roof plane. It will
snap exactly into position. 5. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw a
jack truss from the intersection of the
2. Select the truss; click the Multiple last hip truss and the hip jack to the eave.
Copy edit button; and click and drag 6. Select the jack truss; click the Multiple
the Move handle down into the hip to
create copies at regular intervals. See Copy edit button; and lay out jack
“Copying Trusses” on page 499. trusses up to the other hip jack.
3. Stop when the height of the hip truss
reaches a reasonable minimum.

506
CAFull_RM.book Page 507 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Drop Hip or California Hip

A Drop Hip, or California Hip, system uses In the following image, two of the drop hip
trusses with lowered top chords to support trusses are colored gray for clarity. Notice
stick frame hip ridges and common rafters. that these trusses support the rafters.

Drop Hip (or

California Hip)

Common Rafters
Drop Hip Trusses (deepen the joist
for this truss)

To create a drop hip truss system Specification dialog, and select the
Drop hip truss check box. See “General
1. Start a drop hip truss system as you Tab” on page 510.
would a step down hip system. See 3. Use the Build Framing dialog to pro-
“Step Down Hip” on page 506. duce the common rafters, and the short
2. When the hip trusses are drawn, group joists at the hip end. See “Build Framing
select them, open the Truss Dialog” on page 467.

507
CAFull_RM.book Page 508 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Subgirder Hip

Subgirder Hip
Subgirders are the partial trusses that butt In the following illustration, the double truss
into the doubled truss at the end of the main has one face colored dark gray, and several
run. subgirders are colored light gray.

Subgirder Hip

Double Truss

Subgirder Trusses (11)

To create a subgirder truss system 3. Using the Roof Truss tool, draw the
first subgirder from the hip apex out to
1. Draw a Roof Truss where the hip the eaves.
apex meets the ridge. 4. Select it and using the Multiple Copy
2. Double it by drawing a second truss on edit button, make copies in both
the far side from the hip section.

508
CAFull_RM.book Page 509 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

directions. Stop when the height of the 5. Finish off with hip jacks and jack trusses
subgirders reach a reasonable minimum. as in a step down hip system.

Girder Trusses
Girder trusses provide support for trusses
that are cut short, for example, by a reverse
gable or a skylight. They are often doubled-
or tripled-up for strength.
Draw a new truss from an existing truss to
the roof edge, as you would to draw a hip or
end jack truss; or draw a truss between two
trusses, forming a girder. This may be
necessary for a large opening, such as a
skylight.

Trusses cannot be drawn through each other.

If a truss is drawn through an existing truss,
the program automatically shortens it so that
it butts into the existing truss.

Scissors Trusses
Trusses drawn between roof planes and The following is an example of a scissors
sloping ceiling planes of a different pitch truss drawn beneath a 6 in 12 pitch gable roof
than the roof are called Scissor trusses. See and above 3 in 12 pitch ceiling planes.
“Ceiling Planes” on page 408.

509
CAFull_RM.book Page 510 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Truss Specification Dialog

Roof Truss Specification Dialog

Select a roof truss or group of roof trusses individual trusses, such as gable trusses,
and click the Open Object edit button to while others affect the whole group.
open the Roof Truss Specification dialog. The shape or volume of a roof truss is
controlled by the roof planes above it and the
The Roof Truss Specification dialog allows ceiling planes below it. It cannot be changed
you to redefine parts of an existing truss or from this dialog.
group of trusses. Some settings affect only

General Tab

1 8

2 9
3 10
4
5 11
6 12
7 13
14

1 Specify the depth of the different 2 Check Require Kingpost to require a

members that form the selected truss. vertical webbing member from the roof
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord. peak to the bottom chord.

• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord. If this is not checked, a vertical member may
still be supplied, depending on what is
• Specify the depth of the Webbing.

510
CAFull_RM.book Page 511 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

needed to support the chords at or closer than dialog. Because both common rafters and hip
the specified maximum spans. ridges must pass over this truss, the ridge
depth should be set equal to that of the rafter
Following is a truss detail. The lower truss
depth. For an illustration of a Drop Hip truss,
was a copy of the upper truss, with Require
see “Drop Hip or California Hip” on page
Kingpost checked.
507.

5 Check Energy Heel to model a truss

with an energy heel, which removes the
bottom chord from the overhang area. For
Kingpost this to be modeled, the Raise Off Plate value
in the Build Roof dialog must be equal to or
greater than eight.
To provide more space for ceiling insulation
at the exterior walls, roofs are sometimes
3 Check End Truss to replace the raised off of the top plate with an energy
webbing with vertical members
heel. When a truss is built for such a roof, a
positioned and spaced the same as the wall
vertical member is added over the supporting
studs below. If an end truss is in the same
wall to prevent the bottom chord from extend
position as a gable attic wall, it replaces the
ing into the overhang area as far as the end
framing that would otherwise be produced
of the rafter, or until it intersects the rafter.
for that wall. See “Framing Reference
Marker” on page 467.
Energy Heel

No Energy Heel
End Truss with vertical supports

4 Check Drop Hip Truss to lower the

flat top of a truss in the hip area of a
roof.
6 Check Reduce Gable to lower the top
The flat top is lowered so that common chord of the gable truss so that lookouts
rafters and hip ridges can pass over and be may pass over the truss. Any overhang is
supported by it. The amount that the top removed from a reduced truss. You can
chord is lowered is derived from the rafter supply this overhang with short rafters drawn
Depth on the Roof tab of the Framing at the ends of the truss.

511
CAFull_RM.book Page 512 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Roof Truss Specification Dialog

11 Specify the Ceiling Step of the selected

truss, which is the maximum distance
its bottom chord can step down to locate a
ceiling on the floor below the top floor. See
“Ceiling Steps” on page 497.

12 Check Force truss rebuild to rebuild

the truss envelope based on the existing
roof planes when you click OK. Not
available if Lock Truss Envelope is checked.
Reduce Gable
End Truss 13 Check Lock truss envelope to lock the
size and configuration of the selected
truss. If a locked truss is moved, it will
Lookouts maintain its original settings and will not fit
properlyif the new roof and ceiling
7 Check Attic Truss -to specify an attic conditions are different from the original.
truss. See “Attic Trusses” on page 496.
14 Check No special snapping to prevent
8 Specify the Maximum Span, which is the selected truss from snapping along
the maximum horizontal distance its long edge to a wall’s main layer or to the
between supports along the Top Chord and corner of a roof plane. If enabled, Object
the Bottom Chord. When these values are
Snaps may still occur. See “Object
equal, the truss webbing often appears more
Snaps” on page 133.
regular.
The default Maximum Span settings are set Line Style Tab
in the Build Framing dialog. See “Trusses
Tab” on page 479. For more information about the Line Style
tab, see “Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Truss webbing is drawn for representa- Fill Style Tab

tional purposes only and as with trusses
in Chief Architect in general, is not engi- For more information about the Fill Style tab,
neered. see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

9 Specify the Thickness, or truss width Materials Tab

in floor plan view. This setting
overrides default settings. For more information about the Materials
tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.
10 Specify the Maximum Height of the
selected truss.

512
CAFull_RM.book Page 513 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog

Floor trusses can be created whenever walls To open the Floor Truss Specification
define one or more rooms. dialog, select a floor truss in floor plan view
and click the Open Object edit button.

General Tab

1 5
2
3
4 6
7
8
9

1 Specify the depth of the different 3 Specify the Maximum Span, which is
members that form the selected truss. the maximum horizontal distance
• Specify the depth of the Top Chord. between supports along the Top & Bottom
Chord.
• Specify the depth of the Bottom Chord.
The default Maximum Span is set in the
• Specify the depth of the Webbing.
Build Framing dialog. See “Trusses Tab” on
2 Check Vertical Supports to use page 479.
vertical supports in the selected truss.

513
CAFull_RM.book Page 514 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Floor/Ceiling Truss Specification Dialog

9 Check Lock truss envelope to lock the

Top Chord Vertical Support size and configuration of the truss. A
locked truss which has been relocated will
maintain its original settings.

Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see
Bottom Chord Webbing “Line Style Tab” on page 889.

6 Specify the Overall Thickness of the Fill Style Tab

selected truss.
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
7 Specify the Webbing Thickness “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
thickness of the webbing.

8 Check Force Truss Rebuild to rebuild Materials Tab

the truss envelope based on the existing
floor or ceiling platform when you click OK. For information about the Materials tab, see
Not available if Lock Truss Envelope is “Materials Tab” on page 709.
checked.

514
CAFull_RM.book Page 515 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

515
CAFull_RM.book Page 516 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 17:

Electrical

The electrical plan shows the location of all electrical objects is determined by the
electrical objects such as lights, switches, location of walls, cabinets and other objects.
outlets, smoke detectors and vent fans. Basic
wiring diagrams show which objects share
Building requirements vary throughout
circuits and the locations of the controlling the country and around the world. It is
switches. your responsibility to comply with local codes.
Electrical objects can be displayed in 2D and
3D views. Some electrical light fixtures also Chapter Contents
add light sources to 3D and Raytrace views. • Electrical Defaults
See “Lighting” on page 775. • The Electrical Tools
• Creating Wiring Schematics
Electrical objects can be selected, deleted, • Auto Place Outlets
copied, moved, rotated, reflected, and added • Electrical Library
to the library like other objects. • Displaying Electrical Objects
Usually, the electrical plan is one of the last • Editing Electrical Objects
additions to a plan since the position of most • Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Electrical Defaults
Default Settings for electrical objects Default Settings from the menu or by
control which symbols are placed in double-clicking the Electrical Tools
the current plan when the Electrical Tools are
used and can be accessed by selecting Edit>

516
CAFull_RM.book Page 517 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

button. See “Preferences & Default Settings” Default heights of individual objects can be
on page 62. overridden in the Electrical Service
Specification dialog. See “Electrical Service
Specification Dialog” on page 522.

2
3
4

1 Default Library Objects - These are 4 Default Heights - Specify the heights
the items used when electrical objects at which electrical outlets and switches
are automatically generated or created using are initially placed.
the Electrical Tools. Select an item in the • Check Use Default Heights to apply the
scrollable list to see a preview image to the default heights specified here to electrical
right and the symbol’s name below. objects placed in floor plan view.
2 Select an item in the Default Library • Outlet - Specify the default height for
Objects list and click the Library outlets, and phone, cable and tv jacks.
button to select a new default object from the
• Switch - Specify the default height for
library. See “Select Library Object Dialog”
switches, doorbells and thermostats.
on page 689.
• Above Cabinet - Specify the default
Symbol Name - The name of the object
3 height for switches and outlets placed
shown in the preview image displays above most cabinets in floor plan view, as
here. measured from the countertop. See
“Adjusting the Height of Electrical
Objects” on page 522.

517
CAFull_RM.book Page 518 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Electrical Tools

The Electrical Tools

Select Build> Electrical to access the Outlets placed outside the building or in an
Electrical Tools. exterior area such as a deck or porch are
labeled WP, or Water Proof.
Click in floor plan view to place an electrical
object. Some can only be placed against Outlets placed on the wall behind a base
walls, some only on the ceiling or floor, and cabinet containing a dishwasher or sink are
some automatically change as needed. If you placed at the normal 12" (300 mm) above the
click within 12" of the wall, the selected floor. If an outlet is placed above a cabinet,
object is placed on the wall. the default Above Cabinet Default Height is
used instead.
Electrical objects are placed according to the
settings in the Electrical Defaults dialog. Other types of outlets, such as floor outlets,
See “Electrical Defaults” on page 516. are available in the Electrical Library .

Outlets Lights
Select Build> Electrical> 110V Select Build> Electrical> Light to
Outlet to place 110 volt duplex place light fixtures as specified in the
outlets in walls or on the floor. Select Build> Electrical Defaults dialog. Depending on
Electrical> 220V Outlet to place 220 volt where you click in floor plan view, the light
outlets. may be mounted on the ceiling or on a wall.
Outlet locations are measured from their Some light symbols can be mounted under
centers in floor plan view. Individual outlet wall cabinets, as well. All lights placed in a
heights can be specified in the Electrical plan can also serve as light sources in most
Service Specification dialog. 3D and Raytrace views.
Certain room types and situations cause Click away from any wall to place a light on
various types of outlets to be placed. To take the ceiling. Click near a wall to place the
advantage of the program’s capabilities, light in the wall. Specify the height of an
define room types properly before placing individual light in the Electrical Service
electrical objects. See “Room Types” on Specification dialog.
page 271. Many lights are available in the Electrical
In rooms defined as Bath or Master Bath, Library . All library lights create light
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupt (GFCI) sources in camera Render and raytrace
outlets are placed. views.

If standard outlets are placed in a room Light Render Data

prior to defining it as a Bath, you should
replace them with GFCI outlets. The rendering characteristics of individual
lights that control how they appear in Render

518
CAFull_RM.book Page 519 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

and raytrace views can be specified on the height of switches is measured from the floor
Light Data tab of the Electrical Service to the center of the object.
Specification dialog. See “Light Data Tab”
on page 524.
If you connect two or more switches in a
circuit, they update to 3-way or 4-way
Switches switches automatically.

Select Build> Electrical> Switch to

Switches placed from the Electrical Library
place wall switches as specified in the
do not automatically update by default, but
Electrical Defaults dialog. Like outlets, the
can be specified to do so. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 522.

Creating Wiring Schematics

Electrical schematics can be created in two See “Editing Spline Based Objects” on page
ways. Using the Connect Electrical tool 166. When attached to other electrical
is quick and easy, but if you need detailed objects, however, connections display only
schematics, you can create your own wiring Reshape edit handles when selected.
diagrams using the CAD tools. Remove an electrical object from a circuit by
selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
Connect Electrical button. See “Deleting Objects” on page 196.
Select Build> Electrical> Connect More than one switch can control an object
Electrical to illustrate circuits. Using or group of objects. Two switches controlling
this tool, you can show which lights and the same objects are referred to as three-way
outlets are attached to any given switch. switches. Three switches controlling the
To create a new circuit or to add to an same objects are called four-way switches.
existing circuit, click one electrical object The number of “ways” is one more than the
number of switches in the same circuit. This
while using Connect Electrical tool,
number displays with the switch symbol in
drag to the next object and release.
floor plan view.
Connections created with the Connect
Electrical tool can be edited like splines.

Auto Place Outlets

Select Build> Electrical> Auto Place entire room at intervals not greater than
Outlets and click in a room tool to twelve feet so that no wall position is farther
place outlets, usually 110 volt, around the

519
CAFull_RM.book Page 520 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Electrical Library

than six feet (1800mm) from the nearest placed and does not work in any room
outlet. defined as an exterior room. Exterior rooms
require that the outlets be placed individually
Outlets are placed based on settings in the
Electrical Defaults dialog. See “Electrical using the 110V Outlets tool or from the
Defaults” on page 516. It is important that Electrical Library. See “Room Types” on
the room type be defined before using Auto page 271.
Place Outlets so that outlets are placed Railings and invisible walls do not separate
appropriately in each room type. rooms for Auto Place Outlets : If Auto
Stand-alone or built-in appliances such as Place Outlets is used in a room defined
ranges, washers, and dryers each have their by railings or invisible walls, outlets are
required 110 volt or 220 volt outlets placed automatically placed in all adjacent rooms
automatically. Lights are always placed that share these wall types with that room.
above sinks.
Any outlet can be moved, deleted, or merged
Auto Place Outlets requires a room to with other outlets or switches. See
have a door before outlets are automatically “Switches” on page 519.

Electrical Library
Select Library> Library Browser to You can create electrical symbols and save
accesses a variety of electrical them to the library. See “Custom Symbols”
symbols. on page 974.
Browse for electrical objects such as bath You can also assign electrical objects from
vent fans, an electrical panel, fluorescent the library to toolbar buttons for easy access
lights, chandeliers, a smoke detector, and placement to frequently-used library
thermostat, and much more. Select a symbol, objects. See “Place Library Object Button”
then click in your plan to place it on a wall, on page 692.
floor, or ceiling.

Displaying Electrical Objects

The display of electrical objects and Electrical labels display in floor plan view
connections is controlled in the Layer when these conditions are met:
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying • The layer Electrical, Labels layer is
Objects” on page 117. turned on.
When displayed in 3D, light fixtures act as • Show Labels is checked and a label
sources of light that help illuminate your 3D shape is specified in the Electrical
model. See “Lighting” on page 775.

520
CAFull_RM.book Page 521 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Schedule Specification dialog. See Specification dialog. See “Label Tab” on

“Label Tab” on page 1042. page 527.
• To produce a component or custom label, • To produce automatic electrical labels, an
specify it in the Electrical Service electrical schedule exists in the plan.

Editing Electrical Objects

Electrical objects can be selected as a group
and individually in 2D and 3D and edited
using the edit handles, the edit toolbar and
their specification dialog. See “Electrical
Service Specification Dialog” on page 522.
Light fixtures and Added Lights can be
group-selected, but their light data cannot be Wall-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
edited unless they have the same number of
light sources associated with each. See Electrical objects placed on floors and
“Lighting” on page 775. ceilings can be rotated.
Lights can also be edited using the Adjust
Lights dialog. See “Adjust Lights Dialog” on
page 779.

Moving Electrical Objects

Ceiling-mounted outlet in 2D and 3D views
Using Dimensions
Electrical connections edit like splines. See
Electrical objects can be moved precisely “Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 166.
using manual dimensions. See “Moving
Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
First, dimensions must be checked on the
Locate Objects tab of the Dimension
Defaults dialog. See “Dimension Defaults
and Preferences” on page 809.

Using the Edit Handles

Using the Edit Buttons
The edit handles for electrical objects vary
depending on the location of the object. Wall A selected electrical symbol can be edited in
mounted electrical objects cannot be rotated, a variety of ways using the buttons on the
so only the Move edit handle displays. edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on
page 1140.

521
CAFull_RM.book Page 522 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Adjusting the Height To change the height of an electrical object in

of Electrical Objects floor plan view, open the object for
specification and type the desired height in
The heights where electrical objects display the Electrical Service Specification dialog.
in 3D views are initially based on settings in See “Electrical Service Specification Dialog”
the Electrical Defaults dialog. See on page 522.
“Electrical Defaults” on page 516.
Electrical objects placed in 3D views are
In floor plan view, an outlet placed where a placed wherever you click a wall, regardless
base cabinet meets a wall is placed above the of the height. In 3D views, the position of an
counter unless the cabinet contains a fixture electrical object can be adjusted using its edit
or appliance other than a bathroom sink. If handles.
the fixture requires electricity, the outlet
remains behind the cabinet at normal wall Deleting Electrical Objects
height, where it can supply power to the
fixture or appliance. An electrical object can be deleted by

Kitchen sinks are assumed to require selecting it and clicking the Delete edit
electricity since they often contain a garbage button or by pressing the Delete key.
disposal. Dishwashers are not considered to All electrical objects in a room, on a floor, or
require electricity since they are usually in the entire plan can be deleted as a group
plugged in under a nearby sink. If an outlet is using the Delete Objects dialog. See
needed above a cabinet containing a kitchen “Deleting Objects” on page 196.
sink, place the outlet before adding the sink,
or move the outlet up.

Electrical Service Specification Dialog

Select one or more electrical objects and • The Light Data tab specifies how lights
click the Open Object edit button to appear in rendered views. See “Lighting”
open the Electrical Service Specification on page 775.
dialog. The settings in this dialog vary, • The Layer tab specifies the layer the
depending on the type of object(s) you select. object is placed on.
The Electrical Service Specification dialog • The Materials tab allows you to change
consists of four tabs: materials on electrical objects.
• The Service Data tab specifies the loca- Depending on the type of symbol selected,
tion of individual electrical objects. only some of the tabs are available. Only the
Service Data, Layer and Material tabs are
available for switches and outlets.

522
CAFull_RM.book Page 523 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Service Data Tab

The items on this tab vary, depending on the
type of electrical object selected.

1
2

1 The Name of the selected object as • Specify the Offset From Floor of a floor
used in the Library Browser and outlet or floor lamp.
Materials List displays here. • Specify the Distance From Wall of a
wall mounted symbol. A negative value
2 Specify the Position of the selected will recess the symbol into the wall and
electical symbol. The options available
depend on the type of electrical symbol may prevent it from being seen in 3D.
selected.
3 Specify the Size of the selected
• Specify the Offset From Ceiling of a electical symbol.
ceiling outlet or ceiling mounted light. If • Specify the Height, Width and Depth of
the light is mounted to a cabinet, this the selected symbol.
value is the offset from the cabinet.
• Click the Reset button to restore the elec-
• Specify the Height to Center of a trical symbol’s original size
switch, wall outlet or wall light.

523
CAFull_RM.book Page 524 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Electrical Service Specification Dialog

4 Check Automatically Change Switch “Connect Electrical” on page 519. Switches

Type When Wiring for a selected placed from the toolbar use this option by
switch to become a three- or four-way switch default; switches placed from the library do
if your wiring plan later uses it as such. See not. Only available for switches.

Light Data Tab

The Light Data tab is available when the sources are selected, the settings on this tab
selected electrical object is a light fixture. are not available.
The available options vary depending on the
The settings on this tab are similar to those
type of light selected. If multiple light
on the same tab of the Light Specification
fixtures with different numbers of light
dialog. See “Light Specification Dialog” on
page 781.

1
2
3
4
5
8
6

7 9

10

1 The currently selected Light Source • Select an existing Light Source associ-
displays here. Each fixture can have ated with the selected light fixture from
multiple light sources. See “Lighting” on the drop-down list .
page 775. • Click Add Light or Delete Light to add
or delete light sources from the list.

524
CAFull_RM.book Page 525 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2 Select a light source Type from the effects. You may need to experiment to fully
drop-down list for the currently understand how to use them.
selected Light Source. Available types are
Point Light, Spot Light, and Parallel Light. 6 Specify the direction and drop off rate
of a Parallel or Spot Light source.
See “Light Types” on page 779.
• The Tilt Angle controls the angle of the
3 Check Auto Intensity to have the illumination with respect to the horizon.
program provide an average intensity to A value of -90° means that the light is
render the light source with reasonable pointing straight down and a value of 90°
lighting effects. Uncheck this box to enable means that the light is pointing straight
the slider bar and text box and control how up. 0° is parallel to the horizon.
bright the light appears in rendered views.
• The Dir Angle defines the direction of
Lights with an intensity of 0% act as though the illumination relative to the ground.
they are turned off. It is possible to have too Zero° is measured horizontally pointing
much light. If you have multiple lights in a to the right. Positive values rotate in a
room all set to maximum intensity, colors counter-clockwise direction from there.
and textures can turn white. Enter a value up to 360°. If you enter a
negative value, the program will add
4 Click the Color to define the color of 360° to it when you click OK or press the
the selected light source. Colored lights
alter the appearance of textures and can be Tab key.
used to achieve special effects. • The Cut Off Angle controls the angle of
the cone of illumination for Spot Lights
The default color of light is pure white,
only. A cone angle of 180° creates a spot
which has the least affect on the material
light that shines on one side of the light
colors and textures.
source, representing a half sphere. A
5 Check Attenuated to control how small cone angle, for example 10°, cre-
quickly the light sources’ intensity ates a very narrow cone of light. The cut
drops as its distance from the light source off angle should always be between 0°
increases. Only Spot and Point Lights have and 180°.
attenuation. • The Drop Off Rate affects how fast the
The three edit values represent the three intensity of illumination drops off from
coefficients (a, b, and c) in the expression the center of the cone to the outside edge.
1 / (a + b*d+c*d*d), where d is the distance This is only available for Spot Lights.
from the light source. Increasing any of these
values results in the light intensity dropping The default drop off value is 7.5, which
faster (the light does not travel as far). means the light drops off fairly quickly.
Decreasing any value results in the light Do not set this value too low because
intensity dropping slower (the light travels there are limitations in the OpenGL light-
farther). Small changes in these coefficients ing model that result in jagged circles of
can have significant impact on lighting light when they are shining on large flat
surfaces. Appearances can be improved

525
CAFull_RM.book Page 526 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Electrical Service Specification Dialog

by decreasing the Maximum Triangle • Casts Shadows controls whether or not

Size and increasing the Drop off Rate. the light source casts shadows when
Shadows are turned on in Camera views.
7 Offset Position gives you control over
the location of the light source relative
You should only use one or two light
to the fixture.
sources to casts shadows at a time.
• From Base controls how far the light Shadow calculations can slow rendering
source is from the fixture base. The fix- significantly.
ture base is determined by the surface
• Check Show Position in Camera View
that it is attached to (i.e. wall, floor, or
to indicate the position of a selected Point
ceiling).
or Spot Light source in 3D views when it
• Offset in X/Offset in Y allow you to is turned On. This tool can be used to
position the light source relative to the determine if your light source is posi-
center of the fixture, along the floor/ceil- tioned correctly.
ing.
10 Specify which view types in which the
8 Specify the appearance of Soft selected light source is used. The more
Shadows (raytracing), or how the lights you use in either view, the slower the
selected light source casts soft shadows in a time to generate that view.
Raytrace view.
• Select Use in Camera View to turn the
• The Light Size determines how big the selected light source on in regular 3D
illumination appears. Zero indicates a views only.
single point light source, while a size of 3 • Select Use in Raytrace View to turn the
indicates a larger source such as a light- selected light source on in Raytrace
bulb. views only.
• The Softness setting determines how • Select Use in Both to turn the selected
many iterations the raytracer should go light source on in both Camera and
through to soften the light. This value Raytrace views.
determines the quality of the raytrace, but
also slows it down. You should not use
values greater than 2 or 3, unless the Note: Many more lights can be included in
Raytrace views than in rendered views.
Light Size is very large.
Some fixtures may have four or five lights for
use in Raytrace views but only one in Cam-
9 Specify the appearance of the selected era views. See“Rendering & Raytracing” on
light source in Camera and/orRaytrace
page 772.
views.
• Check On to use the light source is used Layer Tab
in Camera or Raytrace views, or uncheck
it if you prefer that the light source not be The Layer tab is found in the specification
used. dialogs for a variety of objects, including
electrical objects. For more information, see
“Layer Tab” on page 125.

526
CAFull_RM.book Page 527 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Materials Tab
Note: If you choose a label shape in the Elec-
The Materials tab is found in the trical Schedule Specification dialog, the set-
specification dialogs for a variety of objects, tings here are overridden and the schedule
including electrical objects. For more label is used instead.
information, see “Materials Tab” on page
709. The display of electrical labels can also be
controlled in the Layer Display Options
Label Tab dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
on page 121.
The Label tab is found in the specification
dialogs for a variety of different objects,
including electrical objects. For more
information, see “Label Tab” on page 1045.

527
CAFull_RM.book Page 528 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 18:

Trim & Molding

Chief Architect offers a wide selection of Chapter Contents

trim and molding options. Corner boards, • Corner Boards
quoins, and frieze moldings can be added to • Corner Board Specification Dialog
a building’s exterior. Molding polylines and • Quoins
3D molding polylines can be edited as 2D • Quoin Specification Dialog
CAD objects using the CAD editing tools, • Editing Corner Boards and Quoins
then extruded to display in 3D for a variety • Molding Profiles
of powerful applications. • Symbol Moldings
In addition, Chief Architect offers a wide • Molding Polylines
selection of trim and molding options for • Displaying Molding Polylines
doors, windows, rooms, and many interior • Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings
objects. See “Libraries” on page 682. • Frieze Moldings
• Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
You can also assign moldings to a variety of • 3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog
objects, such as rooms and cabinets, in those
objects’ specification dialogs. See
“Specification Dialogs” on page 33.

528
CAFull_RM.book Page 529 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Corner Boards
Corner boards are added to a building Corner boards extend from the top plate
exterior in any view by selecting down to the bottom of the floor platform of
Build> Trim> Corner Boards. the floor on which it is placed, but do not
extend to other floors. You must add corner
boards to all floors of the building that you
want to have corner boards.
A selected corner board or boards can be
moved, but only to another wall corner or
corners. In 3D views, corner boards can be
lengthened or shortened using the edit
handles. Corner boards can be copied,
deleted and resized similar to other objects
Click at a wall corner where you want to add using the edit toolbar or the Corner Board
trim. Be sure to click where the outside wall Specification dialog.
surfaces meet. If you click where the inside The default material for corner boards is
surfaces meet, corner trim will be created defined by the Exterior Trim entry in the
inside the room. Material Defaults dialog. See “Material
Defaults Dialog” on page 726.

529
CAFull_RM.book Page 530 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Corner Board Specification Dialog

Corner Board Specification Dialog

General Tab

3
1

1 Specify the Width and Thickness of • Specify the Initial Thickness of all sub-
the selected corner board(s). sequently created corner boards. This
does not change the thickness of any
2 Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify existing corner boards.
the top and bottom heights of the corner
board(s). The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are
• If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the not saved with the plan file and are reset the
corner board automatically extends to the next time you run the program.
top plate.
Layer Tab
• If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom
of the corner board automatically extends For information about the Layer tab, see
to the bottom of the floor platform. “Layer Tab” on page 125.

3 The Initial Values settings affect Materials Tab

subsequently created corner boards.
• Specify the Initial Width of all subse- For information about the Materials tab, see
quently created corner boards. This does “Materials Tab” on page 709.
not change the width of any existing cor-
ner boards.

530
CAFull_RM.book Page 531 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Quoins
Select Build> Trim> Quoins in any 3D views, quoins can be lengthened or
view and click at a wall corner where shortened using the edit handles. Quoins can
you want to place quoins. be copied, deleted and resized similar to
other objects using the edit toolbar or the
Quoin Specification dialog.

The size of quoins in floor plan view is

relative on their size in 3D.
Initially, quoins use the same material as the
default material of the wall surface they are
placed against. This material is specified in
the Wall Type Definitions dialog. See “Wall
Type Definitions Dialog” on page 243.
A selected quoin or quoins can be moved,
but only to another wall corner or corners. In

Quoin Specification Dialog

2 4

1 Specify the dimensions of the quoins in • Specify the Width, which is the long
the selected Quoin object. dimension of each quoin in the selected
Quoin object. The dimension along the

531
CAFull_RM.book Page 532 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Quoin Specification Dialog

other wall is half this value when they are • Specify the Initial Width of all subse-
staggered or mirrored. quently created quoins. This does not
• Specify the Thickness, which is the change the width of any existing quoins.
amount that the quoin protrudes from the • Specify the Initial Thickness of all sub-
exterior surface of the wall. sequently created quoins. This does not
• Specify the Height for all quoins in the change the thickness of any existing
selected Quoin object. quoins.

• Specify the Gap, which is the distance The Initial Width and Initial Thickness are
between successive quoins. not saved with the plan file and are reset the
next time you run the program.
2 Check Set Top/Set Bottom to specify
the top and bottom heights of the 4 Specify the arrangement of quoins used
quoin(s) in the text fields. by the selected Quoin object(s).
• If Set Top is unchecked, the top of the • Staggered - Produce quoins that have
corner board automatically extends to the one long side and one short side stag-
top plate. gered on opposite sides of the corner.
• If Set Bottom is unchecked, the bottom • When Staggered is selected, check Swap
of the quoin automatically extends to the Start Block to switch the starting order
bottom of the floor platform. for staggered quoins.
• Uniform - Produce quoins that are of
3 The Initial Values settings affect equal length on both sides of the corner.
subsequently created quoins.
• Mirrored - Produce quoins that alternate
having either two long sides or two short
sides.

Staggered Mirrored Uniform

Layer Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Layer tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Layer Tab” on page 125. “Materials Tab” on page 709.

532
CAFull_RM.book Page 533 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Editing Corner Boards and Quoins

Before a corner board or quoin can be edited, • In floor plan view, corner boards and
it must be selected. Click on a trim object quoins display two edit handles and can
when the Select Objects tool is active. be moved and rotated.
Corner boards and quoins can also be group • In cross section/elevation and 3D views,
selected and edited. See “Selecting Objects” corner boards and quoins can be moved,
on page 144. lengthened, and shorted much the other
line-based objects are. See “Editing Line
Corner boards and quoins can be edited using
Based Objects” on page 147.
their edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons,
and their specification dialogs. See “Corner
Board Specification Dialog” on page 530 and
Using the Edit Buttons
“Quoin Specification Dialog” on page 531. A selected corner board or quoin can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
Using the Mouse on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1140.
Depending on the type of view, a corner
board or quoin displays a different set of edit
handles when selected.

Molding Profiles
A molding profile is a polyline that Creating a Molding Profile
represents a 2D cross section of a particular
style of molding. A molding profile does not You can easily create custom molding
display in 3D on its own; it must be applied profiles using the Line and Arc CAD Tools
to a room or a molding polyline. See by following a few basic guidelines. The
“Moldings Tab” on page 540 or “Molding object is to draw a polyline, closed or not.
Polylines” on page 535. • Moldings can be drawn in either floor
plan view or in a CAD Detail window.
The library contains a selection of moldings,
as well as curbs, gutters, handrails and rafter • Draw the molding profile at its actual,
tails. You can customize library molding unscaled size.
profiles and also create your own custom • The profile must be drawn with the
profiles and add them to the library. See proper orientation. The back of most pro-
“Adding to the Library” on page 700. files, or the side facing the wall, must be
drawn as a vertical edge on the left side
of the polyline.

533
CAFull_RM.book Page 534 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Symbol Moldings

• Similarly, curbs and gutters are drawn When the molding profile suits your needs,
with the back of the profile as a vertical select it and click the Add to Library
edge on the left side of the polyline. edit button. See “Adding to the Library” on
• Open polylines should be used for gutter page 700.
and rafter tail profiles. Gutter profiles
attach to the roof on the left side. Place Molding Profile
• Open polylines should be used for rafter An existing molding profile can be placed in
tail profiles. Rafter tail profiles should be floor plan view or a CAD Detail, edited, and
open on the left side. added to the library as a new profile.
• In the case of handrail profiles, the bot-
Right-click on a molding profile in the
tom edge must be drawn on the left side
library and select Place Molding Profile
of the polyline.
from the contextual menu. Move your
pointer into the drawing area and click once
to place a closed polyline identical to the
selected profile at that location. The polyline
can then be edited to suit your needs.

Note: Place Molding Profile cannot be used

to apply a molding profile to an object - it is
only used to. place a profile polyline.

Base molding profile - Handrail profile -

back edge faces left bottom faces left

Symbol Moldings
Symbol Moldings are 3D symbols that are Creating a Symbol Molding
repeated along a path to form molding.
Molding symbols are different from molding Begin by opening a new, blank plan and
profiles because they are replicated 3D creating a single instance of the molding
sumbols instead of extruded 2D shapes. symbol using the Primitive Tools . See
“Primitive Tools” on page 649. For example,
to create the molding shown in the
illustration above, make an object that looks
like this:

534
CAFull_RM.book Page 535 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2. In the Import 3D Symbol dialog, specify

the symbol as Molding and click the
Advanced button.
• If you plan to use the molding symbol
more than once, check the box beside
Add to Library. See “Adding a New
Object” on page 700.
3. On the 3D tab of the Symbol
Specification dialog, rotate the symbol
as needed so that it faces you in the pre-
view image.
When you are satisfied with its appearance,
convert it to a 3D symbol. See “Convert to Symbol moldings work best if you make
Symbol” on page 987. them symmetrical.
You can also import a 3D symbol from
another application. See “Importing 3D Symbol moldings are center aligned. Both
Symbols” on page 967. ends have a 45° miter, so the end instances
may be chopped.
To import a molding symbol Once created, a symbol molding can be
replicated along a molding polyline. See
1. Select File> Import> 3D Symbol “Molding Polylines” on page 535.
from the menu. See “Import 3D Symbol
Dialog” on page 968.

Molding Polylines
A molding polyline is a 3D path that either a • Molding Lines
2D molding profile is extruded along or a
series of molding symbols is repeated along. • 3D Molding Polylines
Molding polylines can be used to create
custom room moldings and decorations • 3D Molding Lines
anywhere in your 3D model. To create a molding polyline, first select the
The Molding Polyline tools are desired Molding Polyline tool. The Select
accessed by selecting Build> Trim Library Object dialog will open. Select a
from the menu. molding profile or symbol from the library,
then click and drag to draw the path for the
There are four types of molding polylines: selected molding profile or symbol.
• Molding Polylines

535
CAFull_RM.book Page 536 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Molding Polylines

If a molding profile or symbol has been

previously selected during the current
session in the program, you can begin
drawing using this molding without selecting
anything from the library.
Molding polylines can also be created using
the Make Room Molding Polyline and Molding polyline and molding line in
Floor Plan View and 3D overview
the Convert Polyline edit tools.
3D Molding Polyline Tool
Molding Polyline Tool Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding
Select Build> Trim> Molding Poly- Polyline in floor plan or cross section/
line in floor plan view, a camera view elevation view to create a closed molding
or overview to create a molding polyline polyline.
with a closed shape and a single height off • When drawn in a cross section/elevation
the floor along its entire perimeter. Molding view, a 3D Molding Polyline’s top and
Polylines are drawn like rectangular bottom edges have two different heights.
polylines. Its sides have different heights at their
In floor plan view, Molding Polylines can start and end points.
also be created by selecting a profile from the • If drawn in floor plan view, a camera
Library Browser. Single-click to place a view or overview, a 3D Molding Polyline
2’x2’ closed polyline or click and drag to has a single height along its perimeter.
draw a rectangular polyline.
In either case, its edges can be edited so that
it travels in three dimensions rather than two.
Molding Line Tool
Select Build> Trim> Molding Line in 3D Molding Line Tool
floor plan view, a camera view or over-
Select Build> Trim> 3D Molding
view to create a molding line with a single
Line in floor plan or cross section/ele-
height off the floor along its entire length.
vation view to create a molding line.
Multiple Molding Lines can be connected to
form open or closed polylines as long as they • If drawn in a cross section/elevation
share the same height. view, a 3D Molding Line’s start and end
points can have two different heights.
• If drawn in floor plan view, a camera
view or overview, a 3D Molding Line has
a single height along its length.
3D Molding Lines can be connected to form
polylines as long as the ends at which two
segments connect have identical heights.

536
CAFull_RM.book Page 537 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Once drawn, a 3D Molding Line can be page 539 and “3D Molding Polyline
edited so that it travels in three dimensions. Specification Dialog” on page 541.

Floor Plan View Moldings Library

In the floor plan view, select a molding
profile from the library. The Molding Poly-
Cross Section/ line tool becomes active, allowing you to
Elevation View draw a molding polyline with using the
(selected) selected profile.

3D Overview Converting Room Molding

Select a room and click on the Make Room
3D Molding polyline and 3D molding line Molding Polyline edit button. This
as they appear in three different views. opens the Make Room Molding Polyline
dialog, allowing you to select which type of
Editing Molding Polylines room molding to convert to a molding
Molding polylines can be edited much the polyline. See “Room Polylines” on page 282.
way CAD polylines are. See “Editing Open
Polyline Based Objects” on page 155 and Converting a CAD Polyline
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on Select a CAD polyline and click the
page 160. Convert Polyline edit button to covert
All molding lines and polylines also can be it into a molding polyline or a 3D molding
edited in their specification dialogs. See polyline. See “Converting Objects” on page
“Molding Polyline Specification Dialog” on 205.

Displaying Molding Polylines

As with other objects, the display of dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
molding polylines in 2D and 3D views 174.
is controlled in the Layer Display Options
By default, molding polylines are placed on
the Moldings layer.

Changing Profiles on Existing Moldings

In 3D views, select a molding profile or profile has been selected. Click on a molding
symbol from the Library Browser and the polyline, 3D molding polyline, room
pointer changes to indicate that a molding molding, cabinet molding, door molding, or

537
CAFull_RM.book Page 538 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Frieze Moldings

window molding to change the current

molding profile. This is the same as changing
the molding profile in the specification
dialog for the object.

Click on a molding in 3D view to change it

Frieze Moldings
Frieze moldings (also known as freize Creating Frieze Moldings
boards) are mounted below the eaves of roof
planes and can be generated automatically To create automatic frieze moldings, specify
using the Build Roof dialog. a molding profile on the Frieze tab of the
Build Roof dialog; check Build Fascia,
Gutters on the Build tab of the Build Roof
dialog; and click OK. See “Build Roof
Dialog” on page 377.

Frieze moldings below the eave of automatically generated roof planes

Displaying Frieze Moldings Selecting Frieze Moldings

By default, frieze molding displays in 3D To select a frieze molding, its layer must first
views but not in floor plan view and its be unlocked and turned on. See “Locking
default layer, Roofs, Frieze Moldings, is Layers” on page 117. In floor plan or cross
locked. See “Layer Display Options Dialog” section/elevation view, select a wall and click
on page 121.

538
CAFull_RM.book Page 539 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

the Select Next Object edit button or Frieze molding can also be edited in the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog. See
press the Tab key until the frieze molding is
selected. When the frieze molding is selected “3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog”
the Status Bar says “3D Molding Polyline.” on page 541.
See “The Status Bar” on page 34. If you edit a frieze molding, you may want to
uncheck the Automatic Frieze property on
Editing Frieze Moldings the 3D Molding Polyline Specification
dialog to avoid losing your edits if fascia is
Like other 3D Molding Polyines, frieze
recalculated.
molding can be edited much the way CAD
polylines are in floor plan and cross section/ Once Automatic Frieze is unchecked, it
elevation views. See “Editing Molding cannot be checked again.To restore the
Polylines” on page 537. automatic updating behavior of frieze
molding, it must be regenerated.

Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

To open the Molding Polyline Specification Polyline Tab
dialog, select a molding polyline or group of
molding polylines and click the Open For information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 921.
Object edit button.
Selected Line Tab
General Tab
The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected segment of the molding polyline is a
line, as opposed to an arc. For more
information, see “Line Style Tab” on page
889.

Arc Tab
The Arc tab displays when the selected
Specify the Height of the polyline. segment of the 3D molding polyline is an
arc, as opposed to a line. See “Arc Tab” on
Select No Molding on Selected Edge to page 896.
create blank section in the molding polyline
along the selected line segment.

539
CAFull_RM.book Page 540 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

Moldings Tab

1
2
3

1 Molding - Select the molding to edit. moves the molding up and a negative offset
always moves the molding down.
2 Add New - Click to open the Select
Library Object dialog and add a new To Top - Click to specify that the top of the
molding profile or symbol to the molding molding is at the polyline height plus the
polyline. See “Select Library Object Dialog” offset.
on page 689.
To Bottom - Click to specify that the bottom
Select - Click to remove the currently of the molding is placed at the polyline
selected profile and replace it with a new one height plus the offset.
from the Select Library Object dialog.
Inside - Click to extrude the molding profile
Delete - Click to delete the currently selected on the inside or right side of the polyline.
profile. Clear to extrude the molding profile on the
outside or left side of the polyline.
3 Height - Specify the molding profile
height. It must be greater than 0.
Width - Specify the width. This option is
not available for molding polylines created
from default room moldings. This value must
be greater than 0.
Offset - Specify the offset from the molding
polyline height to the top or bottom of the
molding profile. A positive offset always Molding extruded inside

540
CAFull_RM.book Page 541 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Line Style Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Fill Style Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 921.
Molding extruded outside (Inside unchecked)
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

Select a 3D molding polyline and click the When Automatic Frieze is checked, the
Open Object edit button to open the 3D frieze molding is updated whenever you
Molding Polyline Specification dialog.
check Build Fascia, Gutters on the Build
Roof dialog and click OK.

General Tab Once Automatic Frieze has been

unchecked, it cannot be checked again.To
restore the automatic updating behavior of
the frieze molding, it must be regenerated.
See “Creating Frieze Moldings” on page
1
538.
2
Selected Line Tab
1 Uncheck Molding on Selected Edge to The Selected Line tab is available when the
turn off the display of the specified
molding on the edge of the 3D molding selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
polyline that was selected when the dialog is a line as opposed to an arc.
was opened. For more information about the The Length/Angle section in the 3D
selected edge, see “Selecting Objects” on Molding Polyline Specification dialog is
page 144. different other Selected Line tabs.

2 Automatic frieze is enabled when a

frieze molding is selected (see
“Selecting Frieze Moldings” on page 538).

541
CAFull_RM.book Page 542 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

Angle in XY Plane specifies the counter-

clockwise angle that the selected line makes
with the positive X axis when viewed from
above, as in floor plan view.
Angle from XY Plane specifies the angle
that the selected line makes with the
horizontal XY plane when viewed from the
side, as in a cross section/elevation view. A
positive value means that the line slopes up;
a negative value means that it slopes down.
For more information about using the other
settings on the Selected Line tab of the 3D
Molding Polyline Specification dialog, see
Length specifies the 3D length of the “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
selected line of the 3D molding polyline.

542
CAFull_RM.book Page 543 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected segment of the 3D molding polyline
is an arc as opposed to a line.

1 5

6
3

7
4

1 The Lock options specify how Select Chord to keep the start and end fixed
changing one value affects other values. and change the radius.
Select Start to keep the start and center of
2 The Start options specify the
the arc fixed and move the end. coordinates of the starting point of the
selected arc, and are editable when either
Select End to keep the end and center of the
Lock End or Lock Arc are selected.
arc fixed and move the start.
Select Center to keep the center of the arc 3 The End options specify the
coordinates of the end point of the
fixed and move the start or end.
selected arc, and are editable when either
Select Arc to keep the arc geometry fixed Lock Start or Lock Arc are selected.
and translate the arc.

543
CAFull_RM.book Page 544 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

3D Molding Polyline Specification Dialog

4 The Chord options specify the length selected arc and are editable when Lock Arc
and angle of the selected arc and are is selected.
editable when either Lock Start or Lock
End are selected. The Chord Angle is also 7 The Normal options specify the
coordinates of the normal for the plane
editable when Lock Arc is selected.
that the arc exists in. The normal is a vector
• Chord Length - the 3D distance between that is parallel to that plane and is expressed
arc start and end. as a line between two points: (0,0,0) and the
• Chord Angle - the angle created by the point defined in the dialog.
arc chord and the positive X axis. In plan view, the arc direction is counter
clockwise if the normal has a positive value
5 The Arc options specify radius, angle on the z axis (0,0,1) and clockwise if the
and length values of the selected arc:
value on the z axis is negative (0,0,-1).
• Radius - the distance from the arc to the
arc center.
Moldings Tab
• Start Angle - the angle created by a line
from the arc center to the start and the For information about the Moldings tab, see
positive X axis. “Moldings Tab” on page 540.
• End Angle - the angle that a line from the
center to the end Line Style Tab
• Arc Angle - the angle created by a line For information about the Line Style tab, see
from the arc center to the start and a line “Line Style Tab” on page 901.
from the center to the end.
• Arc Length - the length of the arc. Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
6 The Center options specify the “Materials Tab” on page 709.
coordinates of the center point of the

544
CAFull_RM.book Page 545 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

545
CAFull_RM.book Page 546 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 19:

Cabinets

With Chief Architect’s cabinet tools you can Chapter Contents

create base, wall, and full height cabinets as • Cabinet Defaults
well as soffits, shelves, partitions, and • The Cabinet Tools
custom countertops. These objects are very • Cabinet Fillers
versatile, allowing for a wide range of • Placing Cabinets and Fillers
customization. • Custom Countertops
Chief Architect also has many customized • Displaying Cabinets
cabinet symbols and cabinet groups available • Cabinet Labels
in the library. Cabinets you have customized • Editing Cabinets
can be saved to your own library for future • Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel
Style
use.
• Editing Custom Countertops
• Special Cabinets
• Cabinet Specification Dialog
• Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog
• Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog
• Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

546
CAFull_RM.book Page 547 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Cabinet Defaults
Access default settings for each Cabinet Fillers and Custom Countertops do
cabinet type by selecting Edit> not have defaults dialogs. Instead, their
Default Settings, then clicking the + beside initial settings are based on the those of other
Cabinets. Select a subheading and click the objects.
Edit button to open the defaults dialog • Base Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are
associated with your selection. based on Base Cabinet Defaults.
The Cabinet Defaults dialogs can also be • Wall Cabinet Fillers’ initial settings are
accessed by double-clicking the Cabinet based on Wall Cabinet Defaults.
Tools parent button. • Full Height Cabinet Fillers’ initial set-
tings are based on Full Height Cabinet
Defaults.
• Custom Countertops’ initial settings are
based on Base Cabinet Default settings
but are also influenced by the settings of
cabinets beneath them.
See “Custom Countertops” on page 549.

Dynamic Cabinet Defaults

The following cabinet default values are
dynamic: Separation, Backsplash Height
and Thickness, Countertop Overhang and
Double-clicking a Cabinet Tools child button Thickness, Toe Kick Height and Depth,
also opens its corresponding defaults dialog, Side and Vertical Overlap, Stiles,
if that object has a defaults dialog. Hardware spacing, and all Materials. See
“Dynamic Defaults” on page 67.
Each type of cabinet object has default
definitions for size, style, materials and much When changed, existing cabinet objects
more. In fact, the default dialog for each using the default value are affected.
cabinet type is similar to its corresponding
specification dialog. For descriptions of General Cabinet Defaults
these settings, see “Cabinet Specification
The General Cabinet Defaults dialog can be
Dialog” on page 562, “Shelf/Partition
accessed only from the Default Settings
Specification Dialog” on page 576 and
dialog.
“Soffit Specification Dialog” on page 662.

547
CAFull_RM.book Page 548 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Cabinet Tools

3 Specify how Cabinet Resizing takes

place when the edit handles are used.
1 • Select Use Grid Snaps to resize cabinets
2 using Snap Grid increments1.
3 • Select Use Resize Increment to resize
cabinets using the increment specified
here.
• Set the Resize Increment at which cabi-
4 nets resize. The minimum allowable
increment is 1/16 of an inch (10 mm).

4 Uncheck Show Partial Module Lines

to display lines between merged cabinet
modules as specified by the “Cabinets,
1 Specify the Minimum Cabinet Width.
The minimum allowable width is 1/16 Module Lines” layer2. Check this box to
of an inch (10 mm). represent module lines as grey lines that do
not extend across the cabinets.
2 Uncheck Create Automatic Fillers to
prevent fillers from automatically
generating in spaces between cabinets. This You can set these values specifically for
setting is dynamic: changing it will affect particular manufacturers.
cabinets already present in your plan.
1.See “Grid Snaps” on page 136.
2.See “Displaying Objects” on page 117.

The Cabinet Tools

Select Build> Cabinet to access the Once created, cabinets, soffits, shelves,
Cabinet Tools. partitions and fillers can be selected and
Cabinets are easily created with a single click edited much like other box-based objects4.
in any view3. Typically, though, groups of
cabinet objects are positioned closely Base Cabinets
together and arranged to form work spaces, Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet
and there are some special behaviors and and click in any view. Base cabinets
techniques to be aware of. See “Placing can be placed directly under wall cabinets
Cabinets and Fillers” on page 551.

4.See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on

3.See “Click-to-Create” on page 142. page 164.

548
CAFull_RM.book Page 549 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

and generate a countertop and toe kick by Create corner shelves by placing one shelf on
default. each wall, then moving or stretching them
until they touch.
Wall Cabinets Once created, shelves can be selected and
To place a wall cabinet, select Build> edited. See “Shelf/Partition Specification
Cabinet> Wall Cabinet and click in Dialog” on page 576.
any view. Wall cabinets can be placed
directly over base cabinets. Partitions
Select Build> Cabinet> Partition
Full Height Cabinets button and click in any view to create a
To place a full height cabinet, select vertical partition.
Build> Cabinet> Full Height and Like shelves, partitions can be selected and
click in any view. Full height cabinets edited after they are placed.
generate a toe kick by default and cannot be
placed on top of other cabinets. Partitions can be used with shelves to create
complex storage systems.
Soffits
Custom Countertops
Soffits typically fill the space between
cabinet tops and the ceiling, but can Custom Countertops are drawn and
also be used to create any object that can be edited just like other closed-polyline
modeled as a 3D box. To place a soffit, select based objects1. Select Build> Cabinet>
Build> Cabinet> Soffit and click in any Custom Countertop, then either click and
view. drag a rectangle or single-click to place a
2’x2’ countertop. See “Custom Countertops”
Soffits can display in both floor plan and 3D
on page 553.
views. They can be assigned materials that
are calculated in the Materials List; by You can also generate a custom countertop
default, they use the material assigned to over one or more base cabinets using the
interior walls in the General Materials
Generate Custom Countertop edit tool.
dialog. Like cabinets, soffits can have
See “Using the Edit Buttons” on page 557.
custom molding profiles specified for them.
For more information about using soffits for Custom Counter Holes
a variety of purposes, see “Other Objects” on
page 648. Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
Counter Hole, then either click and
drag a rectangle or single-click to place a
Shelves
2’x2’ countertop hole. Custom Counter
Select Build> Cabinet> Shelf and
click in any view to create a shelf. 1.See “Rectangular Polyline” on page
903.

549
CAFull_RM.book Page 550 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Cabinet Tools

Holes must be drawn within an existing

Custom Countertop, can be drawn in any Place range tops and sinks into cabi-
view except cross section/elevation views nets early, so that any resizing can be
and can be edited to any shape. See “Editing done before too many cabinets are placed.
Custom Countertops” on page 558.
To install an appliance into a cabinet, select
the appliance for placement in the selection
Cabinet Modules Library
pane of the Library Browser and click on a
In the Library Browser, expand the cabinet. There must be enough space in the
Cabinet Modules category to access a cabinet or adjoining cabinets to contain the
list of cabinets. Select the library object you selected appliance. See “The Library
want, then click in any view to place it in the Browser” on page 683.
plan. Once placed, library cabinets can be
Fixtures can be added to both the top and
edited. See “Libraries” on page 682.
front of the same cabinet. The fixture on top
You can add single cabinets or blocked units can be selected by clicking the cabinet and
to the library. See “Adding to the Library” on pressing the Tab key or clicking the Select
page 700 and “Architectural Blocks” on page Next Object edit button. The fixture on
676. the face can be deleted on the Front tab of the
Cabinet Specification dialog. When a
Cabinet Door and cabinet has fixtures on both its top and front,
Drawer Library
the Open Symbol edit button opens the
A selection of special cabinet doors, specification dialog for the fixture on the
drawers and panels is available in the front. If a cabinet has only one fixture, the
Library Browser. Select a library object, then Open Symbol edit button opens it for
click on an existing cabinet to place the door specification.
or drawer onto that cabinet. Doors, drawers
and panels can be assigned to a cabinet in its
In the real world, some appliances can
specification dialog, as well. Cabinet doors,
share a cabinet, while others cannot. It
drawers and panels can also be placed as is up to you to determine which appliances
stand-alone fixtures. can be effectively and safely combined.
You can use the symbol development tools to
create custom cabinet doors and drawers and Electrical Objects
save them in the library for future use. See
Electrical objects such as switches and
“Adding to the Library” on page 700.
outlets can be placed on cabinets in
most views. See “The Electrical Tools” on
Built-In Appliances page 518.
A variety of fixtures and appliances such as
sinks, cooktops, dishwashers, and garbage
disposals can be placed into cabinets. See
“Inserted Objects” on page 691.

550
CAFull_RM.book Page 551 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Cabinet Fillers
Cabinet fillers can be created automatically Cabinet Filler Tools
or placed manually. See “General Cabinet
Defaults” on page 547. If you prefer, you can place cabinet
fillers manually using the Cabinet
Both automatic and manually placed cabinet Filler Tools. Select Build> Cabinet Filler to
fillers are included in the Materials List. access these tools.
Cabinet filler sizes in the Materials List are
rounded to the nearest 1/16” (1 mm). To create a cabinet filler, select Build>
Cabinet Filler , choose the desired tool
Automatic Fillers from the submenu, then click to place a filler
just as you would a cabinet, in any view.
By default, Chief Architect models a
continuous countertop and generates fillers Base Cabinet Fillers are composed
automatically when cabinets of the same of a front surface, a toe kick and a
height are either touching or placed with 3” section of countertop.
(30 mm) of one another. Wall Cabinet Fillers are composed of
If two cabinets meeting at a corner are a front surfac only.
separated from each other by 3”(30 mm) or Full Height Cabinet Fillers are
less, the program will automatically generate composed of a front surface and a toe
a filler in the angle between them. A filler is kick.
used to separate the front of one of these
cabinets from the one it meets so that You can also convert a regular base, wall or
drawers and doors have room to operate. full height cabinet into a filler by checking
Filler in the Cabinet Specification dialog.
Similarly, a cabinet filler can be converted to
a regular cabinet by unchecking this box. See
“General Tab” on page 563.
Once created, manually placed cabinet fillers
can be edited much like regular cabinets.

Two base cabinets and the filler between them

Placing Cabinets and Fillers

Cabinets and cabinet fillers are easily created shared attributes, they have some special
with a single click in any view1. Because behaviors.
they are typically organized into groups with
1.See “Click-to-Create” on page 142.

551
CAFull_RM.book Page 552 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Placing Cabinets and Fillers

Cabinet Snapping and Aligning by moving a cabinet into the desired position
using dimensions2.
Cabinets have several special snapping and
aligning behaviors which help you create
precisly aligned cabinets quickly and easily. Cabinet Merging
• When Base and/or Full Height cabinets When cabinets of the same height and type
are within 3” of one another’s sides, they are placed side-by-side within 3” (30 mm) of
will snap together. Wall cabinets snap in a one another they will automatically merge,
similar manner, but only with other Wall making any shared components such as the
cabinets. toe kick, countertop, backsplash and
moldings continuous. Any gap between
• When Base and/or Full Height cabinets
merged cabinets will be automatically filled.
are within 3” of one another’s sides and
their front or back surfaces are within 3” The exposed ends of merged cabinets have
of aligning, they will become aligned. side counter overhangs, closed toe kicks, feet
Wall cabinets snap in a similar manner and corner pilasters. Adjacent merged
with other Wall cabinets as well as Full cabinets share front pilasters.
Height cabinets.
Cabinets placed at different angles will also
• When a Base and/or Full Height cabinet merge if they face toward one another and
is placed against the back of another Base meet at a front corner. Cabinets that meet at a
or Full Height cabinet, its back surface back corner will also merge provided that
will automatically face the other cabinet’s they face away from one another at an angle
back. Wall cabinets snap in a similar no greater than 87°. In either case, a filler is
manner with other Wall as well as Full created in the angle between the two.
Height cabinets.
If the side of a cabinet is placed within 3” (30
• When a cabinet or cabinet filler is placed mm) of a wall, the countertop will extend to
against a wall, its back and/or side will the wall and a filler will be created.
snap to the wall and, if the wall is moved,
the cabinet will move with it. Cabinet merging occurs even when Object
When cabinets are snapped to a wall or to Snaps are turned off; however, you can
other cabinets, only exposed end cabinets suppress this behavior for cabinets that do
have side counter overhangs, closed toe not actually touch by turning off Create
kicks, feet and corner pilasters. Adjacent Automatic Fillers. See “General Cabinet
cabinet fronts share front pilasters. Defaults” on page 547.

Cabinet snapping and aligning occurs even Base and Wall Cabinets
when when Object Snaps are turned
1
Base and wall cabinets have different default
off ; however, you can override this behavior heights, so they can be placed directly above

2.See “Moving Objects Using Dimen-

1.See “Object Snaps” on page 133. sions” on page 831.

552
CAFull_RM.book Page 553 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

or below one another without interference. places an 18” cabinet. See “General Cabinet
You can use Object Snaps to center a Defaults” on page 547.
wall cabinet’s back center point above that of If you try to place a cabinet into a space
a base cabinet, or vice versa. See “Click-to- narrower than the default Minimum
Create” on page 142. Cabinet Width, a cabinet will not be placed.
If, for example, you have a space that is 8”
Minimum Cabinet Size and your Minimum Cabinet Width is 9”, no
cabinet is placed.
If you try to place a cabinet into a space that
is too narrow for its default size, the program
will place a smaller cabinet with a width that
Cabinet Fillers
is a multiple of the default Resize By default, the program will automatically
Increment. For example, if you try to place a place a filler between cabinets that are within
24” wide cabinet in a 20” wide space and 3” of one another. You can instead turn off
your Resize Increment is 3”, the program Create Automatic Fillers and place fillers
manually.

Custom Countertops
Countertops are automatically clicking the Generate Custom Countertop
generated on top of base cabinets. edit button. See “Using the Edit Buttons”
These default countertops are basically on page 557.
components of the cabinets. They can be
edited in the Cabinet Specification dialog When a Custom Countertop covers any
but cannot be selected and modified portion of a base cabinet, it overrides the
separately. You can instead use Custom default countertop.
Countertops, which are drawn and edited If a sink or built-in appliance is added to the
just like other closed-polyline based objects cabinet, a hole for the fixture is automatically
can be selected and edited independent of the cut in the custom countertop.
cabinets beneath. See “Rectangular Polyline”
on page 903. A custom countertop bases its thickness and
height on the base cabinet(s) below.
Select Build> Cabinet> Custom
• If there are multiple cabinets below, it
Countertop , then either click and drag a uses the specifications for the cabinet
rectangle or single-click to place a 2’x2’ with the greatest overall height.
countertop. Custom Countertops can be
drawn in any view except cross section/ • If there is no base cabinet below, its
elevation views. height and thickness are based on the
base cabinet defaults. See “Cabinet
You can also generate a custom countertop Defaults” on page 547.
over one or more selected base cabinets by

553
CAFull_RM.book Page 554 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Cabinets

The countertop initially uses the default dialog. See “Custom Countertop
countertop material set in the Base Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page 578.
Defaults dialog. You can specify a different
Once created, a custom countertop can be
material as well as the height and position in
edited like other closed-polyline based
the Custom Countertop Specification
objects. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
Objects” on page 160.

Displaying Cabinets
The display of the various cabinet Custom Countertop edit tool, a Custom
object types, labels, module lines, Countertop uses the same fill style as the
door opening indicators and more is selected cabinet. See “Fill Style Tab” on page
controlled in the Layer Display Options 902.
dialog. See “Displaying Objects” on page
117. Both automatic and Custom Countertops
display if the “Cabinets, Countertops” layer
In Floor Plan View is turned on.

Cabinets are drawn so that wall cabinets, By default, cabinet module lines do not
soffits and shelves are always in front of base display when cabinet modules are merged.
and full height cabinets, countertops and To show lines between individual cabinets in
partitions. floor plan view, set the “Cabinets, Module
Lines” layer to display. You can specify
You can select a cabinet of any type and click whether module lines are full or partial. See
the Move to Front edit button to make “General Cabinet Defaults” on page 547.
that object display in front of other cabinets You can also display cabinet front indicator
of the same type. See “Move to Front of arrows in floor plan view by turning on the
Group” on page 176. “Cabinets, Front Indicators” layer.
If the “Cabinets, Labels” layer is turned on,
cabinet labels are centered on the cabinet In 3D Views
they represent. Cabinet labels have their own
To show opening indicator arrows in cross
edit handle and can be moved when the
section/elevation and Vector views, turn on
cabinet is selected. Label size is controlled in
the “Opening Indicators” layer.
the Schedule Specification dialog. See
“Label Tab” on page 1042.
In the Materials List
Fill Styles and colors can be assigned to
cabinets and Custom Countertops. Custom There are a number of ways to control how,
Countertops use a transparent fill style by or whether, cabinets are included in the
default. If generated using the Generate Materials List. See “Organizing Materials
Lists” on page 1050.

554
CAFull_RM.book Page 555 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

You can also add and edit information about its Components dialog. See “Components
cabinet components and subcomponents in Dialog” on page 1062.

Cabinet Labels
Labels for both cabinets and cabinet fillers
display in floor plan view when the Cabinets, Code
Labels layer is turned on. See “Displaying All Cabinets
Objects” on page 117. LS + Key Lazy Susan
LSD + Key Lazy Susan Diagonal Door
Label size is controlled in the Cabinet
DC + Key Diagonal Door
Schedule Specification dialog. See “Label
LC + Key Left Corner
Tab” on page 1042.
BC + Key Blind Corner
Select a cabinet to see the label edit handle. PBC + Key Peninsula Blind Corner
This can be used to move the label. Key + P Peninsula
Cabinet labels are available in three different Key + F Filler
formats: E + Key Right or Left End
A + Key Angled Front
• Automatic Labels, which include size,
PR + Key Peninsula Radius
type and other information in abbreviated
R + Key Radius End
form.
B Base
• Component Code, which can be speci- OB Oven Base
fied in a cabinet’s Components dialog. SB Sink Base
See “Components Dialog” on page 1062. RB Range Base
• User-Specified, which is entered in a #DB Drawer Bank (# is the
cabinet’s specification dialog. See “Label number of drawers
Tab” on page 1045. FHB Full Height Base (1 full
height door
Automatic Labels
W Wall
The format for automatic cabinet labels has Code from Drawer (# is the number
four parts: Key, Code, Size, and Door Swing. above + #D of drawers
The Key provides basic information about
the cabinet box and its use. B refers to base U Full Height (Utility)
cabinets, W refers to wall cabinets and U OTC Tall Oven
refers to full height cabinets. RTC Tall Refrigerator

Together with the key, the Code provides Blind corner cabinets are dependent on the
additional information about the shape of the cabinet’s position in the plan. A cabinet can
cabinet box: only be a blind corner cabinet when its front
is partially hidden by another cabinet. See

555
CAFull_RM.book Page 556 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Cabinets

“Blind Cabinets” on page 562. If a cabinet is

moved, therefore, its Code information may Full Height WHD
change. Width (W) Always included
The Size follows the Code in a cabinet label. Depth (D) Always included
Cabinet width is always included in the label; Height (H) Always included
depth and height, on the other hand, may be Corner Always included
included depending on the cabinet type and Depth (D)
whether they are standard or non-standard.
Door Swing is included at the end of the
Base and full height cabinet labels present
label as either L or R, but only if all the
Size information in this order: width, depth,
doors on a cabinet have the same swing.
height. Wall cabinet labels present it in a
slightly different order: width, depth, height. Here are a few examples of automatic
cabinet labels and their meanings:
Sizes • 3DB24: Base cabinet with 3 drawers, 24”
Base W(D)(H) wide. Depth and height are standard.
Width (W) Always included
• SB24R: Sink base, 24” wide, with a right
Depth (D) 24” (60 cm)
door. Depth and height are standard.
Height (H) 34 1/2” (90 cm)
Corner Depth = Width
• BCW2436R: Blind wall cabinet, 24”
Depth (D) wide, 36” high, with a right door. Depth
is standard.
Wall WH(D) • DCW2436L: Diagonal corner wall
Width (W) Always included cabinet, 24” wide, 36” high, with a left
Height (H) Always included door. Depth is standard (equal to width).
Depth (D) 12” (30 cm) • OTC362490: Full height cabinet with
Corner Depth = Width oven, 36” wide, 24” deep, 90” high.
Depth (D)

Editing Cabinets
Cabinets and cabinet fillers can be selected in Using the Mouse
2D and 3D views both individually and as a
group and edited using the edit handles, the Cabinets can be edited like other box-based
edit toolbar and their specification dialog. objects. See “Editing Box-Based Objects” on
See “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page page 164. Depending on the view, the edit
562. handles a cabinet displays when selected
will vary.

556
CAFull_RM.book Page 557 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

When a cabinet is selected in floor plan view Cabinet Specification dialog. For example,
or on its top surface in a 3D view, ten edit you cannot redefine the crown molding on a
handles display. They are the Move handle at full height cabinet if it was selected with a
the center, the Rotate handle, and a Resize base cabinet that does not have crown
handle on each edge and at each corner. molding.
Soffits, shelves, and partitions can be group
selected and edited using their corresponding
specification dialog. It is important that only
soffits, or only shelves, or only partitions be
a part of the selection set in order to access
the needed specification dialog.
See “Cabinet Specification Dialog” on page
562.

If cabinet labels are displayed, a label will Using the Edit Buttons
move as its cabinet is moved or resized. An
A cabinet or cabinets can be edited in a
edit handle for the label also displays when a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
cabinet is selected. See “Displaying
toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
Cabinets” on page 554.
1140.
When a cabinet is selected on a side in a
cross section/elevation or 3D view, it has five Add to Library
edit handles: the Move handle and a Resize
handle on each edge. In 3D views, cabinets Cabinets can be saved in the
can be selected on any surface: front, side, Library Browser. Select a base,
back or top. wall or full height cabinet or cabinet filler
and click either the Add to Library or Add
Cabinets cannot be concentrically resized, to Library As edit button. See “Adding a
even when the Concentric edit behavior is New Object” on page 700.
enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page 137.
If you use Add to Library As , you can
Multiple Cabinets add the selected cabinet to the library in
either of two ways:
When cabinets are selected as a group, they
can be modified as a group in the Cabinet • Select Cabinet Module to save the cabi-
Specification dialog. Any specifications that net along with its doors, drawers and pan-
the selected objects share in common can be els and any fixtures or appliances.
edited. • Select Cabinet Doors and Drawers to
When you group select cabinets of different save the cabinet door style only.
types, some options are not available in the

557
CAFull_RM.book Page 558 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel Style

Using Dimensions Moving Walls with

Like various other objects, cabinets can be Cabinets Attached
moved and resized using dimensions. See When a cabinet is placed or moved against a
“Moving Objects Using Dimensions” on wall, it will snap to the wall and become
page 831. attached to it. When a wall is moved, all
In order to be edited using dimensions, attached cabinets move with it.
cabinets must be located by them. You can Moving a wall to an unattached cabinet will
specify whether cabinets are located by not attach the cabinet to it: the cabinet must
dimensions in the Dimension Defaults be moved to the wall. A cabinet can also be
dialog. See “Locate Objects Tab” on page
attached to a wall when Plan Check is
816.
used. See “Plan Check” on page 928.
Dimensions can be set to locate the sides
When wall layers are resized or the wall
and/or corners of cabinet boxes - not the
layer definition redefined, the cabinets may
countertop. If you wish, you can move a
become unattached. To reattach, select them,
dimension’s extension lines to locate the
drag them away from the wall, and then drag
countertop after the dimension is drawn. See
them back again.
“Editing Extension Lines” on page 829.

Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel Style

There are several ways to specify the cabinet the Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Front
door, drawer and panel style. Tab” on page 565.
If the desired cabinet door, drawer and/or You can also apply a door, drawer or panel
panel styles are known before cabinets are style to a cabinet directly from the Library
placed, they can be specified in the Cabinet Browser. Select a door or drawer style in the
Defaults dialog. See “Cabinet Defaults” on library, then click on a cabinet face item to
page 547. apply the selected style to that cabinet. If you
are in a 3D view, the view updates. Continue
Once cabinets are placed, select or group-
clicking on cabinets or select a different tool
select them and click the Open Object to stop using this function. See “Placing
edit button to choose a new door style from Library Objects” on page 690.

Editing Custom Countertops

Custom Countertops and Custom handles, the edit toolbar and their
specification dialogs. See “Custom
Counter Holes can be selected in 2D Countertop Specification Dialog” on page
and 3D views and edited using the edit 578.

558
CAFull_RM.book Page 559 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

closed polylines are. See “Editing Closed-

Polyline Based Objects” on page 160.

Using the Edit Toolbar

A selected Custom Countertop or
Custom Counter Hole can be edited in a
variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
Using the Mouse 1140.

Custom countertops are considered to be

CAD-based objects and are edited the way

Special Cabinets
There are a number of special cabinet shapes Corner Cabinets
that can be specified. Certain requirements
must be met before some special cabinet To create a corner cabinet, click as close to
shapes can be specified. If the requirements an inside wall corner as possible in using
are not met, a warning message will explain either the Base Cabinet , Wall Cabinet
what is needed. See “Cabinet Specification
, or Full Height cabinet tool. A
Dialog” on page 562.
corner cabinet remains a corner cabinet when
it is moved, edited or copied.
Normal Cabinets
Turn an existing cabinet into a corner
Select Build> Cabinet> Base Cabinet cabinet by selecting Corner Cabinet from the
and click in floor plan view to place a Special drop-down list in its specification
normal, rectangular base cabinet. dialog. See “General Tab” on page 563.
• Before a corner cabinet can be specified
in the Cabinet Specification dialog, the
cabinet’s Width must be greater than its
Depth.
• The Left and the Right Side Widths can
be set independently for corner cabinets.

Normal (default) cabinet

559
CAFull_RM.book Page 560 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Special Cabinets

• If multiple cabinets are joined together,

only exposed end (outside) cabinets have
corner pilasters, cabinet feet, side counter
overhangs and closed toe kicks.
• If multiple joined cabinets have both
Front Pilasters and Corner Pilasters
specified, the exposed end cabinets
include corner pilasters and inside cabi-
Corner cabinet with sides of equal width
nets have front pilasters.
• You can specify a Diagonal Door on cor- • If multiple cabinets are joined, inside
ner cabinets to create an angled corner cabinets share Front Pilasters.
cabinet. See “Front Tab” on page 565.
• Corner pilasters and cabinet legs are
eliminated on the back if the cabinet is
against a wall, and on either side if it’s
joined with another cabinet.
• For more information see “Cabinet Spec-
ification Dialog” on page 562.

Corner cabinet with diagonal door

• The diagonal door on corner cabinets can

be curved by entering a negative value in
the second Right Side Width field. See
“General Tab” on page 563.
Exposed End Cabinets

End Cabinets
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Left or Right End Cabinet from the Special
drop-down list to create an end cabinet.

Corner cabinet with curved door

Exposed End Cabinets

A cabinet that is merged on one side but not
the other is referred to as an exposed end.
Pilasters, feet, countertop overhangs and
closed toe kicks all behave differently when Left End Cabinet
groups of cabinets are merged: • End Cabinets have an angled front and
side.

560
CAFull_RM.book Page 561 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• The cabinet width must be no greater The radius can be adjusted by changing the
than its depth for an end cabinet to be Depth/Bow Depth value. See “General Tab”
specified. on page 563.

Radius End Cabinets Angled Front Cabinets

Open a cabinet for specification and select Open a cabinet for specification and select
Right or Left Radius End from the Special Angled Front from the Special drop-down
drop-down list to create a radius end cabinet. list to create an angled front cabinet.

Radius End cabinets have a 90° arch

Angled Front Cabinet
As you face the cabinet, a right radius end
• The length of the left and right side of an
curves to the right, and a left radius end
Angled Front cabinet can be defined by
curves to the left.
changing the Depth/Bow Depth value.
See “General Tab” on page 563.
Left Right
Radius Radius Bow Front Cabinets
End End
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Bow Front from the Special drop-down list
Peninsula Radius Cabinets
to create a bow front cabinet.
Open a cabinet for specification and select
Pen. Radius from the Special drop-down list
to create peninsula radius cabinet.

Bow Front Cabinet

• The bow depth of a Bow Front cabinet

can be defined. See “General Tab” on
Peninsula Radius Cabinet page 563.

561
CAFull_RM.book Page 562 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

• The bow depth cannot exceed half the

cabinet width.
• The doors and drawers on a Bow Front
cabinet automatically match the curva-
ture of the cabinet.

Kitchen Islands
To create a kitchen island, simply place
several cabinets back-to-back and/or side-to-
side. Match the widths so that each cabinet
back or side meets the back or side of only Blind Cabinets
one other cabinet. If this is not done, the lines Often, when two cabinets meet in a corner,
separating the cabinets cannot be suppressed. one is partially hidden by the other. This
Two cabinets cannot merge with the same partially hidden cabinet is called a “blind”
side of another cabinet. The picture shows cabinet. Chief Architect will resize and offset
two instances when cabinets are placed back- the front items of the partially hidden cabinet
to-back. Cabinet fronts and joining surfaces so that they are not located in the hidden
are shown. portion of the cabinet face.

Cabinet Specification Dialog

Select a cabinet and click the Open The Cabinet Specification dialog allows
Object edit button to open the Cabinet you to customize cabinets individually and in
Specification dialog.
groups.

If the selected cabinet is an imported symbol, The options in the cabinet specification
the Cabinet Symbol Specification dialog dialogs are similar to the corresponding
Cabinet Defaults dialog. See “Cabinet
opens instead and has fewer options than the
Cabinet Specification dialog. See “Symbol
Defaults” on page 547.
Specification Dialog” on page 974.

562
CAFull_RM.book Page 563 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1
2

3 7

6
8
9

1 A number of Special cabinet types are • Height (Including Counter) - This is the
available in the drop-down list. Certain measurement of the cabinet box from the
requirements must be met before some bottom to the top. For base cabinets, this
special cabinet shapes can be specified. See dimension includes the counter thickness,
“Special Cabinets” on page 559. but not the height of the backsplash.
• Check Filler to specify the selected cabi-
net as a filler of the same type instead of a Note: Height defines the height of the entire
true cabinet. See “Cabinet Fillers” on cabinet. The height of the cabinet face, coun-
page 551. This checkbox is disabled in tertop and the toe kick are all included in this
value. If you change either the Countertop
the Cabinet Defaults dialogs.
Thickness or the Toe Kick Height, the cabinet
face height is altered. This changes the
2 Specification - The selected cabinet’s heights of your face objects.
dimensions can be specified here.
Fractional cabinet widths, depths, and
heights are supported to 1/16th of an inch.

563
CAFull_RM.book Page 564 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

• Width - This is the measurement of the • Flat Sides can be added to base cabinets.
front of the cabinet box from left to right. Checking Flat Sides eliminates the coun-
This does not include the countertop ter overhang on the cabinet’s exposed
overhang. ends.
• Depth - This is the measurement of the • Check Flat Back to eliminate the over-
cabinet box from front to back. It does hang on cabinets with an exposed back.
not include the thickness of overlay doors
or the countertop overhang. 4 Backsplash - The dimensions and style
of the backsplash are specified here.
• For Special type Bow Front cabinets,
• Specify the Backsplash Height. The
specify the Bow Depth in inches. Up to
backsplash is only available when the
half the cabinet width is allowed.
cabinet is against a wall.
• For corner cabinets, the Width and
• Backsplash Thickness - Specify the
Depth/Bow Depth fields become Right
thickness of the backsplash material.
Side Width and Left Side Width. If a
corner cabinet is assigned a diagonal door • Side - Check this box to have the same
on the Front tab, the second Right Side height backsplash added to the side of a
Width field specifies the bow depth: a base or wall cabinet that is against a wall
positive number creates a bow and a neg- or taller cabinet.
ative number, an inside bow. • Check Always Present to display the
• Floor to Bottom - Specify a distance. backsplash at all times. If unchecked, a
For base and full height cabinets, this is backsplash is present only when the cabi-
usually 0. Increase this value by at least net is against a wall.
1/16” to eliminate the toe kick. If a toe Any base cabinet or wall cabinet can have a
kick height has been changed from the backsplash defined. The backsplash for a
default values, raising a cabinet off the wall cabinet extends from the bottom of the
floor does not remove the toe kick. cabinet down to the base cabinet. The
• Follow Terrain - If the cabinet is outside backsplash for a base cabinet is measured
a room, check this box to place the cabi- from the countertop up.
net relative to the terrain height.
Wall cabinets offer a check box for
Countertop - Specify the dimensions Backsplash to Base Below. If a backsplash
3
and style of the countertop here. is added to a wall cabinet, it completely
• Counter Thickness and Counter Over- covers the wall from the bottom of the
hang - Specify these values for base cab- cabinet to the countertop or backsplash
inets. The Counter Overhang is used for below.
any side of a cabinet that is not against a If a base cabinet and a wall cabinet both have
wall or another cabinet. Changing the a backsplash, the backsplash from the wall
counter thickness does not alter the cabi- cabinet extends down to the top of the base
net height but it does affect the height of cabinet backsplash.
face items.

564
CAFull_RM.book Page 565 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Electrical switches or outlets that are placed pilasters that do not extend to the floor are
within the backsplash area display in front of specified, checking this places a support
the backsplash in a 3D view when electrical block under them at exposed corners.
items are turned on in the Layer Display The preview of the cabinet updates as the
Options dialog. See “Layer Display Options cabinet changes.
Dialog” on page 121.
6 Corner - Specify angled or rounded
Toe Kick - The dimensions and style of corners for the selected cabinet(s).
5
the toe kick are specified here.
Corner Width - Enter a value to create a flat
Toe Kick Height and Depth - Specify these corner plane of the specified width. This also
values for base or full height cabinets. If a applies to the countertop.
Toe Kick Height or Depth is defined, it
Check Rounded to eliminate the 45 degree
becomes part of the cabinet and is not deleted
plane and round the cabinet corners.
if the cabinet is raised off the floor.
If the Toe Kick Height or Toe Kick Depth is 7 The preview of the cabinet updates as
the cabinet changes.
set to use the default “(D),” the toe kick is
only available when the cabinet is resting on
8 Show Color - Uncheck this box to
the floor. Delete the “(D)” and enter a show the cabinet preview in black and
positive value to display a toe kick on a white.
cabinet that is raised off the floor.
9 The Automatic Cabinet Label displays
Changing the Toe Kick Height does not alter below the preview diagram.
the cabinet height but it does affect the height
The cabinet label displays the cabinet’s type
of face items.
and size, which is also found in the Size
Flat Sides can be added to base and full column of the Materials List. See “Materials
height cabinets. Checking Flat Sides Lists” on page 1048.
eliminates the toe kick area on the exposed
The automatic label is not editable, but you
end of the cabinet.
can specify a custom label on the Label tab.
Check Flat Back to eliminate the toe kick on See “Label Tab” on page 1045.
cabinets with an exposed back. This does not
The labels display in floor plan view if
eliminate the toe kick on the cabinet front.
Cabinet Labels are turned on in the Layer
Check Closed Toe to extend the cabinet Display Options dialog.
sides to cover the sides of the toe kick area. If

Front Tab
The configuration of the cabinet’s front items
and shelves is specified here.

565
CAFull_RM.book Page 566 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

1
2

1 Click on a face item in the preview • Select Library or click the Library but-
diagram to select it. The selected item ton to select a cabinet door or drawer
is highlighted, and the Item Number, Item front from the library. See “Select Library
Type and Item Height identify the part Object Dialog” on page 689.
selected.
Once a door style is selected from the library,
Select the Door Style and Drawer it displays in the drop-down list. See
2
Style from the drop-down lists. “Editing Cabinet Door/Drawer and Panel
• Select Plain Doors or Drawers to apply Style” on page 558.
a flat drawer or door front.
3 Define the Face Items on the front of
• Select Framed Doors or Doors to apply the selected cabinet.
a drawer with a frame and flat panel The Item Number of the currently selected
front. The drawer must be at least 6 face item displays here. Click the drop-down
inches for the frame and panel to display. list to select a different number. Item
numbers start at the top of the cabinet and go

566
CAFull_RM.book Page 567 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

down the face. Item number 1 usually • The backsplash can be selected but its
identifies the top face frame rail (separation). type cannot be changed.
Click the Item Type drop-down list to select Item Height - Define a value for the selected
from the available front items, such as doors, item in the cabinet front. Fractional heights
drawers and panels. are supported to 1/16th of an inch.
Each front item is usually separated by a • When the height of a cabinet is changed,
frame piece, or rail. The exposed portion of a or the height of a face item is changed,
rail is defined as a separation. The frame the height of the lowest face item is
pieces on the side are referred to as stiles. altered to make up the difference.
• If you modify the lowest item, the item
Note: The program makes sure that the directly above is adjusted. Set the coun-
heights of the front items equal the total cabi- tertop height and the toe kick height first,
net face height. When necessary, a blank and then work from the top to the bottom
area is inserted at the bottom or the lowest when adjusting face items.
face item is deleted when there is not enough
room. This means you should start editing • If the height of an appliance has been
face items at the top and work down. altered, entering “d” restores its default
height.
• A cabinet can have any number of front
Click Specify Shelves to open the Cabinet
items, but there is a limit to the number of
Shelves Specification dialog and specify
items that can actually fit on a given cabi-
the shelf configuration for a door or opening
net’s front.
face item.
• Auto Right and Auto Left Doors become
double doors automatically when the cab- Click Add New to add a new face item
inet width is greater than 24” (600 mm). directly below the currently selected item.
Left, Right and Double Doors are as • When you click Add New, the New
specified regardless of the cabinet width. Cabinet Face Item dialog displays.
• Cabinet fronts may be composed of any Define the Item Type, Item Height and
combination of face items. click OK.

• False Drawers assume the appearance of

the drawer style and hardware assigned to
the cabinet.
• Door Panels assume the appearance of
the cabinet’s door style but not the door
hardware.
• Appliances cannot be added from the
Item Type list, but are included once • If you click Add New with no face item
they have been added from the library. selected, the program adds the new item
See “Built-In Appliances” on page 550. at the bottom of the cabinet face.

567
CAFull_RM.book Page 568 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

• When a face item is added to the cabinet • Diagonal Door - This option is only
front, the program attempts to reduce the available for corner cabinets. Check this
height of the lowest item on the cabinet box to create a diagonal door instead of a
front to make room for the new item. double door at right angles.
Click Delete to remove the currently selected
If Diagonal Door is checked in the
item.
Cabinet Defaults dialog, corner cabinets
• When a face item is deleted, the height of have a diagonal door by default.
the lowest item is usually increased to
• Stile Between Doors - Select the check
make up the difference.
box to have double doors and double
• When an Auto Left, Auto Right, Left, drawers separated by a stile. This has no
Right, or Double Door is deleted, it is effect on other item types.
replaced by an Opening.
• Lazy Susan - This option is only avail-
Click Move Up to move the currently able for corner cabinets. These do not
selected item up one position, switching show, but are reflected in the cabinet
places with the item directly above. label and how the cabinet is drawn in
floor plan view.
Click Move Down to move the currently
selected item down one position, switching • The Reverse Appliance check box is
places with the item directly below. available if a sink, appliance or other fix-
ture is placed into the cabinet. Select
Reverse Appliance to reverse the fixture
Note: The program tries to maintain a single
separation between all face items. When you from left to right. This feature can be
add or delete a face item, separations are used to change a left hand door on a built-
usually added or deleted with them. in refrigerator to a right hand door.
• Check Double Face to replace the cur-
Some Options are available depending
4 rent cabinet face with two faces, each
on the type of cabinet selected. approximately half as wide.
• Inset Doors may be selected for all cabi- • Check Triple Face to replace the cabinet
nets. This option makes all door and face with three faces.
drawer faces flush with the cabinet face
instead of overlaying it. • Enter a Bevel width value to apply bev-
eled edges to plain drawers and doors.
• Doors On Back may be selected if the This does not affect framed or library
cabinet back is not attached. The back doors. The bevel width, as viewed from
matches the front. the front has a maximum value of 3”.
• Glass Doors may be defined for any cab- • Enter a Side Overlap value to apply an
inet that doesn’t use a library door. When overlap to doors and drawers. A value of
selected, the door panel is created using 1 inches creates an overlap of one inch on
the glass material. The entire door is either side.
glass on plain doors.

568
CAFull_RM.book Page 569 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Enter a Vertical Overlap value to apply a These can be set independently if neces-
vertical overlap to doors and drawers. A sary. When set to default ([D]), the pro-
value of 1 inches creates an overlap of gram uses the separator width for the left
one inch on top and bottom. and right stiles.
• Separation - Defines the width of the
face frame between doors, drawers, and 5 Appliance Front Offset - This option
is available for cabinets with top-
face items. A European style cabinet typ- mounted fixtures, such as sinks and
ically has a 3/4” separation. cooktops. Enter a value to adjust the depth of
• Left and Right Stile - Define the frame the counter surface between the counter edge
width to the left or right of all face items. and the fixture.

Sides/Back Tab
The settings on the Sides/Back tab allow you
to control the appearance of the selected
cabinet’s sides and back surface.

569
CAFull_RM.book Page 570 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

1 Side Type - Specify the appearance of • Select Match Front to apply the same
the Left, Right and Back Sides of the face items as the cabinet front to its back.
cabinet by selecting an option from the drop- Only available for the Back Side.
down list for each:
• Select Use Default to use the default 2 Specify the appearance of the selected
cabinet’s Panels.
panel type set in the Cabinet Defaults
• Choose “Use Default” or select a Plain,
dialog. See “Cabinet Defaults” on page
Framed or Library Panel Style from the
547.
drop-down list.
• Select Finished to specify the side a fin-
• Click the Library button to select a panel
ished.
style from the Library Browser. Cabinet
• Select Unfinished to specify the side as doors are typically used, although draw-
unfinished ers can be used, as well. See “Select
• Select Auto Finished to finish the side Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
only when it is not adjacent to another • Check Full Size Panel to apply a single
cabinet or a wall. panel to the entire side. When unchecked,
• Select Paneled to apply a panel to the the panel uses the same Style and Over-
side. lap values as the front. If the cabinet has
multiple levels of doors on its front, the
• Select Auto Paneled to apply a panel to
side will have matching panels.
the side only when it is not adjacent to
another cabinet or a wall. • Specify the selected panel’s Thickness.

570
CAFull_RM.book Page 571 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Hardware Tab

1 Specify the desired Hardware for the ates two handles the specified distance
selected cabinet(s). from the drawer edge.
• Specify the location of the handle Down
• Select a Door Handle from the drop- from Drawer Top. A value of 0" centers
down list or select a Library handle from the handle on the drawer.
the Select Library Object dialog. • Hinges - Select from the list of available
• Specify the location of the handle In styles or select a Library hinge from the
from Door Edge and Down from Door Select Library Object dialog. Specify the
Top. For Wall Cabinets, this value is Up location of the hinges Up/Down from
From Door Bottom. Door Edge. Two or three hinges are
• Select a Drawer Handle from the drop- placed, depending on the door height.
down list or select a Library handle from
the Select Library Object dialog. Enter- 2 Specify the desired Pilasters for the
selected cabinet(s).
ing a value In from Drawer Edge cre-

571
CAFull_RM.book Page 572 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

• Front Pilaster - Select the default front

pilaster, a pilaster from the library, or
None.
• Corner Pilaster - Select the default cor-
ner pilaster, a pilaster from the library, or
None. Specifying a corner pilaster auto-
matically creates a flat corner surface and
overrides the Flat Corner setting on the
General tab.
• The Width applies to both front pilasters
and corner pilasters.
• Check Extend to Floor to extend front
pilasters and corner pilasters to the floor.
Removing the Toe Kick on the General
tab also extends the pilasters to the floor.

3 Cabinet Feet - Select the default

cabinet leg, a cabinet leg from the
library, or None. Adjoining cabinets share
cabinet legs. Not available for wall cabinets. Base cabinet with front pilasters and legs

572
CAFull_RM.book Page 573 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Moldings Tab

1
2

Multiple moldings for each type of cabinet Moldings and Profiles library category.
can be specified. For example, you may want Browse and add a new molding to the list.
a wood edge around countertops of base
Select - Click here to open the Moldings and
cabinets and a crown molding that ties
Profiles library category. If you select a
together the tops of the wall cabinets and full
molding using the Select button, you replace
height cabinets.
the current molding in the list. This option
1 Molding - Select a molding for the substitutes one molding for another; it does
cabinet. This list has items only if you not add a new molding to the list.
assigned moldings to your default cabinet.
Delete - Click here to delete the selected
These moldings are stored with individual
molding from the cabinet.
cabinets in all other cases.
3 Molding Specification - Modify the
2 Add New - If no moldings are selected selected cabinet’s molding profile.
or if you want to add a new molding to
the list, click the button to open the

573
CAFull_RM.book Page 574 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cabinet Specification Dialog

Height - This is the vertical dimension of the objects. For more information, see “Fill Style
molding profile. This value is initially set in Tab” on page 902.
the selected molding profile but can be
adjusted. Materials Tab
Width - This value can be used to resize the The Materials tab is found in the
molding profile horizontally. specification dialogs for many different
Offset - This value defines the distance the objects. For more information, see
molding is offset from the top or bottom of “Materials Tab” on page 709.
the cabinet. Where it is measured from Some material options may be disabled if the
depends on which option is selected below. selected cabinet is a manufacturer symbol.
You can enter positive or negative values in
this field. The molding does not display if it Label Tab
is completely above or below the cabinet.
The Label tab is found in the specification
Once an offset is defined, select From Top dialogs for a variety of different objects,
or From Bottom to specify a reference point. including cabinets. For more information,
• From Top is measured from the cabinet see “Label Tab” on page 1045.
top and the molding top.
• From Bottom is measured from the Note: If you choose a label shape in the Cab-
molding bottom and the cabinet bottom. inet Schedule Specification dialog, the set-
tings here are overridden and the schedule
label is used instead.
Layer Tab
The Layer tab is found in the specification The display of cabinet labels can also be
dialogs for many different objects. For more controlled in the Layer Display Options
information, see “Layer Tab” on page 125. dialog. See “Layer Display Options Dialog”
on page 121.
Fill Style Tab
The Fill Style tab is found in the
specification dialogs for many different

574
CAFull_RM.book Page 575 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Cabinet Shelf Specification Dialog

From the Front tab of the Base Cabinet, and click the Specify Shelves button to open
Wall Cabinet, or Full Height Cabinet the Cabinet Shelf Specification dialog. See
Specification dialog, select a door or “Front Tab” on page 565.
opening face item in the preview diagram

Automatic Manual
1 By default, cabinet shelves are 2 Select the Manual radio button to
specified automatically. The default specify cabinet shelving for the selected
number of shelves, shelf type, thickness, door or opening. If a cabinet is resized after
spacing, and depth display here. shelving has been manually edited, the
specifications are maintained, but all shelves
may not be display in all situations.
The Number of Shelves can be specified.
Equal Spacing is checked by default.

575
CAFull_RM.book Page 576 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

3 The shelf type, thickness, spacing, and Enter a shelf Thickness in fractions or
depth can be specified on a per shelf decimals.
basis or for all shelves at once. To determine
Changing the Spacing From Previous
which, select the shelf number or All Shelves
unchecks Equal Spacing above.
from the drop-down list.
You can select Full, Half or Specify the shelf
Note: If All Shelves is selected after Depth manually.
changes have been made to any one shelf,
“no change” displays, indicating that all 4 The preview shows shelf numbers,
shelves are not the same.
thickness, depth, and spacing. Press the
Tab key to update the preview as changes are
Specify the shelf Type from the drop-down made.
list.

Shelf/Partition Specification Dialog

Select a shelf or partition and click the Open The options in these specification dialogs are
Object edit button to open the Shelf similar to the corresponding defaults dialogs.
Specification or Partition Specification
See “Cabinet Defaults” on page 547.
dialog.

576
CAFull_RM.book Page 577 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

Specify the Height, Width, Depth, and the Moldings Tab

distance from the Floor to Bottom of the
shelf or partition. This tab is similar to the same tab in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. For more
Click the Follow Terrain check box if you information, see “Moldings Tab” on page
want the shelf or partition to follow the 573.
terrain.
Layer Tab
Fill Style Tab
For information about using the Layer tab,
The Fill Style tab is found in a variety of see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
specification dialogs throughout the
program. For more information, see “Fill Materials Tab
Style Tab” on page 902.
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

577
CAFull_RM.book Page 578 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Custom Countertop Specification Dialog

Select a custom countertop and click the Thickness - Specify the thickness of the
Open Object edit button to open the countertop independent of the cabinet below.
Custom Countertop Specification dialog.
Set Thickness From Cabinet must be
unchecked.
General Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 901.
1 Selected Line Tab
2
For information about the Selected Line tab,
3 see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.

4 Moldings Tab
This tab is similar to the same tab in the
Cabinet Specification dialog. For more
information, see “Moldings Tab” on page
1 Check Hole in Countertop to convert 573.
the polyline into a countertop hole. The
selected polyline must be contained within a
custom countertop.
Line Style Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see
2 Check No Molding On Selected Edge “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
to turn off molding on the selected
edge.
Fill Style Tab
3 Check Set Height From Cabinet to The Fill Style tab is found in a variety of
allow the Countertop Height to be
determined by the cabinet below. specification dialogs throughout the
program. For more information, see “Fill
Top Height - Specify the height of the top of Style Tab” on page 902.
the custom countertop independent of the
cabinet below. Set Height From Cabinet Materials Tab
must be unchecked.
For information about the Materials tab, see
4 Check Set Thickness From Cabinet to “Materials Tab” on page 709.
allow the Countertop Thickness to be
determined by the cabinet below.

578
CAFull_RM.book Page 579 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

579
CAFull_RM.book Page 580 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 20:

Terrain

Chief Architect allows you to model the • Stepping Stone Tools

terrain around a house. Begin by specifying • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
elevation data that creates the surface • Sun Shadows
contours, and then add surface features such • Terrain Objects in the Library
as planting areas, water features and plants. • Displaying Terrain
• Editing Terrain Objects
You can import terrain data from a variety of
• Terrain Specification Dialog
sources and use this data to produce your 3D
• Elevation Point Specification Dialog
model.
• Elevation Line Specification Dialog
Once the terrain is modeled, shadows that • Flat Region Specification Dialog
follow the terrain can be created using the • Hill / Valley Specification Dialog
Sun Angle tool. See “Sun Angles” on page • Raised / Lowered Region Specification
776. Dialog
• Terrain Feature Specification Dialog
Roads and sidewalks are among the objects • Garden Bed Specification Dialog
that can be placed in your terrain and are • Terrain Break Specification Dialog
discussed in “Roads, Driveways & • Terrain Path Specification Dialog
Sidewalks” on page 634. • Importing Elevation Data
• Import Terrain Wizard
Chapter Contents • Import GPS Data Wizard
• Terrain Configuration Button • Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data
• Terrain Perimeter • Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data
• Elevation Data Tools • Plant Tools
• Terrain Modifier Tools • Plant Image Specification Dialog
• Terrain Feature Tools • Plant Specification Dialog
• Garden Bed Tools • Plant Chooser Dialog
• Water Feature Tools • Hardiness Zones

580
CAFull_RM.book Page 581 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Sprinkler Tools • Sprinkler Specification Dialog

Terrain Configuration Button

The Terrain and Road Tools can be • Garden Bed Tools
accessed through the Terrain menu.
You can also display these tools on your • Water Feature Tools
toolbar using the Terrain Configuration.
See “Toolbar Configurations” on page 112. • Stepping Stone Tools
The Terrain Configuration and Terrain menu • Terrain Wall and Curb Tools
both display the following terrain and road
• Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
parent tools:

• Elevation Data Tools

• Plant Tools
• Terrain Modifier Tools
• Sprinkler Tools
• Terrain Feature Tools

Terrain Perimeter
The Terrain Perimeter is a closed
polyline defining the boundary of the
terrain that generates in 3D views and the
contour lines that generate in floor plan view.
Select Terrain> Create Terrain Perimeter
to create a terrain perimeter.
If you do not see the Terrain Perimeter in
floor plan view, select Window> Fill Terrain Perimeter
Window . See “Zoom Tools” on page
731.

581
CAFull_RM.book Page 582 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Elevation Data Tools

affect how the terrain displays in 2D and 3D.

See “Terrain Specification Dialog” on page
596.
Click the Terrain Specification
button to open the Terrain
Specification dialog. The Terrain
Specification dialog controls how terrain is
generated and how it displays in 3D views.
Terrain perimeter at 0' - 0" in a 3D view
See “Terrain Specification Dialog” on page
596.

Build Terrain
When created in a new, blank plan, a terrain
perimeter will be 50’ x 100’. If you create a Select Terrain> Build Terrain to
terrain perimeter after you have drawn all or generate the terrain surface based on
part of a 3D model, it will increase in size as the provided elevation data. See “Building
needed to encompass everything in floor plan the Terrain” on page 594.
view.
The Terrain Perimeter can be resized and Clear Terrain
edited like other polyline-based objects. See To remove the generated terrain
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on contours, select Terrain> Clear
page 160. Terrain. When the terrain is cleared,
A CAD polyline can be converted into a contours do not display in 3D and contour
terrain perimeter. See “Editing Terrain lines do not display in floor plan view.
Objects” on page 595.
Clear Terrain does not remove the
If you do not add any terrain elevation data terrain perimeter, elevation data, or terrain
within the terrain perimeter, the terrain features from the model. Rather it deletes all
remains flat at an elevation of 0' - 0". program-generated 2D contour lines and 3D
The Terrain Perimeter has a variety of contours.
editable properties, including many that

Elevation Data Tools

Select Terrain> Elevation Data to represented by contour lines in floor plan
add elevation information to your view and a curved surface in 3D. See
terrain. “Displaying Terrain” on page 593.
When terrain is generated, this data is used to Elevation data can be specified using the
calculate the surface of your site and is Elevation Point , Elevation Line ,

582
CAFull_RM.book Page 583 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Elevation Spline , Elevation Region To place an elevation point

and Terrain Break tools. 1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-

The elevation of each Elevation Line, Spline vation Point and click in floor plan
and Region is specified in inches (in metric view at the point where you would like
plans, mm) relative to an absolute terrain to place elevation data. See “Place
elevation of 0. In order to create rising and/or Point” on page 880.
falling terrain, multiple terrain data objects 2. The Elevation Point Specification dia-
with different elevation values must be used. log opens. Enter an elevation value and
click OK. See “Elevation Point Specifi-
To avoid unexpected results, try to avoid cation Dialog” on page 600.
drawing Elevation Data objects - includ-
ing Terrain Breaks - with different elevation 3. Click somewhere else in floor plan view
information at the same location. and the Elevation Point Specification
dialog opens again with the last eleva-
Elevation Points tion value entered.

An Elevation Point contains the

absolute elevation data for one point in
the terrain model. Typically, Elevation Points
are imported rather than placed manually.
Chief Architect requires many points to
make an accurate approximation of your site.

When adding elevation data manually, it

is recommended that Elevation Lines
and Splines be used instead of Elevation
Points. Elevation Points are most effectively
Elevation Points before terrain generation
used when they are imported. See “Importing
Elevation Data” on page 612.

Even small sites may require over a hundred 4. Repeat steps 1, 2 and 3 to place addi-
points to generate an accurate model of the tional elevation points with varied elva-
terrain if it is sloped. For the sake of tion values as needed.
illustration, the images in the following 5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See
example shows only a few elevation points. “Building the Terrain” on page 594.

583
CAFull_RM.book Page 584 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Elevation Data Tools

120"

0"

Contour lines after terrain generation Elevation Lines before terrain generation

Elevation Lines 5. Select Terrain> Build Terrain . See

“Building the Terrain” on page 594.
An Elevation Line contains absolute
elevation data for many points along a
line at a constant elevation. Elevation lines
can be connected to create a polyline with
many straight sections. For the sake of
illustration, the images in the following
example show single-section elevation lines.

To draw an elevation line

1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data> Ele-

vation Line , then click and drag a
Contour lines after terrain generation
line inside the Terrain Perimeter in floor
plan view.
2. Click on the elevation line to select it,
then click the Open Object edit but-
ton.
3. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Line
Specification dialog, specify the desired
elevation and click OK. See “Elevation Full Overview after terrain generation
Line Specification Dialog” on page 603.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to draw additional After it is drawn, an Elevation Line can be
elevation lines as needed. edited much the way other line-based objects

584
CAFull_RM.book Page 585 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

can. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on

page 147.

Elevation Splines
Elevation Splines can be used to form
complex curves and shapes. Like
elevation lines, elevation splines contain
absolute elevation data for many points along
a constant elevation.
To place an elevation spline, select Terrain>
Contour lines after terrain generation
Elevation Data> Elevation Spline and
click and drag multiple sections in floor plan
view. See “Splines” on page 908. After it is drawn, an Elevation Spline can be
edited much the way other spline-based
Elevation splines are initially placed at
objects can. See “Editing Spline Based
elevation 0' - 0"and must be opened and
Objects” on page 166.
assigned an elevation. See “Elevation Line
Specification Dialog” on page 603.
Elevation Regions
An Elevation Region contains
60" absolute elevation data for an enclosed
region and is ideal for creating a flat surface
36" in your terrain.

To create an elevation region

1. Select Terrain> Elevation Data>

0" Elevation Region .
2. There are two ways to add a Terrain
Elevation splines before terrain generation Modifier to your plan:
• Click once to place an 8’ (0.6 m)
square feature at that location.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw
a feature sized as needed. See “Rectan-
gular Polyline” on page 903.
3. Click on the region to select it, then click
the Open Object edit button.
4. At first, an elevation line is at elevation
0' - 0". In the Elevation Region

585
CAFull_RM.book Page 586 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Elevation Data Tools

Specification dialog, specify the desired

An Elevation Region can also be created
elevation and click OK. See “Elevation by drawing a closed polyline using Eleva-
Line Specification Dialog” on page 603.
tion Lines .
After it is drawn, an Elevation Region can be
240" reshaped much the way other closed
polyline-based objects can. See “Editing
Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
120" 160.

Terrain Breaks
A Terrain Break creates a division
0" along the terrain surface that affects
terrain generation. Elevation data on one side
Elevation lines used to create a terrain grade, of the terrain break does not affect the terrain
elevation region used to create building pad. generation on the other side, allowing you to
create immediate drops in terrain.
To place a Terrain Break, select Terrain>
Elevation Data> Terrain Break and
click and drag a line in floor plan view.
• If the Terrain Break divides the terrain
perimeter into two separate pieces, the
terrain data on either side is calculated
independently and smoothed separately,
resulting in sharp terrain contours.
• If the Terrain Break does not extend com-
pletely from one side of the terrain perim-
eter to the other, the areas near each end
Contour lines after terrain generation
of the Terrain Break are blended.

Full Overview after terrain generation

586
CAFull_RM.book Page 587 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

240"

120"

84" Full Overview after terrain generation

18"
0" The Retaining Wall tool creates a
similar effect by drawing a Terrain Break as
Elevation lines create the grade, elevation well as a retaining wall that rests against the
region creates the building pad, and the terrain break. By default, the top height of the
break (dashed) creates a vertical drop. retaining wall matches the terrain on the high
side of the break and the bottom matches the
low side. See “Retaining Walls” on page 592.

Contour lines after terrain generation

Terrain Modifier Tools

Select Terrain> Modifier to access boundaries. The rest of the terrain is
tools that allow you to modify the unaffected.
existing elevation data by drawing a closed
polyline. Their height is relative to the terrain Raised/Lowered Regions
surface generated from the Elevation Data
provided in your plan. A Raised Region creates a raised
area that is flat on the top like a
The elevation data associated with Terrain plateau, while a Lowered Region creates a
Modifiers only affects the terrain within their depression that is flat on the bottom.

587
CAFull_RM.book Page 588 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Feature Tools

Hills and Valleys

Elev. Line
The Hill and Valley tools create (240")
raised and lowered areas in the
Raised
terrain that come to a point rather than Hill Region
flattening at their highest or lowest Elevation
Region (120")
elevations.
Flat
Valley
Region
Flat Regions
Lowered Region
Elev. Line
A Flat Region adjusts to the (0")
surrounding terrain to maintain a flat
elevation. Elevation lines create the grade, elevation region
creates the building pad, and the terrain modifiers
There are two ways to add a Terrain Modifier create terrain shapes relative to the elevation data.
to your plan:
• Click once to place a modifier with end-
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square at that
location.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw a
feature sized as needed. See “Rectangular
Polyline” on page 903.
Terrain Modifiers can only be drawn when a
Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only Full Overview after terrain generation
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
perimeter. See “Displaying Terrain” on page
593.
Terrain modifiers can be blocked with
Once created, Terrain Modifiers can be images and stored in the library for
selected and edited in a variety of ways. See future use. See “Creating Architectural
“Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 166. Blocks” on page 677.

Terrain Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Feature to access example, create paths and planting beds with
tools for drawing bounded areas that gravel or mulch materials that stand out in a
follow the contours of the terrain rather than grassy Terrain Perimeter.
modifying them.
In fact, Garden Beds , Water Features
Terrain Features are useful for creating
landscaping features because they have and Stepping Stones are special
specified heights and materials. You can, for Terrain Features with material and height

588
CAFull_RM.book Page 589 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

attributes already applied to them, saving

you time when drawing these objects.
Terrain Features can only be drawn when a
Terrain Perimeter is present, and will only
display in 3D when they are drawn within the
perimeter. See “Displaying Terrain” on page
593.
Terrain Features were used to create the
following images. Positive or negative
elevation values are assigned to each, as are
landscaping materials such as sand, water,
and soil. The volleyball net, flowers, and tree
are all objects found in the Library Browser.
See “Libraries” on page 682.
Terrain features in floor plan view

Terrain features in a Final View

Terrain Features can be created in either of ing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on page
two ways: 160 and “Editing Spline Based Objects” on
• Click once to place a feature with end- page 166.
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square at that
location. Terrain Features can be drawn in 2D
and 3D views.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw a
feature sized as needed. See “Rectangular Rectangular Features
Polyline” on page 903.
The Rectangular Feature tool can be
Once created, Terrain Features can be edited used to create straight-sided features
into nearly any shape you require. See “Edit-

589
CAFull_RM.book Page 590 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Garden Bed Tools

that can be edited into a wide variety of Terrain features can also be converted from
shapes. closed 2D polylines or splines using the
Rectangular Features can also be edited like Convert Polyline edit tool. See “Convert
other closed polyline-based objects. See Polyline” on page 205.
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on For information about adding height and
page 160. material information to Terrain Features, see
“Terrain Feature Specification Dialog” on
Spline Feature page 606.
The Spline Feature tool can be used to
create features with rounded edges and Terrain Holes
smoothly curved corners. A Terrain Hole is a region that cuts a
Spline Features can be edited like other hole in the terrain. Using this tool is the
closed spline-based objects. See “Editing same as creating a Terrain Feature and
Spline Based Objects” on page 166. checking Make Hole in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
Kidney Shaped Features Specification Dialog” on page 606.

The Kidney Shaped Feature tool Terrain Holes are useful for manually
allows you to quickly create features clipping the terrain around a foundation that
with curved edges, smooth corners and a does not match the footprint of the first floor.
right angle bend in its shape.
Kidney Shaped Features can be edited like Terrain features can be blocked with
other closed spline-based objects. See images and stored in the library for
future use as planting beds. See “Creating
“Editing Spline Based Objects” on page 166.
Architectural Blocks” on page 677.

Garden Bed Tools

Select Terrain> Garden Bed to access Polyline Garden Bed
tools that can be used to place garden
bed features in your terrain. This tool draws a garden bed with
straight sides and four right angles. See
Garden Beds are basically Terrain Features “Rectangular Features” on page 589.
with material and height attributes typical of
planting beds. See “Terrain Feature Tools” Round Garden Bed
on page 588.
Use this tool to draw garden beds with
In addition, you can choose to distribute rounded edges and smoothly curved
copies of a plant image within a Garden Bed. corners. See “Spline Feature” on page 590.
See “Distributed Objects” on page 666.

590
CAFull_RM.book Page 591 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Kidney Shaped Garden Bed Once drawn, Garden Beds can be selected
and edited just like other Terrain Features.
You can draw a kidney shaped garden
bed with this tool. See “Kidney Shaped Specify the material and set the height of
Features” on page 590. Garden Beds in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
Specification Dialog” on page 606.

Water Feature Tools

Select Terrain> Water Feature to drawn and edited the same way that splines
access tools for drawing ponds and are. See “Splines” on page 908 and “Editing
streams in your terrain. Spline Based Objects” on page 166.
Water Features are basically Terrain Click the Advanced Splines edit button
Features with material and height attributes to activate additional edit handles that you
typical of bodies of water. See “Terrain can use to reshape the stream. See
Feature Tools” on page 588. “Advanced Splines” on page 169.

Round Pond Streams follow the contours of the

Use this tool to draw a pond with terrain, so they may appear to flow uphill if
rounded edges. See “Spline Feature” they are not drawn correctly in the terrain.
on page 590. Try to draw them so that they follow a
downward course for their entire length.
Kidney Shaped Pond Once drawn, Water Features can be selected
and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
This tool draws a kidney shaped pond.
See “Kidney Shaped Features” on page Specify the material and set the height of
590. Water Features in the Terrain Feature
Specification dialog. See “Terrain Feature
Stream Specification Dialog” on page 606.

Select the Stream tool, then click and

drag to draw a stream. Streams are

Stepping Stone Tools

Select Terrain> Stepping Stone to Stepping Stones are basically Terrain
place a walkway made of individual Features with material and height attributes
stepping stones. typical of walking paths. See “Terrain
Feature Tools” on page 588.

591
CAFull_RM.book Page 592 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

There are two ways to draw Stepping Stones: Round Stepping Stone
• Click once to place a stepping stone with The Round Stepping Stone tool draws
endpoints that form a 1’ (300 mm) square stepping stones with rounded edges.
at that location. See “Spline Feature” on page 590.
• Click and drag from end to end to draw a
Once drawn, Stepping Stones can be selected
stepping stone sized as needed. See
and edited just like any other Terrain Feature.
“Rectangular Polyline” on page 903.
By default, Stepping Stones have a concrete
Polyline Stepping Stone material; however, you can specify the
material and set the height of Stepping
The Polyline Stepping Stone tool Stones in the Terrain Feature Specification
draws rectangular stepping stones. See dialog. See “Terrain Feature Specification
“Rectangular Features” on page 589. Dialog” on page 606.

Terrain Wall and Curb Tools

Select Terrain> Terrain Wall and Specification. See “Terrain Path Specifica-
Curb to draw landscaping walls and tion Dialog” on page 610.
curbs that follow the contours of the terrain.
Straight and curved Terrain Walls and Curbs Retaining Walls
are drawn just as other walls are. See The Retaining Wall tools function similarly
“Drawing Walls” on page 228. to Terrain Breaks, but include a wall. See
“Terrain Breaks” on page 586.
Terrain Walls
Use the Straight Retaining Wall tool
Use the Straight Terrain Wall tool to draws a straight wall that holds back
draw a wall that sits on top of and sloped terrain.
follows the terrain.
Use the Curved Retaining Wall tool
Use the Spline Terrain Wall to draw a to draw a curved retaining wall.
curved terrain wall. This wall is drawn
A Retaining Wall’s height is determined by
the same way as a CAD Spline. See
the elevation of the terrain on each side. By
“Splines” on page 908.
default, the height of the wall matches the
Once drawn, a Terrain Wall can be like other terrain on the high side of the break and the
line-based objects. See “Editing Line Based bottom matches the low side. If you insert a
Objects” on page 147 and “Editing Spline Retaining Wall into flat terrain, it looks like a
Based Objects” on page 166. concrete strip in 3D views.
Terrain walls are 5’ (1500 mm) high and con- Once drawn, a Retaining Wall can be edited
crete by default, but you can specify the much like other walls. See “Editing Walls”
material, height and more in the Terrain Path on page 231.

592
CAFull_RM.book Page 593 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Terrain Curbs Once drawn, a Terrain Curb can be like other

line-based objects. See “Editing Line Based
Terrain Curbs are useful for creating curbs Objects” on page 147 and “Editing Spline
around planting beds and along paths. Based Objects” on page 166.
Use the Straight Terrain Curb tool to You can specify the height of straight and
draw a straight landscaping curb. spline terrain curbs on the General tab of the
Use the Spline Terrain Curb tool to Terrain Path Specification. See “Terrain
draw a curved landscaping curb. This Path Specification Dialog” on page 610.
curb is drawn the same way as a CAD
Spline. See “Splines” on page 908. You can also add Fencing to your ter-
rain, complete with gates from the
Doors Library. See “Fencing” on page 227.

Sun Shadows
Sun shadows are computed based on the Sun Shadow and the terrain is not up-to-date,
contour of the terrain. If a terrain perimeter the terrain automatically rebuilds. You can
exists, the sun shadow adjusts to the terrain. turn off the automatic rebuild. See “Sun
Angle Specification Dialog” on page 782.
The Sun Shadow is automatically rebuilt
whenever terrain is rebuilt. If you generate a

Terrain Objects in the Library

The Library Browser contains a lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road
variety of objects that can be placed in markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself
a plan’s terrain, including plants, exterior and send them to the library as one unit. This
fixtures, accessories and roadway objects. library object can then be placed into any
See “The Library Browser” on page 683. plan. Once placed into a plan, each object is
independent and is no longer part of the
You can also create your own objects and
group. See “Adding to the Library” on page
save them in the library. Select any
700.
combination of elevation points, elevation

Displaying Terrain
How terrain objects display in 2D and In order for objects such as Terrain Features
3D views is controlled in the Layer and Roads to be visible in 3D views, the
Display Options dialog. See “Layer Display Terrain Perimeter layer must also display. In
Options Dialog” on page 121. addition, only the portions of these objects

593
CAFull_RM.book Page 594 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Terrain Objects

that are drawn within the Terrain Perimeter generated, sometimes only briefly, indicating
will be seen in 3D views. See “Terrain the progress.
Feature Tools” on page 588.

3D View Tools
A variety of tools are available to help you
adjust the perspective of your 3D views. See
“Editing 3D Views” on page 758.

Building the Terrain

When terrain is generated, Chief You can turn off Auto Rebuild Terrain in
Architect gathers all elevation data that the 3D Settings dialog and rebuild the
has been added to the model and creates a terrain manually only when needed by
terrain surface. The program interpolates the selecting Terrain> Build Terrain . See
data to produce smooth contours. “3D Settings Dialog” on page 744.
Contour lines are generated at intervals
specified on the Contours tab of the Terrain Terrain & 3D Drawing Time
Specification dialog. If elevation data is Terrain is typically large with many surface
added to the model at 24 inch intervals and triangles, which often increases the drawing
the contour line interval is set to 12 inches, time of 3D views. The time required is
generating terrain creates one additional affected by the quality of the terrain, the
contour line between each piece of elevation amount of elevation data and number of
data. See “Contours Tab” on page 598. terrain features present. For information
A Terrain Perimeter with no additional about surface triangles and how they
elevation data generates a terrain that is flat influence terrain quality, see “General Tab”
at the elevation 0' - 0". on page 596.
By default, the terrain is automatically built Lights and symbols can be placed outdoors
before a 3D view is generated. This process and included in 3D views when the terrain is
takes a variable amount of time, depending generated. These objects can also contribute
on the amount of elevation data and number to the time needed to generate 3D views. See
of terrain features in the plan. The Building “Rendering Tips” on page 773.
Terrain progress dialog displays as terrain is

Editing Terrain Objects

Before a terrain object can be edited, it must Terrain Perimeter and Terrain Features can
be selected. All terrain objects can be be selected in 3D views. See “Selecting
selected in floor plan view. In addition, the Objects” on page 144.

594
CAFull_RM.book Page 595 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

A selected terrain object can be edited using Using the Edit Tools
its edit handles, edit tools and specification
dialog. See “Specification Dialogs” on page A selected terrain object can be edited in a
33. variety of ways using the buttons on the edit
toolbar. The edit tools available for a terrain
Any time elevation data is changed, the object depends on the type of terrain object
terrain must be regenerated. This occurs selected. See “Edit Toolbar Buttons” on page
automatically when a 3D view is created. It 1140.
can also be done manually by selecting
Terrain> Build Terrain . Note: If you copy terrain objects from one
plan to another, you cannot view the pasted
objects in 3D unless a Terrain Perimeter
Using the Edit Handles exists.
• The shape of the Terrain Perimeter can be
edited like other polyline-based objects. Moving Terrain Objects
See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based Using Dimensions
Objects” on page 160. If dimensions display when a terrain object is
• Elevation Points can be moved in floor selected, the object can be moved using the
plan view using the Move edit handle. them. For more information see “Moving
• Elevation Lines, Elevation Splines and Objects Using Dimensions” on page 831.
Terrain Breaks are edited like other line-
and spline-based objects. See “Editing Plot Plans and
Line Based Objects” on page 147, “Edit- Plan Footprints
ing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on
There are two different ways to create a plot
page 160, and “Editing Spline Based
plan in Chief Architect:
Objects” on page 166.
• In floor plan view using the Terrain and
• The shape of a Raised Region, Lowered
CAD Tools.
Region, Hill, Valley, and Flat Region
can be edited like a spline. See “Editing • In a CAD Detail using the Plan Foot-
Spline Based Objects” on page 166. print tool and other CAD Tools.
• Terrain Features are edited like other
Each method has its advantages. For more
spline- and polyline-based objects. See
information, see “Creating a Plot Plan” on
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects”
page 125 of the User’s Guide.
on page 160 and “Editing Spline Based
Objects” on page 166.

Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog controls appearance.
how your terrain is modeled, as well as its

595
CAFull_RM.book Page 596 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Specification Dialog

The Terrain Specification dialog can be

accessed in any of three ways:
• Select Terrain> Terrain
Specification .
• Select the Terrain Perimeter and click the
Open Object edit button.
• Double-click the Terrain Perimeter using
the Select Objects tool.

General Tab

3 5

Chief Architect builds 3D terrain surfaces by Triangle size is computed roughly as

splitting them into triangles. Increasing the follows:
triangle count decreases triangle size,
Size of Triangle = Area of Terrain Perimeter /
yielding more detailed contour lines and a
Number of Triangles
better 3D approximation of the terrain.

596
CAFull_RM.book Page 597 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

There is no upper limit to the number of elevation. 8 inches is used for a slab
triangles you can specify, but smaller foundation, 18 is used if a foundation floor is
triangles demand longer terrain generation present, and 12 is used otherwise.
time, increased memory requirements, and
Building Pad Elevation - Enter a value to
increased drawing time. If you select a large
offset terrain from floor 1. The default value
number of small triangles for a large site, you
of 12 inches results in floor 1 being 12 inches
may wait a long time for the calculation.
above any terrain at an elevation of 0 inches.
Elevation lines are sampled less frequently This value does not change existing elevation
when the surface triangle size is larger, data and does not alter elevation contours.
speeding up terrain generation when there
The program always defines the first floor
are many elevation lines in the plan.
elevation at 0’-0”. While this is desirable for
The Low (1000), Medium (2000), and High adjusting walls, roofs and floor platforms, it
(4000) values work well for an average lot leads to misrepresentations in relation to real
area of 20,000 square feet. If your terrain world elevations. Finished grade can be
perimeter varies greatly from this, consider measured relative to the finished floor, but to
defining the number of triangles using the measure elevation in the real world, building
Custom setting or the Triangle Size setting. pads are rarely at 0’-0” sea-level.

1 Triangle Count - Specify the number For example, if a structure is placed in the
of surface triangles. middle of a terrain sloping evenly from a
• Custom - Specify a custom triangle height of 100.00 feet to a height of 112.00
count value. feet, entering a value of 106.00 feet for the
building pad elevation places the structure at
• Triangle Size - Specify the maximum tri- the correct height in 3D views.
angle size in the terrain surface.
Smoothing - Control the amount of 4 Hide terrain intersected by building -
2 Check this box to cut out the portion of
rounding applied to terrain edges. A the terrain that is intersected by the first floor
low value for smoothing produces terrain footprint. Checking this box prevents the
that has sharp peaks and abrupt changes in generation of contour lines inside the house.
slope. A high value results in terrain that
continuously flows from point to point. If your foundation footprint differs from your
first floor footprint, you may need to use the
3 Flatten Pad - Check this box to flatten Terrain Hole tool for custom clipping
the area beneath your building.
instead. See “Terrain Feature Tools” on page
Auto Calculate Elevation - Check this box 588.
to automatically calculate the building pad
elevation value during terrain rebuild. Chief 5 Skirt - Define the thickness of the skirt
Architect takes the center of the building added to the terrain. The skirt is only
footprint and finds the terrain elevation at visible in 3D views and gives the viewer a
this point. This elevation is added to 8, 12, or sense of depth when viewing the terrain.
18 inches to calculate the building pad

597
CAFull_RM.book Page 598 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Specification Dialog

Flat specifies that the skirt be flat at its base. Follow Terrain specifies that the skirt base
Chief Architect determines the lowest point maintains a consistent distance below the
in the terrain and then offsets this value by terrain. The distance is obtained from the
the user specified thickness value. The thickness value you provide.
resulting value is used as a uniform elevation
for the base of the skirt.

Contours Tab
Chief Architect identifies two types of are drawn on different layers, so you can
contour lines: Primary and Secondary. They control how they display in floor plan view.

1 Specify the Frequency at which 12”, a contour line is computed for each
contour lines are generated. elevation change of 12”.
• Define the Interval between contour • Specify the Offset value. If the offset is 5
lines, which is the change in elevation feet and the interval is set to 10 feet then
between contours. If the interval is set to contours are generated at the elevations

598
CAFull_RM.book Page 599 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

5’, 15’, 25’, 35’, etc. Most often, the Off- Spline Tab
set is set to 0.
The Spline tab has a single option and is only
• Primary Contour Every__Contours - available when the selected object is a spline.
Specify the interval for primary contours. See “Convert to Spline” on page 187.
A value of 1 produces only primary con-
tours, while a value of 5 defines every
fifth contour line as a primary contour.

2 Specify the appearance of contour

Labels in floor plan view. Most settings
here are the same as those for Simple Text.
See “Text Specification Dialog” on page 850.
• Check Label Secondary Contours to New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
label secondary contour lines with their between line segments that are used to draw
elevation data. Primary Contour lines are the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
labelled with their elevation data auto- the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
matically. draw the spline faster.

3 Specify the Contour Line Units, the Selected Line Tab

units used by contour labels. Select
either Inches or Decimal Feet (Millimeters The Selected Line tab is available when the
or Meters for metric). selected edge of the Terrain Perimeter is a
line as opposed to an arc. See “Selected
4 If contour Smoothing is turned on, Edge” on page 145.
Chief Architect attempts to remove
sharp bends and jagged sections from the 2D This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
contour lines. Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
• Specify the number of Passes to perform page 888.
when smoothing. The more passes, the
smoother the contour lines become, but Selected Arc Tab
contours become less accurate.
The Selected Arc tab is available when the
Polyline Tab selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the page 185.
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
the Volume of a closed polyline. For more This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
information, see “Polyline Tab” on page 901.
896.

599
CAFull_RM.book Page 600 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Elevation Point Specification Dialog

Line Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Line Style tab, see Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
“Line Style Tab” on page 889. terrain surface and terrain skirt in 3D views.
These materials are not calculated in the
Fill Style Tab Materials List. See “Materials Tab” on page
709.
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Elevation Point Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Point Specification Objects tool.
dialog, select an elevation point and click the
Use the Elevation Point Specification
Open Object edit button, or double-click
dialog to define the selected elevation point
on an elevation point using the Select
and control its appearance in floor plan view.
When all changes are made, click OK to
store the changes or Cancel to ignore them.

General Tab

600
CAFull_RM.book Page 601 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 Location - Specify the exact location of • Y Coordinate - Enter the y coordinate of

the elevation point. the elevation point.
• Elevation - Enter the height of the eleva-
tion point in inches and/or feet (mm for 2 Text - Enter notes, such as elevation, in
this box. This text displays beside the
metric). For example entering 5’6 (with elevation point in floor plan view. You can
the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an enter a pound (#) sign to display the
elevation of 66 inches. elevation value in floor plan view.
• X Coordinate - Enter the x coordinate of
the elevation point. 3 Marker Radius - Enter the radius in
inches (or millimeters).

Attributes Tab

1 Layer - Define the Layer the elevation By Layer - Check this box to use the line
point should be placed on. See “Layer color of the layer the elevation point is
Tab” on page 125. located on.

2 Color - Click the color bar to open the 3 Click the drop-down list to specify the
Windows Color dialog and select the Font of any accompanying text. Check
color of the elevation point and the boxes to apply text options.
accompanying text. See “Color Chooser
Dialog” on page 727. 4 Specify the Size of the Elevation Point
and any associated text.

601
CAFull_RM.book Page 602 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Elevation Line Specification Dialog

Character Height - Define the character Compatible Size to use this information for
height of the text. text sizing. See “Character Size” on page 840
Version 9 Compatible Size -In Version 9, Transparent - Check this box to make the
text size was based on sizing information background of the text transparent.
stored in each font rather than actual
Rotate with Plan - Check this box to allow
character dimensions. Check Version 9
the text to rotate when the plan is rotated.

Elevation Line Specification Dialog

To open the Elevation Line Specification for metric). For example entering 5’6 (with
dialog, select one or more Elevation Line/ the apostrophe as foot mark) results in an
Splines, or a polyline composed of elevation elevation of 66 inches.
Lines/Splines, and click the Open Object
edit button. You can also double-click an
2 Interior is Flat - This option is
available for closed Elevation Regions.
Elevation Line/Spline using the Select Check this box to maintain a flat surface at
Objects tool. the specified Elevation.

The Elevation Line Specification dialog is 3 Interpolate Tangent to Edge - This

used to define the selected Elevation Line/ option is available for closed Elevation
Spline and controls its appearance in floor Regions. Check this box to flatten the terrain
plan view. surface as it approaches the edges of the Ele-
vation Region.
The settings in this dialog are the same as
those in the Elevation Region Specification Polyline Tab
dialog. See “Elevation Regions” on page
585. The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
line or polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed
Elevation Tab Area, and the Volume of a closed polyline. If
multiple Elevation Line/Spline segments
form a closed Elevation Region, its Area will
be calculated. Elevation Lines/Splines do not
have a thickness, so they have no Volume.

1 Spline Tab
2 The Spline tab has a single option and is only
3
available when the selected object is an
elevation spline. See “Splines” on page 908.
1 Elevation - Enter the elevation of the
Line/Spline in inches and/or feet (mm

602
CAFull_RM.book Page 603 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

For information about the Selected Line tab,

see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.

Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected object or segment is an arc as
opposed to a line.
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw For information about the Selected Arc tab,
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes see “Selected Arc Tab” on page 901.
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
draw the spline faster. end of the previous connected line. Similarly,
moving the End of a line segment moves the
Selected Line Tab start of the next connected line.
The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected object or segment is a line as Line Style Tab
opposed to one that has been converted to an For information about the Line Style tab, see
arc. See “Selected Edge” on page 145. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Flat Region Specification Dialog

To open the Flat Region Specification dia- Spline Tab
log, select a Flat Region and click the Open
The Spline tab has a single option and is only
Object edit button, or double-click a Flat available when the selected object is a spline.
Region using the Select Objects tool. See “Splines” on page 908.
The options in the Flat Region Specification
dialog are similar to those a number of other
dialogs in the program.

Polyline Tab
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
the Volume of a closed polyline. between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.

603
CAFull_RM.book Page 604 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

Selected Line Tab Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected edge of the polyline is a line as selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on opposed to a line.
page 145.
This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
end of the previous connected line, if there is 896.
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
segment moves move the start of the next Line Style Tab
connected line, if there is one.
For information about the Line Style tab, see
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
page 888. Fill Style Tab
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Hill / Valley Specification Dialog

The Hill/Valley Specification defines the Enter a Height for the selected Hill or Valley.
selected Hill or Valley and controls its This height is relative to the terrain surface
appearance in floor plan view. that is generated from the Elevation Data in
your plan. See “Terrain Modifier Tools” on
To open the Hill/Valley Specification dialog,
page 587.
select one or more Hill or Valley and click
the Open Object edit button, or double- Polyline Tab
click the region(s) using the Select Objects
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
tool. polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
the Volume of a closed polyline. Hills and
Hill / Valley Tab Valleys do not have a volume measurement.

Spline Tab
The Spline tab has a single option and is only
available when the selected object is a spline.
See “Splines” on page 908.

604
CAFull_RM.book Page 605 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

segment moves move the start of the next

connected line, if there is one.
This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
page 888.

Selected Arc Tab

New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw The Selected Arc tab is available when the
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to opposed to a line.
draw the spline faster. This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
Selected Line Tab 896.
The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected edge of the polyline is a line as Line Style Tab
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on For information about the Line Style tab, see
page 145. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
end of the previous connected line, if there is Fill Style Tab
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.

Raised / Lowered Region Specification Dialog

To open the Raised/Lowered Region The Raised / Lowered Region
Specification dialog, select one or more Specification dialog is similar to the Hill /
raised or lowered regions and click the Open Valley Specification dialog. See “Hill /
Object edit button, or double-click the Valley Specification Dialog” on page 605.

region(s) using the Select Objects tool.

Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Feature Specification edit button or double-click the Terrain
dialog, select a Terrain Feature or group of
Terrain Features and click the Open Object Feature(s) using the Select Objects tool.

605
CAFull_RM.book Page 606 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Feature Specification Dialog

The Terrain Feature Specification defines Most of the tabs in this dialog are similar to
the selected Terrain Feature and controls its those for a variety of other objects in the
appearance in 2D and 3D views. program.

General Tab

1 Specify the Height and Thickness of Polyline Tab

the terrain feature relative to the terrain
surface. The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
• Specify the top Height of the feature the Volume of a closed polyline.
using a positive or negative number.
• Specify the feature’s Thickness. Spline Tab
If a feature’s height above the terrain is The Spline tab has a single option and is only
greater than its thickness, the program will available when the selected object is a spline.
fill in the resulting gap. See “Splines” on page 908.
• Make Hole - Check this box to make a
Terrain Hole. See “Terrain Holes” on
page 590.

2 Clipping - Check this box to remove

sections of the Terrain Feature that
intersect other Terrain Features at a lower
height. Clipping is also useful for creating
features that contain other features such as New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
planters or swimming pools. between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
Distributed Plant Tab the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster.
This tab is only available when the For
information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 901.

606
CAFull_RM.book Page 607 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Selected Line Tab For information about the Selected Arc tab,
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected object or segment is a line as
Line Style Tab
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
page 145. For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.
For information about the Selected Line tab,
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
Fill Style Tab
Selected Arc Tab For information about the Fill Style tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected object or segment is an arc as
opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on Materials Tab
page 185. For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

Garden Bed Specification Dialog

To open the Garden Bed Specification Distributed Plant Tab
dialog, select a Garden Bed or group of
The Distributed Plant tab is similar to the Fill
Garden Beds and click the Open Object Objects tab of the Distribution Region
edit button or double-click the Garden Bed(s) Specification dialog. See “Distributed
using the Select Objects tool. Object Tab - Distribution Region” on page
667.
The Terrain Feature Specification defines
the selected Terrain Feature and controls its
Polyline Tab
appearance in 2D and 3D views.
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
The tabs in this dialog are similar to those for
polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
a variety of other objects in the program.
the Volume of a closed polyline.
General Tab
Spline Tab
The settings on the General tab are the same
The Spline tab has a single option and is only
as those on the same tab of the Terrain
available when the selected object is a spline.
Feature Specification dialog. See “General
See “Splines” on page 908.
Tab” on page 607.

607
CAFull_RM.book Page 608 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Break Specification Dialog

Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected object or segment is an arc as
opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on
page 185.
For information about the Selected Arc tab,
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes Line Style Tab
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to For information about the Line Style tab, see
draw the spline faster. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Selected Line Tab Fill Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the For information about the Fill Style tab, see
selected object or segment is a line as “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
page 145.
Materials Tab
For information about the Selected Line tab,
For information about the Materials tab, see
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

Terrain Break Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Break Specification Transition Distance - Define the distance
dialog, select a Terrain Break or group of from the edge of the terrain break to where
Terrain Breaks and click the Open Object the break stops affecting the terrain.
edit button or double-click the Terrain
Polyline Tab
Break(s) using the Select Objects tool.
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the
General Tab polyline’s Perimeter, its enclosed Area, and
the Volume of a closed polyline. Terrain
Breaks do not have a thickness, so they have
no volume. If multiple Terrain Break
segments form a closed polyline, its Area
will be calculated.

608
CAFull_RM.book Page 609 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Spline Tab one. Similarly, moving the End of a line

segment moves move the start of the next
The Spline tab has a single option and is only connected line, if there is one.
available when the selected object was
converted to a Terrain Break from a spline. This tab is similar to the Line tab of the Line
See “Splines” on page 908. Specification dialog. See “Line Tab” on
page 888.

Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected segment of the polyline is an arc as
opposed to a line.
This tab is similar to the Arc tab of the Arc
New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
Specification dialog. See “Arc Tab” on page
between line segments that are used to draw
896.
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
draw the spline faster. Line Style Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see
Selected Line Tab “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
The Selected Line tab is available when the
selected edge of the polyline is a line as Fill Style Tab
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on The Fill Style tab is only available when
page 145. multiple Terrain Break segments enclose an
Moving the Start of a line segment moves the area. For more information, see “Fill Style
end of the previous connected line, if there is Tab” on page 902.

Terrain Path Specification Dialog

To open the Terrain Path Specification Most of the tabs in this dialog are similar to
dialog, select one or more Terrain Walls or those for a variety of other objects in the
Terrain Curbs and click the Open Object program.
edit button or double-click the terrain path(s)
using the Select Objects tool.

609
CAFull_RM.book Page 610 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Terrain Path Specification Dialog

General Tab

1 Enter the Width of the item and the

Height. If you enter a negative number
for the height, the item sinks into the terrain.

2 When one terrain path joins another,

you can flare the intersection. Enter a
radius for the flare and indicate whether the
start or the end of the path should be flared
by checking the appropriate box. New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
between line segments that are used to draw
Polyline Tab the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
The Polyline tab indicates the length of the draw the spline faster.
Terrain Path polyline’s Perimeter, its
enclosed Area, and the Volume of a closed Selected Line Tab
polyline.
The Selected Line tab is available when the
Spline Tab selected object or segment is a line as
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
The Spline tab has a single option and is only page 145.
available when the selected object is a spline
path. See “Splines” on page 908. For information about the Selected Line tab,
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.

Selected Arc Tab

The Selected Arc tab is available when the
selected object or segment is an arc as

610
CAFull_RM.book Page 611 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

opposed to a line. See “Change Line/Arc” on Fill Style Tab

page 185.
For information about the Fill Style tab, see
For information about the Selected Arc tab, “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.
Materials Tab
Line Style Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
For information about the Line Style tab, see “Materials Tab” on page 709.
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.

Importing Elevation Data

Elevation data can be added to a plan using Text Files
the tools and techniques described in this
chapter or it can be imported from a file. Elevation data can be saved in text files as x,
y, and z coordinates where x and y define the
Chief Architect can import elevation data location of a point on a Cartesian grid, and z
saved in DWG/DXF, GPS Exchange (.gpx) defines the elevation for that point. Each
and a variety of text file formats (.txt, .csv, elevation point must be on a separate line in
.prn, .xyz, .auf and .nez). If your terrain data the text file.
is not saved in one of these file formats, there
are third party programs available that can Importable text files can come from
convert to these formats. surveyors, other software programs, or you
can create your own using a GPS system.
DXF/DWG Files Elevation data saved in text files can be
imported using the Import Terrain Wizard.
If you have a model of your terrain created
on another program that contains contour
lines and elevation data, that information can GPS Exchange Files
be imported directly as elevation data into Elevation data can also be imported from
Chief Architect as a .dxf or a .dwg file. See .gpx files created using a GPS system using
“Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data” on the Import GPS Data Wizard.
page 620.

Import Terrain Wizard

The Import Terrain Wizard allows you Select File> Import> Terrain Data to
to import elevation data saved in text open the Import Terrain Wizard. Click Next.
(.txt) file format into your model.

611
CAFull_RM.book Page 612 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Import Terrain Wizard

Select File

1 Select File to Import -Enter the name followed by the X coordinate, the Y
of a text file, or Browse to locate a file coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
on your computer.
#XYZ Description - Information in this
2 Select the Organization of the Data - format begins with a number that belongs to
You need to know how the data in your each data point followed by the X
text file is organized. Each data point con- coordinate, the Y coordinate, the Z
tains information about its X-axis (East to coordinate, and a description.
West location), Y-axis (North to South
YXZ - Information in this format begins with
location), and Z-axis (elevation). It might
the Y coordinate followed by the X
also contain a brief description.
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
Elevation information can come in one of six
#YXZ - Information in this format begins
different sequences, and is separated by
with a number that belongs to each data point
either a comma (comma delimited) or a
followed by the Y coordinate, the X
space (space delimited).
coordinate, and the Z coordinate.
XYZ - Information in this format begins with
#YXZ Description - Information in this
the X coordinate, followed by the Y
format begins with a number that belongs to
coordinate and the Z coordinate.
each data point followed by the Y
#XYZ - Information in this format begins coordinate, the X coordinate, the Z
with a number that belongs to each data point coordinate, and a description.

612
CAFull_RM.book Page 613 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Filter Data

1
2
3

1 This is the number of points your data

contains. Building terrain with too
many elevation points may take a long time,
depending on your processor speed and
memory. If you import more than 1000 or
2000 elevation points, the Linear Smoothing
option in the Terrain Specification dialog is
recommended. See “Terrain Specification
Dialog” on page 596.

2 Use Every __ Points - Reduce the data

imported by skipping data points.
Specifying every 2 points reduce thes data by
50%; specifying every 10 points reduces the
data by 90%.

3 Restrict the Data to the Ranges

Below - Another way to restrict the data The outer box in this diagram and the points
used is to define a range. Data within these within it represent all of the data contained
ranges is imported, while data outside these within a given text file. If you are only
ranges is not. interested in a small area represented in the
text file, a subset of this information could be
used instead by defining a range, which is
represented by the smaller box in this
diagram. To do this you must define the
range using X, Y, and Z coordinates. The
same effect is accomplished by deleting

613
CAFull_RM.book Page 614 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Import Terrain Wizard

unwanted data from your text file before it is

imported.

Scale Data

1
2

3
4

1 This describes the total number of data 3 Units - Select the units of measurement
points to be imported and the range of used in your data for each axis. Only
the coordinates of those points. linear units are available. The units in the
drop-down lists are a subset of the units in
2 Translate - Accurately position the the Edit Preferences dialog. For more
terrain beneath your plan. You need to
information on specifying default units, see
know where the origin is located in your
“Unit Conversions Panel” on page 85.
plan, and where that origin is located relative
to the geographical data in your text file. The
4 Scale Coordinates - Multiply the
coordinates of the data point that correspond coordinates of each axis by a specific
with the origin point in Chief Architect number to decrease or increase the relative
should be entered here. size or relief of your terrain.

To find the origin point in your plan, 5 Rotate Coordinates - Accurately

rotate terrain data counterclockwise
open the Move Point dialog, enter abso-
around the Z axis.
lute coordinates X=0, Y=0, and click OK to
move the point to the (0, 0) location. See
“Move Point Dialog” on page 883.

614
CAFull_RM.book Page 615 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Import GPS Data Wizard

The Import GPS Data Wizard allows file format. Select File> Import> GPS Data
you to import terrain data from .gpx to open the Import GPS Data Wizard.

Welcome

Click Next to continue.

615
CAFull_RM.book Page 616 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Import GPS Data Wizard

Select File

Enter the name and directory of the file you Click Next to continue.
want to import, or click Browse to select a
.gpx file on your computer.

616
CAFull_RM.book Page 617 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Import Data As

1 Specify which items you want to import 2 Specify what you would like each item
by checking the box to the left of the to Import As from the drop-down list.
Name. Items with unchecked boxes are not
imported.

617
CAFull_RM.book Page 618 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Import GPS Data Wizard

Transform Coordinates

1
2
3

1 Map - Specify the point in the imported 2 Lower Elevation Data - Specify the
terrain data, defined by degrees amount that you would like to lower all
latitude and degrees longitude, that you imported elevation data.
would like to locate at the origin in the Chief
Architect plan. 3 Rotate - Accurately rotate the position
of north in the imported terrain data
counterclockwise around the Z axis.

618
CAFull_RM.book Page 619 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Finish

Click Finish to close the Import GPS Data If you do not see the imported terrain, select
Wizard and return to floor plan view.
Window> Fill Window .

Importing DXF/DWG Elevation Data

Select File> Import> Drawing • If the vertices have differing Z values, an
(DWG/DXF) to open the Import elevation point is created for each vertex.
Drawing Wizard, which you can use to • Imported points are converted to eleva-
import elevation data in .dxf/.dwg format. tion points.
See “Import Drawing Wizard” on page 954.
• Other imported entities (solids, faces,
On the Select File page of the Wizard, check etc.) are imported normally.
the Terrain Elevation Data box.
Lines and points in the imported drawing are When importing elevation data, only
converted to elevation lines and elevation import layers containing this data. To
import other layers as normal CAD, run the
points, preserving the elevation data
Terrain Import Wizard again with Terrain Ele-
associated with them. vation data unchecked.
• If an imported line has vertices with the
same Z values, an elevation line is cre-
ated.

619
CAFull_RM.book Page 620 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data

If a terrain perimeter does not already exist in

the plan, a perimeter that surrounds the data
is generated.

Converting CAD Lines to Terrain Data

CAD lines can be selected and If a terrain perimeter is not present in your
converted to terrain data using the plan, this will be the only terrain object
Convert Polyline edit tool. available to select. A terrain perimeter must
exist before any of the other terrain objects
Using this tool, you can convert CAD lines
can be created.
in an imported drawing into terrain data that
can be used to generate a 3D terrain model. Roads and road objects can also be created.
They are discussed in “Roads, Driveways &
Select a CAD line, spline, or polyline in floor
Sidewalks” on page 634.
plan view and click the Convert
Polyline edit button to open the Convert When you click OK, the terrain object’s
Polyline dialog. See “Convert Polyline
specification dialog opens, allowing you to
Dialog” on page 206. specify elevation data or other attributes.

Plant Tools
Select Terrain> Plant> to add plants Select Terrain> Plant> Plant
to your landscaping plan. Plants can Chooser to open the Plant Chooser
also be placed in a plan directly from the dialog. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page
library. See “Placing Library Objects” on 627.
page 690.
Select Terrain> Plant> Create Plant
Plant objects are actually images, which Image to create a plant image. Once a
provide realism while avoiding high 3D plant image is created, it can be added to the
surface count. Once created, plant images library for future use. See “Adding to the
can be selected and edited much like other Library” on page 700.
image objects. See “Editing Images” on page
Choose Terrain> Plant> Grow All
935.
Plants to open the Grow Plants dialog.
Plants have labels which you can display in
floor plan view. You can also create a Plant
Schedule . See “Schedules” on page
1036.

620
CAFull_RM.book Page 621 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Click and drag the slider bar and select a Select Terrain> Plant> Show
growth period from zero to twenty years. Hardiness Zones to access regional
This only works for plants that have a mature climate zone maps. See “Hardiness Zones”
height and mature age specified in the Plant on page 629.
Image Specification dialog. See “Plant
Information Tab” on page 624.

Plant Image Specification Dialog

Select a plant in a floor plan or 3D view and This dialog can also be accessed by selecting
click the Open Object edit button to Terrain> Plant> Create Plant Image .
open the Plant Image Specification dialog.

Image Tab

1
2
3
4

621
CAFull_RM.book Page 622 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Plant Image Specification Dialog

1 Image File - The path and name of the • Enter a Width for the image.
selected image file displays here. Click • When Retain Aspect Ratio of is
Browse to specify the saved location on your checked, if you change either the Height
computer of the image that represents the or Width, the other value changes to
plant in 3D views. maintain this ratio. If this is unchecked
and you resize the plant image, it may
2 2D Plant Symbol - A number of 2D become distorted.
symbols are available to mark the
location of the image in floor plan view. • Click Reset Original Aspect Ratio of to
Select one from the drop-down list or click reset the image’s original aspect ratio and
the Library button to choose a CAD block remove any distortion caused by resizing.
from the Library Browser.
If you change the symbol that represents an 5 Specify the Location of the selected
plant image.
image, you may want to save the new image
• Precisely position the selected plant
to the library. See “Adding to the Library” on
image in reference to the plan coordinates
page 700.
by specifying its X Coordinate and Y
3 Options Coordinate.
• Specify the selected plant image’s Height
• Check Reverse Image to reflect the Above Ground.
appearance of the image about an imagi-
nary vertical line through its center. Transparency Tab
• Check Do not rotate in 3D view to pre- The settings on the Transparency tab of this
vent the plant image from rotating with dialog are similar to those on the same tab of
the camera. the Image Specification dialog. For more
information, see “Transparency Tab” on page
4 Specify the Size of the plant image, as 938.
seen in 3D views.
• Enter a Height for the image.

622
CAFull_RM.book Page 623 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Plant Information Tab

You can search for plants using the attributes
on the Plant Information tab. See “Plant
Chooser Dialog” on page 627.

1 6

2 8

3 9
4

1 The selected plant’s Common Name, 4 This section indicates the Bloom Time
Scientific Name and/or Variety Name when you can expect the plant to
display here. A Pronunciation guide is also produce flowers.
provided.
45 The boxes with checks are the Special
This indicates the Flower Color of the Characteristics of the selected plant.
2
plant.
6 Plant Size information at maturity. An
Leaf Color of the plant is indicated average mature height range can be
3
here. entered using the drop-down lists. This is
used with the Grow Plants feature. See
“Plant Tools” on page 621.

623
CAFull_RM.book Page 624 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Plant Image Specification Dialog

7 The special needs of this plant are 8 The check boxes indicate the Type of
shown here.These include the Sun, plant.
Water, Soil pH, and Hardiness Zone range.
See “Hardiness Zones” on page 629. 99 The check boxes indicate the Sub-Type
of the plant.

Plant Description Tab

1
2

1 A detailed Description of the plant Layer Tab

displays in this text field.
For information about the Layer tab, see
2 Information in the Lighting “Layer Tab” on page 125.
Comments fields describes the plant’s
light requirements. Fill Style Tab
3 Hardiness Zone Comments are given For information about the settings on the Fill
here. See “Hardiness Zones” on page Style tab, see “Fill Style Tab” on page 902.
629.

624
CAFull_RM.book Page 625 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

If the plant’s 2D Plan Symbol is a CAD Label Tab

block is selected from the library, the settings
on the Fill Style tab will have no effect on the The Label tab is available for a variety of
appearance of the plant in floor plan view. If different objects. For more information, see
you wish, you can create a custom CAD “Label Tab” on page 1045.
block with the desired fill pattern. See “CAD
Blocks” on page 912.

Plant Specification Dialog

Select a 3D plant symbol and click the Open 3D plants also have a Symbol Specification
Object edit button to open the Plant dialog, which can be accessed by clicking the
Specification dialog. Open Symbol edit button.

General Tab

1 Specify the Size/Position of the • If you want the plant to sit on a table
selected 3D plant. rather than the floor, edit the Floor to
• Specify the Height, Width, and Depth of Bottom value.
the plant. • Click the Reset button to return to the
default values if they have been edited.

625
CAFull_RM.book Page 626 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Plant Chooser Dialog

2 Check Reverse Symbol to reflect the Materials Tab

appearance of the plant about an
imaginary vertical line through its center. Use this tab to select materials to apply to the
plant in 3D views. These materials are not
3 A preview of the plant displays on this calculated in the Materials List. See
side of the dialog. Remove the check “Materials Tab” on page 709.
from Show Color to see the image in black
and white. Label Tab
Layer Tab The Label Tab is available for a variety of
different objects. For more information, see
For information about the Layer tab, see “Label Tab” on page 1045.
“Layer Tab” on page 125.

Plant Chooser Dialog

Select Terrain> Plant> Plant Use the Plant Chooser to search the library
Chooser to open the Plant Chooser for plant images and symbols that meet your
dialog or click the button at the bottom of the search parameters. You can search using any
Library Browser window. or all of the options in this dialog.

Plant Information Tab

6
1
7

9
2
3 10

4
5

11

626
CAFull_RM.book Page 627 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

1 the Common Name, Scientific Name Hardiness Zone range. See “Hardiness
or Variety Name for the plant. A Zones” on page 629.
Pronunciation field is also provided.
8 When you have entered all the
Specify the Flower Color of the plant. parameters, click the Search button at
2
the bottom of the dialog. The search results
3 Specify the Leaf Color here. display in this pane of the window.
4 Indicate when the plant produces Specify whether you want the Common
flowers in the Bloom Time field.
Name or Scientific Name listed by clicking
5 Check the boxes to show the Special either radio button above the search results.
Characteristics of this plant.
9 Check the boxes to indicate selected
6 Enter Plant Size information at plant’s Type.
maturity. An average mature height
range can be entered using the drop-down 10 Check a box to specify the selected
plant’s Sub-Type.
lists. This is used with the Grow Plants
feature. See “Plant Tools” on page 621.
11 Highlight a plant in the list and click the
View Item button to see a preview.
7 Special needs are shown here.These
include the Sun, Water, Soil pH, and

Plant Description Tab

1 4

627
CAFull_RM.book Page 628 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Hardiness Zones

1 Enter a Description to search for in this 4 When you have entered all the
text field. parameters, click Search. The search
results display in this pane of the window.
2 Enter Lighting Requirements to Specify whether you want the common or
search for in this field.
scientific names listed.
3 Enter Hardiness Zone Comments to
search for here.

Hardiness Zones
Select Terrain> Plant> Show of regional Hardiness Zone Maps. Click the
Hardiness Zones to view a selection drop-down list to select various regions.

Sprinkler Tools
Use the Sprinkler Tools to design a be selected and edited. See “Sprinkler
sprinkler system in your plan. Specification Dialog” on page 630.
Select Terrain> Sprinkler> Select Terrain> Sprinkler>
Sprinkler Head to open the Library Sprinkler Line to draw sprinkler
Search dialog. Choose a sprinkler type from lines in your plan. Sprinkler lines are drawn
the library, then click in the drawing area to and edited much like CAD Lines. See “Line
place them. Once drawn, sprinkler heads can Tools” on page 884.

628
CAFull_RM.book Page 629 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Select Terrain> Sprinkler>

Sprinkler Spline to draw curved 90° Spray 180° Spray 360° Spray
sprinkler lines in your plan. Sprinkler splines Angle Angle Angle
are drawn and edited like CAD Splines. See
“Splines” on page 908.

Sprinkler Line Sprinkler Spline

The display of sprinkler heads, lines and

splines can be controlled in the Layer
Display Options dialog. See “Displaying
Objects” on page 117.

Sprinkler Specification Dialog

To open the Sprinkler Specification dialog, can also double-click the sprinkler(s) using
select a sprinkler or group of sprinklers and the Select Objects tool.
click the Open Object edit button. You

629
CAFull_RM.book Page 630 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Sprinkler Specification Dialog

General Tab

1 Enter the Height, Width, and Depth, 2 Check Reverse Symbol to reverse the
or top to bottom height, of the sprinkler. sprinkler from left to right.
• Enter a Floor to Bottom value to define
the distance from the bottom of the sprin- 3 Set the sprinkler Spray Angle and
Spray Radius.
kler to elevation 0 of floor one.
• Click the Reset button to return the sprin- Fill Tab
kler values to the defaults.
The Fill Tab for sprinklers is similar to that
• Check Follow Terrain to make the sprin- for other many objects such as base cabinets.
kler follow the surface of the terrain. See “Fill Style Tab” on page 574.
Check Follow Terrain and enter a Floor to
Bottom value to set sprinkler’s elevation Layer Tab
relative to the terrain surface. For example, a For information about the Layer tab, see
value of -6 recesses the sprinkler head 6 “Layer Tab” on page 125.
inches below the surface of the terrain.
Spray Fill Tab
The elevation of a sprinkler can be
edited in cross section/elevation view. The Spray Fill tab controls how the area
within the sprinkler’s reach displays in floor

630
CAFull_RM.book Page 631 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

plan view and is similar to the Fill Style tab Label Tab
found in many dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab”
on page 902. The Label Tab is available for a variety of
different objects. For more information, see
“Label Tab” on page 1045.
Materials Tab
For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

631
CAFull_RM.book Page 634 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 21:

Roads, Driveways
& Sidewalks

Roads and sidewalks are modeled in 3D like Chapter Contents

other terrain objects in Chief Architect. • Road and Sidewalk Defaults
Because they have much in common with • Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools
terrain objects and rely upon terrain data to • Displaying Road Objects
be viewed in 3D, it is helpful to be familiar • Editing Road Objects
with terrain modeling before using these • Adding Road Objects to the Library
tools. See “Terrain” on page 580. • Road Specification Dialog
• Median Specification Dialog
• Driveway Specification Dialog
• Road Marking Specification Dialog
• Sidewalk Specification Dialog

634
CAFull_RM.book Page 635 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Road and Sidewalk Defaults

Default Settings can be accessed by The settings in this dialog are the same as
selecting Edit> Default Settings. those in the Driveway Specification dialog.
Click the + beside Roads, Sidewalks and See “Driveway Specification Dialog” on
Driveways to display the subheadings. See page 642.
“Default Settings” on page 63.
The settings in the Road Defaults, Driveway Road Marking Defaults
Defaults, Road Marking Defaults, and You can access the Road Marking Defaults
Sidewalk Defaults dialogs determine the dialog from the Default Settings dialog, or
initial settings when the road and sidewalk
by double-clicking the Road Marking
tools are used. It is a good idea to check these
button.
settings before placing any roads or
sidewalks in your plan. The settings in this dialog are the same as
those in the Road Marking Specification
Road Defaults dialog. See “Road Marking Specification
Dialog” on page 644.
You can access the Road Defaults dialog
from the Default Settings dialog, or by
Sidewalk Defaults
double-clicking the Road Tools button.
You can access the Sidewalk Defaults dialog
The settings in this dialog are the same as from the Default Settings dialog, or by
those in the Road Specification dialog. See
double-clicking the Sidewalk button.
“Road Specification Dialog” on page 640.
The settings in this dialog are the same as
Driveway Defaults those in the Sidewalk Specification dialog.
See “Sidewalk Specification Dialog” on page
You can access the Driveway Defaults 644.
dialog from the Default Settings dialog, or
by double-clicking the Driveway button.

635
CAFull_RM.book Page 636 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Road objects can be drawn in floor Straight Road
plan view, camera views and
overviews, but only when a Terrain To place a road without any curves,
Perimeter exists in the plan. See “Terrain select Terrain> Road> Straight
Perimeter” on page 581. Road and click and drag to draw a line in
floor plan view. The ends of multiple road
When road objects are first placed into your sections can be connected together.
plan, their initial dimensions and properties
are controlled by their default settings. See Roads are edited alone their center line like
“Road and Sidewalk Defaults” on page 635. CAD lines and polylines. See “Editing Line
Based Objects” on page 147.
Road objects created with the Road Tools
have a consistent width that can be defined in Spline Road
their specification dialogs. See “Road
Specification Dialog” on page 640 and Use Terrain> Road> Spline Road to
“Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on page draw a curved road. Spline roads are
610. drawn and edited like CAD splines. See
“Splines” on page 908.
Road objectss are flat along their widths,
which makes it easy to create roads on
Polyline Road
sloping terrain.
A polyline can be used to model roads
Roads have curbs, and Sidewalks and
of any shape. It is ideal for creating
Driveways cut out curbs and gutters
parking lots and other non-linear road
wherever they meet a Road or a Road
surfaces. Roads created with the Polyline
Polyline.
Road tool conform to the surface of the
terrain beneath them.
To place a road polyline select Terrain>
Road> Polyline Road and click and
drag to draw a rectangular polyline in floor
plan view.
Road Polylines are edited alone their center
line like polylines. See “Polylines” on page
900.

Once road objects have been placed, they can Median

be edited individually or as a group. See
“Editing Road Objects” on page 639. A median is a polyline that can be
used within a road. The median is

636
CAFull_RM.book Page 637 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

made of the same material as the terrain Road Stripe

beneath it and has a curb if the road that
encompasses it has one. The Road Stripe tool allows you to
paint lines on a road surface.

To place a road stripe, select Terrain>

Road> Road Stripe and click and drag
To place a median select Terrain> Road> to draw a line within a road in floor plan
view. Multiple road stripes can be connected
Median and click and drag to draw a
together.
rectangular polyline in floor plan view. Road
median polylines must be contained within a Road Stripes are edited like CAD lines. See
road. “Line Tools” on page 884.
Road medians are edited just like CAD
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900. Road Marking
Polylines can be converted to road medians. A Road Marking paints polylines on
See “Converting Objects” on page 205. a road surface, allowing any shape to
be created.
Cul-de-sac To place a road marking select Terrain>
A Cul-de-sac is a road object with a Road> Road Marking and click and
special, rounded shape that can be drag to draw a rectangular polyline within a
placed at the end of a Road object. Select road in floor plan view.
Terrain> Road> Cul-de-sac and click on
Road markings are edited like CAD
the end of a road to place a cul-de-sac at that
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900.
location.
A driveway is a road without a curb. A
Culs-de-sac cannot be placed on road
driveway cuts out a curb wherever it meets a
polylines.
road or a road polyline. Like a road, the
Culs-de-sac can be edited just like CAD elevation of a driveway is flat across its
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline width.
Based Objects” on page 160.

637
CAFull_RM.book Page 638 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Road, Driveway and Sidewalk Tools

Straight Driveway end to draw a line. The ends of multiple

sidewalk sections can be connected together.
To create a driveway, select Terrain>
Driveway> Straight Driveway, then Sidewalks are edited along their center line
click and drag to draw a line. Multiple like line- and polyline- based objects. See
driveway sections can be connected together. “Editing Line Based Objects” on page 147.

Height, thickness and material information Sidewalks can be edited in the sidewalk’s
can be specified in a driveway’s specification specification dialog. See “Sidewalk
dialog. See “Driveway Specification Dialog” Specification Dialog” on page 644.
on page 642.
Driveways are edited like other line-based
objects. See “Editing Line Based Objects” on
page 147.

Spline Driveway
Use the Spline Driveway tool to
create a curved driveway. Select
Terrain> Driveway> Spline Driveway.
Spline driveways are drawn and edited like
CAD splines. See “Splines” on page 908. Spline Sidewalk
Use the Spline Sidewalk tool to
Polyline Driveway create a curved sidewalk. Select
Use the Polyline Driveway tool to Terrain> Sidewalk> Spline Sidewalk.
create a sidewalk of any shape. Spline roads are drawn and edited like CAD
Driveway polylines conform to the surface of splines. See “Splines” on page 908.
the terrain beneath them.
Polyline Sidewalk
To place a driveway polyline, select
Terrain> Driveway> Driveway Use the polyline sidewalk tool to
create a sidewalk of any shape.
Polyline and click and drag to draw a
Sidewalk polylines conform to the surface of
rectangular polyline in floor plan view.
the terrain beneath them.
Driveway polylines are edited just like CAD
To place a sidewalk polyline select Terrain>
polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900.
Sidewalk> Sidewalk Polyline and click
Straight Sidewalk and drag to draw a rectangular polyline in
floor plan view.
To create a sidewalk with no curves,
select Terrain> Sidewalk> Straight Sidewalk polylines are edited just like CAD
Sidewalk, then click and drag from end to polylines. See “Polylines” on page 900.

638
CAFull_RM.book Page 639 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Auto Generate Sidewalks 1 Left/Right Side of Road - Check one

or both boxes to generate a sidewalk on
Select a road or median and click the the selected road object.
Auto Generate Sidewalk edit button
to open the Auto Generate Sidewalks 2 All Connected Roads - Check this box
dialog. to generate a sidewalk along all other
roads connected to the selected road object.

3 Offset From Road - Specify a gap

between the generated sidewalk and the
1 selected road object.

2
3

Displaying Road Objects

Roads and sidewalks display in floor roads and sidewalks will not display, either:
plan and 3D views based on the even if their layers are turned on.
settings for their layers in the Layer Display
By default, terrain rebuilds automatically
Options dialog. See “Layers” on page 116.
when road objects are added, removed or
edited. If it does not, you can select Terrain>
In 3D Views
Build Terrain . See “Terrain Perimeter”
Road objects display in 3D views within the on page 581.
Terrain Perimeter. If the display of the
Terrain Perimeter is turned off in 3D views,

Editing Road Objects

Road objects can be selected individually Using the Mouse
and as a group in 2D and 3D views and
edited using the edit handles, the edit toolbar The edit handles available for a selected road
and their specification dialogs. See “Road object depend on the type of object selected.
Specification Dialog” on page 640 and • Straight Roads , straight Driveways
“Terrain Path Specification Dialog” on page
610. , straight Road Stripes , and
Straight Sidewalks are edited along
their centerline like a line or open

639
CAFull_RM.book Page 640 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Adding Road Objects to the Library

polyline. See “Editing Line Based In the Specification Dialog

Objects” on page 147.
Road objects can be extensively customized
• Spline Roads and Sidewalk Splines in their specification dialogs. See “Road
Specification Dialog” on page 640.
are edited along their centerline like
CAD splines. See “Splines” on page 908.
Using the Edit Tools
• Polyline Roads , Cul-de-sacs ,
A selected road object or objects can be
Medians , Road Markings edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
Polyline Driveways and Polyline on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1140.
Sidewalks are edited along their
perimeter, like standard polylines. The Convert to Polyline Object
width is determined by the polyline’s
shape. See “Editing Closed-Polyline A selected Straight or Spline Road,
Based Objects” on page 160. Sidewalk or Driveway can be
converted into a Polyline Road, Sidewalk or
• Medians are also edited like Driveway by clicking the Convert to
polylines. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Polyline Object edit button.
Based Objects” on page 160.
Polyline Roads, Sidewalks and Driveways
display the same edit handles as closed
polylines, allowing you to edit their shapes
as much as needed.

Adding Road Objects to the Library

You can create your own road objects and When a group of terrain objects from the
save them to the library. Select any library is placed into a plan, each object
combination of elevation points, elevation becomes independent and can be edited
lines, terrain features, roads, sidewalks, road individually. See “Adding to the Library” on
markings, or even the terrain perimeter itself page 700.
and send them to the library as one unit.

Road Specification Dialog

To open the Road Specification dialog, Many of the settings in this dialog are similar
select a Straight Road, Spline Road, Polyline to those in the Terrain Path Specification
Road, Median or Cul-de-sac and click the dialog.
Open Object edit button.

640
CAFull_RM.book Page 641 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1 Specify the Width and Height of the 2 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
road relative to the terrain. and the End when they intersect with
other road objects. Check one or both boxes.
The Width option is not available for a cul-
de-sac or non-centerline road. Radius - Enter the flare radius.
Flaring is not available for culs-de-sac or
non-centerline roads.

Curb Tab

2
3
4

1 Has Curb - Check the box if you want 2 Cut Curb for Driveways and
the selected road to contain a curb. Sidewalks - Check this box to cut the
curb for driveways and sidewalks.
Width - Enter a width value for the curb.
Height - Enter a Height value for the curb. 3 Select Curb Profile - Click this button
to select another curb profile.

641
CAFull_RM.book Page 642 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Median Specification Dialog

4 Default Curb Profile - Click this For more information, see “Spline Tab” on
button to use the default curb profile. page 901.

Polyline Tab Line Style Tab

The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
volume of the road. For more information, many other specification dialogs. See “Line
see “Polyline Tab” on page 901. Style Tab” on page 889.

Selected Line/Arc Tab Fill Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when a This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
Straight Road is selected. For more many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
information, see “Line Tab” on page 888. page 902.
The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a Straight Road is Materials Tab
selected. See “Arc Tab” on page 896. This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
many other specification dialogs. See
Spline Tab “Materials Tab” on page 709.
The Spline tab is available when a Spline The material selected here displays in 3D
Road is selected. Specify the angle between views but is not calculated in the Materials
the line segments used to draw the spline. List.

Median Specification Dialog

The options in the Median Specification Specification. See “Road Specification
dialog are similar to those in the Road Dialog” on page 640.

Driveway Specification Dialog

Select a driveway and click the Open Object
edit button to display the Driveway
Specification dialog.

642
CAFull_RM.book Page 643 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1
2
3

1 Width - Enter a width for the driveway. The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a driveway is selected.
2 Height - Enter a Height above the For more information, see “Arc Tab” on page
terrain.
896.
3 Flare - Driveways can be flared at the
Start and the End when they intersect Line Style Tab
with roads or other driveways. Check one or
both boxes. This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
many other specification dialogs. See “Line
Radius - Enter the flare radius. Style Tab” on page 889.

Polyline Tab Fill Style Tab

The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
volume of the driveway. For more many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
information, see “Polyline Tab” on page 901. page 902.

Selected Line/Arc Tab Materials Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
straight segment of a driveway is selected. many other specification dialogs. See
For more information, see“Line Tab” on “Materials Tab” on page 709.
page 888.
The material selected here displays in 3D but
is not calculated in the Materials List.

643
CAFull_RM.book Page 644 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Road Marking Specification Dialog

Road Marking Specification Dialog

Select a Road Marking and click the Open selected. For more information, see“Line
Object edit button to display the Road Tab” on page 888.
Marking Specification dialog. The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a road marking is
General Tab selected. For more information, see “Arc
Tab” on page 896.

Line Style Tab

This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
1
many other specification dialogs. See “Line
Style Tab” on page 889.

1 Width - Enter a width value for the Fill Style Tab

selected Road Marking.
This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
Polyline Tab page 902.
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and
volume of the road marking. For more Materials Tab
information, see “Polyline Tab” on page 901.
This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
many other specification dialogs. See
Selected Line/Arc Tab “Materials Tab” on page 709.
The Selected Line tab is available when the The material selected here displays in 3D but
straight segment of a road marking is is not calculated in the Materials List.

Sidewalk Specification Dialog

Select a Straight Sidewalk, Spline the Open Object edit button to display
Sidewalk, or Polyline Sidewalk and click the Sidewalk Specification dialog.

644
CAFull_RM.book Page 645 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1
2
3

1 Specify the Size of the sidewalk. The Selected Arc tab is available when the
curved segment of a Straight Sidewalk is
• Width - Enter a width for the selected selected. See “Arc Tab” on page 896.
road. This option is not available for a
cul-de-sac or non-centerline road. Spline Tab
• Height - Enter a Height above the terrain The Spline tab is available when a Spline
for the selected road. Sidewalk is selected. See “Spline Tab” on
page 901.
2 Flare - Roads can be flared at the Start
and the End when they intersect with
other road objects. Check one or both boxes. Line Style Tab
Radius - Enter the flare radius. This tab is the same as the Line Style tab in
many other specification dialogs. See “Line
Flaring is not available for culs-de-sac or Style Tab” on page 889.
non-centerline roads.
Fill Style Tab
Polyline Tab
This tab is the same as the Fill Style tab in
The Polyline tab lists the perimeter, area and many other dialogs. See “Fill Style Tab” on
volume of the sidewalk. See “Polyline Tab” page 902.
on page 901.
Materials Tab
Selected Line/Arc Tab
This tab is the same as the Materials tab in
The Selected Line tab is available when a many other specification dialogs. See
Straight Sidewalk is selected. For more “Materials Tab” on page 709.
information, see“Line Tab” on page 888.
The material selected here displays in 3D but
is not calculated in the Materials List.

645
CAFull_RM.book Page 646 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Sidewalk Specification Dialog

646
CAFull_RM.book Page 647 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

647
CAFull_RM.book Page 648 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 22:

Other Objects

Chief Architect has additional objects that Chapter Contents

can be used to customize your design. • Primitive Tools
• Creating Primitives
• Editing Primitives
• 3D Box Specification Dialog
• Sphere Specification Dialog
• Cylinder Specification Dialog
• Cone Specification Dialog
• Polyline Solids
• Polyline Solid Specification Dialog
• Soffits
• Special Applications for Soffits
• Calculating Materials on Soffits
• Soffit Specification Dialog
• Distributed Objects
• Distribution Region/Path Specification
Dialogs
• Fireplaces
• Fireplace Specification Dialog
• Library Fireplaces
• Chimneys

648
CAFull_RM.book Page 649 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Primitive Tools
The Primitive Tools allow you to Cylinder
create basic solid geometric shapes,
which can be combined to create a wide Select the Cylinder tool, then click
variety of custom solid objects. Select and drag to draw a solid 3D cylinder.
Build> Primitive to display the Primitive
Tools. Cone
With the exception of Faces, objects made Select the Cone tool, then click and
with the Primitive Tools are included in drag to draw a solid 3D cone.
materials list calculations, although it is best
that their specified materials are either Polyline Solid
Concrete or Volume material types. See
Select the Polyline Solid tool, then
“Define Material Dialog” on page 719.
click and drag to draw a polyline solid.
Despite their name, polyline solids are not
Box true solids; however, they can be converted
Select the Box tool, then click and drag into solids. See “Polyline Solids” on page
to draw a solid 3D box. See “Creating 658.
Primitives” on page 649.
Face
Sphere Select the Face tool, then click and
Select the Sphere tool, then click and drag to draw the edges of a two-
drag to draw a solid 3D sphere. dimensional surface. Faces are two-sided,
can display in 3D views and be used to create
custom Solid objects. See “Face Objects” on
page 650.

Creating Primitives
Primitive solids are drawn similar to the way • To create 3D Box , click and drag in
CAD boxes and circles are. Depending on any direction other than vertical or hori-
the view in which they are created, however, zontal to define the width and depth of
the method may differ somewhat. the box’s base. Its initial height is 1”.

In Floor Plan View • To create a Sphere , Cylinder or

In floor plan view, primitive solids are drawn Cone , click and drag in any direction
much the way boxes and circles are. Select a to define the radius.
tool, then click and drag to define an area.

649
CAFull_RM.book Page 650 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Primitives

• As it is drawn, the height of a Cylinder Convert to Solid

or Cone is equal to its radius. Click the Convert To Solid edit button
Initially, the bottom surface of boxes, to convert the selected polyline solid or
cylinders and cones, and the center point of slab into a solid so that it can be used with
spheres, are all set at 0” on the Z axis. See other solids to create complex structures.
“Entering Coordinates” on page 142.
Face Objects
In 3D Views Regardless of the view, primitive faces are
In 3D views, the height of boxes, cylinders drawn the way line-based objects are when
and cones can be defined as they are drawn. the Alternate edit behavior is active. See
“Alternate” on page 138.
• To create 3D Box , Cylinder or
Cone , click and drag to define the To draw a Face
width and depth of the box’s base, then
drag upward or downward to define its
1. Select Build> Primitive> Face ,
height.
then click, drag and release the mouse
• Drag upward to set the height of the bot- button to draw the first edge.
tom surface at 0”, or drag downward to
2. Click to define the endpoints of addi-
set the top surface at 0”.
tional edges. A Face must have at least
• To create a Sphere , click and drag in three edges.
any direction to define its radius. 3. To finish drawing, click at the original
starting point. This is easiest to do when
In Cross Section/Elevation Endpoint snapping is enabled. See
Views “Object Snaps” on page 133.

With the exception of Polyline Solids Once drawn, Faces can be extruded to create
Solid objects.
and Faces , primitives cannot be created
in cross section/elevation views. See
“Polyline Solids” on page 658.

Editing Primitives
Primitives can be selected individually and Using the Mouse
as a group and edited using the edit handles,
the edit toolbar and their respective Objects drawn using the Primitive Tools can
specification dialogs. be edited similar to CAD boxes or circles.
When selected, a primitive displays six edit
handles: a Move handle, a Rotate handle and

650
CAFull_RM.book Page 651 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

a Resize handle on each edge. Unlike CAD A custom chimney can be designed using 3D
boxes or circles, primitives do not have Boxes and Cylinders and the Union
corner Resize edit handles.
and Subtract edit tools.
Faces are the exception to this statement.
Like Polyline Solids, they have Resize edit
handles on each edge and can be edited like
closed polylines. See “Editing Closed-
Polyline Based Objects” on page 160.

Using the Edit Tools

A selected primitive or primitives can be
edited in a variety of ways using the buttons
on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1140.

Creating Complex Structures

with Primitives
Primitive objects can be manipulated and
combined to produce complex structures.
Use the Union , Intersection and
Subtract edit tools to create unique 3D
shapes and combine shapes into Architec-
tural Blocks . See “Architectural Blocks”
on page 676.
A detailed model truck can be created using
A fireplace, for example, can be created by
3D Boxes and Cylinders and the
arranging 3D Boxes .
Union , Intersection and Subtract
edit tools.

651
CAFull_RM.book Page 652 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Primitives

Structures created using the Primitive Tools

can be converted to symbols. See “Convert
to Symbol” on page 987.

Explode Shape
The Explode Shape edit tool allows
you to explode a selected Solid object
into a collection of faces.

Extrude Object
Decorative stone columns can be modeled The Extrude Object edit tool allows
you to produce a Solid object by
using 3D Boxes and the Union , and extruding a selected Face object in any direc-
Subtract edit tools. tion. See “3D Drafting” on page 28.

To use Extrude Object

1. Select a Face object and click the

Extrude Object edit button.

2. In the Extrude Object dialog, specify

When a primitive has been manipulated the Extrusion Delta, which is the direc-
tion and distance that the object is
using the Union , Intersection and extruded.
Subtract edit tools, it is no longer a • Specify the distances that the object
primitive that can be resized or reshaped should extrude in the directions of each
using the edit handles or specification dialog. of the three axes.
Instead, it is a considered a solid. See “Shape 3. Click OK.
Specification Dialog” on page 658.

652
CAFull_RM.book Page 653 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Revolve Object Axis in the current plan. The object

will revolve in the Y and Z axes.
The Revolve Object edit tool allows
• Select Y-Axis to revolve the object
you to produce a Solid object by
around a line that runs parallel to the Y
extruding a selected Face object while rotat-
Axis in the current plan. The object
ing it around an axis or point that you spec-
will revolve in the X and Z axes.
ify.
• Select Z-Axis to revolve the object
To use Revolve Object around a line that runs parallel to the Z
Axis in the current plan. The object
1. Select a Face object and click the will revolve in the X and Y axes.
• Select User Defined to define the axis
Revolve Object edit button.
around which the object will revolve.
3. When User Defined is selected, the X, Y
and Z Direction fields become active.
Type a length value in each field to spec-
ify the direction of a custom Axis of
Rotation. All three values cannot be 0.
No specific unit is used: instead, the
ratio between these numbers is used to
define an axis of rotation.
4. Specify the Rotate About Point, which
is the point around which the object will
rotate.
5. Specify the Angle of Rotation, which is
2. In the Revolve Object dialog, specify
how far around the axis of rotation that
the Axis of Rotation, which determines
the object will rotate. A value of 180°
the direction that the object will rotate.
will rotate the object half-way around
The Axis of Rotation is a line that is per-
the axis, while 360° will rotate it in a
pendicular to the direction in which the
complete circle.
object will rotate.
• Select X-Axis to revolve the object 6. Click OK.
around a line that runs parallel to the X

3D Box Specification Dialog

Select a 3D box and click the Open When you first draw a 3D box, the origin of
Object edit button to open the 3D Box the box is the point where you start drawing
Specification dialog.
it; the width of the box is the X axis
dimension.

653
CAFull_RM.book Page 654 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

3D Box Specification Dialog

1 2

1 Dimensions - Use this section to Angle in XY Plane - Enter a number from 1

specify the size of the box. to 360 to control the rotation of the box on
the X axis.
Enter the Width, Length, and Height of the
box. Angle From XY Plane - This number
controls the rotation of the box on the Y axis.
2 Origin - Use these settings to position
the origin of the box in relation to the Angle Around Width Vector - Enter the
origin point of your plan. See “Entering number to specify the rotation of the box on
Coordinates” on page 142. the Z axis.
Enter the X, Y, and Z delta coordinates for
the box. Line Style Tab
For information about the Line Style tab, see
3 Width Vector - A width vector is an “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
invisible line that runs the width of the
box. Use the width vector settings to
precisely control the rotation of the box in Materials Tab
free space. For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

654
CAFull_RM.book Page 655 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Sphere Specification Dialog

Select a sphere and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Sphere
Specification dialog.

1
2
3
4

1 Radius - Specify the radius of the Line Style Tab

sphere.
For information about the Line Style tab, see
2 Center X - Specify the exact position “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
of the sphere by entering the location of
the center on the X axis. Materials Tab
3 Center Y - Enter the position of the For information about the Materials tab, see
sphere center relative to the Y axis. “Materials Tab” on page 709.
4 Center Z - Enter the position of the
sphere center relative to the Z axis.

655
CAFull_RM.book Page 656 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Cylinder Specification Dialog

Cylinder Specification Dialog

Select a cylinder and click the Open
Object edit button to open the Cylinder
Specification dialog.

1 2

1 Dimensions - Use these settings to settings to control the rotation of the cylinder
specify the size of the cylinder. in free space.
• Radius - Enter the radius of the cylinder. • Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
• Height - Specify the height of the cylin- control the rotation on the X axis.
der. Because the cylinder is round, it only
changes appearance if you also enter a
2 Center - Locate the cylinder precisely number in Angle From XY Plane.
with these settings.
• Angle From XY Plane - This number
• X - Enter the location of the cylinder cen- controls the rotation of the cylinder on
ter along the X axis. the Y axis.
• Y - Enter the location of the cylinder cen-
ter along the Yaxis. Line Style Tab
• Z - Enter the location of the cylinder cen- For information about the Line Style tab, see
ter along the Z axis. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.

3 Axis - The axis is an invisible line that Materials Tab

runs the length of the cylinder. By
default, this axis is vertical. Use the Axis For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

656
CAFull_RM.book Page 657 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Cone Specification Dialog

Select a cone and click the Open Object
edit button to open the Cone Specification
dialog.

1 2

1 Dimensions - These setting specify the • Angle in XY Plane - Use this number to
size of the cone. control the rotation on the X plane.
• Radius - Enter the radius of the cone. Because the cone is round, it only
changes appearance if you also enter a
• Height - Enter the height of the cone. number in Angle From XY Plane.
2 Center - You can locate the cone • Angle From XY Plane - This number
precisely relative to the origin using controls the rotation of the cone on the Y
these settings. plane.
• X - Enter the location of the cone center
along the X axis. Line Style Tab
• Y - Enter the location of the cone center For information about the Line Style tab, see
along the Yaxis. “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
• Z - Enter the location of the cone center
along the Z axis. Materials Tab
3 The Axis is an invisible line that runs For information about the Materials tab, see
the length of the cone. By default, this “Materials Tab” on page 709.
axis is vertical. Use the Axis settings to
control the rotation of the cone in free space.

657
CAFull_RM.book Page 658 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Shape Specification Dialog

Shape Specification Dialog

Select a Face, a solid created using the converting a slab or polyline solid and click
Union , Intersection and Subtract the Open Object edit button to open the
Shape Specification dialog.
edit tools, or a solid created by

Shape Tab

The 3D Surface Quality settings control can be from the true location of the
how any curved surfaces on the selected curved surface. Lower values produce
object are rendered in 3D views. more triangles and a smoother appear-
• Check Automatic to have the program ance in 3D views.
define the Maximum Deflection, which is
the amount each flat, triangular surface Line Style Tab
used to represent a curved surface in 3D For information about the Line Style tab, see
can deviate from the true curvature of the “Line Style Tab” on page 889.
object. For more information about trian-
gles, see “Higher Quality Rendering” on
Materials Tab
page 774.
• Specify the Maximum Deflection in For information about the Materials tab, see
plan inches (mm). This value is the maxi- “Materials Tab” on page 709.
mum distance that a point on a triangle

Polyline Solids
Polyline Solids are polyline shaped 3D Creating Polyline Solids
objects with a specified thickness.
They can be oriented either horizontally or A horizontal polyline solid can be created in
vertically and are useful for creating custom floor plan view or any 3D view by selecting
details anywhere in your 3D model. Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid , then
either clicking clicking and dragging to draw

658
CAFull_RM.book Page 659 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

a rectangle. See “Rectangular Polyline” on Converting CAD Polylines

page 903.
A closed CAD polyline can be converted into
A vertical polyline solid can be created in a a polyline solid in floor plan and cross
cross section/elevation view by selecting section/elevation views using the Convert
Build> Primitive> Polyline Solid , then Polyline edit button. See “Convert
either clicking or clicking and dragging to Polyline” on page 205.
draw a rectangle. The polyline solid is placed
in front of any objects visble in the view. If Convert to Solid
no objects are behind, the polyline solid is
placed one foot in front of the camera. You can convert a polyline solid to a
primitive in order to build complex
Polyline solids can be edited the way other solid structures. Select the polyline solid you
closed polyline-based objects are. See want to convert and click Convert to Solid
“Editing Closed-Polyline Based Objects” on on the edit toolbar.
page 160.

Polyline Solid Specification Dialog

To open the Polyline Solid Specification
3 Thickness - Specify the thickness for
dialog, click on a polyline to select it, then the polyline solid. Increasing the
click the Open Object edit button. thickness will cause the polyline solid to
grow upward (horizontal) or toward the
elevation/cross section camera (vertical).
General Tab
Polyline Tab
For information about the Polyline tab, see
“Polyline Tab” on page 901.
1
Selected Line Tab
2
For information about the Selected Line tab,
3 see “Selected Line Tab” on page 901.

1 Hole in Polyline Solid - Select to Line Style Tab

convert the polyline solid into a hole in
a surrounding polyline solid. For information about the Line Style tab, see
“Line Style Tab” on page 889.
2 Height - Specify the height of the top
of the polyline solid. This property is
not available for vertical polyline solids.

659
CAFull_RM.book Page 660 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Soffits

Fill Style Tab Materials Tab

For information about the Fill Style tab, see For information about the Materials tab, see
“Fill Style Tab” on page 902. “Materials Tab” on page 709.

Soffits
Soffits typically fill the space between Once a soffit is placed in a plan, you can
the tops of wall cabinets and the change its size and position to meet a variety
ceiling, but they are very versatile and can be of needs.
used to create almost any other object that
can be modeled as a 3D box. Placing Soffits
Soffits can be created in both 2D and 3D
Soffit Defaults
views. They can be assigned materials that
The default settings for soffits are set in the are calculated in the Materials List, but by
Soffit Defaults dialog. The settings in this default they use the material assigned to the
dialog are similar to those in the Soffit default wall. See “Wall, Railing and Fencing
Specification dialog. See “Soffit Defaults” on page 215.
Specification Dialog” on page 662.
When positioned against a wall in a room,
For best results when placing soffits above soffits will display any moldings present in
wall cabinets, soffits should be the same that room that are at the same height as the
width as and 1" (20mm) deeper than the soffit. See “Moldings Tab” on page 290.
default wall cabinet. See “Cabinet Defaults”
Like cabinets, soffits can also have custom
on page 547.
molding profiles specified. See “Moldings
The default soffit height should be equal to Tab” on page 573.
the space between the ceiling and the top of
When a soffit is created, it is placed on the
the wall cabinets.
Cabinets, Soffits layer. See “Layer Display
The maximum soffit width is 170 feet (52m), Options Dialog” on page 121.
and the minimum width is 1/16" (1 mm).

Special Applications for Soffits

Anything that can be represented by a three
dimensional box of any size or angle can be Note: For free form shapes, polyline solids
represented by a soffit. They can be resized may be better suited for the job. See “Polyline
to as small as 1/16" x 1/16" x 1/16" (1mm x Solids” on page 658.
For a box that can be rotated around any
1mm x 1mm) or as large as 135 feet (32m).
side, a 3D box may be better suited. See
“Box” on page 649.

660
CAFull_RM.book Page 661 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Soffits can have materials applied to them to Masonry Veneer

represent simple mirrors, posts, chimneys
and so on. As an alternative to pony walls, create a
brick or stone veneer that extends halfway up
Following are some additional examples. a wall using soffits placed around the base of
the house. Specify a depth for the soffits
Accent Tiles equal to the masonry material to be used.
A material such as ceramic tile can be
assigned to one or more soffits applied to the
walls above tubs or in showers.

Soffits automatically stop at the floor

platform when moved downward. To place a
soffit for a brick ledge, create a Cross
Section/Elevation view looking straight
at the brick ledge. Select the brick soffit, hold
the Ctrl key down, grab the soffit by its
middle handle, and drag it down past the
floor so that it covers the floor platform edge
as well. See “Unrestricted Movement” on
page 178.

Calculating Materials on Soffits

The number of bricks, tiles, shingles, shakes mortar joint) the front of the soffit is
or other materials applied to a soffit is 48"x48”=2304 square inches. Including
calculated using the following rules: the mortar joint, each brick requires 3 3/
• If the soffit depth is less than the larger of 8” x 8 3/8” = 28.26 square inches. 2304
4 inches (10 mm) or 1 ½ times the mate- sq. in. divided by 28.26 sq. in. per brick
rial thickness, then only the front area of gives 81.5 bricks.
the soffit is used. Thus if a soffit is • If the soffit depth is greater than both 4
48"x48”x4” thick, and the Dark Red inches (10 mm) and 1 ½ times the mate-
brick material is used (3"x 8" with 3/8” rial thickness, then the surface areas of

661
CAFull_RM.book Page 662 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Soffit Specification Dialog

the soffit back, sides and top are used in gle layer of the material applied to each
addition to the front, if these surfaces are applicable face.
not attached to a wall or other soffit. • For shingles and shakes, the overlap
However, only those portions of the amount should be subtracted from the
sides, top and bottom remaining after height, as opposed to brick or tile, where
subtracting twice the material thickness the joint width is added to the size.
are used. So, for Dark Red brick, which
has a depth of 4", the sides, top and bot- • For materials in the area category, the
tom surface areas cannot contribute to the soffit area calculation above is used, with
brick count unless the soffit depth is the material thickness treated as zero.
greater than 8 inches. • For materials in the volume, concrete or
• If surface materials such as brick are earth categories, the true volume of the
applied to a large soffit, the soffit center soffit is used.
is assumed to be hollow, with only a sin-

Soffit Specification Dialog

To customize a soffit using the Soffit The settings in this dialog are similar to those
Specification dialog, double-click on the in the Soffit Defaults dialog, but affect only
soffit using the Soffit tool or select the the selected object(s).

soffit and click the Open Object edit

button.

662
CAFull_RM.book Page 663 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1 Specification - Define the size and Sloped Soffit is checked. See “Sloped
position of the selected soffit relative to Soffits” on page 664.
the floor or terrain. • Follow Terrain - Check this box to make
• Height - Define the vertical height of the a soffit placed outside a building adjust
soffit. its height to the height of the terrain.
• Width - Specify the width of the soffit.
2 Options - Specify a sloped soffit and/or
• Depth - Define the the distance between position relative to the roof or ceiling.
the front and the back of the soffit. When • Check Sloped Soffit to slope the soffit
selected in floor plan view, the front of a vertically from the back up towards the
soffit has a “V,” and the back of the soffit front. When you specify a soffit as
has a triangular rotation handle. sloped, the options on the General tab
• Floor to Bottom - Specify the distance change. See “Sloped Soffits” on page
from the bottom of the soffit to the floor. 664.
This is sometimes more easily done by • Check Place Under Roof to have the sof-
positioning the soffit in a 3D view. fit’s slope follow that of the roof. The
• Height at Front - This option applies to soffit moves up and the top of the soffit is
sloped soffits and becomes enabled when in the same plane as the roof, at the same
pitch as the roof. Be sure to place the

663
CAFull_RM.book Page 664 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Soffit Specification Dialog

front of the soffit toward the high side of Layer Tab

the roof. Only available when Sloped
Soffit is checked. Not available in the The Layer tab is found in the specification
Soffit Defaults dialog. dialogs for many different objects. For more
information, see “Layer Tab” on page 125.
• Check Place Under Ceiling to move the
soffit vertically until the top contacts the
Fill Style Tab
ceiling plane. Not available in the Soffit
Defaults dialog. The Fill Style tab is found in the
specification dialogs for many different
3 A preview of the soffit displays on the objects. For more information, see “Fill Style
right side of the dialog box.
Tab” on page 902.
4 Check Show Color to display the
soffit’s material in the preview. Materials Tab
The Materials tab is found in the
Moldings Tab
specification dialogs for many different
The Moldings tab is found in the specifica- objects. For more information, see
tion dialogs for many different objects. For “Materials Tab” on page 709.
more information, see “Moldings Tab” on
page 573.

Sloped Soffits
When a soffit is specified as a sloped soffit, The three inset diagrams show how the
the options on the General tab of the Soffit options in the dialog affect a sloped soffit.
Specification dialog change.

664
CAFull_RM.book Page 665 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Elevation View

Floor Plan View

3D view

Front

• Thickness is measured perpendicular to Both the front and back heights of a sloped
the slope of the soffit. soffit must be defined.
• Width is measured left to right across the • Height at Back is measured from the fin-
soffit. ished floor to the lowest point at the back
• Horizontal Length is measured from of the soffit.
back to front in floor plan view. Since the • Height at Front is measured from the
soffit is sloped, this measurement is not finished floor to the underside of the sof-
the actual length of the soffit. It cannot, fit at the upper end.
for example, be used to determine the
length of a sloped beam.

665
CAFull_RM.book Page 666 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Distributed Objects

Distributed Objects
The Distributed Object tools allow 3. Distribution paths are drawn like other
you to place multiple copies of an open polyline and spline-based objects.
object in an evenly spaced array, either • Click and drag from end to end to draw
within a region or along a path. Select one or more connected lines or spline
Build> Distributed Object to access these segments.
tools.
4. Select the region and click the Open
Object edit button.
5. In the Distribution Region
Specification dialog:
• Select the object to be distributed
within the region.
• Specify the distributed objects’ spac-
ing, orientation and positioning.
Distribution Distribution • Click OK to close the dialog.
Regions Paths Once created, Distribution Regions and
To create distributed objects Paths can be edited into nearly any shape you
require. See “Editing Closed-Polyline Based
1. Select Build> Distributed Object and Objects” on page 160 and “Editing Spline
choose the desired Distributed Object Based Objects” on page 166.
tool.
Explode Distributed Objects
2. Distribution regions are drawn like other
closed polyline and spline-based objects. Objects grouped in a Distribution
• Click once to place a region with end- Region or Path cannot be individually
points that form a 10’ (4 m) square. selected. You can, however, click the
• Click and drag from end to end to draw Explode Distributed Object edit button to
a region sized as needed. separate a region or path into its individual
components. Once exploded, a Distribution
Region or Path cannot be regrouped.

Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs

Select a Distribution Region or Path and The settings in these two dialogs are similar
click the Open Object edit button to and most tabs are also found in the
open the Distribution Region or specification dialogs for a variety of other
Distribution Path Specification dialog.
CAD-based objects.

666
CAFull_RM.book Page 667 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Distributed Object Tab - Distribution Region

1 Current Object - Specify the object • Check Show Objects to display the dis-
assigned to the selected region. tributed objects in floor plan view.
• Click the Select button to choose an • Check Show Region to display the edges
object from the library. See “Select of the distribution region in floor plan
Library Object Dialog” on page 689. view.
• A preview of the Current Object along
with its name display to the left. 2 Object Spacing - Specify how the
objects in the region are spaced.
• Click the Delete button to unassign the • Specify the Distance between the objects
Current Object from the selected region. in the region, as measured from their cen-
• Click the Edit button to open the Current ter points.
Object’s specification dialog. Changes • Select Standard Grid to position the
made here affect all objects generated objects in rows and columns based on the
within the region. See “Specification standard X/Y grid in the program. This
Dialogs” on page 33. grid is affected by Rotate View. See
“Rotate View” on page 189.

667
CAFull_RM.book Page 668 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs

• Select Alternate Grid to position the • Select Random Angle to rotate the
objects in rows and columns based on the objects in the region at a variety of ran-
shape of the region. dom angles.

3 Object Orientation - Specify how or if 4 Object Positioning - Specify the

the objects in the region are rotated. positioning of the distributed objects
These settings do not affect the region itself relative to a point of origin within the region.
or its edges. • Specify the X Offset, the horizontal dis-
• Specify the Angle that the distributed tance in floor plan view from the region’s
objects should be placed at. specified point of origin.
• Select Absolute Angle to rotate the • Specify the Y Offset, the vertical dis-
objects to the specified Angle as mea- tance in floor plan view from the region’s
sured from an imaginary horizontal line specified point of origin.
drawn from the origin towards the right. • Select From Polyline Center to measure
• Select Relative Angle to rotate the the offset from the region’s center point.
objects relative to the angle of the • Select Polyline Start to measure the off-
region’s first edge or, if that edge is set from the region’s start point. This start
curved, to the angle of its chord. The first point is typically located at the top left of
edge is typically located at the top of the the region when it is first created; how-
region when it is first created; however, ever, this can change as the region is
this can change as the region is edited. edited.

668
CAFull_RM.book Page 669 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Distributed Object Tab - Distribution Path

1 Current Object - Specify the object • Check Show Objects to display the
assigned to the selected path. assigned objects in floor plan view.
• Click the Select button to choose an • Check Show Path to display the distribu-
object from the library. See “Select tion path in floor plan view.
Library Object Dialog” on page 689.
• A preview of the Current Object along 2 Object Spacing - Specify how the
objects along the path are spaced, as
with its name display to the left. measured from their center points.
• Click the Delete button to unassign the • Select Distance Between Object Cen-
Current Object from the selected region ters to maintain a specific distance
or path. between all objects, measured from their
• Click the Edit button to open the Current centers. If the path is resized, the total
Object’s specification dialog. Changes number of objects may change.
made here affect all objects generated • Specify the Distance Between Object
along the path. See “Specification Dia- Centers in the text field to the right.
logs” on page 33.

669
CAFull_RM.book Page 670 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Distribution Region/Path Specification Dialogs

• Select Number of Evenly Distributed Polyline Tab

Objects to maintain a specific number of
objects. If the path is resized, the spacing The Polyline tab is found in the specification
between objects may change. dialog for closed polyline-based objects
throughout the program, and indicates the
• Specify the Number of Objects in the length of the polyline’s Perimeter, its
text field to the right. enclosed Area, and its Volume.
3 Object Orientation - Specify how or if
the objects on the path are rotated. Spline Tab
• Specify the Angle that the distributed The Spline tab has a single option and is only
objects should be placed at. available when the selected object is a spline.
• Select Absolute Angle to rotate the See “Splines” on page 908.
objects to the specified Angle as mea-
sured from an imaginary horizontal line
drawn from the origin towards the right.
• Select Relative Angle to rotate each
object relative to the edge of the polyline
or spline that it is located on.
• Select Random Angle to rotate the
objects in the region at a variety of ran- New Segment Angle - Specify the angle
dom angles. between line segments that are used to draw
the spline. Specifying a smaller angle makes
4 Object Positioning - Specify the the spline smoother. Specify a larger angle to
positioning of the distributed objects draw the spline faster.
relative to the path itself.
• Specify the Side Offset, the distance that Selected Line Tab
the objects are offset to the side of the
The Selected Line tab is available when the
path, using positive or negative numbers
selected edge of the region or path is a line as
to offset to one side or the other.
opposed to an arc. See “Selected Edge” on
• Specify the Start Offset, the distance that page 145.
the first object on the path is offset from
the starting point of the line, polyline or Moving the Start of a line segment moves the
spline. end of the previous connected line, if there is
one. Similarly, moving the End of a line
• Check Alternate Sides to position segment moves move the start of the next
objects on alternating sides of the path, connected line, if there is one.
creating a stepped pattern.
The settings on the Line tab are found in a
variety of specification dialogs throughout
the program. See “Line Tab” on page 888.

670
CAFull_RM.book Page 671 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Selected Arc Tab Line Style Tab

The Selected Line tab is available when the The settings on the Line Style tab are found
selected edge of the region or path is an arc in a variety of specification dialogs
as opposed to a line. See “Selected Edge” on throughout the program. See “Line Style
page 145. Tab” on page 889.
The settings on the Arc tab are found in a
variety of specification dialogs throughout Fill Style Tab
the program. See “Arc Tab” on page 896. The settings on the Fill Style tab are found in
a variety of specification dialogs throughout
the program. See “Fill Style Tab” on page
902.

Fireplaces
A masonry fireplace can be placed in Built into a Wall
or away from a wall by selecting
Build> Fireplace and then clicking in the To place a masonry fireplace in a wall, select
drawing area. Build> Fireplace and click on a wall. A
• If created in a wall, it is considered a wall fireplace is created with the outside of the
opening and can be moved or resized like fireplace flush with the outside of the wall.
a window or door.
• If created away from a wall, it moves and
resizes similar to a cabinet.
A selection of prefabricated metal fireplaces
is also available from the Fixtures (Interior)
library category. These can be framed in with Select the fireplace to display four edit
standard walls. See “Libraries” on page 682. handles located along the wall.
The display of fireplaces is controlled in the
Layer Display Options dialog. See “Layer
Display Options Dialog” on page 121.
Fireplaces are edited, moved, resized, and
deleted similar other objects. See “Editing
Objects” on page 130. Click the diamond-shaped Depth handle and
drag toward the outside of the wall. The
fireplace will stop when the firebox front is
flush with the inside edge of the wall.

671
CAFull_RM.book Page 672 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Fireplace Specification Dialog

Unlike fireplaces placed in walls, free-

standing fireplace have ten edit handles when
selected and may be rotated, resized, or
moved in any direction, similar to the way
CAD boxes can. See “Editing Box-Based
Objects” on page 164.

In 3D views, fireplaces placed in walls Free-standing fireplaces can be selected and

display five edit handles: a Resize handle replaced with a symbol from the library by
along each edge and a Move handle at the clicking the Replace From Library edit
center. button. See “Replace From Library” on page
693.
Fireplaces always face the interior when
placed on an exterior wall. When placing a
fireplace in an interior wall, click on the edge Fireplace Foundations
of the wall that you want the fireplace to If a fireplace is added on the first floor before
face. The fireplace is created with the firebox building the foundation plan, a foundation
on the same side as the wall edge you clicked will be generated under the fireplace when
on to create it. the foundation is built.

Freestanding The fireplace foundation is the same material

type as the original fireplace, but will not
To place a free-standing masonry fireplace, have a firebox or a hearth. This fireplace
select Build> Fireplace and click in an foundation may be edited or deleted as
open area away from a wall. desired. A firebox and hearth can be added in
the Fireplace Specification dialog.

Fireplace Specification Dialog

Select a masonry fireplace and click the objects in selection group must be either
Open Object edit button to display the placed in a wall or free-standing.
Fireplace Specification dialog. Multiple Dimensions in this dialog here must be
fireplaces can be group-selected, but all entered in whole inches. Fractions and
decimals are not accepted.

672
CAFull_RM.book Page 673 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

General Tab

1 3

1 Specify the dimensions of the fireplace • Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance
and hearth. from the floor to the bottom of the hearth.
• Height - Specify the height of the fire-
place. 2 Check Suppress Dimensions to turn
off dimensions when this fireplace is
• Width - Specify the width of the fire- selected. This option is only available for a
place. fireplace placed in a wall.
• Depth - Specify the depth of the fire-
3 Add for Rough Opening - Specify the
place. amount to add to Each Side, the Top
• Hearth Depth - Specify the Hearth and the Bottom for the window’s framed
Depth. This is measured from the front of rough opening. These options are only
the fireplace out into the room. To elimi- available for a fireplace placed in a wall.
nate the hearth altogether, enter a zero for
this value. 4 The preview image of the fireplace
updates as changes are made. Press the
• Hearth Height - Specify the height of Tab key to update to the most recent change.
the hearth relative to the floor in that
room.

673
CAFull_RM.book Page 674 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Library Fireplaces

Firebox Tab

1
2

1 No Firebox - Select the check box to from the center. A value of 0 centers the
eliminate the firebox from the fireplace. firebox in the fireplace.
This is often used in the foundation plan to
Offset to Left/Right - Choose to offset the
provide a solid matching base for the
firebox to the left or to the right.
fireplace on the first floor.

2 Set the dimensions of the firebox. Layer Tab

For information about the Layer tab, see
• Enter the firebox’s Height and Width. “Layer Tab” on page 125.
• Enter the Depth of the firebox.
Materials Tab
3 Offset - Enter the number of inches (or
mm) to offset the firebox, measured For information about the Materials tab, see
“Materials Tab” on page 709.

Library Fireplaces
A variety of different fireplace symbols are 682. The fireplaces in the Library behave just
available in library. See “Libraries” on page like other Library objects.

674
CAFull_RM.book Page 675 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Some fireplace symbols can be enclosed by

Always check the manufacturer’s prod- walls or positioned to project through a wall.
uct information for the framing and
clearance requirements of the fireplace unit
you plan to use, and design your plan
accordingly

Placing a Library Fireplace

A variety of fireplace symbols are available
in the library, See “Creating Objects” on
page 141.
Flush fireplace are designed to snap to wall
surfaces. Open Front Library fireplace
projecting through a 4" wall

Chimneys
Chimneys for • Place a soffit in position over the chim-
Masonry Fireplaces ney chase, resize it to match, then extend
the soffit in a 3D view using the same
To create a chimney on a masonry fireplace method as extending a masonry fireplace.
• Define the chimney chase as a room area
1. Select the fireplace in a 3D view. using walls, making sure these walls are
2. Ctrl + drag the top edge of the chimney aligned between floors. The chimney
upward through all the floors and the chase “room” on the uppermost floor
roof until it is to the desired height. See should have a much higher ceiling than
“Unrestricted Movement” on page 178. the other rooms on that floor and should
also have no ceiling or roof. See “Room
3. When the chimney is approximately the Specification Dialog” on page 283.
correct height, select the fireplace, click
A selection of chimney tops is available in
the Open Object edit button, and
the library. In addition, custom chimney
type in the exact height.
caps can be made using soffits, polyline
solids or other primitive objects.
Chimney Chases & Caps
There are two ways to draw a chimney chase.

675
CAFull_RM.book Page 676 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 23:

Architectural
Blocks

An architectural block is a collection of Chapter Contents

individual 3D objects that are grouped • Architectural vs CAD Blocks
together so that they can be placed and • Creating Architectural Blocks
moved as a single object. Although blocked • Displaying Architectural Blocks
together, these objects retain many of their • Editing Architectural Blocks
own attributes, such as materials. • Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and
Components
Architectural blocks can also be exploded so
• Architectural Block Specification Dialog
that the individual sub-objects become
independent of one another.

676
CAFull_RM.book Page 677 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Architectural vs CAD Blocks

Just as there are two types of objects in Chief Knowing the differences between these two
Architect, architectural and CAD, there are types of blocks helps you decide which type
two types of blocks. See “Architectural vs of block can best meet your needs.
CAD Objects” on page 131.
A CAD block can include and also be nested
Architectural objects such as cabinets and in a larger block with CAD objects, text and
fixtures can be included in architectural dimensions, but cannot include or be blocked
blocks, while CAD objects such as lines, with architectural objects.
arcs, text and dimensions can be included in
An architectural block can include and also
CAD blocks. See “CAD Blocks” on page
be nested in a larger block with architectural
912.
objects, but cannot include or be blocked
with CAD objects, text or dimensions.

Creating Architectural Blocks

An architectural block is created by • Primitives and Polyline Solids
group-selecting multiple architectural • Molding Polylines
objects and then clicking the Make
Architectural Block edit button. • Roads, Driveways, Sidewalks
• Terrain Features and Terrain Modifiers
The following is a list of objects that can be
included in architectural blocks: Once blocked, the set of blocked objects is
• Cabinets (Base, Wall, Full Height) contained in a bounding box, indicating that
they are now an architectural block.
• Soffits, Shelves, Partitions
• Fixture/Furniture Symbols
• Hardware Symbols
• Millwork Symbols
• Geometric Shape Symbols
• Electrical objects
• Images
Architectural blocks can be created in any
• Custom Countertops & Counter Holes
view.
• Slabs & Foundation Slabs

677
CAFull_RM.book Page 678 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Architectural Blocks

Displaying Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be displayed in all You can control the appearence of the
views. The display of architectural blocks, bounding box by changing the layer
including their bounding box, is controlled in properties for the architectural block.
the Layer Display Options dialog. See
The label for an architectural block in floor
“Displaying Objects” on page 117.
plan view can be generated automatically,
You can select an architectural block and created manually, derived from the
click the Move to Front edit button to component code, or suppressed. See “Label
make that block display in front of other Tab” on page 681.
objects in the same drawng group, including The display of architectural blocks in
cabinets and some library symbols. See materials lists and schedules can be turned
“Move to Front of Group” on page 176. off completely. The block can appear as a
The sub-objects of a block can use the layer single unit or its sub-objects and components
attributes assigned to their current layer or can be listed separately. See “General Tab”
the layer attributes assigned to the block. See on page 680.
“General Tab” on page 680.

Editing Architectural Blocks

Architectural blocks can be selected and block has a label, it also has its own Move
edited in 2D and 3D views. See “Selecting handle.
Objects” on page 144.
Architectural blocks cannot be resized, but
the individual objects in the block can be.
Note: Moving an architectural block in 3D
view regenerates the view. If the architectural In the Specification Dialog
block contains terrain objects, the terrain is
rebuilt. Architectural blocks can be edited in their
specification dialog. See “Architectural
Once selected, an architectural block can be Block Specification Dialog” on page 680.
edited using its edit handles, edit toolbar
buttons, and specification dialog. See Using the Edit Tools
“Architectural Block Specification Dialog”
on page 680. A selected architectural block or blocks can
be edited in a variety of ways using the
Using the Edit Handles buttons on the edit toolbar. See “Edit Toolbar
Buttons” on page 1140.
A selected architectural block displays a
Move handle and a Rotate handle. If the

678
CAFull_RM.book Page 679 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Editing Sub-Objects Adding Architectural Blocks

The individual objects included in an to the Library
architectural block can also be selected and You can create your own architectural
edited. See “Architectural Blocks, Sub- blocks and save them in the library.
Objects, and Components” on page 679. See “Adding to the Library” on page 700.

Explode Architectural Block Note: If you open a plan that was created in
You can break an architectural block the Full version of Chief Architect in the Base
to make its objects independent. version and select an architectural block, you
cannot unblock it or edit its components.
Select the architectural block and click the
Explode Architectural Block edit button.

Architectural Blocks, Sub-Objects, and Components

An architectural block is composed of a • Explode the architectural block, select
group of sub-objects that have been blocked the sub-object, and click the Open
together. For example, a kitchen island Object edit button.
architectural block may consist of cabinets,
appliances, a custom countertop, and other • Select the sub-object while it is part of
accessories. the architectural block and click the

Each of the sub-objects in an architectural Open Object edit button. Some attri-
block may contain additional parts called butes may not be editable while the
components. The cabinets in a kitchen island, object is part of a block. See “Editing
for example, may contain handles, hinges, Architectural Blocks” on page 678.
and drawer glide.
To edit a sub-object
Architectural blocks can be treated as a
single unit in materials lists, ignoring sub- 1. Click the Select Objects button,
objects and their components. See “General then click on the sub-object that you
Tab” on page 680. would like to edit.
2. With the architectural block selected,
Sub-Objects
click the Select Next Object edit
Certain attributes of an architectural block button or press the Tab key.
can be edited at the sub-object level. A sub-
The selection switches to the individual
object can be edited by accessing its
object and it can be edited using its edit
specification dialog in either of two ways:
handles, edit toolbar and specification
dialog.

679
CAFull_RM.book Page 680 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The ability to edit an object as part of a block Components dialog lists all the sub-objects
may be more restricted than if the object that comprise an architectural block, as well
were independent. If more extensive editing as the components that make up each sub-
is required, the architectural block must be object.
exploded.
To open the Components dialog, select an
architectural block and click the
Components
Components edit button. See
You can view and/or modify the components “Components Dialog” on page 1062.
of an architectural block (or group of blocks)
through the Components dialog. The

Architectural Block Specification Dialog

The Architectural Block Specification Select an architectural block or group of
dialog controls the way architectural blocks architectural blocks and click the Open
display in floor plan view and in materials Object edit button to open the
lists and schedules. Architectural Block Specification dialog
for the selected block(s).

General Tab

1
2
3
4

1 Display Bounding Box - Check this to the architectural block. The box uses the
show the bounding box of the objects in Architectural Blocks Layer settings.

680
CAFull_RM.book Page 681 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2 Display Sub-Objects Using Block Note: "Other" must be checked in the Sched-
Layer - Check this box to apply the
display properties for the architectural block ule Specification dialog for the architectural
layer as specified in the Layer Display block to appear in the schedule. See “Text
Tab” on page 1040.
Options dialog to all of the sub-objects.

If this box is not checked, all the sub-objects Layer Tab

display according to the display properties
set for their current layer. See “Displaying For information about the Layer tab, see
Objects” on page 117. “Layer Tab” on page 125.

3 Ignore Sub-Objects - Check this box Label Tab

to treat the architectural block as a
single unit in materials lists and schedules. The Label Tab is available for a variety of
This also turns off sub-objects in floor plan different objects. For more information, see
view, displaying only the bounding box. “Label Tab” on page 1045.

4 Block Schedule - Specify which

schedule the architectural block appears Note: Labels for architectural blocks only dis-
in when Ignore Sub-Objects is checked. play in floor plan view.
Select None to exclude the architectural
block from all schedules.

681
CAFull_RM.book Page 682 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 24:

Libraries

Chief Architect’s library contains thousands Chapter Contents

of symbols, materials, and images that can • The Library Browser
enhance any plan. Anything that you want to • Library Browser Contents
incorporate in your building design that • Selection and Preview Panes
cannot be made with Chief Architect’s • Library Search Dialog
architectural and drafting tools can be found • Select Library Object Dialog
in the library, created or imported and then • Placing Library Objects
saved in the library for future use. • Place Library Object Button
New library catalogs and enhancements are • Replace From Library
created by Chief Architect on a continuing • Displaying Library Objects
basis and are available for download. There • Editing Library Objects
are also third party developers who have • Library Objects and the Materials List
created their own libraries for Chief • Symbol Object Specification Dialogs
Architect that are available for purchase. • Editing Libraries
• Adding to the Library
• Importing and Exporting Library Content

682
CAFull_RM.book Page 683 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Library Browser

The Chief Architect Library Browser is
a repository of ready-to-use symbols,
images, and components that can be used in a 1
plan. Explore the contents, find what you’re
looking for, and place it in your plan. 2
To open the Library Browser:

• Select Library> Library Browser.

• Press Ctrl + L on your keyboard. 3
By default, the Library Browser is docked to
the right side of the program window, but can
be undocked or docked to another side. See
“Docking the Library and Project Browser”
4
on page 685.
The Library Browser window has three
adjustable sections: library directory pane,
selection pane, and preview pane. To adjust
the height or width of a section, place the 5
pointer over the split bar you want to move.
When the double-headed arrow displays, 1 Select the Library Browser tab to view
the Library Browser.
click and drag.
Select the Project Browser tab to view the
Project Browser. See “Project Browser” on
page 924.

2 The library directory displays here. The

overall structure is:

• Library Category

• Library Folder 1
• Library Subfolder 1
• Library Object 1
• Library Subfolder 2

• Library Folder 2 and so on.

683
CAFull_RM.book Page 684 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

The Library Browser

Navigate the hierarchy using the tree view, Click the Library Search button to
by clicking in the view window, or by using open the Library Search dialog. See
the keyboard. “Library Search Dialog” on page 687.
You can add your own custom objects to the Click the Plant Chooser button to
User Libraries category and organize them in open the Plant Chooser dialog. See
folders that you create to suit your needs. See “Plant Chooser Dialog” on page 627.
“Adding to the Library” on page 700.
Click the Online Content button to
3 The Selection pane shows thumbnails launch your default web browser to the
for the highlighted item in the directory Chief Architect Web site, where links to third
tree view. Move your cursor over an item in party content developers can be found.
the selection pane to see a tool tip with the
Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
item’s name. See “The Selection Pane” on
button to toggle the Selection window
page 686.
on and off.
If you have Scrollable List checked in your
Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
preference settings, a scroll bar is present at
button to toggle the Preview window
the bottom of the selection pane. See
on and off.
“Library Browser Panel” on page 76.
Click the Toggle Display button to
4 The Preview pane displays a 3D or switch between Standard Render and
alternate view of the selected object.
Vector View images of a selected library
You can display preview images in either
object in the Preview pane. See “Rendered
Standard Render or Vector View style. See
and Vector Views” on page 742.
“The Preview Pane” on page 687.
Click the Preferences button to open
You can control the configuration of the
the Library Browser panel of the
Library Browser panes in the Preferences
Preferences dialog, where properties of the
dialog. See “Library Browser Panel” on page
Library Browser are controlled. See “Library
76.
Browser Panel” on page 76.
Select an object by clicking on the desired
object in the pane, then click in the plan to Using the Contextual Menus
place it. Once placed, the object can be
selected, moved, or edited. All placed objects Right-click on an item in the Library
are saved with the plan. Browser to open a contextual menu
displaying options related to that item.
You can work with the Library Browser
open. To close the Library Browser, click the
Close button or double-click on an object
in the Selection pane.

5 The toolbar beneath the tree view aids

in navigating and displaying windows.

684
CAFull_RM.book Page 685 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Once undocked, the Library and Project

Browser can be moved by clicking and
dragging the title bar.
When moved to the top, bottom, or side of
your screen, it automatically docks in a
vertical or horizontal orientation, depending
on its location.
• Disable Docking in the Preferences
dialog prevents the Library and Project
Browser from docking to the side of the
screen. See “Library Browser Panel” on
page 76.
• Holding down the Ctrl key prevents the
Library and Project Browser from dock-
Docking the Library ing while moving.
and Project Browser • If you close the program with the Library
Initially, the Library and Project Browser is and Project Browser docked, it displays
docked to the right side of the Chief in the same position the next time the
Architect program window. program is opened.

To undock the browser window, double-click To return the browser window to its original
the striped grab bar. You can also undock the position and size, click the Restore Position/
browser window by clicking on the grab bar Size button on the Library Browser Panel of
and dragging it into the center of the program the Preferences dialog.
window.

Library Browser Contents

The Library Browser’s contents are divided Select the Help menu and choose Download
into five categories: Chief Architect Library Catalogs to view additional libraries
Libraries, Manufacturer Libraries, User available for download.
Libraries, Import and Export.
Manufacturer Libraries
Chief Architect Libraries
The Manufacturer Libraries category
The Chief Architect Libraries category contains a variety of name-brand products,
contains a wide selection of 3D symbols, from materials to fixtures to CAD blocks.
images, CAD objects, and materials.
For users who participate in the Support and
Software Assurance program, manufacturer

685
CAFull_RM.book Page 686 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Selection and Preview Panes

content can be downloaded from the Chief and organized in a manner that best suits
Architect website and then imported into the your work style.
program. See “Adding to the Library” on
Library content can be imported in either of
page 700.
two ways:
User Libraries • Symbols or groups of symbols can be
imported using the Import 3D Symbol
The User Libraries category contains your dialog. See “Import 3D Symbol Dialog”
custom library files. Here, you can create and on page 968.
organize custom library folders and imported
• Entire Chief Architect library files can be
items such as symbols, CAD blocks, images,
imported using the Import Library Data
backdrops, line styles and materials.
dialog.
Import Libraries Export Libraries
The Import category contains any symbols,
The Export category is used to organize
images, line styles, backdrops and backdrop
library items so that they can be exported as a
libraries that you have recently imported into
Chief Architect library file and either shared
the program. See “Importing and Exporting
with other users or imported into the program
Library Content” on page 702.
on another computer. See “Importing and
Items in the Import category can be selected Exporting Library Content” on page 702.
and moved into the User Libraries category

Selection and Preview Panes

The Selection and Preview panes allow you If you have Scrollable List checked in your
to view and select the items in the tree list. preference settings, a scroll bar is present at
the bottom of the selection pane. See
The display of these preview panes can be
“Library Browser Panel” on page 76.
controlled in the Preferences dialog. See
“Library Browser Panel” on page 76. When you click on a thumbnail in the
selection pane to select it, a rendered 3D
The Selection Pane preview of the item displays in the Preview
pane. You can move your cursor into the
When an item is selected in the Library drawing area to place the selected object.
Browser tree list, a basic three-dimensional
line-based representation of the item displays Click the Show/Hide Selection Pane
in the Selection pane. If the selected item is button to toggle the Selection window
a folder, a thumbnail drawing representing on and off.
each item in the folder displays; if the
selected item is a single object, a drawing of
that object displays.

686
CAFull_RM.book Page 687 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

The Preview Pane by clicking in the Selection pane or by right-

clicking on the Preview pane and select
When an individual library item is selected, Reset Preview.
either in the tree list or the Selection pane, a
rendered picture of the object displays in the Click the Show/Hide Preview Pane
Preview pane. button to toggle the Preview window
on and off.
If the selected object is a 3D symbol, you can
rotate and zoom in or out on the Preview Click the Toggle Display button to
using the mouse. Two-dimensional objects, switch between Standard Render and
such as CAD Blocks or Line Styles cannot be Vector View images of a selected library
adjusted in this manner in the Preview pane. object in the Preview pane. See “Rendered
and Vector Views” on page 742.
If you have rotated a view in the Preview
pane, you can restore the default angle either

Library Search Dialog

The Library Search dialog can be used window and the Select Library Object
to search the library for items that meet dialog, to open this dialog.
your search parameters. Click the Library
You can also access this dialog by selecting
Search button, found in the Library Browser
Library> Library Search .

687
CAFull_RM.book Page 688 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Library Search Dialog

5
1
6

1 Search Text - Enter a word or words to • Check Include Folders to include library
use in your search for a name in the folders in your search.
library.
Substrings are not included. For example, The Library Search dialog remembers
searching for the word “windows” will not the last valid search whenever it is
produce “window” as a search result. On the accessed.
other hand, searching for the word “window”
will produce “windows” as a search result. 2 Check Filter by Style, then select one
or more architectural styles to restrict
• Check Match Keyword to match the the search results to objects of that style. If
entered word with an object’s search no styles are checked, search results will not
attributes. See “Search Attributes” on be restricted. See “Search Attributes” on
page 689. page 689.
• Check Match Entire Word to match the
entire word or words with the complete 3 Check Filter by Type, then select one
or more categories of library item to
name of the object.
include in your search.

688
CAFull_RM.book Page 689 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

• Click Select All to select all of the cate- performing a Library Search. See “Library
gories in the list. Search Dialog” on page 687.
• Click Clear All to clear all of the catego-
ries. To associate keywords with unlocked library
objects
4 Click the Search button to search the
library using the parameters you 1. Right-click on an object in the User
selected. Libraries, Import or Export category.
2. Select Search Attributes from the con-
The Library Search dialog remembers textual menu.
the last valid search whenever it is
accessed.

5 When the search is complete, the

Number of Items that match your
description displays here.

6 A scrollable list of items in the search

results displays here.
• Click on an item in the list to open the
Library Browser to that item’s location.
• Use the scroll bars or arrow keys to scroll
through the search results.

The Library Search dialog remembers 3. Any searchable Keywords associated

the last valid search whenever it is with the object display in the list on the
accessed.
left. Type in any additional keywords.

Search Attributes 4. Check the box beside any Styles that

you want to associate with the object.
The Search Attributes dialog lists the
5. Click OK to close the dialog and apply
keywords and styles associated with a
your changes.
selected library object. Keywords and styles
can be used to locate the object when

Select Library Object Dialog

The Select Library Object dialog is a modal button to select and apply items from the
version of the Library Browser that is library to the object currently opened for
accessible from object specification dialogs specification. See “Specification Dialogs” on
that display the button. Click this page 33.

689
CAFull_RM.book Page 690 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Placing Library Objects

The Select Library Object dialog and its

individual panes can be resized ; display
the Preview and Selection panes; and can
initiate a Library Search .
If the Select Library Object dialog is opened
by clicking the Library Material button on
The Select Library Object dialog only the Materials tab of any specification dialog
displays categories that are related to the (see“Materials Tab” on page 709), three
opened object. For example, this is how the additional options are available:
Select Library Object dialog displays when
accessed from Front tab of the Door • Click the New Library button to cre-
Specification dialog.
ate a new library in the Materials cate-
gory.

• Click the New Material button to

open the Define Material dialog and cre-
ate a new material.

• Click the Open Item button to open

the Define Material dialog for the
selected custom material in an unlocked
library. See “Define Material Dialog” on
page 719.
These three options are also found in the
New submenu of the contextual menu that
displays when you right-click an unlocked
library in the Library Browser. See “Using
the Contextual Menus” on page 684.
To make your selection, highlight the desired Click on the Use default material checkbox
object and click OK, or simply double-click to select the material which is currently in
on the object in the selection pane to close use as the default for that particular item in
the Select Library Object dialog. the plan.

Placing Library Objects

Library objects are subject to placement they are placed, for example, and some
restrictions based upon typical real-life library objects have additional requirements.
placement. Most library objects require
Library windows and doors, for example,
sufficient free space at the location where
must be placed in a wall just like standard

690
CAFull_RM.book Page 691 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

windows and doors, and some fixtures are is located at the point where they are first
designed to be placed in cabinets. placed.
Library symbols have placement restrictions • A few objects, notably some light fix-
that are determined when the symbol is tures, will mount on the bottom of a wall
created but can be changed later. See cabinet or on the ceiling.
“Symbols vs. Native Objects” on page 695 • In addition, some objects will attach to a
and “Symbol Specification Dialog” on page wall if one is nearby.
974.
If a warning message displays when placing To place a stand alone library object
a library object or symbol, it will indicate
where the object can be placed. 1. Click on an object in the tree view or
selection pane of the Library Browser to
There are three main categories of items select it for placement. See “The Library
available in the Library Browser: Browser” on page 683.
• Stand-alone objects that can be placed 2. Move your cursor into the view area and
directly into a plan. Examples include notice that it displays an icon indicating
cabinet modules, furnishings and images. the type of object selected instead of an
• 3D objects designed to be inserted into arrow icon.
another 3D object. Examples include 3. Click to place the selected object at that
cabinet fixtures, windows and doors. location.
Some items, such as cabinet doors and
4. Continue clicking to place as many
fixtures, can be inserted into another
instances of the selected object as
object or placed as stand-alone objects.
needed. When you are finished, click the
• Materials, molding profiles and line
Select Objects button.
styles, which cannot stand alone and
must be assigned or applied to another Once a stand-alone object has been placed, it
object. can be edited in a variety of ways. See
“Editing Library Objects” on page 694.
Stand-Alone Objects
Most library categories contain objects that
Inserted Objects
can be selected in the Library Browser and Some objects cannot stand alone and must be
placed directly in a 2D or 3D view. placed into other objects in a plan. For
• Most stand-alone objects are designed to example, doors and windows must be
rest on the floor or terrain. inserted into a wall, while some appliances
and plumbing fixtures must be placed inside
• Some objects will rest on top of a cabinet, a base cabinet. See “Doors” on page 292,
shelf, furniture or roof plane object if one “Windows” on page 316 and “Cabinets” on
page 546.

691
CAFull_RM.book Page 692 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Place Library Object Button

To insert a library object • Using the specification dialog of the con-

taining object. See “Select Library Object
1. Click on an object in the tree view or Dialog” on page 689.
selection pane of the Library Browser to • By selecting the item in the library and
select it for placement. See “The Library then clicking on the containing object in
Browser” on page 683. floor plan view.
2. Move your cursor into the drawing area. • Materials can be assigned to objects
3. Click on the object into which you wish directly from the library in 3D views by
to insert the selected library item. The by selecting the material and then
library item is inserted into the object. clicking on an object’s surface. See “The
4. Continue clicking to place as many Material Painter” on page 707.
instances of the selected item as needed. • Moldings and Line Styles can also be
When you are finished, click the Select added to a plan by selecting the desired
Objects button. library item, then clicking and dragging a
line in the drawing area. The result is
either a Molding Line or CAD Line,
Assigned Items depending on the selected library item.
Some library items, such as moldings and See “Molding Polylines” on page 535.
materials, are not objects in themselves but
can be applied to objects in a variety of ways.

Place Library Object Button

The Place Library Object button can
be added to your toolbar and used for
quick access and placement of frequently
used library items.
1
If the Place Library Object button has
not yet been assigned a library object, click it 2
once to open the Library Object Button
Specification dialog.

Double-click a Place Library Object

button that has been assigned a library object
to open the Library Object Button
Specification dialog.

1 Click the Library button to open the

Select Library Object dialog and

692
CAFull_RM.book Page 693 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

assign a library object to the button. If a from two automatically generated button
library object has already been assigned, icons or click Browse to browse your
click this button to assign a new library computer for a different icon.
object. See “Select Library Object Dialog”
on page 689. Up to 100 Place Library Object buttons
can be added to the same toolbar, each
2 When a library object has been assigned a different object.
selected, assign a button icon. Choose

Replace From Library

The Replace From Library edit Select Replace Identical Objects in Room
button is available for most selected to replace all objects that are in the same
objects. Click this button to open the room as, and are identical to, the currently
Replace From Library dialog and replace selected object.
the selected object, and others like it if you
Select Replace Identical Objects on Floor
choose, with an object of the same type from
to replace all objects that are on the same
the library.
floor as, and are identical to, the currently
selected object.
A few things to remember about Replace
1 From Library :
• Works in floor plan and 3D views.

2 • The replacement option Replace

Identical Objects in Room is not avail-
able for doors and windows.

Replace From Library is available for

any object that can be stored in the Library
1 Click the Library button to open the Browser and can be selected, including:
Select Library Object dialog and select
an object to use as a replacement. The name architectural objects, architectural blocks,
of the object that is currently selected as a electrical objects and image objects.
replacement displays above. Objects that cannot be replaced using this
feature include materials, backdrops, and
2 Select one of the Replacement items assigned to other objects, such as
Options.
materials.
Select Replace Selected Object to replace
only the currently selected object.

693
CAFull_RM.book Page 694 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Displaying Library Objects

Displaying Library Objects

The display options available for library Object Labels
objects depend on the type of object in
question, as well as the view. Fixtures, Furnishings, Geometric Shapes,
Hardware, Millwork, Architectural Blocks
and Plants can display labels in floor plan
In Floor Plan View
view when the appropriate layer is set to
All library objects except materials, doors display in the Layer Display Options dialog.
and drawers applied to cabinets, and For example, fixture labels are placed on the
backdrops can display in floor plan view. “Fixtures, Labels” layer.
Library objects are represented in floor plan
The size of labels for any objects with
view by 2D CAD blocks that resemble the
schedules can be specified in the Schedule
size and shape of the object when viewed
Specification dialog. Label size for objects
from above. To learn how to specify the
without schedules is 2 1/2” (60 mm). See
symbol that represents an object, see “2D
“Label Tab” on page 1042.
Block Tab” on page 978.
As with other architectural objects, the In 3D Views
display of library objects is controlled by
layer in the Layer Display Options dialog. All library objects except CAD blocks can
Each library category has its own layer. See display in 3D views.
“Layer Display Options Dialog” on page By default, images rotate to face the camera
121. in 3D views. For information about turning
Symbols belong to one of three drawing off image rotation, see “Image Specification
groups that influence which objects display Dialog” on page 936.
in front of others in floor plan view. You can Cabinets from Architectural Blocks and
click the Move to Front of Group edit Cabinet Modules library categories and
button to display a selected symbol in front Doors from the Doors category may also
of over symbols or architectural blocks. See display door opening indicators in Vector
“Drawing Groups” on page 176. Views when the “Opening Indicators” layer
is turned on. See “Layer Display Options
Dialog” on page 121.

Editing Library Objects

Library objects placed in a plan or layout can information, see “Selecting Objects” on page
be selected individually or as a group, like 144.
other objects in Chief Architect. For more
Once selected, library objects can be edited
in a variety of ways using dimensions, the

694
CAFull_RM.book Page 695 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

edit handles, the edit toolbar buttons and the like other objects. See “General Plan
specification dialog. See “Symbol Object Defaults Dialog” on page 68.
Specification Dialogs” on page 696.
When a furnishing or fixture symbol is
selected in floor plan view or on the top
Symbols vs. Native Objects surface in a 3D view, up to ten edit handles
A symbol is an object that is based on a 3D display. They are the Move handle at the
.dxf, .dwg, .obj, .3ds or .skp file that has center, the Rotate handle just outside the
been imported into Chief Architect. front indicator (a V) and a Resize handle on
each edge and at each corner.
Native objects are those placed into the plan
using Chief Architect’s standard tools, such When a symbol is selected on a side in a
as Doors , and Cabinets . Native objects do cross section/elevation or 3D view, it
not have a 3D .dxf, .dwg, .obj, .3ds or .skp displays five edit handles: the Move handle
file associated with them and are not and a Resize handle on each edge.
symbols. Symbols cannot be concentrically resized,

Remove Manufacturer Lock even when the Concentric edit behavior

is enabled. See “Edit Behaviors” on page
Manufacturer symbols are limited in 137.
the ways that they can be edited. After
The labels of library cabinets, electrical,
such a symbol is placed in a plan, select it
furnishings and fixtures, when displayed,
and click the Remove Manufacturer Lock
have a separate Move edit handle that
edit button to remove the manufacturer data
displays when the object is selected.
so that it can be edited like other symbols.
Fixtures and furniture placed in a plan are
Using Edit Handles subject to bumping/pushing behavior when
moved. See “Bumping/Pushing” on page
Most library symbols are box-based objects 178.
and can be edited as such. See “Editing Box-
Based Objects” on page 164. Depending on
the type of view and the surface selected, the
Deleting Built-in Fixtures
edit handles a symbol displays will vary. and Appliances
To resize Fixtures and Furniture, you must A fixture installed into the front of a cabinet
check Fixture/Furniture Resize Enabled in becomes a cabinet face item, like a door or
the Plan Defaults dialog. When this option is drawer. It can be resized or deleted like other
checked, these library objects have edit face items in the Cabinet Specification
handles when selected and can be resized dialog. See “Front Tab” on page 565.

695
CAFull_RM.book Page 696 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Library Objects and the Materials List

Library Objects and the Materials List

Most library objects are counted in the
Materials List, as are any comments added to Note: Although the size and materials of
the Components dialog for a library object. many library objects can be edited, these
See “Components Dialog” on page 1062. changes are not reflected in the Materials
List.

Symbol Object Specification Dialogs

The Fixture, Furniture, Geometric Shape, Object edit button opens the Furniture
Hardware and Millwork Specification
Specification dialog.
dialogs all display the same options. The
actual name of the dialog is determined by Many library symbol objects can also be
the type of object currently opened for edited in the Symbol Specification dialog.
specification. See “Symbol Specification Dialog” on page
974.
For example, selecting a library object from
the Interiors library and clicking the Open

General Tab

1
2

1 The Name of the selected object displays here.

696
CAFull_RM.book Page 697 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

2 Specification - Define the size and refrigerator. This option has no effect on
height above the floor of the object. objects that are symmetrical.
• Enter the Height for the object.
4 A preview of the library object displays
• Enter the Width of the object. here and updates with changes.
• Enter the Depth of the object.
5 Show Color - Check this box to display
• Floor to Bottom - Enter the distance the preview of the object in color.
from the floor to the bottom of the object.
A value of zero makes the object rest on Layer Tab
the floor. For information about the Layer tab, see
• Check Follow Terrain if you want the “Layer Tab” on page 125.
object to follow the surface of the terrain
when it is placed outside a building. Materials Tab
• If the selected symbol is ceiling mounted, For information about the Materials tab, see
Height Above Ceiling will be available “Materials Tab” on page 709.
instead of Floor to Bottom. Specify the
selected object’s height above the ceiling.
Label Tab
Enter a negative value to offset the sym-
bol below the ceiling, or uncheck Follow For information about the Label tab, see
Ceiling if you prefer to specify the “Label Tab” on page 1045.
object’s Floor to Bottom height instead.
• Reset - Click to reset the symbol’s origi- Manufacturer Tab
nal, unmodified size. If the selected symbol or material was copied
from the Manufacturers category, the
3 Reverse Symbol - Check this box to Manufactuer’s tab lists contact information
reverse the object’s appearance, so that
features on its left are positioned on its right, about the manufacturer. See “Manufacturer
and vice versa. This turns a right-hand Libraries” on page 685.
refrigerator, for example, into a left-hand

Editing Libraries
Most library folders in the Library Browser
are locked and cannot be deleted, moved, An individual library object in a locked
renamed, or modified. library can be edited if you first copy it
into an unlocked library.
User-created library folders and objects,
however, are unlocked and can be moved, Preferences
copied, deleted, and renamed.
Click the Preferences button at the
bottom of the Library Browser to open

697
CAFull_RM.book Page 698 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Editing Libraries

the Preferences dialog, where display same name, it is best to use short, descriptive
properties for the Library Browser can be and unique names.
controlled. See “Library Browser Panel” on
page 76. Moving Folders and
Library Objects
Expand/Collapse All
Unlocked library folders and objects can be
When a Category, Library or Folder level moved to new locations in the Library
item is selected in the tree view of the Browser provided that the destination is an
Library Browser, Expand All and Collapse unlocked library. Folders and library objects
All are available in the Library and are organized alphabetically within each
contextual menus, allowing you to expand or hierarchy.
contract its contents in the tree view.
To move an unlocked item to a different
location, select it in the tree list, then click
Copy Library List
and drag it to the new location in the list.
To make a copy of the list of all library
Folders able to accept additions highlight as
objects, select a folder in tree view and
the file is moved. Release the mouse button
choose Library> Copy Library List, then
to relocate the selected library item.
paste the entire library heirarchy as text into
a text program such as Notepad or Text
Editor. Copying Folders and
Library Objects
Renaming Libraries To copy a Folder or Library Object, right-
Unlocked library folders and the objects click on it in the Library Browser and select
within them can be renamed. There are Copy from the contextual menu. Click on a
several ways to rename a selected, unlocked new location in the tree view and select
library item: Edit> Paste to paste a copy in the new
location or right-click and select Paste from
• Right-click on the item, select Rename the contextual menu.
from the contextual menu, and type a
new name. You can also copy items by dragging and
dropping them into an unlocked library
• Press F2 on your keyboard and type a
folder.
new name.
• Click once on the item, pause for a Library Categories cannot be added, copied,
moment, then click a second time, then moved or deleted.
type a new name.
Components
Library names are case-sensitive and can
contain up to 63 characters. While you can The display of architectural library objects in
have more than one library item that uses the the Materials List is affected by information
in the Components dialog. In the Library

698
CAFull_RM.book Page 699 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Browser tree view, right click to highlight

and select an unlocked symbol in the Library Changes made to library objects are
Browserand choose the Components option permanent and immediate. They cannot
to open the Components dialog . See be undone, so use care when modifying your
libraries. You should create backups of all
“Editing Library Objects” on page 694. your library files (*.alb) before making any
Once placed in a plan, many objects have a modifications.

Components edit tool that allows you to

make changes to that object’s Components
Keyboard Commands
without affecting the symbol in the library. The Library Browser can be navigated using
See “Components Dialog” on page 1062. the arrow keys on your keyboard.
Terrain objects, CAD blocks, moldings, • The right and left arrow keys expand and
images, backdrops, and materials do not collapse folders.
display in the Materials List. • The up and down keys change which
library object is currently selected.
Open Symbol • Select an item in an unlocked library and
Any image, material, plant image,or symbol press F2 to rename it.
in an Unlocked library can be edited from • Select an item in an unlocked library and
the Library Browser menu. press Delete to delete it.
To open the Symbol Specification dialog, If you have Scrollable List selected in the
click on a symbol name in the tree view of Preferences dialog, pressing the Tab key
the Library Browser and select Library> switches focus between the tree view and the
Open. See “Symbol Specification Dialog” selection pane. Use your mouse to select an
on page 974. object for placement. See “Library Browser
Panel” on page 76.
Deleting Libraries
If you have Tiled To Fit Window selected
Unlocked libraries and the folders and library instead, pressing the Tab key switches focus
objects within them can be deleted in any of between the tree view and the selection pane.
three ways: You can then use the arrow keys to select a
• Select it in the Library Browser and library object within the selection pane.
choose Library> Delete Object.
• Right-click on it and choose Delete from
the contextual menu.
• Press the Delete key on your keyboard.

699
CAFull_RM.book Page 700 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Adding to the Library

Adding to the Library

New libraries, folders, and library objects Adding a New Object
can be added to the Library Browser. Library
objects are always placed in alphabetical New materials, images, plant images and line
order within their heirarchy. styles can be created in an unlocked library
folder. Right-click on the folder, select New>
Most libraries shipped with Chief Architect from the contextual menu, then select the
are locked and cannot be edited, indicated type of item you wish to create from the
by a small padlock on the folder; however, submenu.
you can copy a locked library, and paste it as
an unlocked file or entire folder into the User Nearly any object imported into a plan,
Libraries category. The newly created copy converted into a symbol or placed from the
can then be edited. Library Browser can be added to the library.
• Check Add to Library in the Import 3D
Additional unlocked libraries can also be
Symbol dialog. See “Importing 3D
added to the User Libraries category,
Symbols” on page 967.
allowing you to customize the organization
of your user library. • Check Add to Library in the Convert to
Symbol dialog. See “Convert to Symbol”
Unlocked libraries are saved in the Chief on page 987.
Architect Data folder on your computer. See
“Chief Architect Data” on page 44. • Select an object in your plan and click the
Add to Library edit button.
Adding a New Folder In addition, some Chief Architect objects
New folders can be added to an unlocked that are not symbols, such as cabinets,
library category or folder by right-clicking windows, doorways, CAD blocks, molding
on an unlocked library or folder and selecting profiles, architectural blocks, and terrain
New> Folder from the contextual menu. objects can be added to the library. See
“Symbols vs. Native Objects” on page 695.
A new folder initially named “Untitled” is
created. Some objects, notably cabinets and doors
with custom door styles, have other library
objects inserted into them. See “Inserted
Objects” on page 691. You can choose to add
the containing object to the library, or the
inserted object:

• Click the Add to Library edit button

to add the containing object to the Import
library category with the inserted object
included.
An object created using a tool within

700
CAFull_RM.book Page 701 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

Chief Architect will automatically be the window you are working in.
added to the Import category using the
name of that tool, whereas a symbol
You can create digital photos of a build-
imported will automatically use the Sym- ing site for use as a backdrop.
bol Name. These objects can be renamed
after adding them to the Library, either To add a backdrop to the library
before or after moving them to their
appropriate user created folder in the
User Libraries category. See “Renaming 1. Select File> Import> Backdrop to
Libraries” on page 698. open the Import Backdrop File dialog,
which is similar to the Import Picture
• Click the Add to Library As edit File dialog. See “Importing Pictures” on
button to choose which symbol category page 940.
to add the object to. Depending on your 2. Browse to an image file on your com-
choice, either the inserted object is added puter, select it, and click Open. This
to the Import library category, or the con- backdrop can now be found in the My
taining object with the inserted one Backdrops library.
included.
You can also create a new backdrop by
Adding Materials and copying and pasting an image into Chief
Architect or by using the Screen Capture
Images to the Library
tools. See “Copying and Pasting Objects” on
Chief Architect can use materials and images page 191 and “Creating Screen Captures” on
in a variety of file formats and provides page 946.
several means of adding new material and
image files to the library. For more Folders in the Backdrops category can-
information, see “Creating Materials” on not have the forward slash “/” character.
page 712, “Managing Plan Materials” on
page 717, “Images” on page 933, and Bonus Catalogs
“Adding Images to the Library” on page 934.
Chief Architect periodically posts new and
Adding Backdrops updated Chief Architect library catalogs
to the Library available for download. Select Help>
Download Library Catalogs from the
Backdrops are images that display behind the
menu to launch your Internet browser to the
model in 3D views. See “3D Backdrops” on
Chief Architect Web site.
page 756.
New backdrops can be created using a Legacy Library Conversion
variety of graphic file formats. Backdrops
are automatically adjusted to fit the window If you have any custom libraries created in
size, so they look best when they are created Chief Architect X1, the initial startup of
with the same height to width proportions as Chief Architect X2 will give you the option

701
CAFull_RM.book Page 702 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Importing and Exporting Library Content

to convert these libraries for use in Chief 4. Click on the Open button to import
Architect X2. See “Legacy Library these prior version third party .alb files
Conversion” on page 11 of the User’s Guide. into the Import category.
You can also convert legacy .alb files by 5. Click and drag these files or folders into
selecting Library> Convert Legacy (.alb) the appropriate folder that you have cre-
Library Files. ated for them in your User Libraries cat-
egory.
To convert legacy library files
Third Party Libraries
1. Select Library> Convert Legacy (.alb)
There are a variety of third party sources for
Library Files.
3D symbols, textures and other items that
2. In the Select a Legacy Library File may be of use in Chief Architect. Some
Folder dialog, select one or more .alb sources even provide this content in .alb file
files that you want to bring in to Chief format, which was the library file format
Architect X2. used by Chief Architect versions 8.0 through
3. Once selected, the names of these files X1. These third party libraries can be
will display in the File name: field. converted for use in Chief Architect X2 as
described above.

Importing and Exporting Library Content

Chief Architect’s Import and Export library Items in the Import category can then be
categories allow you to easily copy library selected and moved into the User Libraries
content, including 3D symbols, images, line folder, which is where your custom library
styles, backdrops and backdrop libraries content is located and can be organized to
from one computer to another as well as suit your needs. See “Library Browser
share entire custom libraries with colleagues. Contents” on page 685.
Chief Architect library files have two
To import library files into the library
different file extensions: .calib and .calibz.
Both files can include any combination of
1. Select Library> Import Library to dis-
Chief Architect library items; in addition,
play the Import Library Data dialog.
.calibz files are able to save any data
associated with textures and images. 2. Browse to the .calib or .calibz file(s) that
you want to import and either single or
Import Libraries group-select the files so that their names
display in the File Name field.
When library files are imported into the • To select a group of files, click on the
program or 3D symbols are added to the first one, hold down the Shift key, then
library upon import, these items are placed in
the Import library category.

702
CAFull_RM.book Page 703 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

click on another file. The two files plus 6. Click and drag one of the imported sym-
all files in between are selected. bols to the appropriate category that you
• To select multiple files individually, have created for it in your User Librar-
click on one, hold down the Ctrl key, ies folder.
then click on additional files. Only the If Add Symbol to Library is not checked
files you click on are selected. when a symbol is imported into the program,
• To select all files in the directory, click you can still add it to the library at a later
on one and press Ctrl + A. Only do this time by selecting it and clicking the Add to
if you wish to import all files in the
Library edit button. See “Adding a New
folder.
Object” on page 700.
3. Click the Open button.
4. A progress bar will display, telling you Export Libraries
the progress of each library data file as it
The Export category is used to organize
is imported. Once imported, each file
library items so that they can be exported as a
will be located in the Import category of
Chief Architect library file and either shared
the Library Browser.
with other users or imported into the program
5. Click and drag each imported item to the on another computer.
desired location in the User Libraries
category. To export content from the library

To import 3D symbols into the library 1. Locate an object or folder of objects that
you want to export, right click on it and
1. Select File> Import> 3D Symbol . select Copy.
2. In the Import 3D Symbol dialog, make 2. Right-click on the Export category and
sure Add Symbol to Library is select Paste.
checked. See “Import 3D Symbol 3. When all of the items you wish to export
Dialog” on page 968. are copied into the Export category,
3. Browse to the 3D file(s) that you want to select Library> Export Library to dis-
import and either single or group-select play the Export Library Data dialog.
the files so that their names display in • You can also right-click on the Export
the File Name box. heading and select Export Library.
4. Click the Open button. 4. In the Export Library Data dialog:
5. A progress bar will display telling you • Choose the appropriate Save in: loca-
the progress of each symbol, and once it tion for your exported library file.
has completed importing a file, that • Type in a name for your library file in
symbol will now be located in the the File Name field.
Import section of the Library Browser.

703
CAFull_RM.book Page 704 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Importing and Exporting Library Content

• Click the Save as type: drop down list customized library content before placing it
and select whether or not you want the in its final location.
library to include Textures/Images. • Items in the Import category should be
moved into User Libraries.
If any of the items being exported are • Items in the Export category should be
images or use textures, be sure to
exported and then removed.
select the .calibz file type.
For best results, it is recommended that you
• Click Save. clear out these categories whenever you
5. After you export library data, a dialog finish importing or exporting library data.
will prompt you to clear the Export cate- You can clear out the items located in the
gory. Unless you plan to modify the cur- Import and Export categories at any time by
rent export selections and export a new selecting Library> Delete Import Items or
library, click Yes. Delete Export Items. A warning dialog will
confirm that you are sure you want to delete
Deleting Items from the all of the items in that category. Click Yes.
Import/Export Libraries
The Import and Export library categories are
intended to be places where you can organize

704
CAFull_RM.book Page 705 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chief Architect Reference Manual

705
CAFull_RM.book Page 706 Thursday, January 22, 2009 1:16 PM

Chapter 25:

Materials

The objects used in Chief Arc